Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D15-0269 - CORNER BAKERY - TENANT IMPROVEMENT393 STRANDER BLVD D15-0269 City of Tukwila • Department of Community Development « 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel No: 2623049064 Permit Number: D15-0269 Address: 393 STRANDER BLVD Issue Date: 1/14/2016 Permit Expires On: 7/12/2016 Project Name: CORNER BAKERY Owner: Name: REGENCY CENTERS LP Address: PO BOX 790830 C/O PROPERTY TAX DEPT, SAN ANTONIO, IL, 78279 Contact Person: Name: ROBERT CHANDLER Address: 135 LASALLE ST, STE 3100, CHICAGO, IL, 60603 Contractor: Name: WILCOX CONSTRUCTION INC Address: 234 5TH AVE S, EDMONDS, WA, 98020-3425 License No: WILCOC*194Q0 Phone: (312) 262-2286 Phone: (425) 774-4185 Expiration Date: 12/10/2017 Lender: Name: NW CORNER LLC Address: 4030 MOORPARK AVE, STE 232, SAN JOSE, CA, 95117 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: TENANT IMPROVEMENT FOR A BAKERY IN AN EXISTING RESTAURANT SPACE Project Valuation: $450,000.00 Fees Collected: $7,631.72 Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: YES Fire Alarm: YES Type of Construction: VB Occupancy per IBC: A-2 Electrical Service Provided by: TUKWILA FIRE SERVICE Water District: TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA SEWER SERVICE Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: 2012 National Electrical Code: 2014 International Residential Code Edition: 2012 WA Cities Electrical Code: 2014 International Mechanical Code Edition: 2012 WAC 296-4613: 2014 Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: 2012 WA State Energy Code: 2012 International Fuel Gas Code: 2012 Public Works Activities: ChanneIization/Striping: Curb Cut/Access/Sidewalk: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling/Oversize Load: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut: 0 Fill: 0 Landscape Irrigation: Sanitary Side Sewer: Number: 0 Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: No Permit Center Authorized Signature: \ Dater I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit and agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature: � Date: Print Names o5k C_arA--= This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: 'BUILDING PERMIT CONDITIONS' 2: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 3: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 4: The special inspections and verifications for concrete construction shall be as required by IBC Chapter 17, Table 1705.3. 5: The special inspections for steel elements of buildings and structures shall be required. All welding shall be done by a Washington Association of Building Official Certified welder. 6: When special inspection is required, either the owner or the registered design professional in responsible charge, shall employ a special inspection agency and notify the Building Official of the appointment prior to the first building inspection. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official in a timely manner. 7: A final report documenting required special inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted to the Building Official. The final inspection report shall be prepared by the approved special inspection agency and shall be submitted to the Building Official prior to and as a condition of final inspection approval. 8: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the seismic design requirements for nonstructural components. ASCE 7, Chapter 13. Partition walls shall not be tied to a suspended ceiling grid. All partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterially braced to the building structure. Such bracing shall be independent of any ceiling splay bracing. 10: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 11: All food preparation establishments must have Seattle/King County Department of Public Health sign -off prior to opening or doing any food processing. Arrangements for final Health Department inspection shall be made by calling Seattle/King County Department of Public Health, (1-800-325-6165 ext 9-566), at least three working days prior to desired inspection date. On work requiring Health Department approval, it is the contractor's responsibility to have a set of plans approved by the agency on the job site. 12: Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of not greater than 25. All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Such identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for inspection at the factory. 13: Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 14: All wood to remain in placed concrete shall be treated wood. 15: Masonry construction shall be special inspected. 16: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8-feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. Periodic special inspection is required during anchorage of storage racks 8 feet or greater in height. 17: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 18: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 19: Every occupied space other than enclosed parking garages and buildings used for repair of automobiles shall be ventilated in accordance with the applicable provisions of the International Mechanical Code. 20: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 21: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 22: Preparation before concrete placement: Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed unless a tremie is to be used or unless otherwise permitted by the building official. All debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete. 23: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 24: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 25: Signs are not approved as part of this permit. A separate sign permit is required 30: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (3A, 40B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 26: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 27: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 28: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 7.2, 7.3) 31: Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. 29: A Type 1 hood shall be installed at or above all commercial cooking appliances and domestic cooking appliances used for commercial purposes that produce grease vapors. Each required commercial kitchen exhaust hood and duct system required by section 610 of the International Fire Code to have a Type 1 hood shall be protected with an approved automatic fire -extinguishing system installed in accordance with this code. (IFC 904.2.1 and IFC 904.11) Automatic fire -extinguishing systems shall comply with UL 300 or other equivalent standards and shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the listing. (NFPA 96, 10.2.3) (INSTALLATION OF A TYPE 1 HOOD REQUIRES A SEPARATE MECHANICAL PERMIT.) 32: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 33: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 34: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 35: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.9.1) 36: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 37: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.6) 38: Aisles and aisle access ways serving as a portion of the exit access in the means of egress system shall comply with the requirements of this section. Aisles or aisle access ways shall be provided from all occupied portions of the exit access which contain seats, tables, furnishings, displays and similar fixtures or equipment. The required width of aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1017.1) 39: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1011.6.3) 40: Emergency lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is at least an average of 1 foot-candle (11 lux) and a minimum at any point of 0.1 foot-candle (1 lux) measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 foot-candle (6 lux) average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 foot-candle (0.6 lux) at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. (IFC 1006.3.1) 44: Fire protection systems shall be maintained in accordance with the original installation standards for that system. Required systems shall be extended, altered or augmented as necessary to maintain and continue protection whenever the building is altered, remodeled or added to. Alterations to fire protection systems shall be done in accordance with applicable standards. (IFC 901.4) 42: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide. (NFPA 13-8.6.5.3.3) 41: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2436). 45: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2437. 47: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2437) 46: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 48: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 49: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 50: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.9 of the International Building Code. 51: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1) 43: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 52: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 53: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. 54: Prior to requesting a landscaping inspection please provide a landscaping affidavit from the landscape architect, stating that the landscaping was installed per approved plans. Landscape inspection can occur any time after the plants are planted. You do not need to wait until the end of the project to schedule the landscaping inspection. As part of the landscaping inspection you will need to verify that the irrigation system is working properly 55: Original landscaping additions to site were to have been completed under PW15-0115, however when called for inspection, the site showed corrections are needed. Rather than hold up finalization of the PW permit, Planning is shifting final landscaping approval to this permit. Prior to calling for a landscaping final, please review the approved landscaping plan and ensure that all notes on the landscaping plans have been addressed AND that all new plant material has been planted on the site (on inspection 12/7/15 the two new trees to be planted had not been installed). In addition, please make sure that the planting beds have been amended as required by the approved landscaping plan. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 f 1700 BUILDING FINAL" 0301 CONCRETE SLAB 0611 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 1400 FIRE FINAL 0409 FRAMING 0606 GLAZING 0502 LATH & GYPSUM 1500 PLANNING FINAL 0401 ROOF SHEATHING 4000 SI-CONCRETE CONST 4046 SI-EPDXY/EXP CONC 4022 SI-MASONRY 4025 SI-STEEL CONST 4026 SI-STRUCT STEEL 4004 SI-WELDING 0406 SUSPENDED CEILING CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department • Public Works Department • Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, 4VA 98188 http://www.TukwilaWA.gov Building Permit No. Project No. Date Application Accepted: ` tC) 01 Date Application Expires: L4 1 use CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. "Please Print" SITE LOCATION King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 2623049064 Site Address: 393 Strander Blvd. Suite Number: Floor: Tenant Name: Corner Bakery Cafe New Tenant: ® .....Yes ❑ ..No PROPERTY OWNER Name: Regency Centers Address: 5355 SW Meadow Rd., Suite 295 City: Lake Oswego State: OR Zip: 97503 CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: Rob Chandler - Stantec Architecture Address: 135 S LaSalle St, Suite 3100 City: Chicago State: IL Zip: 60603 Phone: (312) 262-2286 Fax: (312) 262-2301 Email: Robert. Chandler@stantec.com GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: tbd Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: ARCHITECT OF RECORD Company Name: Stantec Architecture, Inc. Architect Name: Brian Reno Address: 135 S LaSalle St City: Chicago State: IL Zip: 60603 Phone: (312) 262-2300 Fax: (312) 262-2301 Email: Brian.Reno@stantec.com ENGINEER OF RECORD Company Name: Brad Young and Assoicates, Inc. Engineer Name: Brad Young Address: 345 Pollasky Ave City: Clovis State: CA Zip: 93612 Phone: (559) 323-9600 Fax: Email: brad@byaengineering.com LENDERIBOND ISSUED (required for projects $5,000 or greater per RCW 19.27.095) Name: r, !�v v�tJ�rt L Address: y8 p City- AAI305E State: Zip:9S/� G H:\Applications\Forrrs-Applications On Line\2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 Page 1 of 4 hh BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION — 206-431-3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 450,000 Existing Building Valuation: Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): Restaurant Tenant Improvement in an existing building. New tenant layout consisting of dining, service, restrooms and kitchen areas. Will there be new rack storage? ❑..... Yes ❑.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC V Floor 3,777 3,777 0 0 VB A-2 2"d Floor 3 rd Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? El ....... Yes 0....... No if"yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: V1 ....... Sprinklers ® .......Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ .......None ❑ .......Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? El ....... Yes ....... No If "yes, attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-112 " x I I " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ ....... On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. HAApplicationskFornts-Applications On Linek2011 ApplicationsTermit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 Page 2 of 4 bh PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INFORMATION - 206-433-0179 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Existing building in existing shopping center. No site scope of work Call before you Dig: 811 Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. Water District m ...Tukwila ❑... Water District #125 ❑ .. Highline El.. Renton ❑ ...Water Availability Provided Sewer District m ...Tukwila ❑... Valley View ❑ .. Renton ❑ .. Seattle ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate ❑...Sewer Availability Provided Septic System: ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with ADDlication (mark boxes which an ❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34" ❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) ❑ .. Geotechnical Report ❑ ...Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ ...Bond ❑ .. Insurance ❑ .. Easement(s) ❑ .. Maintenance Agreement(s) ❑ ...Hold Harmless — (SAO) ❑ ...Hold Harmless — (ROW) Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right-of-way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - No Disturbance ❑ .. Right-of-way Use — Potential Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right-of-way ❑ Non Right-of-way ❑ ❑ ...Total Cut cubic yards ❑ .. Work in Flood Zone ❑ ...Total Fill cubic yards ❑ .. Storm Drainage ❑ ...Sanitary Side Sewer ❑ .. Abandon Septic Tank ❑ .. Grease Interceptor []...Cap or Remove Utilities ❑ .. Curb Cut ❑ .. Channelization ❑ ...Frontage Improvements ❑ .. Pavement Cut ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ ...Traffic Control El.. Looped Fire Line ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑ ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection " Irrigation " Domestic Water " ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... WO # ❑ ...Temporary Water Meter Size.. WO # ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size............ WO # ❑... Deduct Water Meter Size " ❑ ...Sewer Main Extension ............. Public ❑ Private ❑ []...Water Main Extension ............. Public ❑ Private ❑ FINANCE INFORMATION Fire Line Size at Property Line Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) ❑ ... Water ❑ ...Sewer ❑ ...Sewage Treatment Monthly Service Billing to: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: City State Zip Water Meter RefundBillina: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: City State Zip H:\Applications\Forms-Applications On Line\2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 Ldocx Revised: August 2011 Page 3 of 4 bh PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED Date: 10/07/2015 Print Name: Rob Chandler (Authorized Agent) Day Telephone: (312) 262-2286 Mailing Address: 135 S LaSalle St, Ste 3100 Chicago IL 60603 City State Zip H:Wppliwtions\.For -Applications On Line\2011 ApplicationsTermit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 Page 4 of 4 bh DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $4,715.43 D15-0269 Address: 393 STRANDER BLVD Apn: 2623049064 $4,715.43 DEVELOPMENT $4,491.10 PERMIT FEE ROOO.322.100.00.00 0.00 $4,486.60 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE 6640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $224.33 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $224.33 Date Paid: Thursday, January 14, 2016 Paid By: WILCOX CONSTRUCTION INC Pay Method: CHECK 057141 Printed: Thursday, January 14, 2016 7:56 AM 1 of 1 CPWSYS7fM5 Date Paid: Friday, October 09, 2015 Paid By: STANTEC Pay Method: CHECK 12071 Printed: Friday, October 09, 2015 3:06 PM 1 of 1 SYSTEMS INSPECTION RECORD [UTIONRetain a copy with permit N0. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 ProjeUct: Qr Typ'ecpftingpectionl Address: S"W 6w DatelCCalld : Special Instructions: Date#aLited: / a.m. �-f" liZ I�t7 p.m. Requester: Phone No: Inspector: Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 's ' 2- INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: Address: 11v.tLA Div' Date Called: 1 �iI z, Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: El REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD I Z Retain a copy with permit �� T "0�.� SPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Prot: A _i�st� �r TYr(g pf spe n. Address: Date C d: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. M. 1Requester: 13fiorfe'No: o Approved per applicable codes. R<orrections A required prior to approval. (Inspector: y �� �uate: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. TL. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Prroojec/t:: kti e-r Type f I spectiony A4dress: C Il ) � � J � Date Called: Speeiar Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. . ` t,6 p.m. Requester: Phone No: Inspector: i uate.y REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. l" rnoINSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit f `L 6 NfWrrECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Co�_R.er � Types of Inspection: c %� Q!C- L( vl, ( Address: C _ �Date 3 / i'r�elQ-�' 1414_ Called: Special Instructions: A� Date ate: r a. (0 p.m. Reques er: f-/ Wp Phone No: ?z6'c5 Inspector: Date: LG _ I REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD _ I(q) Retain a copy with permit S �0 IN EC I N NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pro"^t: Type of Inspection: A dr ss: 7 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Req�ues er: Phone No: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. W� INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit�s`��� INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 r (206) 431-3 70 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 C—e( �(" Project: Type f Ins ecti , n: Addres:� Date Called: Special Instructions: J— Date Wa d: a.m. fb p.m. Request r: Phone No: ElApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: E AL A�' e-,f (pe-4 r ('C'%' j Inspector: REINSPtCTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Calf to schedule reinspection. cf- INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit � r� t bl �'� INSPECTION N0. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: (-J/11°w Z Type of Inspection: , L- %�S�AleI�,' Address: 3A 3 5+YOAAd 9�1 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: 03- UoI - LY12 Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. IInspector: *k--- IDate: 14 j 11 1 Jt/ I REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (-7) INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Dg- 4 ` IN ION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd.., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: ew Address: 3 Sc ✓ Date Called: Special Instructions: r P/ (V n 1. / C/ Date Want d: a.m. - p.m. Requeste ` ,c' G I Phone '!J� i,L � �7 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. J REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. a INSPECTION RECORD t>a- � �• Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: ,� l G6trme Type of Inspecti o Ce- l Ad�s: Sft Date Called: Special Instructions: 4,4of4 c Datee�anted: a.m. "! —T` M p.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. CA Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: t r ce- zkd `ct, G v-u � 17 (Inspector: I/,// (uatej r 3— 1 El REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection: fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD rRetain a copy with permit SPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188. (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Aiv1;(U w. Project: 4a CIOV- Type f Ins c i Address: % Date Called: Special Instructions: O Date Wanted: a.m. _� p.m. Re uest Vr: Phone No: !P — ❑ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Date? ` '2--C/ —/,6 u REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be . paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cal[ to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD i Retain a copy with permit D L5�-0 4 i .. lOty N0. PERMIT N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 SOUthcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type,4 Inspection:/ {� ,� �1��.. I k ddress: 3 S ( d Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. 2" p.m. Re ues W1jEp!(t!/6,) �t�t l Phone No: © C 2- -501 E] Approved per applicable codes,. E Corrections required prior to approval. Ilinispector: } Date-2, / REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.. rd INSPECTION RECORD MRetain a copy with permit p(5-60 IN'STTCTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: ww—. 343s: SIMKX(w d Date Call Special Instructions: A"1AA Date Want e�l� va.m. z —t/ p.m. Requester: Phone No: Inspector: �� �- Dater REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Dtj'0` 6 IRWTION No. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd.., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pr 'ems ct: �C WCU 6- K QAI— Type of inspection F M f fit_ ( Addr � r ( Date Called: Special Instructions: A/v��A Date Wanted: a.m., 2,— (—(` p.m. 1 (1 Requester: Phone No: nspector: TM=AEL�-- REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cat[ to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD C� Retain a copy permit ermit INCOON NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd.; #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pro ect: Type of Inspectiop'. Acidre-K(v� 3 3 5 Date Called: 1 Special Instructions: Bate W ted. - 4 a. f p.m.il Requ ter: Phone No: proved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: G -viv b2 cat (Inspector: IDate :2-- q — f / I REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD I Retain a copy with permit L5-ee INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDINGS DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Prot � C� Type of I pection: Address: .ate Called: Specia nstructions: Date Wanted: Requester: i Phone No: �J ?approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: 1 Date: r `a REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call, to schedule reinspection C INSPECTION RECORD 1,P1.5 ��� Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Prof t: Type of Insp ion: ' � Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a:ir p.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Ih — =-O l Retain a copy with permit Z 1a INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: , 1 Type of Inspection: Address: Contact'Pers n: Suite #: 9 3 5 ilk^la ' Special Instructions: Phone No.: LAjApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector:,✓) S3 Date: Hrs.: �. i $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. uming waaress Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD Ili C - c) Retain a copy with permit Z&-- S - 0.3 1 INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project- �.N � ��2 � Type of Inspection: 5� Address: St 1#2 Vkj✓ -Qrr- Contact Person: Suite #: Special Instructions: Phone No.: H-Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector:Date: Hrs.: $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. pniing Aaaress Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 , INSPECTION RECORD 15- 6�2 dQ Retain a copy with permit S - 03.1 INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: fJ t'�©e-r7e Type of Inspection: S NkZr + rt. o? Address: / Cdntact Person: Suite #: 3013 P vd Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. r COMMENTS: j 1 klel- V 2 ram,' nog C IV Needs Shift Inspection: S Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: e .1 A Hood & Duct: CJ Monitor: ipyl Pre -Fire: d Permits: % Occupancy Type: Inspector: (V S <-I/ I Date: rVl;�,o%l I Hrs.: / $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. tsming Aaaress Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD I b — V — Retain a copy with permit _-V) \- - 2b�1 16 _S off/ INSPECTION NUMBER t Ej IT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT •�� 206-575-4407 Project: C C� Type ofInspection: j�j� \^ 1tC ', I vl ,\ `JLi� Y V J 1 `. Address: 3 S�� \ � � Suite #:t- Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: r Needs Shift Inspection: YC Sprinklers: `r- s Fire Alarm: Mc>f Hood & Duct: Yc s `, o Monitor: Pre-Fire: Vaz) Permits: Occupancy Type: Z Inspector: & !R\Nr\51 I Date: Lk`tal1(_ I Hrs.: ❑ $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. tsming Aaaress Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD ail � -��� ( Retain a copy with permit A - �7- o37 INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: u rfiIQL j }f'kk,( `i Type of Inspection: —PiA- Address:A Contact Person: Suite #: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 1,P10 ve- k to A bom-p- t-i Z ?w (1 R--ee�e Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: I Inspector: A/ir_-J1t,,- (�- Z I Date: Hrs.: t $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. tsming Aaaress Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 RE WED F-OR g-,0WOPLIANCE APP E / JAN 04 2016 - - -- - - - - SULDING 01VISIOP! i L 6-Aw STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 0 9 2015 QQHMXUNlt19jqCAFt SOUTHCENTER PLAZA 393 STRANDER BLVD. TUKWILA, WA. 98188 BYA# 15256 October 8, 2015 Prepared For: Stantec 1383 North McDowell Blvd. 250 Petaluma CA 94954 JS7av OZ& 01 BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER 345 l"o" asky Ave).We • Clovis. California 93612 • 559-323-9600 • 559-323-9633 Fax - www.byaerimneering.com Corner Bakery Cafe Tukwila, Wa. T.I - New Kitchen Hood Support and Enclosure Wall Design Parameters Code 2012 IBC Wind V= 110 mph Basic Wind Speed (3-second ultimate gust) Exposure B, Risk Category II Seismic SS 1.451, S1=0.541 SDS=0.967, SD1=0.541 1=1.0, Ip=1.0 R=3.5 (Main structure) Steel fy (W.F.)A992 = 50 ksi, UNO Steel fy (Tube)A500 Grade B = 46 ksi, UNO Steel fy (Pipe)A53 Grade B = 35 ksi, UNO Steel fy (Misc.)A36 = 36 ksi, UNO Light gage studs fy High Strength Bolts Typical Bolts Concrete f'c (Foundation) Concrete f'c (walls) Concrete f'c (Columns) Concrete f'c (Floor desks) Rebar #3 bars Rebar #4 and larger bars Welded Rebar Dimensioned Lumber Glulam Beams Wood Connectors (Manufacture) Masonry f'm = 50 ksi minimum, UNO = A325N = A307 = 2500 psi, UNO = 3000 psi, UNO = 3000 psi, UNO = 3000 psi, UNO = Gr. 40, fy = 40,000 psi, UNO = Gr. 60, fy = 60,000 psi, UNO = A706 = DF#2, UNO = 24F-V4 @ simple spans, UNO = 24F-V8 @ Cantilever spans, UNO = Simpson Strong Tie, UNO (Equivalent may be used) = 1500 psi, UNO Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure = 1500psf (DL+LL) per IBC minimum Note: The above material properties are typical properties and apply unless noted otherwise within this calculation package. The materials listed are not necessarily used in this design. Please see the following calculations for the actual types of materials used for this specific design. BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT T`-sign Maps Summary Report http://ehp4-earthquake.cr.usgs.gov/designmaps/us/summary.php?temp... Z(= Design Maps Summary Report User -Specified Input Report Title CBC - Tukwila, Wa Wed June 24, 2015 22:20:50 UTC Building Code Reference Document ASCE 7-10 Standard (which utilizes USGS hazard data available in 2008) Site Coordinates 47.456080N, 122.25475°W Site Soil Classification Site Class D - "Stiff Soil" Risk Category I/II/III i5mi- 5000in; i mg it S11A Mon Bu en 167 QD h . c R De Moines rnapquest >y 15 MapQum 5 ifata@2015'up - G MapQuest USGS-Provided Output SS = 1.451 g SMs = 1.451 g SDS = 0.967 g Sl = 0.541 g SMI = 0.811 g SDI = 0.541 g For information on how the SS and S1 values above have been calculated from probabilistic (risk -targeted) and deterministic ground motions in the direction of maximum horizontal response, please return to the application and select the "2009 NEHRP" building code reference document. MCEm Response Spectrum 1.65 1.50 1.35 1.20 1.05 0.90 IM 0.75 0.60 0.45 0.30 0.15 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.20 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.20 2.00 Period, T (sec) 1.10 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.70 .� CM 0.60 rA 0.50 0.40 0.30 0.20 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.20 2.00 Period, T (sec) For PGAM, TL, CRs, and CR, values, please view the detailed report. Design Response Spectrum 2- i of 2 6/24/2015 3:21 PM Scope of Work: The project will consist of new tenant improvements of an existing building. The existing HVAC units for this space will be removed and replaced and there will be new kichen hoods supported by the interior walls and roof joists. The main building shell will not be modified in any way that affects the existing lateral resisting system or vertical support of the roof framing system. The calculations will address the following 1. The connection of the kitchen hoods to the existing framing for lateral and vertical forces. 2. New HVAC support 3. All items not included in these calculations are by others. BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT 3 Loading Main Roof DLroof LLroof Roofing 2.2 PSF Roof Plywood 2.3 3/4" plywood Roof Framing 4 18" open web joist @ 24" o.c. Insulation 1 Ceiling 1.8 M&E&P 2 Miscellaneous 1.7 152PSF Dead Load 20 PSF Live Load lb DLroof DLroof' ft2 lb LLroof LLroof' ft2 DLwall.metal 10•psf BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax lb DLroof = is 2 ft LLroof = 20 lb ft lb DLwall.metal = 10 2 ft Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT q Snow Load pg := 25 • psf Slope 0.375 roof 12 Ce := 0.9 Ct := 1.0 := 1.0 pf.1 := 0.7•Ce•Ct•i.pg pf.min 25•psf•I pf := max(pf.1 ,pf.min) Cs := 1.0 ps Cs' pf LLsnow ps Ground Snow Load per City Requirements Exposure Factor Thermal Factor Importance Factor pf.1 = 15.75 - psf pf.min = 25•psf pf = 25•psf LLsnow = 25 • psf BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING Print Date: 10/8/2015 345 Pollasky Avenue File Name: 15256.xmcd Clovis, California 93612 Engineer: TT (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax The existing parapet is -T-0" above the existing roof height. Length of roof upwind of drift is less than 25 ft (Lu <25 ft). Use 25ft as the length of the roof upwind of the drift. Snow Drift- perASCE 7-05 Section 7.7.1 �0.13•pg + 14•psf)• I ft hp := 7.0•ft hb ps ly he := hp - hb Leeward Case I := 25•ft parapet height non drift snow height 17.25 lb 3 ft hb = 1.449ft he = 5.551ft max drift height hd.lee min 0.43.3 lu ft •�pg-- I + 10 - 1.5 -ft, he p pd.lee y,hd.lee wlee 4 • hd. lee Windward Case lu := 30.0•ft Roof Length minimum Lu value hd.lee = 1.558ft lb pd.lee = 26.879— ft2 wlee = 6.233 ft hd.wind min 0.43 3 lu ft 4 pg' sf + 10- i.5 •ft,hc hd.wind = 1.75ft p 4'hd.wind = 1.312ft 3 pd.wind 'y'(4'hd.wind) 3 wwind 4- 3 hd.wind) LLsnow.drift.1 max(pd.lee,pd.wind) Ldrift.1 max(wlee ,wwind) BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax lb pd.wind = 22.638 2 ft wwind = 5.249ft LLsnow.drift.1 = 26.879lb ft lb Ldrift.1 = 6.233ft Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT C� Item 1: New Kitchen Hoods There will be (2) new kitchen hoods with weights of 566 and 543 Ibs installed for the tenant remodel. There will be new metal ceiling studs added that span from wall to wall to support the hood units. Assume these studs also support the ceiling adjacent to the studs. The worst case loading will be when the hood support framing will need to support the weight of 2 units. L .= io.o•ft 53o•Ib Phood.1 4 MX := 354•ft•lb At L = 5'-0" and 9'-10" Phood.1 = 132.5 Ib Vy := 195• Ib See Enercalc printout for loading Use: 600SI62-54 aligned with Hood corners See attached BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT 7 Title Block Line 1 You can change this area using the "Settings" menu item and then using the "Printing & Title Block" selection. Title Block Line 6 General Beam Analysis Project Title: Engineer: Project Descr: File = Wdraa ENERCALC, INC.1 Project ID: Printed: 6 JUL 2015,11:15AM Build:6.15.4.10, Ver:6.15.4.10 Description : (N) Hood Supoprt Framing General Beam Properties Elastic Modulus 29,000.0 ksi Span #1 Span Length = 10.0 ft Area = 10.0 inA2 Moment of Inertia = 100.0 inA4 D(0.142) D(0.142) D(0.053) D(0.0 153) Span = 10.0 fl Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Load(s) for Span Number 1 Point Load: D = 0.1420 k P 1.0 ft, (Hood) Point Load: D = 0.1420 k 0) 6.0 ft, (Hood) Point Load: D = 0.0530 k P 6.50 ft, (Hood) Point Load : D = 0.0530 k (a) 9.0 ft, (Hood) DESIGN SUMMARY Maximum Bending = 0.541 k-ft Maximum Shear = 0.2085 k Load Combination +D+H Load Combination +D+H Location of maximum on span 6.000ft Location of maximum on span 0.000 ft Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Maximum Deflection Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.000 in 0 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0.000 in 0 Max Downward Total Deflection 0.003 in 40177 Max Upward Total Deflection 0.000 in 0 Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Load Combination Max Stress Ratios Summary of Moment Values Summary of Shear Values Segment Length Span # M V Mmax + Mmax - Ma - Max Mnx Mnx/Omega Cb Rm Va Max Vnx Vnx/Omega Overall MAXimum Envelope Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+L+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+Lr+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+S+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+0.750L+0.750S+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+0.60W+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+0.70E+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+0.450W+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.450W+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +D+0.750 L+0.750 S+0.5250 E+H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.54 0.54 0.21 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.32 0.32 0.13 +0.60D+0.70E+0.60H Dsgn. L = 10.00 ft 1 0.32 0.32 0.13 Title Block Line 1 Project Title: You can change this area Engineer: Project ID: using the "Settings" menu item Project Descr: and then using the "Printing & Title Block" selection. Title Block Line 6 Printed: 6 JUL 2015,11:15AM General Beam Analysis File=0:(drawings120151152561DWGICalcs115256.ec6 ENERCALC, INC.1983-2015, Build:6.15.4.10, Ver:6.15.4.10 Description : (N) Hood Supoprt Framing Overall Maximum Deflections Load Combination Span Max. "" Defl Location in Span Load Combination Max. "+" Defl Location in Span D Only 1 0.0030 5.200 0.0000 0.000 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Overall MAXimum 0.208 0.182 Overall MlNimum 0.125 0.109 +D+H 0.208 0.182 +D+L+H 0.208 0.182 +D+Lr+H 0.208 0.182 +D+S+H 0.208 0.182 +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+H 0.208 0.182 +D+0.750L+0.750S+H 0.208 0.182 +D+0.60W+H 0.208 0.182 +D+0.70E+H 0.208 0.182 +D+0.750Lr+9.750L+0.450W+H 0.208 0.182 +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.450W+H 0.208 0.182 +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.5250E+H 0.208 0.182 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H 0.125 0.109 +0.60D+0.70E+0.60H 0.125 0.109 D Only 0.208 0.182 Lr Only L Only S Only W Only E Only H Only I CFS Version 6.0.4 Section: 6005162-54.sct 6005162-54, 33 ksi Stud SSMA Library Rev. Date: 1/22/2011 8:57:49 AM By: RSG Software Printed: 7/6/2015 11:08:28 AM GEuZIY& -s 40 f OA hf"?V slt PfO127 Section Inputs Brad Young Brad Young & Associates, Inc. Material: A653 SQ Grade 33 Apply strength increase from cold work of forming. Modulus of Elasticity, E 29500 ksi Yield Strength, Fy 33 ksi Tensile Strength, Fu 45 ksi Warping Constant Override, Cw 0 in^6 Torsion Constant Override, J 0 in^4 Stud, Thickness 0.0566 in (16 Gage) Placement of Part from Origin: X to center of gravity 0 in Y to center of gravity 0 in Outside dimensions, Open shape Length Angle Radius Web (in) (deg) (in) 1 0.5000 270.000 0.084900 None 2 1.6250 180.000 0.084900 Single 3 6.0000 90.000 0.084900 Cee 4 1.6250 0.000 0.084900 Single 5 0.5000 -90.000 0.084900 None Page 1 k Hole Size Distance Coef. (in) (in) 0.000 0.0000 0.2500 0.000 0.0000 0.8125 0.000 1.5000 3.0000 0.000 0.0000 0.8125 0.000 0.0000 0.2500 Z CFS Version 6.0.4 Section: 600S162-54.sct 600S162-54, 33 ksi Stud SSMA Library Rev. Date: 1 /22/2011 8:57:49 AM By: RSG Software Printed: 7/6/2015 11:08:28 AM Page 2 Brad Young Brad Young & Associates, Inc. Member Check - 2007 North American Specification - US (LRFD) Material Type: A653 SQ Grade 33, Fy=33 ksi Design Parameters: Lx 10.0000 ft Ly 10.0000 ft Lt 10.0000 ft Kx 1.0000 Ky 1.0000 Kt 1.0000 Cbx 1.0000 Cby 1.0000 ex 0.0000 in Cmx 1.0000 Cmy 1.0000 ey 0.0000 in Braced Flange: None Red. Factor, R: 0 Stiffness, k�: 0 lb Loads: P Mx Vy My Vx (lb) (lb-ft) (lb) (lb-ft) (lb) Entered 0.0 541.00 209.0 0.00 0.0 Applied 0.0 541.00 209.0 0.00 0.0 Strength 2170.0 815.82 2872.2 327.86 2857.5 Effective section properties at applied loads: Ae 0.55634 in^2 Ixe 2.8608 in^4 Iye 0.1807 in-4 Sxe(t) 0.95361 in^3 Sye(1) 0.43688 in^3 Sxe(b) 0.95361 in^3 Sye(r) 0.14916 in-3 Interaction Equations NAS Eq. C5.2.2-1 (P, Mx, My) 0.000 + 0.663 + 0.000 = 0.663 <= 1.0 NAS Eq. C5.2.2-2 (P, Mx, My) 0.000 + 0.663 + 0.000 = 0.663 <= 1.0 NAS Eq. C3.3.2-1 (Mx, Vy) Sgrt(0.038 + 0.005)= 0.208 <= 1.0 NAS Eq. C3.3.2-1 (My, Vx) Sgrt(0.000 + 0.000)= 0.000 <= 1.0 Item 1 b: Check connection of new Hood equipment to existing wall for lateral forces SS := 1.451 Fa := 1.00 2 SdS := 3 • Fa • SS SdS = 0.967 I := 1.0 Importance Factor a := 1.0 HVAC unit per table 13.6-1 Rp := 2.5 HVAC unit per table 13.6-1 z := 12•ft Height of Attachment H := 16•ft Height of roof Wp := 530•lb Mechanical Unit Weight 0.4•a •SdS•I •W Fp.1 := P R P P. 1+ 2 Z ASCE 7-10 EQ. 13.3-1 P Fp 1 = 205lb Fp.max := 1.6•Sds•Ip*WP Fp.min = 0.3•SdS•IP•WP Fp.max = 820.2991b Fp.min = 153.8061b Fp := if(Fp.1 > Fp.max , Fp.max , max(Fp.1 )Fp.min)) Fp = 205.075lb BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax Project required seismic load Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT I-z- Lhood :— 6•ft 0.717p wlateral:— Lhood lb wlateral = 23.921ft 16 Fstud := wlateral' 12 . ft Fstud = 31.901 lb The Hood will be attached to blocking between the studs using #12 tek screws at 6" o.c. for the lateral forces. The tek screws are ok for 124 Ibs of pullout force. The blocking will attach to the existing studs with Simpson L50 clips at each side which are good for 6001b lateral force. The Seismic force is relatively minor and by inspection all attachments are ok. The seismic force is less than the 5psf out of plane force all non -bearing walls are required to be designed to and are ok by inspection. hstud 8 •ft Fstud _ lb 16 — 2.991 2 hstudz'ft ft BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax < 5 psf wall out of plane forces Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT 1 Item #2 - HVAC Support Check the existing roof framing for the new HVAC loading Member 1 - Existinq Roof Joist L .= 30•ft 2.67 + 2.67 wDL DLroof' 2 .ft 2.67 + 2.67 wLL := LLroof' 2 .ft 2.67 + 2.67 wSL := LLsnow' 2 .ft P 1526-lb at L = 12.5 ft DL.HVAC 5 wDL = 40.05 ft wLL=53.4ft WSL = 66.75 ft PDL.HVAC = 305.21b Check the loading versus a tapered joist with the smallest top and bottom chords available for the span and depth. The attached calculations show the additional weight of the HVAC unit will not cause the joist to fail. OK to use tapered 18" open web joist See attached BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT I Ll IVS EC_ Project: Project Type: Member 1 Location: Folder: Folder Date: 10/8/15 2:03 PM RedSpecTm by RedBuiltT'" Designer: v7.0.21 Comment: TAPERED 18-21.8" Red—LTM @ 32" o.c. This product meets or exceeds the set design controls for the application and loads listed This truss design is feasible. The finished design shall be produced by RedBuilt Engineering. All open -web trusses are custom designed to carry the specific design loads for each project. Actual truss capacity when fabricated is limited to that required to resist the specific loads. Do not use this analysis to verify the capacity of existing trusses. DEFLECTIONS (in) % Allow. Design Allow. Design Allow. Pass/Fail Span Live 48% 0.725 1.500 L / 497 L / 240 PASS Span Total 67% 1.341 2.000 L / 268 L / 180 PASS SUPPORTS Support 1 Support 2 Live Reaction (lb) (DOLa/o) 1023 (115) 1015 (115) Dead Reaction (lb) 793 736 Total Reaction (lb) (DOL%) 1816 (115) 1751 (115) Bearing Top Chord Bottom Chord Support Ledger Beam Bearing Clip 6" No -Notch U-Clip Clip Approx. Clip Height 1.5" 0" Approx. Clip Width 7.1875" 6.6875" Assumed Bearing Width 3.5" 3.5" SPANS AND LOADS Dimensions represent horizontal clear span. Top Chord Slope: 0.125/12 le 30'- 0.0" APPLICATION LOADS Type Units DOL Live Dead Partition Tributary Member Type Uniform psf Snow(115%) 25 15 0 32" Snow Roof Joist ADDITIONAL LOADS Type Units DOL Live Dead Location from left Application Comment Point lb Floor(100%) 0 305 12'-6.0" Adds To HVAC NOTES • Building code: IBC. Methodology: Allowable Stress Design • No repetitive member increase applied in design. • Truss design includes consideration for partial span application live load. • Continuous lateral support required at top edge. Lateral support at bottom edge shall be per RedBuilt recommendations. • Pricing Load (plf) = 117 • Pricing Index (plf) = 127 0:\drawings\2015\15256\DWG\Calcs\15256.red Page 1 of 1 The products noted are intended for interior, untreated, non -corrosive applications with normal temperatures and dry conditions of use, and must be installed in accordance with local building code requirements and RedBuilt' recommendations. The loads, spans, and spacing have been provided by others and must be approved for the specific application by the design professional for the project. Unless otherwise noted, this output has not been reviewed by a RedBuilt'" associate. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION VOIDS THIS ANALYSIS. RedBuilt'" RedSpeCTM, Red -IT"', Red-I45TM, Red-I45LTM, Red-I58T", Red-I65T", Red-I65TTM, Red-I90TM, Red-I90HTM, Red-I90HST"', Red-LTM, Red-LTTm, Red- WT"', Red-STM, Red -MT"', Red-HTM, RedLamT"', FloorChoiceTM are trademarks of RedBuilt LLC, Boise ID, USA. Copyright © 2010-2014 RedBuilt LLC. All rights Member 2 - Existing Roof Joist L .= 23•ft 2.67 + 2.67 wDL := DLroof' 2 .ft 2.67 + 2.67 WLL LLroof ' 2 .ft 2.67 + 2.67 wSL := LLsnow' 2 .ft P 1526 • ib at L = 14.5 ft DL.HVAC 5 WDL = 40.05 ft WLL = 53.4 lb ft WSL = 66.75 ft PDL.HVAC = 305.21b Check the loading versus a tapered joist with thesmallest top and bottom chords available for the span and depth. The attached calculations show the additional weight of the HVAC unit will not cause the joist to fail. OK to use tapered 23" open web joist See attached BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559) 323-9600 (559) 323-9633 Fax ht 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT i RedBujItTM, RedSpecTM, Red -IT°', Red-I45TM, Red-I45LTm, Red-158TM, Red-165TM, Red-I65TTM, Red-I90TM, Red-I90HTM, Red-I90HSTM, Red -LT", Red LTT", Red WT", Red ST", Red MT", Red HT", RedLamT", FloorChoiceT"' are trademarks of RedBuilt LLC, Boise ID, USA. Copyright © 2010-2014 RedBuilt LLC. All rights dspEc.-Project: Location: Project Type: Member 2 Member 2 Folder: Folder Date: 10/8/15 2:05 PM RedSpecTm by RedBuiltTM Designer: v7.0.21 Comment: TAPERED 20-22.9" Red—LTM @ 32" o.c. This product meets or exceeds the set design controls for the application and loads listed This truss design is feasible. The finished design shall be produced by RedBuilt Engineering. All open -web trusses are custom designed to carry the specific design loads for each project. Actual truss capacity when fabricated is limited to that required to resist the specific loads. Do not use this analysis to verify the capacity of existing trusses. DEFLECTIONS (in) % Allow. Design Allow. Span Live 23% 0.263 1.150 Span Total 33% 0.498 1.533 SUPPORTS Support 1 Support 2 Live Reaction (lb) (DOL%) 786 (115) 786 (115) Dead Reaction (lb) 584 664 Total Reaction (lb) (DOL%) 1370 (115) 1450 (115) Bearing Top Chord Top Chord Support Ledger Beam Bearing Clip 6" No -Notch 6" No -Notch Clip Clip Approx. Clip Height 1.5" 1.5" Approx. Clip Width 7.1875" 7.1875" Assumed Bearing Width 3.5" 3.5" SPANS AND LOADS Dimensions represent horizontal clear span. APPLICATION LOADS Type Units DOL Live Uniform psf Snow(115%) 25 ADDITIONAL LOADS 23'- 0.0" Design Allow. Pass/Fail L / 999+ L / 240 PASS L / 554 L / 180 PASS Top Chord Slope: 0.125/12 Dead Partition Tributary Member Type 15 0 32" Snow Roof Joist Type Units DOL Live Dead Location from left Application Comment Point lb Floor(100%) 0 305 14'-6.0" Adds To HVAC NOTES • Building code: IBC. Methodology: Allowable Stress Design • No repetitive member increase applied in design. • Truss design includes consideration for partial span application live load. • Continuous lateral support required at top edge. Lateral support at bottom edge shall be per RedBuilt recommendations. • Pricing Load (plf) = 120 • Pricing Index (plf) = 133 O: \drawings\2015\15256\DWG\Ca Ics\15256.red Page 1 of 1 The products noted are intended for interior, untreated, non -corrosive applications with normal temperatures and dry conditions of use, and must be installed in accordance with local building code requirements and RedBuilt'" recommendations. The loads, spans, and spacing have been provided by others and must be approved for the specific application by the design professional for the project. Unless otherwise noted, this output has not been reviewed by a RedBuilt- associate. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION VOIDS THIS ANALYSIS. U Check HVAC Units for Lateral Loading: max weight of 1526 Ibs Seismic Loads SS = 1.451 Fa := 1.00 2 SDS := 3 •Fa•SS Seismic Design Category - D a := 2.5 Rp := 6.0 Z := 16ft h := 16ft Ip := 1 Wp := 15261b Seismic Force: F.p 0.4•a •SDS•W I Fp.1 �= P R p P. 1+ 2' h P Fp.max := 1.6SDS•Ip'WP SDS = 0.967 Sd 1 > 0.75 Per table 13.6-1 HVAC component amplification factor Per table 13.6-1 HVAC Component Response modification factor assumed average roof height Importance Factor HVAC unit weight Fp 1 = 738.075lb Fp.max = 2361.841lb Fp.min 0.3•SDS•Ip'Wp Fp.min = 442.845lb FP := if(Fp 1 > Fp.max , Fp.max , max(Fp 1 , Fp.min)) Fp = 738.075 lb BRAD YOUNG A ASSOCIATES, INC. Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING Print Date: 10/8/2015 345 Pollasky Avenue File Name: 15256.xmcd Clovis, California 93612 Engineer: TT (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax f�` Lateral Analysis -Wind Analysis from section 29.5.1 Exposure B Risk Category II V := 110 Kzt := 1.0 Kz := 0.58 Kd := 0.90 qz := 0.00256 • Kz' Kzt' Kd • V2 • psf GCr := 1.9 Af := 7.33ft•3.0ft Pw qz-GCr'Af 0.6•Pw = 405.346lb 0.7•(Fp) = 516.653lb qz = 16.169•psf Gust effect factor Projected area normal to the wind Lateral wind load Max factored lateral wind load Max factored lateral earthquake load Seismic Load Governs BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: Tr °a Check HVAC Units Overturning -Transverse Direction LHVAC 7.33ft Length of HVAC Unit HHVAC 3.0ft Height of HVAC Unit Wp = 15261b VA := (0.7•Fp) OTM := VA. HHVAC 2 RM := W • LHVAC 1 p 2 OTM — (0.6 — 0.14•SDS) . RM, Uplift, :_ LHVAC No need for holdowns Weight of HVAC Unit Lateral Load OTM = 774.979ft•lb RM, = 5592.79ft•lb Uplift, =—248.7421b Check HVAC Units for Overturning - Longitudinal Direction WHVAC 5ft Width of HVAC Unit HHVAC = 3ft Height of HVAC Unit Wp = 1526lb VA = 516.653lb OTM := VA • H HVAC RM2 := Wp • WHVAC 2 OTM — (0.6 — 0.14•SDS) •RM2 Uplift2 :_ WHVAC No need for holdowns BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES. INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 Pollasky Avenue Clovis, California 93612 (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax Weight of HVAC Unit Lateral Load OTM = 1549.958ft•lb RM2 = 3815ft•lb Upllft2 =—44.478lb Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates Print Date: 10/8/2015 File Name: 15256.xmcd Engineer: TT °t /0(� Holdown Design: Try: 1/4" Wood Screw for anchor w/ G = 0.50 lb Wunfactored 172 in Unfactored withdrawal design value Embed := 3 •(3in) minimum embedment depth CD := 1.60 Load duration factor for wind/seismic load CM := 1.0 Wet service factor Ct := 1.0 Temperature factor Ceg := 1.0 End grain factor Ctn := 1 o Toe -nail factor Wallow CD'CM'Ct-Ceg'Ctn'Wunfactored'Embed Wallow = 550.41b Uplift := max(Upliftl , Uplift2) Uplift =—44.478 lb Check for Sliding: VA = 516.653lb N .= 4 VA Vanchor-_N Zunfactored 1631b No uplift occuring - anchor not needed for overturning Lateral EQ load min number of total anchors Vanchor = 129.163 lb Unfactored lateral design value Zallow CD'Zunfactored Zallow = 260.81b Vanchor = o.49s <1.0: lag screw is acceptable Zallow Use: 1/4" wood bolts for HVAC anchor at each support BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES INC Copyright 2015 Brad Young & Associates STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING Print Date: 10/8/2015 345 Pollasky Avenue File Name: 15256.xmcd Clovis, California 93612 m Eneer: TT (559)323-9600 (559)323-9633 Fax g `- i Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 WL9 0 L6.Y...it3 SECTION 00 0101 CORNER BAKERY CAFE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED SOUTHCENTER JAN 0 4 2016 393 STRANDER BLVD. TUKWILA, WA 98188 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION.-, CAFE #1619 CITY r..1h OCT 6 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER pis- 0(P9 00 0101 - 1 Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 00 0102 PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Project Name: Corner Bakery Cafe, located at 393 Strander Blvd., Tukwila WA 98188. B. Cafe Number: #1619. C. The Owner, hereinafter referred to as Owner: Northwest Corner, LLC. D. Owner's Project Manager: Aaron Charles. 1. Address: 12700 Park Central Drive, Suite 1300. 2. City, State, Zip: Dallas, TX 75251. 3. Phone/Fax: (678) 576-0519. 4. E-mail: aaron.charles@cornerbakerycafe.com. 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. Summary Project Description: A tenant finish out of 3,777 square feet and 530 square feet of new exterior patio space.. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION r M 00 0102 - 1 PROJECT INFORMATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 00 0107 SEALS PAGE END OF SEALS PAGE 00 0107 - 1 SEALS PAGE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS A. 00 0101 - Project Title Page B. 00 0102 - Project Information C. 00 0107 - Seals Page D. 00 0110 - Table of Contents E. 00 5000 - General Requirements F. 00 6000 - Responsibility Schedule G. 00 7100 - Contracting Definitions SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. 01 1000 - Summary B. 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements C. 01 3050 - Design Procedures and Substantiation Requirements D. 01 3114 - Facility Services Coordination E. 01 4216 - Definitions F. 01 6000 - Product Requirements 2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS A. 02 4100 - Demolition 2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE A. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete B. 03 0130.65 - Resurfacing and Rehabilitation of Concrete C. 03 0130.75 - Concrete Repair D. 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories E. 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing F. 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete G. 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes 2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY A. 04 2714 - Thin Brick Veneer Masonry B. 04 2616 - Adhered Masonry Veneer 2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS A. 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing B. 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications C. 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings D. 05 7300 - Decorative Metal Railings 2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A. 06 0573 - Wood Treatment B. 06 1000- Rough Carpentry C. 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry 00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. 064100 -Architectural Wood Casework E. 06 4216 - Wood -Veneer Paneling F. 06 6100 - Simulated Stone Fabrications 2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation B. 07 2500 - Weather Barriers C. 07 5423 - Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing (TPO) D. 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim E. 07 8400 - Firestopping F. 07 9005 - Joint Sealers 2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A. 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. 08 1116 - Aluminum Doors and Frames C. 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors D. 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels E. 08 4313 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts F. 08 7100 - Door Hardware G. 08 7101 — Door Hardware Insert H. 08 8000 - Glazing I. 08 8300 - Mirrors 2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation B. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies C. 09 2216 - Non -Structural Metal Framing D. 09 3000 - Tiling E. 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings F. 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring G. 09 6813 - Tile Carpeting H. 09 7200 - Wall Coverings I. 09 9000 - Painting and Coating 2.10 DIVISION 10-- SPECIALTIES A. 10 2113.16 - Plastic -Laminate -Clad Toilet Compartments B. 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION 2.16 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING A. 22 0519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) A. 23 0713 - Duct Insulation 00 0110 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings C. 23 8113 - Packaged Terminal Air -Conditioners 2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL A. 26 0537 - Boxes B. 26 2726 - Wiring Devices C. 26 5100 -Interior Lighting D. 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting 2.19 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS 2.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2.21 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK 2.22 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 2.23 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 00 6000 "REFER TO SHEET A004 OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE" NOTE: 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE, SCHEDULE AND RECEIVE ALL ITEMS WHETHER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER, OWNER'S VENDORS OR CONTRACTOR. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE A MASTER SCHEDULE IDENTIFYING RESPONSIBILITIES FOR ACTIVITIES THAT DIRECTLY RELATE TO HIS WORK. 2. ALL ITEMS SCHEDULED FOR DELIVERY SHALL HAVE A LOCATION COORDINATED FOR STORAGE ONSITE. 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO INSPECT ALL ITEMS FOR DAMAGE UPON DELIVERY. 00 6000 - 1 RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 00 7100 CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY: THESE DEFINITIONS ARE INTEGRAL TO THE AGREEMENT. 1.02 DEFINITIONS - DESIGN -BUILD DOCUMENTS A. Contract Documents: As defined in the Conditions of the Contract and as follows: 1. At the time of execution of the Agreement, the Contract Documents consist of the following: a. The Agreement and Conditions of the Contract, and other documents listed on the Table of Contents under the heading Contracting Requirements. 2. From time to time after execution of the Agreement, upon approval by the Owner, the following types of documents will be incorporated into the Contract Documents: a. Drawings and other documents documenting the design. b. Construction drawings and specifications detailing the execution of the design. B. Project Program: The Owner's requirements for size, arrangement, organization, and location of functional spaces , description of space functions , identification of fittings, equipment, and furnishings , description of the physical and environmental requirements for each space , together with a description of the image, goals, or "mission" of the project. 1.03 DEFINITIONS - TIME PERIODS AND MILESTONE DATES A. Preliminary Design: The time period during which the design criteria are finalized and preliminary drawings and written descriptions are prepared to illustrate the proposed design of the work or a portion of the work to the Owner , as described in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Design Development: The time period during which the form, arrangement, size, and materials of the work or a portion of the work are determined , as described in the Conditions of the Contract. C. Construction Documents: The time period during which process working drawings, specifications, and other documents describing the work or a portion of the work are prepared in sufficient detail to allow accurate and complete construction. D. Construction: The time period from the beginning of work on the project site until final payment as defined by the Conditions of the Contract. E. Substantial Completion: The date as defined in the Conditions of the Contract. The date of substantial completion is the due date for the following: 1. Design -Builder's complete punchlist of items to be completed. 2. Owner's complete punchlist of items to be completed. 3. Compliance with requirements of governing authorities, for submittals, inspections, and permits. 4. Compliance with Owner's requirements for access to areas occupied by the Owner. F. Closeout: The time period during which all details of both construction and commissioning are completed. 1. The Closeout period is the time from the Date of Substantial Completion until final payment, both as defined by the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Before and during the Closeout period, the Owner will ascertain whether the completed project complies with the the Contract Documents. G. Occupancy: The time period during which the project is occupied for its intended purpose. 1. The Occupancy period begins at the Date of Substantial Completion , as defined by the Conditions of the Contract. H. Correction Period: The time period defined by the Conditions of the Contract. 00 7100 - 1 CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 00 7100 - 2 CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: B. Owner's Name: C. The Project consists of a commercial 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK square foot in -line building. A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings and specified in Section 02 4100. B. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner before Substantial Completion. 1. Ansul system. 2. Music system. 3. Telephone system. 4. POS system. 5. Security system B. Owner will supply and install the following: 1. Trash receptacles under beverage counter. 2. Roller shades. 3. Window curtains. 4. Espresso machine. 5. Mop holders 6. Soda system 7. CO2 tank and lines 8. Office safe 9. Office furniture C. Owner will supply the following for installation by Contractor: 1. Wall pictures with frames. 2. Interior signage. 3. Trash receptacles in restrooms. 4. Install round table and Baker Boy statue on table. 5. Install menu board slide in panels 6. Install knife racks in back of house 7. Install clip boards in back of house 8. Install coffee brewer 9. Install frozen drink machine 10. Install insulated coffee urns 11. Install (4) menu display frames at POS shrouds 12. Exhaust fans and curbs 13. Kitchen hoods 14. Kitchen hood stainless steel skirts 15. Patio heaters by J.D. Higgins 16. Wall murals 17. Walk off mat carpet by Milliken Carpet, Lee Kahler: 800-241-4826 18. Carpet squares by Milliken Carpet, Lee Kahler: 800-241-4826 01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 19. Carpet glue by Milliken Carpet, Lee Kahler: 800-241-4826 20. Hand towel dispensers in restrooms (1 each) 21. Hand towel dispensers at sinks in back of house areas 22. Toilet seat cover dispener - one per toilet 23. Soap dispensers 24. Diaper change table - one per restroom 25. "Restroom", "To Go", and "CBC" parking signs for exterior building or pole mounts. G.C. to furnish and install signes, poles and bases. Verify quantity and locations with Owner. Must be approved by LL. 26. Sneeze guards at main counter (2). Supplied by KES. Assemble and screw into solid surface counter top (pre -drill). 27. Coat rack with hooks. Install per owner direction. 28. Tables 29. Table bases 30. Booths - secure with blocks to floor 31. Banquette seating - G.C. to provide to owner vendor 32. Chairs 33. Couch 34. Nook table - assembly required by G.C. 35. Leather lounge chairs 36. Patio chairs 37. Patio tables 38. Patio umbrella steel base 39. Exterior ornamental iron benches. Attach to concrete. Verify quantity with owner. 40. Patio umbrellas 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner and Landlord's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage unless previous approval from Owner and Landlord is granted. D. Time Restrictions: 1. Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior and interior work to the hours dictated by the Landlord.. E. Utility Outages and Shutdown.- 1 . Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.06 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS A. Unless otherwise noted, all provisions of the sections listed below apply to all contracts. Specific items of work listed under individual contract descriptions constitute exceptions. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. END OF SECTION 01 1000 - 2 SUMMARY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Progress photographs. B. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. C. Submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Submit new photographs at least once a week, within 3 days after exposure. B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. C. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect. D. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events: 1. Completion of demolition. 2. Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 3. Enclosure of building, upon completion. 4. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos. E. Views: 1. Provide factual presentation. 2. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion. F. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1. Delivery Medium: upload to Expesite. 2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3.02 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Owner and Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below. 3.03 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. 01 3000 - 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.05 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches (215 x 280 mm): Submit the number of copies that Contractor requires, plus one copy that will be retained by Architect. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. 3.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Deliver submittals to Corner Bakery Project Manager at business address. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect or Engineer review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION 01 3000 - 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 01 3050 DESIGN PROCEDURES AND SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for design of the facility, based on the design criteria specified. B. Substantiation requirements. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Proven -In -Use: Proven to comply by having actually been built to the same or very similar design with the same materials as proposed and functioning as specified. B. Proven -by -Mock -Up: Compliance reasonably predictable by having been tested in full-scale mock-up using the same materials and design as proposed and functioning as specified. Testing need not have been accomplished specifically for this project; when published listings of independent agencies include details of testing and results, citation of test by listing number is sufficient (submittal of all test details is not required). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Substantiation Submittal Procedures: 1. Time Frames: As specified. If there is a conflict between the degree of detail or completion specified and the progress of the design or construction, obtain a clarification before submitting. 2. Number of Copies: 2 copies for Owner's use and records; Owner will return not more than one additional copy. 3. For time periods that constitute Milestones, all substantiation submittals required during that period must be complete and accepted before the Milestone can be considered achieved. 4. Resubmissions: Clearly identified as such, with all changes made since the original submittal clearly marked. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN -BUILDER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. In addition to requirements specified in other sections, provide products and elements that comply with the following. B. Elements Made Up of More Than One Product: 1. Where an element is specified by performance criteria, use construction either proven -in - use or proven -by -mock-up, unless otherwise indicated. a. The Design -Builder may choose whether to use elements proven -in -use or proven - by -mock-up, unless either option) is indicated as specifically required. b. Where test methods accompany performance requirements, use those test methods to test the mock-up. 2. Where a type of product is specified, without performance criteria specifically applicable to the element, use the type of product specified. 3. Where more than one type of product is specified, without performance criteria specifically applicable to the element, use one of the types of products specified. 4. Where neither types of products nor performance criteria are specified, use products that will perform well within the specified life span of the building. C. Products: 1. Where a product is specified only by a manufacturer name and model number/brand name, use only that model/brand product. 2. Where the properties of a product are specified by description and/or with performance criteria, use products that comply with the description and/or performance criteria. 3. Where manufacturers are listed for a particular product, use a product made by one of those manufacturers that also complies with other requirements. 01 3050 - 1 DESIGN PROCEDURES AND SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. Reference Standards: Where products or workmanship is specified by reference to a document not included in the Contract Documents, comply with the requirements of the document, except where more stringent requirements are specified. 1. Date of Issue: As indicated in each instance except where a specific date is established by code. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. During Preliminary Design, the design criteria and the design itself must be refined, finalized, and documented. B. Owner will appoint representatives of the following departments to provide details of functional needs: 1. Food service staff. 2. Operations staff. 3. Maintenance staff. C. Design Documentation: Record all design and performance criteria that will be of use during occupancy and operation of the project, including all items specified for maintenance manuals, below. 1. Design Criteria Documentation Included in Construction Documents: Organized logically (from the point of view of operations staff) and placed in a prominent location in drawing sets. 2. If desired, documentation may consist of annotated modifications to and amplification of the Conceptual Documents, with changes that affect Contract Times or Contract Price documented as required for modifications. 3. If required, shop drawings may be used to accomplish design documentation. 4. Owner will maintain the project program document, modified to reflect changes made during refinement of the design. 5. Drawings: Prepared using AutoCAD 2008, using Owner's specified drawing and layering conventions. 6. Shop Drawings: Prepared using same CAD software. 7. Mock -Ups: Where necessary to clarify design intent and obtain approvals, construct full- scale mock-ups. END OF SECTION 01 3050 - 2 DESIGN PROCEDURES AND SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 01 3114 FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Responsibilities of separate contractors. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for coordination. C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION REQUIRED A. Coordinate the work listed below: 1. Fire Suppression: Division 21. 2. Plumbing: Division 22. 3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Division 23. 4. Electrical: Division 26. 5. Communications: Division 27. 6. Electronic Safety and Security: Division 28. 7. Site Utilities: Division 33. 8. Any items Owner furnished and installed. B. Coordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals and for delivery of products. C. Conduct meetings among subcontractors and others concerned, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. D. Participate in progress meetings. Report on progress of work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes of meetings and reports to concerned parties. 3.02 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. Prepare coordination drawings to organize installation of products for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to identify potential conflicts. B. Prepare a master schedule identifying responsibilities for activities that directly relate to this work, including submittals and temporary utilities; organize by specification section. C. Identify electrical power characteristics and control wiring required for each item of equipment. D. Maintain documents for the duration of the work, recording changes due to site instructions, modifications or adjustments. 3.03 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination with related work. Transmit copies of reviewed documents to Owner and Architect. B. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchors. C. Check compatibility with equipment and work of other sections, electrical characteristics, and operational control requirements. D. Coordinate controls, interlocks, wiring of switches, and relays. E. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. F. When changes in the work are made, review their effect on other work. G. Verify information and coordinate maintenance of record documents. 01 3114 - 1 FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.04 OBSERVATION OF WORK A. Observe work for compliance with Contract Documents. 3.05 DOCUMENTATION A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record: 1. Specification section number and product name. 2. Name of Contractor, subcontractor, 3. Name of testing agency and name of inspector. 3.06 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in operable condition as required by Section 01 7000. END OF SECTION 01 3114 - 2 FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 01 4216 DEFINITIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage. B. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make ready for use. C. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re -used materials or equipment. D. Provide: To furnish and install. E. Supply: Same as Furnish. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 01 4216 - 1 DEFINITIONS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re -use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Procedures for Owner -supplied products. G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner. C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. D. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Motors: Refer to Section 22 0513, NEMA MG 1 Type. Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 01 6000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re - approval by authorities. D. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3.02 OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. See Section 01 1000 - Summary for identification of Owner -supplied products. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 01 6000 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION 01 6000 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building demolition excluding removal of hazardous materials and toxic substances. B. Selective demolition of built site elements. C. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. D. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements. C. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Description of items to be removed by Owner. D. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re -use by Contractor. E. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. F. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. G. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring. H. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. I. Section 02 6500 - Underground Storage Tank Removal. J. Section 02 8400 - Polychlorinate Biphenyl (PCB) Remediation: Removal of equipment containing substances regulated under the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA), including but not limited to PCB- and mercury -containing equipment. K. Section 07 0150.19 - Preparation for Re -Roofing: Removal of existing roofing, roof insulation, flashing, trim, and accessories. L. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Vegetation and existing debris removal. M. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. N. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 SCOPE A. Remove portions of the building as designated on the Construction Documents. B. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work. C. Remove concrete slabs on grade within site boundaries as required for new construction. D. Remove underground tanks. 02 4100 - 1 DEMOLITION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 E. Remove fences and gates as required. F. Remove other items indicated, for salvage and relocation. 2.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. D. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. E. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. F. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface. G. Underground Storage Tanks: Remove and dispose of as specified in Section 02 6500. 2.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take -offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 02 4100 - 2 DEMOLITION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 2.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION 02 4100 - 3 DEMOLITION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 03 0100 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of existing concrete surfaces. B. Repair of exposed structural, shrinkage, and settlement cracks. C. Resurfacing of concrete surfaces having spalled areas and other damage. D. Repair of deteriorated concrete. E. Repair of internal concrete reinforcement. F. Scope of Work: As indicated on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. B. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011 a. C. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. D. ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars; 2008. E. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. F. ASTM C928/C928M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid -Hardening Cementitious Material for Concrete Repairs; 2009. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Detergent: Non-ionic detergent. 2.02 CEMENTITIOUS PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 2. Prospec, an Oldcastle brand: www.prospec.com. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 4. SpecChem, LLC: www.specchemlic.com. 5. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Cementitious Resurfacing Mortar: One- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer -modified cementitious mortar designed for continuous thin -coat application. C. Cementitious Repair Mortar, Trowel Grade: One- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer - modified cementitious mortar. 1. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Dry Material: ASTM C928/C928M. D. Cementitious Pavement Repair Mortar: Fast hardening, flowable; composed of cement, sand, and additives; capable of setting in cold weather conditions without the aid of chloride- or gypsum -based accelerators; in -place material capable of withstanding freeze/thaw conditions. 1. Dry Material: ASTM C928/C928M. E. Exterior Self -Leveling Concrete Topping: Portland cement -based; suitable as wear surface topping in exterior and wet locations as well as underlayment for applied materials. 03 0100 - 1 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Compressive Strength; ASTM C109, air cure only: 4300 pounds per square inch (30 MPa), minimum, at 28 days. 2. Flexural Strength; ASTM C348: 1000 pounds per square inch (7 MPa), minimum, at 28 days. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING EXISTING CONCRETE A. Clean concrete surfaces of dirt or other contamination using the gentlest method that is effective. 1. Try the gentlest method first, then, if not clean enough, use a less gentle method taking care to watch for impending damage. 2. Clean out cracks and voids using same methods. B. The following are acceptable cleaning methods, in order from gentlest to less gentle: 1. Water washing using low-pressure, maximum of 100 psi, and, if necessary, brushes with natural or synthetic bristles. 2. Increasing the water washing pressure to maximum of 400 psi. 3. Adding detergent to washing water; with final water rinse to remove residual detergent. 4. Steam -generated low-pressure hot-water washing. 3.02 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR USING CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS A. Clean concrete surfaces, cracks, and joints of dirt, laitance, corrosion, and other contamination using method(s) specified above and allow to dry. B. Apply coating of bonding agent to entire concrete surface to be repaired. C. Fill voids with cementitious mortar flush with surface. D. Apply repair mortar by steel trowel to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm) over entire surface, terminating at a vertical change in plane on all sides. E. Trowel finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION 03 0100 - 2 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 03 1000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form stripping. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast -in - place concrete work. B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. 3.03 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. 3.04 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. 03 1000 - 1 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. END OF SECTION 03 1000 - 2 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 03 2000 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. B. Section 03 3800 - Post -Tensioned Concrete. C. Section 03 4500 - Precast Architectural Concrete: Reinforcement for precast concrete panels. D. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry. E. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding connection to concrete reinforcement. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. D. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. F. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. G. ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail -Steel and Axle -Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. H. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420). B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low -alloy steel bars. C. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280), Type A. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. END OF SECTION 03 2000 - 1 CONCRETE REINFORCING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 03 3000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floors and slabs on grade. B. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and polishing. C. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. D. ACI 302.1 R -Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (Errata 2007). E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). 1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. J. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. K. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011 a. L. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2012. M. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. N. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2009. O. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2012. P. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 2011. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 03 3000 - 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 2.06 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin -film -forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete placement. B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water -based, liquid membrane -forming compound, that dissipates within 3 to 5 weeks; complying with ASTM C309. 2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. 2.07 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. 1. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to achieve consistent color from batch to batch. 2. Fiber Reinforcement: Batch and mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. 03 3000 - 2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 3.02 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.03 SLAB JOINTING A. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. B. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains. C. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick blade and cut at least 1 inch (25 mm) deep but not less than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab. 3.04 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m). 2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m). 3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m). B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re -measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours. D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water -saturated sand, water -fog spray, or saturated burlap. 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. 03 3000 - 3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.07 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. END OF SECTION 03 3000 - 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 03 3511 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E1155 -Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COATINGS A. High Gloss Clear Sealer: Transparent, non -yellowing, water -based coating. 1. Composition: Acrylic polymer -based. 2. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Deck-O-Grip W/B (slip -resistant): www.wrmeadows.com. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Decra-Seal W/B: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials suitable for further finishes. 3.02 GENERAL A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 COATING APPLICATION A. Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents, laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents, and other impediments to adhesion. B. Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within limits established by coating manufacturer. C. Protect adjacent non -coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately remove excess material. END OF SECTION 033511 - 1 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 04 2616 ADHERED MASONRY VENEER PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive thin brick veneer. END OF SECTION 04 2616 - 1 ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members, suspension cables, sag rods, and struts. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. C. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A: Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. B. Section 07 8100 - Applied Fireproofing: Fireproof protection to framing and metal deck systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. E. ASTM Al08 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2007. F. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High -Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2005 (Reapproved 2009). G. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2011. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M. C. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars. D. Suspension Cable: wire rope. E. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Space shear stud connectors at 16 inches ( mm) on center. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees. END OF SECTION 05 1200 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010. C. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009. D. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold -formed structural tubing. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM Al53/A153M where connecting galvanized components. END OF SECTION 05 5000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 05 6213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted handrails. B. Stair railings and guardrails. C. Free-standing railings at steps. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of backing plates in stud wall construction. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. B. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Handrails and Railings: 1. Kee Safety, Inc; Kee Klamp (steel): www.keesafety.com. 2. KaneSterling: www.sterlingdula.com. 3. The Wagner Companies: www.wagnercompanies.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code. B. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damageto connections or members. C. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. 1. Top Rails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter, round. 2. Intermediate Rails: 3/4 inches (19 mm) diameter, round. 3. Posts: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter, round. D. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast or imbedded into concrete, for bolting anchors. 2. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates, for bolting anchors. 2.03 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold -formed structural tubing. B. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. 05 5213 - 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. C. Anchor railings securely to structure. D. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. END OF SECTION 05 5213 - 2 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 05 7300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Railing and guardrail assemblies. B. Wall -mounted handrails. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). B. AWS C 3.4/C3.4M - Specification for Torch Brazing; 2007. C. AWS C 3.5/C 3.5M - Specification for Induction Brazing; 2007. D. AWS C 3.9/C 3.9M - Specification for Resistance Brazing; 2009. E. AWS D1.101.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010. F. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel; 1999. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RAILING SYSTEMS A. Railings - General: Factory- or shop -fabricated in design indicated, to suit specific project conditions, and for proper connection to building structure, and in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. 1. Design Criteria: Design and fabricate railings and anchorages to resist the following loads without failure, damage, or permanent set; loads do not need to be applied simultaneously. a. Lateral Force: 75 lb (333 N) minimum, at any point, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935. b. Distributed Load: 50 pounds per foot (0.73 kN per m) minimum, applied in any direction at the top of the handrail, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935. c. Concentrated Loads on Intermediate Rails: 50 pounds per square ft (0.22 per sq m), minimum. d. Concentrated Load: 200 pounds (888 N) minimum, applied in any direction at any point along the handrail system, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935. 2. Assembly: Join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts using slip-on non -weld mechanical fittings, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 3. Joints: Tightly fitted and secured, machined smooth with hairline seams. 4. Field Connections: Provide sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. 5. Welded and Brazed Joints: Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline; use methods that avoid discoloration and damage of finish; grind smooth, polish, and restore to required finish. a. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. b. Welded Joints: 1) Carbon Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D 1.1 /D1 A M. 2) Stainless Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D 1.6. c. Brass/Bronze Brazed Joints: 1) Perform torch brazing in accordance with AWS C3.4/3.4M. 2) Perform induction brazing in accordance with AWS C3.5/3.5M. 3) Perform resistance brazing in accordance with AWS C3.9/3.9M B. Wall -Mounted Handrail: 1. 1.25 inch (31.8 mm) diameter IPS Schedule 40 aluminum; natural anodized finish. END OF SECTION 05 7300 - 1 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 06 0573 WOOD TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site applied termiticide for wood materials. B. Site applied termiticide for other building materials. C. Site applied mildicide for wood materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Site Applied Termiticide and Mildicide: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied termiticide, mildicide and mold growth preventative. B. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood, Steel and Concrete: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied termiticide formulated for use on wood, steel, concrete and other building materials. C. Site Applied Mold Cleaner: Non -bleaching, oxidizer based formula with high -pH tolerant surfactant. Contains no sodium hydroxide or sodium hypochlorite. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dust, dirt and other contaminants from treatment surfaces. Remove tarpaulins, dropcloths, strippable protective films, etc., from areas to be treated Move equipment and stored materials that block or prevent product application. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Comply with manufacturers written mixing and installation instructions. B. Mildicide: Apply to wood and wood based building materials as listed. 1. All structural wood and sill plates within 24 inches (610 mm), minimum, of point of contact with foundation. 2. All wood, wood based and cellulosic sheathing within 24 inches (610 mm), minimum, of point of contact with foundation. END OF SECTION 06 0573 - 1 WOOD TREATMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water -resistive barrier over sheathing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two -Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2010. F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.aisc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 (50 by 50 mm through 50 by 150 mm) ): 1. Grade: No. 2. 2.03 EXPOSED DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dryor MC19. 2.04 EXPOSED BOARDS A. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping. B. Moisture Content: Kiln -dry (15 percent maximum). C. Surfacing: S4S. D. Species: Douglas Fir. E. Grade: No. 2, 2 Common, or Construction. 06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.05 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: APA PRP-108, Rated Sturd-I-Floor. 1. Exposure Class: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 16 inches (406 mm). 3. Thickness: 3/4 inches (19 mm), nominal. B. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I. C. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum, ASTM C1177/C1177M, square long edges, 5/8 inch Type X fire-resistant (16 mm Type X fire-resistant). D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. E. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better. 3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative -treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. B. Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. C. Water -Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500. 2.07 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative -Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Treat lumber less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade. 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Treat plywood less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. 06 1000 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall -mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Where ceiling -mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall -mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. 1. Place water -resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends. C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire -rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire -rated assembly. 06 1000 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor -to -ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. END OF SECTION 06 1000 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood door frames, glazed frames. C. Wood casings and moldings. D. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. C. Section 06 4216 - Wood -Veneer Paneling: Shop fabricated custom paneling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (1:8). 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Dc not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. Install prefinished paneling with full bed contact adhesive applied to substrate. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.7 mm). END OF SECTION 06 2000 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 6100 - Simulated Stone Fabrications: Cast plastic countertops. C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for casework. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (1:8). 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arborite . B. Provide specific types as follows: 2.04 COUNTERTOPS A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL, conventionally fabricated and self -edge banded. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. 06 4100 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. 3.03 SCHEDULES PL-01 ARBORITE: #S417 SNOW WHITE (OFFICE MILLWORK) PL-02 ARBORITE: #S550 ELEGANT WHITE (OFFICE COUNTERTOP) PL-03 ARBORITE: #W418 WALNUT FUDGE (RR PARTITIONS) PL-04 ARBORITE: #W405 BLACK (TOE -KICKS AT BEV. LINE, TRASH TOWERS) END OF SECTION 06 4100 - 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 06 4216 WOOD -VENEER PANELING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Custom wood veneer paneling. B. Solid wood panel trim. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. B. Do not deliver wood materials to project site until building is fully enclosed and interior temperature and humidity are in accordance with recommendations of AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELING A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. 2.02 WOOD -BASED MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.03 ADHESIVES AND FASTENERS A. Adhesives: Type suitable for intended purpose, complying with applicable air quality regulations. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Prepare panels for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Finish exposed edges of panels as specified by grade requirements. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting and scribing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. B. Do not begin installation until wood materials have been fully acclimated to interior conditions. C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. END OF SECTION 06 4216 - 1 WOOD -VENEER PANELING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 06 6100 SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast plastic washroom vanities, washroom vanities with integral sink, and counter top. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 12 3600 - Countertops: Solid surfacing countertops. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components by mold to achieve shape and configuration. B. Radius corners and edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. B. Align work plumb and level. C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Dimension: 1/8 inch (3 mm). B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean and polish fabrication surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces. 3.06 SCHEDULES AV-01 1/2" SOLID SURFACE / AVONITE: "NEW CALGARY" #C1-2700 (F.O.H.) AV-02 1/2" SOLID SURFACE / AVONITE: FOUNDATIONS "WHITE" #F1-8016 (INTEGRAL RESTROOM SINK) AV-03 1/2" SOLID SURFACE / AVONITE: FOUNDATIONS "BLACK CORAL" #F1-9125 (RESTROOM COUNTERS) END OF SECTION 06 6100 - 1 SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction. B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials. B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire -rated through -penetration assemblies. C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2011 bet . B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2011. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Expanded polystyrene board. B. Insulation on Inside of Concrete and Masonry Exterior Walls: Fiber board. C. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. D. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. E. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. F. Insulation Above Lay -In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. 2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.03 FIBER BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, ASTM C612. 1. Facing: None, unfaced. 2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.04 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at Contractor's option. B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 07 2100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Black polyethylene film for above grade application, 10 mil (0.25 mm) thick. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch (50 mm) wide. END OF SECTION 07 2100 - 2 THERMAL INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 07 2600 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water -Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not air tight or vapor retardant. B. Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and water vapor -resistant and air tight. C. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water -resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders. B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders. C. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm. D. Water -Resistive. Barrier: Water -shedding barrier made of material that is moisture -resistant, to the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. AATCC Test Method 30 - Antifungal Activity, Assessment on Textile Materials: Mildew and Rot Resistance of Textile Materials; 2004. C. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2008. D. ASTM C836/C836M - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid -Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate .Nearing Course; 2012. E. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. G. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2011. H. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water -Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2009. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A. Water -Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding. 1. Use building paper unless otherwise indicated. 2. Under Portland cement stucco, use two separate layers of building paper. 3. Under siding, use two separate layers of building paper. B. Air Barrier: 1. On outside surface of inside wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls use air barrier coating. 2. On outside surface of single wythe masonry and concrete exterior walls use air barrier coating. 3. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier coating. 07 2500 - 1 WEATHER BARRIERS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Interior Vapor Retarder: 1. On inside face of studs of exterior walls, under cladding, use mechanically fastened vapor retarder sheet. 2. On bottom face of rafters, under cladding, use mechanically fastened vapor retarder sheet. 3. On inside face of masonry and concrete walls use vapor retarder coating. D. Exterior Vapor Retarder: 1. At refrigerated rooms, on outside surface of insulated walls and ceiling/roof, under final finish, use vapor retarder coating. 2.02 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BARRIER NOR VAPOR RETARDER) A. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D226 Type I felt (No.15). B. Building Paper: Asphalt -saturated Kraft building paper complying with requirements of ICC-ES AC38 Grade D. 1. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches (55 cm), minimum, for minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127. 2.03 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER -RESISTIVE) A. Air Barrier Coating: Cold -fluid -applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing membrane. 1. Dry Film Thickness: 10 mils (0.010 inch) (0.25 mm), minimum. 2. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02 L/s/sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. 3. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 2.04 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER -RESISTIVE) A. Vapor Retarder Coating: Cold liquid applied, resilient, UV -resistant coating and associated joint treatment. 1. Dry Film Thickness: 5 mils (0.005 inch) (0.12 mm), minimum. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 1.0 perm (57 ng/(Pa s sq m)), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 3. VOC Content: Less than 50 g per L when tested in accordance with 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Resistance to Fungal Growth: Pass AATCC Test Method 30. 5. Suitable for use on concrete, masonry, plywood and gypsum sheathing. 6. Joint Preparation Treatment: Coating manufacturer's recommended method, either tape or reinforcing mesh saturated with coating material. 7. Joint Filler: As recommended by coating manufacturer and suitable to the substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Water -Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to shed water but with seams not sealed. C. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. D. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. E. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior: 07 2500 - 2 WEATHER BARRIERS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Install sheets shingle -fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches (305 mm). 4. Install water -resistive barrier over jamb flashings. 5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 6. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing. F. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - Vapor Retarder On Interior: 1. When insulation is to be installed in assembly, install vapor retarder over insulation. 2. Seal seams, laps, perimeter edges, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-adhesive tape, making air tight seal. 3. Locate laps at a framing member; at laps fasten one sheet to framing member then tape overlapping sheet to first sheet. 4. Seal entire perimeter to structure, window and door frames, and other penetrations. 5. Where conduit, pipes, wires, ducts, outlet boxes, and other items are installed in insulation cavity, pass vapor retarder sheet behind item but over insulation and maintain air tight seal. G. Coatings: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where exterior masonry veneer is to be installed, install masonry anchors before installing weather barrier over masonry; seal around anchors air tight. 3. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints. H. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: 1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches (125 mm) onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches (150 mm) up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches (100 mm) wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non -flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches (230 mm) wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches (50 mm) beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not leave paper- or felt -based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week. END OF SECTION 07 2500 - 3 WEATHER BARRIERS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermoplastic membrane roofing system, including all components specified. B. Disposal of demolition debris and construction waste is the responsibility of Contractor. Perform disposal in manner complying with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. C. Asbestos -containing materials may be present in the existing roofing system. Remove, handle, and dispose of asbestos -containing material in manner complying with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. D. Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com. E. Commencement of work by Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by Contractor that this specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessary prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification of the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or the project conditions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Formed metal flashing and trim items associated with roofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2012. B. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010. C. ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting; 2009. D. ASTM D6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing; 2011 a. E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007. F. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2005. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have the following: 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering. C. Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications, scheduling, and inspections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Firestone Building Products LLC, Carmel, IN: www.firestonebpco.com. 07 5423 - 1 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Roofing systems manufactured by others are acceptable provided the roofing system is completely equivalent in materials and warranty conditions and the manufacturer meets the following qualifications: a. Specializing in manufacturing the roofing system to be provided. B. Manufacturer of Insulation and Cover Boards: Same manufacturer as roof membrane. 2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Roofing System: Thermoplastic olefin (TPO) single -ply membrane. 1. Membrane Attachment: Fully adhered. 2. Comply with applicable local building code requirements. B. Roofing System Components: Listed in order from the top of the roof down: 1. Membrane: Thickness as specified. 2. Base Sheet Over Insulation: Mechanically attached. 3. Insulation: a. Maximum Board Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm); use as many layers as necessary; stagger joints in adjacent layers. 2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Membrane: Flexible, heat weldable sheet composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber; complying with ASTM D6878, with polyester weft inserted reinforcement and the following additional characteristics: B. Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane manufacturer. C. Curb and Parapet Flashing: Same material as membrane, with encapsulated edge which eliminates need for seam sealing the flashing -to -roof splice; precut to 18 inches (457 mm) wide. D. Formable Flashing: Non -reinforced, flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber. 1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent. 2. Tensile Strength: 1550 psi (10.7 MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638 after heat aging. 3. Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638 after heat aging. 4. Tearing Strength: 12 Ibf (53 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1004 after heat aging. 5. Color: White. 6. Acceptable Product: UltraPly TPO Flashing by Firestone. E. Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rubber polymer seaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch (1.6 mm) nominal; TPO QuickSeam Flashing by Firestone. F. Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer by Firestone. G. Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion -resistance complying with FM 4470. H. Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches (33 mm) wide by 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick; Firestone Termination Bar by Firestone. I. Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber -based, for use where membrane reinforcement is exposed; UltraPly TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Firestone. J. General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant; UltraPly TPO General Purpose Sealant by Firestone. 07 5423 - 2 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 K. Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre -molded to suit a variety of flashing details, including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.; UltraPly TPO Small and Large Pipe Flashing by Firestone. L. Roof Walkway Pads: Non -reinforced TPO walkway pads, 0.130 inch (3 mm) by 30 inches (760 mm) by 40 feet (12.19 m) long with patterned traffic bearing surface; UltraPly TPO Walkway Pads by Firestone. 2.04 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS A. Base Sheet: SBS polymer -modified bitumen sheet, complying with ASTM D6163, Type I, Grade S, with glass fiber reinforcing fabric, formulated for hot asphalt and cold adhesive application to substrate and cap sheet; Firestone SBS Base. B. Adhesive: As recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. 2.05 ROOF INSULATION AND COVER BOARDS A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam with black glass reinforced mat laminated to faces, complying with ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1, with the following additional characteristics: 1. Thickness: As indicated elsewhere. 2. Size: 48 inches (1220 mm) by 96 inches (2440 mm), nominal. a. Exception: Insulation to be attached using adhesive or asphalt may be no larger than 48 inches (1220 mm) by 48 inches (1220 mm), nominal. 3. R-Value (LTTR): a. 1.0 inch (25 mm) Thickness: 6.0, minimum. b. 1.25 inch (32 mm) Thickness: 7.5, minimum. c. 1.5 inch (38 mm) Thickness: 9.0, minimum. d. 1.75 inch (44 mm) Thickness: 10.5, minimum. e. 2.0 inch (51 mm) Thickness: 12.1, minimum. f. 3.0 inch (76 mm) Thickness: 18.5, minimum. g. 4.0 inch (102 mm) Thickness: 25.0, minimum. 4. Compressive Strength: 20 psi (138 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C1289. 5. Ozone Depletion Potential: Zero; made without CFC or HCFC blowing agents. 6. Recycled Content: 19 percent post -consumer and 15 percent post-industrial, average. 2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Wood Nailers: PS 20 dimension lumber, Structural Grade No. 2 or better Southern Pine, Douglas Fir; or PS 1, APA Exterior Grade plywood; pressure preservative treated. 1. Width: 3-1/2 inches (90 mm), nominal minimum, or as wide as the nailing flange of the roof accessory to be attached to it. 2. Thickness: Same as thickness of roof insulation. B. Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: 45 degree face slope and minimum 5 inch (127 mm) face dimension; provide at all angle changes between vertical and horizontal planes that exceed 45 degrees. 1. Install using hot asphalt (Type IV), roofing mastic, or mechanically fastened using fasteners and plates approved by roofing manufacturer. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Where manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices and industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. B. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation period. 07 5423 - 3 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Do not start work until Pre -Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notification that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty. D. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel. E. Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings, terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight condition. F. Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow proper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to 80 degrees F (15 to 25 degrees C). G. Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work. 1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings. 2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives, and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray. 3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by other trades. H. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer. I. Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers and cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform deck. B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in the substrate before commencing with roofing work. C. Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains. D. Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable of project conditions and requirements. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into the building through air intakes. B. Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharp edges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials that may damage the membrane. C. Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide with fill material acceptable insulation to membrane manufacturer. D. Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent bitumen seepage into building. 3.04 VAPOR RETARDER A. Before installing insulation install vapor retarder directly over the deck. B. Ensure that all penetrations and edge conditions are sealed to prevent moisture and air drive into the roofing system. 07 5423 - 4 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.05 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in configuration and with attachment method(s) specified in PART 2, under Roofing System. B. Install insulation in a manner that will not compromise the vapor retarder integrity. C. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before the end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather. D. Lay roof insulation in courses parallel to roof edges. E. Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with acceptable insulation. Do not leave the roofing membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.06 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relax time. B. Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water. C. Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test seams and laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and details. D. Install membrane adhered to the substrate, with edge securement as specified. E. Adhered Membrane: Bond membrane sheet to substrate using membrane manufacturer's recommended bonding material, application rate, and procedures. F. Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goes through an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches (1:6 ) using mechanically fastened reinforced perimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommended by roofing manufacturer. 1. Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter and square penetrations less than 4 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Metal edging is not merely decorative; ensure anchorage of membrane as intended by roofing manufacturer. 3.07 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required by membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details. B. Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated on the drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal onto membrane. 1. Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions. 2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation. 3. Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg. 4. Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated. 5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge. 6. If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the metal edging, install an additional piece of self-adhesive flashing membrane over the metal lap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of the two flashing sections. 7. When the roof slope is greater than 1:12, apply seam edge treatment along the back edge of the flashing. C. Existing Scuppers: Remove scupper, clean, and re -install. D. Flashing at Walls, Curbs, and Other Vertical and Sloped Surfaces: Install weathertight flashing at all walls, curbs, parapets, curbs, skylights, and other vertical and sloped surfaces that the 07 5423 - 5 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 roofing membrane abuts to; extend flashing at least 8 inches (200 mm) high above membrane surface. 1. Use the longest practical flashing pieces. 2. Evaluate the substrate and overlay and adjust installation procedure in accordance with membrane manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Complete the splice between flashing and the main roof sheet with specified splice adhesive before adhering flashing to the vertical surface. 4. Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown on roof drawings. E. Roof Drains: 1. Existing Drains: Remove all existing flashings, drain leads, roofing materials and cement from the drain; remove clamping ring. 2. Taper insulation around drain to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain. Use specified pre -manufactured tapered insulation with facer or suitable bonding surface to achieve slope; slope not to exceed manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Position membrane, then cut a hole for roof drain to allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch (12 to 19 mm) of membrane to extend inside clamping ring past drain bolts. 4. Make round holes in membrane to align with clamping bolts; do not cut membrane back to bolt holes. 5. Apply sealant on top of drain bowl where clamping ring seats below the membrane 6. Install roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts; tighten clamping bolts to achieve constant compression. F. Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing seals directly to the penetration. 1. Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre -molded pipe flashings wherever practical; otherwise use specified self -curing elastomeric flashing. 2. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations: Provide penetration pocket at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep, with at least 1 inch (25 mm) clearance from penetration, sloped to shed water. 3. High Temperature Surfaces: Where the in-service temperature is, or is expected to be, in excess of 180 degrees F (82 degrees C), protect the elastomeric components from direct contact with the hot surfaces using an intermediate insulated sleeve as flashing substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3.08 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings. B. Walkway Pads: Adhere to the roofing membrane, spacing each pad at minimum of 1.0 inch (25 mm) and maximum of 3.0 inches (75 mm) from each other to allow for drainage. 1. If installation of walkway pads over field fabricated splices or within 6 inches (150 mm) of a splice edge cannot be avoided, adhere another layer of flashing over the splice and extending beyond the walkway pad a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on either side. 2. Prime the membrane, remove the release paper on the pad, press in place, and walk on pad to ensure proper adhesion. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for warranty purposes (i.e. not a sales person). B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas, including bitumen, adhesives, sealants, and coatings. 07 5423 - 6 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the work of this section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and surfaces. C. Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable protection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition. END OF SECTION 07 5423 - 7 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and downspouts. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) thick; smooth No. 4 finish. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet -type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate (lashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. 2.03 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. END OF SECTION 07 6200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. 2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. 3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. 4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. B. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. D. Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly. 1. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of successful testing. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. END OF SECTION 07 8400 - 1 FIRESTOPPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Steel glazing frames. D. Accessories, including glazing and louvers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 08 9100: Louvers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory -Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007. C. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. D. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004). E. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non -removable stops on non -secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.02 STEEL DOORS A. Interior Doors , Non -Fire -Rated: 1. Core: Polystyrene foam. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). 3. Finish: Factory Finished White. 2.03 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. 08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gage 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches (100 mm) high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches (1200 mm): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Interior Door Frames, Non -Fire -Rated: Face welded type. D. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Fixed, of profile similar to jambs. E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; ; factory -installed. 1. Style: Standard straight slat blade. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000 , factory installed. C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 7100. 2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10 , door manufacturer's standard. B. Factory Finish: Complying with ANSI A 250.3, manufacturer's standard coating. 1. Color: As shown on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Coordinate installation of hardware. D. Coordinate installation of glazing. E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. F. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to this section. END OF SECTION 08 1113 - 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 1116 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush aluminum doors. B. Flush aluminum panels. C. Aluminum door frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 609 - Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Anodized Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. C. AAMA 701/702 - Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2011. D. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. E. ASTM B221 M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing components of the types specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with documented experience in installing components of the types specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The design of the project has been based on products manufactured by KAWNEER. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M), alloy 6063-T5 or alloy 6463-T5. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Flush Aluminum Doors and Panels: Provide 1-3/4 in (44 mm) thick doors without visible face seams, constructed from materials as follows: 1. Framing and Hardware Backup: Extruded aluminum tubing, 0.125 in (3.17 mm) minimum thickness. 2. Core: Rigid insulating material of not less than 2.0 Ib/cu ft (32 kg/cu m) density. 3. Door Edge: Extruded aluminum cap. 4. Bonding Agents: Manufacturer's standard materials meeting EPA requirements. 5. Lights: 1 inch (25 mm) thick insulating units made up of clear, 1/4 inch (6 mm) tempered glass. B. Aluminum Door Frames: Provide frames sized to fit wall thicknesses indicated on the drawings, in profiles indicated, and constructed from materials as follows: 08 1116 - 1 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Frame Members: Extruded aluminum shapes, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, reinforced at hinge and strike locations. 2. Corner Brackets: Extruded aluminum, fastened with stainless steel screws. 3. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, removable snap -in type without exposed fasteners. 4. Replaceable Weatherstripping: AAMA 701/702 wool pile. 5. Glazing: 1 inch (25 mm) thick insulating units made up of clear, 1/4 inch (6 mm) tempered glass. 2.04 FINISHES A. Finish: Clear anodic coating; AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A31 Class II, minimum thickness 0.4 mil (0.010 mm). 2.05 FABRICATION A. Door sizes shown are nominal; provide standard clearances as follows: 1. Hinge and Lock Stiles: 0.125 inch (3.17 mm). 2. Between Meeting Stiles: 0.250 inch (6.34 mm). 3. At Top Rail and Bottom Rail: 0.125 inch (3.17 mm). B. Aluminum frames: Sizes and contours as indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. B. Verify that frames installed by other trades for installation of doors of this section are in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames as required for project conditions. B. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes. C. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . B. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and within specified tolerances. C. Where aluminum surfaces contact metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact by painting dissimilar metal with heavy coating of bituminous paint. D. Hang doors and adjust hardware to achieve specified clearances and proper door operation. E. Install glazing in glazing frames; set glazing stops and glazing gaskets flush with frame. 3.04 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609. B. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial completion. 08 1116 - 2 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Replace damaged or defective components that cannot be repaired to a condition indistinguishable from undamaged components. END OF SECTION 08 1116 - 3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated, non -rated, and acoustical. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 08 1213 - Hollow Metal Frames. C. Section 08 7100 -Door Hardware. D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. LMA (VPS) - Voluntary Product Standards and Typical Physical Properties of Decorative Overlays; Composite Panel Association; 2004. B. WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association; 2011. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. 3. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. 4. Low Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors: Laminate fused directly to seamless core unless otherwise indicated. 5. Where P.Lam. is indicated on door schedule, use either high pressure or low pressure decorative laminate faced doors. B. Exterior Doors: Flush solid core construction. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Facing: Wood veneer WS-01 with marine opaque finish where indicated on drawings. C. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations . 2. High pressure decorative laminate finish where indicated on drawings. 3. Low pressure decorative laminate finish where indicated on drawings. 08 1416 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.02 DOOR CORES A. Core for Low Pressure Decorative Laminate, Non -Rated and 20 Minute Rated: ANSI A208.1 Grade M-2 particleboard, minimum, with no seams on faces; edges reinforced as required to pass performance grade specified. 2.03 DOOR FACINGS A. Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Medium density overlaid plywood. B. Low Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing: Comply with Laminating Materials Association "Voluntary Product Standards and Typical Physical Properties of Decorative Overlays"; matching PVC edges applied with polyurethane hot melt adhesive. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface -mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. C. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished. D. Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weatherstripping devices. E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire -rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory -Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.04 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION 08 1416 - 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall access door and frame units. B. Ceiling access door and frame units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. B. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Access doors in ductwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS A. Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tool -operated spring or cam lock; no handle. 3. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. B. Walls in Wet Areas: 1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tool -operated spring or cam lock; no handle. 3. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. C. Ceilings, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Same type as for walls. 1. Size in Lay -in Grid Ceilings: To match grid module. 2. Size in Other Ceilings: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tool -operated spring or cam lock; no handle. D. Removable Access Panels: Where indicated. 1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tool -operated catches. 2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 3. Steel Finish: Primed. 4. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color. 5. Hardware: a. Hinges for Non -Fire -Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. END OF SECTION 08 3100 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 4313 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum -framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Weatherstripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2011. B. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. C. ASTM B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. D. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). E. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). F. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: See below under description of products. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kawneer North America; Product Encore: www.kawneer.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum -Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back). 2. Finish: High performance organic coating. B. Performance Requirements: 08 4313 - 1 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of jurisdictional code. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft (0.3 L/s/sq m) of wall area, measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283. 4. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at specified pressure differential. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 6. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound. 7. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C) over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). B. Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100. B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. C. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 08 4313 - 2 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. K. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft (1.5 mm/3 m), whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION a 08 4313 - 3 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors. B. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. C. Thresholds. D. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. _ Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts: Hardware for doors in storefront, including: 1. Integral weatherstripping. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010. C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. B. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPLIERS A. Locknet - Rob Owen, robo@locknet.com, (800) 887-4307 ext. 149. 2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. ADA Standards for Accessible Design. 3. Fire -Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 4. All Hardware on Fire -Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 5. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. D. Finishes: Identified in schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire -rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire -rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.04 SCHEDULE - ATTACHED. END OF SECTION 08 7100 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE Page 1 of 61 Index of Abbreviations Anchor Type M - Masonry 'T' Anchor MP - Multipurpose Anchor Door Core PART - Particle Core PC - Bonded Particle Core POLYS - Polystyrene Door Edge 313 - Bevel Both Stile Edges A - 1/8" in 2" Lock edge - Square Hinge edge 8 - Square Both edges (Non -Handed) Frame Construction SW - Weld Seam Frame Mat'I A60 - A-60 Galvanneal Steel AL - Aluminum CRS - Cold Rolled Steel Frame Profile C - Double Bend M - Single Bend Frame Series Door Finish AL - Aluminum Frames CM - Drywall/Masonry frames PF-STD - Composite Core Prefinish, Standard Color M - Masonry Flush frames Door Mat'I A60 - A-60 Galvanneal Steel AL - Aluminum CRS - Cold Rolled Steel RED -OAK - Red Oak Door Seam S - Exposed Seam Door Series 707S - Commercial Grade AL - Aluminum Doors GCD - Custom Door WD - Wood Doors Door Type F - Flush FG - Full Glass FL,, - 10" x 10" Vision lite HG - Half glass Lite Kit TYPE 9 - 3/8" Pocket Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 1 Pair of doors, Vestibule Opening: 100 Number Openinq Size: 36", 36" x 84" x _ (RHRA) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth. Construction Profile Type Hd) <Aluminum> AL AL 4 3/4" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge <Aluminum> AL AL Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Others Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 1 2 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C 1 Exit Device Dorma 9600BB LHR 7" ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 1 Exit Device Dorma 9600BB RHR 7" ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 1 Cylinder Dorma 87R10 00 630 TMP 630 2 Astragal Pemko 29324CNB 84" C Meeting Stile 2 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 1 Threshold Pemko 271 A72" A 1 Weatherstripping NGP 110NA-72" x 84" A 2 Weatherstripping Pemko 18061CNB 36" (TKSPB) C Door Sweep 36 72 3 '-► Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 4 of 61 1 Single door, Exterior From Vestibule Opening: 100A Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x _ (LHR) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth Construction Profile Tie Hd) <Aluminum> AL AL 4 3/4" _ Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Tie Lite Kit Core Seam Edge <Aluminum> AL AL Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Others Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 2 1 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C 1 Exit Device Dorma 960OBB LHR 7" ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 1 Cylinder Dorma 87R10 00 630 TMP 630 Rim Cylinder 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 10" x 35" US32D US32D Kick Plate 1 Threshold Pemko 271 A36" A 1 Weatherstripping NGP 110NA-36" x 84" A 1 Gasketing NGP C627A-36" A 36" a Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 5 of 61 I Pair of doors, Vestubule From Entry Opening: 102 Number Opening Size: 36", 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RHRA) Frame Frame Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I <Aluminum> AL AL Frame Jamb Frame Frame Gauge Depth Construction Profile 4 3/4" Facing Anchor (Jamb, Type Hd) Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge <Wood> WD RED -OAK 13/T FG PART Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Millworker Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 4) 2 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C 2 Door Pull RockWood 53 x 70B 630 630 2 Push Plate Rockwood 70B US32D US32D 2 Astragal NGP 136PDKB-84" DKB Meeting Stile 2 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 2 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 10" x 35" US32D US32D 1 Weatherstripping NGP 110NA-72" x 84" A 72" 36" - - 3gr - ► ' I i-- - ------- ---- Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 6of61 1 Single door, Patio From Dining B Opening: 104 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x_ (RHR) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd) <Aluminum> AL AL 4 3/4" Door Door Catalog Label <Aluminum> Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Others Door Door Door Door Door Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core AL AL Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 2 1 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 1 Exit Device Dorma 9600BB RHR 7" ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 1 Cylinder Dorma 87R10 00 630 TMP Rim Cylinder 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 10" x 35" US32D Kick Plate 1 Threshold Pemko 271A36" 1 Weatherstripping NGP 110NA-36" x 84" 1 Gasketing NGP C627A-36" 36" v Door Door Seam Edge C 630 630 689 US32D A A A Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 7 of 61 1 Single door, Women's Restroom Opening: 108 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RH) Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth Construction Profile Curries CM CRS 16 5 7/8" SW C Facing Anchor (Jamb, Type Hd) MP 2" 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Graham GCD PLam 13/4" F PC Door Finish Door Remarks Sanara 7932 Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 5 men 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP 1 Door Pull Rockwood BF107 x 70C US32D US32D 1 Push Plate Rockwood 70C US32D US32D 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 6" x 34" US32D US32D Pull Side 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 8" x 34" US32D US32D Push Side 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D 1 Miscellaneous Item Rockwood BF687 Brown Brown Restroom Door Sign 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 36" Door Door Seam Edge 3/3 Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 8 of 61 1 Single door, Men's Restroom Opening: 109 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (LH) Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth Construction Profile Curries CM CRS 16 5 7/8" SW C Facing Anchor (Jamb, Type Hd)_ MP 2" 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'1 Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge Graham GCD PLam 13/4" F PC 3/3 Door Finish Door Remarks Sanara 7932 Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET:-5 women 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP 1 Door Pull Rockwood BF107 x 70C US32D US32D 1 Push Plate Rockwood 70C US32D US32D 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 6" x 34" US32D US32D Pull Side 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 8" x 34" US32D US32D Push Side 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D 1 Miscellaneous Item Rockwood BF688 Brown Brown Restroom Door Sign 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 36" Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 9 of 61 1 Pair of doors, Service Opening: 110 Number Opening Size: 18", 18" x 84" x 1 3/4" (LHA) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd) Curries CM CRS 16 5 7/8" SW C. MP Door Door Catalog Label Eliason Door Finish Door Remarks Door Door Door Door Door Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core SCP-8 Laminate 13/4" F- PART Eliason SCP-8 w/ 18" Stainless Steel Kick Plate 36" A Corner Bakery SCP-8 Door Door Seam Edge Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 10 of 61 1 Single door, Exterior From Kitchen Opening: 112 Number Opening Size: 42" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RHR) Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth Construction Profile Curries M A60 16 5 3/4" SW M Door Door Catalog Label Curries Door Finish Door Remarks PF-STD Window w/ 112" Lexan & inside metal flap. Door color: White Facing Anchor (Jamb, Type _ HHd M 2" 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Series Mat'[ Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge 707S A60 18 1 3T FV- TYPE 9 POLYS S A Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 9 1 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 1 Exit Device Dorma 9300A 630 x PRT03/630 x 42" x 84" x 1 3/4" - RHR 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 30" x 40" US32D 1 Threshold Pemko 171A42" 1 Gasketing NGP C627A-42" 1 Miscellaneous Hardware Detex EAX-500 x IC7 42" C 630 689 US32D A A Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 11 of 61 Page 12 of 61 1 Single door, Office Opening: 115 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RH) Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'I Gauge Depth Construction Profile Curries CM CRS 16 5 7/8" SW C Facing Anchor (Jamb, Type Hd) MP 2" 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Type Fie _ Lite Kit Core Seam Edge Curries 707S CRS 18 1 3/4" HG` TYPE 9 POLYS S B Door Finish Door Remarks PF-STD Door color: Sherwin Williams F75KXW 7066 Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 7 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP 1 Lockset Dorma C880 D LCC 626 RH 1 3/4" 626 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8616 AF86P 689 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 12" x 34" US32D US32D 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D 1 Threshold Pemko 171 A36" A 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 36" Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 13 of 61 72" 36" 36" E-1 36-" E-3 36" E-2 36" E-4 Corner Bakery ale Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 5/8" T 5/8" 2" -Ak- 3 Corner Bakery Cale Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Anchor Type Masonry 'T Anchor(M) Multipurpose Anchor (MP) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Item #1 Item #2 Item #3 Hardware Schedule Heading #1 (Group: HW SET: 1) 1 Pair of doors 100, Vestibule 36", 36" x 84" x - AL DR x AL FR RHRA 2 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C (Pg 50) 1 Exit Device Dorma 960OBB LHR 7" ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 (Pgs 31-38) 1 Exit Device Dorma 960OBB RHR 7" ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 (Pgs 31-38) 1 Cylinder Dorma 87R10 00 630 TMP 630 2 Astragal Pemko 29324CNB 84" C (Pg 55) Meeting Stile 2 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 (Pgs 27-30) 1 Threshold Pemko 271 A72" A (Pg 52) 1 Weatherstripping NGP 110NA-72" x 84" A (Pg 45) 2 Weatherstripping Pemko 18061 CNB 36" (TKSP8) C (Pg 54) Door Sweep Heading #2 (Group: HW SET: 2) 1 Single door 100A, Exterior From Vestibule 1 Single door 104, Patio From Dining B 36"x84"x -AL DRxALFR LHR RHR 2 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C (Pg 50) 1 Exit Device Dorma 960OBB LHR 7" ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 (Pgs 31-38) 1 Exit Device Dorma 960OBB RHR 7 ALD NS 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 (Pgs 31-38) 2 Cylinder Dorma 87R10 00 630 TMP 630 Rim Cylinder 2 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 (Pgs 27-30) 2 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 10" x 35" US32D US32D (Pg 58) Kick Plate 2 Threshold Pemko 271A36" A (Pg 52) 2 Weatherstripping NGP 110NA-36" x 84" A (Pg 45) 2 Gasketing NGP C627A-36" A (Pg 46) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 19 of 61 Heading #3 (Group: HW SET: 4) Item #4 1 Pair of doors 102, Vestubule From Entry RHRA 36", 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" - W D DR x AL FR 2 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C (Pg 50) 2 Door Pull RockWood 53 x 70B 630 630 2 Push Plate Rockwood 70B US32D US32D (Pg 56) 2 Astragal NGP 136PDKB-84" DKB (Pg 47) Meeting Stile 2 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 (Pgs 27-30) 2 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 10" x 35" US32D US32D (Pg 58) 1 Weatherstripping NGP 110NA-72" x 84" A (Pg 45) Heading #4 (Group: HW SET: 5 men) Item #5 1 Single door 108, Women's Restroom RH 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" - WD DR x HM FR 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP (Pg 44) 1 Door Pull Rockwood BF107 x 70C US32D US32D (Pg 57) 1 Push Plate Rockwood 70C US32D US32D (Pg 56) 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 (Pgs 27-30) 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 6" x 34" US32D US32D (Pg 58) Pull Side 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 8" x 34" US32D US32D (Pg 58) Push Side 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D (Pg 59) 1 Miscellaneous Item Rockwood BF687 Brown Brown (Pg 61) Restroom Door Sign 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 (Pg 60) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 20 of 61 Heading #5 (Group: HW SET: 5 women) Item #6 1 Single door 109, Men's Restroom LH 36"x84"x1 3/4" - WD DR x HM FR 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP (Pg 44) 1 Door Pull Rockwood BF107 x 70C US32D US32D (Pg 57) 1 Push Plate Rockwood 70C US32D US32D (Pg 56) 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 (Pgs 27-30) 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 6" x 34" US32D US32D (Pg 58) Pull Side 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 8" x 34" US32D US32D (Pg 58) Push Side 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D (Pg 59) 1 Miscellaneous Item Rockwood SF688 Brown Brown (Pg 61) Restroom Door Sign 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 (Pg 60) Heading #6 (Group: HW SET: 9) Item #7 1 Single door 112, Exterior From Kitchen RHR 42" x 84" x 1 3/4" - HM DR x HM FR 1 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C (Pg 50) 1 Exit Device Dorma 9300A 630 x PRT03/630 x 42" x 84" x 1 3/4" - RHR 630 (Pgs 31-35) 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 (Pgs 27-30) 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 30" x 40" US32D US32D (Pg 58) 1 Threshold Pemko 171A42" A (Pg 53) 1 Gasketing NGP C627A-42" A (Pg 46) 1 Miscellaneous Hardware Detex EAX-500 x IC7 (Pg 22) Heading #7 (Group: HW SET: 7) Item #8 1 Single door 115, Office RH 36"x84"x1 3/4" - HM DR x HM FR 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP (Pg 44) 1 Lockset Dorma C880 D LCC 626 RH 1 3/4" 626 (Pgs 39-43) 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8616 AF86P 689 689 (Pgs 23-26) 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 12" x 34" US320 US32D (Pg 58) 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D (Pg 59) 1 Threshold Pemko171A36" A (Pgs48-53) 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 (Pg 60) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 21 of 61 CHA EXIT ALARMS EAX-500 Battery Powered Door or Wall Mount Exit Alarm The Detex EAX-500 Series is designed for applications requiring an alarmed exit device on secured doors. The alarm, with approximately 100dB, will sound when an unauthorized exit occurs. The EAX-500, with its redesigned shape and smaller size make it the ideal choice for quick and easy installations on emergency exit and restricted doors. G Shown with cylinder (cylinder sold separately) Go Benefits - • Low cost, self-contained door alarm with piezo horn that sounds to warn unauthorized use of a door or gate Features - • Patented plastic template allows for foolproof alignment of internal magnetic door contact and accurate installation • Tapered cover allows for installa- tion on narrow stile doors, 2" minimum • Intelligent circuit senses the ex- temal magnet location auto- matically and sets the correct door handing Mechanical Options - • Secure, tamper resistant housing • Quick, easy installation saves time and money • Patented cam assembly automat- ically adjusts for different sizes of cylinders without use of spacers • Alarm can only be silenced by proper control key • Extended bypass (now a standard feature) allows alarm to remain bypassed when door is open and automatically rearm upon door closing • Modem graphics on cover to dem- onstrate key rotation and operation • 100 dB piezo alarm • 9VDC battery operated with Low Battery Alert • LED visual and audible arming indicators • Field selectable 2-minute auto rearm, if desired • Field selectable status indicators, if desired • EAX-500 may be ordered in SK4 Kit allows for wall mounting • EAX-500SK includes exit alarm several kit configurations: and includes (2) brown MS-1059S prepped for wall mounting, door contacts mortise cylinder and surface SK1 Kit allows for wall mounting magnetic door contacts - specify and includes (1) white MS-1039S SK5 Kit allows for wall mounting cover lock # - additional surface door contact and includes (1) grey MS-2049S contacts can be ordered separately door contact SK2 Kit allows for wall mounting • OKC - Outside Key Control (Rim and includes (2) white MS-1039S SK6 Kit allows for wall mounting Cylinder required) door contacts and includes (2) grey MS-2049S door contacts Where DWI is Bent" SK3 Kit allows for wall mounting 4 and includes (1) brown MS-1059S • KS - Key Stop (Key removed only ® door contact when armed) fi/e salary and Secarily Ooar Nardcvara Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 22 of 61 t--� DORMA Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 23 of 61 DORMA 8600 E I Surface Applied Door Closers The 8600 Series closers represent the latest in door control technology, designed to exceed the demands of today's buildings. With features like the full range spring power adjustment, the 8600 Series closer provides the flexibility needed to meet the many demands of commercial and institutional applications, including ADA barrier -free accessibility requirements. This door control also features a backcheck positioning adjustment for parallel arm applications, to maintain an ANSI backcheck range similar to regular and top jamb applications. The modern slim cover, flat form arm, and architectural finishes provide the aesthetic qualities required of architectural grade closers. In addition to all of these superior features, the 8600 Series is backed by DORMA's unprecedented 25-year warranty. Technical Details: Available as 8616 closers for interior and exterior doors. • �� Meets barrier -free requirements (adjustable size 1 thru 6). • Non -handed for regular, top jamb and parallel arm applications. • Adjustable backcheck standard. Controls opening motion during abusive or abrupt opening. • POS backcheck positioning valve (standard) maintains effective backcheck range on parallel arm applications. Valve is accessible with the closer installed. • Optional delayed action adjustable with a separate independent valve. Delays door closing to allow unobstructed passage through the opening. • Slim plastic cover standard. Full plastic or metal cover optional. • Designed to minimize change in closing speed during severe temperature changes. • Aesthetically pleasing and easy to adjust steel flat form arm assembly. • A full complement of optional arms, plates, and brackets available for special applications. • SN81 sex nuts and machine screws for 1-3/4" thick doors included standard. • Available with optional self -drilling screws for steel door and frame applications (DPK86) • Available with optional self -tapping screws for aluminum door and frame applications (TPK86). • No slip, octagonal bore spring adjustment standard. I-' f DORMA (k 'Features 8616 Spring size (shipped as size 4) 1-6 Non -handed Parallel arm bracket Full line of specialty function arms and plates Backcheck positioning adjustment Controlled closing with two adjustment valves 180°-10° 10°-0° Backcheck Delayed action Hold open SNB1 sex nuts for 1-3/4" thick doors included Self -drilling screws (DPK) Self -tapping screws (TPK) Tamper -resistant TORX screws (TX) Slim plastic cover Full cover (metal or plastic) Certifications: • yes o optional • ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 certified. • U.L. & C.U.L. listed. • Meets UL10C and UBC 7.2 (1997). • Meets ANSI A117.1 and ADA for barrier -free accessibility. • CSFM approved. Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 24 of 61 DORMA 8600 Surface Applied Door Closers Specification: The architectural grade 8600 Series is a non -handed surface applied door closer with adjustable spring power and backcheck positioning adjustment. Adjustable hydraulic backcheck will take effect at approximately 70°. The 8600 has two independent, noncritical adjustment valves to control sweep and latch closing speeds. The backcheck positioning valve assures an effective ANSI backcheck range on parallel arm applications. All closers to have field adjustable spring power from size 1 to 6 and meet barrier -free requirements. Closers to have a slim plastic cover and a wide range of arm options. All 8600 fully adjustable spring force door closers to include an integral design to positively stop adjustment of the spring at the minimum and maximum spring force settings. Optional Specifications: The 8600 Series closer will have optional delayed action (DAY Delayed action range will be effective from maximum opening to approximately 65". All 8600 closers to have full metal (FMC) or full plastic (FC) cover. All 8600 closers to have sex nuts with machine screws for 1-3/8" door (SNB2). Closers to have self -drilling screws for steel doors and frames (DPK86). Closers to have self -tapping screws for aluminum doors and frames (TPK86). Closers to have TORX security for all exposed fasteners (TX86). REDUCED OPENING FORCE INSTALLATIONS CAUTION: Manual door closers, including those certified to meet BHMA/ANSI A156.4, when installed and adjusted to conform to ADA or other reduced opening force requirements, may not provide sufficient power to reliably close and latch a door. Refer to catalog for ED800 Low Energy Operator to meet reduced opening force requirements without affecting closing power. Finishes: Standard Sprayed Finishes: Aluminum: 689. Bronze: 691 (Dull), 690 (Statuary), or 695 (Dark Ouranodic). Gold: 696. Black: 693. Optional DORMA Custom Color or Designer Color Finishes: Contact Customer Service. Optional Plated Finishes: Brass: 605 (Bright) or 606 (Satin). Bronze: fill (Bright), 612 (Satin), or 613 (Oxidized Satin Oil Rubbed). Nickel: 618 (Bright) or 619 (Satin). Chrome: 625 (Bright) or 626 (Satin). Warranty: 25 years Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 25 of 61 DORMA I 8600 0 Technical Drawings Technical Drawing (Symbols and Notes) • — Recommended application N/A — Not applicable / application not recommended — Opening force 5 lb or less on interior doors; 8.5 lb or less on exterior doors where door without closer attached requires 1 lb opening force or less. NOTE: The backcheck positioning adjustment is specifically designed for parallel arm applications. It advances the backcheck to an approximate ANSI range similar to regular and top jamb applications. The backcheck range(s) within each parallel arm technical drawing reflect an on status. Regular, top jamb, and track ranges reflect an off status. The 8600 Series closer is shipped with the backcheck positioning valve on. Regular x Flat Form Arm (or Round Form Arm) 8616 AF86 (Flat Form Arm — Shown) 8616 AR (Round Form Arm) 8616 A08 (Round Form Arm) 4.1/2' 9.1/4 1.1/4 (235) (32) 2.3/4 (70) c--� 4.1/2 13 ' --------V---------1-- x 4.1/2' Bun Hinges Minimum door mil for mounting closer 2.1/2'. Minimum door mil to bottom of slim plastic cover 2.5/8'. Minimum door mil to bottom of optional full cover 3.5/8'. Iavn a�ni Backcheck positioning valve In *OFF' position. Size Selection Chart INTERIOR/ DOOR WIDTH CLOSFA EXTERIOR 2'-0. 2'-6. 3'4r 3'-6' 4'-O'4'-6' min. mat mu. met met max. INTERIOR u 8 616 EXTERIOR & WA MAXIMUM I APPROX. I Appeo" OPENING BACNCHECXOEIAYED ACTION 180' 65'-180' 180'-65' ' Bwkcheck Is odamed approximately 15-with positioning valve on, Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 26 of 61 t-A-1 DORMA Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 27 of 61 DORMA 8900 00 Surface Applied Door Closers The 8900 Series heavy-duty door closers are versatile, durable, reliable, and feature modern styling for institutional or high -traffic commercial applications. Long Term Performance: • 10 million cycles independently certified. • TIGHT LOCK' arm tightening. • Forged steel main arm hub. • Corrosion -resistant, high -strength, aluminum housing. • Hardened pinion/piston provide toughness and high -strength. Certifications & Warranty: • ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 certified. • U.L. & C.U.L. listed. • Meets UL10C and UBC 7.2 (1997). • 8916 meets ANSI A117.1 and ADA for barrier -free accessibility. • CSFM approved. Product Configuration: • Non -handed for RH or LH doors. • Tri-pack (Reg, TJ, PA) standard. • 8916 meets Size 1 (5 Ito opening force) barrier -free ADA adjustability. • Positioning valve (POS) on front, accessible with closer installed. • Full adjustment using BC, POS (PA mount), Sweep, and Latch valves. • Delay valve optional. • All valves (including POS) are accessible with closer installed. • Closing force adjustment assured by octagonal housing bore • Closing force adjustment halts at either full -on or full -off — no guessing. • Accurate installation using full-size templates. • Cover retained by screws passing through cover holes. t-A-4 DORMA Features 8916 8956 Spring size (8916 shipped as size 4) 1-6 5-6 +50% Non -handed Parallel arm bracket Full line of specialty function arms and plates Backcheck positioning adjustment Controlled closing with two adjustment valves 180"-15• 15•-0• 180•-15° 15•-0* Backcheck Hydraulic delayed action Hold open SN1 sex nuts for 1-3/4' thick doors included Self -drilling screws Self -tapping screws Tamper -resistant TORX screws Full cover (plastic) Full cover (metal) • standard - optional Features: • Standard Models 8916 and 8956 closers shipped with regular arm, plastic cover, and components required for the three most popular mounting configurations (Reg, TJ, PA). • Model 8916 closers fully adjustable to meet interior and exterior barrier -free ADA requirements. • Model 8916 may be used on doors to 48' wide interior (42" wide exterior) and weighing up to 180 lb. • Model 8956 closers fully adjustable for use on exceptionally wide, tall, or heavy doors. • Backcheck valve (standard) provides adjustable -intensity hydraulic cushioning and prevents uncontrolled door opening to protect the door and frame. • POS Backcheck Positioning valve (standard) maintains effective backcheck range on parallel arm applications. • Tamper -resistant (hex key) valve adjustment with all valves accessible with closer installed on door (standard). • Full plastic cover standard, full metal cover (FMC) optional. • Heavy duty, aesthetically pleasing, and easy to adjust steel arm assembly. • Standard fasteners include separate wood and metal screws. • SN1 sex nuts for 1-3/4' thick doors included standard. • 25 year warranty. • Optional delay valve extends the closing cycle time. • Arm options include a variety of specialty arms, interchangeable across many DORMA surface closer models. • A full complement of optional plates and brackets are available for special applications. • Screw options include self -drilling and tapping screws (DPK89) for steel door and frame applications or self -tapping screws (TPK89) for aluminum door and frame applications. Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 28 of 61 DORMA 8900 N Surface Applied Door Closers I Specification: The heavy-duty 8900 Series non -handed surface applied closer with adjustable spring power and backcheck positioning adjustment. The 8900 has intensity adjustable hydraulic backcheck that will take effect at approximately 65°. The 8900 has two independent, noncritical adjustment valves to control sweep and latch closing speeds. The backcheck positioning valve maintains an effective backcheck range on parallel arm applications. The 8916 will be available with field adjustable spring power from size 1 to 6 for barrier -free requirements. The 8956 will be adjustable size 5 to 6 +50 % additional closing force over the size 6. All 8900 fully adjustable spring force door closers to include an integral design to positively stop adjustment of the spring at the minimum and maximum spring force settings. Optional Specifications: The 8900 Series closer will have optional delayed action. Delayed action range will be effective from maximum opening to approximately 65'. All 8916 and 8956 SPA, SPAT, and SPAK to have (ABP) Advanced Backcheck Position to advance backcheck to approximately 45'. All 8900 closers to have full metal covers. All 8900 closers to have sex nuts with machine screws for 1-3/8' door (SN2). Closers to have self -drilling screws for steel doors and frames (DPK89). Closers to have self -tapping screws for aluminum doors and frames (TPK89). Closers to have TORX security for all exposed fasteners (TX89). REDUCED OPENING FORCE INSTALLATIONS CAUTION: Manual door closers, including closers certified to meet BHMA/ANSI A156.4, when installed and adjusted to conform to ADA or other reduced opening force requirements, may not provide sufficient power to reliably close and latch a door. Refer to catalog for ED800 Low Energy Operator to meet reduced opening force requirements without affecting closing power. Finishes: Standard Sprayed Finishes: Aluminum: 689, Bronze: 691 (Dull), 690 (Statuary), or 695 (Dark Duranodic). Gold: 696. Black: 693. Optional DORMA Custom Color or Designer Color Finishes: Contact Customer Service. Optional Plated Finishes: Brass: 605 (Bright) or 606 (Satin). Bronze: 611 (Bright), 612 (Satin), or 613 (Oxidized Satin Oil Rubbed). Nickel: 618 (Bright) or 619 (Satin). Chrome: 625 (Bright) or 626 (Satin). Warranty: 25 years Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 29 of 61 Heavy -Duty Super Parallel Arm 8916 SPA/SPAT/SPAK 8956 SPA/SPAT/SPAK Minimum stop width 1.1/8 A5/8' or 1/2' stop (29) t3-1/4 I4 �n (330) (197) (54) a . _ - _ . _ - _ . _ . _ . _ - _ . - _ 4.1/2' x 4.1/2' Bun Hinges Minimum door rail for mounting closer 5' (5/8' stop shown). Minimum door rail to bottom of cover 5.3/8' (5/8' stop shown). Backcheck positioning valve: In 'ON" position. ANGLE X. APPROIL APPROX. NIMU M1000RM OPENdi� Size Selection Chart HOLD OPEN CLOSER CLOSER SOFFIT PLATE MAAAXIMUM OPENING BACKCHECK DELAYED ACTION WIDTH TO 100' 4-12' 9.3IB' TOO- 60'-IW 100'-65• 26' d.OSEft INTERIOR/ DOOR WIDTH H.O.90' 1114) (238) Ell- 2'-0. 2'fi' 3'-0' 3'-6' a'-0- �'-6' TO IW 7L8_ 6-1/4• too- 70'-180' I8D'-75- 23' mfn. maa. ran. rtus. mas. ran. H.O. 125- (22) (159) INTERIOR • �, g, 6, N/A 0916 EXTERIOR NM N/A (ABP) Advinced Dackched Petition INTERIOR NIA N/A N/A ANGLEOFDIM'A'DIM"B• APPROX. lox. MINIMUM 0956 Of CCLOSER SOFFIT MAXIMUM BAACIL�(CHE. DELAYED DOOR EXTERIOR N/A N/A WA HOLD OPEN TO 100' H.O. 9(' 1::L4' (121) PLATE 9319_ 1251) OPENING too. 45'-Io0• ACTION 100'40" WIDTN 28' Heavy -Duty Parallel Arm Door Saver x Cushion 8916 DS/DST/DSK 8956 DS/DST/DSK 4.1/2' x 4.1/ Butt Hinges Minimum step width 1.1/8 (29) Spacer block 5/8' of 1/2' stop (54) (54) l I 3.1/4 f (83) 7.3/4 I 2.1/8 _ (197) I (54) p - — - — - — - — - — - J - Minimum door mil for mounting closer 5' (5/8' stop shown). Minimum door mil to bottom of cover 5.3/8' (5/8' stop shown). Backcheck positioning valve in "ON" position. pd�L i Size Selection Chart CLOSER INTERIOR/ DOOR WIDTH EXTERIOR ml . 3lf ma. 4n mat INTERIOR 6. rNMA 6916 EXTERIOR b, N/A INTERIOR NIA N/A NIA 8956 EXTERIOR N/A N/A TEMPLATE DIM •A" DIM "8" SOFFIT CUSHION/ APPROX. Al"OX. DELAYED MINIMUM DOOR RFFFAENCE CLOSER PLATE HOLD OPEN BACKCHECK ACTION WIDTH 85' � 1(3a7e 85• 50--85' 85-60' 26, W 189 (92CB 90' 55'-90' 90--60' 25' 1Do- 2.318 8-5$ IDO' 60'-10(' 100'-65' 24• I6S (219) 110' 110' 65--110- 110--70" 23' II 17iz 19 1 • Hold Oven Is owosimatel7 1"-2' less than the cushkm eng1e listed in the chmt. M4 DORMA 17 Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 30 of 61 t--� DORMA Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 31 of 61 D O ' I Exit Device DORMNs 9000 Series premium exit devices are available in medium or narrow stile for high impact applications such as schools, universities, and other institutional or commercial buildings. Certification: • Certified/listed to ANSI/BHMA 156.3, Grade 1 for exit devices. • U.L. and C.U.L. listed under their continuing reinspection programs and conforms to standards U.L. IOC and U.B.C. 7-2 positive pressure testing. • Complies with NFPA 101 life safety code. Fire rated devices comply with NFPA 80 fire doors and windows. • Devices, trim, pulls, and levers comply with the Americans for Disabilities Act, 1994, and ANSI 117.1-2003 for accessible and usable buildings and facilities. • Contributes to U.S. Green Building Council, LEED MR Credits 2.1, 4.1, 4.2 and 5.1. • Listed with the California Department of Forestry and Fire Protection, Office of the State Fire Marshal (medium stile devices only). • Hurricane code approved to Miami -Dade County Florida acceptance No. 06-912.05 (medium stile devices only). • Florida State Building Code listed (medium stile devices only). Specification: All devices to have heavy-duty cast chassis. All device touchbar, rail, and cover assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge solid wrought materials for true architectural finishes or color coated finishes. The partial -length touchpad assembly accommodates field installation of options such as cylinder dogging and exit alarm. Non -labeled units to have hex key dogging standard. Fire rated versions available for labeled applications. Surface vertical rod devices shall have pullman type top latch bolts and round slidebolt bottom latches. All devices to have deadlocking latch bolts with 3/4' throw. All units shall offer a full range of free wheeling operational trim, except mortise devices. All units shall offer optional rigid and clutch -style trim, where applicable. All devices to be furnished with appropriate mounting hardware including both wood and machine screws, as well as sex nuts where required. Optional Specifications: Non -labeled devices to have cylinder dogging. Mortise cylinder included. Specify CO. All surfacelconcealed vertical rod devices to have pullman type bottom latch bolt. Specify PB. All surface/concealed vertical rod devices to have extended top rod up to 10'. Specify ETR. All surface/concealed vertical rod devices to be furnished less bottom rod. Specify LB. Devices to have electric latch bolt retraction to provide remote access from the secure side of door. Can also be used in conjunction with low energy/automatic door operator. Specify ES. (ES must be powered by PS-501 power supply and use ES-105 power transfer). Devices to have a latch monitor to report the latch bolt status. Specify LM. Devices to be furnished with two switches in the touchbar to provide notification when touchbar is depressed. Specify MS. Devices to have latch monitor with monitor switches in touchbar. Specify LM/MS. Devices to have latch monitor with monitor switches and a bypass to permit authorized exit. Specify LMIMS BP. Devices to have one of the following exit alarm options: battery -powered exit alarm (BPA), battery -powered exit alarm with a 4-minute reset (SPAR), or direct hard -wired exit alarm (DWA). Devices to use a vision lite shim kit to raise the device from the door surface to accommodate glass light molding. Specify GK9000 (medium stile) or GK9200 (narrow stile). All devices for labeled wood or composite doors to be furnished with sex bolts. Specify SNB. All concealed vertical rod devices installed in aluminum doors to be furnished with appropriate brackets for aluminum door applications. Specify ALD (9100) or NS (9600). All devices to use tamper -resistant security screws. Specify TX. All devices to be furnished with rigid trim. Specify R after trim. All devices to be furnished with clutch -style lever trim. Specify C after lever trim. Finishes Architectural Finishes: Powder Coated Finishes: Brass: 605 (Bright) or 606 (Satin). Aluminum: 689. Bronze: 611 (Bright), 612 (Satin), or Bronze: 691 (Dull) or 613 (Oxidized Satin Oil Rubbed). 695 (Dark Duranodic). Nickel: 619 (Satin). Black: 693. Chrome: 625 (Bright) or 626 (Satin). Gold: 696. Stainless Steel: 630 (Satin). Clear Powder Coating: Specify P. Antimicrobial Protected Coating: Specify AM. Warranty: 10 years mechanical, 2 years electronic integral components and accessories. Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 32 of 61 Page 33 of 61 N`4 OORMA (continued) Concealed Vertical Rod (2) independent doors (Less Bottom Rod) Wood/Steel 8' x 10' Devices are panic listed only with (1) point latching 9100 LB x 9100 LB Concealed Vertical Rod Steel _ 8' x 10' 3 Hour' 3�� (Less Bottom Rod) ----- - — ---- F9100 LB x F9100 L8 Wood 8' x 10' 1-1/2 Hour' (swing opposite direction) - - Surface Vertical Rod 9400 x 9400 Wood/Steelk8l 10' Devices are panic listed only (2) independent doors with (2) point latching % (swingsame direction) _ I I Surface Vertical Rod F9400 x F9400 Steel 10 1-1/2 Hour' 1-1/2 Hour - 1-1/2 Hour —Wood Wood 8' 10' Surface Vertical Rod 9400 x 9400 Wood/Steel10' Steel 8' x 10' Devices are panic listed only 3 Hour (2) independent doors with (2) point latching Surface Vertical Rod F9400 x F9400 � Wood 8' x 8' _ 1-1/2 Hour 1-1/2 Hour (swing opposite direction) Wood 8' x 10' Surface Vertical Rod (Less Bottom Rod) Wood/Steel 8' x 10' Devices are panic listed only (2) independent doors with (1) point latching 9400 LB x 9400 L8 1.112 Hour',' - Surface Vertical Rod Steel 8' x 10' (Less Bottom Rod) ----- -- Wood - 8' x 10' F9400 LB x F9400 L8 1-1/2 Hour' (swing same direction) Surface Vertical Rod (Less Bottom Rod) Wood/Steel 8' x 10' Devices are panic listed only (2) independent doors with (1) point latching 9400 LB x 9400 LB S'✓/ (swing opposite direction) Surface Vertical Rod (Less Bottom Rod) F9400 LB x F9400 LB Steel 8' x 10' 3 Hour' Wood 8' x 10' 1-1/2 Hour' Rim x Surface Vertical Rod (2) independent doors with (1) and (2) point 9300 x 9400 Wood/Steel 8' x 8' Devices are panic listed only latching (swing same direction) Rim x Concealed Vertical Rod (2) independent doors with (1) and (2) point 9300 x 9100 Wood/Steel 8' x 8' Devices are panic listed only latching (swing same direction) - Mortise x Surface (2) independent doors Vertical Rod Wood/Steel 8' x 10' Devices are panic listed only with (1) and (2) point - 9500 x 9400 _ _ 3 Hour latching �t Mortise x Surface Steel 8' x 10' Vertical Rod F9500 x F9400 _ 1-1/2 Hour 1-112 Hour (swing same direction) Wood _ Wood 8' x 8' 8' x 10' Mortise x Concealed Vertical Rod Wood/Steel 8' x 10' Devices are panic listed only (2) independent doors with (1) and (2) point p 9500 x 9100 _ 3 Hour latching �Or— Mortise x Concealed Vertical Rod Steel 8' x 10' Wood 8' x 8' 1-1/2 Hour{ F9500 x F9100 14%2Hour (swing same direction) Wood - 8' x 10' Concealed Vertical Rod 9600 x 9600 Wood/Steel 8' x 10' 8' x 10' Devices are panic listed only Hour' (2) independent doors with (2) point latching — Concealed Vertical Rod Steel __1-1/2 _ 1. Hour 11/2 Hour' F9600 x F9600 1 Wood Wood 8' x 8' I 8' x 10' I (swing same direction) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 34 of 61 DORMA 9300 0 Exit Device -A 9300/F9300 Medium Stile Rim Exit Devices The 9300 and F9300 present a simple, heavy-duty, easily installed solution where high quality panic and fire -listed hardware is needed. The patented exit devices in the 9300 and F9300 Series are available in a full range of finishes and trim options. The F9300 Series devices carry an "A" label for three-hour steel fire door applications. Model Function Operation Trim Model Number 9300 01 Exit Only Numbers F9300 (no trim) 9300 DT Dummy Trim VODT NPTDT YODT F9300 I a 9300 02 Entrance by trim when V102 I PTT02 actuating bar is locked down. V302 PRT02 0 9300 03 Entrance by trim when latch V003 V103 NPT03 PTT03 Y003 F9300 bolt is retracted by key. Key. V303 LI PRT03I a removable only when locked. jk)I I� CD9300 04 Entrance by trim when latch V003 . V103 NPT03 PTT03 Y003 bolt is retracted by key or set in V303 PRT03 ° a a retracted position by key. 9300 05 Entrance by thumbpiece. Key HTT05 no F9300 locks or unlocks thumbpiece. HRT05 U� U 9300 06 Entrance by thumbpiece only HTT06 F9300 when released by key. Key HRT06 k removable only when locked. J 9300 08 Entrance by knob or lever. Key F9300 locks knob lever. YK08 YR08 or unlocks or YT08 YC08 YGO8 F9300 08x08 Entrance by lever. Outside or inside key locks or unlocks YK08x08 N �YR08x08 YT08x08 lever. YC08xO8 YG08xO8 9300 09 Entrance by knob or lever only F9300 when released by key. Key YK091,, YR09� YT09 removable only when locked. YC09 YG09 9300 22 Entrance by thumbpiece (no HTT22� cylinder). Trim always active. HRT22In �j 9300 23 Entrance by knob or lever F9300 (no cylinder). Knob or lever YK23U L YR23 YT23 always active. YC23 YG23 14 Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 35 of 61 DORMA 9600 01 Exit Devices 9600/F9600 Narrow Stile Concealed Vertical Rod Exit Devices 1.1/8 1-3_/J8 (29) 1 (35) 1 13.7/8 i (98) d 2-3/4 2.11/16 (70) l�l (68) � 8-1l8 -} - (206) li /4 Specify Door Brackets �1 (32) p ALD • Medium stile aluminum NS • 2-1/8' narrow stile 9 aluminum (default) ::3-7/8 rl WD - Narrow stile wood or (98)ti hollow steelLV13/e (35) 9600 01 Exit Only F9600 (no trim) 9600 DT Dummy Trim ZODT F9600 O 9600 02 Entrance by trim when OP02 ZP02 ZK02R f ZR02R actuating bar is locked down. CI 0 LI ZT02R — ZCO2R ZG02R 9600 F9600 03 Entrance by trim when latch bolt is retracted by key. Key Z003* II ZP03 Dj �j II II ZK03R Q ZR03R (� j LI I( ZT03R AIL_ U UUUIII f� IN ZC03R CCCYYYU removable only when locked. ZG03R CD9600 04 Entrance by trim when latch Z003* ZP03 ZK03R ZR03R pp bolt is retracted by key or set in ZT03R �Il a retracted position by key. ZC03R tttt����IIYY ZG03R 9600 08 Entrance by knob or lever. ZK08 ZRO8 ZR08C F9600 Key locks or unlocks knob ZTOS � ZT08C or lever. ZC08 ZG08 ZC08C ZG08C 9600 09 Entrance by knob or lever only ZK09 ZR09 @ ZR09C F9600 when released by key. Key T removable only when locked. ZTCrL Z09 ZZC09 C09C 09C 9600 11 Entrance by thumbturn and ZP11 F9600 pull. Key locks or unlocks �I thumbturn. 9600 12 Entrance by thumbturn and pull ZP12 F9600 only when released by key. Key removable only when locked. 9600 23 Entrance by knob or lever ZK23 (1 ZR23 F9600 (no cylinder). Knob or lever 1 ZT23 always active. ZC23 ZG23 9600 25 Entrance by thumbturn and ZP25 (�l F9600 pull (no cylinder). Thumbturn always active. •Pull by others 24 Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 36 of 61 DORMA 9600 0 Strikes Minimum Stile Standard Strikes No. 418 • Top Strike 9600/F9600, 9600 LB/179600 LB No. 439 - Bottom Strike 9600/F9600 1.5/8 £Strike 13116 (41) 15116 (21) (24) ivertical (16)1 0. E'S`tdke ivertical T— Edge of Stop 3/32 1 2 (2) r((25 1 (SL l 3�4 I Inside Face 1 1/4 Ref. 13/16 3l32 I F. (25) (6) (20) (2) _ 3/4 i Finished floor -. _. -1 I L; �(19)I� Optional Strikes No. 340 - For bottom slidebolt 2 -{ Strike (LVertical 51) (25)Inside Face ILA 12� I _ Finished Floor 5/8' Dia. Hole In Floor Ref.1/4 1/2' Oeup Minimum (6) No. 431 - For use with optional pullman bottom latch bolt No. 419 - For wood frame installations 1.13/16 Strike 13/16- (q6) 15/16 (21) (24) Vertical T— Edge of Stop 2 1.1/2 1) L !I. 9116 3/32 ; (13) 1.5) (35I (qq) Strike Vertical 13/4 (44) ( (2)Inside Face J 1/4 1/4 Ref. 5/32 Flnlshc�Floor (4) 1F �F�2'5) Square Cutout P Deep Vertical Rod x Vertical Rod Minimum Stile -Vertical Reference E�fii 6 Vertical Rod x Rim Minimum Stile Vertical Reference—i-- 1.5/8 (41) i 1 ' E ti Not Fire Rated Vertical Minimum Vertical Minimum 9600 Reference j Stile F9600 ( Reference I Stile 9600 1 Minimum Stile No Trim/OP02 1-1/4 (32) 1-7/8 (48) No Trim/OP02' 2-3/4 (70) 13-3/16 (81) No Trim/OP02I 2-3/16 (56) --- -- Z m 1-1/4 0-2)2) 2-1/16 (52) Z Trim 12-3/4 (70) 3-3/16 (81) TriZ Trim 1 2-7/16 (62) t_� DORMA Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 37 of 61 DORMA9000 0 1 Trim Narrow Stile Trim 3.118 2(79) 7/8 (57) 57) 3-1/8 1221 I` �.� (79) 8.1/2 7-1/2 Jj 8-112(216) (191) (216) L (41) 2-1/41. (41) Trim Descriptions Raised Escutcheon Plate Tubular Pull Raised Escutcheon Plate Dummy Trim Tubular Pull Trim Designations ZODT OP02 ZP02 Handing — — — Function DT 02 02 DORMA Cylinder — — — (default) DORMA Cylinder — — — (optional SFIC) Trim 3-1/8 7/8 3.1/8 (79) 3-7/16 (22) r (79) (87) a 0 8.1/2O L) 812O f216) U1 0 . _ (216) 1, 4 (216) 1-5/8 1-5/8 (41) (41) (41) Trim Descriptions Raised Escutcheon Plate Raised Escutcheon Plate Raised Escutcheon Plate with Cylinder Hole Tubular Pull with Knob with (pull by others) Cylinder Hole Cylinder Hole (rigid trim) Trim Designations Z003 ZP03 ZK03R Handing — Specify Hand — Function 03 or 04 (with CD device) 03 or 04 (with CD device) 03 DORMA Cylinder 8OR30SC - Rim 80R20SC - Rim 80R20SC - Rim (default) DORMA Cylinder 87R30BA - 7-pin 87R20BA - 7-pin 87R20BA - 7-pin (optional SFIC) 42 Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 38 of 61 DORMA Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 39 of 61 DORMA C800 ■ DORMA's C800 Series Grade 1 heavy-duty cylindrical locksets provide exceptional security, enhanced aesthetics, and rugged dependability. These premium locks are built with a high performance cylindrical chassis for all applications where ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000 Grade 1 products are required. To meet the aesthetic needs of your project, these versatile locks are available in a range of lever and knob trim designs. Features • All DORMA C800 Series locks feature advanced design concepts for extreme reliability and are manufactured with the finest materials for exceptional durability. • To ensure exceptionally smooth operation, the C800 Series locks with lever trim incorporate a cast stainless steel retractor combined with roller bearings. This design provides both extremely high strength and an extended service life for the lock mechanism. • DORMA C800 Series locksets are easy to install in both wood and hollow metal doors with ANSI/BHMA Standard A156.115 preparations for cylindrical locks. • All C800 Series lever locks are through -bolted for additional strength and reliability. Extra strength & vibration -resistance from through -bolted chassis t�_" DORMA Recommended Applications • Schools and universities • Hotels • Apartments • Hospitals and Nursing Homes • Churches • Municipal Buildings • Airports • Retail Complexes • Warehouses • All C800 Series operating lever trim features a specially designed freewheeling function to protect the lock from damage caused by excessive torque applied to the lever handles. When locked, the outside lever handle will move freely through a 60• arc without operating the latch bolt. This free movement minimizes the opportunity for damage to the lock mechanism. • All C800 Series lever handle locks include a special, high - strength spring and positive stop to eliminate unsightly sagging levers. • All C800 Series lever locks are easily adjustable to accommodate doors from 1-3/4'-2-1/4' thick without spacers (1-3/8'-1-3/4' with spacers 660005). Consult the factory for other thicknesses. • C800 Series knob locks will accommodate doors from 1-3/8'-2' thick without spacers or special tools. Levers with returns return to within 1/2' (12) of door face High performance cast cylindrical chassis \ Heavy-duty internal springs prevent sagging levers Adjustable for door thickness 0 Strong, stainless A. Cast stainless steel steel latch bolt retractor with rollers for long, trouble -free service life Stand: cylinders for maximum flexibility Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 40 of 61 DORIVIA C800Technical Details Technical Details: ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Yes Highest grade level obtainable Series 4000, Grade 1 UL listed for UL 10C Yes UL and CUL listed for use on 3-hour fire -rated doors and for all positive pressure applications Non -handed* Yes Simple installation Key -in -lever lock Yes Provides added strength and through -bolted security Cast stainless steel latch Yes Provides exceptionally smooth retractor with roller bearings operation and superior strength and durability against lock -in or lockout situations Lock chassis constructed of Yes Provides superior strength, steel, stainless steel, and durability, and corrosion zinc components resistance Stainless steel latch bolt Yes Provides superior strength and wear resistance Auxiliary deadlocking Yes Provides superior strength and latch bolt wear resistance Premium PVD Finishes Yes PVD (physical vapor deposition) finishing used on 605, 606, 612, 613, 619 for consistent durable color Accepts standard and Yes Allows flexibility of using most interchangeable core currently available standard and cylinders interchangeable core cylinders `Excluding LF or LV handed lever selections. Certification/Compliance: ANSI: Meets A156.2 Series 4000 Grade 1. Meets A117.1 accessibility code and ADA requirements for t barrier -free accessibility. UL/CUL — UL 10C Positive Pressure: All C800 are ', listed 3 hour fire rated. Locks with 1/2' throw latch C ul US bolts are listed for A label and lessor class doors, 4'0' x 8'0' maximum per leaf. LISTED California State Reference Code: (formerly title 19, California State Fire Marshall standard) All levers with returns, return to within 1/2' (12 mm) of door face. Meets Buy American Act. Cylinders and Keying: • Unless otherwise specified, cylinders will be provided in DORMA standard keyway with two (2) nickel silver keys. • Optional patented key system available. • Refer to separate DORMA Price List for full details and options such as master keying, retrofit cylinders and keyways, and small format and full size interchangeable cores. Warranty: For details, refer to Limited Warranty Policy in the current DORMA Price List. Finishes: Brass: 605* (Bright, Clear Coated), 605 PVD (Bright), or 606 PVD (Satin). Bronze: 612 PVD (Satin) or 613 PVD (Dark Oxidized Satin). Nickel: 619 PVD (Satin). Chrome: 625 (Bright) or 626 (Satin). Stainless: 630* (Satin). *Available on knob locksets only. NOTE: Consult factory for finishes not shown. Antimicrobial Protected Coating: Specify AM. Special Finish Notes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18 standards describe 613 Dark Oxidized Satin Bronze finish as a category B finish. B category finishes, "do not match from one alloy or form of material to the next and from one manufacturer to the next." The 613 finish may vary between manufacturers' products and models. In some instances, for customer convenience, the most appropriate BHMA finish symbols are used to indicate similarity of appearance, regardless of base metal or finishing process. Finishes of latches, strikes, cylinders/cores, and visible mounting screws, though similar in appearance, may differ from the finish of the trim. Finish designations in the 600 numbers are the BHMA (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association) industry standard. Security Screws: TorO tamper -resistant screws are available for all exposed screws. Specify TX. Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 41 of 61 DORMA C800 ■ The C800 Series ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 Heavy -Duty Cylindrical Locks are available in many trim designs that complement DORMA mortise locks and exit devices. • C800 Series lever locks feature a custom designed • Independent internal return springs hold levers in correct mechanism that allows locked outside lever to rotate through horizontal position approximately 60' without damage. . , All designs available with either conventional cylinders • &ADA compliant levers feature solid, cast handles. m. or small format interchangeable cores. • Levers with returns, return to within 1/2' (12 mm) of door face. • Roses and knobs made of brass or stainless steel. wer D. Lever D. r ,. ♦. �. 5 3-L2 4-3/4 3-1� (127) ( (89) -� (121) ''' (89) i (.�2.3/4 2.3/4 (70) (70)- Handed �.Lever D. 31/2 f 41/2�? .� '1 'ti 31/2'" ( 4-3/4' { (89) (125) - J (121) (70) T- f 51 jj/ 43/4 �"3.124 (127) Akt-1-1 �2.3/4 -2-3/4 (70) (70) Handed Knob Design - KB +�` 2_3/16 2.3/4 (56) (70) Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 42 of 61 Page 43 of 61 I Mac Plain bearing hinge. Steel base material Bearing hinge. Steel base polished and polished and plated or furnished in plated or furnished in prime coat prime coat. finish. APPLICATION Available Sizes I Inches MM Gauge 4�x 4%f 114.3 x 114.3 .134 t ---;. E 8 oRecommended for standard weight doors. For doors with a closing devices MPB 79, bearing hinge must be used. zMacPro by McKINNEY templated hinges are made to conform to ANSI/BHMA 156.1, 156.7. 8 z° 40 An ASSAABLOY Group company McKINNEY 1-800-346-7707 www.mckinneyhinge.com AvailableOptions: I • NRP(non-removable pin) • Consult the factory for available finishes Packed 3 each per box, 48 per carton. All machine x all wood screws. A8112 Steel A8133 Steel ASSA ABLOY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 44 of 61 rNational Guard Products, Inc. I Phone:800-647-7874 I www.ngp.com The products you count on. The people you trust Fax: 800-255-7874 Neoprene Seals All products this page �.. i Properties: n o � a i •Synthetic rubber polymer blend: Polychloroprene and EPDM y • na Very good abrasion resistance, tensile strength and memory • Flame resistant • Moisture resistant • Temperature range -30°F to 250°F Good resistance to ozone, sunlight and aging. • BHMA Certified to ANSI/BHMAA156.22 performance tests for Heat, Cold, Air Infiltration and Smoke Infiltration 46 x 314" Stainless Steel Sheet Metal Screws furnished. Screw holes slotted for adjustment Closed Cell Sponge -�-1/2"— T t 9/16'.3/16� 11/16" 1 AIIIII&M 3/16" neoprene neoprene 108NA 110NA 108NB 110N8 LL 108NDK8 LL 110NOKB 122n 122h 122NDKB F — 7/8"3/16� ,ft131NA rL114' eoprene 131NB 131NOKS k - - I---- 7/8" ---1 1/4" 3/16" neoprene 127NA 127NB 127NDKB ID 7/8"_+ 3/8" T 3/8" "asi 132NA� neoprene 1 "n L 132NDKB o �— 7/ 3l16" neoprene 134NA 134NB L _ 134NDKB A - clear B - gold DKB - dark bronze neoprene is black 7/8" l 1/4" 3/16" neoprene F 120N LL 120NS 120NDKB neoprene —1 130NA 130NB 130NDKB E— 1 1/16" R 1/4"1 neoprene 133N 133NB 133NDKB �- 15/16"--I 5/16" 13/32" neoprene 165NA 165NDKB Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 45 of 61 �- National Guard Products, Inc. I Phone:800-647-7874 I www.ngp.com fie products you count on. The people you trust. fax: 800-255-7874 + Nylon Brush Sweeps H I 1 a #6 x 3/4" Stainless steel sheet Metal screws furnished. All products this page Screw holes are slotted for adjustment. I aaa j ai A -clear with gray brush f �� I 3: B - gold with black brush i DKB - dark bronze with black brush no suffix - mill with gray brush M y T T m 5/8" 314" C O + t , A605A 7/16" B606A Z 1/2" A605B B606B 1 A605DKB B606DK8 a Emma a mm T 3/4" 1 C607A 9116" C607B C607DK8 1 7/16" C627A C627B 9/16" C627DKB ® 1 RM T 518" f 3/4. 1 OV634A OV634B OV634DKB 600 600A 600E 60ODKB 1 718" I 601 601A 1` 601 B 601DKB T 5/8" 1" 1 OV633A OV633B OV633DKB 1 1 1/16" 1" 1 D608A D608B D608DKB Nylon Brush Plus Specially formulated to withstand greater temperature extremes while providing maxi- mum protection against air infiltration. Nylon Brush Plus color is Tan. �7/16­ T 1l 5/8" 718" 1" 1 1 7/16" 7116" 1 i 9605A 9600 9600 9605E 9600A 9600A 9605DKB 9600B 9600E 960ODKB 960ODKB 1 3/16" 1 9/16" E609A E609B E609DKB 1 3/8" 1 3/4" 1 1 3/8" 2 1/2" G610A H612A G6108 H612B G61ODKB H612DKB Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 46 of 61 IF vay / ���"'lll FFF------ sre• -� mM. manure — polypropylene 2na„ar pile a 143PA 147N neoprene 143PB 143PDKB T coil spring #6 SMS furnished. —T va•� \ 23132• \ 1 I I6N neoprene 116NDKB Mortise dimensions 3/4" ® &WA wide x desired depth. #6 X 3/4" SMS furnished. \\ Max �I•-1/2"— 7/16 7/32" _ nylon brush \ Ab35Ewa Mortise dimensions 7/32" x 1/2" Order as set to receive two pieces Maximum length 108" I nylon brush, pile, and vinyl are gray neoprene and I silicone are black �— I / .— rns• nonce ' 1 va"I \ —T 3/a 1 136N neoprene 136NDKB Is Mortise dimensions 7/16" wide x desired depth. #2 SMS furnished. =�T ,In / #4 x 1" SMS famished. 3 136P Mortise dimensions 7/16" wide x desired depth. 136PDKB #2 SMS furnished. polypropylene pile LU2 ISIN neopreneMAX j IMMe 1/2" 7/16" IS IS silicone I S I V vinyl Mortise dimensions r wide x 1/2" Order as set to receive two pieces Maximum length 108" Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Submittal Date: 04/23/13 Page 47 of 61 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: STACK: -savelevel- Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. C. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. D. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors. E. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts. F. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows. G. Section 08 5200 - Wood Windows: Glazed windows. H. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors. 1. Section 10 2800 - Toilet Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. E. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass --Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2012. F. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a. G. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2009a. H. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. I. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009. J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F .(10 degrees C). B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES A. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing. 1. Application (s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, minimum. 08 8000 - 1 GLAZING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 a. Tint: Clear. 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). B. Type S-1 - Single Vision Glazing: 1. Applications: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Annealed float glass. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat -Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. 2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 08 8000 - 2 GLAZING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 08 8300 MIRRORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and Plastic mirrors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood frames for mirrors. B. Section 10 2800 - Toilet Accessories: Metal -framed mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010. B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011 el. D. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004 (hftp://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.h 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D. Installation in Frames: 1. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. 3.04 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION 08 8300 - 1 MIRRORS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 0561 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following types of floor coverings: 1. Resilient tile and sheet. 2. Carpet tile. 3. Thin -set ceramic tile and stone tile. 4. Quarry tile. B. Removal of existing floor coverings. C. Preparation of new and existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. D. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and pH. E. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or pH conditions. 1. Contractor shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. If such remediation is indicated by testing agency's report and is due to a condition not under Contractor's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior to entering into the contract, a contract modification will be issued. F. Preparation of new and existing wood -based floors and subfloors for installation of new floor coverings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Limitations on curing requirements for new concrete floor slabs. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C109/C109M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2011b. B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009). C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011. D. ASTM F1869 -Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011. E. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; May 2011. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor may perform adhesive and bond test with his own personnel or hire a testing agency. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) or more than 85 degrees F (30 degrees C). B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any 090561 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali -resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited. 3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate. B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present. C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi -layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment. 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), maximum. 2. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A. Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1. Preliminary cleaning. 2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet (100 square meters) and one test in each additional 1000 square feet (100 square meters), unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. 3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 4. pH tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Specified remediation, if required. 6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required. 7. Other preparation specified. 8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 9. Protection. B. Remediations: 1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation; re -test after correction. 2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire suspect floor area. 3. Excessive pH: If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area. 3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS A. Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings, as applicable to floor covering being removed. B. Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and as specified. 090561 -2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.03 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film -forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. 3.04 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this section. C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows. D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet (1.4 kg per 93 square meters) per 24 hours. F. Report: Report the information required by the test method. 3.05 PH TESTING A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Note: This procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the Contractor's convenience. C. Use a wide range pH paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water. D. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the pH paper into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine pH reading. E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value is over 10. 3.06 PREPARATION A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound. D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints. 3.07 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. 3.08 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION 090561 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Gypsum sheathing. F. Gypsum wallboard. G. Joint treatment and accessories. H. Water -resistive barrier over exterior wall sheathing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 4000 - Cold -Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind -load -bearing metal stud framing. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. E. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water -resistive barrier over sheathing. F. Section 09 2216 - Non -Structural Metal Framing. G. Section 09 3000 - Tiling (Tile): Tile backing board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). B. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2011 a. C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products;.2011. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2011. F. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011. G. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. H. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008. I. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel; 2011. J. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2012. K. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011. L. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012. M. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010. 09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf (240 Pa). 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 4. Furring: Hat -shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm). B. Exterior Non-Loadbearing Studs and Furring for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 09 2216. C. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 4000. D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm). b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 3. Paper -Faced Products: a. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. 4. Mold -Resistant Paper -Faced Products: a. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. B. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including kitchen, restrooms, coffee/ beverage staions, office, cooler/ freezer, and service/ expo areas.. 2. Glass -Mat -Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178. a. Standard Type: Thickness 5/8 inch (16 mm). b. Products: 1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer. C. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Glass -Mat -Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 4. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated. 5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 6. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 7. Edges: Square, for vertical application. 8. Glass -Mat -Faced Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Sheathing. D. Exterior Soffit Board: Exterior gypsum soffit board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings and soffits in protected exterior areas, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges. Tapered. 3. Products: 09 2116 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Soffit Board. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unlaced. Thickness: inch. B. Water -Resistive Barrier: No. 15 asphalt felt. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. 4. Chemical hardening type compound. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch (0.7 mm) In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self -piercing tapping type; cadmium -plated for exterior locations. E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.8 to 2.8 mm) in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing. Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 2. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center. F. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of: 1. Framed openings. 2. Wall mounted cabinets. 3. Plumbing fixtures. 4. Toilet partitions. 5. Toilet accessories. 6. Wall mounted door hardware. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 09 2116 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. 1. Paper -Faced Sheathing: Immediately after installation, protect from weather by application of water -resistive barrier. C. Exterior Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing members or other solid backing. D. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer of non -rated double -layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination. E. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing authority. For non -rated assemblies, install as follows: 1. Single -Layer Applications: Screw attachment. F. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet (10 meters) apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet (16 meters) long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound and finished with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. END OF SECTION 09 2116 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal partition, ceiling, and soffit framing. B. Framing accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking within stud framing. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wall sheathing. C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers. D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic Insulation. E. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Head and sill flashings. F. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels. G. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal studs for gypsum board partition framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that rough -in utilities are in proper location. 2.02 INSTALLATION OF STUD FRAMING A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754. B. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. C. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track. E. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches (600 mm) on center. F. At partitions indicated with an acoustic rating: 1. Place one bead of acoustic sealant between runners and substrate , studs and adjacent construction. 2. Place one bead of acoustic sealant between studs and adjacent vertical surfaces. G. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs. H. Install studs vertically at 16 inches (400 mm) on center. I. Align stud web openings horizontally. J. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld. K. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs. L. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from each side of openings. 09 2216 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 M. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames; install supports and attachments. N. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical, mechanical, and other work to be placed within or behind stud framing. 0. Blocking: Use wood blocking secured to studs. Provide blocking for support of plumbing fixtures. 2.03 CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754. B. Install furring after work above ceiling or soffit is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C. Install furring independent of walls, columns, and above -ceiling work. D. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed in structural slab. Space hangers as required to limit deflection to criteria indicated. Use rigid hangers at exterior soffits. E. Space main carrying channels at maximum 72 inch (1 800 mm) on center, and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from wall surfaces. Lap splice securely. F. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full load to hangers. G. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from perimeter walls, and rigidly secure. Lap splices securely. H. Laterally brace suspension system. END OF SECTION 09 2216 - 2 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 3000 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate. D. Ceramic accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.1 a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2011. B. ANSI A108.1 b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2011. C. ANSI A108.1 c -Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet - Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement D. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2011. E. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 2011. F. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2011. G. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2011. H. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2011. I. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2011. J. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2011. K. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 2011. L. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2008. M. TCNA (HB) -Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2011. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent -based products in an unventilated environment. 09 3000 - 1 TILING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal -Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. Corner Bakery account #NA001453. Brett McLeroy - 877-556-5728. B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows: 1. Size and Shape: 2. Colors: As shown on drawings. C. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows.- 1 . Size and Shape: 3 inch by 6 inch (Running bond). 2. Surface Finish: Semi -gloss. 3. Colors: As scheduled. D. Quarry Tile: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows: 1. Size and Shape: 6 inch square (150 mm square). 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 3. Colors: As scheduled. 4. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove, cove base, and window sill or step nosing shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout. B. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4. 2.04 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Custom Building Products . B. Standard Grout: ANSI A118.6 standard cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1 /8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. 3. Color(s): As scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for the installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. 09 3000 - 2 TILING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. E. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through Al08.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations. B. Lay the to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. K. Apply sealant to junction of the and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W245. B. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W243, thin -set with dry -set or latex -Portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W222, one coat method. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at showers and bathtub walls, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W222, one coat method. 3.05 SCHEDULE Refer to construction documents for finish schedules. END OF SECTION 09 3000 - 3 TILING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 1300 - Fire -Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. B. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2007. B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels; 2008. C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2011. D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product as scheduled below: www.armstrong.com. 2. USG; Product as scheduled below: www.usg.com. B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Same as for acoustical units. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 09 5100 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each corner, or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above -ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3.04 SCHEDULE ACT-01 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE / USG: 24"x48" VINYL COATED CEILING TILE / COLOR: WHITE / GRID DONN DX; COLOR: WHITE - FACTORY FINISHED ACT-02 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE / ARMSTRONG.- 24"x24" CIRRUS STANDARD WHITE / GRID: PRELUDE ACT-03 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE / ARMSTRONG: 24"x24" FINE FISSURED #1728 - TECH BLACK SQUARE LAY -IN / GRID: PRELUDE XL 15/16, TECH BLACK ACT04 ARMSTRONG TINCRAFT SQUARES: 24"x24" CIRCLES #8008 WHITE / GRID: PRELUDE XL 15/16 WHITE END OF SECTION 09 5100 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011. B. ASTM F1303 -Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004 (Reapproved 2009). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring Type KONECTO: Color and pattern throughout wear layer thickness, with backing, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1303, Type II, with Class A fibrous backing. 2. Manufacturers: a. KONECTO. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Fit joints tightly. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.03 SHEET FLOORING A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. B. Double cut sheet at seams. C. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer. 3.04 SCHEDULE 09 6500 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 VP-01 VINYL WOOD PLANKS: KONECTO / PRESTIGE COLLECTION; CHESTNUT 80016, 6" PLANK / REFER TO MFG'S INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT AT ALL BASE & PERIMETER WALL LOCATIONS PER OWNER DIRECTION. END OF SECTION 09 6500 - 2 RE&LIENT FLOORING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 6813 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. B. Removal of existing carpet tile. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Milliken & Company; www.milliken.com. Bill Zimmerman - 617-413-2679. . 2.02 MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile : as scheduled below, manufactured in one color dye lot. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing carpet tile. B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install carpet the in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Fully adhere carpet the to substrate. G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 SCHEDULE CPT-01 CARPET TILES: MILLIKEN; PATTERN STYLE - NEW HIGHLANDS #6117 / COLOR: #903 / SIZE: 36"x36" / REFER TO MFG'S INSTRUCTIONS CPT-02 WALK OFF MAT: MILLIKEN; CLEAN SWEEP - BARRIER REEF #4043 / COLOR: #230 - RAISIN / PROVIDE TRANSITION STRIP END OF SECTION 09 6813 - 1 TILE CARPETING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 7200 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall covering and borders. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Preparation and priming of substrate surfaces. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability. B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer. B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall covering. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to requirements of the wall covering manufacturer. 2.02 PREPARATION A. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra -sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. B. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 2.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.04 SCHEDULES WC-01 VINYL WALL COVERING: PATTERN CUSTOM KOROSEAL, RJG 5277 COCOA-2 /CONTACT: 866-628-2280 OR JIM PRICE 214-616-4505 WC-02 THIN BRICK VENEER: TEJAS STONE AS DIST. BY ACME BRICK / 50% DALLAS ANTIQUE, 50% RED & BLACK ANTIQUE / GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS: #145 LIGHT SMOKE / WITH CORNERS. CONTACT: JUSTIN STERNA 682-503-5126 OR 972-775-0007. WC-04 FLUTED 3/8" ASH / WOOD V-PANEL BY MILLWORKER WC-04A FLUTED 3/4" ASH COLUMN BY MILLWORKER WC-09 FRP: FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS / MARLITE: #P-100 WHITE WC-10 STAINLESS STEEL PANELS / FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY K.E.S. WC-11 DECORATIVE METAL PANEL: McNICHOLS PERFORATED EXPANDED METAL - GRECIAN 31684002438 WC-13 FLUTED GLASS: 1/8" THICK, 3/16" TEMPERED GLASS WITH ONE POLISHED EDGE. FLUTES TO FACE SEATING. WC-14 CUSTOM FRAMED MIRROR AT COLUMNS 09 7200 - 1 WALL COVERINGS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 WC-15 FRAMED 12"x12" MIRROR INSERTS ABOVE BOOTHS END OF SECTION 09 7200 - 2 WALL COVERINGS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory -finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no -exceptions. B. Paints: 1. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field -catalyzed coating. 09 9000 - 1 PAINTING AND COATING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. All Exterior Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete, concrete masonry, brick, cement board, and soffit board. 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer recommended by manufacturer. 3. Primer On Concrete and Concrete Masonry: One heavy coat latex block filler (100 percent acrylic) squeegeed into pores. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete, uncoated steel, and galvanized steel. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. 09 9000 - 2 PAINTING AND COATING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.02 APPLICATION A. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. PT-01 GLIDDEN / EGGSHELL FINISH / COLOR: #A0758 MACADAMIA WHITE PT-02 SHERWIN WILLIAMS / EGGSHELL FINISH / COLOR: #6608 RAVE RED PT-03 GLIDDEN / EGGSHELL FINISH / COLOR: #A1701 MANOR HOUSE PT-04 SHERWIN WILLIAMS / EGGSHELL FINISH / COLOR: #6119 ANTIQUE WHITE (KITCHEN WALLS) PT-05 GLIDDEN / SEMI -GLOSS ENAMEL / COLOR: #A0051 WHISPER WHITE (BACK OF HOUSE DOORS) PT-06 GLIDDEN / SEMI -GLOSS ENAMEL / COLOR: #A2016 DARK SECRET (RR DOOR FRAME) PT-07 PRIMER (AS PREP FOR GRAPHIC) PT-08 GLIDDEN / COLOR: #4216-9990 BLACK (GLOSS FINISH AT PATIO RAIL - MATTE FINISH AT AWNING FRAME) PT-09 SHERWIN WILLIAMS / EGGSHELL FINISH / COLOR: #0067 BELVEDERE CREAM (CEILING) END OF SECTION 09 9000 - 3 PAINTING AND COATING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 10 2113.16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plastic laminate toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Concealed steel support members. B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members. C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. D. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and ceilings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Particleboard for Core: ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, sawdust or flakes, made with waterproof resin binder; of grade to suit application; sanded faces. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS. 1. Arborite: #W418 Walnut Fudge 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Plastic laminate finished, floor -mounted headrail-braced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Plastic laminate adhesive and pressure bonded to faces and edges of particleboard core, with beveled corners and edges; edges of cut-outs sealed. C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Door Width: 24 inch (610 mm). 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch (915 mm) , out -swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch (1 473 mm). 5. Thickness of Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm). D. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and floor -to -ceiling vertical upright consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Wall and Pilaster Brackets: Polished stainless steel. B. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 10 2113.16 - 1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. END OF SECTION 10 2113.16 - 2 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms and showers. B. Grab bars. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors: Other mirrors. B. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories. C. Section 10 2113.16 - Plastic -Laminate -Clad Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ASTM C1036 -Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. C. ASTM C1503 -Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed are made by manufacturer as scheduled on drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. C. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper -proof , security type. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories as scheduled on drawings PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION 10 2800 - 1 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single phase electric motors. B. Three phase electric motors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008). B. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004. C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. C. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures. D. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors, and their accessories, with minimum three years documented product development, testing, and manufacturing experience. B. Conform to NFPA 70. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lincoln Motors: www.lincolnmotors.com. B. A. O. Smith Electrical Products Company: www.aosmithmotors.com. C. Reliance Electric/Rockwell Automation: www.reliance.com. 2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Service: 1. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Motors Larger than 1/2 Horsepower: 208 volts, three phase, 60 Hz. B. Construction: 1. Open drip -proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 22 0513 - 1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. 4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type. C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, and power factor, efficiency. D. Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. END OF SECTION 22 0513 - 2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps. B. Thermometers and thermometer wells. C. Filter gages. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2005. B. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid -in -Glass Thermometers; 2007. C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2007. D. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 404 - Gages, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions, 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for manufactured components. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough -in, taps, supports and test plugs. B. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2. Moeller Instrument Co., Inc: www.moellerinstrument.com. 3. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com. B. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube. 2. Size: 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter. 3. Mid -Scale Accuracy: One percent. 4. Scale: Psi and KPa. 2.02 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi (1034 kPa). B. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch (6 mm) NPT for minimum 150 psi (1034 kPa). C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch (6 mm) connections. D. Syphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 1/4 inch (6 mm) angle or straight pattern. 2.03 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 22 0519 - 1 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com. B. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Red- or blue -appearing non -toxic liquid in glass; ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish. 1. Size: 9 inch (225 mm) scale. 2. Window: Clear Lexan. 3. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77. 4. Calibration: Degrees F. C. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue -appearing non -toxic liquid in glass; ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in vertical plane. 1. Size: 9 inch (225 mm) scale. 2. Window: Clear Lexan. 3. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77. 4. Calibration: Degrees F. 2.04 DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer Instruments, Inc: www.dwyer-inst.com. 2. Omega Engineering, Inc: www.omega.com. 3. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp: www.wekslerglass.com. B. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stainless steel case, silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer, hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stem. 1. Size: 5 inch (125 mm) diameter dial. 2. Lens: Clear glass. 3. Accuracy: 1 percent. 4. Calibration: Degrees F. C. Thermometers: Dial type vapor or liquid actuated; ASTM E1; stainless steel case, with brass or copper bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and black pointer, glass lens. 1. Size: 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter dial. 2. Lens: Clear glass. 3. Length of Capillary: Minimum 5 feet (1500 mm). 4. Accuracy: 2 percent. 5. Calibration: Degrees F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage. C. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance from insulation. D. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. E. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. F. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. 22 0519 - 2 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 G. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. END OF SECTION 22 0519 - 3 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 0653 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe Markers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Control Panels: Nameplates. B. Instrumentation: Tags. C. Piping: Tags. D. Pumps: Nameplates. E. Small -sized Equipment: Tags. F. Tanks: Nameplates. G. Thermostats: Nameplates. H. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay -in ceiling. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com. C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Background Color: Black. 2.04 TAGS A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter with smooth edges. 2.05 STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 22 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch (20-30 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 1/2 inch (15 mm) high letters. 2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch (40-50 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color field, 3/4 inch (20 mm) high letters. 3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch (65-150 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch (300 mm) long color field, 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) high letters. B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9000, semi -gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME All 3.1. 2.06 PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. MIFAB, Inc.: www.mifab.com. 4. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Comply with ASME A13.1. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. E. Color code as follows: 1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters. 2.07 CEILING TACKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark: www.craftmarkid.com. B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head. C. Color code as follows: 1. Green - Plumbing valves PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. 1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or stencils. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on 22 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. H. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION 22 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. D. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2010. E. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007. F. ASTM C 449/C 449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2000. G. ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2007a. H. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012. I. ASTM C 795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2003. J. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. K. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. L. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. M. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. 22 0719 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723, 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C). 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; semi -rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F (343 degrees C). 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm - inches (0.029 ng/Pa s m). E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch (300 mm) centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. H. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 Ib/cu ft (16 kg/cu m) density. 3. Weave: 5x5. I. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color. J. Insulating Cement: 1. ASTM C449/C449M. 2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell International: www.armacell.com. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F (40 degrees C). 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F (104 degrees C). 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 2.04 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 22 0719 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C). b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C). c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch (0.0029 ng/Pa s m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm). e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Compatible with insulation. B. ABS Plastic: 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C). b. Maximum Service Temperature of 180 degrees F (82 degrees C). c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.012 perm inch (0.018 ng/Pa s m), when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness: 30 mil (0.76 mm). e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. C. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m) plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 1. Lagging Adhesive: a. Compatible with insulation. D. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum. E. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Thickness: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm). 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 22 0719 - 3 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges and unions at equipment. H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples., 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. I. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet (3 meters) above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. M. Heat Traced Piping: Provide electric heat tracing per Division 23 for above ground water piping located in non -conditioned spaces. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: to 1-1/2 inch ( mm). 2) Thickness: 1 inch ( mm). 2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). B. Other Systems: 1. Cold Condensate Piping: a. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation. b. Pipe Size: All sizes. c. Thickness: 1/2-inch. END OF SECTION 22 0719 - 4 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Grease waste. 3. Domestic water. 4. Gas. 5. Cold condensate piping. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004). B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011. C. ASME 1316.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18). D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2010). E. ASME 616.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011. F. ASME R16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers[]. G. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). H. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). I. ASME (BPV IV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. J. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010. K. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. L. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009. M. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. N. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2011 a. O. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008, P. ASTM B42 -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010. Q. ASTM B88 -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. R. ASTM B88M -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005 (Reapproved 2011). S. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2011. T. ASTM D2513 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings; 2012a. 22 1005 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 U. ASTM D2683 - Standard Specification for Socket -Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter -Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2010. V. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010). W. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008. X. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe; 2010. Y. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5). Z. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651). AA. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution; American Water Works Association; 2008 (ANSI/AWWA C900). AB. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2005. AC. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2004 AD. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009. AE. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2006. AF. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010. AG. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post -Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2009. AH. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009. Al. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011. AJ. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011. AK. MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011. AL. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008. AM. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011. AN. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010. AO. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. 22 1005 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX). E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable plumbing code and all locally adopted amendments. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D3034 SDR 35. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Push -on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets. 2.02 GREASE WASTE PIPING A. Coated Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2.04 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies. C. Copper Pipe: Exposed drain piping, ASTM B 42. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder. 2.05 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900. 22 1005 - 3 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.06 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn for building service, soft annealed for trap primer lines, Type K (A). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.07 CONDENSATE PIPING A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type M (C), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.08 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.09 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING A. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. 2. Joints: Fusion welded. 2.10 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1600 MM) OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half -lapped 10 mil (0.25 mm) polyethylene tape. 2.11 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.12 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches (80 mm) and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch (25 mm): 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket. 1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606. 2. Housing Material: Malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized. 3. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F (-34 degrees C) to 230 degrees F (110 degrees C). 4. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc -electroplated steel. 5. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools. 6. Manufacturers: a. Grinnell Mechanical Products, a Tyco International Company: www.grinnell.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: 22 1005 - 4 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 2. Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket. E. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.13 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. 3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. 4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. 5. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment. 6. Rooftop Supports for Low -Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows: a. Bases: High density polypropylene. b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material. e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) under pipe to top of roofing. f. Manufacturers: 1) PHP Systems/Design; PHP Pipe Supports: www.phpsd.com. B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) to 4 Inches (100 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 22 1005 - 5 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 7. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring,, adjustable, copper plated. D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308. 6. Other Types: As required. 7. Manufacturers: a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com. 2.14 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches (80 mm): 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. 2.15 GLOBE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up To and Including 3 Inches (80 mm): 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends. C. 2 Inches (50 mm) and Larger: 1. MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug -type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain -wheel operators for valves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger mounted over 8 feet (2400 mm) above floor. 2.16 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com. 3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Construction, 4 Inches (100 mm) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi (2760 kPa) CWP, bronze, three piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. 2.17 PLUG VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Val-Matic: www.valmatic.com. 22 1005 - 6 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Construction 2-1/2 Inches (65 mm) and Larger: MSS SP-78, 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide lever operator with set screw. 2.18 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com. 3. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Construction 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm) and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psi (1380 kPa) CWP, castor ductile iron body, nickel -plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle. C. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches (150 mm) and larger, and chain -wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet (2400 mm) above floor. 2.19 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com. 3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. B. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends. C. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): 1. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged or grooved ends. 2.20 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): 1. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends. 2.21 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. b. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. c. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. d. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com. b. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com. c. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F (98.9 degrees C), capacity ASME (BPV IV) certified and labelled. 2.22 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com. 22 1005 - 7 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2. Green Country Filtration: greencountryfiltration.com. 3. WEAMCO: www.weamco.com. B. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under: 1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi (2070 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm): 1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) stainless steel perforated screen. 2.23 HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANT A. Manufacturers: 1. 3M Scotch -Weld Pipe Sealant or an approved equal. B. White, dimethacrylate paste. C. Anerobic adhesive, low breakaway torque, for applications that require easy disassembly. D. Temperature Rating: -65 to +400 deg F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft ( m) of cover. I. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. L. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. M. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. O. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. P. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. Q. PVC Pipe: Make solvent -welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 22 1005 - 8 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 R. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. S. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over.4 inches (100 mm). 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. T. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 10. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. H. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. I. High Temperature Fixtures and Equipment Connections: Secure screwed and compression pipe connections with high temperature pipe sealant to ensure a long-lasting, leak free connection. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch (10 mm) vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) slope. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot (1:400) and arrange to drain at low points. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Disinfect new or repaired water distribution system. C. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). 22 1005 - 9 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves . 1. Provide 18 gage (1.20 mm) galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch (150 mm) above floor and 6 feet (1800 mm) minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of loose batt insulation stuffing. C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 11 inch wg (2.7 kPa). 3.08 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches (15 mm) to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft (2 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches (9 mm). b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) to 2 inches (50 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm). c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) to 3 inches (75 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm). d. Pipe size: 4 inches (100 mm) to 6 inches (150 mm): 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). 2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch (15 mm). END OF SECTION 22 1005 - 10 PLUMBING PIPING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor drains. B. Floor sinks. C. Ceeanouts. D. Hose bibbs. E. Hydrants. F. Backflow preventers. G. Water hammer arrestors. H. Interceptors/separators. I. Thermostatic mixing valves. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME Al 12.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2007). B. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011). . C. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2009 (ANSI/ASSE 1012). D. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors, etc. E. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: Two. 2. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs: Two. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in .this section with not less than three years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 22 1006 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Floor Drain (FD): 1. ASME Al 12.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel -bronze strainer. C. Floor Sink (FS): 1. Lacquered cast iron body with dome strainer, epoxy coated interior, aluminum dome strainer, three-quarter grate and seepage flange. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (GCO or TWO-WAY CO): 1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO): 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (WCO): 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.03 HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Interior Hose Bibbs: 1. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. 2.04 YARD HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Wall Hydrants (NFWH): 1. ASSE 1011; freeze resistant, self -draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread spout, vandal resistant with operating key, 3/4 inch hose connection, and integral vacuum breaker. 2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.06 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com. 2. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Double Check Valve Assemblies: 22 1006 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. 2.07 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Watts Regulator Company: www.waftsregulator.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. PPP, Inc.: www.pppinc.net B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Copper construction, piston type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 2O1, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure. 2.08 SUMPS AND INTERCEPTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Park Industries: www.park-usa.com 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Grease Interceptors: 1. Construction: a. Material: Precast concrete. b. Accessories: Multi -weir baffle assembly, integral deep seal trap, removable integral flow control , sediment bucket. c. Cover: Steel, epoxy coated, non-skid with gasket, securing handle, and enzyme injection port . 2.09 MIXING VALVES A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com. 2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral temperature adjustment. 3. Capacity: 18 gpm �_ L/s) at 125 psi ( kPa) differential. 4. Accessories: a. Check valve on inlets. b. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet. c. Stem thermometer on outlet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs. F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. 22 1006 - 3 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to quick closing valves. END OF SECTION 22 1006 - 4 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 3000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water heaters. B. Compression tanks. C. Water softeners. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and drains. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label. C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.05 CERTIFICATIONS A. Water Heaters: NSF approved. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co: www.hotwater.com. 2.02 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Type: Automatic, natural gas -fired, vertical storage. B. Tank: Glass lined welded steel ASME labeled; multiple flue passages, 4 inch (100 mm) diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches (50 mm) glass fiber, encased in corrosion -resistant steel jacket; baked -on enamel finish; floor shield and legs. 22 3000 - 1 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Accessories: Provide: 1. Water Connections: Brass. 2. Dip tube: Brass. 3. Drain Valve. 4. Anode(s): Magnesium. 5. Safety Drain Pan. 6. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labelled. D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 to 180 degrees F (49 to 82 degrees C), automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat factory set at 195 degrees F (90 degrees C), gas pressure regulator, multi -ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple, flue baffle and draft hood. 2.03 DIAPHRAGM -TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV Vill, 1); supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig (860 kPa), with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles. B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air -charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig (80 kPa). 2.04 WATER SOFTENERS A. Softener Tank: 1. Glassfiber reinforced plastic tank. B. Brine Tank: 1. Glassfiber reinforced plastic tank. C. Microprocessor Based Control: Brass control valve cycled to regenerate from one to twelve day period. 2.05 IN -LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com. 2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com. 3. SIHI Group: www.sterlingsihi.com. B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig (860 kPa) working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly. C. Impeller: Bronze. D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F. Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system. END OF SECTION 22 3000 - 2 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Urinals. C. Lavatories. D. Sinks. E. Service sinks. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z358.1 - American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment; 2009. B. ASHRAE Std 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking -Water Coolers with Self -Contained Mechanical Refrigeration; 2006. C. ASME Al 12.6.1 M - Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002). D. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011. E. ASME Al 12.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures. C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME Al 12.19.2, wall hung, siphon jet flush action. 1. Bowl: 16.5 inches (420 mm) high with elongated rim. 2. Flush Volume: 1.28 gallon (4.8 liters), maximum. 3. Flush Valve: Concealed (back spud). 4. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. 5. Color: White. 6. Manufacturers: a. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 22 4000 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 b. Eljer, Inc: www.eljer.com. c. Kohler Company: www.kohlerco.com. d. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Flush Valves: ASME Al 12.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Sensor -Operated Type: Solenoid operator, low voltage hard -wired, infrared sensor and over -ride push button. 2. Concealed Type: Rough brass, exposed parts chrome plated, wall escutcheon, wheel handle stop. 3. Manufacturers: a. American Standard Inc; SELECTRONIC 1.28 Exposed Toilet Flush Valve: www.americanstandard.com. b. Coyne & Delany Co: www.coynedelany.com. c. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com. d. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. C. Seats: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bemis Manufacturing Company: www.bemismfg.com. b. Church Seat Company: www.churchseats.com. c. Olsonite: www.olsonite.com. d. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 2. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, without cover. D. Water Closet Carriers: 1. Manufacturers: a. JOSAM Company: www.josam.com. b. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 2. ASME Al12.6.1M; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. 2.02 WALL HUNG URINALS A. Wall Hung Urinal Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Eljer, Inc: www.eljer.com. 3. Kohler Company: www.kohlerco.com. B. Urinals: Vitreous china, ASME Al12.19.2, wall hung with side shields and concealed carrier. 1. Flush Volume: 0.5 gallon (1.9 liters), maximum. 2. Flush Style: Siphon jet. 3. Flush Valve: Concealed (back spud). 4. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. 5. Trap: Integral. 6. Removable stainless steel strainer. C. Flush Valves: ASME Al 12.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Sensor -Operated Type: Solenoid operator, low voltage hard -wired, infrared sensor and over -ride push button. 2. Concealed Type: Rough brass, exposed parts chrome plated, wall escutcheon, wheel handle stop. 3. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. 4. Manufacturers: a. American Standard, Inc; SELECTRONIC 0.125 Exposed Urinal Flush Valve: www.americanstandard-us.com. b. Coyne & Delany Co: www.coynedelany.com. 22 4000 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 c. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com. d. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. D. Carriers: 1. Manufacturers: a. JOSAM Company: www.josam.com. b. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 2. ASME All 12.6.1 M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. 2.03 LAVATORIES A. Lavatory Manufacturers: 1., American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com. 3. Eljer, Inc: www.eljer.com. 4. Kohler Company; Model K-1728: www.kohlerco.com. (LAV-1) 5. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. B. Vitreous China Counter Top Basin: ASME All 12.19.2; vitreous china self -rimming counter top lavatory, with drillings on 4 inch (100 mm) centers, front overflow, soap depression, seal of putty, calking, or concealed vinyl gasket. C. Sensor Operated Faucet: Cast brass, chrome plated, deck mounted with sensor located on neck of spout. 1. Spout Style: Standard. 2. Power Supply: 24 VAC. a. Cord and plug. b. For 24V applications, provide transformer. 3. Mixing Valve: Internal, automatic. 4. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 0.5 GPM (1.89 LPM), laminar flow device. 5. Finish: Polished chrome. 6. Sensor Operated Faucet Manufacturers: a. American Standard, Inc; PROXIMATIC Selectronic Faucet: www.americanstandard- us.com. b. The Chicago Faucet Company: www.chicagofaucets.com. c. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com. d. Toto USA; Model : www.totousa.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage (1.3 mm) brass P-trap with clean -out plug and arm with escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer. 3. Wheel handle stops. 4. Rigid supplies. 5. Carrier: a. Manufacturers: 1) JOSAM Company: www.josam.com. 2) Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. b. ASME Al 12.6.1 M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. 2.04 SERVICE SINKS A. Service Sink Manufacturers:. 1. American Standard, Inc; Model : www.americanstandard-us.com. 2. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com. 3. Fiat; Model TSB 100: www.craneplumbing.com 22 4000 - 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Bowl: 24 by 24 by 10 inch (600 by 600 by 250 mm) high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch (25 mm) wide shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer. C. Trim: ASME Al 12.18.1 exposed wall type supply with cross handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges. D. Accessories: 1. 5 feet (1.5 m) of 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose. 2. Hose clamp hanger. 3. Mop hanger. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 9005, color to match fixture. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel. C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 22 4000 - 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single phase electric motors. B. Three phase electric motors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009, Revision 1 - 2010. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Service: 1. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Motors Larger than 1 /2 Horsepower: 208 volts, three phase, 60 Hz. B. Construction: 1. Open drip -proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency. D. Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is.made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. END OF SECTION 23 0513 - 1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Air -Conditioning Units: Nameplates, except with 1-inch height lettering. B. Control Panels: Nameplates. C. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay -in ceiling. D. Ductwork: Stencilled painting. E. Controls Sensors and Devices: Nameplates. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving: www.advancedgraphicengraving.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 4. Letter Color: White. 5. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Background Color: Black. 7. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709. 2.03 STENCILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Ductwork: 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) high letters. C. Stencil Paint: Semi -gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1. 2.04 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 23 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Install ductwork with stencilled painting. Show direction of flow. Identify as supply, return, exhaust, grease exhaust, etc. Include associated equipment identification number. Locate identification at each air-conditioner/fan, at each side of a penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. C. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay -in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION 23 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 PROCEDURE A. TAB Firm: Melink Corporation, Milford, Ohio. B. Include the cost of test, adjust and balance services as part of the mechanical work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002. B. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition. C. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Submit to Architect. 2. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work. 3. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration date. d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. e. Final test report forms to be used. f. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions. g. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set. h. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity. i. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure differentials. j. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. k. Procedures for measurement of kitchen hood air flows and a copy of the hood manufacturer's recommendations. B. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit to the Owner representative within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing. 2. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced 23 0593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 6. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 7. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch -pound) units only. 8. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Engineer. g. Project Contractor. h. Project altitude. i. Report date. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 3. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 4. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times. B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. D. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 9. Air outlets are installed and connected. 10. Duct system leakage is minimized. 23 0593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Hold a pre -balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. 1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced. B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. C. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust system total airflow rate to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return systems. Adjust kitchen exhaust systems to within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust outlets and inlets to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design. _ C. Adjust final room pressurization of the kitchen to 0.03 to 0.05 inches w.c., positive relative to outdoors, by increasing/decreasing the outdoor air flow through the associated rooftop A/C units. 3.05 KITCHEN -TO -DINING ROOM AIR BALANCE A. Testing of kitchen to dining room air balance shall be conducted with the building exterior doors tightly closed, the roof access closed, all ceiling tiles in place, and the kitchen swinging doors closed. The A/C units shall be operated in the occupied mode without economizer. The restroom exhaust fan shall be running. The kitchen exhaust and makeup air fans shall on with the exception of the warewasher hood fan. B. With the dining room A/C units operating at the maximum outside air set point, adjust the kitchen transfer air fan speed so that the air velocity through the expo window is 50 feet per minute plus or minus 5 fpm. C. With the dining room A/C units operating at the minimum outside air set point verify that the direction of airflow through the expo window is from the dining room to the kitchen (i.e. the kitchen is negative relative to the dining room) via smoke stick. If the airflow direction is reversed then decrease the kitchen transfer air fan slowly until the proper balance is achieved. D. Record the kitchen transfer air fan speed and the control dial position. 3.06 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report. E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. G. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 23 0593 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.07 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities . B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct for supply and return duct systems only. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. 3.08 SCOPE A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units 2. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units 3. Terminal Heat Transfer Units 4. Fans 5. Air Inlets and Outlets 3.09 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM 6. Service factor 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements 8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore B. V-Belt Drives: 1. Identification/location 2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM 4. Belt, size and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual C. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location 23 0593 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Supply air flow, specified and actual 6. Return air flow, specified and actual 7. Outside air flow, specified and actual 8. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 9. Inlet pressure 10. Discharge pressure 11. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 12. Number of Belts/Make/Size 13. Fan RPM D. Exhaust and Makeup Air Fans.- 1 . Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and actual 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size 11. Fan RPM E. Duct Traverses: 1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure 9. Air temperature 10. Air correction factor F. Air Distribution Tests: 1. Room number/location 2. Terminal type 3. Terminal size 4. Design air flow 5. Test (final) air flow 6. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION 23 0593 - 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010. B. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2011. C. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2010. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum 3 years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 23 0713 - 1 DUCT INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F (0.052 at 24 degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F (649 degrees C). 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. 4. Density: 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot (PCF). C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch (0.029 ng/Pa s m), when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage (1.5 mm). 2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible board. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.036 at 24 degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F (232 degrees C). 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent. 4. Maximum Density: 8.0 Ib/cu ft (128 kg/cu m). C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch (0.029 ng/Pa s m), when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. D. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet (3 meters) above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. 23 0713 - 2 DUCT INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Supply Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 2-inches thick. B. Return Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 1-1/2 inches thick. C. Makeup Air Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Dishwasher Exhaust Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 1-1/2 inches thick. E. Toilet Exhaust Ducts: Flexible or Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation, 1-inch thick for first 5 feet of duct beginning at the exhaust fan curb duct flange. Purpose of insulation is to minimize the potential for sweating on the exterior of the duct during unoccupied hours and cold outdoor conditions. F. Transfer Air Ducts: Not required. END OF SECTION 23 0713 - 3 DUCT INSULATION Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General HVAC metal ductwork. B. Insulated flexible duct. C. Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork. D. Kitchen hood makeup air ductwork. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide six copies of ductwork fabrication drawings to Tenant's Construction Manager for approval. Allow eight working days, minimum, for review without causing delays to scheduled construction progress. Submittals shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Submittals shall bear the stamp of the general and subcontractor showing that he has reviewed and confirmed that they are in conformance with the contract drawings and specifications or indicate where exceptions occur. Lack of such review and approval will be cause for rejection without review by the Tenant's Construction Manager. C. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale at no less than 1/4" = V-0". Indicate duct layout, fittings, accessories, hangers, metal gages and pressure class, duct sizes, bracing, and welds. Include sections through the kitchen and other congested areas to verify vertical clearances between ducts, ceilings, building structure, utilities, fire protection, lighting, drainage piping, and other potential obstructions. D. Project Record Documents: Maintain one copy of drawings and specifications on the jobsite to record deviations from the Contract Documents. Include location of concealed ducts and equipment; revisions, addendums and change orders; significant deviations made necessary by field conditions or coordination with other trades; and approved equipment substitutions. Record actual locations of ducts, duct fittings, accessories and controls. At completion of the project and before final approval, provide reproducible "As Built" drawings and certify the accuracy of each print by signature and date. E. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Provide two copies of reduced size shop drawings and approved product submittals for insertion in the project O&M manuals. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warranty the work of this section for 12 months from the date of acceptance (in writing) by the Tenant's Construction Manager. Repair or replace any defective work, materials, or equipment at no cost to the landlord or tenant. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. 23 3100 - 1 HVAC DUCTWORK Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES A. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. 2-inch pressure class, seal class A unless otherwise indicated. Fiberglass duct is not allowed. B. Dishwasher Exhaust: 2 inch w.g. (500 Pa) pressure class, negative, galvanized steel. C. Kitchen Hood (Type I and II) Exhaust Ductwork: 1. Construct of ASTM A1011 /A1011 M 16 gage (1.52 mm) un-galvanized steel. 2. Construction: a. Liquid tight with continuous external weld for all seams and joints. b. Where ducts are not self draining back to equipment, provide low point drain pocket with copper drain pipe to sanitary sewer. 3. Access Doors: a. Provide for duct cleaning inside horizontal duct at drain pockets, every 20 feet (6 m) and at each change of direction. b. Use same material and thickness as duct with gaskets and sealants rated 1500 degrees F (815 degrees C) for grease tight construction. D. Kitchen Hood Makeup Air Ductwork: Galvanized steel, 2-inch pressure class, positive, and seal class A. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Un-Galvanized Steel for Ducts: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS, cold -rolled commercial steel. C. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled. 5. Products: a. Carlisle HVAC Products; Hardcast Iron -Grip 601 Water Based Duct Sealant: www.carlislehvac.com. D. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. E. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308. 6. Other Types: As required. 7. Manufacturers: a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com. F. Grease Duct Fire Wrap 1. Application: 2-hour commercial kitchen grease duct enclosure. 2. Manufacturer: Thermal Ceramics, FIREMASTER, Duct Wrap 2x2+, U.L. Listed. 3. Blanket Thickness per Layer: Two inch. 4. Code Compliance: IMC 2009 and Mechancal Code of the City of Fort Worth. 23 3100 - 2 HVAC DUCTWORK Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals. C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide single thickness turning vanes for duct widths up to 36-inches, and provide double thickness, airfoil, turning vanes for duct widths greater than 36-inches. E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is indicated. F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Insulated Flexible Ducts: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire. 1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with aluminized vapor barrier film. Thermal resistance of R-6 or greater. 2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG (2.50 kPa) positive and 1.0 inches WG (250 Pa) negative. 3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec). 4. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F (-28 degrees C to 99 degrees C). 2.05 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, SMACNA Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication & Installation Guidelines and NFPA 96. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with stainless steel band clamps. E. Kitchen Hood Exhaust: Install with duct sloped toward hood as required by code. Construct duct liquid tight, welded. Wrap duct with two layers of grease duct fire wrap in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using the overlapping, telescoping method. F. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. G. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. 23 3100 - 3 HVAC DUCTWORK Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 H. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. I. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch (200 mm) and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. J. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. K. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum length of insulated flexible duct held in place with clamp. Provide duct wrap type insulation adhered to top of diffuser to prevent sweating. L. Ductwork Leakage Testing: 1. In accordance with SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, second edition. 2. Test whole system (i.e. 100 percent of supply, return, exhaust and makeup air ductwork). 3. Positive pressure test allowed for negative pressure ductwork. 4. Maximum permitted leakage class is 6 CFM per 100 square feet of ductwork at 1-inch w.g. pressure. 5. Any ductwork exceeding the allowable leakage rate shall be resealed and retested until it is in compliance. 3.02 CLEANING A. Perform duct system cleaning prior to the start of interior painting activities by the General Contractor. B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. END OF SECTION 23 3100 - 4 HVAC DUCTWORK Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Duct access doors. C. Duct test holes. D. Flexible duct connections. E. Volume control dampers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warranty the work of this section for 12 months from the date of acceptance (in writing) by the Tenant's Construction Manager. Repair or replace any defective work, materials, or equipment at no cost to the landlord or tenant. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 3. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. B. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. 2.03 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd (1.0 kg/sq m). 23 3300 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches (75 mm) wide. 2.05 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches (600 mm). 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch (150 x 760 mm). 1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch (150 x 760 mm). 2. Blade: 24 gage (0.61 mm), minimum. E. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch (200 x 1825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 1. Blade: 18 gage (1.2 mm), minimum. F. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches (300 mm) and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches (750 mm) provide regulator at both ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch (100 x 100 m) for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. D. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. F. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. G. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. END OF SECTION 23 3300 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide six copies of submittal data to Tenant's Construction Manager for approval. Allow eight working days, minimum, for review without causing delays to scheduled construction progress. Submittals shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Submittals shall bear the stamp of the general and subcontractor showing that he has reviewed and confirmed that they are in conformance with the contract drawings and specifications or indicate where exceptions occur. Lack of such review and approval will be cause for rejection without review by the Tenant's Construction Manager. C. Product Data: Data shall include at a minimum descriptive literature, dimensions, colors, accessories, and performance tables/curves including flow, pressure, throw, and sound data. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007. B. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006. C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty the work of this section for 12 months from the date of acceptance (in writing) by the Tenant's Construction Manager. Repair or replace any defective work, materials, or equipment at no cost to the landlord or tenant. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carnes Company HVAC: www.carnes.com. B. Metalaire: http://www.metalindustriesinc.com/metalaire/ C. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. 2.02 SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Provide square, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi -core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Connections: Round. C. Frame: Provide lay -in ceiling type. Provide surface mounting frame in hard ceiling. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish. E. Color: white. F. Accessories: Provide radial opposed blade volume control damper; removable core with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 23 3700 - 1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.03 RECTANGULAR LOUVERED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Square or rectangular, louvered face, high capacity diffuser to discharge air in one way, two way, three way, and four way pattern. Removable core. B. Connections: Rectangular. C. Frame: Provide lay -in ceiling type. Provide surface mounting frame in hard ceiling. D. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel finish. E. Color: White. 2.04 PERFORATED FACE CEILING RETURN/EXHAUST GRILLE A. Type: Perforated face with removable face. Provide ceiling frame with back pan and round duct connection. B. Frame: T-bar for lay -in ceilings and surface mounting frame for hard ceilings. C. Fabrication: Steel with steel frame and baked enamel finish. D. Color: White. 2.05 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch (13 x 13 x 13 mm), and 1 x 1 x 1 inch (25 x 25 x 25 mm) grid core. B. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with baked enamel finish. C. Color: White D. Frame: Channel lay -in frame for suspended grid ceilings. E. Provide ceiling frame with back pan and rectangular duct connection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. Insulate top of supply and return air diffusers and grilles. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. END OF SECTION 23 3700 - 2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 23 8113 PACKAGED ROOFTOP A/C UNITS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged unitary gas/electric rooftop. B. HVAC controls and energy monitoring. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide six copies of equipment submittal data to Tenant's Construction Manager for approval. Allow eight working days, minimum, for review without causing delays to scheduled construction progress. Submittals shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Submittals shall bear the stamp of the general and subcontractor showing that he has reviewed and confirmed that they are in conformance with the contract drawings and specifications or indicate where exceptions occur. Lack of such review and approval will be cause for rejection without review by the Tenant's Construction Manager. C. Product Data: Provide data for manufactured products and assemblies. Data shall include at a minimum descriptive literature, dimensions, weights, rough -in data, applicable accessories, performance tables/curves, code compliance, electrical power requirements, and gas pressure and demand (if applicable). D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Filters: One set for each unit. i G. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Provide two copies of operation and maintenance instructions, approved product submittals, and equipment warranties for insertion in the project O&M manuals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Unit and refrigeration system shall comply with ASHRAE 15, Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. Unit shall be certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47b/CSA 2.3b and ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6, Safety Standard Gas -Fired Furnaces. D. Unit Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) shall be equal to or greater that prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. E. Unit shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236, Safety Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Warranty Start Date: Warranty begins on the date of initial equipment startup or 6 months from the date of shipment, whichever comes first. B. Manufacturer shall provide materials and labor warranty for a period of 2 years. Program shall cover materials and workmanship that prove defective within the specified warranty period. Program excludes labor associated with routine maintenance, such as belt and air filter replacement. 238113-1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP A/C UNITS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Manufacturer shall provide a limited "parts only" warranty for 5 years from the warranty start date. Warranty shall cover materials that prove defective within the manufacturer warranty guidelines. D. Manufacturer shall provide a compressor exchange warranty (parts only) for 10 years from the warranty start date. E. Manufacturer shall provide an heat exchanger warranty (parts only) for 10 years from the warranty start date. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The Trane Company. B. Primary Contact: Ethan Kinsey, National Account Manager; Phone: 972-406-6081; e-mail: ethan.kinsevatrane.com. C. Seconday Contact: Darlene Pullen, Project Manager; Phone 972-406-3684; e-mail: darlene. pullena-trane.com. D. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Description: Packaged, self-contained, factory assembled and tested, prewired unit, consisting of cabinet, compressor, condenser fan, condensing coil, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, gas or electric furnace as scheduled, air filters, and controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. B. Operating Range: Between 115 deg F and 0 deg F in cooling mode. C. Assembly: Down flow air delivery; draw -through configuration. D. R-410A refrigerant. E. Insulated cabinet. F. Hinged access panels. G. Double sloped drain pan. H. Roof curb. I. 100% outdoor air economizer, reference enthalpy control, and powered exhaust, as scheduled. J. Microprocessor controls. K. Hail guard, as scheduled. L. Through the base electrical. Non -fused disconnect. Un-powered convenience outlet. M. Dehumidification hot gas reheat. N. Return air smoke detector, as scheduled 0. Demand controlled ventilation controls with return duct mounted CO2 sensor, as scheduled. 2.03 CABINET A. Casing: Zinc coated, galvanized steel. B. Exterior surfaces: Phosphatized and finished with a weather -resistant baked enamel finish. C. Access Door Hinges: Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors. D. Finish: Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 672 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. E. Roof of air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage F. Insulation: Minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick acoustic duct liner for lining cabinet interior. G. Drain Pan: Plastic, double sloped, reversible. 238113-2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP A/C UNITS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.04 OUTSIDE AIR / ECONOMIZER A. Unit shall include 0-100% economizer consisting of a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2 inches w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Unit shall include outside air opening bird screen, and outside air hood with rain lip. Barometric relief dampers or powered exhaust shall be included as scheduled. 2.05 EVAPORATOR FAN A. Direct drive for 10-tons and below. Belt drive for units greater than 10-tons. Unhoused, backward curved plenum supply fan, statically and dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber isolators. B. Motor: High efficiency, open drip proof. C. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid -position as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor. 2.06 COMPRESSOR A. Direct drive, hermetic scroll type with thermal overload protection and crakecase heaters. B. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant. C. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. D. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides and a factory installed replaceable core liquid line filter driers. E. Refrigeration circuit shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a control signal terminal which allow the unit to have a dehumidification mode of operation, which includes supply air temperature control to prevent supply air temperature swings and overcooling of the space. 2.07 EVAPORATOR COIL A. Direct expansion coiling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins. B. Designed for use with R-410A refrigerant. C. Refrigeration circuit with externally equalized thermal expansion valve, filter -drier, and charging valves. 2.08 CONDENSER A. Condenser fans shall be a vertical discharge, axial flow, direct drive fan. B. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant. C. Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub -cooling. 2.09 GAS HEATER A. Unit shall include a natural gas furnace with a minimum of 2 stages of capacity control. B. Gas furnace shall consist of stainless steel heat exchangers with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower and an electronic pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion airflow is established. C. Furnace shall include a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic direct spark igniter to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required. 238113-3 PACKAGED ROOFTOP A/C UNITS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. Unit shall include a single gas connection and have gas supply piping entrances in the unit base for through -the -curb gas piping and in the outside cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping. 2.10 DEHUMIDIFICATION CONTROL A. Provide hot gas reheat coil and associated controls that, when activated, will actively control room humidity. B. Dehumidification shall only be allowed when the outside air temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F. Dehumidification is not allowed if there is an active call for heating or a request for greater than 50 percent cooling. C. Economizer: Deactivated economizer controls during dehumidification cycle. D. A relative humidity sensor shall be provided in the room associated with the A/C unit (refer to drawings). E. Dehumidification shall take precedence over a call for first stage of cooling. F. Sequence of Operation: 1. Upon entering the dehumidification cycle the reheat valve is energized and the compressor is started. When the room humidity setpoint is satisfied the reheat valve is de -energized and the compressor cycles off. 2. Upon a call for the second stage of cooling the reheat valve is de -energized and the compressors continue to operate. 2.11 AIR FILTERS A. Easily removed 2 inch (50 mm) thick disposable glass fiber panel filters, MERV 8 minimum, upstream of cooling coil. 2.12 ROOF CURB A. Curb shall be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasket shall be furnished within the control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting of the rooftop unit. Provide minimum 1-1/2 inch thick, 3-lb density rigid insulation on perimeter curb walls. Curb height shall be 14-inch. 2.13 A/C UNIT CONTROLS A. Factory provided controls, completely installed, wired and tested, capable of controlling all features and options of the unit. B. Refer to Energy Managment controls for additional information. C. Demand Controlled Ventilation (DCV): Modulate the outside air and return air dampers between the DCV minimum setpoint and the OA maximum setpoint, based on the carbon dioxide (CO2) concentration in the occupied space. The purpose is to minimize the outdoor air intake and energy consumption while maintaining adequate ventilation for the occupants. In the occupied mode the outside air (OA) damper opens to the DCV minimum setpoint. If the CO2 level is less than or equal to the Lower Limit CO2 concentration then the OA damper remains at the DCV minimum setpoint. If the CO2 level is greater than or equal to the Upper Limit CO2 concentration then the OA damper opens to the OA maximum setpoint. If the CO2 level is between the Lower Limit and the Upper Limit then the OA damper will modulate proportionally between the DCV minimum setpoint and the maximum OA setpoint. If there is a call for economizer cooling, the OA damper may be opened further to satisfy the cooling request. In the unoccupied mode the OA damper closes and the return air damper opens. 1. DCV Minimum Setpoint: Refer to Rooftop Unit Schedule. 2. OA Maximum Setpoint: Refer to Rooftop Unit Schedule, OA CFM. 3. Lower Limit CO2 Concentration: 1,250 ppm. 4. Upper Limit CO2 Concentration: 1,500 ppm. 238113-4 PACKAGED ROOFTOP A/C UNITS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.14 ENERGY MANAGEMENT A. Manufactured by EnTouch Controls, Inc. Furnished by The Trane Company. Install and started up by the Mechanical Contractor. B. Primary Contact: Ethan Kinsey, National Account Manager; Phone: 972-406-6081; e-mail: ethan.kinsey(a)trane.com. C. Seconday Contact: Darlene Pullen, Project Manager; Phone 972-406-3684; e-mail.. darlene.pullen(a-)_trane.com. D. Each A/C system shall be provided with a 7-day programmable thermostat, ENTOUCH CONTROLS #ENTOUCH1-E, per IECC 503.2.4.1, which is used in conjunction with ENTOUCH ENERGY MONITORS. Controller shall be capable of occupied/unoccupied heating and cooling control with thermostatic setback/setup controls. E. PROGRAMMING 1. Dining Room Systems: a. 5 AM (locked). A/C units are set to occupied mode. 1) Cooling, Dehumidification Set Point: 73 deg F, 50% RH. 2) Heating Set Point: 68 deg F. 3) Evaporator Fan: Continuous operation. 4) Outdoor Air Damper: Damper opens and is controlled by demand controlled ventilation controls and economizer controls (if applicable). b. 11 PM (locked). A/C units are set to unoccupied mode. 1) Cooling, Dehumidification Set Point: 85 deg F, dehumidification control is disabled. 2) Heating Set Point: 60 deg F. 3) Evaporator Fan: Intermittent operation on a call for cooling or heating. 4) Outdoor Air Damper: Damper closes. Demand controlled ventilation controls and economizer controls are disabled. 2. Kitchen Systems: a. 5 AM (locked). A/C units are set to occupied mode. 1) Cooling, Dehumidification Set Point: 75 deg F, 47% RH. 2) Heating Set Point: 68 deg F. 3) Evaporator Fan: Continuous operation. 4) Outdoor Air Damper: Damper opens to minimum set point and is overriden by economizer controls (if applicable). b. 11 PM (locked). A/C units are set to unoccupied mode. 1) Cooling, Dehumidification Set Point: 85 deg F, dehumidification control is disabled. 2) Heating Set Point: 60 deg F. 3) Evaporator Fan: Intermittent operation on a call for cooling or heating. 4) Outdoor Air Damper: Damper closes.Demand controlled ventilation controls and economizer controls are disabled. 3. Deadband: 3 deg F. 4. Security Temerature Adjustment Range: +/-3 deg F. F. Controls shall maintain programming and time settings during a loss of power for a period of 2 days minimum and have the ability to download the correct time from the internet if longer than 2 days. G. The following equipment and systems should be monitored via the ENTOUCH ENERGY MONITORS at the appropriate electrical panel. 1. Total Electrical Power: Monitor main power panel for building (or lease space). 2. Heating and Cooling Electrical Power: Monitor individual rooftop HVAC units. 3. Fans: Monitor individual exhaust fans. 4. Make Up Air Unit 5. Lighting: Monitor main lighting panel(s). 238113-5 PACKAGED ROOFTOP A/C UNITS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 H. The power panel manufacturer shall provide each panel that is connected to monitored equipment/systems with an ENTOUCH CONTROLS #ENTOUCH GM8, which is used in conjunction with the ENTOUCH CONTROLLER. GM8 shall be capable of measuring both the main input to the panel as well as eight (8) branch circuits. See electrical panel details for more information. I. Electrical Contractor shall configure appropriate panels with an ENTOUCH GM8 (or GM4 as required) monitoring device to communicate to an ENTOUCH1-X controller. 1. Connect the ENTOUCH GM8 to the ENTOUCH1 controller wirelessly (see ENTOUCH1 installation guide). 2. Configure the size of the current transducer (CT) for the main power feeders. 3. Configure the number of wires in parallel feed if there is more than one (1) wire per phase. NOTE: THIS IS THE NUMBER OF WIRES IN EACH PHASE, NOT THE TOTAL NUMBER OF WIRES TO THE PANEL. 4. Configure the CT size for each branch load being monitored. Refer to the electrical drawings. 5. Configure the number of poles for the breaker that each branch load is connected to. J. h. After installation and local wireless access has been set up, contractor shall contact ENTOUCH CONTROLS to remotely setup access and ensure proper installation. Contractor shall stay on site during this setup procedure and adjust any devices as necessary. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Pipe condensate from drain pan as indicated on the drawings. Provide 4-inch minimum trap. Provide 1/2-inch flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation on drain lines. C. Unit startup and control commissioning shall be performed by factory certified startup. Contractor startup will not be allowed. D. Manufacturer or designated representative shall provide four (4) hours of owner training on the system. E. Provide temporary air filters before starting rooftop units. Replace temporary filters with new, clean filters prior to start of the test, adjust and balance work. 3.02 LOW VOLTAGE WIRING A. Definition: Less than or equal to 24 Volt. B. Wiring: Plenum rated cable. Alternately provide non -plenum rated wiring in metalic conduit. C. Provide low voltage wiring as required for a complete and functioning system. This work includes the necessary transformers, contactors, relays, boxes, switches, etc. D. Install above finished ceilings in a neat and organized fashion. Attach wiring to the building structure. END OF SECTION 238113-6 PACKAGED ROOFTOP A/C UNITS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less. C. Wiring connectors. D. Electrical tape. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low -Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure -Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts with piping or other potential conflicts. 3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 26 0519 - 1 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Nonmetallic -sheathed cable is not permitted. C. Armored cable is not permitted. D. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway. E. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway. F. Underground Installations: Use only building wire in raceway. G. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. H. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. I. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits or as indicated on drawings. J. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet (25 m). K. Use 10 AWG minimum conductor for 20 ampere 120 or 277 volt 4 wire circuits (home runs). L. Conductor sizes are based on copper. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com. B. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. C. Industrial Wire & Cable, Inc: www.iewc.com. D. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. 2.03 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic -Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C. G. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return air plenums. H. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. I. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. a. Exceptions: 26 0519 - 2 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet (23 m): 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet (46 m): 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet (46 m): 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape. 3. Color Code: a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray. b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe. 2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHH`dV-2. b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. c. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with labeled maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires with labeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C. E. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C. 2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 2.06 WIRING ACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: 1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F (105 degrees C). 26 0519 - 3 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and .listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F (105 degrees C). B. Split Bolt Connectors: C. Solderless Pressure Connectors: D. Spring Wire Connectors: E. Compression Connectors: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. D. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each outlet. E. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. F. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. G. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. H. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. I. Field -Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. J. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. K. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. L. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. M. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. N. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 26 0519 - 4 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 O. Waterproof and seal connection in outdoor locations, underground, in pull boxes, fixtures, and devices. P. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. END OF SECTION 26 0519 - 5 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. D. Ground rod electrodes. E. Grounding and bonding components. F. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal frame of the building. 3. Concrete -encased electrode (LIFER Ground). 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System; 1983. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. D. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 26 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. D. Grounding System Resistance: 1. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall -of -potential" method. E. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s): a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet (3.0 m) at an accessible location not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) from the point of entrance to the building. b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous. c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper. 2. Metal Building or Structure Frame: a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location. 3. Concrete -Encased Electrode: a. Provide connection to concrete -encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet (6.0 m) of bare copper conductor as indicated on the drawings embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance. F. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non -current -carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 3. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. b. Metal gas piping. 4. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 26 0526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 26 0519: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use compression connectors or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. D. Ground Bars: 1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators. 2. Size: As indicated. 3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made. E. Ground Rod Electrodes: 1. Comply with NEMA GR 1. 2. Material: Copper -bonded (copper -clad) steel. 3. Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter by 10 feet (3.0 m) length, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 ELECTRODES A. Foundation Electrodes: 3/0 AWG. 2.04 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze. B. Exothermic Connections: C. Wire: Stranded copper. D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. E. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 26 0526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553. E. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding electrode external to concrete. F. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance. G. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4.1. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13. C. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. D. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 26 0526 - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0629 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. B. Conduit and equipment supports. C. Anchors and fasteners. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2011. D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association; 2004. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A: Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with applicable building code. D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of . Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. 26 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a. Zinc -Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. b. Galvanized Steel: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M or ASTM All 53/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One -hole or two -hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory -fabricated continuous -slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field -assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc -plated steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion -resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors or expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 26 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface -mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface -mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor -mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. I. Remove temporary supports. J. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. K. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon -head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. L. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. M. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall. N. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION 26 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0534 CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B. PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC). D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit. G. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC). H. Conduit fittings. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl -Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. H. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J. UL 360 - Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing -Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 26 0534 - 1 CONDUIT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete slabs, where permitted. 2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2" trade size and larger. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit. 2. Exterior, Direct -Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit. 3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, PVC - coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit. 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground. 26 0534 - 2 CONDUIT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2" trade size is provided, use PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends. 6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 7. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) on either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. D. Embedded Within Concrete: 1. Within Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit. 2. Within Slab Above Ground: Use rigid PVC conduit. 3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: a. Where exposed below 8 feet (2.4 m), except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. M. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m). N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m) unless otherwise indicated. 4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: a. Transformers. b. Motors. c. Movable equipment; ie kitchen equipment not permanently installed, and similar.. O. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 3/4" trade size. D. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.0 E. Direct Buried Underground locations: PVC conduit, schedule 40 unless noted otherwise on plans. Under traffic lanes, use schedule 80 conduit and extend 10 feet to each side of traffic lane. F. Outdoor locations above ground: Use rigid metal conduit, or in locations not subject to physcial damage, EMT conduit. 26 0534 - 3 CONDUIT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. B. Fittings: 1. Non -Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.04 PVC -COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil (1.02 mm). C. PVC -Coated Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC -coated conduit to be installed. 2. Non -Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil (1.02 mm). . D. PVC -Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil (0.38 mm). 2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. B. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. C. Description: Interlocked steel construction. 2.06 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. B. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. C. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. 2.07 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. B. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set -screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 26 0534 - 4 CONDUIT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.08 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 PVC, Schedule 80 PVC where indicated on plans. C. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. 2.09 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFNC liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1660. B. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 51413; suitable for the type of conduit to be connected. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC -based, minimum thickness of 20 mil (0.51 mm). B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion -resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound -force (890 N). E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101, D. Install PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer. E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111. F. Install liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) in accordance with NECA 111. G. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed: a. Across floors. b. Across roofs. 26 0534 - 5 CONDUIT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 c. Across top of parapet walls. d. Across building exterior surfaces. 4. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical. 5. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 6. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. 7. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 8. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches (300 mm) between conduits and hot surfaces. 9. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. H. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. I. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc -rich paint or conduit joint compound on field -cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor. 7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. I. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Make penetrations for roof -mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. 7. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. 26 0534 - 6 CONDUIT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 K. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. L. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. M. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches (300 mm) at each end. N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. O. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. B. Where coating of PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors. B. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. C. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations. END OF SECTION 26 0534 - 7 CONDUIT Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0537 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm), including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm). 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS 1). D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS 2). E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non -Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. B. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 26 0537 - 1 BOXES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm), Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet -steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush -mounted in concrete. 4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush -mounted in masonry walls. 5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 7. Do not use "through -wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. 8. Sheet -Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. 9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single -piece construction. Do not use field -connected gangable boxes. 12. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm): 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm): a. Provide screw -cover or hinged -cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 26 0537 - 2 BOXES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. E. Install boxes plumb and level. F. Flush -Mounted Boxes: 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) at the edge of the box. G. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. H. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. I. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. J. Close unused box openings. K. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. L. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. M. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 2717. N. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. O. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. P. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Q. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. R. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. 1. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls. S. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. T. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. END OF SECTION 26 0537 - 3 BOXES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Identification nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Underground warning tape. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. 2. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. 3. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical panelboards. a. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment - specific data: B. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxes each load connection. 2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Foil -backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches (76 mm) wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil (0.1 mm), unless otherwise required for proper detection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. C. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. D. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches (75 mm) inches below finished grade, or as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 26 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance requirements for overcurrent protective devices. B. Short circuit study. C. Coordination study and analysis. D. Arc Flash Calculation and Labeling. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems; 2001. B. IEEE 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis; 1997. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Study Preparer's Qualifications. B. Study Report: Submit protective device studies as specified, prior to submission of product data submittals or ordering or fabrication of protective devices. 1. Include stamp or seal and signature of preparing engineer. C. Field Engineer Qualifications. D. Field Inspection Report: Show final adjusted settings of protective devices. 1.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY A. Analyze the specific electrical and utilization equipment (according to NEC definition), the actual protective devices to be used, and the actual feeder lengths to be installed. 1. Study Methodology: Comply with requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70, IEEE 399, and IEEE 242. 2. Report: State the methodology and rationale employed in making each type of calculation; identify computer software package(s) used. B. One -Line Diagrams: Prepare schematic drawing of electrical distribution system, with all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the protective devices; identify nodes on the diagrams for reference on report that includes: 1. Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, utility contribution, and short circuit values (asymmetric and symmetric) at the main switchboard bus and all downstream devices containing protective devices. 2. Breaker and fuse ratings. 3. Transformer kVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R ratios, and wiring connections. 4. Identification of each bus, with voltage. 5. Conduit materials, feeder sizes, actual lengths, and X/R ratios. C. Short Circuit Study: Calculate the fault impedance to determine available 3-phase short circuit and ground fault currents at each bus and piece of equipment during normal conditions, alternate operations, emergency power conditions, and other operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. 1. Show fault currents available at key points in the system down to a fault current of 7,000 A at 480 V and 208 V. 2. Include motor contributions in determining the momentary and interrupting ratings of the protective devices. 26 0573 - 1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3. Primary Fault Level Assumptions at Utility transformer secondary terminals: Preferred: use actual value obtained from Utility Company; if actual value not available, use data from Bussman SPD Handbook, latest edition, Impedance and Reactance Data. 4. Report: Include all pertinent data used in calculations and for each device include: a. Device identification. b. Protective device. c. Device rating. d. Calculated short circuit current, asymmetrical and symmetrical, and ground fault current. D. Coordination Study: Perform an organized time -current analysis of each protective device in series from the individual device back to the primary source, under normal conditions, alternate operations, and emergency power conditions. 1. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between series devices, including upstream primary device. 2. Plot the specific time -current characteristics of each protective device on log -log paper. 3. Organize plots so that all upstream devices are clearly depicted on one sheet. 4. Also show the following on curve plot sheets: a. Device identification. b. Voltage and current transformer ratios for curves. c. 3-phase and 1-phase ANSI damage curves for each transformer. d. No -damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage cures. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum short circuit cutoff point. h. Simple one -line diagram for the portion of the system that each curve plot illustrates. i. Software report for each cure plot, labeled for identification. E. Analysis: Determine ratings and settings of protective devices to minimize damage caused by a fault and so that the protective device closest to the fault will open first. 1. Required Ratings and Settings: Derive required ratings and settings of protective devices in consideration of upstream protective device settings and optimize system to ensure selective coordination. 2. Identify any equipment that is underrated as specified. 3. Identify specified protective devices that will not achieve required protection or coordination and cannot be field adjusted to do so, and for which adequate devices would involve a change to the contract sum. 4. In all cases where adequate protection or coordination cannot be achieved at no extra cost to Owner, provide a discussion of alternatives and logical compromises for best achievable coordination. F. Protective Device Rating and Setting Chart: Summarize in tabular format the required characteristics for each protective device based on the analysis; include: 1. Device identification. 2. Relay CT ratios, tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup. 3. Circuit breaker sensor rating, long-time, short -time, and instantaneous settings, and time bands. 4. Fuse rating and type. 5. Ground fault pickup and time delay. 6. Input level and expected response time at two test points that are compatible with commonly available test equipment and the ratings of the protective device. 7. Highlight all devices that as furnished by Contractor will not achieve required protection. 1.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD CALCULATION A. Calculate degree of arc flash hazard and prepare a lebel for each piece of equipment that includes the following data.- 1 . Equipment flash protection boundary. 26 0573 - 2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2. Incident energy. 3. Level of personal protective equipment necessary to be worn to work on the energized equipment. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Study Preparer Qualifications: Qualified engineer of panelboard manufacturer or approved professional engineer. B. Computer Software for Study Preparation: Use the latest edition of commercially available software utilizing specified methodologies. C. Contractor Responsibility: Provide all project -related data needed by study preparer, including equipment, wire sizes, insulation types, conduit types, and actual circuit lengths. D. Owner's Responsibility: Provide data on relevant Owner power distribution equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Provide protective devices of ratings and settings as required so that the protective device closest to the fault will open first. B. In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, provide overcurrent protective devices having ratings and settings in accordance with results of this analysis. C. Provide arc flash hazard warning labels for each piece of equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of a qualified field engineer and necessary tools and equipment to test, calibrate, and adjust the installed protective devices to conform to requirements determined by the coordination analysis. B. Adjust installed protective devices having adjustable settings to conform to requirements determined by the coordination analysis. C. Submit report showing final adjusted settings of all protective devices. END OF SECTION 26 0573 - 3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Occupancy sensors. B. Outdoor photo controls. C. Daylighting controls. D. Lighting control panel. E. Lighting Dimmer Panel F. Ancillary low voltage switches G. Manufacturer's site visits 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. B. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches, wall dimmers, fan speed controllers, and wall plates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings. 2. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment or other potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others. 3. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights, and luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other sections or by others. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component. 2. Daylighting Controls: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each photo sensor and associated system component. C. Field Quality Control Reports. D. Manufacturers wiring diagrams, including layout on plan, specific to the project and lighting circuits. 26 0923 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all occupancy sensors. B. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all daylighting controls. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system. C. Basis of Design: as noted on plans and schedules. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices. F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. D. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place. E. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 2726. F. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on 26 0923 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. G. Identify lighting control devices in accordance with Section 26 0553. H. Occupancy Sensor Locations: 1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for complete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices. 2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors a minimum of 6 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers. I. Outdoor Photo Control Locations: 1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down. 2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources, including light sources controlled by the photo control itself. J. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control. K. Daylighting Control Photo Sensor Locations: 1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for proper control of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for closed loop systems to accurately measure the light level controlled at the designated task location, while minimizing the measured amount of direct light from natural or artificial sources such as windows or pendant luminaires. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for open loop systems to accurately measure the level of daylight coming into the space, while minimizing the measured amount of lighting from artificial sources. L. Lamp Burn -In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn -in. M. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessible ceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location. N. Where indicated, install separate compatible wall switches for manual control interface with lighting control devices or associated power packs. O. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does not turn off power pack. P. Where indicated or required, provide cabinet or enclosure in accordance with Section 26 2716 for mounting of lighting control device system components. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain services of manufacturer's representative to meet with the contractor on the site before rough in of the lighting controls starts for educational purposes. Allow one day minimum on site to go over complete installation details. B. Obtain services of manufacturer's representative to commision lighting controls. Allow 2 days on site to adjust, program, and instruct contractor to make wiring corrections or additions if needed. C. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects. 26 0923 - 3 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals. E. Test time switches to verify proper operation. F. Test outdoor photo controls to verify proper operation, including time delays where applicable. G. Test daylighting controls to verify proper operation, including light level measurements and time delays where applicable. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals. H. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. B. Training: Train owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized service representative. 4. Location: At project site. END OF SECTION 26 0923 - 4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power distribution panelboards. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards. C. Load centers. D. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 0573 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2009. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. D. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. E. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. 1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. 26 2416 - 1 PANELBOARDS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated. B. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating; not less than the available fault current as shown or scheduled, and not less than available fault current as determined by approved fault current study.. C. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. D. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. Furnish two of each panelboard key. E. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. 2.03 INTEGRATED FACILITIES SYSTEMS A. Description: A customized assembly of panelboards, transformers, control devices, integraged into one assembly with uniform front and rear, as shown and scheduled on drawings.IFS shall be prewired and preassembled into an integrated monolithic unit. B. IFS unit may include but not limited to panelboards, transformers, surge protection, energy monitoring, BAS, lighting control, motor control, shunt trip, or other electrical devices and equipment. C. Integrated rating may be used for fault current and arc flash protection. D. Equipment within the IFS system shall be otherwise in accordance with the requirements of this specification. E. Manufacturer: 1. Cutler Hammer IFS system 2. Approved equal by other manufacturers. 2.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 2. Ground Bus Material: Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt -on type. 2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide mounting for enclosures as indicated. 26 2416 - 2 PANELBOARDS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 3. Ground Bus Material: Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt -on type unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide mounting for enclosures as indicated. 2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.06 LOAD CENTERS A. Description: Circuit breaker type load centers listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Bus Material: Copper. C. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic plug-in type. D. Enclosures: 1. Provide mounting for enclosures as indicated. 2. Provide circuit directory label on inside of door or individual circuit labels adjacent to circuit breakers. 2.07 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick -make, quick -break, over center toggle, trip -free, trip -indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity as indicated on drawings. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. a. Provide field -adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger. 5. Multi -Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1. C. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. D. Install panelboards plumb. 26 2416 - 3 PANELBOARDS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 E. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. F. Install all field -installed branch devices, components, and accessories. G. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. END OF SECTION 26 2416 - 4 PANELBOARDS Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 2701 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metering transformer cabinets. B. Meter bases. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: 208Y/120 volts, three phase, four -wire, 60 Hertz. B. Service Entrance: 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D: www.squared.com. B. As provided by serving Utility Company.. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door, conforming to utility company requirements, with provisions for locking and sealing. B. Other Components: As required by utility company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install service rack, weatherhead, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by utility company. B. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. END OF SECTION 262701 - 1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 2717 EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005). B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements. B. Sequencing: 1. Install rough -in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required. 2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 28 18 and in individual equipment sections. B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726. C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534. D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519. E. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537. 26 2717 - 1 EQUIPMENT WIRING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION 26 2717 - 2 EQUIPMENT WIRING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Wall plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0537 - Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005). C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. B. Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com 2.02 ALL WIRING DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: 1. Wiring Devices Installed Indoors: Color as indicated on drawings with stainless steel wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 2. Wiring Devices Installed outdoors: Gray with cast aluminum weatherproof cover wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 WALL SWITCHES A. All Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only, quiet operating, general -use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20; types as indicated on the drawings. B. Switch Type: Single pole, double pole, and 3-way. 26 2726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. All Receptacles: Heavy Duty, Self -grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498; types as indicated on the drawings. B. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5- 20R or NEMA 5-15R as indicated on the drawings; single, duplex, or double duplex as indicated on the drawings. C. GFI Receptacles: 1. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5- 20R. 2. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 2.05 WALL PLATES A. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Color as noted on drawings to match wiring device. B. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel. C. Weatherproof Covers for Wet or Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion -resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor. b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor. c. Receptacles: 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor or 6 inches (150 mm) above counter. d. Install telephone/data box 18 inches above finished floor. e. Install telephone box for side -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone 54 inches above finished floor. f. Install telephone box for forward -reach wall telphone to position top of telephone at 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push -in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw -actuated binding. E. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. F. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. G. Install wall switches with OFF position down. H. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. 26 2726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough.openings. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. END OF SECTION 26 2726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 2818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed safety switches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for.Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); .2008. B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non -Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Product Data: Not required where products to be used are as specified and/or scheduled. Otherwise, provide manufacturer's standard catalog or specification pages with specific products to be used clearly marked and identified as to use in the project. Catalog data without specific identifiers will be returned 'NOT REVIEWED'. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES A. Description: Quick -make, quick -break, enclosed safety switches complying with NEMA KS 1, type HD (heavy duty), and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. D. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches designed to accomodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. E. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor. 26 2818 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 F. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. G. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA KS 1 and NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. H. Provide handle lockable in OFF position. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. C. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. D. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. END OF SECTION 26 2818 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts. E. Fluorescent emergency power supply units. F. Lamps. G. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; Consolidated-2002. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. D. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. E. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. H. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. Catalog data without complete specific identifiers will be returned'NOT REVIEWED'. B. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. 26 5100 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all linear fluorescent ballasts. D. Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units. E. Provide ten year pro-rata warranty for batteries for self -powered exit signs. F. Provide three year full warranty for fluorescent emergency power supply units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Type : Recessed lensed fluorescent troffer. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included in the drawings. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. E. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. F. Fluorescent Luminaires: 1. Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where required. 2. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Occupancy Sensors: Provide programmed start ballasts. G. LED Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 8750. 2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included in the drawings. C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. 2.04 EXIT SIGNS A. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. 2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location. 2.05 BALLASTS A. All Ballasts: 1. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. B. Fluorescent Ballasts: 1. All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high frequency electronic ballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935. 2. Internal Disconnect Means: Provide switch or means to de -energize ballast for service. 26 5100 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 2.06 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS A. Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 2.07 LAMPS A. All Lamps: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. 2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards. B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire. 1. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 4,100 K unless otherwise indicated. C. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire. 1. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 4,100 K unless otherwise indicated. 2.08 ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). C. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. D. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. E. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. F. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under section 26 05 37 using flexible conduit. G. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions with luminaire. H. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: 1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. 2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so. 3. Secure lay -in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. 4. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J. Exit Signs: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. K. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 26.5100 - 3 INTERIOR LIGHTING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each product for damage and defects. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. C. Test self -powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION 26 5100 - 4 INTERIOR LIGHTING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires. B. Ballasts. C. Lamps. D. Poles and accessories. E. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles for installation in poles. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO LTS - Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 5th Edition, with 2011 Interim Revisions B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: Installation shall be warranted by contractor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. Provide manufacturers warranty for all items so warranted. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. C. Electrical Componnents: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. 26 5600 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. E. LED Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 8750. 2.02 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent Ballasts: Suitable for lamps specified. 2.03 LAMPS A. Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire. B. All Lamps: 1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire. C. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire. 1. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 4,100 K unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 POLES A. All Poles: 1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed. 2. Structural Design Criteria: a. Comply with AASHTO LTS. b. Wind Load: Include effective projected area (EPA) of luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed. 1) Design Wind Speed: 90 miles per hour ( kph), with gust factor of 1.3. 3. Material: Aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Shape: Round, reference schedule for exact type. 5. Finish: Match luminaire finish, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Mounting: Install on concrete foundation, height as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Poles: Provide ground lug, accessible from handhole or transformer base. 2.05 ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship) and NECA/IESNA 501 (exterior lighting). C. Pole -Mounted Luminaires: 1. Grounding: a. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, metal poles, and foundation reinforcement to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. b. Provide supplementary ground rod electrode as specified in Section 26 0526 at each pole bonded to grounding system as indicated. 2. Install separate service conductors, 12 AWG copper, from each luminaire down to handhole for connection to branch circuit conductors. 3. Install weather resistant GFI duplex receptacle with weatherproof cover as specified in Section 26 2726 in designated poles. D. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. Install lamps in each luminaire. 26 5600 - 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Corner Bakery Cafe Prototype 5.2 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each product for damage and defects. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to.verify proper operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION 26 5600 - 3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING %, ro9wimsBor Equipment & Furnishings Co. Project: D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter 393 Strander Blvd. Tukwilla, WA 98188 From: W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Jeremiah Schwigdt 9355 Northfield Blvd Denver, CO 80238 303-289-9378 7209600338 (Contact) To: Corner Bakery Seattle Vinay Panchal REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION t� is %W ak& q 06/09/2015 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT Q 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER Kolpak Item #100 NJ Equipment & Ftunishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 100 - WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER COMBO (1 EA REQ'D) Kolpak With Remote Refrigeration 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 1 Kolpak Item #101 wo�wwmalplr Equipment & F u nWfings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 101- WALK-IN FREEZER (1 EA REQ'D) Kolpak With Floor Ramp and Remote Refrigeration 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 2 Focus Foodservice FF1848G Item #102 —4- & � Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 102 - WIRE SHELVING (10 EA REQ'D) FocusFF1848G Shelf, Wire, 18"W x 48"L, green epoxy coated finish The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 102 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Focus 10 FF2424G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 24"L, green epoxy coated finish Focus 5 FF2436G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 36"L, green epoxy coated finish Focus 11 FF2448G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 48"L, green epoxy coated finish Focus 5 FF2442G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 42%, green epoxy coated finish Focus 32 FGN074G Post, 74"H, mobile, green epoxy coated with SaniGard'" Focus 8 FCASTS Caster, 5", swivel stem with brake, for universal shelving post (set of 4) D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 3 Focus FF1848G Item #102 _Cl1r__,_ 'I- i -I Item # - --- Job --- - - i FOCUS SHELVING Wire Shelving • R',edSm: The open wire design of these heavy gauge chrome or epoxy coated shelves minimizes dust accumulation and allows a free circulation of air, greater O visibility of stored items and greater light penetration. • Iffe n¢ci} w FOCUS SHELVING can change as quickly as your needs change. By using various sizes, hundreds of shelving configurations become possible. • 7(=e =me secum A.Sse Wr. Posts with the double groove`visual guide feature, have circular grooves at I" (25mm) intervals and are numbered at 2" (50mm) intervals. A tapered split sleeve (plastic) snaps together around each post.Tapered openings in the shelf corners slide over the tapered split sleeves to lock on the shelf. Shelf is assembled in minutes without the use of any special tools. • ZZ=V. Ribs: Run front to back, allowing you to slide items on and off shelves smoothly. • :�Ce�C¢¢�y�iC¢�C'c: Shelves can be adjusted at I " (25mm) intervals along the entire length of the post. • [Q =u=Y'a: FOCUS wire shelving is available in two finishes: chromate & epoxy coated. • /si d'Eus0=C¢0a VeeO: Bolt levelers compensate for uneven surfaces. • MwenSnu : Each shelf up to 48" in length is rated to support up to 800 lbs. of uniformly distributed weight. Shelves longer than 48" support 600 lbs. Focus Foodservice, LLC 300 Knightsbridge Parkway, Suite 500 Lincolnshire, IL 60069 www.focusfoodservice.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 4 Focus FOCUS SHELVING WIRE SHELVING Wire Shelves FF1848G Item #102 Job - - -- - - -- - Width Length Approx. Pkd.Wt. Item No. Item No. (in) (mm) (in) (mm) (Ibs.) (kg) Chromate Epoxy 12 305 36 914 7 3.1 FF 1236C FF 1236GN 12 305 48 1220 9 4.1 FF 1248C FF 1248GN 12 305 60 1524 13 5.8 FF 1260C FF 1260GN 14 355 24 610 6 2.7 FF 1424C FF 1424G 14 355 30 760 7 3.2 FF 1430C FF 1430G 14 355 36 910 8 3.6 FF 1436C FF 1436G 14 355 42 1060 9.5 4.3 FF 1442C FF 1442G 14 355 48 1220 10.5 4.7 FF 1448C FF 1448G 14 355 60 1525 14 6.3 FF 1460C FF 1460G 14 355 72 1825 17 7.7 FF 1472C FF 1472G 18 455 18 455 5.6 2.55 FF 1818CH - 18 455 24 610 7 3.2 FF 1824C FF 1824G 18 455 30 760 8 3.6 FF 1830C FF 1830G 18 455 36 910 9.5 4.3 FF 1836C FF 1836G �(P' 18 455 42 1060 1 1 5.0 FF 1842C FF 1842G • 18 455 48 1220 12 5.4 FF 1848C FF 1848G 8rh 18 18 455 455 54 60 1370 1525 14.5 17 6.6 7.7 FF 1854C FF 1860C FF 1854G FF 1860G 18 455 72 1825 20 9.1 FF 1872C FF 1872G 21 530 24 610 8 3.6 FF2124C FF2124G Split Sleeves P 21 530 30 760 9 4.1 FF2130C FF213OG 21 530 36 910 11 5.0 FF2136C FF2136G 21 530 42 1060 12 5.4 FF2142C FF2142G 21 530 48 1220 14 6.4 FF2148C FF2148G 21 530 54 1370 16 7.6 FF2154C FF2154G "S" Hooks 21 530 60 1525 18 8.2 FF2160C FF216OG 21 530 72 1825 24 10.9 FF2172C FF2172G Used to "add -on" shelving units with 24 610 24 610 9 4.1 FF2424C FF2424G only two posts required. 24 610 30 760 11 5.0 FF2430C FF2430G Item No. 93333 Chromate 24 610 36 910 13 5.9 FF2436C FF2436G Item No. 93333GN Green Epoxy 24 610 42 1060 15 6.8 FF2442C FF2442G 24 610 48 1220 16 7.3 FF2448C FF2448G 24 610 54 1370 18 8.6 FF2454C FF2454G 24 610 60 1525 21 9.5 FF2460C FF2460G 24 610 72 1825 26 11.8 FF2472C FF2472G 30 760 36 910 33.2 15.1 FF3036CH - 30 760 60 1525 53.4 24.3 FF3060CH FF306OGN Height Approx. Pkd. Wt. Item No. Item No. Posts (in.) (mm) (Ibs.) (kg) Chromate* Epoxy" 7 190 0.5 0.2 F0007C FG007G Posts are grooved at I" (25mm) increments 13 368 1 0.5 FG013C FG013G and numbered at 2" (50mm) 33 876 2 0.9 FG033C FG033G increments. Posts are double grooved every 54 1386 3 1.4 FG054C FG054G 8" (203mm) for easy identification. 63 1589 3.5 1.6 FG063C FG063G 74 1895 4 1.8 FG074C FG074G 86 2200 5 2.3 FG086C FG086G 'Note: for mobile post use the prefix "FGN" -FOCUS-Focus Foodservice, LLC 300 Knightsbridge: Parkway, Suite 500 i Lincolnshire IL..60069 1 Phone 800-968-3918 Fax 800-968-4129 www.focusfoddservici!.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 5 Focus FGN074G Item #102 _Cr VON_10 Item # R��UJ Job :O HDS-PLUSTM HIGH DENSITY STORAGE SYSTEM Features • Design: Maximize usable storage space. Over 35% increased storage capacity in same amount of space as stationary units. Eliminates excess traffic aisles.The open wire design of these heavy gauge chromate or green epoxy coated shelves minimizes dust accumulation and allow free circulation of air, greater visibility of stored items and greater light penetration. • Versatile: Choose a track length to fit your space. Choose from three widths of shelves (18", 21 ", or 24") to meet your requirements. Can be constructed to fit almost any area in almost any configuration. The overhead track system guides the mobile units and opens an easy access, clutter -free aisle between any two (or more) units, promoting cleanliness, accessibility and improved organization of stored goods. • Fast and Secure Assembly: Entire system assembles in minutes using only an Allen wrench. Our High Density Storage System features 5 easy -to -assemble components: Shelving, Posts, Stationary Unit Kits, Mobile Unit Kits and Track Sets. • Shehring: Pick your finish (Chromate or Green Epoxy) and your size (18", 21 " or 24" widths). Tapered openings in the shelf corners slide over the tapered split sleeves to lock on the shelf. On stationary shelving units, each shelf up to 48" in length is rated to support up to 800 lbs. of uniformly distributed weight. Shelves longer than 48" support 600 lbs. • Posts: Pick your finish (Chromate or Green Epoxy). 80" Post lengths are specifically designed for use in our High Density Storage System. Posts have circular grooves at I" (25mm) intervals and are numbered at 2" (50mm) intervals. Tapered plastic split sleeves snap together around each post. • Stationary Unit Kits: Use on both ends of the storage system or as a middle unit (for lengths 20' and over). Must have a minimum of 2 stationary units per system. Assembles quickly and easily to shelving posts; enhances stability and security of the system. Includes 4 triangular security feet, 4 self -leveling track guide blocks, and 4 locking track collars. • Mobile Unit Kilts: One set is needed for each mobile shelving unit. Assembles quickly and easily to shelving post. Self adjusting guide blocks accommodates uneven surfaces. Each kit includes 4 each 6" Polyurethane Casters, 2 Stainless Steel Caster Channels (pick your width: 18", 21 " or 24") and 4 self -leveling track guide blocks. • Track Sets: Available in lengths of 6 ft to 21 ft.**. Sections are connected together with easy -to -use track joiners allowing a large range of length combinations. • Easy To Order: Simple order process. All necessary parts are packaged into easy -to -order, ready -to -skip kits. Shelves and shelving posts sold separately. "NOTE: Track Sets 20' and over require an additional Stationary Unit Kit, shelves and shelving posts in the center of the track. For track sections over 21', call for quotation. Focus Foodservice, LLC • 300 Knightsbridge Parkway, Suite 500 • Lincolnshire, IL 60069 • www.focusfoodservice.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 6 Focus FGN074G Item #102 HDS-PLUSTM HIGH DENSITY STORAGE SYSTEM HDS-PlusT" Component Specifications: High Density Storage System uses high quality Focus Foodservice shelving and posts Specifications Guide Blocks are made from high density, precision machine grade polyethylene designed specifically to fit in Focus Foodservice Shelving Posts. System Components A = Stationary End Units B = Stationary Intermediate Unit (Optional) C =Track Set D = Mobile Units E = Open Aisle Track Sets consist of a pair of mirror -finish, T304 Stainless Steel Tubes, which precisely fit through guide blocks.Track sets also include track joiners, which securely connect tubes. .1 E 1. .1 E I- Overhead View Caster Channels are made from T304 Stainless Steel. 6" Polyurethane Stem Casters feature heavy duty stainless steel axle & durable hard rubber bumper. Wt. Cap per caster: 400 lbs. A A C C D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 7 Focus FGN074G 1 Item ##110022 1 V�LJV SHELVING • Shelf Sizes: Widths 18", 21 ", 24"; Lengths: 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 54", 60", 72" REQUIREMENTS • Shelf Finishes: Chromate and Green Epoxy - Warranty: I year on components, and chromate shelves/posts. 12 Years on green epoxy shelves/posts HDS-Plus" Components Item No Description Weight per piece (lbs.) (kg) FTSSU Stationary Kit (Consists Of) FTSFZ Triangular Security Feet, Zinc 4/Pkg 0.6 0.3 FTSGB Guide Blocks, Set Of 4 0.6 0.3 FTSLC Locking Collars, Set Of 4 1.7 0.8 FTSMUIS Mobile Unit Kit - 18" Wide Shelf (Consists Of) FTSC6 6" Polyurethane Casters with Bumper, Set Of 4 9.1 4.1 FTSGB Guide Blocks, Set Of 4 0.6 0.3 FTSU 18 18" Caster Channel, Set of 2 2.1 0.9 FTSMU21 Mobile Unit Kit - 21" Wide Shelf (Consists Of) FTSC6 6" Polyurethane Casters with Bumper, Set Of 4 9.1 4.1 FTSGB Guide Blocks, Set Of 4 0.6 0.3 FTSU21 2 I " Caster Channel, Set of 2 2.4 1.1 FFSMU24 Mobile Unit Kit - 24" Wide Shelf (Consists Of) FTSC6 6" Polyurethane Casters with Bumper, Set Of 4 9.1 4.1 FTSGB Guide Blocks, Set Of 4 0.6 0.3 FTSU24 24" Caster Channel, Set of 2 2.8 1.3 Track Sets: FTSTK6 Track set 6' 12.9 5.9 FTSTK7 Track set 7' 14.9 6.8 FTSTK8 Track Set 8' 16.9 7.7 FTSTK9 Track Set 9' 19.9 9.0 FTSTK 10 Track Set 10' 20.9 9.5 FTSTK I I Track Set 11' 23.9 10.8 FTSTK 12 Track Set 12' 25.9 11.7 FTSTK 13 Track Set 13' 27.9 12.6 FTSTK 14 Track Set 14' 30.9 14.0 FTSTK 15 Track Set 15' 31.8 14.4 FTSTK 16 Track Set 16' 34.9 15.8 FTSTK 17 Track Set 17' 36.8 16.7 FTSTK 18 Track Set 18' 38.8 17.6 FTSTK 19 Track Set 19' 41.9 19.0 FTSTK20 Track Set 20' 42.8 19.4 FTSTK21 Track Set 2 P 45.8 20.8 NOTE: All track sets include track sections and trockjoiners. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. T Page: 8� ----- Focus FGN074G HDS-PLUS" HIGH DENSITY STORAGE SYSTEM Job Item #102 Shelving Width (in) (mm) Length (in) (mm) Pack (Ibs.) Pkd. Wt. (kg) Item No. Chromate Item No. Epoxy 18 455 24 610 4 24.9 11.3 FF 1824C FF 1824G 18 455 30 760 4 29.8 13.5 FF 1830C FF 1830G 18 455 36 910 4 34.8 15,8 FF 1836C FF 1836G 18 455 42 1060 4 39.4 17.9 FF 1842C FF 1842G 18 455 48 1220 4 44.2 20.0 FF 1848C FF 1848G 18 455 54 1370 2 27.7 12.6 FF 1854C FF 1854G 18 455 60 1525 2 30.6 13.9 FF 1860C FF 1860G 18 455 72 1825 4 36.1 6.3 FF 1872C FF 1872G 21 530 24 610 4 29.0 13.2 FF2124C FF2124G 21 530 30 760 4 34.8 15.8 FF2130C FF213OG 21 530 36 910 4 40.7 18.5 FF2136C FF2136G 21 530 42 1060 4 46.2 21.0 FF2142C FF2142G 21 530 48 1220 4 52.4 23.8 FF2148C FF2148G 21 530 54 1370 2 30.1 13.7 FF2154C FF2154G 21 530 60 1525 2 33.2 15.1 FF2160C FF216OG 21 530 72 1825 2 39.2 17.8 FF2172C FF2172G 24 610 24 610 4 33.0 15.0 FF2424C FF2424G 24 610 30 760 4 39.4 17.9 FF2430C FF2430G 24 610 36 910 4 46.4 21.0 FF2436C FF2436G 24 610 42 1060 4 52.4 23.8 FF2442C FF2442G 24 610 48 1220 4 59.2 26.9 FF2448C FF2448G 24 610 54 1370 2 34.1 155 FF2454C FF2454G 24 610 60 1525 2 37.8 17.1 FF2460C FF2460G 24 610 72 1825 2 47.5 21.5 FF2472C FF2472G Posts Description Height (in) (mm) Pack Pkd.Wt. (Ibs.) (kg) Item No. Chromate Item No. Epoxy Posts for Stationary Unit 80 2032 4 5 2.3 FG080CH FG080GN Posts for Mobile Unit 74 1880 NOTE Shelves and Shelving posts sold separately. 4 4.7 2.2 FGN074C FGN074G Focus Foodser-vice, LLC 300 Knightsbridge Parkway, Suite 500 • Lincolnshire, IL 60069 Phone 800-968-3918 Fax 800-968-4129 • www.focusfoodservice.com rev. 0311 ��D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 9 Focus Foodservice FF2442G Item #102.1 Equipment & Fumishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 102.1- WIRE SHELVING (10 EA REQ'D) Focus FF2442G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 42"L, green epoxy coated finish The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 102 ACCESSORIES 10/08/2015 Mfr Qty Model Spec Focus 15 FF2436G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 36"L, green epoxy coated finish Focus 10 FF2424G Shelf, Wire, 24"W x 24"L, green epoxy coated finish Focus 28 FGN074G Post, 74"H, mobile, green epoxy coated with SaniGard`"' Focus 7 FSCASTS Stem/Swivel Caster Set, 5" (12.7 cm) diameter, (2 swivel; 2 swivel/brakes), with bumpers, 250 lb load rating per caster, heavy duty polyurethane non -marking tread, includes donut bumper, NSF (set of 4) D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 10 Focus i iCr�V11_IC. IZJ��VJ FSCAST5 FSCAST5 Item # __..- Job 5" HEAVY-DUTY POLYURETHANE STEM CASTERS [FSCAST5] Item #102.1 • Design: 5" 02.7 cm) diameter, 1 1/4" (3.2 cm) face, heavy-duty polyurethane non -marking casters turn your shelving unit into a mobile solution. Each caster includes a 5" (12.7 cm) revolving donut bumper at no additional charge. • Load Rating: Each caster has a load rating of 250 lbs. (113 kg). • Special Post Requirements: When ordering these casters specify posts without feet (i.e. FGN033C). Item # Description Pack FSCAST5' Set of 4 each 5" (12.7 cm) stem casters (2 swivel & 2 swivel/brake) w/bumpers 4 sets FSCAST56 5" (12.7 cm) swivel stem caster with brake & bumper 4 FSCAST5C 5" (12.7 cm) swivel stem caster & bumper 4 Shipped in full color trilingual merchandising carton. l ir% -- Focus Foodservice • 300 Knightsbridge Parkway, Suite 500 • Lincolnshire, IL 60069 Phone 800-968-3918 • Fax 800-968-4129 • www.focusfoodservice.com ... rev.1212 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 11 Barringer Marketing AL-1820B Item #103 Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 103 - BUN PAN RACK (6 EA REQ'D) BAR AL-1820B All Welded 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 12 Focus Foodservice FMSEC24484GN Item #104 wc�'�%Vimalr Equipment & Furnishings Co. ------------ Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 104 - SECURITY ENCLOSURE KIT (1 EA REQ'D) Focus FMSEC24484GN Security Cage Complete Mobile Kit, 24" x 48" x 63"H, includes: 4 shelves, (2) front panels, (2) side panels, (2) back panels and assembly hardware, 4 each 63" posts, (4) 5" casters (2 swivel & 2 swivel with brakes) with bumpers, green epoxy finish, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 104 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 13 Focus fZ�✓`.�VJ FMSEC24484GN Item #104 Item # Job — _-- SECURITY CAGES NSF Features: • Secuuc Cr. Provides protection for valuable products from loss to minimize shrinkage. • CUIE ITIOW +- 72oducCs: Heavy-duty panels have open construction permitting visibility of entire contents at all times. • 7km5sInes: Chromate finish or green epoxy coated. • 91e= z!7uV acted ZzEacC!an: Available in 18" and 24" widths and 36", 48", and 60" lengths to accommodate a wide range of size options. • lase cl� Minimal parts for fast and i easy assembly. • Inc =Czec9 Mat-= MiCc alcrg: Saves freight costs because each unit is shipped knocked down.All parts are packed in one secure carton. Focus Foodservice, LLC • 300 Knightsbridge Parkway, Suite 500 • Lincolnshire, IL 60069 • www.focusfoodservice.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 14 Focus FMSEC24484GN Item #104 SECURITY CAGES '°b Cage only Size IN (CM) Chromate Item # Green Epoxy Coated Item # 18 x 36 x 63 h (45.7 x 91.4 x 160.0) FSEC 183663 - 18 x 48 x 63 h (45.7 x 122.0 x 160.0) FSEC 184863 - 18 x 60 x 63 h (45.7 x 152.4 x 160.0) FSEC 186063 - 24 x 36 x 63 h (61.0 x 91.4 x 160.0) FSEC243663 FSEC243663GN 24 x 48 x 63 h (61.0 x 122.0 x 160.0) FSEC244863 FSEC244863GN 24 x 60 x 63 h (61.0 x 152.4 x 160.0) FSEC246063 FSEC246063GN Stationary Complete Cage* Size IN (CM) 2 Shelf Item # 3 Shelf Item # 4 Shelf Item # Finish 18 x 36 x 63 h (45.7 x 91.4 x 160.0) FSSEC 1836 FSSEC 18363 FSSEC 18364 Chromate 18 x 48 x 63 h (45.7 x 122.0 x 160.0) FSSEC 1848 FSSEC 18483 FSSEC 18484 Chromate 18 x 60 x 63 h (45.7 x 152.4 x 160.0) FSSEC 1860 FSSEC 18603 FSSEC 18604 Chromate 24 x 36 x 63 h (61.0 x 91.4 x 160.0) FSSEC2436 FSSEC24363 FSSEC24364 Chromate 24 x 48 x 63 h (61.0 x 122.0 x 160.0) FSSEC2448 FSSEC24483 FSSEC24484 Chromate 24 x 60 x 63 h (61.0 x 152.4 x 160.0) FSSEC2460 FSSEC24603 FSSEC24604 Chromate 24 x 36 x 63 h (61.0 x 91.4 x 160.0) FSSEC2436GN FSSEC24363GN FSSEC24364GN Green Epoxy Coated 24 x 48 x 63 h (61.0 x 122.0 x 160.0) FSSEC2448GN FSSEC24483GN FSSEC24484GN Green Epoxy Coated 24 x 60 x 63 h (61.0 x 152.4 x 160.0) FSSEC2460GN FSSEC24603GN FSSEC24604GN Green Epoxy Coated ' Stationary complete cage includes cage, shelves, and 4 each 74" posts Mobile Complete Cage** Size IN (CM) 2 Shelf Item # 3 Shelf Item # 4 Shelf Item # Finish 18 x 36 x 63 h (45.7 x 91.4 x 160.0) FMSEC 1836 FMSEC 18363 FMSEC 18364 Chromate 18 x 48 x 63 h (45.7 x 122.0 x 160.0) FMSEC 1848 FMSEC 18483 FMSEC 18484 Chromate 18 x 60 x 63 h (45.7 x 152.4 x 160.0) FMSEC 1860 FMSEC 18603 FMSEC 18604 Chromate 24 x 36 x 63 h (61.0 x 91.4 x 160.0) FMSEC2436 FMSEC24363 FMSEC24364 Chromate 24 x 48 x 63 h (61.0 x 122.0 x 160.0) FMSEC2448 FMSEC24483 FMSEC24484 Chromate 24 x 60 x 63 h (61.0 x 152.4 x 160.0) FMSEC2460 FMSEC24603 FMSEC24604 Chromate 24 x 36 x 63 h (61.0 x 91.4 x 160.0) FMSEC2436GN FMSEC24363GN FMSEC24364GN Green Epoxy Coated 24 x 48 x 63 h (61.0 x 122.0 x 160.0) FMSEC2448GN FMSEC24483GN FMSEC24484GN Green Epoxy Coated 24 x 60 x 63 h (61.0 x 152.4 x 160.0) FMSEC2460GN FMSEC24603GN FMSEC24604GN Green Epoxy Coated k' Mobile complete cage includes cage, shelves, 4 each 63" mobile posts, and 4 each casters (2 swivel, 2 swivel with brakes) & bumpers SHELVES AND POSTS SOLD SEPARATELY. IT IS RECOMMENDEDTHAT A MINIMUM OF 3 SHELVES BE USED WITH EACH CAGE. Each security cage contains two front panels, two side panels, two back panels, back panel assembly hardware, and top loop assembly hardware. Note: To create mobile cages, utilize 63" open bottom posts (Item No. FGN063C or FGN063G). For stationary applications, utilize 74" posts with leveling feet (Item No. FG074C or FG074G). }- Focus Foodservice, LLC 300 Knightsbridge Parkway, Suite 500 • Lincolnshire, IL 60069 Phone 800-968-3918 Fax 800-968-4129 • www.focusfoodservice.com mwin mIN M rev. 031 1 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 1S Rolland TB3025D1 Item #200 Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet - 10/08/2015 ITEM# 200 - OFFICE SAFE (1 EA REQ'D) Rolland T1330251)1 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 16 Custom Item #200.1 %q0,00w3malpr Equipment 8s F umishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 200.1- SAFE INSTALLATION (1 EA REQ'D) Custom 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 17 John Boos EMS-2016-6-X Item #201 Equipment & Fumishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 201- MOP SINK (1 EA REQ'D) John Boos EMS-2016-6-X Mop Sink, floor mounted, 24-5/8" L-R, 19-1/8" F-B, 6"H water level, 2" heavy duty free flow drain, stainless steel construction (FLYER) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 201 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 18 John Boos EMS-2016-6-X Item #201 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 19 By Owner Item #201A Equipment & F. mWiinm Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 201A - MOP/BROOM WALL HANGER (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER <Incomplete> <by Owner> D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 20 By Owner Item #20113 %Ar, wmsjr Equipment & Furnishings Co. -------------- Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 201B - MOP BUCKET W/WRINGERS (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER <Incomplete> <by Owner> D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 21 John Boos PBF-SS-6-X Item #201C N��f' Equipment & F umWiino Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 201C - SERVICE FAUCET (1 EA REQ'D) John Boos PBF-SS-6-X Service Sink Faucet, vacuum breaker nozzle with 3-4" garden hose thread, pail hook, top support arm, 1/2" NPT female flanged, with adjustable inlet with screwdriver stop (FLYER) D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 22 Custom CG Item #202 %4,00owmBler Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. ITEM# 202 - CORNER GUARD (6 EA REQ'D) Custom CG Verify Quantity Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 23 Custom ECP Item #202.1 W 0 Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 202.1- END CAP (6 EA REQ'D) Custom ECP 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 24 Custom FLASHING Item #203 Woo 3MUSIor Equipment & Ftunishinga Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 203 - S/S WALL FLASHING - MOP SINK (11 EA REQ'D) Custom FLASHING Verify Size Per Ft. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 25 Olympic J1842K Item #205 vl.%o��� Equipment & Furnishings co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 205 - WIRE SHELVING (1 EA REQ'D) Olympic J1842K Shelf, wire, 18" x 42" , green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 ACCESSORIES Mfr Olympic Qty Model Spec 2 J1WD18K Wall Bracket, single, 18", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 26 Olympic J1842K Item #205 _AV� R "Wririlam"I&. STORAGE COMPANY Reliable space ... economically. OLYMPIC WIRE SHELVING GREEN EPDXY • Unique Design: The open wire design of these carbon -steel shelves minimizes dust accumulation and allows a free circulation of air, greater visibility of stored items and greater light penetration. • Versatile Construction: Olympic wire shelving can change as quickly as your needs change. • Fast, Secure Assembly: Posts have circular grooves at 1" (25mm) intervals. A tapered split sleeve snaps together around each post. Tapered openings in the shelf corners slide over the tapered split sleeves providing a positive lock. Shelf is assembled in minutes without the use of any special tools. • Shelf Wires: Run front to back, allowing you to slide items on and off shelves smoothly. • Shelf Accessibility: Shelves can be loaded/unloaded easily from all sides. This open construction allows use of maximum storage space of cube. • Adjustability: Shelves can be adjusted at 1" (25mm) intervals along the entire length of the post. • Finish: Green epoxy finish with chromate substrate. • Posts: Bolt levelers compensate for surface irregularities on stationary posts. Posts also available for mobile application. • Warranty: Olympic green epoxy coated shelves and posts carry a 7 year limited warranty against rust and corrosion. OLWIV RA I " , Olympic Storage Company Reliable vase... scanmical y D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 27 a n11 M 0 Olympic J1842K Item #205 X O CL W C CD 0C OLYMPIC WIRE SHELVING GREEN EPDXY STORAGE COMPANY Reliable space ... economically. WIRE SHELVES Width/Length (in.) (mm) Approx. Weight Per Shelf (lbs.) (kg) Pack Quantity Green Epoxy 14 x 30 355 x 760 7 3.2 4 J1430K 14 x 36 355 x 914 8 3.6 4 J1436K 14 x 42 355 x 1066 9.5 4.3 4 J1442K 14 x 48 355 x 1219 10.5 4.7 4 J1448K 14 x 60 355 x 1524 14 6.3 2 J1460K 14 x 72 355 x 1829 17 7.7 2 J1472K 18 x 24 457 x 610 7 3.2 4 J1824K 18 x 30 457 x 760 8 3.6 4 J1830K 18 x 36 457 x 914 9.5 4.3 4 J1836K 18 x 42 457 x 1066 11 5 4 J1842K 18 x 48 457 x 1219 12 5.4 4 J1848K 18 x 54 457 x 1370 14.5 6.6 2 J 1854K 18 x 60 457 x 1524 17 7.7 2 J1860K 18 x 72 457 x 1829 20 9.1 2 J1872K 21 x 24 530 x 610 8 3.6 4 J2124K 21 x 30 530 x 760- 9 4.1 4 J2130K 21 x 36 530 x 914 11 5 4 J2136K 21 x 42 530 x 1066 12 5.4 4 J2142K 21 x 48 530 x 1219 14 6.4 4 J2148K 21 x 54 530 x 1370 16 7.3 2 J2154K 21 x 60 530 x 1524 18 8.2 2 J2160K 21 x 72 530 x1829 24 10.9 2 J2172K 24 x 24 610 x 610 9 4.1 4 J2424K 24 x 30 610 x 760 11 5.0 4 J2430K 24 x 36 610 x 914 13 5.9 4 J2436K 24 x 42 610 x 1066 15 6.8 4 J2442K 24 x 48 610 x 1219 16 7.3 4 J2448K 24 x 54 610 x 1370 19 8.6 2 J2454K 24 x 60 610 x 1524 21 9.5 2 J2460K 24 x 72 610 x 1829 26 11.8 2 J2472K Load Capacity: Up to 48" (1220mm) Length = 800 lbs. (363kg), evenly distributed. 54" - 72" (1829mm) Length = 600 lbs. (272kg), evenly distril .. Split Sleeves POSTS Approx. Pack Height* Cat. No. Height- Cat. No. Weight Per Post Quantity Stationary Post Stationary Past Mobile Post Mobile Post Posts are grooved (lbs.) (kg) (in.) (mm) Green Epoxy (in.) (mm) Green Epoxy at 1 �� (25mm) increments and numbered at 2" (50mm) increments. Posts are double- grooved every 8" (203mm) for easy 2 0.9 8 34'/2 875 J33K 34 3/4 857 J33UK 3 1.4 8 54 s/15 1385 J54K 5313/16 1366 J54UK 3'/2 1.6 8 62 9/15 1590 J63K 61 13/16 1570 J63UK 4 1.8 8 75 5/e 1895 J74K 73 7/e 1873 J74UK 5 2.3 8 86 5/8 2200 J86K 85 7A 2181 J86UK "Height includes leveling bolt and cap. **Mobile posts come without leveling bolt assembly and accomodate stem casters. identification. Height is for post only. OLY-001 E - Epoxy Wire Shelving Rev. 3/10 _ `- Information and specifications are subject to change ST017AL COMPANY without notice. Please confirm at time of order. Reflobte span ... ecoaundcalfy. Copyright ©2010 Olympic Storage Company D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 28 Olympic JlWD18K Item #t205 �A!11111` 'M ArM AM�AW� uAT1v11""`JF& STORAGE COMPANY Reliable space... economically. WIRE SHELVING ACCESSORIES NSF Direct Wall Mounts Each consists of one shelf support and mounting plate. Use single support at shelf ends; double support for adjoining shelves. (Single — Two required per shelf.) SINGLE DOUBLE Shelf Width Approx. Pkd. Wt. Model No. Model No. Approx. Pkd. Wt. Model No. Model No. (in.) (mm) (lbs.) (kg) Chrome Green Epoxy (tbs.) (kg) Chmme Green Epoxy 14 355 1.5 0.7 J1WD14C J1WD14K 3 1.4 J2WD14C J2WD14K 18 457 2 0.9 JlWD18C J1WD18K 4 1.8 J2WD18C J2WD18K 24 610 3 1.4 J1WD24C J1WD24K 4.5 2.0 J2WD24C J2WD24K Stem Casters — Resilient Rubber (Order By Each) Use with posts to create a mobile shelving unit to meet your special needs. Each caster is constructed of resilient rubber wheels and plated components. Load rating is 200 lbs. (90kg) per caster. Sold by the piece. If-h, Wheel Diameter Face Load Rating Appmx Pkd. Wt. V (in.) (mm) (in.) (mm) (tbs.) (kg) Type Wheel Tread (lbs.) (kg) Model No. 5 127 11/4 32 200 90 Stem/Swivel Resilient 21/2 1.1 J5 %J5 J5B 5 127 1114 32 200 90 Stem/Brake Resilient 25/e 1.2 J513 Stem Caster Kit — High Modulus Rubber (One Kit = Four Casters) Kit consists of four swivel casters with brakes. Each caster is constructed of durable, non -marking high modulus rubber. Load rating is 300 lbs. (136kg) per caster. Wheel Diameter Face Load Rating Approx Pkd. Wt. (in.) (mm) (in.) (mm) (Tbs.) (kg) Type Wheel Tread (lbs.) (kg) Model No. X4 5 127 1'/4 32 300 136 Stem/Brake Flat High Modulus Rubber 9 4.1 J5FBA-4 Stackable Shelf Ledges 4" (100mm) High. Shelf Width Approx. Pkd. Wt. Model No. (in.) (mm) (tbs.) (kg) Chrome 14 355 0.83 0.36 JL14-4C 18 457 1.5 0.68 JL18-4C 24 610 2 0.9 JL244C 30 760 2.25 1.03 JL30-4C 36 914 2.75 1.25 JL36-4C 48 1219 3.75 1.68 JL48-4C 60 1524 4 1.81 JL60-4C 72 1828 5 2.25 JL72-4C NOTE: Actual ledge length is approximately 1" (25mm) shorter than nominal shelf length/width Shelf Dividers for Shelves Keep shelf contents orderly with these 8" (203mm) high, pressure -fit dividers. Shelf Width Approx. Pkd. Wt. Model No. (in.) (mm) (tbs.) (Kg) Chrome 18 457 2.25 1 JDD18C 24 610 2.75 1.3 JDD24C ��� ,+�arx• " Replacement Plastic "S" Hook Foot Plate Split Sleeves Two are required Use to bolt units to the One bag required for each storage level. floor, or when a broader, per shelf; 4 pairs per bag.F4 Model No. J9995Z more stable foot is Model No. J9985 desired. Zinc Finish. *'.• Model No. J9993Z Information and specifications are subject to change /ILT,v,��—♦ — OVI without notice. Please confirm at time of order. STORAGE COMPANY Copyright© 2011 Olympic Storage Company Reliable space ... economically. OLY-005E • Rev. 7/11 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 29 Custom FLASHING Item #206 Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 206 - S/S WALL FLASHING - DISHROOM (212 EA REQ-D) Custom FLASHING Verify Size D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 30 SPG International Item #207 Equipment & Ft mWiino Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 207 - SINK, (3) THREE COMPARTMENT (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Three compartment sink 106" x 30" constructeed of 16 gauge fully welded stainless steel with 10 backsplash. Includes S/S covers w/storage bracket, lever brackets and overflows. Additional details per spec sheet. Right or left side splashes as needed. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & furnishings Co. Page: 31 Fisher 22209 Item #207.1 Equipment & Furnishings CO. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 207.1- LEVER WASTE (3 EA REQ'D) Fisher 22209 10/08/2015 DrainKing Waste Valve, with flat strainer, 12 GPM drain rate, dual teflon seals, stainless steel ball, cast red brass body The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 207.1 C WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE C WASTE INDIRECT DIRECT SIZE SIZE 1-1/2^ D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 32 Fisher 22209 Item #207.1 APPLICATION: I PRODUCT NAME: DrainKing WASTE VALVE JOB NAME: SPECIAL CONFIGURATION ❑ CHECK BASE MODEL AND OPTIONS QUANTITY: ITEM NO. MODEL: ❑ 22209 WITH FLAT STRAINER 4" [101.6mm] ROUGH -IN: 2" NPT MALE 1-1/2" NPT FEMALE 11-5/8" — [296.Omm] 03-1/2" [88.9mm] o_ ANSI/A112.18.1 M �15 OPTIONS OR MODIFICATIONS: ❑ OTHER FEATURES: • DUAL TEFLON SEALS • STAINLESS STEEL BALL " CAST RED BRASS BODY " EXTRA STURDY STAINLESS STEEL CLAMPING RING " "CLEAR THROUGH" OPENING - NO NEED TO DISASSEMBLE IF SNAKING IS REQUIRED • INDUSTRY STANDARD "SEALING' ANGLE - FITS FLUSH TO STANDARD STAINLESS STEEL SINKS " STAINLESS STEEL FLAT STRAINER • 1/4 TURN FULLY OPENS AND CLOSES VALVE DRAIN RATE: " 12 GPM SHIPPING WEIGHT /SHER FISHER MANUFACTURING COMPANY TOLL FREE: 800-421-6162 - FAX: 800-832-8238 information@fisher-mfg.com - www.fisher-mfg.com ru y D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 33 Fisher 13269 Item #208 wo���IMQS03r Equipment & Fumishings CO. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 208 - WALL / SPLASH MOUNT FAUCET (2 EA REQ'D) Fisher 13269 Faucet, backsplash mount, 8" c/c, 12" long swing spout, 1/2" inlets The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 208 C WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1/2" 1/2" C 10/08/2015 WASTE INDIRECT SIZE DIRECT SIZE D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 34 Fisher 13269 Item #208 APPLICATION: I PRODUCT NAME: 8" C/C BACKSPLASH FAUCET JOB NAME: SPECIAL CONFIGURATION ❑ CHECK BASE MODEL AND OPTIONS QUANTITY: ITEM NO. MODEL: ❑ 13234 W/ 6" SWING SPOUT 12" ❑ 13242 W/ 8" SWING SPOUT [305mm] ❑ 13250 W/ 10" SWING SPOUT ❑ 13269 W/ 12" SWING SPOUT r r� „B„ ❑ 13277 W/ 14" SWING SPOUT ❑ 13218 W/ 16" SWING SPOUT �= OPTIONS OR MODIFICATIONS: ❑ SUPPLY LINES (24" OR 36") CIRCLE LENGTH ❑ DJ SUB-ASSY (7-1/4" OR 13") CIRCLE LENGTH C ❑ ELBOWS 8„ ❑ VANDAL RESISTANT KIT [204mm] ❑ HANDLES (CROSS OR WRIST) CIRCLE STYLE ❑ OTHER MODEL DIM "A" DIM "B" DIM "C" 13234 2-1/4" [57mm] 5-7/8" [149mm] 6" [152mm] 13242 2-1 /2" [64mm] 6-3/8" [162mm] 8" [204mm] 13250 3-1/8" [79mm] 6-7/8" [175mm] 10" [254mm] 13269 3-3/4" [95mm] 7-3/8" [187mm] 12" [305mm] 13277 4-3/8" [111 mm] 8-1/4" [210mm] 14" [356mm] 13218 5" [127mm] 8-7/8" [225mm] 16" [406mm] ROUGH -IN: 4-1/4" (MA [108mm] 1-3/8" r -� [35mm] 1 /2" N PT 07/8" MALE [22mm] 8" [204mm] it $[3 ANSI/A112.18.1 M 2-1/4" [57mm] 112" SLIP JOINT FEATURES CONTROL VALVE * 8" C/C BACKSPLASH MOUNT * SWIVELLING SEAT DISKS * HOT SIDE STEM - RIGHT HAND * COLD SIDE STEM - LEFT HAND * STAINLESS STEEL SEATS * STAINLESS STEEL SEAT SCREWS * STAINLESS STEEL HANDLE SCREWS * 1/2" SLIP JOINT SYSTEM LIMITS * TEMP: 40*F MIN. TO 140*F MAX. * PRESSURE: 200 PSI MAX. STATIC * 2.20 GPM AT 80 PSI SHIPPING WEIGHT * 5.0 LBS /SHER FISHER MANUFACTURING COMPANY TOLL FREE: 800-421-6162 - FAX: 800-832-8238 information@fisher-mfg.com - www.fisher-mfg.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 35 John Boos PRW24-X Item #209 N)�'Iro:o Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 209 - POT RACK (1 EA REQ'D) John Boos PRW24-X Pot Rack, wall mount, double bar, 96" L, 3/16" x 2" stainless steel flat bar, includes (16) stainless steel double hooks, NSF (FLYER) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 209 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 36 John Boos PRW24-X Item #209 I.Rohn M.- B000c Shm IN7 "PRW1" & "PRW2" Stainless Steel POT RACKS Model PRW1 Single Bar Rack Wall Mount Model PRW2 Double Bar Rack Wall Mount FEATURES: " Pot Racks are fabricated from 2"x3/16" Stainless Steel flat bar 16 gauge, type 300 stainless steel with # 3 polish, satin finish • All Pot Racks feature Welded -Set -Up * Pot Hooks are Removable and Stainless Steel " All models are approved by the National Sanitation Foundation CONSTRUCTION: Stainless Steel Pot Racks are TIG welded Exposed welds are polished to match adjacent surfaces Model PRW1 Single - Bar Rack Wall Mount MODEL LENGTH HOOKS QTY PRW11A 36" 3 PRW11 48" 4 PRW12 60" 5 PRW13 72" 6 PRW13A 84" 7 PRW14 96" 8 PRW14A 108" 9 PRW15 120" 10 Model PRW2 Double - Bar Rack Wall Mount MODEL LENGTH HOOKS QTY PRW21 36" 6 PRW21 48" 8 PRW22 60" 10 PRW23 72" 12 PRW23A 84" 14 PRW24 96" 16 PRW24A 108" 18 PRW25 120" 20 OPTIONAL MATERIAL: ACCESSORIES Frame: 2" x 3/16" Flat Bar, 16 gauge type 300 stainless steel # 3 polish, satin finish MODEL IQ Hooks: Stainless Steel lExtra Hooks John Boos & Co 315 South First Street - Effingham, IL 62401 Phone: 217-347-7701 - Fax: 217-347-7705 Email: sales@johnboos.com - Web -site: www. johnboos.com M-5 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 37 John Boos PRW24-X Item #209 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS 2" T—' 1 �_1 rd7/16" PRW1 12 —� w i 12"-- 2"x3/16" j 12" 16" S/S Bar i PRW2 Shipped Welded set -Up Units 6 ft. and longer are furnished with extra support bracket All dimensions are typical. Tolerance +/- .500". Model PRW1 Single - Bar Rack Wall Mount MODEL LENGTH HOOKS WT PRW11A 36" 3 9 PRW11 48" 4 11 PRW12 60" 5 14 PRW13 72" 6 17 PRW13A 84" 20 PRW14 96" 8 22 PRW14A 108" 25 PRW15 120" 10 28 Model PRW2 Double - Bar Rack Wall Mount MODEL LENGTH HOOKS WT PRW21A 36" 6 20 PRW21 48" 8 22 PRW22 60" 10 29 PRW23 72" 12 35 PRW23A 1 84" 14 42 PRW24 96" 16 48 PRW24A 108" 18 54 PRW25 120" 20 60 John John Boos & Co _ BOOS' 315 South First - Effingham, IL 62401 Phone: 217-347-7701 - Fax: 217-347-7705 sine 18S7 Email: sales@johnboos.com - Web -site: www.johnboos.com —� March 2009 John Boos is constantly engaged in a program of improving products and therefore reserves the right to change specification without prior notice M-6 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 38 Focus Foodservice FWMG1836GN Item #210 o Equipment & FurnWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 210 - SHELVING, WALL -MOUNTED (2 EA REQ'D) Focus FWMG1836GN EZ-Wall'"" Wire Grid, wall mount, 36"W x 18"D, green epoxy finish The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 210 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Focus 2 FWMB6SS EZ-Wall'" Mouting Hooks, for wire grid, stainless steel (package of 6) D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 39 Focus COMPONENTS & ACCESSORIES EZ-Wall" Organization & Storage System Starter Components and Suggested Configurations OHorizontal Mounting Bracket Chromate Item# Green Epoxy hem# Dimensions (I.) Dimensions lcm) FWMBKT12CH FWMBKT12GN 12"xl"x 3" 30.5 x 2.5 x 7.6 cm FWMBKY18CH FWMBKT18GN 18"x1"X 3' 45.7 x 2.5 x 7.6 cm FWMBKT36CH FWMBKT36GN 36"xI"x 3" 91.4 x 2.5 x 7.6 cm FWMBKT48CH FWMBKT48GN 48"xt"x 3' 122.0 x 2,5 x 7.6 cm FWMBKT60CH FWMBKT60GN 60"z1"x 3" 152.4 x 2.5 x 7.6 cm OVertical Bracket Chromate Item# Green Epoxy Item# Dimensions (in) Dimensions (cm) FWMVBI7CH FWMVB17GN 16"x2 iv32"X 1314" 40.6 x 5.9 X 4.5 cm FWMVB31CH FWMVB31GN 31"x 211/32"x1 3/4" 79.3 x 5.9 x 4.5 cm FWMBKT41CH FWMBKT41GN 441ii'x 211132"x 13/4" 113 x 5.9 x 4.5 cm O Shelf Mounts [single] Chromate Item# Green Epoxy Item# Dim t lint Dim ns (cml FWMSB14CH FWMSB14GN 14"eX 6'X 2" 35.8 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm FWMSB18CH FWMSBIBGN 18"X6"X 2" 45.7 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm FWMSB2ICH FWMSB2IGN 21"X6"X 2" 53.0 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm FWMSB24CH FWMSB24GN 24"X 6'X 2' 61.0 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm Shelf Mounts [double] Chromate Item# Green Epoxy Item # Dimensions (in) Dimensions (cm) FWMD814CH FWMSB14GN 14"X6"X 2" 35.8 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm FWMDB18CH FWMSB18GN 18"X6'X 2' 45.7 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm FWMDB21CH FWMSB21GN 21"X6"X2' - 53.0 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm FWMDB24CH FWMSB24GN 24"X6"X2' 61.0 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm 4 Wire Grid with optional wall or horizontal bracket mountin com onets Chn,mate Item. Green Ep..y Item # Dimensions (in) Dim,,I..s (cm) ■■=rr■■■r■■■ rr■r■ ■■:I�ri stainless steel Item, Description Dimensions (in) DI -tons (cm) FWM86SS 6hooks 2"x 2'x 1" 5.1 x5.1 x2.5 cm lot it, grids FWMAF1111824CHS1 Small vertical brackets 4.5"X 3.5'X 1.65" 11.5.8.9 x 4.2 cm to attach wire grid to horizontal bracket I `1 `f aL- Customer Service at 800.968.3918 I Fax 800.968.4129 I online at orders@focusfoodservice.com For additional information and components go to: www.focusfoodservice.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter FWMG1836GN Item#210 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS I EZ-Wall" Organization & Storage System • • • Starter Components and Suggested Configurations Read All InstruCtionS & Tips Before Assembly. \J I. I I Horizontal Mounting Bracket OVertical Bracket O Shelf Mount O Wire Grid Most components available in Chromate and Green Epoxy depending on intended use. 'Hardware to mount brackets to wall is NOT included. "Shelf brackets available to accommadate various shelf depths. Length of shelf is determined by wail mounted horizontal bracket or distance between shelf brackets. 1O Horizontal Mounting Bracket Horizontal bracket that mounts to wall. Create a workspace from 12" to 60". Each bracket includes one connecting screw Mid -- for use with multiple horizontal modules to fit your environment. *Hardware to mount brackets to wall is NOT Included. OVertical Brackets These vertical brackets that attach to the horizontal mounting bracket and include two set screws to secure them to the horizontal mounting brackets to reduce side-to-side"swing". Holes in brackets allow for additional screws to be used for greater safety and security. Brackets are available in 3 lengths and 2 finishes. *Hardware to mount brackets to wall In NOT Included. OShelf Mounts Mount into the slots in the vertical supports. Used with single shelf configurations. Double shelf mounts are available for side -by -side multiple shelf units. ezwalllnstrl 113 W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. OWire Grids Can easily be attached to vertical brackets without hardware. " Additional components to mount grid to horizontal bracket or directly to wall are available. 'Hardware to mount to wall in NOT included. See back page of document. Page: 40 Focus FWMG1836GN Item #210 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS EZ-Wall'" Organization & Storage System Starter Components and Suggested Configurations Getting Started HELPFUL TIP: Each horizontal mounting bracket includes one screw for building longer units (fig. 1). When using multiple horizontal brackets in one installation, we recommend attachinq all brackets together with furnished screws prior to mounting them to the wall. This way you only need to level the bracket(s) once and you not need struggle to attach them together while up on a ladder. Step 9 - Horizontal mounting bracket: Attach the horizontal bracket to the wall using the appropriate hardware. IMPORTANT: Use a leveling device to ensure that the bracket is installed level on the wall (fig.2).'Hardware to mount brackets to wall in NOT included. Step 2 - Vertical brackets: Hang vertical brackets on horizontal bracket, so that the hook at the top straddles the upper portion of the horizontal unit. Position the two vertical brackets to accommodate the length of the shelf you will be installing. Tighten the set screws slightly to keep them in approximate position. Once shelf is in position (step 4), you can finish tightening the set screws. HELPFUL HINT: Screw holes have been added to shelf supports to allow operator to secure them to the wall if desired. Step 3 - Shelf brackets: Position top of shelf bracket on to vertical bracket hooks and gently guide bottom of bracket down into gap. Now you are ready to install your shelf. Adding Shelf t Wire Grid HELPFUL TIP: There are various styles and finishes of shelves to choose from. Select the shelf that will provide the most options for usage. Step 4 -Add a shelf: Position the four shelf collars above bracket nubs and lower shelf. Step 5 - Installing a grid: With horizontal wires facing out, position the top horizontal wire of the grid on the hooks of the vertical brackets and lower. The grid will seat itself on the brackets. step 4 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter SUGGESTED CONFIGURATION OPTIONS (Additional Components Required) Creating Multiple Shelf Units Horizontal mounting brackets are available in 12", 18", 36" 49" and 60" lengths to provide Flexibility and versatility in installing the proper size unit to fit the space. Both single and double shelf brackets are available (fig. 3). These brackets allow the installer to expand the wall storage system horizontally as needed. Double shelf brackets accommodates two shelf ends atone time to reduce the need for additional vertical shelf supports or single shelf brackets, while saving horizontal space on the process. W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Building a Wire Grid System Wire grid storage modules can be created with or without the use of vertical brackets If vertical brackets are desired, they are available in lengths from 16" to 44" (fig. 4). If standard length vertical brackets are not required, smaller vertical brackets are available to attach the grid to the horizontal mounting brackets (fig. S). Grid hooks can be used to anchor the grid to the wall or to hang a wire grid directly to a wall completely independent of any bracket. *Hardware to mount brackets to wall In NOT Included. Page: 41 Focus FWMG1836GN Item #210 COMPONENTES & ACCESORIOSINSTRUCCIONES EZ-Wall'" Organizacion y sistema de almacenamiento -F CUO- DE E N SAM B LAJ E Componentes de inicio y configuraciones sugeridas. j EZ-WaIITMOrganizacion y sistema de almacenamiento • • Soporte de montaje horizonfal Componentes de inicio y configuraciones sugeridas. O '' ' Cromado Articulo N- Epaxyverde Articulo N? Dimensiones(pulg) Dim es(cm) FWMBKT12CH FWMBKT12GN 12"x1"x 3" 30.5 x 2.5 x 7.6 cm FWMBKT18CH FWMBKT18GN 18"x 1"x 3" 45.7 x 2.5 x 7.6 cm FWMBKT36CH FWMBKT36GN 36"xI"x3" 91.4 x 2.5 x 7.6 cm Aal FWMBKT48CH FWMBKT48GN 48"xI"x3" 122.Ox2.5x7.6cm - O Soporte de montaje horizontal FWMBKT60CH FWMBKT60GN 60"x1'x3" 152.4x25x7.6cm O Soporte vertical OSoporte vertical Cromado Articulo W Epoxyverde Articulo No Dimensiones (pu19) Dimenstones(cm) FWMVB17CH FWMVB17GN 16"x211n2' x13r4" 40.6x5.9x4.5Cm O Montaje del estante FWMVB31CH FWMVB3IGN 3 1 " x 211132"x 13r4" 79.3 x 5.9 x 4.5 cm FWMBKT41CH FWMBKT41GN 441a'x 211132"■13/4" 113 x 5.9 x 4.5 cm 0 Rejilla de alambre La a de las panes viene en Cromado o epoxy 3O Montaje de estantes [individual] vercle, de, seglin el uso. e Cromado Articulo NF Epoxy -,de Articulo NP Dimensiones (pul9) Dimensiones (cm) 'No incluye elementos de sujeci6n Para fijar los soportes ala pared. FWMSB14CH FWMSB14GN 14"X6"X2" 35.8x 15.3 x SA cm FWMSBIBCH FWM5818GN 18'%6'X2" 45.Iz 15.3x 5.1 cm " Soporte S Para estantes de diversas profundidades. La longitud del estante esta determinada por at soporte FWMSB21CH FWMSB21GN 21" K 6" X 2" 53.0 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm horizontal de montaje a la pared o la distancia entre los soportes del estante. FWMSB24CH FWMSB24GN 24"X6"X 2" 61.0 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm Montaje de estantes [doble] Principales componentes del sisterna EZ-Wall Para multiples configuraciones (Lista control detallada at final del documento). Cr-do Anlculo N.- Epoxy -de Mlculo N.- Dimensiones(pulg) Dimensinnes(cm) FWMDB14CH FWMSB14GN 14'X6"X2" 35.8 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm O Soporte de montaje horizontal FWMDB18CH FWMS818GN 18" X 6" X 2" 45.7 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm Soporte horizontal pare fijar a la pared. Crea un lugar de trabajo FWMD821CH FWMSB21GN 21"X 6" X 2" 53.0x 15.3.5.1 cm de 12" a 60". Cada soporte incluye un tomillo de conexi6n pars usar con m6ltiples m6dulos horizontales y adecuarse a su FWMDB24CH FWMSB24GN 24" X 6" X 2" 61.0 x 15.3 x 5.1 cm ambiente. `No incluye elementos de sujeci6n para fijar los 4O Rejilla de alambre [con componentes opcional para montaje a la pared o al soporte horizontal] soportes a la pared. OSoportes verticales Cromado Articulo NY Epoxy verde Artlwlo NP Dlmensiones(pulg) Dimensiones(cml Estos soportes verticales que se unen at soporte de montaje horizontal a lnduyen dos tomillos prlsloneros FWMG1836CH FWMG1836GN 37" X 18" X 1" 94.7 x 45.7 x 2.5 cm Para asegurados a los soportes de montaje horizontal FWMG2448CH FWMG2448GN 49" X 24" X 1" 94.7 x 61.0 x 2.5 cm y reducir el balanceo de lado a lado. Los onficios en los soportes permitenlacolocaci6ndetornillos FWMG3036CH FWMG3036GN 37"X30"X1" 94.7x76.8x2.5cm adicionales para aumentar la seguddad. Los soportes vienen an 3 largos y 2 terminaciones. Acero lnaxidable Articulo N° Descripcidn Dimensiones (pulg) oimensione:(em) 'No incluye elementos de sujeci6n para fijar los soportes a la pared. - FWM8655 6 ganchos 2" x 2" x 1" 5.1 x 5.1 x 2.5 cm para rejilla de alambre FWMAFUR1824CHS5 Soportes verticales pequenos adosar la rejilla de alambre 4.5" % 3.5" X 1.65" 11.5 x 8.9 x 4.2 cm 4 O Rejillas de alambre. para al soporte horizontal O Montaje del estante Pueden adosarse f3cilmente a los soportes verticales sin Monte an las ranuras de los soportes verticales. elementos de fijaci6n. " Disponibilidad de Componentes r-r, V-1 1C'_. Utilizado con confgureciones de estantes individuates. adicionales para montar la rejilla at soporte horizontal o L�iI.A) Servicio al cliente at 800.968.3918 1 Fax 800.968.41291 en linea a orders@focusfoodservice.com Montaje de estantes dobles disponible para multiples directamente a la pared. NO incluye elementos de Para m6s informaci6n y componentes visite: www.focusfoodservice.com -11instru1113 m6dulos de estantes ubicados uno at lado del otro. sujec16n. Ver reverso del documento. D16349 -Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 42 Focus FWMG1836GN Item #210 H-Wall" Organization y sistema de almacenamiento Componentes de inicio y configuraciones sugeridas. Para empezar RECOMENDACION UTIL: Cada soporte de montaje horizontal incluye un tornillo para construir m6dulos de mas tamano (fig.1). Cuando se usan m6hiples soportes horizontales en una Bola instalaci6n, recomendamos unir todos los soportesjuntos con los tornillos provistos antes de fijarlos a la pared. De este modo, s6lo necesitara nivelar todos los soportes una vez y no tendr5 que esforzarse Para unirlos mientras este arriba de la escalera. Paso 1 - Soporte de montaje horizontal: Una el soporte horizontal a la pared utilizando el elemento de sujeci6n adecuado. IMPORTANTE: Use un elemento Para nivelar y asegurarse de que el soporte este nivelado sobre la pared (fig.2)."NO incluye elementos de sujeci6n para fijar Ins soportes a la pared. Paso 2 - Soportes verticales: Cuelgue los soportes verticales sobre los horizontales de modo tal que el gancho de la parte superior traspase la parte superior de la unidad horizontal. Ubique los dos soportes verticales Para adaptarlos a la longitud del estante que esta instalando. Ajuste levemente los tornillos prisioneros Para mantenerlos aproximados. Una vez que el estante este en su posici6n definitiva (Paso 4), puede terminar de ajustar los tornillos. RECOMENDACION UTIL: Se agregaron orificios Para tornillos a los soportes del estante para que el operador pueda fijarlos a la pared si to desea. Paso 3 - Soportes de estante: Ubique la parte superior del soporte de estante sobre los ganchos del soporte vertical y suavemente guie la parte inferior del soporte hacia abajo Para calzar en la ranura. Ahora, esta listo Para instalar su estante. Para agregar un estante / Rejilla de alambre RECOMENDACION UTIL: Hay varios estilos y terminaciones de estantes Para elegir. Elija el estante que le permita mas variedad de usos. Paso 4-Agregue un estante: Ubique los cuatro abrazaderas de los estantes encima de los topes del soporte y el estante inferior. Paso 5-Instalaci6n de la rejilla: Con los alambres horizontales hacia afuera, coloque el alambre horizontal superiorde la rejilla sobre los ganchos de los soportes verticales a inferior. La rejilla se apoyar5 sobre los soportes. Paso 4 'r fig.1 fig.ta Paso 1 fig.2 F+CL6 OPCIONES DE CONFIGURACIONES SUGERIDAS (Se necesitan componentes adicionales) Para crear unidades de estantes multiples Los soportes de montaje horizontal vienen en largos de 12", 18", 36" 48" y 60" Para permitir flexibilidad y versatilidad a instalar una unidad del tamafio adecuado al espacio disponible. Disponibilidad de soportes para estantes dobles a individuales (fig. 3) Estos soportes permiten al instalador ampliar el sistema de almacenamiento sobre la pared en sentido horizontal segOn la necesidad. Los soportes para estantes dobles se adaptan para alojar dos extremos de estantes al mismo tiempo y reducir la necesidad de colocar otros soportes verticales para estantes o soportes para estantes individuales y a la vez ahorran espacio horizontal en el proceso. Para construir un sistema de rejillas de alambre Se pueden armar m6dulos de almacenamiento de rejillas de alambre con o sin soportes verticales. Si se desea colocar soportes verticales, estos estan disponibles en longitudes de 16" a 44" (fig. 4). Si no se necesitan soportes verticales de longitud estandar, hay soportes verticales mas pequefios para fijar la rejilla a los soportes de montaje horizontal (fig. 5). Se pueden usar ganchos para rejillas Para fijar la rejilla a la pared o Para colgar una rejilla de alambre directamente a una pared completamente independiente de cualquier soporte. *NO incluye elementos de sujeci6n para fijar los soportes a la pared. N■■ ■■■ ■ ■S■ NON■ ■■■■O■. ..r��� ■NNONNONN... ■■■■■■■.■■ ■■■■■■■■■NNI ■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■�■■■■■■■■■■ SOON ■■■■ MOMS■■■NONN■ SOMME /SO■O■N0 no mom NOMMOR IF ■■■N■NNNNNNN �ANNNNNo oil D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 43 SPG International CLN-DISH Item #211 %,j(-�-Ow,M1Bj3r Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 211- CLEAN DISH TABLE (1 EA REQ'D) SPG CLN-DISH Per Spec. 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 44 Olympic J1836K Item #212 Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 212 - WIRE SHELVING (2 EA REQ'D) Olympic J1836K Shelf, wire, 18" x 36", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 . ACCESSORIES Mfr Olympic Model Spec 133K Post 33", stationary, grooved at 1" increments, includes leveling bolt & cap, green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 45 SPG International GLS-RK Item #213 Equipment & F umishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 213 - GLASS RACK OVER SHELF (2 EA REQ'D) SPG GLS-RK GLASS RACK OVER SHELF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 46 By Owner Item #214 %Irc WIMUSIPT Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 214 - CONDENSATE EXHAUST HOOD (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER Greasemaster D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 47 Fisher 13390 Item #215 wc��WIMWM Equipment & FtiimWfings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 215 - PRE -RINSE FAUCET ASSEMBLY (1 EA REQ'D) Fisher 13390 Pre -Rinse Assembly, 8" c/c splash -mounted mixing valve, with spring action flexible gooseneck, with spray head (1.15 gallons per minute @ 60 PSI), with wall bracket The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 215 WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1/2" 1 1/2" C WASTE INDIRECT SIZE DIRECT SIZE D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 48 Fisher APPLICATION: JOB NAME: QUANTITY: [9E 13390 ITEM NO. 12" [305mm] 12" 4-1/4" [305mm]tp05mm] _ 8" f 2-3/8"r[204mmm] �I [60mm] 12" (MAX) 1/2" X 1-3/8" NPT [305mm] MALE NIPPLE ROUGH -IN: 07/8" [22mm] EPAct 2005 Compliant (1A JOINT JDED) ANSI/A112.18.1 M Item #215 PRODUCT NAME: PRE -RINSE, SPRING STYLE, BACKSPLASH MOUNT SPECIAL CONFIGURATION ❑ CHECK BASE MODEL AND OPTIONS MODEL: ❑ 13390 ULTRA SPRAY VALVE, WALL BRACKET ❑ 13366 ULTRA SPRAY VALVE, NO WALL BRACKET OPTIONS OR MODIFICATIONS: ❑ SUPPLY LINES (24" OR 36") CIRCLE LENGTH ❑ ADD -ON FAUCET (6", 8", 10", 12", 14", 16") CIRCLE ❑ IN -LINE DUAL CHECK VALVE ❑ BRUSH ❑ ELBOWS ❑ VANDAL RESISTANT KIT ❑ HANDLES (CROSS OR WRIST) CIRCLE STYLE ❑ OTHER FEATURES CONTROL VALVE *8"BACKSPLASH MOUNT * INTERNAL SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES * SWIVELLING SEAT DISKS * HOT SIDE STEM - RIGHT HAND * COLD SIDE STEM - LEFT HAND * STAINLESS STEEL SEATS * STAINLESS STEEL SEAT SCREWS * STAINLESS STEEL HANDLE SCREWS * 1/2" SLIP JOINT KIT HOSE * 36" LENGTH * STAINLESS STEEL END FITTINGS * STAINLESS STEEL EXTERNAL JACKET * 3 PLY FIBER REINFORCED INTERNAL RUBBER HOSE * REPAIRABLE IN FIELD WITH SIMPLE TOOLS ULTRA SPRAY VALVE * LOWEST ENERGY USER - 1.15 GPM @ 60 PSI * CLEANS FASTER - TEST PROVEN * ENGINEERED TO LAST - NO 'O' RINGS TO LEAK * INTERCHANGEABLE - FITS ALL BRANDS SYSTEM LIMITS * TEMP: 40*F MIN. TO 140°F MAX. * PRESSURE: 200 PSI MAX. STATIC SHIPPING WEIGHT * 12.0 LBS =FIS! MANUFACTURING COMPANY TOLL FREE: 800-421-6162 - FAX: 800-832-8238 information@fisher-mfg.com - www.fisher-mfg.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 49 SPG International SLD-DISH Item #216 Submittal Sheet ITEM# 216 - SOILED DISH TABLE (1 EA REQ'D) SPG SLD-DISH 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 50 By Owner A4 Item #217 W® WMISIr Equipment $ FumWiinp Co. ITEM# 217 - DISH MACHINE (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER A4 <Incomplete> Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: S1 Winholt Equipment WL-66 Item #218 Equipment 8s F�unishi Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 218 - LOCKER (3 EA REQ'D) Winholt WL-66 Locker, Six Tier, 1 column, 6 doors per column, 10" x 12" x 12" compartment, doors are mesh grid vented The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 218 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Winholt Disclaimer: Freight classes have been assigned based upon descriptions and generalizations provided by the National Motor Freight Traffic Association November 2006 catalog. These classes are subject to interpretation by both the shipper and the carrier. We cannot guarantee that the freight class will not be changed during a weight and inspection by the carrier on those items that are part of the catalog. All special order items are subject to interpretation at the time of shipment. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 52 Winholt WL-66 Item #218 ITEM NO. QUANTITY NO JOB NO. SPEC NO. — FEATURES & BENEFITS: • Employee lockers provide a safe storage place for their personal things when working. • Mesh grid doors are a standard security feature allowing managers to see what is being stored in the lockers while also allowing ventilation to the lockers. • 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 door models available. • 1 door lockers are used in environments where full length clothes are stored, an inside shelf is included for storage of books, hats, lunches, and other personal belongings. • 2 door lockers allow double the number of storage units and are great for environments where jackets are worn for work. I= • 5 door and 6 door lockers are space savings models where 1 Column storage space is a premium. • Available in single column or three column configurations. 3 column configurations allow for easier installation. • Depths of 12", 15", and 18" available on various lockers. • Door catch has padlock hasp to add a lock (provided by others). • Enclosed bases standard at no additional charge and help reduce dirt, dust, and debris from getting under lockers. • Standard color is beige, additional colors available upon request. • Lockers ship fully assembled. WAM, ifOLD' __,E0U'21-MEIn1T D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter FL- w-11111 :: 3 Column Horizontal Wall Locker 141 Eileen Way • Syosset, NY 11791 • Tel: 1-800-444-3595 • Fax: 516-222-0371 www.winholt.com sales@winholt.com PENNSYLVANIA • GEORGIA TEXAS CALIFORNIA W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 53 Winholt W L-66 ITEM NO.. JOB NO._ SPEC NO. ® 1 Door I. I 2 Door 5 Door Employee Lockers ■ 6 Door 16 Door Model Number Order # # Doors Dimensions Approximate Ship Weight Width (in) (mm) (in) (mm) I (in) I (mm) (lb) (kg) 1 Door, 1 Column L-11 156208 1 1 12 305 12 305 1 78 1981 49 22 L-11/15 163838 1 12 305 15 381 78 1981 57 1 26 1 Door,3 Column tL-3 152856 3 36 914 12 305 78 1981 148 67 3/15 1 163820 1 3 1 36 1 914 1 15 1 381 1 78 1981 1 150 1 68 2 Door, 1 Column 21 tL-21/15 156216 2 12 305 15 381 78 1981 52 24 1 163846 2 12 305 15 1 381 1 78 119811 56 1 25 2 Door, 3 Column L-6 152864 6 36 914 12 1 381 1 78 1981 156 71 L-6/15 1 163942 6 36 914 15 1 381 1 78 1981 160 1 73 Door, Horizontal Wall Mount Locker L-4 1 156099 1 4 1 48 1219 18 1 457 13 5/8 346 1 40 1 18 5 Door, 1 Column L-55 626433 1 5 1 12 1 305 1 12 1 305 1 66 1676 49 1 22 6 Door, 1 Column L-66 156195 6 12 305 12 305 78 1981 54 1 24 L-66/15 163862 6 12 305 78 1981 66 30 L-66/18 163918 6 12 3051�ta 78 1981 78 36 6 Door, 3 Column L-618 130358 18 36 914 12 305 78 1981 190 86 L-618/15 163854 18 36 914 78 1981 198 90 L-618/18 163900 18 36 914lifi� 78 1981 234 108 16 Door L-16/CB 1 138253 1 16 1 72 1828 1 18 1 457 1 78 1981 170 1 77 Item #218 �wi�r-Notr EQUIPMENT LOCKER ACCESSORIES SLOPE TOP • 6 • BOXED BASES LOCKER NUMBERS Approx. Model Depth Ship Number Item Description Weight (in) (mm) (lb) (kg) Fits 3 Columns WLST-12 Wide. 12 305 5 2 Includes: 3 Slope Tops, WLST-15 3 Back Supports, 2 15 381 15 3 End Pieces Model Number Description WL-BB12 Replacement Box Base For 12" Depth WL-BB15 Replacement Box Base For 15' Depth WL-BB18 Replacement Box Base For 18" Depth Locker number labels are supplied one-up, consecutively. The first locker is numbered at the factory and the other number tags are shipped inside that locker. Special numbering sequences are available at no extra charge. Include the required numbering with your order. Win -Holt Equipment is a leading manufacturer of material & food handling equipment. Since 1946, retailers and restaurant chains have trusted Win-Holt's equipment to ensure increased productivity and efficiency in their operation. Multiple locations reduce logistics and transportation costs. All Win -Holt associates are dedicated to customer satisfaction. For general sales and engineering information only. All units are subject to change without notice. Please consult factory for certified specifications. 141 Eileen Way • Syosset, NY 11791 Tel: 1-800-444-3595 • Fax: 516-222-0371 www.winholt.com sales@winholt.com E_ P E N N S Y L V A N I A G E O R G I A T E X A S C A L I F O R N I A INRK- mpnm - 2s0n D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 54 By Owner BUS BOX Item #220 ® iaor Equipment 86 F�nnishinon Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 220 - BUS BOX (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER BUS BOX D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: SS By Owner FLATWARE Item #221 Equipment & F umWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 221- FLATWARE DISHWASHER RACK (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER FLATWARE Per Spec. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 56 Focus Foodservice FMSEC24484GN Item #222 Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 222 - SECURITY ENCLOSURE KIT (1 EA REQ'D) Focus FMSEC24484GN Security Cage Complete Mobile Kit, 24" x 48" x 63"H, includes: 4 shelves, (2) front panels, (2) side panels, (2) back panels and assembly hardware, 4 each 63" posts, (4) 5" casters (2 swivel & 2 swivel with brakes) with bumpers, green epoxy finish, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 104 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 57 By Owner Item #223 Equipment 8b Furnwiinv Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 223 - MANAGERS DESK (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER <by Owner> 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & furnishings Co. Page: 58 Olympic J2448K Item #300 A W o� Equipment & Furnishings co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 300 - WIRE SHELVING (20 EA REQ'D) Olympic J2448K Shelf, wire, 24" x 48", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Olympic 5 J2442K Shelf, wire, 24" x 42", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF Olympic 5 J2430K Shelf, wire, 24" x 30", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF Olympic 5 J2424K Shelf, wire, 24" x 24", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF Olympic 28 J74UK Post 74", mobile, works with stem caster, grooved at 1" intervals, green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF Olympic 7 J5FBA-4 Stem/Swivel-Brake Caster Set, includes (4) 5" dia. casters with brake, 1-1/4" face, non -marking, high modulus rubber tread, 300 lb. capacity per caster, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 59 Delfield SMRRII-S Item #301 wo�WIMVS03r Equipment & F u nWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 301- ROLL -IN REFRIGERATOR (1 EA REQ-D) Delfield SMRRII-S Specification Line Series® Refrigerator, Roll -in, single -section, 36.15 cubic feet, self-contained refrigeration 404A, digital thermometer, recessed metal door handle, pressure relief valve, built-in door locks, stainless steel front, aluminum exterior & interior, solid hinged full height door, top mounted compressor, cUL, UL, NSF, 1/4 hp The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 301 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Delfield 1 115v/60/1, 6.0 amps, NEMA 5-1513, standard Delfield 1 3 Year parts & labor warranty, standard (USA) Delfield 1 (5) Year compressor warranty standard Delfield 1 Self-contained refrigeration system, standard Delfield 1 Door hinged on right standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS I CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 1/4 Cord 2 115 60 1 P g& 5-15P 6 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 60 Delfield SMRRII-S Item #301 'Delfield SP ecification Line' Selontained Solid Door Refrigerated Roll -In Models One section Two section Three section Project Item Quantity CSI Section 11400 Approved Date SSRRII-S SSRRI2-S SSRR13-S Stainless exterior and interior full door SARRII-S SARR12-S SARRI3-S Stainless exterior and aluminum interior full door SMRRII-S SMRR12-S SMRRI3-S SSRRI2-S Specifications Exterior: SS and SA models shall have corrosion resistant stainless steel exterior cabinet sides, front and shroud. SM models shall have corrosion resistant aluminum on exterior cabinet sides and will have stainless front and shroud. All units shall have the upper shroud hinged with a gas assist stay open feature to provide easy access to the refrigeration system. Interior: Cabinet interior shall be corrosion resistant stainless steel (SS models) or heavy gauge aluminum (SA and SM models). Bottom and top surfaces shall be die stamped to provide radius corners and recessed Floor. Mounted to the interior ceiling, the interior incandescent light is controlled automatically through a switch mounted in the hinge assembly to protect against breakage. Door openings are protected with heavy gauge stainless steel breaker strips. An air duct shall be mounted to the ceiling assuring low velocity, even air movement throughout the cabinet interior. Each section can accommodate a 28 1/2"x 27 1 /4"x 72"cart Doors: Exterior shall be corrosion resistant stainless steel. Interior liner shall be resilient high impact ABS material formed to protrude beyond the door gasket to protect the gasket from tearing. Each door has two edge mount, self closing, cam lift style hinges. Doors can be removed from the cabinet without the use of tools. Metal door handle Stainless front aluminum exterior and interior full door Standard Features Options & Stainless steel interior and exterior (SS) Accessories Stainless steel exterior, aluminum interior (SA) Aluminum interior and exterior, stainless front Security (prison) package ISM) Door field rehingability Built in door locks with heavy duty strikes Stainless steel interior door liner Recessed metal door handle Stainless steel back Pressure relief valve is standard to prevent door Laminate on front, sides and back vapor lock Bottom mount electrical Exterior blue Led digital thermometer with high/ Stainless steel banking strip low temperature alarm Heat shield end • Easy to use electronic control 230-50-1 electrical* • Easyaccess"flip up"shroud 220-60-1 electrical* Tough ABS interior door liners *Inclusion of these options will alter the • 10'attached cord and plug electrical specifications of unit Stainless steel breaker strips High density foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non OOP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane keeps energy costs low • Energy savings door heater switch Three year parts and labor warranty and an additional two year compressor parts warranty shall be recessed into the door for easy grip without impacting aisle space. Keyed door lock is mounted in the door next to the handle. Lock engages into a heavy duty strike mounted to the cabinet face. Door gaskets are magnetic and mount to the door snapping in place and are removable without tools. Refrigeration system: All components are mounted to the exterior of the cabinet ceiling, outside the food zone and are assembled as one piece and can be removed as one piece. Environmentally friendly R404A refrigerant is used. The system has the capability of maintaining between 33°F and 40-F in heavy use food service operations. Refrigerant is metered using a highly responsive thermostatic expansion valve. System is controlled using Delfield's ACT -Advanced Control Technology electronic temperature control, which provides improved pull down times, reduces compressor cycling and longer compressor life with lower energy consumption. Control system uses adaptive defrost to assure evaporator coil is free of ice and is operating at optimum efficiency. Evaporator condensate is eliminated using an energy efficient hot gas system. Electrical: Standard electrical connections shall be 11 SV, 60 Hz single phase. A 10' cord and plug is supplied and attached to a junction box mounted on the exterior top of the cabinet. 980 S. Isabella Rd. Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 49858 Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. q NSF D eanitowoc Page: 61 V I 0 N rn t V U0 D 00 rD C 04 Delfield SMRRII-S Item #301 "Delfield C 0 z a, v rn w Cu Iz 0 0 v 0 a, C C O v w v <n - m-1 ---1-- -- -- --- -- — 30 76.2un 1 34.00' 15]5—' I 34.00' �� 1 238.Bcm 1 34.00- I 86.4cm I I 86Acm I I I I 86.4cm I I 1 Plan View Plan View Plan View SSRRI I-5, SARRII-S, SSRRI2-S, 5ARRI2-5, SMRRI2-S SSRRI3-5, SARRI3-5, SMRRI3-S SMRRII-5 G 19 Elevation View Elevation View Elevation View 55RRI1-5, SARRII-5, SSRRI2-5, 5ARRI2-5, SSRRI3-5, SARRI3-S, SMRRII-S SMRRI2-S SMRRI3-5 -- —N ]6.2c.2cm 89.00' 226.1cm ]2.00' 182.9cm I I 1 I 1 I I I End View All Models Specifications Model V/Hz/Ph Amps Volume Shelves No. Of Unit BTU/Hr Ship Nema Energy Cu.Ft. Sq.Ft. Shelves H.P. System Cap Weight Plug (KWH/Day) SSRRII-S,SARRII-S,SMRRI1-5 115/60/1 6.0 36.15 N/A N/A 1/4 2092 476lbs (216kg) 5-15P 3.79 SSRRI2-S, SARRI2-S, SMRRI2-5 115/60/1 9.5 76.34 N/A N/A 1/3 3226 7681bs (348kg) 5-15P 5.86 SSRRI3-S,SARRI3-S,SMRRl3-S 115/60/1 14.5 113.28 N/A N/A =1/25465 10441bs(474kg) 5-20P 7.56 Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice. 980 S. Isabella Rd. Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Phone: 800.733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Printed in the U.S.A. Fax: 800-669-0619 DSSSRRI www.delfield.com 03/13 eanitowoc D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 62 By Owner Item #302 W.00w3mair Equipment & Funishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 302 - EXHAUST HOOD (1 EA REQ-D) BYOWNER Bake Hood 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 63 Blodgett Oven XR8-GS/STAND Item #303 Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 303 - CONVECTION OVEN (1 EA REQ'D) Blodgett Oven XR8-GS/STAND Mini Convection Oven, gas, rotating rack, (8) 18" x 26" pan capacity, steam vent control, blower delay, bake timer, steam timer, halogen lighting, steam vent control, stainless steel interior and exterior, mounted on stainless steel stand with pan slides, casters, 110,000 BTU, ETL, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 303 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Blodgett Oven 1 (2) Two year parts, (1) one year labor warranty C Blodgett Oven 1 Blodgett Oven 1 Blodgett Oven 1 Blodgett Oven 2 Blodgett Oven 1 50115 ELECTRICAL and (3) three additional year door warranty (parts only), standard Natural gas 120v/60/1-ph (oven) Digital programmable control, standard Additional rack slides - set of 2 Special Corner Bakery Flue Riser Kit VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 60 1 3/4 GAS STEAM SIZE MBTU KW INLET SIZE RETURN SIZE LB/HR PSIG (min) PSIG (max) 1 3/4" 110.0 1 C WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 3/4" C WASTE INDIRECT DIRECT SIZE SIZE 3/4" D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 64 Blodgett Oven XR8-GS/STAN D Item #303 BLODGETT 1. XR8-G Gas Mini Rotating Rack Bakery Oven XR8-G with 12 pan stand OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES (AT ADDITIONAL CHARGE) ■ Gas hose with quick disconnect and restraining device: ❑ 48" (1219mm) hose ❑ 36" (914mm) hose ■ Venting ❑ Draft diverter ❑ Draft hood ❑ 12 pan stand with adjustable spacing, removeable crumb trays and low profile casters ❑ MenuSelect control can hold multi -stage program- ming for up to 99 products, includes Cook & Hold, core probe cooking and USB port ❑ Additional rack slides ❑ Wire rack for half-size pans Project Item No. Quantity Refer to operator manual specification chart for listed model names. EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION ■ Fully welded angle iron frame ■ Double pane tempered glass doors ■ Semi -rigid mineral fiber insulation at top, back, sides and bot- tom ■ Removable independent door design ■ Control panel rotates out for easy access INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION ■ 304 stainless steel interior ■ Rotating rack can be removed without tools ■ Rack slide spacing can be adjusted without tools in any configu- ration using 1" increments. ■ Stainless steel heat exchanger system ■ Four side mounted halogen lights for superior illumination OPERATION ■ Indirect -fired with in -shot bumers ■ Internal steamer system ■ Holds 8 pans (18" x 26") based on 4" adjustable slide spacing ■ Digital programmable controls ■ Separate bake and steam times ■ Cool -down mode ■ Blower delay ■ Two speed, 3/4 horsepower, convection motor with automatic ther- mal overload protection STANDARD FEATURES ■ Pre -plumbed gas and water lines ■ Two year parts and one year labor oven warranty* * For all intemational markets, contact your local distributor. FT- us NSF Intertek BLODGETT OVEN COMPANY www.blodgeft.com 44 Lakeside Avenue, Burlington, VT 05401 • Phone: (802) 658-6600 • Fax: (802) 864-0183 X X CIO X O —'I D Z 0 X n X O C m Z D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 65 Blodgett Oven XR8-GS/STAND Item #303 BLODGETT bl— XR8-G Rotating Rack Oven DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM) (367) (217) 0 (71) 060 3 7) TOP VIEW APPROVALISTAMP 80.23 (2039) under hood venting 75.53(1918) 47.44 (1205) 6 37.83 (961) Q9 32.60 (828) 28.32 (719) 0 26.03 (661) NOTE: Add 2" to all height dimensions when using adjustable legs in place of casters SIDE VIEWS 86.53(2198) Direct Venting SHORT FORM SPECIFICATIONS Provide Blodgett gas mini rotating rack bakery oven model XR8-G. Unit shall have a single compartment with fully welded angle iron frame, and 304 stainless steel interior. Unit shall accept eight 18" x 26" standard full-size bake pans and have rack slides with spacing that can be adjusted without tools in any configuration using 1" increments. Rotating rack shall be removable without tools. Unit shall have stainless steel front, top and sides. Doors shall be stainless steel, independent design with dual pane thermal glass windows. Unit shall be gas heated with electronic spark ignition and shall cook by means of indirect fired inshot burners. Unit shall have internal steamer system with pre -plumbed water lines. Unit shall be fitted with four side mounted, halogen lamps. Control panel shall be digital programmable controls, separate bake and steam times, cool -down mode, and blower delay. Manual gas service cut-off switch on front panel. Two year oven parts and one year labor warranty. Provide options and accessories as indicated. DIMENSIONS: Floor space 48.23" (1225 mm) W x 40.27" (1023 mm) D Interior 32" (813 mm) W x 32" (813 mm) D Product clearance 0" from combustible and non-combustible construction GAS SUPPLY: 3/4" NPT Manifold Pressure: • Natural — 3.5" W.0 • Propane —10" W.C. Inlet Pressure: • Natural — 5.0" W.C. min. —14.0" W.C. max. • Propane —11.0" W.C. min. —14.0" W.C. max. MAXIMUM INPUT: XR8-G 110,000 BTU/hr POWER SUPPLY: XR8-G 120V, 60Hz, 1 phase, 15 amp maximum dedicated circuit Blodgett recommends a Pass & Seymour, model 2095, GFCI for this oven. COLD WATER SUPPLY: Pipe Size 3/4" GHT Pressure 40-75 psi. (276-517 kPa) Flow Rate 27 GPH (102 LPH) Appliance is to be installed with backflow protection in accordance With Federal, State or Local codes. DRAIN: XR8-G 3/4" NPT rear drain connection MINIMUM ENTRY CLEARANCE: Uncrated* 45" (1143 mm) Crated 49.25' (1251 mm) * Unit measures 34" (864) deep with the doors, control panel, and back panel removed. SHIPPING INFORMATION: Approx. Weight: XR8-G 950 lbs. (431 kg) Stand 175 lbs. (79 kg) Crate sizes: NOTE: The company reserves the right to make substitutions of components XR8-G 49.25" (1251 mm) x 54.25" (1378mm) without prior notice Stand 54" (1371 mm) x 34" (864mm) x 28" (711 mm) BLODGETT OVEN COMPANY www.blodgett.com 44 Lakeside Avenue, Burlington, VT 05401 • Phone: (802) 658-6600 • Fax: (802) 864-0183 Printed in U.S.A. NOTE: FOR COMMERCIAL USE ONLY P/N 38481 Rev T (3/12) D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 66 Dormont Manufacturing 1675KITS48 Item #304 Equipment & F unAshings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 304 - SAFETY SYSTEM MOVEABLE GAS CONNECTOR (2 EA REQ-D) Dormont 1675KITS48 10/08/2015 Dormont Blue Hose' Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast® CID, 1 Swivel MAX®, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware, 167,000 BTU/hr minimum flow capacity, limited lifetime warranty The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 304 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 67 Dormont 1675KITS48 Item #304 Job Name Job Location Engineer Approval Contractor Approval Contractor's P.O. No. Representative SKU Single Swivel MAX®/SnapFasP Quick -Disconnect Assemblies Sizes:'/2" to 11/4" (15 to 32mm) Single Swivel MAX®/SnapFast® Quick -Disconnect Assemblies feature flexible movement and the one -handed, quick -disconnect fitting with a unique thermal shut-off design that automatically shuts off the gas when the internal temperature exceeds 350°F (177°C). The 360° movement of Swivel MAX adds extra protection to the life of the connector and increases kitchen aisle space by allowing the appliance to be closer to the wall. Features Swivel MAX® Multi -plane Fitting ................. Aluminum body, plated steel fitting Movement ............................. 360' rotational end fitting SnapFast" One -Handed Quick -Disconnect Quick -Disconnect ................... Brass body, aluminum collar Thermal Shut-off .................... Shuts off gas when internal temperatures exceed 350OF (1770C) Specifications The Dormont Blue Hose" Tubing ................................. Annealed, 304 stainless steel Braiding ................................. Multi -strand, stainless steel wire Coating ................................. Blue antimicrobial PVC, melts at 350°F (1770C), coating will not hold a flame End Fittings ............................ Carbon steel; zinc trivalent chromate Stress Guard® ........................ 3601 rotational end fitting at both ends Additional Components Restraining Device ................. PVC -coated, steel multi -strand cable and mounting hardware Valve ................................. Full port, brass body Elbow ................................. Malleable iron, 1 included Approvals & Certifications NSF NSF/ANSI 169 — Special-purpose food equipment and devices SIB O ANSI Z21.69/CSA 6.16 — Connectors for moveable gas appliances ° us ANSI Z21.41 /CSA 6.9 — Quick -disconnect devices for use with gas fuel appliances ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1 — Manually operated gas valves for appliances, appliance connector UL 567 — Pipe connectors for flammable and combustible liquids and LP gas Meets requirements of ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code. Refer to the catalog for additional approvals and certifications or go to www.dormont.com. Not for use in temperatures less than 32°F (0°C). For indoor use only. Maximum operating pressure 1/2 psi. A restraining device is required for all moveable gas equipment Sc-iffmq_ The Dormont Safety System- is the first and only complete gas equipment System) connection system specifically engineered for the commercial kitchen. The Safety System consists of the famous Dormont Blue Hose and a variety of accesso- ries designed for improved safety and performance in commercial kitchens. Because they are manufactured in the USA under an ISO qualified production process and to multiple design certifications, you can Connect with Confidence with the Dormont Safety System. ubrmont SnapFast5 One -handed Quick -Disconnect Swivel MAX® —► Multi -plane Rotation Fitting Stress Guard® Rotation Technology Reduces Stress at Both Ends of the Hose The Dormont —ta Blue Hose® Stainless Steel Construction Stainless Steel Braid Blue Antimicrobial PVC Coating (Cutaway shown) Stress Guard® —� Rotation Technology Reduces Stress at Both Ends of the Hose D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 68 Dormont 1675KITS48 . Item #304 Ordering I 1 LENGTH Configuration Size I.D. 24" (607mm) 36" (914mm) 48" (1,219mm) 60" (1,524mm) 72" (1,829mm) Deluxe Kit* 1650KITS24 1650KITS36 1650KITS48 1650KITS60 1650KITS72 Basic Kit** �/2" (15mm) 1650BPOSR24 1650BPOSR36 1650BPOSR48 1650BPOSR60 1650BPOSR72 Hose Assembly*** 1650BPOS24 1650BPOS36 1650BPOS48 1650BPQS60 1650BPOS72 Deluxe Kit* 1675KITS24 1675KITS36 1675KITS48 1675KITS60 1675KITS72 Basic Kit** 3/"(20mm) 1675BPOSR24 1675BPOSR36 1675BPOSR48 1675BPOSR60 1675BPOSR272 Hose Assembly*** 1675BPOS24 1675BPOS36 1675BPQS48 1675BPOS60 1675BPOS72 Deluxe Kit* 161 OOKITS24 161OOKITS36 16100KITS48 16100KITS60 16100KITS72 Basic Kit** 1" (25mm) 16100BPOSR24 16100BPOSR36 16100BPOSR48 16100BPOSR60 16100BPOSR72 Hose Assembly*** 16100BPOS24 16100BPOS36 16100BPOS48 16100BPOS60 16100BPOS72 Deluxe Kit* 16125KITS24 16125KITS36 16125KITS48 16125KITS60 16125KITS72 Basic Kit** 1%" (32mm) 16125BPOSR24 16125BPOSR36 16125BPOSR48 16125BPQSR60 16125BPOSR72 Hose Assembly*** 16125BPOS24 16125BPOS36 16125BPQS48 16125BPQS60 16125BPOS72 Flow Capacity(Flow. 1 i 0.64 SP. GR. • 1 pressure drop) LENGTH Model Size I.D. 24" (607mm) 36" (914mm) 48" (1,219mm) 60" (1,524mm) 72" (1,829mm) 1650BPOS t/2" (15mm) 81,000 72,000 63,000 56,000 51,000 1675BPQS 3/4" (20mm) 216,000 203,000 167,000 147,000 130,000 16100BPOS 1" (25mm) 385,000 353,000 310,000 274,000 260,000 16125BPQS 1Y4" (32mm) 535,000 491,000 482,000 463,000 460,000 *Deluxe Kits include: The Dormont Blue Hose, Swivel MAX, SnapFast, restraining device, full port valve, street elbow and display box **Basic Kits include: The Dormont Blue Hose, Swivel MAX, SnapFast, restraining device and street elbow ***Hose Assemblies include: The Dormont Blue Hose, Swivel MAX, SnapFast and street elbow The Dormont Blue Hose® Typical Installation The Dormont Blue Hose is a commercial, moveable -grade gas connector designed for use with moveable equipment. II Moveable equipment is defined in ANSI Standard Z21.69/CSA 6.16 q as gas utilization equipment that may be mounted on casters or otherwise be subject to movement. ., D&mont® A Watts Water Technologies Company ES-D-SwivelSnapFast 1306 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter Pkr) 26 N. • Reduces stress on connector • Increases kitchen aisle space by allowing connector to be positioned closer to the wall C::)S�J" • One -handed quick -disconnect fitting • Thermal shut-off when internal temperature exceeds 350oF (177°C) tttt Restraining Device t • t ANSI Z21.69 Standard section 1.7.4 states: Connectors when ® e c' used on caster -mounted equipment shall be installed with a restraining device, which prevents transmission of the strain to the connector �)' `S 7 We guarantee our commercial gas connectors for the u. t,YnME ,.V . life of the original appliance to which it is connected. • 9001-20013 CERTIFIED USA: Export, PA - Tel. (724) 733-4800 • Fax: (724) 733-4808 • www.dorrnont.com © 2013 Dormont W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 69 SPG International Item #30S Equipment & F umishings co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 305 - EQUIPMENT STAND (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Equipment stand for rack oven, stainless steel. Size and Details per spec sheet with 14GA. S/S top and flanged feet. NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 70 SPG International Item #307 !! N�c-, %7MOPM Equipment & Furnishings co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 307 - MOBILE WORK TABLE (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 18" x 36" - With Casters 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 71 Olympic J2436K Item #308 11 :1. :. 1 C 1 1 zz 9 Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 308 - WIRE SHELVING (2 EA REQ'D) Olympic J2436K Shelf, wire, 24" x 36", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Olympic 2 J2430K Shelf, wire, 24" x 30", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF Olympic Olympic JlWD24K Wall Bracket, single, 24", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF J2WD24K Wall Bracket, double, 24", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 72 Olympic J1836K Item #311 �OK r Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 311- WIRE SHELVING (2 EA REQ'D) Olympic J1836K Shelf, wire, 18" x 36", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 ACCESSORIES Mfr Olympic Olympic Olympic Qty Model Spec 2 J1830K Shelf, wire, 18" x 30", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF 2 J1WD18K Wall Bracket, single, 18", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF 3 J2WD18K Wall Bracket, double, 18", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 73 San Jamar CK6536A Item #312 Nl� ro- I qlwmolcm Equipment 8s FlumWlAngs Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 312 - CHECK HOLDER! !CHECK QTY!! (12 EA REQ'D) San Jamar CK6536A Slide Check Rack, 36"L x 3/4"W x 3"H, glass marbles for smooth sliding, anodized aluminum (bagged with header card) <Incomplete> D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 74 SPG International Item #314 1�q r'WMUSjr Equipment & Ni mWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 314 - CATERING TABLE (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 72" x 30" Catering Table, with under -shelf and over -shelf D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 7S Focus Foodservice FGN074G Item #314.1 V�,"�%Wmsolr Equipment & FilmW2inW Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 314.1- POST (1 EA REQ'D) Focus FGN074G Post, 74"H, mobile, green epoxy coated with SaniGard'm The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 314.1 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 76 Custom Item #315 ® %wimmor Equipment & F urnWd gs Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 315 - S/S WALL FLASHING - BAKING STATION (56 EA REQ'D) Custom Priced per foot. Below oven Hood D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 77 Berner SLC07-1048A Item #316 Equipment & Fu*' Wii o Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 316 - AIR CURTAIN (1 EA REQ'D) BernerSLC07-1048A Sanitation Series Low Profile Air Curtain, 48"L, unheated, (1) 1/5 hp motor, for doors up to 7' high, aluminized steel cabinet, baked -on electrostatic white powdered coated aluminum steel cabinet, interior or exterior mounting, UL listed, EPH listed for NSF 37 The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 316 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Berner 1 Five year parts warranty (unheated units) Berner 1 Voltage MUST be specified Berner 1 White powder coat exterior finish standard ELECTRICAL D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 78 Berner SLC07-1048A Item #316 For Door Heights To 7' (insect control) STANDARD CONSTRUCTION • EPH Listed per NSF 37 • 8 1/2" high x 8" deep • 1/5 hp single speed motor(s) • White powder coated exterior (Optional: Custom Color or Stainless) • Wall & Top Mounting LIF��OLPH 5 Year Ifluillilkiraw Limited ed C&us @® . Air Curtain Fans for ANSI/NSF37 Warranty Made in u5A Customer Entry for outdoor use maximum mounting height is 7' MODEL Nozzle Width (in) Max Vel. at Nozzle (fpm) Avg. Outlet Vel. (fpm) Air Volume (cfm) Outlet Vel. Uniformity Power Rating (kW) Motor(s) @ hp Net Wt. (lbs) SLC07-1036A 34.62 3,621 1,786 1,020 92% 0.32 1 @ 1/5 35 SLC07-1042A 40.62 3,439 1,773 1,188 93% 0.32 1 @ 1/5 38 SLC07-1048A 46.62 3,274 1,769 1,360 94% 0.32 1 @ 1/5 42 SLC07-1060A 58.13 2,984 1,727 1,656 95% 0.32 1 @ 1/5 49 SLC07-1072A 71.37 2,913 1,725 2,031 95% 0.32 1 @ 1/5 56 SLC07-2084A 83.50 3,439 1,725 2,376 93% 0.64 2 @ 1/5 76 SLC07-2096A 95.50 3,274 1,727 2,720 94% 0.64 2 @ 1/5 84 SLC07-2108A 107.00 3,274 11709 3,016 94% 0.64 2 @ 1/5 91 SLC07-2120A 118.50 2,984 1,695 3,312 95% 0.64 2 @ 1/5 98 NOTE: Operation at 50 Hz will generate approximately a 17% reduction in air performance. See sheet EP-300 for amp draws/total load requirements. MODEL NUMBER CONFIGURATION S LC07-1 036 A A -SS SLC07 1, 2 036" 120" A=Ambient A=1zo»/so SS=Stainless Steel e=208/1/6o J=240/1/60 CC=Custom Color V=220/1/50 'Suitable for 50hz VELOCITY PROFILE: Model SLC07-1036A Distance from Nozzle (ft) 1 2 1 3 4 Core Velocity (fpm) 1986 1643 1407 Sound level measured 10' (3m) from the unit in free field: 1 & 2 motor(s): 54 dBA & 57 dBA Berner reserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 79 Berner SLC07-1048A Item #316 208/1/60 (voltage code B) or 120/1/60 (voltage code A) 220/1/50 (voltage code V) 240/1/60 (voltage code J) MOTOR AMP DRAW = 3.4 each MOTOR AMP DRAW = 1.7 each MOTOR AMP DRAW = 1.7 each MODEL # CKTS AMPS PER CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING PER CIRCUIT # CKTS AMPS PER CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING PER CIRCUIT # CKTS AMPS PER CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING PER CIRCUIT SLC07-1036A SLC07-1042A SLC07-1048A 1 3.4 15 1 1.7 15 1 1.7 15 SLC07-1060A SLC07-1072A SLC07-2084A SLC07-2096A SLC07-2108A 1 6.8 15 1 3.4 15 1 3.4 15 SLC07-2120A Berner reserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice. ©Copyright, 2015 Berner International Corporation D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 80 LO _1 M SC E 41 Y 00 00 0 0 u 10-24 CHF'EADED INSEPT FOR TOP MOUNTING iTYP)L TO P VIEW WIPING COMPARTMCNT COVED �/ 1/2" CONDUIT KNOCkOUT MOUNTING WIDTH - "C" /� C071] S -II -1 c 0 7 TYP AMIE BET'-JT SYSTEM Sll'-TG E SPEED . � WIDTH TO ELECTPICAL CONNECTION -°D" - END VIEW FRONT VIEW PERFOPATFCI INTAKE SCREEN WALL MOUNTING/COVER PLATE 11NIT WIDTH �- "6" - --- ---- _� - E0.957 -- R.50 C�L5'97 - 0.68 C1,731 -- --- --- TYP `EPEE o°°oD °°0aoo°°D0 °oo=oo °D°DD°°°oD° AIR° \� � �UD°° oa9o°°0 0°°0°00a 0 o °°oHD°o°o90°o0°°D oo D°°°o°O°0D°00° OODD00D0o00 D000o0DDD0D 000O0Do0000 OOOOOD0o0DD D00000D0o0o o°o°o°0gq-00m0 D°o°o ODD00000D00 N DDDO°DDDDDDDDODODD 0o00oDDDo°DD D°0D0DDD0oDD0D0o00o°D°D D°0°DD0D0000000DO°°°°�° °DDo000DODODDDD°D°MA DDD°0°D00°D°DDODO°OD0°0 °D°D°o�.D°0°D_.D°D°D°D°D"0°D°0°o°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°0°0°D°D°D°D°D°D E 0gU00g00 D°D°D°o°D°n°D°0°D°D°D°0°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°0°D°0°D°0,D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D°D_ )BOTTOM[ VIEW ADJUSTABLE NOZZLE VANES ,TYP), !�gggogoBSg°g�gogo_og o��Oag°og�oOoggu g ogo_04ogDogogng�� —_-NOZZLE WIDTH MODEL LC07. 1036A NOZZLE WIDTH 34,62 [87,'951 UNI1'D" WIDTH 36.06 1`11601 MOUNTING WIDTH 35,50 [90L71 ELEC"CRIC WIDTH IL43 C24,U51 LCUI I042A 4062 C10s.171 4- 1)h [lur,.331 41.50 CIp5-411 17.06 C43.331 ALCU7 1n4PA4r,o2 CLIS.417 4S.Ub C122.077 1 47.50 Cl2U.651 17A2 C43S07 58,13 C147.o51 59.55 It5L2o1 5900 C149.86] 23,18 C58,88] _-.Lru7-1060A ;LC07-lU7;_'A 7t.37 CI8L28] 72.2I CIS4.94] 72.25 C123.521 29.50 [74.931 LLCU/-20S4A 23.50 [212.091 84.94 C215.741 84.'8. C214.311 17.06 C43.333 CLC07 2U96A 95.50 C242571 96.94 C246-231 %38 [244.79] 17.12 C4350 .] `LC07 2108A 107.00 [271.7S7 IU8.44 [275.447 107.S 8 (274.00] 17.12 C42.501 LC07-212bA 11S.50 [200A)3 119.94 [304,65] 1 U938 13103.211 23.18 158.80] V 41R FLOW N0TESS i INN DUDg Dgogog �oog��oa o02 8cao°go 1 AIR CUPTAiN MIJ:T BE INSTALLED S❑ AIR STREAM IS NOT -- ORSTPUCTED WHEN DEFLECTED 20' TO EITHER CIDE OF 1L, /c ELECTPICAL CUNNECTIUNS TO BE FLEXIBLE. -- FIELD VERIFY DIMENJ[DNC. ® ANCHOP.'3 ID SUPPDRTING-TRUCTURE BY OTHERS, L\ ADEOUACY OF _UPPOPTING �TPUCTUPE IS TO DC VEPtFIED BY A PROI%ESIONAL :TRUCTURAL ENG[NEEP. LETTER 'A" IN MODEL NUMBER DESIGNATE. AMBIENT UNIT, - DIMENSION: IN INCHEC LCENTIMETEPC]. v PPOJECT -- LOCH LION ARCHITECT -- ANSUMSF'jT ENGINEER REv - AirCurtainFansfor DWG. No. SLC07-Aria MILE �� Customer Entry � DATE. 140CT14 13 E R T E R 12CS MODEL SLC07 CURTAIN BY BE'i! AM©IENI SYSTEM ,REPLACES - BEPNER INTERNATIONAL CORP. 00 ai an r0 CL O U OD L Z3 co v E a cy w v G U1 c U U L =3 O In L N Y co m Z5 C O U Ql cn M lD a --I Blodgett Oven DFG100XCEL BASE Item #317 Equipment & i+umWi_-p CO. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 317 - OVEN (1 EA REQ'D) Blodgett Oven DFG10OXCEL BASE Xcel Convection Oven, gas, (base section only) single -deck, standard depth, capacity (5) 18" x 26" pans, 2-speed fan, porcelain interior liner with coved corners, EZ slide rack, porcelain crumb tray, interior lights, stainless steel front, sides & top, glass doors with removable interior glass windows, converts 60,000 to 80,000 BTU each ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Blodgett Oven 1 (3) year parts, (2) year labor warranty and (2) additional year door warranty (parts only), standard Blodgett Oven 1 Natural gas Blodgett Oven 1 115v/60/1-ph, 10.0 amps, cord & plug, NEMA 5-15P, 3/4 hp, standard Blodgett Oven 1 SSI-M Solid State infinite with 60 min. electro- mechanical timer, standard Blodgett Oven 1 Draft diverter, stainless steel Blodgett Oven 1 Solid stainless steel door in lieu of standard glass door Blodgett Oven 1 37107 Special Corner Bakery Flue Box. Blodgett Oven 1 19S28 Low Profile Casters ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE I CONN AFF I NEMA I AMPS I KW I HP MCA MOCP 1 115 60 1 `P� g& J _S_1S_PT_ 10 3/4 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 82 Wasserstrom !!WHICH STYLE: L OR R?!! Item #318 Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 318 - SOUP RETHERMALIZER / SOUP CHUB (1 EA REQ-D) Wasser !!WHICH STYLE: L OR R?!! <Incomp!ete> ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Wasser 1 F47407010ON N. Wasserstrom & Sons Model No. CRATING Packed: ea Packaging Fee For Corner Bakery Cafe's Rethermalizer D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 83 Delfield 18672BSTM Item #319 1�0 r'winaor Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 319 -REFRIGERATED WORK TOP (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield 18672BSTM Refrigerated Work Table, two -section, 72" W, 18.10 cubic feet, (2) 27" doors, stainless steel top and exterior, interior aluminum floor & back ABS sides, 4" high backsplash, 6" casters, side -mounted (HFC-404A) refrigeration system, 1/4 hp, cUL, UL, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 319 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Delfield 1 115v/60/1-ph, 10 amps, 8' cord, NEMA 5-1513, standard Delfield 1 (3) Year parts & labor warranty standard Delfield 1 Self-contained refrigeration system, standard Delfield 1 (5) Year compressor warranty standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 1/4 Cord d 2 115 60 1 5-15P 10 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 84 Delfield 18672BSTM Item #319 1--V `Delfield 1860OBSTM Self -Contained Refrigerated WorkTables With Backsplash Models • 18648BSTM • 18660BSTM • 18672BSTM • 18691BSTM • 18699BSTM • 186114BSTM 48" refrigerated work table with 4" backsplash 60" refrigerated work table with 4" backsplash 72" refrigerated work table with 4" backsplash 91" refrigerated work table with 4" backsplash 99" refrigerated work table with 4" backsplash 114" refrigerated work table with 4" backsplash 18648BSTM Standard Features Stainless steel exterior is standard Compressor is located on right Finished stainless steel ends Stainless steel top 4" high backsplash Environmentally friendly HFC-404A refrigerant Standard on casters High density foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane keeps energy costs low Three year parts and labor warranty and an additional two year compressor parts warranty 980 S. Isabella Rd. Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & furnishings Co. Project Item Quantity CSI Section 11400 Approved Date Options & Accessories Laminate facing (full front) Laminate end Laminate back Tray racks Cutting board (20" wide x .5"thick) Legs, set of four or six 18"deep single tier stainless steel overshelf Refrigerated drawers Lock Additional shelf (specify door size) Remote refrigeration 230W50 cycle electrical system* * Inclusion of this option will alter the electrical specifications of the unit eanitowoc Page: 85 - M V0 0 C) W n 0 rD Q rD a, rD Q 0 CT rD OD v n to Ln Delfield 18672BSTM Item #319 'Delfield 1860OBSTM 7 31.50' [80cm] 1 Plan View 18648BSTM F� 48.00" [ 122cm] - 4 6.00" === [15cm] === 27.00" [69cm] =_- 15.00" --� I- [38cm] Elevation View 18648BSTM 7 31.50" [80cm] A Plan View 18660BSTM 60.00" [152cm] 0 0 --- 19.00" 27.00" [69cm1 --- [48cm] === --- 14.00" [36cm] Elevation View 18660BSTM 1 7 31.50" 31.50" [80cm] [80cm] Plan View Plan View 18672BSTM 18691BSTM 72.00" [183cm] 0 0 --- 27.00" [69cm] 27.00" [69cm] --- 18.00" [46cm] Elevation View 18672BSTM i 91.00" [231cm] 0 0 0 --- 27.00" [69cm] 19.00" 27.00" [69cm] _== [48cm] Elevation View 18691BSTM 18.00" [46cm] 7 7 31.50' 31.50" [80cm] [80cm] Plan View Plan View 18699BSTM 186114BSTM F 99.00" [251cm] �I 27.00" [69cm] 27.00" [69cm] 27.00" [69cm] _-_ 114.00" [290cm] �! 32.00"[81 cm] 32.00"[81 cm] 32.00"[81 cm] - - - 18.00" 18.00" [46cm]--� __= I- I-[46cm] Elevation View Elevation View 186996STM 186114BSTM 36.00" 40.00" [91 cm] [102cm] 6.12" ` [16cm] 7.6` [19cm] End View BSTM Models NOTE: Unobstructed airflow must be maintained to insure unit performance and maintain warranty Canitowoc D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 86 Delfield 18672BSTM Item #319 1---'V `Delfield Door Swing 1 \ 17.00" [43cm] Clearance 19.00" [48cm] Door 1860OBSTM �pecmcatlons I -Tl 22.00" \ [56cm] \ Once 24.00" [61 cm] Door 1 \ 25.00" \ [64cm] Clearance 27.00" [69cm] Door 30.00" [76cm] Clearance 32.00" [81 cm] Door Model Number of Doors Shelf Area Volume BTU Load BTU Capacity H.P. V/Hz/Ph Amps Nema Plug Ship Weight LBS/KG Energy KWH/Da 18648BSTM (1) 27" 3.95ft2 10.23ft3 475 1462 1/5 115/60/1 8.0 5-15P 390/177 1.83 18660BSTM (1) 19"8,(1)27" 6.51ft2 15.12ft3 686 1462 1/5 115/60/1 8.0 5-15P 435/197 1.94 18672BSTM (2) 27" 7.90ft2 18.10ft3 856 2263 1/5 115/60/1 8.0 5-15P 495/225 2.09 18691 BSTM (2) 27" & (1) 19" 10.29ft2 24.48ft3 1169 2263 1 /4 115/60/1 10.0 5-15P 535/243 2.92 18699BSTM (3) 27" 11.85ft2 27.46ft3 1220 2263 1/4 115/60/1 10.0 5-15P 594/269 2.98 186114BSTM (3) 32" 14.46ft2 37.24ft3 1373 2813 1/3 1 115/60/1 12.0 1 5-15P 685/310 3.36 Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice. eanitowoc 3 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 87 Delfield 18672BSTM Item #319 "Delfield 1860OBSTM Self -Contained Refrigerated WorkTables With Backsplash Specifications Exterior top is constructed of heavy duty stainless steel, with integral 2.12" (5cm) high square nosing at the front. Top is insulated with high -density insulation. Exterior back and bottom are galvanized steel. Exterior ends are finished with stainless steel. Interior base has stainless steel back and bottom. Interior ends and door frames are thermoformed ABS plastic. Base is insulated with high -density foamed -in - place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane. Each interior door section has (1) removable epoxy -coated wire shelf. Door(s) have stainless steel exterior front, with a thermoformed ABS plastic interior liner. Black recessed handle(s) and a snap -in magnetic gasket which is readily replaceable. Base has a machine compartment, standard on right, with a condensing unit with condensate evaporator and an electrical junction box installed. Machine compartment has a removable louver for access to condensing unit. Blower coil(s) with expansion valve are located behind the door mullions. Refrigeration system uses HFC-404A refrigerant, and will maintain 36°F (2°C) to 407 (4°C) interior cabinet temperature. Electrical connections are 115 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase. Unit has a 8' (2.4m) long cord and plug. Casters: Unit is mounted on 5" (13cm) diameter casters; overall height of casters is 6.13" (16cm). NSF R404A 980 S. Isabella Rd. Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Printed in the U.S.A. Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Fax: 800-669-0619 5517A_188STM www.delfieldxom 9/15 canitowoc 4 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 88 OLYMPIC J2442K Item #320 \!9r077mozir Equipment & Furnishings Co. ITEM# 320 - (8 EA REQ'D) OLYMPIC J2442K 24" x 42" epoxy wire shelf ACCESSORIES Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 Mfr Qty Model OLYMPIC 4 J86UK Olympic 1 J5FBA-4 Spec 86" epoxy mobile post Stem/Swivel-Brake Caster Set, includes (4) 5" dia. casters with brake, 1-1/4" face, non -marking, high modulus rubber tread, 300 lb. capacity per caster, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 89 Dormont Manufacturing 1675KITS48 Item #400 %0,r,WM4Bjr Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 400 - SAFETY SYSTEM MOVEABLE GAS CONNECTOR (2 EA REQ-D) Dormont 1675KITS48 10/08/2015 Dormont Blue Hose"' Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast® QD, 1 Swivel MAX®, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware, 167,000 BTU/hr minimum flow capacity, limited lifetime warranty The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 304 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 90 By Owner Item #401 ® w3msir Equipment 8a FumWdno Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 401- COOKLINE HOOD (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER Grease Master 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 91 By Owner Item #401.1 %ro Equipment 8s Fumishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 401.1- PANINI HOOD (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER Grease Master 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 92 SPG International Item #402 00 ® WMISOr Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 402 - S/S BREAD SHELF (48') (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 93 By Owner Item #406 %Aro w3mair Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 406 - TRASH CAN (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER <by Owner> 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 94 SPG International Item #408 %4® W3M&jr Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 408 - TOASTER SHELF ABOVE PASTA COOKER (1 EA REQ'D) SPG D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 95 SPG International Item #408.1 Submittal Sheet ITEM# 408.1- DEFLECTOR SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 15" D x 36" W 18GA 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 96 SPG International Item #408.2 Equipment 8a F�trnishIngs Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 408.2 - WALL SHELF ABOVE RETHERMALIZER (1 EA REQ-D) SPG D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 97 APW Wyott CW-2AI I IDO THESE CHANGE!! Item #409 Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 409 - FOOD PAN WARMER/COOKER, COUNTERTOP (1 EA REQ'D) APW Wyott CW-2AI IIDO THESE CHANGEII X*PERT'' Food Pan Cooker/Warmer, electric, countertop, 22 quart capacity, full size, wet operation, thermostatic control, "W" shaped element, knob guards, stainless steel construction, UL, CSA, CE <Incomplete> The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 409 - ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec APW Wyott 1 1 year parts & labor warranty, standard APW Wyott 1 120v/60/1-ph, 1500w, 12.5 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard C ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 60 1 5-15P 12.5 1.5 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 98 APW Wyott CW-2AI HDO THESE CHANGEH Item #409 A'-W A Standex Company PRODUCT: Designed Smart QUANTITY: ITEM #: • Designed to cook and hold pre-cooked foods from frozen state. • Perfect for soups, chili, and other dishes that need a quick thaw during the cooking cycles and a gentle warming heat for serving. • CW-2Ai model has unique "serpentine shaped" heating elements that evenly distribute heat throughout the unit. • CW-1 B utilizes a bottom mounted heating element and an aluminum transfer plate to provide superior heat. • Provided with insulation to protect interior parts and countertops from heat build-up. • CW-1 B accepts an 11 qt. inset, or with adaptor, a 7 or 4 qt. inset. • Both models are provided with knob guards. Built Solid • Constructed with heavy-duty stainless steel for excellent durability. • Inside liner made with stainless steel. • Steel "element support" stabilizes heating elements and reflects heat toward food. Reliability backed by APW Wyott's Warranty • The CW-2Ai and CW-1 B are backed by a 1-year Parts and Labor warranty. • The CW-2Ai is included in our "Enhanced Warranty' service that replaces new units with certain product issues through the convenience of direcVfactory shipments. Certified by the following agencies: X, n C ET4 us YEAR '�� lmn. LIMITED Intertek Intertek MODELS: o CW-2Ai ❑ CW-18 Model CW-2Ai Classic Cook & Serve Model CW-1 B Classic Cook & Serve APW Wyott Design Features • Wet Usage 100°F to 212T (38°C to 100°C) recommended. • Heavy-duty stainless steel for long life. • Easy to clean. • Thermostatically controlled. • Great for buffets, serving lines, back bars or back -of -the -house. • Handles breakfast, lunch and dinner. • Pans and insets not included. See reverse side for product specifications. APW Wyott Foodservice Equipment Company • 1307 N. Walters Rd Suite 180, Allen, 7X 75013 (800) 527-2100 - (972) 908-6100 • Fax (214) 565-0976 • www.apwwyott.com• info(@apwwyott.com Rev. 090513cp D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 99 APW Wyott CW-2AI IIDO THESE CHANGEI I Item #409 �! A Standex Company_ MODELS: o CW-2Ai ❑ CW-16 PRODUCT: QUANTITY: ITEM #: 9314" (24.e) Model Cwf-2A Classic Cook & Serve 10518 1210" 12112" Model Cw-1 B Classic Cook & Serve Product Specifications Construction: Stainless steel housing and liner pan, 1" fiberglass insulation, 1" rubber legs. Dimensions: CW-1 B: 10 5l8"H x 12'/2° W x 12'/2° D (27 cm x 32 cm x 32 cm) CW-2Ai: 9 3/4'H x 14" W x 22" D (25 cm x 36 cm x 56 cm) Electrical Information: Each unit is equipped with a 60" three wire grounded power cord which terminates with a standard three pronged male plug. The 120V unit uses a NEMA 5-15 plug. The 240V unit uses a NEMA 6- 15P 90° plug. Electrical Specifications: CW-1 B: 120V, 800 W, 6.7 Amps 240V, 800 W, 3.03 Amps CW-2Ai: 120V, 1500 W, 12.5 Amps 240V, 1600 W, 6.7 Amps 208V, 1200 W, 5.8 Amps CW-1 B Options: • 7 quart Adapter Plate (55707) • 4 quart Adapter Plate (55704) CW-2Ai Options: • Two 7 quart Adapter Plates (14883) • Three 4 quart Adapter Plates (14886) • One 7 qt I One 11 qt Adapter Plate (14880) Capacity: CW-1 B: 11 qt CW-2Ai: 22 qt Shipping Information: CW-1 B: 16 Lbs (7.3 kg) CW-2Ai: 21 Lbs (13.3kg) Freight Class: 92'/z FOB: Arizona, 85621 *APW Wyott Reserves the right to modify specifications or discontinue models without incurring obligation APW Wyott Foodservice Equipment Company • 1307 N. Watters Rd Suite 180, Allen, 7X 75013 (800) 527-2100 • (972) 908-6100 • Fax(214) 565-0976 www.apwwyott.com• info(@apwwyottcom Rev. 090513cp D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 100 Wells HDHP-3630G-PS Item #410 Equipment 8s Fun]lishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 410 - COUNTERTOP HOTPLATE (1 EA REQ'D) Wells HDHP-3630G-PS Hotplate, natural gas, countertop, (6) 26,000 BTU burners, cast iron grates, stainless steel housing, individual burner controls, full width drip tray, 4" steel legs, 159,000 BTU, CSA The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 410 ACCESSORIES Mfr Dormont GAS SIZE MBTU KW 1 3/4" 159.0 2 167.0 Qty Model Spec ***ADD 7" PLATE SHELF #021214DE1*** 1 1675KITS48 Dormont Blue Hose— Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast® QD, 1 Swivel MAX", 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware, 167,000 BTU/hr minimum flow capacity, limited lifetime warranty STEAM INLET SIZE RETURN SIZE LB/HR PSIG (min) PSIG (max) 1 2 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter ' W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 101 Wells HDHP-3630G-PS Item #410 ,(0—:- r 90 Years Of Quality Foodservice ductsAnd Service Model HDHP2430G Wells HD Gas Hot Plates are a perfect match with the Wells HD Gas Griddles and HD Gas Char Broilers. The HDHP Series Hot Plates are extra heavy-duty and feature cast iron burners and top grates for higher heat, consistent temperatures and quick recovery. Each burner features operator adjustable infinite heat adjustment and On/Off control, adjustable air shutter to control air and optimize combustion. Durable heavy-duty cast iron burners are easily removable for cleaning and provide superior flame characteristics, even heat, higher maximum heat and gentle low heat. Additional specifications include removable stainless steel front panel for easy access to components, stainless steel side panels, removable drip pan for ease of clean up and adjustable 4" heavy- duty steel legs. HD Gas Hot Plates ship natural gas and are field convertible to LP Gas - conversion kit included. Job Item No. HD Gas Counter Hot Plates MODELS ❑ HDHP1230G ❑ HDHP2430G ❑ HDHP3630G ❑ Cast iron top grates ❑ Cast iron burners „❑ Each burner has adjustable heat control, On/Off control valves and adjustable air shutter for perfect combustion ❑ Available in 2, 4, 6 burner models ❑ Stainless steel front and sides ❑ Easily removable front panel ❑ Convertible from NG to LP - conversion kit included ❑ Removable drip pan ❑ Heavy-duty 4" steel legs ❑ Additional set of 4 adjustable legs #20563 ❑ 2 year parts and one year labor warranty ®� Wells Bloomfield • 10 Sunnen Dr. St. Louis, MO 63143 U.S.A. Phone : (314) 678-6314 • Fax (314) 781-5445 www.wellsbfoomfield.com • Printed in the U.S.A. Sheet No. WELLS HDHP-07/14 NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice and are not intended for installation purposes. See installation instructions prior to installing the unit D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 102 Wells HDHP-3630G-PS Item #410 Over 90 Years Of QualityFoodservice Products And Service 7I I I- I -I IA II r-T I 1!_ 1 3/4 C441 30 114 ! C7681 HD Gas Counter Hot Plates MODELS ❑ HDHP1230G ❑ HDHP2430G 0 HDHP3630G MINIMUM CLEARANCE FROM NON-COMBUSTIBLE SURFACES J BACK SIDE BOTTOM FRONT (Omm) (Omm) (102mm) (Omm) 29 A C7371 10 13/16 ® ® ® ® ® ® 14 11/16 12751 (3731 1— 7 1/2 [1911 B —. MIN. 4' LEGS­'17 1/4 MUST BE C4381 INSTALLED [140] DIMENSIONS: INCH (MMI NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice and are not intended for installation purposes. See installation instructions at www.wellsbloomfield.com prior to installing unit. Model Number Width Width Depth No. of (A) (B) (MM) Controls (MM) (MM) 12" 10-5/8" 30-1/4" HDHP1230G 2 (305) (270) (768) HDHP2430G 4 23-3/4" 22-3/8" 30-1/4" (603) (568) (768) HDHP363OG 6 35-1/2" 34-1/4" 30-1/4" (902) (870) (768) 'PROPANE CONVERSION KIT INCLUDED WITH EACH HOTPLATE Height BTU Rating Approx. Approx. (MM) Natural L.P. Weight Weight (Includes 4°r Shipping Installed legs) GAS 5" W.C. GAS 10" W.C. lbs. lbs. (kg) (kg) 14-11/16"� 53,000 43,000" 88 67 (373) (40) (30) 14-11/16" 106,000 86,00V 225 133 (373) (102) (60) 14-11/16" 159,000 129,000' 304 199 (373) (138) (90) Due to periodic changes in designs, methods, procedures, policies and regulations, the specifications contained in this sheet are subject to change without notice. While Wells exercises good faith efforts to provide information that is accurate, we are not responsible for errors or omissions in information provided or conclusions reached as a result of using the specifications. By using the information provided, the user assumes all risks in connection with such use. 'wWells Bloomfield • 10 Sunnen Dr. St. Louis, MO 63143 U.S.A. NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without 4f Phone: (314) 678-6314 • Fax (314) 781-5445 notice and are not intended for installation purposes. www.wellsbloomfield.com • Printed in the U.S.A. See installation instructions prior to installing the unit D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 103 Custom PLATE SHELF Item #410.1 N�fo 7"Timmir Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 410.1- PLATE SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) Custom PLATE SHELF PART OF ITEM 410 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 104 Delfield F2936C Item #i411 '�� rowimusor Equipment & HiunWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 411- EQUIPMENT STAND, REFRIGERATED BASE (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield F2936C Refrigerated Low -Profile Equipment Stand, 36-1/4" W, single -section, (2) drawers (pans not included), stainless steel top & drawer fronts, front non -spill edge, ABS interior sides, casters, side -mounted refrigeration system with electric condensate evaporator, 1/5 hp, NSF 7 The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 411 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Delfield 1 115v/60/1-ph, 3.8 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard Delfield 1 (5) Year compressor warranty standard Delfield 1 (3) Year parts & labor warranty standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 1/5 2 115 60 1 5-15P 3.8 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 105 Delfield F2936C Item #411 "Delfield F2900C Self -Contained Low -Profile Refrigerated Equipment Stands Models • F2936C 36.25" Self contained low -profile stand • F2952C 52.25" Self contained low -profile stand • F2956C 56.25" Self contained low -profile stand • F2962C 62.25" Self contained low -profile stand • F2975C 75.25" Self contained low -profile stand F2952C Standard Features Top is heavy duty stainless steel, with full perimeter marine edge Standard stainless steel ends Exterior drawer fronts are stainless steel High density environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane foam insulation throughout unit Snap -in drawer gaskets for easy removal Mounted on casters 8'cord and plug supplied Base interior cabinet is cooled with mullion style coated blower coil(s) mounted between each door/drawer section for even air and temperature control Interior refrigerated base cabinet section to Project Item Quantity CSI Section 11400 Approved Date • F2980C 80.25" Self contained low -profile stand • F2987C 87.25" Self contained low -profile stand • F2999C 99.25" Self contained low -profile stand • F291 10C 110.25" Self contained low -profile stand maintain 36' to 40° meeting NSF7 Digital thermometer Wall -mounted bracket to prevent tipping Full Extension Plus Drawer system is a complete drawer system. Drawer system is sized to hold 12"x 20"x 4"deep hotel pans (by others).The drawer system is all stainless steel construction for maximum durability When ordering, specify make, model and depth of cooking equipment sitting on the equipment stand Height of surface for setting equipment is 25.50" Environmentally friendly HFC-404A refrigerant Three year parts and labor warranty and an additional two year compressor parts warranty 980 S. Isabella Rd. Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Fax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Options & Accessories Drawer locks 230V, 50Hz electrical system* Stainless steel back Mechanical housing left side 4"casters in lieu of 6" 6.12" adjustable full stainless steel legs and bullet feet Doors in lieu of drawers (except 32") Plastic laminate end Plastic laminate back Plastic laminate front * Inclusion of this option will alter electrical specifications eanttowoc Page: 106 I r\J mil/ 0 O n In rD n 0 r+ v rD r- 0 v 0 rD DD rD CD n m Q c 3 CD rt r-+ Q Ln � I [|��\/At'(lF1�\/'��\�/� | L|,_,^.U^...� V|.—.,� | F2936C 9i 0.' Y] 6 00' - ' 41'cM 32 F2956C Q 1 too 62.25' L148 Y� MMMM— � UU Warning n,assure proper operation araiopacemust he maintained between the bottom ofany cooking equipment and the top of this unit. Cooking equipment must have abarrier (i.e.bottom, drip � pan) between its heat source and the top ofthe equipment stand. Failure to comply with this could severely damage the equipment stand and void all warranties. F291lOC Canitowoc a D10349 Corner Bakery Suuthcemer VV.West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page:1O7 Delfield F2936C Item #411 'Delfield All Models Plan View I All Models Right Side View Nominal Length + 0.25" (6mm) 30.93" 79cm W/ Marine Edge Top F2900C Specifications 7.62" 6}12" (19cm) (16cm) 26.00" (66cm) Self-contained Models #Of12x20 Pans V/Hz/Ph Amps Ship Weight BTULood BTU System H.P. Nema Plug F2936C 3 115/60/1 3.8 374lbs(170kg) 376 1727 1/5 5-15-P F2952C 4 115/60/1 8.0 3981 bs (181 kg) 452 1727 1/5 5-15P F2956C 4 115/60/1 8.0 4051bs(184kg) 461 1727 1/5 5-15P F2962C 6 115/60/1 8.0 479lbs(217kg) 575 1727 1/5 5-15P F2975C 8 115/60/1 10.0 540lbs(245kg) 717 2341 1/4 5-15P F2980C 8 115/60/1 10.0 578lbs(262kg) 726 2341 1/4 5-15P F2987C 10 1 115/60/1 10.0 672lbs(305kg) 868 2341 1/4 S 15P F2999C 12 115/60/1 10.0 691 lbs (313kg) 1029 2341 1/4 5-15P F29110C 12 115/60/1 12.0 766lbs(347kg) 1143 2630 1/3 5 15P NOTE: Remove the"C"on the model number when ordering with legs. (example - F2952) Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice. Canitowoc 3 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 108 Delfield F2936C Item #411 "Delflield F2900C Self -Contained Low -Profile Refrigerated Equipment Stands Specifications Exterior top is 18-gauge stainless steel with full perimeter marine edge. Corners are fully welded with smooth radii corners for easy clean out. Interior sub -top made of 22- gauge 2BF stainless steel is made integral with the top by injecting 2.00' of high density polyurethane foam between the exterior and interior tops. Refrigerated base interior back and bottom are constructed of a 22-gauge 2BF stainless steel. Exterior bottom and back are made of 22-gauge galvanized steel. Exterior sides aer made of stainless steel. Both left and right interior sides are formed of ABS plastic. The base is injected with 2.00" of high density polyurethane foam between the exterior and interior. Refrigerated base fronts are made of .095" thick ABS thermoformed plastic and backed up by ridged polyurethane water blown injection molded frames. The frames are an excellent thermo-break and superior structural material for fastening doors. and drawers. Finished stainless steel ends are standard. Louver, coil panel and drawer faces are all standard with stainless steel construction. Units are supplied with wall -mounted bracket and threaded rod to allow installation of the unit against a solid surface. Full Extension Plus drawer system is a complete drawer system, which can operate independent of the unit it's installed in. Drawer system is sized to hold 12' x 20" x 4" deep hotel pans and smaller fractional pans. Drawer system is all stainless steel construction for maximum durability. Drawer track rollers are made of Delrin and do not require grease for operation. Intermediate tracks are removable without tools and house Delfield's "anti -friction binary roller system". Drawer boxes are designed with "easy pan grip flanges'. Tracks are designed with a stay shut feature that holds the drawer gasket tight to the base front on uneven floors. Exterior drawer fronts are made of stainless steel; and an interior made of ABS plastic with formed in channels to house the snap -in dart style santoprene gasket. A galvanized brace is foamed in place to be an integral part of the drawer front assembly. Each drawer front is injected with 1.87' of high density polyurethane foam between the exterior and interior. Handles are recessed black plastic and held in with a positive lock system. Drawers are backed by a 10-year warranty on the track assembly. Unit is supported with two 14-gauge leg rails that run the entire length of the unit. Leg rails are welded to the bottom side of the unit and are tied together with two 12-gauge braces running front to back. Caster/leg boxes are welded inside the leg rail and 6" casters are mounted standard. Refrigeration system components are HFC-404A. Interior cabinet is cooled with mullion style blower coils (coated) mounted between each door/drawer section for very even air and temperature control. A thermostat and pre -wired condensing unit with hot gas condensate evaporator are installed in the machine compartment. Models F2952C through F29110C protect the thermostat in a splash resistant enclosure. The digital thermometer with stainless steel guard is located in the top nosing above the machine compartment (standard on right). Interior refrigerated base cabinet will maintain 36°F to 40°F at 100°F ambient room temperature. Electrical connections are 1 15V-60H-1 PH and supplied with an 8'cord and plug. �L C& NSF QWA 980 S. Isabella Rd. Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Printed in the U.S.A. Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Fax: 800-669-0619 5859_F2900 yr w.delfieldxom 04/15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Canaowoc Page: 109 Turbochef PANINI Item #412 %4r, Equipment & Fun shings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 412 - MICROWAVE CONVECTION OVEN (2 EA REQ'D) TurboChef PANINI PaniniTM Oven, Rapid Cook, electric, countertop, top -launched microwave system, external air filtration, LED timer, smart menu system, single or dual -temperature, built-in self diagnostics, smart voltage sensor technology, cool to touch exterior, 4" adjustable legs, die-cast aluminum front panel, powder coated steel exterior, stainless steel interior, includes: (2) trigger sprayers, (1) panini rack and tray, (1) aluminum paddle, (1) oven cleaner, (1) oven guard, 3.2 kW, cULus, CE, ANSI, TUV The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 412 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec TurboChef 2 All items FOB: Carrollton, Texas: Consumable/accessory orders less than $5,000 will incur a handling fee. Orders shipping standard ground will incur a $15.00 handling fee. Orders shipping other than standard ground will incur $25.00 handling fee TurboChef 2 One year parts and labor warranty TurboChef 2 208/240v/60/1-ph, 30.Oamps, 6 foot cord (nominal), NEMA 6-30P, standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS I CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 3.2 2 208/240 60 1 CPIu 6-30P 30.0 B& D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 110 TurboChef PANINI Item #412 THEPanini i1-3221 Kit: Panini Tray Panini Rack PERFORMANCE By combining TurboChef's i-Series technology with the Panini tray, restaurants can rapidly toast, heat, and grill Panini sandwiches. VENTILATION ■ UL® (KNLZ) listed for ventless operation.+ ■ EPA 202 test (8 hr): Product: Pepperoni Pizzas Results: 0.64 mg/m3 Ventless Requirement: <5.00 mg/m3 ■ Internal catalytic filtration to limit smoke, grease, and odor emissions. Project Item No. Quantity —' EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION ■ Powder coated (RAL-3020 -Traffic Red), corrosion -resistant steel outer wrap and door ■ Die-cast aluminum front panels with matte -chrome accents ■ Cool -to -touch exterior; all surfaces below 50'C ■ Ergonomic matte -chrome door handle ■ 4-inch adjustable legs INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION ■ 201 /304 stainless steel ■ Fully welded and insulated cook chamber ■ Removable rack and lower jetplate STANDARD FEATURES ■ Independently -controlled dual motors for vertically -recirculated air impingement • Top -launched microwave system ■ Stirrer to help ensure even distribution of air and microwave ■ Integral recirculating catalytic converter for UL® (KNLZ) listed ventless operation ■ External air filtration ■ Vent catalyst to further limit emissions and odors ■ LED timer counts down last 30 seconds of cook time ■ Smart menu system capable of storing up to 256 recipes ■ Flash firmware updates via smart card ■ Single or dual -temperature interface ■ Field -configurable for single or multiphase operation (requires service call) ■ Self -diagnostics for monitoring oven components and performance ■ Smart Voltage Sensor Technology* (U.S. only) ■ Includes plug and cord (6ft. nominal) ■ Warranty — 1 year parts and labor OPTIONAL FEATURE ■ Custom RAL color exterior (standard color: RAL 3020 Traffic Red) COMES WITH STANDARD ACCESSORIES ■ 1 Bottle Oven Cleaner (103180) ■ 1 Bottle Oven Guard (103181) ■ 2 Trigger Sprayers (103182) ■ 1 Aluminum Paddle (NGC-1478) ■ 1 PaniniRackandTray (i1-3221) u c-nwR/'k C ®� US ANSIINSF i14 fT C E 81 Y5 This product conforms to the ventilation recommendations set forth by NFPA96 using EPA202 test method. Smart Voltage Sensor Technology does not compensate for lack of or over voltage situations. It is the responsibility of the owner to supply voltage to the unit according to the specifications on the back of this sheet. 1. Blower Motors 2. Microwave System ' Vemless certification is for all food items except for foods classified as "fatty raw proteins" Such foods include bone -in, skin -on chicken, raw hamburger meat, raw bacon, raw sausage, steaks, etc. If cooking these types of foods, consult 3. Stirred Impinged Air (Top) and Microwave localHVACcodesandauthoritiestoensurecompliancewithventilationrequirements. 4. Impinged Air (Bottom) Ultimate ventless allowance is dependent upon AHJ approval, as some jurisdictions may not recognize the UL 5. Catalytic Converter certification or application. If you have questions regarding ventless certifications or local codes, please email 6. Impingement Heater ventless.help@turbochef.com 7. Vent Tube Catalyst TurboChef reserves the right to make substitutions of components or change specifications without prior notice. 8. Air Filter 9. Inlet Air for CoolingElectronic Components D - A/ i5/Revision a` D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 11 .E C TurboChef PANINITURB(OCHEF 16.0" (406 mm) 21.0" (533 mm) 4.0" (102Tmm) T (299.7 mm) 2.5" 27.3" (64 mm) (693 mm) 18.5" (470 mm) --►I 4.2" (107 mm) Single Units Height 25.0" 635 mm Width 16.0" 406 mm Depth 29.8" 757 mm Weight 170 lb. 77.1 kg Cook Chamber Height 7.2" 183 mm Width 12.5" 317 mm Depth 10.5" 266 mm Volume 0.54 cu.ft. 15.4 liters Wall Clearance (Oven not intended forbuilt-in installation) Top 5" 102 mm Sides 2" 51 mm SHIPPING INFORMATION U.S.: All ovens shipped within the U.S. are packaged in a double -wall corrugated box banded to a wooden skid. International: All International ovens shipped via Air or Less than Container Loads are packaged in wooden crates. Box size: 37"x 24" x 37" (940 mm x 610 mm x 940 mm) Crate size: 38"x 26"x 38"(965 mm x 660 mm x 965 mm) Item class: 85 NMFC #26770 HS code 8419.81 Approximate boxed weight: 205 lb. (93 kg) Approximate crated weight: 275 lb. (125 kg) Minimum entry clearance required for box: 24.5"(622 mm) Minimum entry clearance required for crate: 26.5"(673 mm) Item #412 10.7" 2.5" (272 mm) 25.9' (64 mm) 10 (658 mm) 0t 39.1" (993 mm) I US, CAN, LA (NEMA 6-30P) )cation g (^1 AUK, BK (IEC 309, 3-pin) U JK (NEMA 1-6-50, PSE, 3-blade) 1 j) JD (NEMA 1-6-50, PSE, 4-blade) ED, BD, SD (IEC 309, 4-pin) EW, KW (IEC 309, 5-pin) 1 AU (Clipsal, 5-pin) SPECIFICATIONSELECTRICAL SINGLE PHASE US/Canada 11-9500-111-US 208/240 VAC, 60 Hz, 30 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW /MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Europe (UK) 11-9500-112-UK 230 VAC, 50 Hz, 27 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Brazil (BK) I1-9500-116-8,K 220 VAC, 60 Hz, 28 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Latin America (LA) I1-9500-117-LA 220 VAC, 60 Hz, 28 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Japan (JK) 11-9500-118-JK 200 VAC, 50 Hz, 30 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Japan (JK) 11-9500-120-JK 200 VAC, 60 Hz, 30 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW:3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW MULTIPHASE Europe Delta (ED) I1-9500-113-ED 230 VAC, 50 Hz, 20 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Europe Wye (EW) I1-9500-114-EW 400 VAC, 50 Hz, 16 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Australia Wye (AU) I1-9500-715-AU 400 VAC, 50 Hz, 16 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Japan Delta (JD) I1-9500-119-1D 200 VAC, 50 Hz, 20 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Japan Delta (JD) I1-9500-121-JD 200 VAC, 60 Hz, 20 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Korea/Middle East Wye (KW) 11-9500-122-KW 400 VAC, 60 Hz, 16 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW Korea/Middle East Delta (SD) I1-9500-123-SD 230 VAC, 60 Hz, 20 amps Max Input: 6.2 kW / MW: 3.2 kW / HTR: 3.0 kW TurboChef Global Operations 0 2801 Trade Center Drive I Carrollton, Texas 75007 USA TurboChef requires installing a type D circuit breaker for US800 90TURBC) 800 908 8726 I t t' l +1 214 379 6nnn all installations. ( . . ) I n ema Iona . Fax: +1 214.379.6073 1 www.turbochef.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 112 Hatco TPT-208 Item #413 wo:��Wimaor Equipment & Fumishinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 413 - POP-UP TOASTER (1 EA REQ'D) Hatco TPT-208 Pop -Up Toaster, (4) 1-1/4" wide self centering slots, individual toasting controls, removable crumb tray, stainless steel construction The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 413 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Hatco 1 NOTE: Sale of this product must comply with Hatco's Minimum Resale Price Policy; consult order acknowledgement for details Hatco 1 NOTE: Includes 24/7 parts & service assistance, call 800-558-0607 Hatco 1 One year replacement warranty, contact Hatco service team for details Hatco 1 208v/60/1-ph, 2700w, 12.5 amps, 6' cord with NEMA 6-15P ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP F 208 60 1 C rd & 6-15P 12.5 2.7 15 g D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 113 Hatco TPT-208 Item #413 4= ° Project Item # Pop -Up Toasters Models: TPT-120, -208, -240, =230-4 The Hatco Pop -Up Toasters are economical, fast, dependable and versatile. These toasters are perfect for self -serve buffet areas and lighter volume restaurants, diners and cafes. Standard features • Evenly toasts a variety of bread products including bagels, Texas toast, waffles and English muffins • All models have four self -centering 1.25" (32 mm) extra wide slots. • Durable stainless steel construction • Individual progressive color controls • Removable crumb trays for easy cleaning • A selector switch for single (or double) sided toasting (excluding TPT-120) • Unit comes with 6' (1829 mm) cord with plug Quantity C us V C E ANSI/NSF 4 TPT-120, -208, -240 TPT-230-4 only IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIiIIIIIIIII11111111111Ii1111i IIIIIIIIII IIIIIIl II IIIIIIIIlIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII1111 HATCO CORPORATION I P.O. Box 340500 Milwaukee, WI 53234-0500 U.S.A. I (800) 558-0607 I (414) 671-6350 Fax: (800) 543-7521 I Int'I. Fax: (414) 671-3976 I www.hatcocorp.com I email: equipsales@hatcocorp.com Fnrm Nn TPT Rnec Sheet Printeri in I I R A netnhar 9n14 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 114 Hatco TPT-208 Item #413 atco SPECIFICATIONS Pen-Un Toasters Pop -Up Toasters Models: TPT-120, -208, -240, -230-4 i13.62" (346 mm) ►I FRONTVIEW 12.32" (313 mm) w 8.04" (204 mm) SIDEVIEW The shaded areas contain electrical information for International models only Model Dimensions (Width x Depth x Height) Volts Phase Watts Amps Plug Ship Weight' TPT-120 (US) 13.62" x 12.32" x 8.04" (346 x 313 x 204 mm) Slot Opening: 1.25" x 5.5" x 4.5" (32 x 140 x 114 mm) 120 Single 1800 1440 15.0 12.0 NEMA 5 15P 14 lbs. (7 kg) TPT-120 (CAN) TPT-208 208 2600 12.5 NEMA 6-15Pt 16 lbs. (8 kg) TPT-240 240 1 10.9 NEMA 6-15P TPT 230 4 230 (CE) 2388 10.4 CEE 7/7 Schuko AS 3112 `Shipping weight includes packaging. t NEMA-6-20P for Canada CORD LOCATION Bottom, back center. PLUG CONFIGURATIONS NEMA 5-15P NEMA 6-15P NEMA 6-20P 7/7 Schuko o 0 c 1 L4 -4 AS 3112 PRODUCT SPECS Pop -Up Toaster The Pop -Up Toaster shall be Model ... rated at ... volts, and ... watts, single phase, by removable crumb trays, resistance wire elements, and a 6' (1829 mm) cord with the Hatco Corporation, Milwaukee, WI 53234 U.S.A. plug attached. The Toaster shall consist of a rugged stainless steel body with 4 slot openings, IIIIIIIIItIIII11111111111111111111111111n11111111111IlIIIIIIIIIIIIIlIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIt111111111111111111111111IIINIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII(II1111111111111111 HATCO CORPORATION I P.O. Box 340500 Milwaukee, WI 53234-0500 U.S.A. I (800) 558-0607 I (414) 671-6350 Fax: (800) 543-7521 I Int'I. Fax: (414) 671-3976 I www.hatcocorp.com I email: equipsales@hatcocorp.com Fnrm Nn TPT.qnP.r Shaat Printart in I I S A ()rtnhar 9(114 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 115 Waring CTS1000 Item #414 Nr' %7IMUSIr Equipment & Furnishings Co. ITEM# 414 - CONVEYOR TOASTER (1 EA REQ'D) Waring CTS1000 Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 Commercial Conveyor Toasting System, electric, horizontal conveyor, 2" opening, 5 min. heat -up time, speed control & energy -saving standby functions, power on & indicator lights, 450 slices/hour, brushed stainless steel construction, cool -touch side panels, 120v, 1800 watt, 15.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, UL, NSF <Incomplete> The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 414 ACCESSORIES C Mfr Qty Model Spec Waring 1 Standard 1-year limited warranty ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 5-15P 15 1.8 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 116 Waring CTS1000 Item #414 �La.G3� [n�`C�� CEO [� Gv] C G3C�dLQd COMMERCIAL Features • Super -high ouput; CTS1000/CTS1000CND — 450 slices per hour CTS1000B —1000+ slices per hour • Ultra -fast, 5-minute heat -up time • Large 2`° opening accommodates thick breads and bagels • Speed control and energy -saving standby functions • Heavy-duty, brushed stainless steel construction • Power On and Toaster Ready indicator lights • Cool -touch side panels • Lightweight and portable with thermo-insulated carrying handles • Limited One Year Warranty c@us @ Commercial Conveyor Toasting Systems CTS 1000/CTS 1000 CND/CTS l 000B 4 CTS 1 OOOB r• r r ;1r1 1 i I I �r CTS 1000/CTS 1000CND D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & furnishings Co. Page: 117 Waring CTS1000 Item #414 NG Commercial C@US sF . Conveyor Toasting Systems CTS 1000/CTS 1000CND/CTS 1000B Item Electrical Plug -Type Listings Dimensions Warranty (H"xW"xD") CTS1000 120 Volt, 15A, 180OW NEMA 5-15P UL, NSF 13.5" x 15.5" x 19.5" Limited One Year CTS1000CND 120 Volt, 12.5A, 150OW NEMA 5-15P CUL, NSF 13.5" x 15.5" x 19.5" Limited One Year CTS1000B 208 Volt, 13A, 270OW NEMA 6-20P cULus, NSF 17.25" x 17" x 19.5" Limited One Year Description Catalog # Std Pkg. Ship Wt. Cubic Feet UPC Code (Ibs.) Commercial Conveyor Toaster CTS1000 1 33.8 4.28 040072007200 Commercial Conveyor Toaster CTS1000CND 1 33.8 4.28 040072012525 Commercial Conveyor Toaster CTS1000B 1 37 4.4 040072011061 �.5" 17.25" IN 15.5" CTS1000/CTS1000CND is 17" -1 CTS1000B Waring Commercial • 314 Ella-T. Grasso Ave. • Torrington, Connecticut 06790 Tel. (800) 492-7464 • Fax (860) 496-9008 • www.waringproducts.com 09WC12035 ©2009 Conair Corporation PG-20353 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 118 Star Mfg. RCS2-600BN - I iCHECK ALTERNATES!! Item #414.1 o Equipment & F unAshings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 414.1- CONVEYOR TOASTER (1 EA REQ-D) Star RCS2-60013N - !!CHECK ALTERNATESII Radiant Conveyor. Toaster, 600 bagel halves/hr., variable speed control, control panel, extended conveyor belt, large warming area, front burn guard, 1 piece cover, "Smart" crumb tray, narrow body with metal sheath elements, cool to the touch exterior, 1" adjustable legs, stainless steel, 120v/50-60/1-ph, 12 amps, 1440 watts, NEMA 5-1513, cULus, UL <Incomplete> The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 414.1 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Star 1 1 year parts & labor warranty, standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS I CYCLE I PHASE I CONN I AFF I NEMA I AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 120 60 1 CPlug 5-15P 12 1.44 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 119 Star RCS2-600BN - !!CHECK ALTERNATES!! Item #414.1 1RAR. Star Manufacturing RADIANT CONVEYOR BAGEL TOASTER Model RCS2-600BN QCS Features/Benefits: * Holman's forced convection system keeps the toaster cool to the touch and extends the life of critical components. The forced convection increases productivity by circulating pre -heated air into toasting chamber. • NEW longer lasting, heavy-duty metal knobs and 1" non-skid heavy- duty rubber feet. • Narrow body with metal sheath elements. • High volume compact toaster - requires only 9-1/2" of counter space and the forced convection system allows the unit to be placed against a wall. Other toasters have louvers requiring additional counter space. • Unit produces up to 600 bagel halves per hour. • Easy to use control panel takes the guesswork out of speed control settings. • Toasts bagels in seconds! • Variable speed control for perfect color and texture of bagels. • Extended conveyor belt for easy loading and large warming area for higher production. * Safe load up area with full width front burn guard and cool to the touch exterior. • "Smart" crumb tray keeps the breadcrumbs from falling under the toaster. * Heated holding area to keep toast at the perfect temperature. • Requires power from a standard 120V oultlet, adding to flexibility of use in the kitchen. * 24 hours 7 days a week technical support by Star technicians. Applications: The RCS2-600BN toaster toasts bagels perfectly while saving time and money. Quality Construction: No matter how you slice it, Holman delivers high quality, reliable toasters. Stainless steel construction for long lasting durability. Heavy-duty motor, drive chain and conveyor speed control for superior reliability. Conveyor belt tension system for smooth and quiet operation. High performance metal sheath elements provide superior toasting performance and reliabili- ty. Units are easy to disassemble with one-piece cover for cleaning and service. Toasters are furnished with 1" adjustable legs and 5ft minimum cord length. Model RCS2-600BN Warranty: Holman's conveyor toasters are covered by a one-year parts and labor c&us warranty. USTE0 Star Manufacturing - 10 Sunnen Drive - P.O. Box 430129 - St. Louis, MO 63143-3800 Phone: (314) 678-6303 - FAX: (314) 781-3636 - www.star-mfg.com H218/04-15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 120 Star RCS2-600BN - !!CHECK ALTERNATESH Item #414.1 RADIANT CONVEYOR BAGEL TOASTER Model RCS2-600BN Dimensions Shipping Model No. Width Depth W/Tray Height Weight Inches Inches Inches Ibs (cm) (cm) (cm) (kg) RCS2-600BN 9.47" 24.56" 15.64" 59 (24.1) (62.4) (39.7) (26.8) Model No. Volts RCS2 6 OBN I 120V I AMPS I 12 5EMP High performance Bagel Fast conveyor toaster is constructed of corrosion resistant stainless steel. Supplied with heavy-duty motor, drive chain and metal sheath elements. A conveyor belt tension system is supplied for a smooth, quiet operation. Extended conveyor belt, crumb tray, heated holding area and full width burn guard is standard. Unit has a one-piece cover for easy access with 1" adjustable legs and a 5ft minimum cord length. Due to periodic changes in designs, methods, procedures, policies and regulations, the specifications contained in this sheet are subject to change without notice. While Star Manufacturing exercises good faith efforts to provide information that is accurate, we are not responsible for errors or omissions in information provided or conclusions reached as a result of using the specifications. By using the information provided, the user assumes all risks in connection with such use. Star Manufacturing - 10 Sunnen Drive - P.O. Box 430129 - St. Louis, MO 63143-3800 Phone: (314) 678-6303 - FAX: (314) 781-3636 - www.star-mfg.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 121 Delfield Item #415 LrA, •• i a,riM Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 415 - PANINI STATION COUNTER (1 EA REQ-D) Delfield Panini station counter, 62" work top refrigerator with self contained refrigeration on left. Stainless steel construction, stainless steel legs (6). 39" Open shelf utility stand. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 122 Duke Manufacturing MUHC51CB2-208 Item #416 EqU1PIIlent & Furnish_-p Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 416 - MOBILE WARMING CABINET (1 EA REQ'D) Duke Mfg MUHC51CB2-208 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 123 Custom Item #417 1 Equipment & F u nWAngs Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 417 - S/S WALL FLASHING - COOKLINE (96 EA REQ'D) Custom D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 124 Custom Item #417.1 •W3M.Sor Equipment & FiunW i W Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 417.1- S/S WALL FLASHING - PANINI COUNTER (12 EA REQ'D) Custom D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 125 SPG International Item #418 V® Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 418 - CONDIMENT WALL SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 126 Wells 2436G Item #420 W�O�Owimusor Equipment & Fumishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 420 - COUNTERTOP GRIDDLE (1 EA REQ'D) Wells 2436G Griddle, countertop, natural gas, 35-7/8" W x 20-1/2" D cooking surface, smooth polished steel griddle plate, zoned thermostatic heat control, stainless steel construction, with.splashguard, 75,000 BTU/HR, CSA, NSF 4 The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 420 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Dormont GAS SIZE MBTU -- Kw 1 3/4" 75.0 2 167.0 ***ADD 7" PLATE SHELF #021214DE2*** 1675KITS48 Dormont Blue Hose— Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast® QD, 1 Swivel MAX", 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware, 167,000 BTU/hr minimum flow capacity, limited lifetime warranty STEAM INLET SIZE RETURN SIZE LB/HR PSIG (min) PSIG (max) 1 2 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 127 Wells 2436G Item #420 ITEM NO. WG-2424G, WG-2436G, WG-3036G & WG-3048G Specifications Overall Dimensions: W (In.) D (In.) WG-2424G 23 3/4 25 3/8 WG-2436G 35 3/4 25 3/8 WG-3036G 35 3/4 30 WG-3048G 4713/16 30 Griddle Surface Dimensions: W (In.) D (In.) WG-2424G 23 7/8 20 1 /2 WG-2436G 35 7/8 20 1 /2 WG-3036G 35 7/8 24 WG-3048G 47 3/4 24 Typical Production Per Load Per Hour WG-2424G Hamburgers 37 555 Steaks 14 160 Pancakes 30 360 Eggs 40 560 WG-2436G Hamburgers 55 825 Steaks 21 250 Pancakes 44 528 Eggs 57 798 WG-3036G Hamburgers 73 1095 Steaks 26 310 Pancakes 60 720 Eggs 79 1106 WG-3048G Hamburgers 87 1392 Steaks 34 408 Pancakes 68 816 Eggs 90 1260 Weights: Lbs. KG WG-2424G 190 210 WG-2436G 257 291 WG-3036G 305 325 WG-3048G 359 423 Wells Gas Countertop Griddles are designed for use with natural or LP gas. In addition to the standard grill surface there are two options to choose from, grooved or chrome -plated. The griddles have u-shaped burners and internal baffling to direct heat and airflow for greater efficiency. Features • Stainless steel hinged front panel protects control knobs. • Each individual snap -action thermostat controls twelve inches of the cooking surface. • Griddle surface is a 3/4" thick, steel plate heated by u-shaped burners that provide even heat distribution over the entire surface. • Each burner has an adjustable air shutter to provide optimum combustion. • Full width front grease trough allows convenient cleaning of entire griddle surface. • Integral splashguard makes clean up of surrounding surfaces easier. • The removable front grease drawer has a four -quart capacity. • Available for use with natural or LP gas. • The WG-2424G — WG-3048G gas griddles meet ANSI Z83 and NSF International standards. • A one-year warranty against defects covers parts and labor. Accessories / Options Chrome -plated griddle surface, allows more efficient heat transfer throughout the cooking area, available by special order. Grooved griddle surface, 3/4-inch thick ribbed steel plate that allows for the "branding' of meat products, available by special order. WELLS ►. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 128 Wells 2436G Item #420 /MN *EVA) STD.4 DIMENSIONS: INCH (M M) MODEL WG-2424G 111/2 GAS INLET (292) 3/4 IN N.P.T. 2 1/4 (57) MODEL WG-2436G 11 1/2 GAS INLET (292) �� 3/4 IN N.P.T. MODELS WG-2424G, WG-2436G GAS COUNTERTOP GRIDDLES MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIRED FROM UNIT TO THE NEAREST COMBUSTIBLE OBJECT BACK SIDE BOTTOM TOP 3 3 4 NA (76) (76) (102) NA 25 3/8 23 (645) 013 SPLASHGUARD I (38) 59/16 L (141) 2 83/8 QO -T (51) (213) 1 I i . , Ai OPTIONAL `. GAS INLET [ 19/16 JV 19/76 4 23116 (40) (40) (102) (56) 20 9116 81/4 (522) 23116 (210) (56) 231/2 (597) 35 3/4 5 9/16 25 3/8 (908) (141) (645) 1 1/2 SPLASHGUARD (38) 2 8318 Oo � (51) 21/4 (213) (57) OPTIONAL GAS INLET 1 9116 1 9/16 I 2 3/16 (40) (40) (56) (102) 32 9/16 81/2 (827) 23116 (216) (56) 21 (533) WG-2424, WG-2436G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: WG-2424G 2 2 25000 50000 5.0 In. W.C. 10.0 In. W.C. WG-2436G 3 3 25000 75000 5.0 In. W.C. 10.0 In. W.C. NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 129 Wells 2436G Item #420 /M� * STD.4 _ DIMENSIONS: INCH (MM) 11 1/2 GAS INLET r (292) 3/4 IN N.P.T. � 0 1 8 3/8 (213) 2 3/4 (70) MODEL WG-3036G GAS COUNTERTOP GRIDDLE MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIRED FROM UNIT TO THE NEAREST COMBUSTIBLE OBJECT BACK SIDE BOTTOM TOP 3 3 4 NA (76) (76) (102) NA 35 3/4, 5 9/16 30 (908) (141) (762) � 11/2 iSPLASHGUARD (38) 215/16 215/16 T (75) (75) ham— 4 (102) 29 13/16 (757) 2 1 /16 (52) 2 (51) T.— OPTIONAL GAS INLET I 2 1/16 �i (52) 8 1/2 (216) 26 11/16 (678) WG-3036G ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: WG-3036G 3 3 25000 75000 5.0 In. W.C. 10.0 In. W.C. NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 130 WELLS MANUFACTURING Wells 2436C - �� DIMENSIONS: INCH (MM) 11 1/2 GAS INLET (292) 3/4 IN N.P.T. 2 3/4 (70) W 1 8 3/8 (213) T3) 47 13/16 (1214) 5 9/16 (1I41) 1 Item #420 MODEL WG-304BG GAS COUNTERTOP GRIDDLE MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIRED FROM UNIT TO THE NEAREST COMBUSTIBLE OBJECT BACK SIDE BOTTOM TOP 3 3 4 NA (76) (76) (102) NA 30 (762) 11/2 SPLASHGUARD (38) 2 (51) b1 OPTIONAL)d GAS INLET 3 1/16 3 1/16 4 I 2 1/16 (78) (78) (102) (52) 41 5/8 8 1 /2 (1057) (216) 2 1/16 (52) 2611/16 (678) WG-304BG ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: WG-3048G 4 4 25000 100000 5.0 In. W.C. 10.0 In. W.C. NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice. WELLS MANUFACTURING COMPANY 2 ERIK CIRCLE, PO BOX 280, VERDI, NV 89439 U.S.A. USA PHONE: (775) 689-5700 - FAX: (775) 689-5972 FOR ORDERS ONLY: (888) 356-5362 • FAX: (800) 356-5142 www.wells-mfg.com © 2002 WFLI-S MANUFACTURING • PRINTED IN THE U.S.A. 02/02 • REV(C) • PART NO. 45988 WELLS D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 131 Custom PLATE SHELF Item #420.1 Equipment & Fumis}+_ i CO. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 420.1- PLATE SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) Custom PLATE SHELF PART OF ITEM: 420 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 132 SPG International Item #421 rW3MfS1r Equipment & F umishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 421- TABLE FOR RANGE, W/ CASTERS (1 EA REQ'D) SPG D16349 Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 133 W. West Equipment & Furnishings PAN BUDDY Item #422 wc�%Vicusjr Equipment 86 Hiirnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 422 - SAUTE PAN WALL RACK (1 EA REQ'D) WWEST PAN BUDDY 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 134 Duke Manufacturing FWM3-22CB5-120 Item #423 Nor,OT, Equipment & F umWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 423 - HOLDING CABINET (1 EA REQ'D) Duke Mfg FWM3-22CB5-120 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Duke Mfg 4 156602 Pan, Single Handle **ONE HANDLE*** 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 135 Delfield D4432N-12M Item #424 Equipment & F,rnWii w Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 424 - MEGA TOP SANDWICH / SALAD PREPARATION REFRIGERATOR (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield D4432N-12M Mega Top Refrigerator, single -section, 32" W, 10.10 cubic feet, (2) drawers, stainless steel top with polyethylene cutting board & (12) 1/6 size plastic pans, ABS interior sides, stainless steel front & sides, 5" casters, front -breathing rear -mounted (R404A) refrigeration system, 1/5 hp, cUL, UL, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 424 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Delfield 1 115v/60/1-ph, 7.2 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard Delfield 1 (3) Year parts & labor warranty standard Delfield 1 Self -Contained refrigeration, std Delfield 1 (5) Year compressor warranty standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS I CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 1/5 Cord 2 115 60 1 P g& 5-15P 7.2 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 136 Delfield D4432N-12M Item #424 4432N MegaTop Front -Breathing Self -Contained Mega Top Refrigerated Models • 4432N-12M Single section with doors twelve pan capacity • D4432N-12M Single section with drawers twelve pan capacity Project Item Quantity CSI Section 11400 Approved Date Standard Features Warming Potential) polyurethane keeps energy costs low u Patented air screen ensures product stays cold Black recessed quick grip handle without drying it out Standard on5"casters for easy cleaning 100%front breathing, which allows the unit to and installation be pushed against a wall or built into a cabinet Wcord and plug supplied or an existing line up One epoxy coated wire shelf standard, �--� • Durable, rugged stainless steel sides, top and installed per door section m, front ACT solid state electronic control • Features Delfield's exclusive ABS interior (on Three year parts and labor warranty f sides). ABS is extremely durable - it won't dent, and an additional two year compressor chip or corrode and is backed by a limited parts warranty lifetime warranty • Delfield supplies 1/6 size pans and positive Options & placement adapter bars for top opening Accessories Dual level pan brackets allow the pans to be 1 lowered an additional inch in the unit without Flat lift offcover fI tools to provide additional pan temperature 18" wide single tier overshelf J holding performance Stainless steel finish on back +r Mega top refrigerators are standard with 8" • Plastic laminate on front wide, dishwasher safe polyethylene cutting Additional wire shelves board treated with antimicrobial agent 3" casters, 3.75" ride height • "D" prefix models feature Delfield's new drawer - Door lock 4432N-12M system. Drawers are backed by a 10-year Exterior thermometer (door models warranty on the track assembly only) • Environmentally friendly R404A refrigerant 220W50 Hertz electrical system* - High density foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP * Inclusion of this option will alter (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global electrical specifications of the unit Specifications Exterior top is one-piece, 22-gauge stainless steel with integral 2.12" (5.1 cm) square nosing on the front. Top of drawer unit has openings to accept twelve 1/6-size 4" (10cm) deep pans. Top of door unit has openings to accept twelve 1/6-size 4" or 6" (1 Ocm or 15cm) deep pans. Adapter bars and 1/6 size pans are supplied by Delfield. Telescoping cover is constructed of 20-gauge stainless steel. Temperature in top opening to maintain 330F (10q to 41OF (50Q, with pans recessed 2.5" 16.4cm) at 86°F ambient room temperature, meeting NSF 7 requirements. One 32" x 8" x .5" (81.3cm x 20.3cm x 1.3cm) polyethylene cutting board treated with antimicrobial agent is mounted on the top at the front edge. Dual level pan brackets allow the pans to be lowered an additional inch in the unit without tools to provide additional pan temperature holding performance. Exterior back and bottom are two-piece 24-gauge galvanized steel. Exterior ends are stainless steel. Interior sides are thermoformed ABS plastic with pilaster shelf supports and clips. Base is fully insulated with high -density foamed in place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane. Refrigeration system uses HFC-404A refrigerant. Compressor is 1/5 H.P., with condenser coil and hot gas condensate evaporator mounted on rear of the cabinet. Evaporator coils are located on the interior rear wall of the cabinet. Refrigerant flow is controlled by a capillary tube. Cabinet maintains an interior cabinet temperature of 360F to 407 (20C to 40C). ACT control: ACT electronic, solid state control, mounted on NSF the exterior rear of the cabinet, allows unit to maintain precise temperatures in heavy duty conditions. Electrical connection is 115 volt, 60 Hertz, single phase. Unit has a 6' (1.8m) long electrical cord and NEMA 5-15P plug. Casters: Equipment is mounted on 5" (13cm) diameter plate C O casters with front two locking. Equipment clearance above the R{TRI(:FM�T floor is 2.5" (6cm). Doors have a 24-gauge stainless steel exterior, with thermoformed ABS plastic interior liner. Cabinet has one adjustable epoxy -coated wire shelf. Drawers have 24-gauge stainless steel exterior with thermoformed ABS plastic interior liner. Drawer frames are 12-gauge stainless steel. Drawer slides are 11-gauge stainless steel with Delrin bearings. Top drawer will hold two 12" x 20" (30.5cm x 50.8cm) pans 4"- 6" (10.1 cm - 15.2cm) deep. Bottom drawer holds two 12" x 20" (30.5cm x 50.8cm) pans 4" (10.1 cm) deep. Pans are supplied by others. 980 S. Isabella Rd. I Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Michigan 48858 Mt. Pleasant, MichFax: 800-669-0619 www.delfield.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. (:anitalwoc Page: 137 W z rn�1V QQ 00 N 0 r--F (D QQ 0 0 1V h QQI ^� ` U QJ rrn 1 V C) V) V V) Delfield D4432N-12M Item #424 'Delfield Q Q) 7 CN r ' 1 lill'Albp 115vl�p 1.1511.911 I.lg-j )ee19B11 lik.*I 8511 Ib91 I <Sa'IIA 11'3mn , l 2Q)S 52 )0 36B6' 6A]2 ]I.9d'SS-13 360P 91.dq 31N W dJl 11A9' fl5311 t)]SINOAI 1295 ]llq Sx F 153' 1910 All' 1A531 35o'15w1 4432N-12M Elevation View 4432N-12M Right Side View 3� m� :avwrt I9 ; 9m loAw:ot wog O t; OIaA M'�pucNs'� 4432N-12M ISO View D4432N-12M ISO View 33.13'IAI.611 315p'I�011 I.IS M 1.1512931 1B819e>I Pll l.<I 32.13 El ,APOP60POEAFMNAONIOG 1.75 13.63 dOPDAA~0MY0NAOlIOM 1 39 36AV gum 335T�AA311 0 21.63 4.96 ILr IN D4432N-12M Elevation View D4432N-12M Right Side View Pan Cutout Configuration INSTALLATION NOTE: Refrigeration system is designed so that air will flow under the unit, through the compressor area and out the front of the unit. Any restriction to this air flow path will void the warranties. PLEASE NOTE: Air flow through the louver on the back of the unit is not necessary for operation, however, any air which passes through the louver is beneficial. Specifications Model 1/6 Size # of Shelf Volume ' H.P. V/Hz/Ph Amps Nema Ship Weight Pan Cap. Shelves Area Plug 4432N-12M 12 1 3.88ft2 10.10ft3 1/5 115/60/1 7.2 5-15P 245lbs/111kg D4432N-12M 12 NA NA 10.10ft, 1/5 115/60/1 7.2 5-15P 293lbs/133kg Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice. 980 S. Isabella Rd. Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Printed in the U.S.A. Fax: 800-669-0619 DS4432N-M www.delfield.com 03113 Canitowoc D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 138 Advance Tabco KSS-302 Item #425 Equipment & Furnishings CO. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 425 - WORK TABLE (1 EA REQ-D) Advance Tabco KSS-302 Work Table, 30" wide top, with splash at rear only, 24" long, with adjustable undershelf, stainless steel frame & shelf, 14 gauge 304 series stainless steel top, 5" backsplash, stainless steel bullet feet The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 425 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 139 Advance Tabco KSS-302 Item #425 ADVANCE TABCO. SMART FABRICATION' - FEATURES: STAINLESS STEEL WORK TABLES PREMIUM Series - 5" Backsplash - Undershelf Style Top is furnished with a 1 5/8" sanitary rolled rim edge on front, 1 5/8" square side edges, and a 5" splash with a 1 " return on the rear side. 24" wide tables supplied with TWO hat channels stud welded to reinforce and maintain a level working surface. 30" and 36" wide tables supplied with THREE hat channels. Pre-engineered welded angle adapters insure ease of future drawer installation. Aluminum die cast "leg -to -shelf" clamp secures shelf to leg eliminating unsightly nuts and bolts. Undershelf is adjustable. CONSTRUCTION: All TIG welded. Exposed weld areas polished to match adjacent surfaces. Entire top mechanically polished to a satin finish. Top is sound deadened. Roll formed embossed galvanized hat channels are secured to top by means of structural adhesive and weld studs. Gussets welded to support hat sections. KSS-Series: Stainless Steel Legs & Undershelf L 30" Wide KSS-240 Wide KSS-300 Wide 24" KSS-242 KSS-302 36" KSS-243 KSS-303 KSS-363 48" KSS-244 KSS-304 KSS-364 60" KSS-245 KSS-305 KSS-365 72" KSS-246 KSS-306 KSS-366 84" KSS-247 KSS-307 KSS-367 96" KSS-248 KSS-308 KSS-368 108" KSS-249 KSS-309 KSS-369 120" KSS-2410 KSS-3010 KSS-3610 132" KSS-2411 KSS-3011 KSS-3611 144" KSS-2412 I SS-3012 I KSS-3612 Item #: Qty #: Model #: Project #: NEW Featuring as Standard: Rolled Rim Edges on "Tw PROVEW, Front & Splash on ORIGINAL ADVANCE TABCO Back and Square Adjustable Undershelf Side Edges with Die Cast Leg Clamp MATERIAL: KSS-SERIES: Stainless Steel Legs & Undershelf TOP: 14 gauge stainless steel type "304" series. SHELF: 18 gauge stainless steel. LEGS: 1 5/8" diameter tubular stainless steel. 1" adjustable stainless steel bullet feet. Stainless steel gussets. KLG-SERIES: Galvanized Legs & Undershelf TOP: 14 gauge stainless steel type "304" series. SHELF: 18 gauge galvanized steel. LEGS: 1 5/8" diameter tubular galvanized steel. 1" adjustable plastic bullet feet. Galvanized steel gussets. X KLG-Series: Galvanized Steel Legs & Undershelf L 30" Wide KLG-240 Wide KLG-300 Wide 24" KLG-242 KLG-302 361, KLG-243 KLG-303 KLG-363 48" KLG-244 KLG-304 KLG-364 60" KLG-245 KLG-305 KLG-365 72" KLG-246 KLG-306 KLG-366 84" KLG-247 KLG-307 KLG-367 961, KLG-248 KLG-308 KLG-368 1081, KLG-249 KLG-309 KLG-369 120" KLG-2410 KLG-3010 KLG-3610 132" KLG-2411 KLG-3011 KLG-3611 144" 1 KLG-2412 I KLG-3012 I KLG-3612 ® Customer Service Available To Assist You 1-800-645-3166 8:30 am - 8:00 pm E.S.T. Email Orders To: customer@advancetabco.com. For Smart Fabrication- Quotes, Email To: smartfab@advancetabco.com or Fax To: 631-586-2933 ADVANCE TABCO. NEW YORK GEORGIA TEXAS NEVADA www.advancetabco.com Fax: (631) 242-6900 Fax: (770) 775-5625 Fax: (972) 932-4795 Fax: (775) 972-1578 J-2 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 140 Advance Tabco KSS-302 Item #425 DETAILS and SPECIFICATIONS ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL TOL ± .500" All Units Shipped Unassembled (KD) for Reduced Shipping Costs. KSS & KLG Series Undershelf Style 5" Backsplash Finished size of undershelf = Length minus 5 3/4" Width minus 5 3/4" I Units 811. and larger are furnished with six (6) legs Leh .� Wwth $quafa Sift E4arss L - Roiled Ram (Edge Erarrt t- 4°TYP z - -- I -i 35 t jr L �- 1Q' KSS-Series: Stainless Steel Legs & Undershelf KLG-Series: Galvanized Steel Legs & Undershelf Wide Wide Wide Wide Wide Wide 30" KSS-240 551bs. KSS-300 701bs. 24" KSS-242 501bs. KSS-302 561bs. 36" KSS-243 661bs. KSS-303 771bs. KSS-363 921bs. 48" KSS-244 81 lbs. KSS-304 921bs. KSS-364 101 lbs. 72" KSS-246 1131bs. KSS-306 1291bs. KSS-366 1421bs. 84" KSS-247 1351bs. KSS-307 1531bs. KSS-367 1691bs. 96" KSS-248 1501bs. KSS-308 171 lbs. KSS-368 1891bs. 132" KSS-2411 301 lbs. KSS-3011 331 lbs. KSS-3611 3581bs. 144" KSS-2412 3161bs. KSS-3012 3461bs. KSS-3612 3731bs. 301, KLG-240 551bs. KLG-300 701bs. 24" KLG-242 501bs. KLG-302 561bs. 36" KLG-243 661bs. KLG-303 771bs. KLG-363 921bs. 48" KLG-244 81 lbs. KLG-304 921bs. KLG-364 101 lbs. *x ADVANCE TABCO is constantly engaged in a program of ADVANCE TABCO® improving our products. Therefore, we reserve the right to SMART FAaA�ATON change specifications without prior notice. J-2a 200 Heartland Boulevard, Edgewood, NY 11717-8380 © ADVANCE TABCO, SEPTEMBER 2005 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 141 Custom Item #SOOA rw I musir Equipment 8s ngs Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 500A - REMOTE CONDENSER UNIT - EXPO LINE (1 EA REQ'D) Custom For Item: 512 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 142 Custom Item #500B ,�� r,%w1MSSj1r Equipment & FuunWflno Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 5006 - REMOTE CONDENSER UNIT SALAD/SANDWICH UNIT (1 EA REQ'D) Custom For Item: 503 & 508 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 143 San Jamar CK6536A Item #501 Equipment & Fumish_ ings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/O8/2015 ITEM# 501- CHECK HOLDER (7 EA REQ'D) San Lamar CK6536A Slide Check Rack, 36"L x 3/4"W x 3"H, glass marbles for smooth sliding, anodized aluminum (bagged with header card) D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 144 Olympic J1860K Item #S02 t, \�-' If- EcOpment 86 ftrmilshiinoR CO. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 502 - WIRE SHELVING (4 EA REQ:D) Olympic J1860K Shelf, wire, 18" x 60", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Olympic 4 JlWD18K Wall Bracket, single, 18", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF Olympic 2 J2WD18K Wall Bracket, double, 18", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 145 Delfield Item #503 .r � i. ►.-7 s-i r Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 503 - SALAD STATION (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield Salad Station, 84" Assembly with backsplash. 44" mega top with remote mechanical section on right. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 146 SPG International TABLE Item #503.1 ,�� rowicWT Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 503.1- TABLE (1 EA REQ'D) SPG TABLE With towel dryer 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 147 By Owner KDS Item #504 ® WMISIr Equipment & Furnishings Co. ITEM# 504 - KDS (4 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER KDS Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 148 By Owner TABLE TRACKER Item #505 Equipment 86 Fhrnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 505 : TABLE TRACKER (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER TABLE TRACKER 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 149 By Owner TIME CLOCK Item #506 Equipment & F� mWiino Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 506 - TIME CLOCK (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER TIME CLOCK 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 150 Glastender LC Item #507 Equipment & F umisiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 507 - LETTUCE CRISPER (1 EA REQ'D) Glastender LC Lettuce Crisper Dispenser, refrgierated, holds (50) heads of shredded lettuce, plastic door with plexi-glass lettuce chute, removable plastic bin, digital thermostat control, auto defrost & condensate evaporator, wall bracket included, stainless steel exterior & interior, self-contained refrigeration, R134a, 1/4 HP, cETLus, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 507 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Glastender 1 1 year parts & labor warranty, 5 year compressor warranty Glastender 1 120V/60/1-ph 5.5 amps, NEMA 5-15P, standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 120 60 1 5.3 .6 1/4 2 120 60 1 5.5 1/4 15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 151 Glastender LC Item #507 ahAM&TS Project: AIA# A family company manufacturing in the USA Item #: Qty: Model #: SIS# LC Standard Features • Self-contained forced air refrigeration system for uniform cooling of product • Automatic condensate evaporator • Digital T-STAT control with automatic defrost • All stainless steel interior construction • Roto-molded plastic foamed -in -place insulated door and let- tuce chute • Stainless steel exterior construction with galvanized steel back and bottom • Removable plastic lettuce bin (divider for bin and extra bins available) • CFC free foamed -in -place insulation • Removable condenser air inlet filter for easy cleaning cV\ area1 Vus • Lift -up door with plexi-glass window < Intertek • Bracket for wall mounting NSFConforms to ANSI/UL STD 471 .4" adjustable legs available Certified to CSA STD • Six-foot grounded cord and plug provided C22.2 No. 120 Specifications Electrical Hinge Location • 120V, 1 phase, 60 Hz, 5.5 full load amps Standard hinge location is right. Factory set left door hinge • Separate 15 amp circuit is required �G is optional. Door is field reversible. Legs (Optional) • Includes a 6-foot NEMA 5-15P grounded cord w� • Available with 220V, 1 phase, 50Hz electrical 4" stainless steel legs with adjustable bullet feet 5-15P Refrigeration • 1/4 HP, R134a refrigerant Plumbing • Automatic condensate evaporator. No drain connection required. Lettuce Bin • Removable plastic bin included Operating Range • 34T (1°C) to 40' F (4°C) Materials • 22 gauge stainless steel parts include: interior and exterior front, and sides • 20 gauge stainless parts include: condensing unit compartment cover • 22 gauge galvanized steel parts include: back • 16 gauge galvanized steel parts include: condensing unit floor and exterior bottom • Roto-molded plastic parts include: lettuce bin, door, and lettuce chute Glastender, Inc. • 5400 North Michigan Road • Saginaw, MI • 48604-9780 Approval/Notes: 989.752.4275 • 800.748.0423 • Fax 989.752.4444 www.glastender.com Specifications subject to change without notice. For current specifications please visit our website. Printed in UNA 6.09 Rev.08-18-15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 152 Glastender LC Item #507 Lettuce Crisper Dimensional Information Al FRONT PLAN VIEWS DIGITAL TEMPERATURE READ OUT THERMOSTAT CONTROL ADJUSTMENT i�wuu REAR NOTE: STANDARD HINGE LOCATION IS RIGHT. FACTORY SET LEFT DOOR HINGE IS OPTIONAL. DOOR IS FIELD REVERSIBLE. WALL MOUNT BRACKET 0�0 DRILL HOLES FOR TOP BRACKET 24-3/4. ABOVE BOTTOM OF UNIT < \ BOTTOM WALL BRACKET 8" OF AIR SPACE IS REQUIRED ABOVE LETTUCE CRISPER TO ALLOW FOR AIR FLOW OUT WARNING: COMPRESSOR FAILURE DUE TO RESTRICTION OR BLOCKAGE OF AIR FLOW WILL VOID WARRANTY. ISOMETRIC VIEWS 24 18-1/32"� REMOVEABLE GRILL WITH ® 9-11/2" FILTER MEDIA i t 36-1 /4" '� 26-3/4" 40-1 /4" � 10-3l4„ 2-3/4" 4" T T6"� LEFT SIDE 1FRONT WITH OPTIONAL 3-1/4" 4" ADJUSTABLE LEGS ELEVATION VIEWS 5400 North Michigan Road • Saginaw, MI •48604-9780 989.752.4275 - 800.748.0423 • Fax 989.752.4444 ® www.glastender.com Printed in USA D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 153 Delfield BS71 Item #508 N w M00ir Fciuipment 8s Furnishings r ITEM# 508 - SANDWICH STATION (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield BS71 Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 154 SPG International Item #508.1 Equipment & FtnnWiings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 508.1- SANDWICH STATION TABLE (1 EA REQ'D) SPG D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 155 SPG International Item #S10 Submittal Sheet ITEM# 510 - BUILT IN DUMP SINK (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Priced with Item: 616 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 156 Vollrath 74701D Item #511 wl':"�%Wicusor Equipment 8r, F urnWiin Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 511- INDUCTION COOKER RETHERMALIZER, BUILT-IN / DROP -IN (8 EA REQ'D) Vollrath 74701D Mirage® Induction Rethermalizer, drop -in, dry operation, 7 quart, inset with hinged cover, 11-7/8"W x 11-7/8"D x 12- 5/16"H, LED push button controls, temperature control in °F or'C, cabinet mount controls with leads (6-1/2"W x 3"D x 2-1/2"H), includes: mounting hardware, 6ft. cord with Nema 5-15P, 800 watt, 6.7 amp, 120v/60/1-ph, cLILus, NSF, FCC (cover not NSF) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 511 ACCESSORIES C Mfr Qty Model Spec Vollrath 8 Requires use of included Vollrath induction - ready inset - failure to use these insets may damage the unit & will void the warranty ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA +7s—p 120 60 1 5-15P 6.7 .8 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 157 Vollrath 74701D Item #511 VO«IMM0 Outperform every day. - Project: Item Number: Quantity: MODELS _ 74701DW Induction Warmer, 701. (US/CAN) "`----- 74701D Induction Rethermalizer, 7 Qt. (US/CAN) 741101DW Induction Warmer, 11 Qt. (US/CAN) 741101D Induction Rethermalizer,11 Qt. (US/CAN) DESCRIPTION Mirage Drop -in Induction Warmers and Rethermalizers use innovative induction technology to run dry (without a water bath), improve food quality and minimize food waste; while using a fraction of the energy. They are shipped complete with an induction -ready inset and slotted hinged cover. The cover is not NSF. WARMER PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Mirage Drop -in Induction Warmers are designed to hold heated prepared foods at temperatures above the HACCP "danger zone" of 140, F (60, C). The performance standard is measured using the NSF mixture preheated to 1650 F (73.9° C). The unit will hold the temperature of this product above 1500 F (65.6° C). The temperature will be maintained best when the food product is held using pans with covers, and the food product is stirred regularly. RETHERMALIZER PERFORMANCE CRITERIA The Mirage® Drop -in Induction Rethermalizers are designed to take a container of cooked food from a chilled state (below 40.0° F [4.4° C]) through the HACCP "danger zone" of 165, F (73.90 C) in less than 90 minutes. The performance standard is measured using the NSF mixture chilled to 350 F (1.7° C). The electric unit will raise the temperature of this product above 165° F (73.9° C) in less than 90 minutes. The temperature will be maintained above 1500 F (65.60 C) when the food product and pan or inset are used with a standard pan or inset cover, and the food product is stirred regularly. Agency Listings C&S NSF, FCC This device complies with Part 18 FCC Rules. LISTED Cover is not NSF. Due to continued product improvement, please consult www vollrath.com for current product specifications. VOLLRA1T 5 �� Outperform every day.- www.vollrath.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter FEATURES • 3D induction coil heats food evenly and efficiently. Dry use. Heat is transferred directly to the induction -ready inset, which eliminates the need to monitor and refill water levels. • Three temperature sensors have direct contact with the inset to provide very accurate temperature control. Sensors help prevent food in near -empty insets from burning, which maintains food quality and reduces food waste. • Sensors measure differences in food temperatures. This drives the Stir Indicator LED that informs operators the food product should be stirred. • Advanced solid state controls with high visible white LEDs include: temperature control in OF and C; four presets - broth soups, creme soups, chili, mac and cheese; rethermalize mode (800W units only); stirring indicator; and a locking function that prevents untrained operators from changing settings. • Includes cover — item 47488 for 7 Qt. or 47490 for 11 Qt., and inset — item 88184 for 7 Qt. or item 88204 for 11 CIL Covers and insets are also sold separately. • Requires use of included Vollrath induction -ready inset. • Meets NSF4 Performance Requirements for rethermalization and hot food holding equipment. • Bottom exit 6' (1.8 m) power cord plugs into any NEMA 5-15R 15 or 20 amp 120V receptacle. • Bottom exit 58" (1.5 m) control cord. • Includes mounting hardware. IMPORTANT • Failure to use Vollrath induction -ready insets may damage the unit and will void the warranty. • All models require unrestricted intake and exhaust air ventilation for proper operation of the controls. The maximum intake temperature must not exceed 110°F (430C). Temperatures are measured in ambient air while all appliances in the kitchen are in operation. • Drop -in models require a minimum clearance of 3 inches (7.6 cm) on all sides and 12 inches (30.5 cm) at the bottom. WARRANTY: All models shown come with Vollrat 's standard warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. For full warranty details, please refer to the Vollrath Equipment and Smallwares Catalog. Approvals Date The Vollrath Company, L.L.C. 1236 North 18th Street Sheboygan, Wl53081-3201 U.S.A. Customer Service: 800.628.0830 Canada Customer Service: 800.695.8560 Main Fax: 800.752.5620 or 920.459.6573 W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Technical Services: 800.628.0832 Technical Services Fax: 920.459.5462 Page: 158 sy CD G O O O. 0 d CD I y W 0 O. cv CD tv N� CD H Vollrath 74701D Item #511 N L N E o� c R CO) L E c 0 t� c c .Q 0 0 CD CM T L z DIMENSIONS (shown in inches (cm)) I A 0 0 0 0 0 0 o =13 o _- 0 0 0 0 0 0 C Front/Side View SPECIFICATIONS '/a (2.2) 4 i l 125/16 91/4 (31.3) (23.5) Top View 5 (12.7) i-® 25/a (6.6) Control Box Depths: Box: 11/a" (3.2 cm) Box with USB Cord: 3" (7.6 cm) 513/16 (14.8) 6'Ae (16.4) Control Box Dimensions (B) (C) (A) Drop -in Drop -in Well (D) Shipping Capacity Overall Body Max Depth Cutout Shipping Dimensions Weight Item QT (L) Width Width Width IN (CM) Diameteg Voltage Watts Amps Plug IN (CM) LB (KG) 74701 DW 7 117/8 103/s 107/16 67/8 105/a 120V 25OW 2.1 NEMA 143/4 x 143/4 v 15 12.4 (6.6) (30.3) (26.4) (26.5) (17.6) (27) 5-15P (37.3 x 37.3 x 38.1) (5.6) 74701 D 7 117/s 103/8 107/16 67/8 10% 120V 80OW 6.7 NEMA 143/4 x 143/4 v 15 12.4 (6.6) (30.3) (26.4) (26.5) (17.6) (27) 5-15P (37.3 x 37.3 x 38.1) (5.6) 741101 DW 11 137/8 12% 127/16 67/8 125/e 120V 250W 2.1 NEMA 143/4 x 143/4 v 15 12.4 (10.4) (35.3) (31.4) (31.2) (17.6) (32.1) 5-15P (37.3 x 37.3 x 38.1) (5.6) 741101 D 11 137/8 123/e 127/16 67/e 125/a 120V 80OW 6.7 NEMA 143/4 x 143/4 v 15 12.4 (10.4) (35.3) (31.4) (31.2) (17.6) (32.1) 5-15P (37.3 x 37.3 x 38.1) (5.6) Outperform every day: www.vollrath.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter 6) 3Y16 (7.8) Receptacle 120V 0� p �W NEMA 5-15R The Vollrath Company, L.L.C. Technical Services: 806.628.0832 1236 North 18th Street Technical Services Fax: 920.459.5462 Sheboygan, WI53081-3201 U.S.A. Customer Service: 800.628.0830 Canada Customer Service: 800.695.8560 Main Fax: 800.752.5620 or 920.459.6573 © 2014 The Vollrath Company L.L.C. Form Number L35949 5/14/14 Printed in USA W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 159 Delfield F224-57 Item #512 Equipment & FiunWfings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 512 - FRONT EXPO COUNTER (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield F224-57 Front expo counter, 39" assembly with backsplash, 39" worktop refrigerator with remote mechanical section on right, 112" assembly with backsplash , 24" hinged door utility stand, 88" top extension S/S interior sides. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 160 SPG International Item #513 • Equipment & FUMW3i Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 513 - THIRD PAN HOLDER (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 161 John Boos EBMS6-2024-X Item #516 Equipment & Fiunishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 516 - MICROWAVE SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) John Boos EBMS6-2024-X Microwave Shelf, wall mount, 24"W x 20"D x 15"H, 16 gauge 300 series stainless steel, Stallion safety edge front with raised lip, NSF (FLYER) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 516 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 162 John Boos EBMS6-2024-X Item #516 John BOOS .. Since 1887 "EBMS6" Stainless Steel Microwave Shelves 3 TYPE 300 STAINLESS STEEL MICROWAVE SHELF MODEL Qty SIZES EBMS6-2024 20"X24" EBMS6-2030 20"X30" FEATURES: " Stainless Steel Shelf Type 300 stainless steel with # 4 polish, satin finish * Finished with a Safety Stallion Front Edge with raised lip * Moves your microwave up to a Convenient Eye Level " Free up valuable counter work space " Constructed specifically to easily hold all popular size microwaves * Ship UPS " All models are approved by the National Sanitation Foundation CONSTRUCTION: " Stainless Steel Shelves are TIG welded Exposed welds are polished to match adjacent surface MATERIAL: Shelf: 16 gauge type 300 stainless steel, # 4 polish, satin finish. John Boos & Co 3601 S. Banker Street - Effingham, IL 62401 Phone: 217-347-7701 - Fax: 217-347-7705 Email: sales@johnboos.com - Web -site: www. johnboos.com N-15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 163 John Boos EBMS6-2024-X Item #516 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS B4CK 1 1/2" --,° All dimensions are typical. Tolerance +/- .500". OPEN 1" 7/8" 5 i 1 —�- 1 7/8" -1 L 21 1/8" J, TYPE 300 STAINLESS STEEL MICROWAVE SHELF Model Size wt. EBMS6-2024 20"X24" 30 EBMS6-2030 20"X30" 39 John Boos & Co 3601 S. Banker Str - Effingham, IL 62401 Phone: 217-347-7701 - Fax: 217-347-7705 Email: sales@johnboos.com - Web -site: www.johnboos.com John BOOS _. .... ^': Since 1887 July 2013 John Boos is constantly engaged in a program of improving products and therefore reserves the right to change specification without prior notice N-16 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 164 SPG International Item #521 Awvr�o wimisor Equipment & FumWiinM Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 521- WORK TABLE DOUBLE OVERSHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Work Table with splash mounted Doble Overshelves 12" D and 1 S/S Undershelfaand saran wrap holes in bottom undershelf brackets. 60" W x 24" D S/S. VERIFY SIZE WITH K101 PLan D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 165 SPG International Item #521.1 W �O Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 521.1- OVERSHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Overshelf 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 166 ACP RFS12TS Item #522 W ��o 0 Equipment & FumWiin Co. ITEM# 522 - MICROWAVE OVEN (1 EA REQ'D) ACID, Inc. RFS12TS Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 Amana® Commercial Microwave Oven, countertop, 1.2 cu. ft. capacity, 1200 watts, medium volume, (2) magnetrons, 5 power levels, 4-stage cooking, 10 menu pads with capacity to program 100 menus, Braille touch pads, LED display, removable air filter, stainless steel exterior, stainless steel interior with sealed -in ceramic shelf, side hinged door, 120v/60/1-ph, power consumption: 1800 total watts, 15 amps, 20 MCA, 5' cord & NEMA 5-20P, ETL The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 522 ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP Cord & F120 60 1 5-20P 15 1.2 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 167 ACP, Inc. RFS12TS 14AWanao Commercial -__ Model RFS12TS shown Medium Volume This category of microwave is ideal for... Applications: Prep stations Pubs - Family restaurants Through put potential: 6 oz. portion, refrigerated Macaroni & Cheese, 40+ per hour - 1 baked potato, 17+ per hour - 6 each (1.5 oz.) batch of refrigerated hamburger patties, 15 batches per hour (60 patties) All ACP, Inc. commercial ovens are backed by our Culinary Center. Call us with any question regarding food preparation, menu development and cooking times.pg 866-426-2621. E Item #522 Project #: Item #: Medium Volume Amana Commercial Microwave Model RFS12TS Power Output 0 1200 watts of power. o Five power levels for consistent, delicious results for frozen, refrigerated and fresh foods - from the freezer to table in minutes. Easy to Use 0 1.2 cubic ft. (34 liter) capacity accommodates a 14" (356 mm) platter and ideal for prepackaged foods. o Up to 100 programmable menu items simplifies cooking and ensures consistent results. o Four stage cooking option with one -touch programming. Reduces prep time, labor and food waste while providing consistent results. 0 Controls are user friendly and require minimal training. o Multiple quantity pad calculates the proper cook times for multiple portions. o Time entry option adds flexibility. See -through door and lighted interior for monitoring without opening the door. o Stackable to save valuable counter space. o Interior ceramic shelf is sealed and recessed to reduce plate -to -shelf edge impact and keep spills contained. o Braille touch pads for ADA compliance. Easy to Maintain o Stainless steel exterior and interior for easy cleaning and a professional look. o Constructed to withstand the foodservice environment. o Removable air filter and a clean filter reminder protects the oven components. o Backed by the ACP, Inc. 24/7 ComSery Support Center, 866-426-2621. o ETL Listed. Ei4 .= ETA Interwk Intertek Part No. 20154701 © 2014 ACP, Inc. Updated 10/21/14 Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404 Original Instructions AC*O 225 49th Ave. Dr. 5W Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 U.S.A. 800-233-2366 319-368-8120 Fax: 319-368-8198 www.acpsolutions.com °/'' 02012Amana. All rights reserved. Brand used under license. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 168 ACP, Inc. RFS12TS Item #522 a 0 m 'u v n Amana Commercial Microwave Model RFS12TS I Medium Volume front view 211/4" I~ (551) (533) side view (door open) 353/4" (908) 2-1 • (54) 141W 1 (365) back view 1 %2" 19/4" (38) (400) 21" (533) Drawings available from KCL CADlog -techs@kcicad.com Specifications Specifications { Model RFS12TS JUPC Code 728028020878 4 Commercial microwave 10 touch pad control panel shall be _ Configuration Countertop programmable with the ability to program up to 100 menu Control System - ouch items and shall have automatic cooking capability for up to -- - ProgrammableControlPad_s - -- - -- 10 two portions. Touch pad shall include Braille for ADA - - compliance. Cooking timer shall be 60 minute, countdown Braille _ Yes - -- style with a time entry option and an adjustable end of cycle Settings Programmable � 100 , audible signal. LED display shall be backlit. There shall be 5 Max. Cooking Time - 60:00 - power levels, 4 cooking stages and defrost mode. Power Levels 5 Microwave output shall be 1200 watts distributed by two Defrost _ Yes magnetrons with rotating antennas to provide superior even Time Entry Option Yes heating throughout the cavity. Heavy duty door shall have a Microwave Distribution � Rotating antennas, top and bottom tempered glass window and a lift and pull handle with a 900+ _ Magnetron g 2 - - opening for easy access. An interior light shall - - - �- - — t facilitate monitoring without opening the door. The large 1.2 Display LED cubic ft. (34 liter) cavity shall accommodate a 14" (356 mm) Stackable Yes platter. Interior ceramic shelf shall be sealed and recessed on Stage Cooking Yes, 4 oven bottom to reduce plate -to -shelf edge impact. Oven shall - Interior Light Yes have a stainless steel interior and exterior and be Stackable Door Opening Lift and pull handle to save counter and shelf space. Air filter shall be easily ac- Signal _ Adjustable, end of cycle ! cessible and removable from the front of the oven and have Air Filter Yes, removable with clean filter reminder a "clean filter" reminder feature. Microwave oven shall com- Multiple Quantity Setting Yes, up to 2 portions ply with standards set by the U.S Department of Health and Exterior Dimensions H 14 3/8" (365) 12 '/4" (551) D 21"(533) 1 Human Services, ETL for safety and sanitation. Cavity Dimensions -- �H 8'/a' (226) % 14 Y8 (_359) D 161/4" (413) Door Depth 34" (864mm), 900+ door open - _ e able Ca Usable Spac r -- -- -- _ -- 1.2 cubic ft. (34 liter) - �-r-- - -- - --a �� Eta Exterior Finish L Stainless steel � � ''�. F"ler"k Warranty Intertek Interior Finish Power Stainless_ steel with sealed -in ceramic shelf --- ___---_._ -- Warranty Certificate for this product can be Consumption 2000 W, 16 A found on the ACP, Inc. website at: Power Output* 1200 W* Microwave _I www.acpsolutions.com/warranty Power Source 120V, 60 Hz, 20 A single phase Plug Configuration / Cord NEMA 5-20 5' (1.5 m) r �: Service Frequency 2450 MHz All products are backed by the ACP, Inc. 24/7 ComSery - _ Product Weight _( -- . ----- 641bs. (29 kg.) Support Center. Ship weight (approx.) 71 lbs. (32 kg.) Shipping Carton Size ,UPS Shippable H 181/2" (467) W 26'/e' (663) ID 22'/e" (581) Yes 1 ,� Measurements in () are millimetersCO omm.SBft * IEC 60705 Tested e66-426-2621 ** Includes handle Part No.20154701 Updated 10/21/14 Original Instructions 9�� 0 2014 ACP, Inc. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404 225 49th Ave. Dr. SW Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 U.S.A. 1 800-233-2366 1 319-368-8120 ) Fax:319-368-8198 ( www.acpsolutions.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 169 SPG International Item #523 NP�f,- WIMO JS. Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 523 - WORK COUNTER ("TO -GO" TABLE) (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 4" Back splash and sliding doors. 48"W x 30" D S/S included in item 512 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 170 Hatco DL-12457CBC Item #524 AA rowmVsVir Equipment & HiunWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 524 - DECORATIVE LAMP (1 EA REQ'D) Hatco DL-12457CBC Decorative Lamp, (1) bulb type, 8-1/2" H x 6-1/8" Dia. shade, rigid mount with pivot (overall length 17" - 71") to canopy, remote switch, No bulb included (specify finish) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 524 ACCESSORIES C Mfr Qty Model Spec Hatco 1 NOTE: Sale of this product must comply with Hatco's Minimum Resale Price Policy; consult order acknowledgement for details Hatco 1 NOTE: Includes 24/7 parts & service assistance, call 800-558-0607 Hatco 1 NOTE: The decorative lamp and Luminaires are NOT returnable Hatco 1 120v/60/1-ph, 250 watt (Decorative lamp only) standard Hatco 1 RED-CTD-120 Lamp Bulb, 250 watt, red, coated Hatco 1 CL-COAT Lamp Shade only, clear coated brushed metal (MUST select color/finish to the remainder of unit) (Not for retrofit) Hatco 1 BLACK Black, designer color (Not for retrofit) Hatco 1 Color to match unit finish Hatco 1 MUST specify horizontal stem length from 17" to 71" nearest inch ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 60 1 Direct 2.08 .25 15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 171 Hatco DL-12457CBC Item #524 at� Decorative Lamps/ Luminaires Models: DL or DLH-400, -500, -600, -700, -725, -750, -760, -775, -800, -1100, -1200, -1300, -1400, -1500 Hatco Decorative Lamps provide radiant heat to briefly hold food warm at kitchen work areas, waitress pickup stations, or customer serving points, while enhancing your d6cor. Versatile enough for almost any location, the range of lights are available with a selection of unlimited personalizing choices. In addition to food warming, configurations for lighting (Luminaire) is offered as well. Standard features • Luminaire, Standard and High Watt bulbs available (bulb not included in unit price) • Models available in fourteen lamp shade styles • Eight different mounting arrangements to choose from • Four switch options • Available for food holding and display or lighting only applications NOTE: Decorative Lamps (DL and DLH Series) are non -returnable. Build Your Decorative/Luminaire Lamp in Six Easy Steps (not for retrofit -bulb not included) - Step 1 Wattage Step 2 Shade Style Step 3 Shade and Canopy Colors Step 4 Mounting Style Step 5 Switch Location Step 6 Overall Length --- D You can develop your own Hatco Decorative Lamp solutions with our online lamp configurator. Visit "www.hatcocorp.com" and click on "Build a Lamp" CLAMP Project Item # Quantity 3lilllll�IVlEififillllllfl�IIIIIIIIUflllllllElfl�flfH i pillllllllllllllllllElf Ef[EfilitRt[f I(I� �I!lil 111 111 life 9tf Pii Rlu l[l �I[[L I (From left to right) - DL-700-AU,-800-CTR,-750-CL,-400-SU, -725-SU, -775-RL,-600-SL,-500-SU, - 760-SL,-1200-SR,-1300-RL, -1100 CR,-1500-CT, and-1400-CU *R144f'ifll![If IIIIIIIIpIIIIIIIId1lUlllt�[ri[iflf{IE[[�Illlllllllllllllllflllfif[[IIIIfIIfIltl Elllllllllillll 111 liEllilll0f[IEIilE[gllfi Options (available at time of purchase only) Designer Colors (Exception: DL-1500) ❑Warm Red ❑Black ❑Gray Granite ❑White Granite ❑Navy Blue ❑Hunter Green ❑Antique Copper Gloss Finishes (Exception: DL-1500) ❑Smooth White ❑Gleaming Gold ❑Glossy Gray ❑Bold Black Gloss Finishes' for Shade Only (Exception: DL-1500) ❑Radiant Red ❑Brilliant Blue ❑Clear Brushed Metal Plated Finishes" (Exception: DL-1500) ❑ Bright Brass ❑ Bright Nickel ❑ Bright Copper ❑Antique Nickel ❑Antique Brass ❑Antique Bronze DL-1500 Color Combinations only ❑ Designer Finishes Black/Antique Copper/Black ❑ Gloss Finishes Bold Black/Radiant Red/Bold Black' ❑ Gloss Bold Black/Plated Bright Nickel/Gloss Bold Black' ❑ Gloss Bold Black/Plated Antique Nickel/Gloss Bold Black" ❑ Gloss Bold Black/Plated Bright Copper/Gloss Bold Black" "Special process required and extended lead times Cord Color (C=Cord, R=Retractable Mounts only) ❑ Black (Standard) ❑ White ❑ Luminaire Lighting, (200W bulb maximum, not included) Extended Electrical Leads - For any SU, SL, or SR mount unit, must specify lead length) 01'-5' (305-1524 mm) 06'-10' (1829-3048 mm) ❑ l l'-15' (3353-4572 mm) ❑ 16'-20' (4877-6096 mm) Accessories Track Mount Bar - (120V only) 04' (1219 mm) Black 04' (1219 mm) White 08' (2438 mm) Black 08' (2438 mm) White ❑ 12' (3658 mm) Black ❑ 12' (3658 mm) White Additional Track Installation and Modification Kit ❑ Black ❑ White ❑ 16 Amp Lamp Toggle Switch Coated Bulbs for Luminaire models only ❑ 120V, 60W Clear ❑ 240V, 60W Clear Coated Bulbs ❑ 120V, 25OW Clear ❑ 240V, 250W Clear ❑ 120V, 250W Red Coated Bulbs for DLH models only ❑ 120V, 375W Clear ❑ 120V, 375W Red Uncoated Bulbs ❑ 120V, 250W Clear ❑ 240V, 250W Clear ❑ 120V, 250W Red Uncoated Bulbs for DLH models only ❑ 120V, 375W Clear ❑ 120V, 375W Red u V MADE IN C E us ANSI/NSF 4 THE nuuuununuunuuuuuuuuuuunuunuununuuuuunuuuuuunuuuuunlllnninuuunnluuunnllnuuunuuunuununnnununuuuunuuuuuununuuuuunnnnuunuuuuuuuuunutunnnuunnnnu HATCO CORPORATION I P.O. Box 340500 Milwaukee, WI 53234-0500 U.S.A. I (800) 558-0607 I (414) 671-6350 Fax: (800) 543-7521 I Int'I. Fax: (414) 671-3976 I www.hatcocorp.com I equipsales@hatcocorp.com I intlsales@hatcocorp.com Fnrm Kin nl nl H Gnar. Shoot Pan.-. 1 of 9 hinP. 9n15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 172 Hatco DL-12457CBC Item #524 Decorative Lamps/Luminaires Models: DL or DLH-400, -500, -600, -700, -725, -750, -760, -775, -800, -1100, -1200, -1300, -1400, -1500 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIInIIIIIInIIIIIIIIIIIIIIlIl11II111111111111111111111111111IIIIlIIIIIIIIIII111111111111111111111I111111111111111111111111111IIIIIIIIII11111111111111II1U1lIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIInllll ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS Please refer to the six steps in the Hatco Foodservice Equipment Price List, go online at www.hatcocorp.com and click on "Build A Lamp", or click on Step 1-Wattages "Video Library" and watch "Decorator Lamp Configurator". This will help you in choosing the correct configuration for your specific needs. Model• Maximum Watt Bulb (Not included) Voltage (Single Phase) Ship Weight• DL- (Luminaire) 200 120,240 6-10 lbs. (3-5 kg) DL- (Standard) 250 120,240 6-10 lbs. (3-5 kg) DLH- (High Watt) 375 120,240 6-10 lbs. (3-5 kg) • Not field convertible • Depending on components Step 2-Shade Styles - I E ' - o00 ooa o00 LO E 06W 1" f- 6.125--1 i- 6.125"—I I--6.25"—( 1— 6.5" --i ♦` 9.5"--I (156 mm) (156 mm) (159 mm) (165 mm) (241 mm) -400 -500 -600 -700 -725 TE o00 000 000 000 c6�2 1V f-12.5" 1 1---10.5" (279 mm) (318 mm) (267 mm) (279 mm) -750 -760 -775 -800 T E TE E �E II N Op N 1 f•— 6.5" —I I— 7" —I 11.54 "--I I— 7" —I 1-- 6.67"—I (165 mm) (178 mm) (293 mm) (178 mm) (169 mm) -1100 (Cylinder) -1200 (Square) -1300 (Triangular) -1400 -1500 Step 3-Colors - Click on www.hatcocorp.com (Order Literature/Sales Literature/Color Chip Chart) or see the Hatco Price List for color representations. Designer colors: Warm Red, Black, Gray Granite, White Granite, Navy Blue, Hunter Green, Antique Copper Gloss Finishes: Smooth White, Gleaming Gold, Glossy Gray, Bold Black Gloss Finishes* for Shade Only: Radiant Red, Brilliant Blue, Clear Brushed Metal Finish Plated Finishes*: Bright Brass, Bright Nickel, Bright Copper, Antique Nickel, Antique Brass and Antique Bronze Exception: DL-1500 in these color options only Designer Black/Antique Copper/Black Gloss Bold Black/Plated Bright Nickel/Gloss Bold Black* (shown) Gloss Bold Black/Plated Antique Nickel/Gloss Bold Black* Gloss Bold Black/Plated Bright Copper/Gloss Bold Black* Gloss Bold Black/Radiant Red/Bold Black* *Special Process Required and Extended Lead Times I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1111111111111 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I HATCO CORPORATION I P.O. Box 340500 Milwaukee, WI 53234-0500 U.S.A. 1 (800) 558-0607 1 (414) 671-6350 Fax: (800) 543-7521 I Int'I. Fax: (414) 671-3976 I www.hatcocorp.com I equipsales@hatcocorp.com I intlsales@hatcocorp.com Fnrm Nn nl nl H Snan Shoat Pana 9 of 9 . h Ina 9n15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 173 Hatco DL-124S7CBC Item #S24 Decorative Lamps/Luminaires Models: DL or DLH-400, -500, -600, -700, -725, -750, -760, -775, -800, -1100, -1200, -1300, 4=0 -1400, -1500 11111 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 111 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 11111 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1111 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Step 4-Mounting Styles Shade Height MOUNTING STYLES SPECIFY the: 8.5" H 10.5" H (216 mm) (267 mm) A Mount _ 7"-20„ Rigid Mount I 178-508 mm 1 Horizontal 7 to 20" Cr to canopy 4.875" Stem Length (178 to 508 mm) a with Shade (t)24 mm) pIVot. Height plus Q Q 1 1.75' AU Overall Overall (44 mm) SWITCH Length: Length: 17" to 30" 19" to 32" (432 to (483 to 762 mm) 813 mm) H P Mount 2.412 —I 0 > Rigid Mount to (61 mm) T I Overall ILcanopy with pivot. (1j < mm) 124 m Length 17" to 71 " 19" to 73" (from pivot (432 to (483 to PL (� Pu to bottom of 1803 mm) 1854 mm) SW TCH uJrsWITc" shade) C Mount l-(lams Cord Mount to canopy. Cu SWITCH cc Cl V SWITCH \ 17n 19n Overall (432 mm) (483 mm) Length to any length to any length CT Mount" Cord Mount to track cn adapter. swTCH Step 5-Switch Locations (N)-None (U)-Upper Switch 14 875" (124 mm) 1 Supplied by installer Not available on: • DLH-(high watt models) • R Mount • Track Mounts: (CT, RT, ST) (L)-Lower Switch (R)-Remote Switch Not available on: • Accommodates 16 amps DLH-(high watt models) • Up to seven 250W lamps, • A Mount or five 375W lamps maximum per remote switch Shade Height MOUNTING STYLES SPECIFY the: 8.5" H 10.5" H (216 mm) (267 mm) R Mount F(156mm) Retractable Cord " ¢ Mount. 31 to 33" to 71 %z" v (787 to (838 to J RL SWITCH Adjusts to 1765 mm) 1816 mm) Co V \ a maximum and minimum RT Mount` ec according W cc Retractable Cord to shade height 33a/e" to a 35 /e° to Mount to track 717/e" adapter. (848 to (ggg to SWITCH \,I 1826 mm) 1876 mm) (124 mmm t I- 4.875° �l Rigid Stem Mount Su�� 14" to 71" 16" to 73" to canopy. SWATCH (356 to (483 to SWSL ITCH 1803 mm) 1854 mm) W ti Overall ST Mount" Length Rigid Stem Mount 17" to 71 " 19" to 73" to track sn (432 to (483 to adapter. SWITCH 1803 mm) 1854 mm) • NOTE: Lamp shade diameter and wattage may limit number of lamps per track. To assure warranty coverage, do not install track systems in damp or wet locations (including above steam tables). Step 6-Overall Unit Length • For C, CT, S or ST Mounts: From ceiling to bottom of warmer lamp shade (#6 in drawing). • For A or P Mounts: From center of shade to wall plus vertical shade length (see line art in mounting styles). • For Clearance: See "Clearance Requirements" in the Hatco Price List Ordering Instructions. Overall Unit Length Overall Clearance Countertop Floor PRODUCT SPECS Decorative Lamp The Decorative Lamp shall be a Hatco Model ... as distributed by the Hatco remote or supplied by installer. Bulb options are uncoated or coated, clear or red, Corporation, Milwaukee, WI 53234 U.S.A. 60W clear, 250W (DL models) or 375W (DLH models). With 24/7 parts and service assistance (US and Canada only), the Decorative Lamp Warranty consists of 24/7 parts and service assistance (US and Canada only). shall be rated at ... watts, ... volts, and ... inches (millimeters) in overall width. It shall consist of a vented lamp shade and mounting. Switch locations can be upper, lower, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I1111111111111111111111111111111111I U I I I I1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 I I I I l l l l l l l l l l l l l ll l l l l l l l HATCO CORPORATION I P.O. Box 340500 Milwaukee, WI 53234-0500 U.S.A. I (800) 558-0607 I (414) 671-6350 Fax: (800) 543-7521 I Int'I. Fax: (414) 671-3976 I www.hatcocorp.com I equipsales@hatcocorp.com I intlsales@hatcocorp.com Fnrm Nn Ill Ill H Snar. ghaat Pana q of R . h inz 'nisi D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 174 Hatco DL-12457CBC Item #525 '�� r'wimusor Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 525 - DECORATIVE LAMP (1 EA REQ'D) Hatco DL-12457CBC Decorative Lamp, (1) bulb type, 8-1/2" H x 6-1/8" Dia. shade, rigid mount with pivot (overall length 17" - 71") to canopy, remote switch, No bulb included (specify finish) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 524 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Hatco 1 NOTE: Sale of this product must comply with C Hatco 1 Hatco 1 Hatco 1 Hatco 1 RED-CTD-120 Hatco 1 CL-COAT Hatco 1 BLACK Hatco 1 Hatco 1 ELECTRICAL Hatco's Minimum Resale Price Policy; consult order acknowledgement for details NOTE: Includes 24/7 parts & service assistance, call 800-558-0607 NOTE: The decorative lamp and Luminaires are NOT returnable 120v/60/1-ph, 250 watt (Decorative lamp only) standard Lamp Bulb, 250 watt, red, coated Lamp Shade only, clear coated brushed metal (MUST select color/finish to the remainder of unit) (Not for retrofit) Black, designer color (Not for retrofit) Color to match unit finish MUST specify horizontal stem length from 17" to 71" nearest inch VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 60 1 Direct 2.08 .25 15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 175 Hatco DL-12457CBC Item #526 Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 526 - DECORATIVE LAMP (1 EA REQ'D) Hatco DL-12457CBC Decorative Lamp, (1) bulb type, 8-1/2" H x 6-1/8" Dia. shade, rigid mount with pivot (overall length 17" - 71") to canopy, remote switch, No bulb included (specify finish) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 524 ACCESSORIES C Mfr Qty Model Spec Hatco 1 NOTE: Sale of this product must comply with Hatco's Minimum Resale Price Policy; consult order acknowledgement for details Hatco 1 NOTE: Includes 24/7 parts & service assistance, call 800-5S8-0607 Hatco 1 NOTE: The decorative lamp and Luminaires are NOT returnable Hatco 1 120v/60/1-ph, 250 watt (Decorative lamp only) standard Hatco 1 RED-CTD-120 Lamp Bulb, 250 watt, red, coated Hatco 1 CL-COAT Lamp Shade only, clear coated brushed metal (MUST select color/finish to the remainder of unit) (Not for retrofit) Hatco 1 BLACK Black, designer color (Not for retrofit) Hatco 1 Color to match unit finish Hatco 1 MUST specify horizontal stem length from 17" to 71" nearest inch ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 60 1 Direct 2.08 .25 15 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 176 SPG International PASS-THU Item #530 %Aro wmBir Equipment 8s F ulmishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 530 - SHELF, PASS-THRU (1 EA REQ'D) SPG PASS-THU 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 177 SPG International ANG-SHLF Item #531 ® aL Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 531- ANGLED PRINTED SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG ANG-SHLF 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 178 SPG International WALL SHELF Item #532 Equipment & FtiimW ngs Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 532 - WALL SHELF (1 EA REQ-D) SPG WALL SHELF Wall Mounted 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 179 SPG International Item #533 1\ 0 wMajull, Equipment & Furnishings nishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 533 -THIRD PAN HOLDER (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 180 SPG International WALL SHELF Item #534 1� �/ Pl O L"/�I m lL Equipment & FumW2inp Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 534 - WALL SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG WALL SHELF Wall Mounted 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 181 SPG International WALL SHELF Item #536 Submittal Sheet ITEM# 536 - WALL SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG WALL SHELF Wall Mounted 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 182 SPG International WALL SHELF Item #537 )��vl 5"�Mmopm Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 537 - WALL SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) SPG WALL SHELF Wall Mounted 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 183 Focus Foodservice FGN074G Item #537.1 well�wyimusoz Equipment & F umLnhings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 537.1- POST (1 EA REQ'D) Focus FGN074G Post, 74"H, mobile, green epoxy coated with SaniGard'm The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 314.1 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 184 John Boos PBHS-W-1410-P-X Item #601 a Equipment 86 Hitmishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 601- HAND SINK (3 EA REQ'D) John Boos PBHS-W-1410-P-X Hand Sink, wall mount, 14"W x 10" front -to -back x 5"deep, 1-7/8" drain, all stainless steel construction (Splash Mount faucet included) (FLYER) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 601 C WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE C WASTE INDIRECT DIRECT SIZE SIZE 1-7/8" D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 185 John Boos PBHS-W-1410-P-X Item #601 John BOOS "Hand Sinks" Pro -Bowl Sinks One Compartment Sinks w/ Stainless Steel Deep Drawn Bowls f p; . ,r PBHS-W-1410-1 PBHS-W-1410 FEATURES: • One piece deep drawn bowl " All sink bowls have a large liberal radii with a minimum dimension of 2" and rectangular in design for increased capacity. " Wall mounting bracket, Stainless Steel, off set design CONSTRUCTION: Bowl Stainless Steel Sinks are TIG welded, Exposed welds are polished to match adjacent surface. MATERIAL: Bowl Type 304 stainless steel polish, satin finish Bracket Type 304 stainless steel polish, satin finish KE, PBHS-F1410 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES FAUCETS APRON SKIRT SIDE SPLASH ADA WRIST BLADES TOWEL DISPENSER SOAP DISPENSER LEVER WASTES OVER FLOWS P- TRAPS John Boos & Co 315 South First Street - Effingham, IL 62401 Phone: 217-347-7701 -Fax: 217-347-7705 Email: sales@johnboos.com - Web -site: www. johnboos.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 186 John Boos PBHS-W-1410-P-X Item #601 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS _-17"-- PBHS-F-1410 15" 1 — 17"~ 81/2„ 1/4 TURNDOWN __2„ IN BACK ANGLE SUPPORT g r�L—— — IN BACK t f I'i I'1 V i PBHS-W-1410-1 - 1 7 MOUNTING BRACKET �It r1G"---I 15' LI-Cl _1 I TURNDOWN IN 13ACK 2' 'PO i BACK P3� JImo` J~ � 14 •. J � 1. All dimensions are typical. Tolerance +/- .500". All units ship unassembled for reduced shipping cost. - 812'. 'PO _- % 'PORT �-�- BAC'K NI PBHS-W-1410 MOUNTING BRACKET -- 16 1 J TURNDOWN IN BACK - 2' !I �. 1'31 •. L _ � John John Boos & Co ` BOOS 315 South First - Effingham, IL 62401 Phone: 217-347-7701 - Fax: 217-347-7705 a Srrm 1887 Email: sales@johnboos.com - Web -site: www.johnboos.com May 2002 John Boos is constantly engaged in a program of improving products and therefore reserves the right to change specification without prior notice D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 187 Hoshizaki KM-515MAH Item #602/603 1�0 rowMMOT Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 602/603 - ICE CUBER (1 EA REQ'D) Hoshizaki KM-515MAH Ice Maker, Cube -Style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, approximately 527-lb capacity/24-hours, stainless steel finish, crescent cube style, R-404A refrigerant, 115v/60/1-ph, 11.7 amps, ENERGY STAR® The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 602/603 ACCESSORIES C Mfr Qty Model Spec Hoshizaki 1 3-Year parts & labor on entire machine Hoshizaki 1 5-Year parts & labor on evaporator Hoshizaki 1 5-Year parts on compressor & air-cooled condenser Hoshizaki 1 B-300SF Hoshizaki 1 Hoshizaki 1 H9320-51 ELECTRICAL Ice Bin, top -hinged front -opening door, approximately 300-lb ice storage capacity, for top -mounted ice maker, stainless steel exterior, painted flange legs included, protected with H- GUARD Plus Antimicrobial Agent, ETL-Sanitation 3-Year parts & labor for bin Water Filtration System, single configuration VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA I AMPS I KW I HP MCA MOCP 115 60 1 1 11.7 WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1 1/2" 2 3 PLUMBING 1 REMARKS Ice maker drain PLUMBING 2 REMARKS 3/8" dew drain WASTE INDIRECT DIRECT SIZE SIZE 1 3/4' 2 3/8' 3 1 3/4" D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 188 Hoshizaki KM-515MAH Item #i602/603 Item # Project: _ M H KM Qty. - -515•Au[oCad available on KCL SLIM -LINE MODULAR CRESCENT CUBER KM-515M H 4/ 14 Item #13217 CUBER DIMENSIONS W x D x H KM-5 15 M_H 22 x 2731 x 305/I6 It Ito I —� B-300 B-500 B-700 B-800 Also available on Large Bins: B-11 BOSS B-130OSS B-1s00SS B-165OSS *KM CUBE DIMENSIONS # 1 'approximate size in inches, image not to scale NSF J C UL US LISTED © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. KM-5 15 MAH Air -Cooled Shown on an optional B-300 KM-5 I SMWH Water -Cooled KM-5 15MRH Remote Air -Cooled • Up to 527 lbs. of ice production per 24 hours • Durable stainless steel exterior • Individual crescent cube • Protected by H-GUARD Plus Antimicrobial Agent IFi-GUARD • CycleSaver° Design �W �/ • EverCheck° alert system • Stainless steel evaporator • Mount two units side -by -side, in only 44" of floor space, for 1,002 lbs. per 24 hours • Removable air filters (Air-cooled models only) • R-404A Refrigerant . The KM-515MAH is ENERGY STAR qualified. Warranty Valid in United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, & U.S.Territories. Contact factory for warranty in other countries. Three Year - Parts & Labor on entire machine. Five Year - Parts & Labor on: Evaporator. Five Year - Parts on: Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil. 618 Hwy. 74 S., Peachtree City, GA 30269 I TEL 1-800.438-6087 I FAX 1-800-345-1325 www.hoshizaki.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 189 Hoshizaki KM-515MAH Item #602/603 KM-5 15 M_H SLIM -LINE MODULAR CRESCENT CUBER DIMENSIONS W x D x H KM-515M H 22 x 27"1 x 35S" AIR-COOLED Water Temp' F. 50' 70' 90' li a 70- 527 504 474 E 80' 510 475 444 a 90' 504 I 419 WATER-COOLED Water Temp' F. 50' 70' 90' li .a 70' 462 457 427 E 80' 458 451 407 a 90' 457 407 REMOTE AIR-COOLED Water Temp' F. 50' 70' 90' ti n 70' 491 480 443 80' 482 465 417 a 90' 480 408 UTILITY CONSUMPTION Model Number Ice Production Per Cycle Lbs. Cubes KWH per 100 LBS. 90170 Pe1h. Water Gal. per 1001bs. t^^^• Water Gal. per 1001ba. KM-515MAH 9.8 480 5.9 18.5 N/A KM-515MWH 10.0 480 5.14 23.0 106 KM-515MRH 10.3 480 5.8 20.8 NIA SPECIFICATIONS Model Number Condenser Amperage Min. Circuit Ampacity Shipping Weight KM-515MAH Air -Cooled 11.7 20 175lbs. KM•515MWH Water -Cooled 9.6 20 175lbs. KM-515MRH Remote Air -Cooled 11.3 20 175lbs. STORAGE BINS Model Number Application Capacity ARI-Rated Capacity B-300 300 lbs. 260 lbs. B•500 500 lbs. 360 Ibs. B-700 700 lbs. 550 Ibs. B-800 800 Ibs. 600 lbs. B-900 900 Ibs. 660 lbs. B-1150 1150lbs. N/A B-1300 1275 lbs. N/A B-1500 1490lbs. N/A B-1650 1605 Ibs. N/A ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING/KM-5 I SM_H • 11SV/60/1 • 20 Amp Max Fuse/HACR Breaker Size • 3/8" OD copper or equivalent independent potable water supply with 1/4" nominal ID minimum • 3/4" FPT water drain I ' NSF C UL US LISTED © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC.•W • ,. • Air-cooled • Water-cooled • Remote Air-cooled ZY 15wm) 0 0 (35Ynm) FRONT VIEW Try Fldo 1-i3n6' (a6tm1 s° 1+ ) 3.11lt 1 15.5'r 3.1/a' leu++a+l (3ssmm) (oomml AIR-COOLED UNIT REMOTE AIR-COOLED UNIT SIDE VIEW ICE DROP ZONE WATER-COOLED UNIT URC-SF Remote Condenser (Sold Separately) For Use with KM.SI SMRH 17 ,m Al, Flow URC•SF 11a 32+aae Candlit Ira- �liie 18 +m 24 Pre -Charged Tubing Kits (Sold SeparteW 20, R404-2046.2 35' R404.3546-2 voltage supply for the URC Remote Condenser is supplied from the Ice Maker. No additional circuit is required. OPERATING LIMITS SERVICE -Ambient Temp Range 45 - 100'F • Panels easily removed and all components • Water Temp Range 45 - 90'F accessible for service. • Water Pressure 10 - 113psig • Removable/cleanable air filters. -Voltage Range 104 - I27V (Air-cooled models only) OPERATING LIMITS/URC-SF -Ambient Temp Range -20'F - +122-F • Vnlraaa It,— 1(14. 117V D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 190 Hoshizaki B-300SF Item #602/603 Item # Project: PF/SF BINS Qhr' -- *AutoCad available on KCL ICE STORAGE BIN SERIES BIN DIMENSIONS W x D x H B-250PF 30x32112x333'8" B-300PF/SF 22 x 32" Z x 46' BD-300PF/SF 22 x 32" Z x 46' B-SOOPF/SF 30 x 32" 2 x 46` BD-SOOPF/SF 30x3212x46' B-700PF/SF 44 x 3212 x 46' B-800PF/SF 48 x 3212 x 46" B-900PF/SF 52 x 3211 x 46' *with 6" adj. legs 0%. 0 O Intertek © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. r B-2SOPF B-30OPF B-SOOPF B-70OPF B-300SF B-SOOSF B-700SF BD-30OPF BD-500PF BD-300SF BD-SOOSF PF - PVC Coated Galvanized Steel Finish SF - Stainless Steel Finish PF/SF BINS 7/241I5 Item #13163 B-800PF B-90OPF B-800SF B-900SF PF BINS • Ice storage capacity from 250 lbs. up to 900 lbs. • Vinyl clad galvanized steel cabinet exterior design for easy cleaning SF BINS • Ice storage capacity from 300 lbs. up to 900 lbs. • Stainless steel exterior design for easy cleaning PF/SF BINS • Protected by H-GUARD Plus Antimicrobial Agent IFi-GUARD ftus • Long lasting attractive appearance �/ • Polyethylene bin liner for sanitary storage • Sturdy construction for side by side or stacked ice machine installation • Foamed -in -place polyurethane insulation, in all bin walls and bottom, provides dependable ice storage BD Bins • Fit 24" - 24 1/2" deep ice machine without Top Kit extension Warranty Valid in United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, & U.S.Territories. Contact factory for warranty in other countries. Two Year - Parts & Labor (Production prior to January 2012). Three Year - Parts & Labor (January 2012 production and after). r�RrCAti� 618 Hwy. 74 S., Peachtree City, GA 30269 I TEL 1-800-438-6087 I FAX 1-800-345-1325 www.hoshizaki.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 191 Hoshizaki B-300SF B-2SOPF B-300PF/SF BD-300PFISF B-SOOPF/SF BD-SOOPF/SF B-700PF/SF B-800PF/SF B-900PF/SF ICE STORAGE BIN APPLICATION Model Number Application Capacity Storage ARI-Rated Storage Capacity Dimensions WxDxH Shipping Weight B-250PF 250 lbs. 230 lbs. 30" x 32" x 331"" 130 lbs. B(D)-300PF/SF 300 lbs. 260 Ibs. 22" x 32"" x 46'" 135 lbs. B(D)-500PF/SF 500 Ibs. 360 lbs. 30" x 32" x 46'" 155 lbs. B-70OPFISF 700 Ibs. 550 Ibs. 44" x 32" °" x 46"' 200 Ibs. B-800PF/SF 800 lbs. 600 lbs. 48" x 32" x 46' 210 lbs. B-900PF/SF 900 lbs. 660 lbs. 52" x 3210" x 46'" 220 lbs. *height includes 6" adi. legs Item #602/603 PF/SF BINS ICE STORAGE BIN SERIES • Up to 230 lbs. of ice storage • Up to 260 lbs. of ice storage • Up to 360 lbs. of ice storage • Up to 550 lbs. of ice storage • Up to 600 lbs. of ice storage • Up to 660 lbs. of ice storage ICE MACHINE MODEL APPLICATION 46 22" Width 22" Width 30" Width 30" Width 44" Width 44" Width 48" Width KMD-410M KM-901M KMD-460M 2KM-320M 2KMD-410M KM-1301SKM-340M LjKM-320M KMS-822M KM-1340M KMD-850M 2 KM-340M 2 KMS-822M KM-14005KM-515M FD-650M-C KM-1601M KMD-901MRH 2KM-515M 2FD-650M-C KM-1601S KM-600M FD-1001M-C KML Series KMD-901MWH 2 KM-600M 2 FD-1001M-C KM-1900S KM-650M F-1501M KMS-1401M' 2 KM-650M KM-21005 Bin F-450M F-2001M KMS-2000M' IM-500S KM-2500S F-801 M 2 F450M F-1001 M 2 F-801 M 2 F-1001M 22" Width NO B-300PF/SF TOP KIT N/A N/A N/A NIA N/A N/A NEEDED (8-250PF/SF) 30" Width NEED NEED HS-2033 NO TOP KIT NEED HS-2129 B-250PF HS-2033 & HS-2129 NEEDED NIA N/A NIA (8-500PF/SF) B-500PF/SF No Top Kit Needed NEED NEED NEED NO 44" Width NEED HS-2035 HS-2034 HS-2034 TOP KIT NEED N/A 8-70OPF/SF HS-2035 & HS-2130 & HS-2130 NEEDED HS-2130 NEED NEED NEED NEED NEED NO 48" Width HS-2035 HS-2131 NEED B-800PF/SF HS-2035 & HS HS-2034 & HS- HS-2032 HS-2032 TOP KIT & HS-2032 203212 - & HS-2032 2034/2032 & HS-2131 NEEDED NEED NEED NEED NEED HS-2132 NEED NEED NEED 52" Width HS-2035 HS-2035 HS-2035 & HS-2035 HS-2033 HS-2033 HS-2032 B-900PF/SF & HS-2033 & HS & HS-2132 203312132 BD Bins fit 24" - 24 1 /2" deep ice machine without Top Kit extension. BD-300SF/PF: KMD-41 OM, KMS-822M, FD-650M-C, FD- 1001 M-C BD5005F/PF: KMD-460M, KMD-850, FD-650M-C Any KMS or FD on bin need Top Kit Extension: HS-2129 - for use with B-500 bins HS-2130 - for use with B-700 bins HS-213I - for use with B-800 bins / - HS-2132 -for use with B-900 bins O © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. Intertek 3: 30 I'-15 B-25OPF 3/4' FPT Drain 22 x 3212 x 33318 WxDxH 28v2 ------B-30OPFISF 22' ---- — 8.500PFISF 30'- -- - ---- 8.700PFISF 44' - -- -- --- 8-800PFISF 48' --- 8-900PFISF 52' 31112 -- rs is --- =- 9lmvFl$F 3fi - 321n ., gecepfs 518 Shank Leg '3/4' FPT D2N 28u7 B BINS BD BINS Top View Top View Slim -Line B-30OPF/SF B-500PF/SF B-70OPFISF BD-300PF/SF BD-500PFISF 44 x 321n x 46 22 x 321r2 x 46 30 x 321n x 46 WxDxH WxDxH WxDxH B-800PF/SF 48 x 321n x 46 WxDxH F1 B-90OPF/SF 52 x 321n x 46 WxDxH D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 192 Hoshizaki H9320-51 Item #602/603 Item # Project: WATER FILTERSQy : - *AutoCad available on KCL H9320 FILTER Single, Double,Triple Single Configuration 18.4" H Twin Configuration 19.1 1" H Triple Configuration 19.15" H E.10 PREFILTER (9795-80) E-20 PREFILTER (9795-90) NSf o © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. FILTRATION SYSTEMS WATER FILTERS 7/24115 Item # 13076 4HC.H 4HC-H i H9320-51 Single Configuration Shown E gQSHWAKIJ JOSHlzr 4HC-H IHR_.H U4 1C H �I H9320-52 Twin Configuration Shown 'Available in single, twin, and triple configurations • Keep ice makers functioning at full capacity • Reduce up to 99.9% of disinfectant chlorine from incoming water supply, eliminating off tastes and odors of the ice • Will filter out dirt and rust particles as small as 1/2 micron producing crystal clear ice (99+% reduction) • Decrease machine maintenance by reducing lime scale build-up Warranty Warranty offered by EVERPURE (Effective Sep. 2, 2003) Five Year - On all heads offered. 618 Hwy. 74 S., Peachtree City, GA 30269 I TEL 1-800-438-6087 I FAX 1-800-345-1325 I www.hoshizaki.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 193 Hoshizaki H9320-51 Item #602/603 WATER FILTERS FILTRATION SYSTEMS • H9320 Filter (Single, double & triple configurations) • E-10 Prefilter • E-20 Prefilter NEW Model Description Undercounter Number Flow Rate KMs KM Cubers IM Cubers Rakers DCMs (Gal. per Min.) AM-50 KM-320, 340, KM-61 515,901 Single KM-101 KML-250, 351, H9320-51 KM-1 451,631 IM-500SAA All Models All Models (2 GPM) KMD-410, 450 KM-201 KM-260 KMS-830 DKM-500 KM-600, 650, 1340M,1601M, 1601S,1900S, Twin 2100S, 2500S H9320-52 2 x (2 GPM) N/A KMD-850M, 901 N/A N/A N/A KMS-822,1122, 1401 KMH-2000S Triple KM-1301 S H9320-53 3 x (2 GPM) N/A KM-1400-M N/A N/A N/A KMS-2000 Replacement H9655-11 Cartridge l (1) One each E-20 PREFILTER (9795-90) Recommended for twin and triple configuration ri E-10 PREFILTER (9795-80) Recommended for single configuration E-10 and E-20 Prefilters can be used for post mix applications. Everpure prefilters are designed to increase the life of Everpure pre -coat water filters in areas with an unusual amount of dirt in the water. With a 10 micron (nominal) rating, the economical Everpure prefilter traps much of the dirt which contributes to scale buildup in ice makers, and clogs the delicate orifices of other water -using equipment. When you install an Everpure prefilter, the pre -coat filters can concentrate on what they do best: remove particles 1/2 micron and larger in size. Replacement Cartridges: E-20 Prefilter: 6 pack (9534-26), 20 pack (9534-20) E-10 Prefilter: 12 pack (9534-12), 40 pack (9534-40) 'ram xoswuKl �xc-x 9--9 INGIi HOSH12AK1 H9320 FILTER Available in single, twin and triple configurations. Rated NSF Class 1, STD 42, for taste, odor and chlorine reduction and for mechanical filtration (99.9+% removal of particles 1/2 micron and larger in size.) Also takes out cysts with sub -micron filtration. Height of Systems (Manifold + Cartridge) Single System - 18.4" H Twin System-19.11' H Triple System - 19.15' H The H9320 System is Tested and Certified by NSF International against NSF/ANSI Standard 42 for the reduction of: Std. No. 42 - Aesthetic effects Aesthetic Effects Bacteriostatic Effects Chemical Reduction Taste & Odor Chlorine Mechanical Filtration Nominal Particulate Class 1 The H9320 Filters and their respective cartridges have been tested and listed by NSF only for the functions listed above. Check for compliance with state and local laws and regulations. Do not use where the water is microbiologically unsafe, or with waters of unknown quality without adequate disinfection before or after the unit. The H9320 filter can be used with water that may contain filterable cysts. ' NSF °� • © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 194 John Boos PB-DISINK101405-P-SSLR-X Item #604/604.1 '�� rOWIMSOT Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 604/604.1- DROP -IN SINK (1 EA REQ'D) John Boos PB-DISINK101405-P-SSLR-X 10/08/2015 Drop -In Sink, one compartment, 10"W x 14" front to back x 5"deep bowl, 4" OC deck mount faucet holes, 3-5/16" drain, 16/300 stainless steel construction, with left & right side splashes, includes economy gooseneck faucet, 3-1/2" spout, NSF, CSA (FLYER) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 604/604.1 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec John Boos Standard flyer accessories only, NO modifications to flyer items allowed or their accessories D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 195 John Boos PB-DISINK101405-P-SSLR-X Item #604/604.1 John ITEM #: OTY: BOOSMODEL #: L _ Since 1887 PROJECT NAME: tE360.j1151I1t3anker StWjfinn -b- r_r131L16240i1JaP Q�BQXi609IIP� (888)L43I1L2667oF. (8. 00)L433�2667� PRO -BOWL DROP -IN HAND SINK 1 BOWL oa FEATURES: MATERIAL: • ONE PIECE DEEP DRAWN BOWL BOWL: TYPE 300 STAINLESS • ALL SINK BOWLS HAVE LARGE LIBERAL RADII CORNERS STEEL POLISH, • INCLUDES BASKET DRAIN SATIN FINISH • DECK MOUNT FAUCET HOLES - 4" ON -CENTER BRACKET: TYPE 300 STAINLESS STEEL POLISH, CONSTRUCTION: SATIN FINISH • BOWL: STAINLESS STEEL TOPS ARE TIG WELDED, EXPOSED WELDS ARE POLISHED TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE. 1 PB-DISINK101410 PB-DISINK101405 PRO -BOWL DROP -IN HAND SINKS .. 0 PB-DISINK101405 PB-DISINK101410 PB-DISINK101405-P-SSLR PB-DISINK101405-SSLR PB-DISINK101410-P-SSLR PB-DISINK101410-SSLR **CALL FACTORY FOR CUT OUT SIZES.`* 40 PB-DISINK101410-P-SSLR 1 PB-DISINK101405-P-SSLR OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Avg=CIS FAUCETS SIDE SPASH ADA WRIST BLADES TOWEL DISPENSER LEVER WASTES OVER FLOWS P-TRAPS D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 196 John Boos PB-DISINK101405-P-SSLR-X Item #604/604.1 PRO -BOWL DROP -IN HAND SINKS DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS PB-DISINK101405 —121/4"-1 a 1 Iis" -a" 1 '/2' 3"Ae' m3'/16" V", 14" 10 R2" 12'/<" 18" 1.2 '/4" 6 I/e�10u 10'/e" 16 3/a" PB-DISINK101405-P-SSLR —12 3/e' — _4 2"67 �3 Yi 18 Y16" 14" 1/16 —12 ;/a' 18 9'16' —j i 0I9!16' I (. 5" PB-DISINK101410 —12'/4"-1 4^ r 03 7/16" la° — 10" . R2" 121/4'— CUTOUT 18" CUTOUT 1 LOCATION LOCATION J 2 1/2 10" 16 3/410— PB-DISINK101410-P-SSLR —12 I/s" .1 1-4 I 3 s/6" 3 7/16 e 181/2" O 14" — 10" —121/e' R2 12 Iro'— 181/2" - 8 1/4" -I— 10'/1 I 6" 21/2" .. ( 15" 1I 1 7'/16 PRO -BOWL DROP -IN HAND SINKS PB-DISINK101405 1 10" X 14" X 5" 12-1/4" X 18" X 5" NSF COMPONENT, CSA N/A PB-DISINK101410 10" X 14" X 10" 12414" X 18" X 10" NSF COMPONENT, CSA N/A P N 10" X 14" X 5" 12-3/8" X 14" X 5" NSF COMPONENT, CSA LH & RH ES: PB5-P-SSLR (INCLUDES: PBF-4-DLF) (INCLUDES: PB-DISINK101405-SSLR 10" X 14" X 5" 12-3/8" X 14" X 5" NSF COMPONENT, CSA LH & RH PB-DISINK101410-P-SSLR 10" X 14" X 10" 12-1/8" X 14" X 10" NSF COMPONENT, CSA LH & RH (INCLUDES: PBF-4-DLF) PB-DISINK101410-SSLR 1 10" X 14" X 10" 1 12-1/8" X 14" X 10" NSF COMPONENT, CSA LH & RH "CALL FACTORY FOR CUT OUT SIZES." WEIGHTS ARE SUBJECT TO ADDITIONAL PACKAGING SOME UNITS SHIP UNASSEMBLED FOR REDUCED SHIPPING COST. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL. TOLERANCE +/- .500" John Boos & Co. is constantly engaged in a program of improving products and therefore reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice. IiARDWO0A5 KCLMIN S. B e ffl L 62 0 O BO 90 q otes jo boos.com B, .�- ,,. ,..:.. .: • ww joh oos.com 4 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 197 SPG International Item #605 ® wmsor Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/201S ITEM# 605 - HIGH WALL SHELF. PREP TABLE (1 EA REQ-D) SPG 8411 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 198 SPG International Item #605.1 ® W3M&jr Equipment & FnrniQ_ hind CO. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 605.1- LOW WALL SHELF PREP TABLE (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 8411 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 199 Olympic J1848K Item #605.2 Submittal Sheet ITEM# 605.2 - WIRE SHELVING (3 EA REQ'D) Olympic J1848K Shelf, wire, 18" x 48", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec 10/08/2015 Olympic 2 11WD18K Wall Bracket, single, 18", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF Olympic 2 J2WD18K Wall Bracket, double, 18", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 200 SPG International Item #606 Submittal Sheet ITEM# 606 - PREP TABLE WITH SINK (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 10/08/2015 90"W x 32" D with a 20" W x 26"D x 14" deep sink, removable sink cover, overflow, twist handle drain w/bracket, 16Ga stainless steel, undershelves. Component Hardware (or equal) KN54-8012 splash mount faucet on 8" centers. Right or Left side splash only when either side is against a wall. Details per spec sheet. NSF ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Fisher 1 13269 Fisher 1 22209 WATER Faucet, backsplash mount, 8" c/c, 12" long swing spout, 1/2" inlets DrainKing Waste Valve, with flat strainer, 12 GPM drain rate, dual teflon seals, stainless steel ball, cast red brass body HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1 1/2" 1/2" 2 WASTE INDIRECT DIRECT SIZE SIZE 1 2 1-1/2" D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 201 FETCO CBS-52H-15 Item #609 Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 609 - COFFEE BREWER (1 EA REQ'D) FETCO CBS-52H-15 5000 Series Coffee Brewer, twin, 1-1/2 gallon capacity, automatic, two -portion standard, gravity flow dispense tube system, gourmet coffee brew basket locks during brew cycle, hot water service, use with L3D-15, LD-15 or TPD-15 dispenser (sold separately) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 609 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec FETCO 1 NOTE: Pricing and specifications subject to change with or without notice - Please call 1.800.FETCO.99 for confirmation FETCO 1 FETCO 1 FETCO 1 FETCO 1 C52016 FETCO 5 D049 FETCO FETCO 1 1 Circuit board: 3 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard Electro-mechanical parts: 2 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard All other parts: 1 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard 2 x 3.0 kW heaters, 120/208-240v, 1-ph, 3+6 wires, 4.6 - 6.1 kW, hardwired, 22.0 - 25.4 max amp draw, 10.5 - 15.0 gallons per hour L3D-15 LUXUS® Thermal Dispenser, 1.5 gallon, Freshness Timer°, Volume InclicatorTM, vacuum insulated, flip & hide fill -through lid, base with built-in handles and drip tray 1 year parts warranty, standard Black dispenser faucet, std. ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1224/2008 F 60 1 Direct 2SA A 6.1 C WATER HOT SIZE I HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 3/8" C WASTE INDIRECT SIZE DIRECT SIZE D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 202 FETCO CBS-52H-15 CBS-52H-15 I Twin Station 1.5 Gallon Coffee Brewer Item #609 :: Features & Benefits • This best selling 2 x 1.5 gallon size meets the rigorous demands of medium -to -large sized operations. • Designed for simplicity, the Handle Operated series brewers save operator time and effort by delivering consistent results from your pre-programmed coffee recipe. • Twin station configuration provides the flexibility of brewing two different recipes or into two different types of dispensers at the same time! • Twin 1.5 gallon brewer is a popular choice across many segments due to its speed, capacity and reliable performance during peak service times. • Brew directly into our best-selling LUXUS" L3D series dispensers ortry the ultra durable TPD series thermal dispensers and extend your beverage service capabilities (sold separately). • Available in multiple power configurations to efficiently meet your cups -per -hour requirement and keep energy costs at a minimum. Approximatemvk rHour: 1.5 1.5 475 • 317 • 238 • 190 • GALLON GALLON Il Il t Electrical Configuration l(KII tS7D i ' Vam ]P=p " 0 Im MMW30i) 1uakagRUM 1tLT1WAM? 1 US/CANADA -- -- -- ---- - -- .. --- -- 052016 2 x 3.0 kW 120/208-240 1 3+G 4.6-6.1 Hardwired 22.0-25.4 1.10.5-15.00) C52026 2x4.0 kW 120/208-240 1 3+G 6.1-8.1 Hardwired 29.3-33.8 15.0-19.51t> - - - -_ --- C520361> 3 x 3.0 kW - - - 120 208-240 3 --� - 4+G - 7.0-9.1 Hardwired 19.5-22.4 - - _ 16.5-22.50) i C520460) 3 x 4.0 kW -/ - -- 120/208-240 3 4+G 9.1-12.1 Hardwired 25.6-29.6 22.5-30.00) C521860) 3 x 4.0 kW J 440-480 3 3+G 10.3-12.1 Hardwired 13.6 14.8 EXPORT C52076 3 x 3.0 kW 1 220-240/38D-415 3 4+G 11.8 12.9 19.5-22.50) i 7.8-9.1 Hardwired C52086(1) - 3 x 4.0 kW 220-240/38D-415 3 ^ 4+G 10.3-12.1 Hardwired - 15.7 17.1 25.5-30Ai'i C52096(1) 2 x 3.0 kW 220-240 1 2+G 5.1-6.1 Hardwired 23.3 24.4 13.5-15.011> C52106i=> 2 x 4.0 kW 220-240 1 2+G 6.8 8.1 Hardwired 30.9-33.8 18.0-19.50) (1) Based on standard factory settings: 4.0 minute brew time; Oq prewet; 200°F water (2) Requires 3 phase upcharge (Z056). '6' Water Specification 3/e" Male Flare - 20-75 prig - - - 11/4gpm V Customize Your Brewer DISPENSERS 1.5 Gallon Thermal Server (L3S-15) 0052 1.5 Gallon Thermal Dispenser (L3D-15) D049 1.5 Gallon Thermal Dispenser (TPD-15) D009 /0 US-15Thermal L3D-151fhermal TPD-151rhermal Server Dispenser Dispenser ♦+ Dimensions fto i rNUD Product 36" - 21" - - 20" 821bs _ Shipping 35" 23" 23" 'JOOLbs ACCESSORIES Single Serving Station for L3S-15/20 Server A097 Twin Serving Station for L3S-15/20 Server A098 Triple Serving Station for L3S-15/20 Server A099 Quad Serving Station for L3S-15/20 Server A129 Identifier Plates, Acrylic A069 Hot Tea Infuser (1.5 Gallon Size) A113 Drip Tray - Square A137 Iced Tea Brew Basket (16" x 6") BOO231OG 1 Half Batch Brew Basket Assembly w/ Black Handle B00428OB1 for CBS-5000 Series Brewers (13" x 5" with .280 Drip Hole) OPTIONS Orange Dispenser Faucet Replacement Handle Green Dispenser Faucet Replacement Handle Blue Dispenser Faucet Replacement Handle WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM In -Line Water Filter (Head / Cartridge / Hose) Replacement Water Filter Cartridge PAPER COFFEE FILTERS 15" x 51/2" (500/Case) 1071.00029.00 1071.00031.00 1071.00032.00 A039 A075 F001 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 203 FETCO D049 Item #609 F71ETCOMODEL ITEM NUMBER: SERIES L3DD-19 NSF Patents: D464,226S, 6,619,50, 6,702,15362, 6,741,180 Other Patents Pending. International Patents Apply. The LUXUS® Thermal Dispenser Brewing directly into our LUXUS® Thermal Dispenser ensures a con- tinuous flow of hot, aromatic, great tasting coffee. LUXUS® Thermal Dispensers are totally portable and require no electric power to main- tain serving temperature. LUXUS® Thermal Dispensers remove the hazards of utilizing glass -lined products without loss of perform- ance, while adding the durability of stainless steel. Printed in USA 2006 NATURAL EVOLUTION It Started in 1987..... We pioneered the LUXUS® THERMAL DISPENSER, dreaming that one day it would become the standard for dispensing coffee that always tastes "just brewed". Fifteen years and hundreds of thousands of dispensers later our vision is the mark of serving the freshest tasting coffee. Now for those who are driven and pas- sionate about providing the best coffee, we present our newest model of LUXUS® THERMAL DISPENSERS with these patented innovations: Vacuum Insulated Freshness Timer® Volume IndicatorTM Base with Built -In Drip Tray & Handles Flip & Hide Brew Through Lid Consultant & Contractor Approvals: FETCO@ 600 Rose Road Lake Zurich, IL 600047-0429 USA Phone: (847) 719-3000 Toll Free: (800) FETCO-99 FAX: (847) 719-3001 sales@fetco.com http://www.fetco.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 204 FETCO D049 Item #609 MODEL L3D-15 SERIES L3D 13.2 C335] L3D-15 ITEM i CAPACITY D049 / 1.5 Gallon SHIPMENT DIMENSIONS /WEIGHT W10 D14 H24 / 13lbs ACCESSORIES A069 Identifier Plate, Acrylic y r WRAPS 049 Plain Black {L3D-15 & L3SJ15 059 Breaking Fresh 6roundsTM For 1311-15 & S 061 Steeping Fresh Leaves- For 3D-15 & L - 066 Icing Fresh Coffee- For L3DL1.5& L3S=15 . L9.0 12281 09.0 102301 26.2 C6651 HANDLE IN UP POSITION 7.7 C196 l OPTIONS _ Z053 Reverse Display__,: Z067 Wrap Application FETCO@ 600 Rose Road Lake Zurich, IL 60047-0429 USA Phone: (847) 719-3000 Toll Free: (800) FETCO-99 FAX: (847) 719-3001 sales@fetco.com http://www.fetco.com FETCO, LUXUS, Extractor, Pulse -Brew, Driven To Pioneer Innovation and product dress are all trademarks or registered trademarks of Food Equipment Technologies Company Printed in USA 2006 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 205 Delfield 406-CA CBC Item #610 AN) rowimmIr Equipment & F umishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 610 - REACH -IN UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield 406-CA CBC Undercounter Refrigerator, single -section, 27" W, 5.7 cubic feet, (1) door, (2) epoxy coated wire shelves, stainless steel front & sides, aluminum sub -top, black recessed handle, ABS interior, 3.75" casters, rear -mounted refrigeration system 404A, 1/5 hp, NSF, cUL, ENERGY STAR® The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 610 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Delfield 1 115v/60/1-ph, 4.0 amps, NEMA 5-1513, standard Delfield 1 (3) Year parts & labor warranty standard Delfield 1 Self-contained refrigeration, standard Delfield 1 (S) Year compressor warranty standard Delfield 1 Door hinged on right standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS I CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 1/5 Cord 2 115 60 1 5-15P 4 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 206 Delfield 406-CA CBC Item #610 "Delflield 406 & 407 Undercounter Series Models • 406 Undercounter refrigerator single section on legs • 407 Undercounter freezer single section on legs • 406-CA Undercounter refrigerator single section on casters • 407-CA Undercounter freezer single section on casters Project Item Quantity CSI Section 11400 Approved Date Standard Features Options & Features Delfield's exclusive ABS interior. ABS Accessories is extremely durable - it won't dent, chip or corrode and is backed by a limited lifetime Stainless steel back warranty Plastic laminate on front Stainless steel front and sides Additional shelf • Two epoxy coated wire shelves Stainless steel single -tier overshelf Environmentally friendly R404A refrigerant 2" diameter (2.5" ride height) casters • Foamed in place environmentally friendly, 5" diameter (6" ride height) casters Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non ODP (Ozone Model 409 stacking collar Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Door lock Warming Potential) polyurethane cuts energy 220 volt, So Hertz electrical system* costs * This option will alter the unit's electrical Black recessed quick grip handle specifications • Rugged 6" high heavy duty metal legs (models Model 406-CA 406 & 407 only). Units with a "CA" suffix are standard on 3" diameter (3.75" ride height) casters • All units come standard hinged right and may be changed at the factory at no charge. Indicate when order is placed • 6' cord and plug supplied Interior thermometer • Three year parts and labor warranty and an additional two year compressor parts warranty Specifications Exterior bottom shall be heavy -gauge galvanized metal. Exterior ends shall be heavy -gauge stainless steel. Base interior shall be one-piece thermoformed ABS plastic material, with integral shelf supports. ABS interior is backed by a limited lifetime warranty. Base shall be fully insulated with high -density foamed -in -place environmentally friendly, Kyoto Protocol Compliant, Non OOP (Ozone Depletion Potential), Non GWP (Global Warming Potential) polyurethane. Door shall have a heavy -gauge stainless steel exterior, with a thermoformed ABS plastic interior liner, and shall be fully insulated with foamed -in -place polyurethane. Door handle shall be black, recessed ABS. Cabinet shall have (2) adjustable epoxy -coated wire shelves installed. MODELS 406/406-CA REFRIGERATORS REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Refrigeration system shall use HFC-404A refrigerant. Compressor shall be 1/5 h.p., with condenser coil and hot gas condensate evaporator mounted on rear of cabinet. Evaporator coil and temperature control shall be mounted on the interior rear wall of the cabinet. Refrigerant flow shall be controlled by a capillary tube. Cabinet shall maintain 360F to 40•F (20C to 4"C) interior cabinet temperature. MODELS 407/407-CA FREEZERS REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Freezer system shall use HFC-404A refrigerant. Compressor shall be 1/5 h.p., with condenser coil, hot gas condensate evaporator and temperature control mounted on rear of cabinet. Evaporator coil shall be mounted on the interior rear wall of the cabinet. Refrigerant flow shall be controlled by a capillary tube. Cabinet shall maintain-5"F to 0"F (-21"C to -180Q interior cabinet temperature. System is controlled using Delfield's ACT -Advanced Control Technology electronic temperature control, which provides i mproved pull down times, reduces compressor cycling and longer compressor life with lower energy consumption. Electrical connections shall be 115 volt, 60 Hertz, single phase. Unit shall have a 6' (1.8m) long electrical cord and NEMA 5-15P plug. Cord and plug shall be located on rear of cabinet, 16" (40.6cm) above floor, 5" from the left side. 406/407: Equipment is shipped with loose 6" (15.2cm) high metal legs with black enamel finish unless mounting is specified on original sales order. Exterior top shall be one-piece, heavy -gauge stainless steel with front edge turned down to form nosing and rear edge turned down. 406-CA/407-CA: Equipment is shipped with loose 3" diameter (3.75" ride height) casters high casters (two locking and two non -locking) unless mounting is specified on original sales order. Exterior top shall be one-piece, heavy -gauge aluminum with all edges turned down. 980 S. Isabella Rd. Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Fax: 800-669-0619 www•delfield.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. 9 NSF 8 C(UL 404A xiFR11:iRAM enerlogic Canitowoc Page: 207 C) ( 0 V C n 0 r— t V Vrn , t V rn (/D � t ) Delfield 406-CA CBC Item #610 `'Delfiield V / Q) v I O 66 27.25" 69 cm T 28.50" 72 cm I Plan View 406/407 35.50" 90 cm REF'G 27.25" 69cm Elevation View 406/407 T 24.75" 63 cm Standard Door Hinging Is On Right Door Clearance Detail 406/407 27.25 69cm I 27.75" 70 cm Plan View 406-CA/407-CA T33.25" 84 cm 27.25" 69cm Elevation View 406-CA/407-CA T 24.75" 63cm Standard Door Hinging Is On Right Door Clearance Detail 406-CA/407-CA Specifications Model # of Shelves Shelf Area Volume H.P. V/Hz/Ph Amps 406 2 4.6ftz 5.7ft3 1 /5 115/60/1 4.0 407 2 4.6ft7 5.7ft3 1/5 115/60/1 5.8 406-CA 2 4.6ft' 5.7ft1 1 1 /5 1 115/60/1 14.0 407-CA 2 4.6ft2 5.7fta 1 1 /5 1 115/60/1 1 5.8 Delfield reserves the right to make changes to the design or specifications without prior notice. 980 S. Isabella Rd. Mt. Pleasant, Michigan 48858 Phone: 800-733-8948 or 989-773-7981 Printed in the U.S.A. Fax: 800-669-0619 DS406_407(CA) www.delfield.com 03113 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Shelf Support Spacing = 7.50"/19 cm = 4.00710 cm = 3.75"/9.5 cm = 2.75"/7 cm 72 cm = 6.00715 cm 72 cm - --- A 19.5&:j 50 cm i I B 35.50" 90 cm C L15�-- - E_-17.OQ 43 cm , 0" c Bullet Feet Can � 1.0073 cm Ad11'ust Upwards Only, Rubber Up To+1.0073cm Bumper Interior Clear Dimension, Leh To Right: 21.25"/54 cm Right End View 4061 = 7.'u- r "cm = 4.00"/10 cm = 9.5 cm 70 cm =6.00"/15 cm cm 19.50� 50 cm i 33.25" 111 tc 84 cm - I - E--17.0 43 cm , 3.75' IOcm 7100"13cm Rubber Interior Clear Dimension, Bumper Left To Right: 21.25'/54 cm Right End View 406-CA/407-CA Installation Note For All Models: Refrigeration system is designed so that air will flow under the unit, through the compressor area, and out the top rear o the unit. Any restriction to this air flow path will void the warranties. NEMA Plug Ship Weight Energy (KWH/Day) 5-15P 176lbs (80kg) 1.88 5-15P 176lbs (80kg) 2.53 5-15P I 168lbs (76kg) 1.88 5-15P I 168lbs (76kg) 2.53 Canitowoc Page: 208 Blendtec SE118AOOQ-CB-REV1 Item #611 '�� rowinisor Equipment & FurnM m Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 611- CONNOISSUER 825 BLENDER PACKAGE (1 EA REQ'D) Blendtec SE118AOOQ-CB-REV1 Connoissuer 825 blender package, countertop or in -counter, (2) 2Qt Four Sided jars (soft lid, large wingtip blade, BPA-Free Tritan container), 30 pre-programmed blend cycles, 5 programmable cycle buttons and pulse, removeable Q-series sound enclosure, 3.8 peak HP, 15-amp/1800-watt direct drive motor, 120V, 50/60 Hz, ETL, NSF, 3 year warranty parts and labor, service plus. ACCESSORIES Mfr Blendtec Blendtec Blendtec Blendtec Qty Model Spec 2 40-609-61COF Four Sided Jars Logo - Coffee 2 40-609-61SMO Four Sided Jars Logo - Smoothie 1 40-609-61LEM Four Sided Jar Logo - Lemon Aide 1 WARRANTY Warranty is 3 years on blender and 1 year on blender jars. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 209 By Owner Item #612 ® WMISIr Equipment & F umishings Co. ------------- Submittal Sheet ITEM# 612 -TRASH CANS (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER <by Owner> 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 210 Fisher 3041 Item #613 0 Equipment & F umishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 613 - DIPPERWELL (1 EA REQ'D) Fisher 3041 Dipperwell Faucet and Sink, 6-7/8" diameter, 1-1/2" x 4" tailpiece, 40' - 140°F system limits, 200 psi maximum static pressure limit, stainless steel seat faucet, stainless steel pan with removable inner shell The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 613 C WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 3/8" WASTE INDIRECT DIRECT SIZE SIZE 1-1/2" D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 211 Fisher 3041 Item #613 APPLICATION: JOB NAME: QUANTITY: ITEM NO. —��2-1/4"1�- [57.9mm] 2-3/4" '32.8mm] 1/2" [69.9mm] [12.7mm] [50.8mm]' 1 5" 6-7/8" [127.Omm] 3/8"NPS t[174.6] mm 3/8"N PT LOCKN UT 5-5/8" [143.2mm] 1-1/2" TAIL PIECE ROUGH -IN: 4 3/4 [119.1 mm] 05-1 /2" 011/16" [139.7mm] [17.5mm� SA ANSI/A112.18.1M PRODUCT NAME: DIPPERWELL FAUCET & SINK ASSEMBLY SPECIAL CONFIGURATION CHECK BASE MODEL AND OPTIONS MODEL: ❑ 3041 OPTIONS OR MODIFICATIONS: ❑ OTHER FEATURES: DIPPERWELL FAUCET * STAINLESS STEEL SEAT DIPPERWELL SINK * STAINLESS STEEL PAN * REMOVABLE INNER SHELL SYSTEM LIMITS * TEMP: 40*F MIN. TO 140*F MAX. * PRESSURE 200 PSI MAX. STATIC SHIPPING WEIGHT * 3.5 LBS SHER FISHER/MANUFACTURING COMPANY TOLL FREE: 800-421-6162 - FAX: 800-832-8238 information@fisher-mfg.com - www.fisher-mfg.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 212 By Owner Item #614 W Moir • 1 Pment & F umLRhings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 614 - COFFEE PRINTER (1 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 213 Schaerer USA COFFEE ART PLUS Item #615 • 3M, i Egtnpment 8s F`nrniBH� n Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 615 - ESPRESSO CAPPUCCINO MACHINE (1 EA REQ'D) Schaerer USA COFFEE ART PLUS (040381-00003EUS) Coffee Art Plus Espresso Machine, super -automatic, dual boilers, equipped with finesteam® Technology for cappuccino and latte foam, auto shut-off steam wand with built-in temp sensor, heats up to 32 oz./1 liter of milk per min., up to 120 shots per hour, (30) programmable selections, push-button operation, automatic grinding, tamping & shot dispensing, digital display, dual integrated grinders/hoppers, 5 min. automated cleaning cycle, black, 208V, 1ph, 30 amp (actual max load: 24 amp), NEMA L6-30P, drain line required, CE, UL, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 615 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Schaerer USA 1 Prepayment required unless other payment terms have been extended. Schaerer USA 1 1 year parts and labor warranty, includes 2 preventative maintance visits, standard (USA only) Schaerer USA 1 One (1) install/startup visit included; additional visits will incur extra charges. Schaerer USA 1 Shipping charge ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP CP F 208 60 1 ug L6-30P 24 9.0 0 C 0 WATER HOT SIZE I HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 3/8" C WASTE INDIRECT DIRECT SIZE SIZE D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 214 Schaerer USA COFFEE ART PLUS Item #61S 17" [432mm] 38" [965mm] (including top clearance) 30" [762mm] 4" [102mm] _ _ _ I L— 3" [80mm] DIAMETER ACCESS HOLE 22" 28" [712mm] [560mm] (including top and bottom clearance) j2" [55mm] I I� 25' [635mm] (including rear clearance) 22" [560mm] I T O [80m I I I I POWER, WATER SUPPLY, AND ACCESS REQUIREMENTS • Receptacle type: NEMA L6-30R ([� • 3 Prong twist -lock • Breaker panel: 30 Amp dedicated 220V G single phase circuit • Actual maximum load: 24 Amps • Access hole with collar (no sharp edges) • Located centrally under machine for water and drain hose • Diameter: Minimum 3"/80mm • Water shut-off valve with 3/8" compression fitting • Back flow preventer in accordance with local requirements • Drain pipe to floor drain • Copper or PVC in accordance with local health codes and regulations • Diameter: 1.5"/38mm or larger The receptacle (NEMA L6-30R) and Water Filter can be located either under the counter or top o counter behind the machine. The receptacle, water shut-off valve and drain pipe must be within 3 feet (36"/915mm) of the center of the location (footprint) of the machine. Ideal under counter space for softener: 30"/765mm (minimum requirement: 26"/660mm). Notes: Access hole is only required if any of the utility hook-ups are located under the counter. 2900 Orange Ave. Suite 102 Signal Hill, CA 90755 Tel.888.989.3004 Fax.562.989.3075 www.schaererusa.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 215 SPG International Item #616 Equipment & Fulmishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 616 - STAINLESS BREW COUNTER (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Custom Fabricated Blender/Brew counter with Sink. Verify which side the sink is located on. 105" W x 32" D with a 14" W x 24" D x 12" deep sink. twist handle drain w/ bracket. Component hardware (or equal) KN45-4000 splash mount faucet on 4" centers. Integral ice bin. Details per spec sheet. NSF K101 Plan!!! ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Fisher 1 3610 Faucet, backsplash mount, 4" c/c, 6" swing spout, with 1/2" inlets C WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE I COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1/2" J 1/2" C WASTE INDIRECT SIZE DIRECT SIZE D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 216 Fisher 3610 Item #616 APPLICATION: JOB NAME: QUANTITY: ITEM NO. MODEL DIM "A" DIM "B" DIM "C" 3610 2" [50.8mm]. 5-3/8" [136.5mm] 6" [152.4mm] 3611 2-1/4" 6" 8" [57.2mm] [152.4mm] [203.2mm] 3612 2-7/8" 6-1 /2" 10" [73.Omm] [165.1mm] [254.Omm] 3613 3-1/8" 6-3/4" 12" [79.4mm] [171.5mm] [304.8mm] 3614 4-1/8" 7-3/4" 14" [104.8mm] [196.9mm] [355.6mm] 1783 4-7/8" 8-3/4" 16" [123.8mm] [222.3mm] [406.4mm] 'ROUGH -IN: ANSI/A112.18.1 M DINT 07/8" 2.2mm] PRODUCT NAME: 4" C/C BACKSPLASH FAUCET SPECIAL CONFIGURATION ❑ CHECK BASE MODEL AND OPTIONS MODEL: ❑ 3610 W/6" SWING SPOUT Cl 3611 W/8" SWING SPOUT ❑ 3612 W/10" SWING SPOUT ❑ 3613 W/12" SWING SPOUT ❑ 3614 W/14" SWING SPOUT ❑ 1783 W/16" SWING SPOUT OPTIONS OR MODIFICATIONS: ❑ SUPPLY LINES (24" OR 36") CIRCLE LENGTH ❑ DJ SUB-ASSY (7-1/4" OR 13") CIRCLE LENGTH ❑ ELBOWS ❑ VANDAL RESISTANT KIT ❑ HANDLES (CROSS OR WRIST) CIRCLE STYLE ❑ OTHER FEATURES: * 4" C/C BACKSPLASH * SWIVELLING SEAT DISKS * HOT SIDE STEM - RIGHT HAND * COLD SIDE STEM - LEFT HAND * STAINLESS STEEL SEATS * STAINLESS STEEL SEAT SCREWS * STAINLESS STEEL HANDLE SCREWS * 1/2" SLIP JOINT SYSTEM LIMITS * TEMP: 40°F MIN. TO 140°F MAX. * PRESSURE 200 PSI MAX. STATIC * 2.20 GPM AT 80 PSI SHIPPING WEIGHT * 4.25 LBS SHER FISHER/MANUFACTURING COMPANY TOLL FREE: 800-421-6162 - FAX: 800-832-8238 information@fisher-mfg.com - www.fisher-mfg.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 217 SPG International Item #616.1 Equipment & F u nWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 616.1- WALL SHELF, BREW COUNTER (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Wall Shelf at Brew Counter. 48" W x 15" D. 18 Ga stainless steel. Square Edges, 1-1/2" rear upturn NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 218 SPG International Item #616.2 NN Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 616.2 - WALL SHELF, BREW COUNTER (1 EA REQ'D) SPG Wall Shelf at Brew Counter. 48" W x 15" D. 18 Ga stainless steel. Square Edges, 1-1/2" rear upturn NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 219 SPG International 4CBT-30B Item #616A • • 11 i11 •'. 1 1 1 • Submittal Sheet ITEM# 616A - BREW COUNTER (1 EA REQ'D) SPG 4CBT-30B 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 220 Olympic J2442K Item #700 �r r Equipment 86 r�irnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 700 - WIRE SHELVING (4 EA REQ'D) Olympic J2442K Shelf, wire, 24" x 42", green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 205 ACCESSORIES Mfr Olympic Qty Model Spec J33K Post 33", stationary, grooved at 1" increments, includes leveling bolt & cap, green epoxy finish with chromate substrate, NSF D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 221 Delfield 406-CA CBC Item #702 1�p r'%wimair Equipment & Furnishings C,o. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 702 - REACH -IN UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR (1 EA REQ'D) Delfield 406-CA CBC Undercounter Refrigerator, single -section, 27" W, 5.7 cubic feet, (1) door, (2) epoxy coated wire shelves, stainless steel front & sides, aluminum sub -top, black recessed handle, ABS interior, 3.75" casters, rear -mounted refrigeration system 404A, 1/5 hp, NSF, cUL, ENERGY STAR® The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 610 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Delfield 1 115v/60/1-ph, 4.0 amps, NEMA 5-1513, standard Delfield 1 (3) Year parts & labor warranty standard Delfield 1 Self-contained refrigeration, standard Delfield 1 (5) Year compressor warranty standard Delfield 1 Door hinged on right standard Delfield 1 AS000-AXD-0039 1" Casters ELECTRICAL VOLTS I CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 1/5 Cord 2 115 60 1 P g& 5-15P 4 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 222 By Owner Item #703 ® w3msir Equipment & Fhmishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 703 - POS TERMIAL (4 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 223 By Owner BY OWNER Item #705 Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM#! 705 - BAKERY DISPLAY CASE (1 EA REQ-D) BYOWNER BY OWNER ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Wasser 1 CRATING N. Wasserstrom & Sons Model No. PACKAGING Packed: ea Packaging Fee For Corner Bakery Cafe's Bakery Case Wasser 1 FREIGHT N. Wasserstrom & Sons Model No. OFRT&HANDLING Packed: ea Outbound Freight D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 224 ACP RCSIODSE Item #707 W"��%WM003r Equipment & F umishings Co. ITEM# 707 - MICROWAVE OVEN (1 EA REQ'D) ACID, Inc. RCS10DSE Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 Amana® Commercial Microwave Oven, countertop, 1.2 cu. ft. capacity, 1000 watts, 10 min. dial timer, 4 power level, stackable, interior light, Grab & Go door handle, non -removable air filter, side hinged door with glass window, stainless steel exterior & interior, 120v/60/1-ph, 15.0 amps, NEMA 5-15P, ETL The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 707 ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 1 120 60 1 & Corug 5-15P 15 1 15.00 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 225 ACP, Inc. RCS10DSE YAWana 0 Commercial Model RCSI ODSE shown Medium Volume This category of microwave is ideal for... Applications: Coffeeshops Ethnic restaurants Concessions Dessert stations All ACP, Inc. commercial ovens are backed by our Culinary Center. Call us with any question regarding food preparation, menu development and cooking times. 866-426-2621. ' _^j�d�yJ/\ Item #707 Project #: Item #:, Medium Volume Amana Commercial Microwave Model RCS10DSE Power Output 0 1000 watts of power. o Four power levels. Easy to Use o User friendly ten minute dial timer lights up for at -a -glance monitoring. o Timer automatically resets to zero if door is opened during heating. User option allows manual reset to zero. c See -through door and lighted interior for monitoring without opening the door. c 1.2 cubic ft. (34 liter) capacity accommodates a 14" (356 mm) platter, prepackaged foods and single servings. c Stackable to save valuable counter space. Easy to Maintain o Stainless steel exterior and interior for easy cleaning and a commercial look. o Constructed to withstand the foodservice environment. o Non -removable air filter protects oven components. o Backed by the ACP, Inc. 24/7 ComSery Support Center, 866-426-2621. o ETL Listed. Eta us aw Intertek Intertek Part No. 8/8/14 12 AGP Updated 8/8/14 Original Instructions 225 49th Ave Dr. SW Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 800-233-2366 319-368-8120 °/ '©2012 Amana. All rights reserved. Brand used under license. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. ©2014 ACP, Inc. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404 Fax:319-368-8198 www.acpsolutions.com Page: 226 a r% m 0 Z ACP, Inc. RCS10DSE Item #707 c 0 0. Ln d LL Amana Commercial Microwave Model RCS10DSE I Medium Volume front view 11" (559) 0 13-7, (35: 21" J (533) side view (door open) Installation clearance: 2" all sides Drawings available from KCL CADIog - techs@kcicad.com Specifications _ Wodel RCSI ODSE UPC Code 728028129465 'C, onfiguration Countertop Control System ;Dial Max Coking Time 1000 Power r Levels 1,4 Time Entry Option yes Microwave Distribution Rotating antenna, top Magnetron 1 Stackable Yes Stage Cooking 1 Interior Light Yes Door Handle Grab & Go Signal End of cycle Exterior Dimensions H 137%" (352) W 22" (559) Cavity Dimensions �HH 8'/A' (216) 14 V (368) Door Depth 32'! V' (832), 900+ door open Usable Cavity Space — '1.2 cubic ft. (34 liter) Exterior r Finish Stainless steel interior Finish Stainless steel Power Consumption_ il550 W, 13 A 11000 W** Microwave 120V, 60 Hz, 15 A single phase I NEMA 5-15 6 ft. (1.5m) '— MHz Power Output** ,Power Source 4Plug Configuration / Cord q y ,Frequency _ Product Weight_ Ship weight (approx.) ---- -- --- Shipping Carton Size.— UPS Shippable 41 1b 41 Ib g) — 48lbs. (22 kg.) -- - -r — — — —r ---- - 'H 17" (432)_ W 26" (660) _!D 20" (508)__ Yes Measurements in () are millimeters * Includes handle ** IEC 60705 Tested Part No. 20154712 Updated 8/8/14 Original Instructions a Specifications Commercial microwave shall have a user-friendly 10 minute dial timer with illuminated digits and an end of cycle audible signal. Timer shall automatically reset if the door is opened during heating with user option to manually reset to zero. There shall be a four power level and cooking stage. Microwave output shall be 1000 watts distributed by one magnetron with a rotating top antenna to provide superior even heating throughout the cavity. Durable door shall have a tempered glass window and a grab and go handle with a 90*+ opening for easy access. An interior light shall facilitate monitoring without opening the door. The large 1.2 cubic ft. (34 liter) cavity shall accommodate a 14" (356 mm) platter. Interior ceramic shelf shall be sealed and recessed on oven bottom to reduce plate -to -shelf edge impact. Oven shall have a stainless steel exterior and interior and be stackable to save counter and shelf space. The air filter shall be permanently affixed to the front of the oven. Microwave oven shall comply with standards set by the U.S Department of Health and Human Services, UL923 for GO ssaffety and NSF4 for sanitation. c ETI■ us Intertek Intertek Warranty Warranty Certificate for this product can be found on the ACP, Inc. website at: 110�„=1 www.acpsolutions.com/warranty Service All products are backed by the ACP, Inc. 24/7 ComSery ter. CSC . ess-yes-:sei © 2014 ACP, I nc. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404 225 49th Ave. Dr. SW Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 U.S.A. 1 800-233-2366 1 319-368-8120 1 Fax: 319-368-8198 1 www.acpsolutions.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 227 Lancer Corp. 85-4526H-111 Item #800 Equipment 83 + m Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 800 - SODA ICE & BEVERAGE DISPENSER (1 EA REQ'D) Lancer85-4526H-111 4500 Series Ice Beverage Dispenser, 22" wide, 180 lb. cubed ice capacity, (6) LEV" self serve levers with Flomatic and UFI valves available, manual front load when ice maker installed, manifold: 3-2-1, illuminated graphics, high capacity over -fill drip tray, low ice indicator, key lock switch, 3/8" barbed fittings, stainless steel construction, CE, ETL, NSF <By Vendor> The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 800 ACCESSORIES C Mfr Qty Model Spec Lancer 1 90 day parts & 1 year equipment warranty standard Lancer 1 115v/60/1-ph, 3.0 amps ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 115 60 1 3 .345 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 228 Lancer IN 4500-22 ri._""!Y 85-4526H-111 N Ice Beverage ®isnenser The IBD is Lancer's #1 selling self -serve dispenser. Hard plumbed syrup and water lines deliver excellent icy cold drinks. Versatile valve configurations and a portion control option allow for easy beverage cost monitoring. Topped with a compelling wraparound display, the IBD is a favorite of our customers. IBD 4500 22" Ice Beverage Dispenser > Industry standard platforms in 22" width - 6 valves, lever or push button dispensing versatility > Illuminated interchangeable front graphics, standard fluorescent 1S watt light bulb > Visual low ice indicator lights up to alert the need for ice in the dispenser bin > High capacity ice storage bin > High capacity drip tray to handle customer ice and beverage overfill helps avoid safety hazards and drink station cleanup from spills > Unique hex drive ice agitation and dispense drive system for trouble free operation and long service life > Multiple valve configurations available for self -serve and portion control operation to control beverage costs > All stainless steel construction; exterior and interior > Fully insulated storage bin and drip tray controls condensation and helps avoid moisture related safety hazards > Plumbing access front and rear for installation flexibility > Dispensing Solutions that ?ourM,ore D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Item #800 �j AAW lancercorp.com Page: 229 Lancer 85-45261-1-111 Item #800 35 318- 899 mm ICE MAKER COMPATIBILITY 3a31�m 9'o 'o Yj\iC��J > Accepts 22" wide ice makers (adapter maybe required) > Manual front load when ice maker installed > Variable automatic agitation timer > Pellet capable dispense is available (specifications on request) Customer Service: Should you require more information about our products, please do not hesitate to contact our customer service desk at custserv@lancercorp.com. Warranty: Forwarranty specifics by product, contact your Lancer Sales Representative. Equipment design and/or specifications are subject to change without notice. Lancer Corp. 6655 Lancer Boulevard • San Antonio, TX 78219 210-310-7000. 1-800-729-1S00 • Fax: 210-310-i2S0 IBD 4500-22 SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS Height: 3S.3?S" (899 mm) Width: 22" (SS9 mm) Depth: 30.5" (77S mm) SPACE REOUIRED Width: 24" (609.6 mm) Depth: 31.S" (800.1 mm) Height: Allow sufficient clearance for manually filling with ice or refer to ice maker recommendation for top clearance. ELECTRICAL 11SW60Hz, 3AMPs 230WSOHz, 1.SAMPs WEIGHT With Ice: 40S Ibs (184 kg) Shipping: 255 Ibs (116 kg) ICE Capacity: 180 Ibs (82 kg) Dispensable:150 Ibs (68 kg) FITTINGS Soda Inlets: 3/8" male barb Syrup Inlets: 3/8" male barb VALVES LEV° other valves available upon request FLEX MANIFOLD CONFIGURATION 3-2-1 KEY LOCK SWITCH DRAW PERFORMANCE Number of Drinks Below 40°F 75°F (24°C) Ambient Temperature 12 oz/10 drinks per minute 24 oz/S drinks per minute 90°F (32°C) Ambient Temperature 12 oz/7.5 drinks per minute 24 oz/3 drinks per minute (Units can supply drinks under40'Fat rated draw performance continuously as long as ice is kept on cold plate.) "?ourAgre i `u1 /E C``� NSF lancercorp.com (\ Model 4500 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 30 Curtis Co. Item #801 Equipment 8s FhmWiino Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 801- TEA DISPENSER (3 EA REQ'D) Curtis Priced with Item: 802 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 231 Curtis Co. TCTS10000 Item #802 Equipment 8s F umiahings CO. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 802 - TEA BREWER (3 EA REQ'D) Curtis TCTS10000 G3 Digital Standard Tea Brewer, automatic, fresh brew, 3 to 5 gallon capacity, digital LCD scroll -through programming, (2) separate inlet valves for brew/dilution, dump valve system, (2) pre-set recipes, color coded button, display banner, stainless steel construction, 120v/60/1, 1650 watts, 13.8A, 6' cord, NEMA S-15P,(dispenser sold separately), UL, NSF The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 802 ACCESSORIES Mfr Qty Model Spec Curtis 3 TC0421A000 Iced Tea Dispenser, 4 gallon, oval 21"H, welded - on handles, sloping internal bottom, combo solid/brew-thru plastic lid, heavy gauge 18/8 stainless steel construction, sized to fit most tea brewers ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE I CONN I AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP ord CPlug 11] F 120 60 1 5-15P 13.8 1.65 5 C WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1/4" C WASTE INDIRECT SIZE DIRECT SIZE D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 232 Curtis TCTS10000 Item #802 PTT310000 Polaris Low Profile Brewer TCTT10000 Tall Tea Brewer G3 DIGITAL ICED TEA BREWING SYSTEMS MODELS: PTT310000, TCTS10000, TC710000, TCTS10600, TCTS10200 TCTSI OOOOITCTS10200 Short Tea Brewer TCTS10600 Rotating Cone Tea Brewer The Curtis G3 Tea Brewing Systems - incredible tea flavor, simple operation, reduced maintenance. At the center of the Curtis G3 Tea Brewing Systems is its unique Universal Control Module. The 153's oversized LCD display and simple interface makes "scroll - through" programming incredibly easy. Of course, there's no need to adjust the system, as Curtis' pre-programmed factory settings deliver ideal results right out of the carton. Simply add bulk leaves or flow-thru fitter packs and press the brew button for gallons of flavorful iced tea in just minutes. Curtis G3 Systems include a host of new features designed to optimize tea quality including... digital temperature and brew -by -volume control, PM alerts, cold water brew Lock -out, and much more. The result is perfect tea flavor and clarity, which keeps customers — and profits — returning. Select from the low -profile PTT3 with movable "TeaToter" dispenser or the TCTS, TCTT or Sweet Tea for direct -to -dispenser high -volume brewing. ITEM NO PROJECT DATE • G3 Digital Control Module — Provides precise control for gourmet fine tuning with pulse -brewing, delay, and all critical brewing functions. • G3 Enhanced Tea Flavor & Clarity — With digital accuracy, two separate precision valves provide unsurpassed control over concentrate brewing and dilution cycles. • "Fast Brew" Option — Program selectable. Shortens brew time by allowing concentrate and dilution cycles to run at the same time. • Intuitive Scroll -Through Precision Programming — Large, brightly lighted display communicates functions at a glance. Easily adjust time, volume, temperature, brew functions and more. • On -Board Self Diagnostics — G3 continually senses proper brewing operation. A service phone number and error code will be displayed in the rare event technical assistance is required... reducing downtime. • Cold Water Brew Lock -Out — Prevents brewing when water temperature is below set level. • Standard 120VAC Operation — Makes installation quick and simple. • "Sweet Tea" Brewer — Complete with electric pump. Program selectable for regular or sweet tea. TCTS10600—Rotating Brew Cone • Rotating Brew Cone — New brew cone allows for multiple teas to be brewed in one footprint. • Dual Dilution — Two dilution spouts allow for two teas on one brewer. Easily brew multiple teas from one brewer. Dual dilution spouts and rotating brew cone allows for brewing two teas without moving serving vessels. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 233 Curtis TCTS10000 Item #802 �`m2an� I inzm» 0O I ff0:" 29 b"M310000 9I3° w6 22.88" (nsam 5.001, a c (MAd nz2an� o o At 4.00" po2 --9.13" 16.63" - jmz�+ �n.zrni TCTS10000/ 0 0 TCTS10200 " 22.88" 4 I 22.25" 13.38' (N Oan� 1.25" ps. and h.8 and 9.13" 16.63" (o2an+ In2El on+ Mil '�'� o TCTT10000 26.50" Do Imaan� 22.88" 13.38" (Norm 10.00" 1.25" (x3. and (.leant 12 ixax one { (nzam o TCTS10600 ❑ 34.25" 22.68" iexoan� Re+an, 22.25" (563 on1 13.38" wooro �13.13" O.D.j r-) pean� BREWER SPECIFICATIONS PTT310000 Polaris Low Profile TCTS10000 Short Tea Brewer TCTT10000 Tall Tea Brewer TCTS10200 Short Sweet Tea Brewer TCTS10600 Rotating Cone Tea Brewer 3 gal. 29.38" x 9.13" x 22.88" 3-5 gal. 34.25" x 10.00" x 22.88- 3-5 gal. 38.50" x 10.00" x 22.88" 3-5 gal. 34.25" x 10.00" x 22.88" 3 gal. per side 34.25" x 13.13" x 22.88" WILCO.. INC. 6913 Acco Street, Montebello, CA 90640-5403 Telephone: ne:e: 800 800-421-6150 - 323-831-2300 Fax: 323-837-2406 www.wilburcurtis.com 120V 13.8A 120V 13.8A 120V 13.8A 120V 13.8A 120V 13.8A D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. 2W+G 1650W 50/60 Hz 46.0 lbs. 7.5 cu. ft. 2W+G 1650W 50/60 Hz 41.0 lbs. 9.1 cu. ft. 2W+G 1650W 50/60 Hz 43.0 lbs. 9.7 cu. ft. 2W+G 1650W 50/60 Hz 48.0 lbs. 9.1 cu. ft. 2W+G 165OW 50/60 Hz 41.0 lbs. 9.7 cu. ft. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. c@us NSF. APR/2014 F-3360 revl Page: 234 Curtis TC0421A000 Item #802 TCO-308 (3 gal. dispenser) TCO-419 (4 gal. dispenser) '} OVAL ICED TEA/COFFEE DISPENSERS MODELS: TCO-421; TCOC-421; TCO-419 TCO-417; TCO-308 TCO-417 (4 gal. dispenser) TCOC-421 (3 gal. dispenser w/Coffee Graphic) Head -to -head no other tea dispenser stands up to the Curds TC01 ITEM NO PROJECT DATE • ALL Stainless -Steel Construction Never Cracks or Discolors - NO hard -to -clean and expensive to replace plastic liner. • Welded -On Stainless Steel Handles - NO screws or plastic. • Contemporary, Rounded Design - ELIMINATES sharp edges and corners. • Tall Faucet Height Fits Any Glass or Pitcher - NO spacer required to adjust height. • Sloping Bottom for Complete Dispensing - NO old-style liner which can trap excess tea or soap when cleaning. • Wide Selection of Models - Fits Curtis and other tea brewer brands. Offer your customers the best in style and safety with the new TCO Oval Dispensers from Curtis. The TCO Dispenser features a slim, modern design that works as good as it looks to promote iced tea or iced coffee sales. It's constructed of durable stainless steel. Unlike some other dispensers, the TCO requires no plastic liner which often stain and crack over time. Best of all, the TCO's stainless steel vessel is easy to clean and delivers years of dependable service. For iced tea and coffee equipment that lasts, nobody measures up to Curtis. • Colorful Merchandising Label Attracts Customers. TCTST - 63 Series Brewer (Shown with optional TO dispenser) PTT3T - G3 Series Brewer (With standard Tea Toter Dispenser) D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 235 Curtis TC0421A000 Item #802 11.125" [28.3 cm] 7 a ' 21.750" [55.1 an] T-- 9.875" 9 15.759' [40.0 cm] [25.1 an] 44� 14.750" 37.3 an 11.125" [28.3 cm] 19.750 [50.2 cm] 1. [40.0 cmcm] 7.875 (20.0 cm] a' 14.750" [37.3 cm] 11.125" _ [28.3 cm] 17.750" [45.0 cm] 15.750" 140.0 cm] III 5.875 [14.9 Cm] ®/ 14.750" [37.3 an] 11.125" [28.3 cm] i 9.250" [23.4 ern] c 40.0 cm] � [40.0 ° 125" c " [37.3 37.3 cm] Spedfications Capacity TCO-421MOC-4211 4 Gallons 4 Gallons 1 4 Gallons 1 1' 3 Gallons Faucet Clearance 9.875" 7.875" 5.875" 0.125" Dimensions (H x W x D) 21.750" x 11.125" x 15.750" 19.750" x 11.125" x 15.750' 17.750" x 11.125" x 15.750" 9.250" x 11.125" x 15.750" Shipping Weight 14 Lbs. 14 Lbs. 13 Lbs. 8 Lbs. Cube (cu. ft.) 3.68 3.68 3.68 1.80 4;0 WILBUR CURTIS COMPANY. INC. 6913 Acco Street, Montebello, CA 90640-5403 Telephone: 800-421-6150 • 323-837-2300 Fax: 323-837-2406 - www.wilburcurtis.com FEB/11 - 11572 - F-3199 rev. D D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 236 Hoshizaki KMD-850MAH Item #804 %, rowimusir- Equipment & Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 804 - ICE CUBER (1 EA REQ'D) Hoshizaki KMD-850MAH Ice Maker, Cube -Style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, approximately 772 lb. capacity per 24 hours, stainless steel finish, crescent cube style, R-404A refrigerant, 208-230v/60/1-ph, 9.8 amps The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 804 ACCESSORIES C C Mfr Qty Model Spec Hoshizaki 1 3-Year parts & labor on entire machine Hoshizaki 1 5-Year parts & labor on evaporator Hoshizaki 1 5-Year parts on compressor & air-cooled condenser Hoshizaki 1 3 wire with neutral for 115v, standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 208-230 60 1 9.8 WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1/2" C WASTE INDIRECT I DIRECT SIZE SIZE 3/4„ D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 237 Hoshizaki KMD-850MAH KMD-850M H MODULAR CRESCENT CUBER CUBER DIMENSIONS W x D x H KMD-85OM_H 30 x 2411 x 28 VL NSf © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. i i KMD-850MAH Air -Cooled KMD-85OMWH Water -Cooled KMD-850MRH Remote Air -Cooled Shown on an optional Lancer 30" Dispenser IID I • Up to 798 lbs. of ice production per 24 hours • Ice on beverage design • Durable stainless steel exterior • Individual crescent cube • Protected by H-GUARD Plus Antimicrobial Agent GUARD • CycleSaverTM sign & • EverCheck- alert system e0 . • Stainless steel evaporator • Removable air filters (Air-cooled model only) • R-404A Refrigerant Warranty Valid in United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, & U.S. Territories. Contact factory for warranty in other countries. Three Year - Parts & Labor on entire machine. Five Year - Parts & Labor on: Evaporator. Five Year - Parts on: Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil. 618 Hwy. 74 S., Peachtree City, GA 30269 I TEL 1-800-438-6087 I FAX 1-800-345-1325 I www.hoshizaki.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Item #804 Item # Project: Qty: --- *AutoCad available on KCL KMD-85OM_H 7/27/ I S Item # 13230 Page: 238 Hoshizaki KMD-850MAH Item #804 KMD-$50M H MODULAR CRESCENT CUBER DIMENSIONS W x D x H KMD-850M H • Air-cooled 30 x 24" x 28 • Water-cooled • Remote Air-cooled AIR-COOLED Water Temp' F. 50' 70' 90' LL n 70' 772 729 667 9 80' 739 672 609 a 90' 729 561 WATER-COOLED Water Temp' F. 50' 70' 90' ti Q 70' 798 782 742 d F 80' 786 762 711 a 90' 782 698 REMOTE AIR-COOLED Water Temp' F. 50' 70' 90' ti a 70' 785 754 701 E 80' 762 714 654 a 90' 754 :l 622 UTILITY CONSUMPTION Model Number Ice Production Per Cycle Lbs. Cubes KWH per 100 LS. 90/70 per 100lbs. 90170 Water Gal. Sono KMD-850MAH 11.7 624 6.2 34.0 N/A KMD-850MWH 11.8 624 4.8 32.0 171 KMD-850MRH 11.3 624 5.8 28.0 N/A SPECIFICATIONS Model Number Condenser Min. Circuit Ampacity Shipping Weight KMD•850MAH Air -Cooled 20 249lbs. KMD-85OMWH Water -Coaled 20 2491bs. KMD-850MRH Ai er o1e 20 235lbs. *KM CUBE DIMENSIONS 11/2 \) 1/2" *approximate size in inches, image not to sale ELECTRICAL & PLUM BIN G/KMD-BSOM_H • 208-23OV/60/1 • 20 amp Max Fuse/HACR Breaker Size • I cemakerWater Sup* Line: Minimum 1/4" Nominal ID CopperWater Tubing or Equivalent • Icemaker Drain Line: Minimum 3/4" Nominal ID Hard Pipe or Equivalent Water -Cooled Model (Lines Must be Independent of Icemakerl • Condenser Water Supply Line: Minimum 1/4" Nominal ID Copper Water Tubing or Equivalent • Condenser Drain/Retum Line: Minimum 1/4" Nominal ID Hard Pipe (open drain system) or Copper WaterTubing (dosed loop system) or Equivalent NSF Q °L 121110 No © HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. MM air (762mm) KMD-850MAH FRONT VIEW AIR-COOLED UNIT KMD-850MRH & MWH FRONT VIEW Fan Motor correction REMOTE AIR-COOLED UNIT OPERATING LIMITS -Ambient Temp Range 4S - 1007 • Water Temp Range 45 - 90'F • Water Pressure 10 - 113psig • Voltage Range 187 - 2S3V CONDENSING UNIT • Voltage Range 104 - 127V • Ambient Temp Range -20 - 1227 ICE DROP ZONE SIDE VIEW WATER-COOLED UNIT URC-9F Remote Condenser (Sold Separately) For Use with KMD-850MRH 15 +ins 32 anfi —'{•'� Air Flow �L/I I I I 11 I RC IJJJI 21+sna URC-9F IILJII LJIJ 36 i5n6 ElectaDol 2 tln6 Ce Access 2 in 3 Ois -ge tine Liqd LRaeSgen"t �' 18 +m \ 34 s�+fi 'Y \./ Pre -Charged Tubing Kits (Sold Separately) 20' R404-2068.2 35' R404-3568.2 Voltage supply for the URC Remote Condenser is supplied from the Ice Maker. No additional circuit is required. SERVICE • Panels easily removed and all components accessible for service. • Removable/cleanable air filters (Air -Cooled model only) • Allow 6" (1 Scm) clearance at rear, sides, nm'� andtopforproper air circulation and easeof maintenance and/or service should they be required. D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 239 By Owner Item #805 Wrl Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 805 - CONDIMENT AND NAPKIN DISPENSERS (4 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 240 By Owner Item #806 %4r, w3mair Equipment 8s Furnishings Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 806 - TRASH BINS (2 EA REQ'D) BYOWNER 10/08/201S D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 241 By Vendor Item #807 Equipment Bs Fumishinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 807 - BAG-N-BOX COMPLETE SYSTEM (1 EA REQ'D) By Vendor D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 242 Grindmaster-Ceci[ware D25-3 Item #808 o Equipment 86 Flunishings Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 808 - BEVERAGE DISPENSER (1 EA REQ'D) Grind master-Cecilware D25-3 Crathco® Classic Bubblers"' Premix Cold Beverage Dispenser, 17-1/2" W, (2) 5 gallon capacity clear polycarbonate bowl, 8-1/4" cup height, MCX Mag Drive'"" impeller, stainless steel base side panels & drip tray, spray & agitate circulation packed with unit, 120v, 660 watts, 6 amps, UL, NSF, cULus (Grindmaster) ACCESSORIES C Mfr Qty Model Spec Grind master-Cecilware 1 5 years compressors warranty, standard Grindmaster-Cecilware 1 120v/60/1, 660 watts, 6 amps, standard ELECTRICAL VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 60 1 6 .66 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 243 By Vendor Item #809 W:,�%wmsjir FiQ111pmCIIt 86 �rni3f+__no CO. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 809 - CARBONATOR AND HIGH WALL SHELF (1 EA REQ'D) By Vendor D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 244 By Vendor Item #810 %4r, W3M&jr Equipment & Ft mWflnp Co. Submittal Sheet ITEM# 810 - BULK CO2 TANK (1 EA REQ'D) By Vendor 10/08/2015 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter . W. West Equipment & furnishings Co. Page: 245 By Vendor Item #811 %4® WMalr Equipment & F u mWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 811- CHEMICAL CLEANING SYSTEM (1 EA REQ'D) By Vendor D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 246 Grindmaster-Cecilware HWD2-120 Item #812 r,%7I MUSOT Equipment & F rnWiinp Co. Submittal Sheet 10/08/2015 ITEM# 812 - HOT WATER DISPENSER (1 EA REQ-D) Grind master-Cecilware HWD2-120 (080500L) Hot Water Dispenser, electric, 2-gallon capacity, 9-1/4"W x 21-1-4"D x 20"H, Tomlinson no drip faucet, stainless steel exterior finish, 1/4" water line required, 120v/60/1-phm 1.8 kW, 15 Amps, cULus, NSF (Cecilware) The cutsheet for this item can be viewed on item 812 ACCESSORIES C C Mfr Qty Model Grind master-Cecilware 1 Grind master-Cecilware 1 ELECTRICAL Spec 2 years parts & labor warranty, standard Export voltages available, contact factory for information VOLTS CYCLE PHASE CONN AFF NEMA AMPS KW HP MCA MOCP 120 60 1 15 1.8 WATER HOT SIZE HOT AFF HOT GPH COLD SIZE COLD AFF FILTERED SIZE FILTERED AFF CONDENSER INLET SIZE CONDENSER OUTLET SIZE 1/4" C WASTE INDIRECT SIZE DIRECT SIZE D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 247 Grind master-Cecilware HWD2-120 Item #812 Hit WAte - i, D-isnensers By � � Solid. Efficient. Reliable. Introducing the newest members to the Cecilware family, the l- MM-3 and H WD-5, the cost-effective, hea%y-duty hot water dispensers for your high volume food preparation needs. I-iWD-5 ese cost-effective workhorses put hot Rater spensing instantly at your fingertips - easily nd efficiently. Be it the 3 or 5 gallon model, is large capacity tank has the capability of providing small to large quantities of hot water instantly, snaking it an ideal solution. for hundreds of food application needs including: the preparation of soups, gravies, sauces, noodles, teas. potatoes .and pastas. HWD-5PC However, if limited counter space is a challenge, then try our compact hot water dispenser. Only 3" pride, the H WD-2 is perfect for your dispensing needs in those small to fit areas. With so many models to choose from. you can trust Cecilware to meet your specific dispensing needs. HWD_2 D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page: 248 Grindmaster-Cecilware HWD2-120 Item #812 210 POW A � — a —j POVIM SUPKY $"Mai fw-MF 30 wo WAY COWIEM" T —70* 21.M Model# Description Capacity Width Height Depth Electrical Ship Weight HWD-2 Hot Water Dispenser 2 Gallon $11 20" Wh" 120V, 1.8 KW, 15A 24OV, 3 KW, 20A 24 lbs. HWD-3 Hot Water Dispenser 3 Gallon 9,/", 24" 217,11 120V, 1.8 KW, 15A 240V, 4.4. KW, 20A 42 lbs. HWD-3PC Hot Water Dispenser w/portion control HWD-5 Hot Water Dispenser 5 Gallon I 1 9/41, 30r" 217," 12OV, 1.8 KW, 15A 240Y, 6.6 KW,30A I I 42 lbs. HWD-5PC Hot Water Dispenser , w/portion control Spe electrical requirements. The 120 V unit - roe cord irelutled. PlunWrig: 1 W Water fine reWre& Export VOKage3:22OV/W add vAxXtonlodelk Opoonal. fo(Z* logs add suffix V to model #. ktd* swxWrd In blEK* Wish except HWOa Stainless Steel. V Large 2,3'or 5 gallon water tank. V Instant automatic ' water refill. -provides, an inexhausfiublesI f)'Iy,of hot,water. V 'Instant hot wat6k in as hide as "i"of counter space. V Energy efficient systems keeps water temperature constant every time. V The HWD-.IJPC and HWD-5PC, offers convenient portion control for precise dispensing. V Fill an 8 oz. c:up it] 6 seconds. V Tomlinson no -drip faucet. V Ideal for large scale food preparation. V Easy -to -clean exterior. V Removable drip tray., Cecilware Corporation 43-05 20th Ave., WC NY 11105 Tel_ 800-935-2211 718-932-1414 Fax: 718.932.78W PP Visit us on the web: wwwzec.ilware.com D16349 - Corner Bakery Southcenter W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. Page:249 December 2, 2015 Carol Lumb City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Attn: Carol Lumb, Planning Department Reference: Correction Letter # 1 Development Permit Application Number D15-0269 CORNER BAKERY - 393 STRANDER BLVD. Dear Ms. Lumb, C11-Y OF i.' K'I4%i L A DEC 0 8 2015 PERMIT CENTER This letter is in response to the plan review comments received on November 5, 2015. Revisions to the sheets are clouded and tagged delta 1. Please note that the lower glazing panels have been revised to show existing glazing to remain with existing film removed. Comment 1: Strander Blvd. and Andover Park West are designated Urban Corridor's by TMC 18.28. TMC 18.28.200 C. requires 60% transparency for the facades along both of these streets between the height of two and ten feet. See also Figures 18-42 and Figure 18.42. Please provide calculations that show this standard has been met for each street. Response 1: 60% transparency was calculated using the total linear feet of the storefront per elevation. On the East Elevation, Andover Park W, the total combined length of the storefront system is 41'-0". 16'-5" of the storefront (40%) is allowed to be covered. Please see revised elevation 03 on sheet A201 with reduced film coverage to 12'-0'/2". On the North Elevation, Strander Blvd., the total combined length of the storefront systems is 63'-6". Only 25'-9" of the storefront(40%) is allowed to be covered. 25'- 8 1 /2" of storefront has film coverage. Per phone conversation with Carol Lumb on November 30, 2015, dark colored film is to be used. ec Comment 2: What type of building materials will be used to obscure the window on Strander that is inside the men's restroom? TMC 18.28.200 CA prohibits the use of darkly tinted glass, mirrored glass and glass covered by screening sheets, white or UV protection film Response 2: N/A per phone conversation with Carol Lumb on November 30, 2015. TMC 18.28.200C.4 states "Darkly tinted glass, mirrored glass and glass covered by screening sheets, white or UV protection film shall not meet transparency requirement." TMC 1 8.28.200C.4 applies to storefront that is to remain transparent and, not to storefront that is allowed to receive film coverage. Comment 3: Sheet A401 shows curtains as window treatments on the lower portions of the windows in the restaurant - will these be visible from the outside? Since the lower portion of the windows are obscured by pre-existing film, curtains are preferred to the film that is in place along Strander and Andover Park West. Response 3: The existing dark film on the all the lower glass panels of the windows will be removed and replaced with curtains. Only the storefronts noted to receive new film coverage will have film. Please let us know if you have further questions or concerns. Sincerely, Stantec Architecture Inc. &ae Principal Phone: (312) 262-2290 Brian.Reno@Stantec.com Siobhan Moon Team Lead Phone: (312) 262-2288 Siobhan.Mooney@stantec.com City of Tukwila Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director November 05, 2015 ROBERT CHANDLER 135 LASALLE ST, STE 3100 CHICAGO, IL 60603 RE: Correction Letter # 1 DEVELOPMENT Permit Application Number D15-0269 CORNER BAKERY - 393 STRANDER BLVD Dear ROBERT CHANDLER, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: PLANNING DEPARTMENT: Carol Lumb at 206-431-3661 if you have questions regarding these comments. 1. Strander Blvd. and Andover Park West are designated Urban Corridor's by TMC 18.28. TMC 18.28.200 C. requires 60% transparency for the facades along both of these streets between the height of two and ten feet. See also Figures 18-42 and Figure 18.42. Please provide calculations that show this standard has been met for each street. 2. What type of building materials will be used to obscure the window on Strander that is inside the men's restroom? TMC 18.28.200 CA prohibits the use of darkly tinted glass, mirrored glass and glass covered by screening sheets, white or UV protection film. 3. Sheet A401 shows curtains as window treatments on the lower portions of the windows in the restaurant - will these be visible from the outside? Since the lower portion of the windows are obscured by pre-existing film, curtains are preferred to the film that is in place along Strander and Andover Park West. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two 2 sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, I can be reached at (206)431-3655. Sincerely, _12�w __��L Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No. D15-0269 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 PERMIT COORD CG,jY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D15-0269 DATE: 12/15/15 PROJECT NAME: CORNER BAKERY SITE ADDRESS: 393 STRANDER BLVD Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: (AZ 0 NI Building Division ❑ Fire Prevention ❑ Planning Division Public Works ❑ Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator ❑ PRELIMINARY REVIEW: DATE: 12/15/15 Not Applicable ❑ Structural Review Required ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 01/12/15 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required ❑ Denied ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/201.1 ?ERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D15-0269 DATE: 10/20/15 PROJECT NAME: CORNER BAKERY SITE ADDRESS: 393 STRANDER BLVD X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision # before Permit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: A-�A Aldingtivis(i`on Fire Prevention� CPlanning CDivision �jb JAP( 10M I Public Works Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: DATE: 10/20/15 Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Structural Review Required ❑ DATE: DUE DATE: 11/17/15 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) Notation: S- 1 REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Denied ❑ (ie: Zoning Issues) DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping [�— PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/I8/2013 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not he accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 12-02-9015 Plan Check/Permit Number: D 15-0269 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # Z Response to Correction Letter # I ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner RECENIM CITY OF T41MNA Project Name: Corner Bakery PERR41T Project Address: 393 Strander Blvd Contact Person:_ Robert Chandler Phone Number: M19) 9R9-2?_$-(; Summary of Revision: _Elease_see_attacbedresponseletter Sheet Number(s): A201 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including dat of visio ,(c nges are clouded and tagged delta 1) Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: ❑ Entered in TRAKiT on \applicationsWorms-applications on linelrevision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: WILCOX CONSTRUCTION INC Page 1 of 3 Home Iriicio en Espanol Contact Safety Washington State Department of Labor & Industries WILCOX CONSTRUCTION INC Search L&I I A-'L Index Help Nly Secure U&I Claims & Insurance Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing Owner or tradesperson 234 5TH AVE SOUTH EDMONDS, WA98020 Principals 425-774-4185 LESSARD, MATTHEW J, PRESIDENT SNOHOMISH County CARTER, PAUL F, VICE PRESIDENT HOLOBAUGH, TRENT L, SECRETARY WILCOX, LAURA (End:01/01/1980) WILCOX, A E (End:01/01/1980) OLDS, HOWARD A, SECRETARY (End:01/01/1980) WILCOX, ROBERT EUGENE, PRESIDENT (End: 11/15/2010) LESSARD, MATTHEW J, SECRETARY (End: 11/15/2010) LESSARD, JAMES MICHAEL, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 11 /21 /2005) Doing business as WILCOX CONSTRUCTION INC WA UBI No. Business type 319 007 592 Corporation Governing persons MATTHEW J LESSARD ROBERT E WILCOX; License Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor Active. Meets current requirements. License specialties GENERAL License no. WILCOC*194Q0 Effective — expiration 11/20/1981-12/10/2017 Bond ................. TRAVELERS CAS & STY CO OF AMER Bond account no. SV4713 Received by L&I 09/26/2005 $12,000.00 Effective date 12/01 /2005 https://secure.Ini.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=319007592&LIC=WILCOC* 194Q0&SAW= 1/14/2016 AREA LOCATION MAP 025 BAKERY CORNER F r e n� NMI An WA'V8'1u'-"'�8 a3_. / CAFE #1619 PROTOTYPE 5.2.13 PROJECT SIZE & TYPE 74'-2" X 50'-2" INTERIOR FINISH, EXISTING 1—STORY BUILDING GROSS AREA MAIN BUILDING (CONDITIONED SPACE) 3,777 Sq. Ft. PATIO 530 Sq. Ft. TOTAL 4,307 Sq. Ft. * REFER TO A101 FOR RATED WALL LOCATIONS DESCRIPTION (SCOPE OF WORK) RESTAURANT TENANT IMPROVEMENT IN AN EXISTING BUILDING OCCUPANCY USE GROUP RESTAURANT GROUP A-2 OCCUPANT LOAD CALCULATIONS (PER SECTION 1004 & TABLE 1004.1.2) ROOM NO. USE USE CLASS SIZE SQFT./PERSON NO. PERSONS 101 VESTIBULE A-2 58 SF — 0 102 -PATIO A-2 300 SF 15 net (LESS CONCENTRATED) 20 103-105 DINING A-2 801 SF 15 net (LESS CONCENTRATED) 54 334 LI 1 person/18 linear in. (BENCH TYPE SEATING) 19 240 U 1 person/24 linear in. (BENCH SEATING —BOOTH) 10 e Number of seats (FIXED SEATING) 0 106 WAITING A-2 60 SF 5 13 108 WOMEN'S ROOM A-2 REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE COUNT ON SHEET A005 0 109 MEN'S ROOM A-2 REFER TO PLUMBING FIXTURE COUNT ON SHEET A005 0 110 SERVICE A-2 281 SF 200 2 6 111, 112, 114, 115 KITCHEN A-2 1,156 SF 200 113 OFFICE A-2 62 SF 100 1 116-117 FREEZER/ COOLER A-2 234 SF 300 1 TOTAL 126 EGRESS WIDTH CALCULATIONS 106 persons x 0.2"/person = 21.2" REQUIRED PUBLIC EXITS: (1) exit door @ 36" wide + (1) exit door @ 72" wide KITCHEN EXIT: (1) exit door @ 42" wide = 42" PROVIDED = 108" PROVIDED BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TYPE & FIRE PROTECTION TYPE: VB—SPRINKLERED BUILDING HEIGHT & AREA MODIFICATIONS INTERIOR FINISH HEIGHT = NO MODIFICATIONS, 26'-3" AREA = NO MODIFICATIONS, 19,300 S.F. EFFECTIVE CODES OF CONSTRUCTION BUILDING CODE 2012 IBC WITH STATE OF WA AMMENDMENTS ELECTRICAL CODE Q/ — IEC WITH STATE OF WA AMMENDMENTS MECHANICAL CODE 012 IMC WITH STATE OF WA AMMENDMENTS PLUMBING CODE 2012 IPC WITH STATE OF WA AMMENDMENTS FIRE CODE 2012 IFC WITH STATE OF WA AMMENDMENTS ACCESSIBILITY CODE ICC/ANSI A117.1-09 WITH STATE OF WA AMMENDMENTS ENERGY CODE NEEC 2012 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE HEALTH DEPARTMENT KING COUNTY ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH CONTACT LIST OWNER NORTHWEST CORNER, LLC 4030 MOORPARK AVE., SUITE 232 SAN JOSE, CA 95117 PH: (408) 981-9183 EMAIL: vpanchal@yahoo.com CONTACT: VINAY PANCHAL LANDLORD REGENCY CENTERS 5355 SW MEADOW ROAD, SUITE 295 LAKE OSWEGO, OR 97503 PH: (503) 603-4733 EMAIL: tombauwens@regencycenters.com CONTACT: TOM BAUWENS KITCHEN DESIGNER W. WEST EQUIPMENT & FURNISHINGS CO. 9355 NORTHFIELD BLVD. DENVER, CO 80238 PH: 720-961-0338 EMAIL: jeremiah@wwestequipment.com CONTACT: JEREMIAH SCHWINDT ARCHITECT STANTEC ARCHITECTURE, INC. 135 SOUTH LaSALLE STREET SUITE 3100 CHICAGO, IL 60603 PHONE: (312) 262-2300 EMAIL: ROBERT.CHANDLER@STANTEC.COM CONTACT: ROBERT CHANDLER MECHANICAL/ PLUMBING ENGINEER WCW ENGINEERS, INC. 760 CREEL DRIVE WOOD DALE, IL 60191 PHONE: (630) 595-8800 EMAIL: SUNG.KWON@WCWENGINEERS.COM CONTACT: SUNG KWON ELECTRICAL ENGINEER DICKERSON ENGINEERING INC. 8101 N. MILWAUKEE AVE NILES, IL 60714 PH: (847) 966-0290 FAX: (847) 966-0294 EMAIL: steve.barnard@dei-pe.com CONTACT: STEPHEN BARNARD STRUCTURAL ENGINEER BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. 345 POLLASKY AVENUE CLOVIS, CA 93612 PH: 559-323-9600 EMAIL: brad@byaengineering.com CONTACT: BRAD YOUNG AWNING FRANCHISE SIGNS INTERNATIONAL 1101-A WEST MELINDA LANE PHOENIX, AZ 85027 PH: (276) 791-1030 FAX: (267) 501.4502 EMAIL: aaronhill.fsi@gmail.com CONTACT: AARON HILL REVISIONS No h1 rr^dc� to the scope of t,?o-k t^rifl'jr-.wi prio, cp -rov-1 of Su"di9 .; r; Div�;:.on. NOT E.: 1 ;;�-;O;,a avi;! r0 t!irc a ns',v p'un submittal aid r; y irt;,lude additional plan review fees. Pe Pla:. i!S'die'v 8 A,- f ravull the violati n of Of appravod Fi Data: UTILITIES LIST WATER CITY OF TUKWILA CONTACT: TODD REEDY PH: (206) 433-1863 SEWER TUKWILA SEWER CONTACT: MIKE KUZAK PH: (206) 433-1864 GAS PUGET SOUND ENERGY CONTACT: NEW SERVICE PH: ELECTRIC PUGET SOUND ENERGY CONTACT: NEW SERVICE PH: TELEPHONE LEGACY CENTURY LINK CONTACT: JOHN CARLSON PH: (800) 603-6000 aC d Cop C BUIL Q DRAWING INDEX REVISION SHEET DESCRIPTION G001 COVER SHEET, CONTACTS & INDEX J_ U p D101 DEMOLITION PLAN w S1.1 TYPICAL NOTES & DETAILS Q S1.2 TYPICAL NOTES & DETAILS U S1.3 TYPICAL NOTES & DETAILS S2.1 CEILING FRAMING PLAN S2.2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S3.1 FRAMING DETAILS A001 DRAWING CONVENTIONS & ABBREVIATIONS Q = A002 ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS U A003 ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS H A004A RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE U A005 EGRESS PLAN A006 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN Q ,. A100 COMPOSITE FLOOR PLAN A101 DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN A102 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN & DETAILS A105 WALL AND SUBSTRATE TYPES A121 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A122 SERVICE/ COOKLINE & MENU BOARD DETAILS A131 ROOF PLAN A201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A301 WALL SECTIONS A303 AWNING DRAWINGS (REFERENCE ONLY) A401 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A402 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A451 FLOOR FINISH PLAN A452 BASE & TRANSITION DETAILS A501 MILLWORK DETAILS A502 MILLWORK DETAILS A503 MILLWORK DETAILS A503A MILLWORK DETAILS A504A MILLWORK DETAILS A505 MILLWORK DETAILS A505A MILLWORK DETAILS A506A MILLWORK DETAILS A601 DOOR & WINDOW DETAILS A602 SCHEDULES A603 DOOR HARDWARE SUBMITTAL A701 FURNITURE & GRAPHICS PLAN z FS1.0 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT PLAN & SCHEDULE = FS2.0 UNDER SLAB UTILITIES ROUGH -IN PLAN & SCHEDULE t= FS2.1 PLUMBING ROUGH -IN PLAN & SCHEDULE Y FS3.0 ELECTRICAL ROUGH -IN PLAN AND SCHEDULE FS4.0 BUILDING CONDITIONS PLAN & SCHEDULE FS4.1 REFRIGERATION PLAN FS5.0 EQUIPMENT ELEVATIONS FS5.1 EQUIPMENT ELEVATIONS PM1 UTILITY ROOF PLAN a PM2 ROOF DETAILS C� P001 SYMBOLS & GENERAL NOTES vE ,' 7 1 E: J=�E :t.'IT m P101 UNDER FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN PI rOi. P111 ABOVE FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN ' CGPY 0- P201 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS t:Rect;anica! �.Ct•��:r�cal k P211 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 19FIumbing P301 PLUMBING DETAILS �.GasPiping subjeci to errors and crI' dons. P311 PLUMBING DETAILS & SCHEDULES Ci'j n documents does r"m-- n pted cado or ordinance. R cc i pt and cond►tions is adkiiDiMedjed: M101 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN Q v M202 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES Q M301 MECHANICAL DETAILS _ U M302 HOOD DETAILS I Of Tukwila2 M303 HOOD DETAILS DING DIVISION M304 HOOD DETAILS � REVlEWE 1 CODE COiMPLIANCE-k E101 LIGHTING PLAN APPROVED J E111 POWER PLAN Jet 10 4 2'5 E112 ENLARGED POWER PLAN & DETAILS I-- E113 0 Ad ROOF PLAN - POWER City ofTuI�,��tla E301 SCHEDULES & DETAILS BUILDING DIVISION J Lu E302 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E303 ELECTRICAL PANELS RE`%E'VED CITY OF TUiVYILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ARE ALARM PLANS AND OBTAIN APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SPRINKLER PLANS PER LOCAL JURISDICTION REQUIREMENTS SEPARATE SUBMITTALS: 1. ALARM SYSTEM 3. SIGN PACKAGE 5. SOUND SYSTEM 2. SPRINKLER SYSTEM 4. AWNING PACKAGE 6. ARE DETECTION SYSTEM 0 U m >.a o O U m O U a z� ma �m O 0 O U E y o 0 C ao O R T LO .= rn '- N O O C O 0 O a > L U _ E a _U N 02 ca`r > U i p U a aa) t o 0 0 0 Q Q V oe U U O E 0 0) " 0� `c � Z ? s a`O v)�a 0 0 0 N O- 0�U_ -C _[_- = `o a r s a- • .• .. IM i �� .• • •Ld Vol 4-0 �LL. — - <ry AGN 0 NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT ��8/2015 & BID 8211 l0/0g>h5 n m 06 5 W ry O H 0 W (/// /D w U) O N 00 O O T_ DRAWN BY: I CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER G001 Cover Sheet DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 b 0 Z ai 9 0 DDEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" wnQ�roninlr. BE LOCATED FROM THIS POINT; REF. SHEET A101 CONCRETE SLAB NOTES 1. REFER TO THE PLUMBING AND KITCHEN FLOOR PLANS FOR SINK AND FLOOR DRAIN LOCATIONS. FLOOR SINKS TO BE FLUSH WITH TILE UNLESS OTHERWISE REQ'D BY CODE. FLOOR FINISH TO SLOPE 1/8' PER FOOT TO DRAINS, TYP. 2. ALL WOOD IN CONTACT WITH CONCRETE MUST BE PRESSURE TREATED, MOISTURE RESISTANT WOOD. 3. PRESERVE & PROTECT ALL EXISTING FOUNDATION WALLS TO REMAIN DURING CONSTRUCTION. 4. SAW CUT CONCRETE SLAB FOR PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, PHONE/DATA AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWINGS. INSTALL CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB - PATCH OVER COMPACTED FILL AT CUTOUTS AND LEAVE -OUTS SHALL MATCH EXISTING. PREPARE FOR SCHEDULED FINISH - COORDINATE WITH SHEET A451 AND KITCHEN DRAWINGS. 5. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LOCAL CODE AND ARE MARSHAL REQUIREMENTS WITH DOCUMENTS; CONTACT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER IF DISCREPANCIES OCCUR BETWEEN DOCUMENTS AND LOCAL REQUIREMENTS. 6. REFERENCE 02/D101 FOR CONCRETE SLAB PATCH DETAIL 7. ALL RIGID INSULATION UNDER FREEZER TO BE TOAMULAR 250" (BY OWENS CORNING) OR APPROVED EQUAL; COORDINATE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION ® FREEZER WITH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. #4 x 2'-0" DOWEL DRILL 6" INTO EXISTING @ 18" O.C. CONCRETE INFILL SLAB - TO MATCH EXISTING SLAB THICKNESS #3 ® 18" O.C. EACH WAY ROUGHEN EDGE OF EXISTING CONCRETE EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB LLJ c LrLJ d 6" SLAB PATCH DETAIL 02 SCALE: 1" = V-0" 3 DEMOLITION NOTES 1. ALL DEMOLITION SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN A SAFE MANNER AND IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH OSHA REGULATIONS. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. THE WORK INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF WALLS, FLOORS - FLOOR FINISHES, CEILINGS, BUILT-IN COUNTERS, AND COUNTERS AND CABINETS, DISPLAY COUNTERS, BULKHEADS, SLATWALL, DOORS, FIXTURES, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS INCLUDING CONDUITS AND DUCTWORK AS SHOWN ON DRAWING OR AS REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE WORK FOR A COMPLETE JOB. 3. REMOVE EVERYTHING AS IDENTIFIED AND DESCRIBED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE OPEN SHELL READY FOR CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE ALL DEMOLITION QUESTIONS THROUGH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 4. PROVIDE TEMPORARY WEATHER AND SECURITY BARRIERS 5. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SHORING FOR NEW OPENINGS 6. PATCH AND REPAIR WALLS AND SLAB WHERE DEMOLITION, DAMAGE OR INCOMPLETE WORK HAS OCCURRED. PREPARE FOR SCHEDULED FINISH. COORDINATE EXTENTS WITH CONSTRUCTION PLAN. 7. WHERE PORTIONS OF THE INTERIOR SURFACES OF THE FACILITY ARE EXPOSED TO THE WEATHER PROTECT ALL SURFACES AT ALL TIMES WITH PLASTIC BARRIER. 8. PROTECT ALL REMAINING ELECTRICAL ITEMS PER CODE. 9. TERMINATE ALL ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SERVICE TO BE REMOVED IN A MANNER CONFORMING TO THE NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED CODE COVERING THE SPECIFIC UTILITY AND SATISFACTORY TO THE OWNER AND BUILDING OFFICIALS. 10. WHERE CONCRETE WORK IS TO BE REMOVED, SAW CONCRETE ALONG STRAIGHT LINES AT LOCATIONS WHERE THE CONCRETE CANNOT BE CONCEALED. IT SHALL BE GROUND SMOOTH OR THE SAW CUT SHALL BE MADE ENTIRELY THROUGH THE CONCRETE. 11. COMPLY WITH FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL HAULING AND DISPOSAL REGULATIONS. 12. NO WALL OR PART OF WALL SHALL BE PERMITTED TO FALL IN ANY DIRECTION UNRESTRAINED. 13. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL STATE AND LOCAL BUILDING CODES, ORDINANCES, AND ANY GOVERNING AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION OVER THE PROJECT. 14. THE JOB SITE SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN A CLEAN, ORDERLY CONDITION FREE OF DEBRIS AND LITTER AND SHALL NOT BE UNREASONABLY ENCUMBERED WITH ANY MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT. ALL DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED AT MINIMUM ONCE PER DAY, OR AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SAFE JOBSTTE CONDITIONS. EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IMMEDIATELY UPON COMPLETION OF EACH PHASE OF HIS WORK SHALL REMOVE ALL TRASH AND DEBRIS AS A RESULT OF HIS OPERATION. 15. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND SITE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET BEFORE STARTING WORK. SHOULD A DISCREPANCY APPEAR IN THE DRAWINGS, OR IN THE WORK DONE BY OTHERS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS THAT AFFECT ANY WORK, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND CBC PM AT ONCE FOR INSTRUCTION ON HOW TO PROCEED. 16. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REQUESTING ALL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED. 17. REMOVE ANY ABANDONED EQUIPMENT, PENETRATIONS, VENTS AND PIPE NOT BEING USED. PATCH AND REPAIR FOR A WATERTIGHT SEAL. 18. PLAN, SCHEDULE AND COORDINATE ALL REMOVAL AND DEMOLITION (AS WELL AS NEW WORK) TO AVOID INTERRUPTION TO ELECTRICAL, HVAC, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION SERVICES TO OTHER TENANTS. 19. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, REMOVE ALL EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES AND PLUMBING LINES THROUGHOUT. CAP ALL EXISTING SANITARY SEWER SERVICE AND DOMESTIC WATER LINES AT POINT OF ENTRY. 20. REMOVE ALL EXISTING AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT AND DUCT WORK THROUGHOUT. 21. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, REMOVE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS THROUGHOUT. TERMINATE AT POINT OF ENTRY. 22. CONTRACTOR TO PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS FROM DAMAGE. 23. REMOVE ALL GAS LINES THROUGHOUT. CAP AT POINT OF ENTRY. 24. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT ANY EXISTING ITEMS TO REMAIN FROM DAMAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION. 25. CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH & REPAIR AS REQUIRED FOR EXISTING ITEMS TO REMAIN. 26. ANY DAMAGED ROOF DECK DISCOVERED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED. KEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES LISTED ARE USED - REFER TO DRAWING) OEXISTING METAL STUD DEMISING WALL TO REMAIN. ONOT USED. OEXISTING COLUMN TO REMAIN. REMOVE (E) FINISH. OREMOVE EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION DOWN TO MATCH EXISTING SILL ELEVATION OF WINDOWS ALONG SAME WALL. REFERENCE DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN & EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS. OEXISTING SIDEWALK TO REMAIN. OEXISTING DOWNSPOUT TO REMAIN. OEXISTING CONCRETE SLAB TO BE TRENCHED FOR PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL WORK. EXISTING FOUNDATION TO REMAIN UNDISTURBED. REF. SLAB FOUNDATION PLAN FOR DETAILS. OEXISTING GAS METER TO REMAIN. OEXISTING CONCRETE SLAB TO REMAIN. OREMOVE EXISTING STOREFRONT AS SHOWN TO RECEIVE DOORS. OREMOVE EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL CONSTRUCTION DOWN TO 1'-0" BELOW EXISTING INTERIOR L CONCRETE SLAB. REFERENCE DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN, WALL SECTIONS, & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. OREMOVE EXISTING STOREFRONT DOOR. OREMOVE EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION. OEXISTING SIDEWALK TO BE REMOVED. OALL EXISTING SUSPENDED CEILING, BULKHEADS, ELECTRICAL, & MECHANICAL SYSTEMS WITHIN TENANT SPACE TO BE REMOVED. OSAW CUT EXISTING PORTION OF CURB TO EXTENTS SHOWN FOR NEW CONCRETE RAMP. OG.C. TO VERIFY LOCATION FOR DUPLEX FLOOR BOX FOR COMMUNITY TABLE; REF. SLAB S FOUNDATION PLAN, FURNITURE PLAN, & ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS. OEXISTING SIDEWALK TO BE REMOVED FOR PATIO WALL CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO WALL SECTIONS. OREMOVE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE & ENLARGE OPENING FOR DOOR IF REQUIRED. OEXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN OREMOVE EXISTING FLOOR AND WALL TILE, PARTITIONS, MILLWORK, AND PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ASSOCIATED TOILET ACCESSORIES. PREPARE EXISTING SLAB TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES AND GRIND CONCRETE SLAB FROM 1/4" DEPTH AT O FACES OF NEW STOREFRONT TO 1" MAX. AT EDGE OF EXISTING WALK TO MAKE WAY FOR PATIO FLOOR FINISH. OEXISTING FOOTING TO REMAIN UNDISTURBED. OREMOVE EXISTING REAR DOOR & PORTION OF WALL SHOWN FOR NEW DOOR & FRAME; VERIFY Z WALL OPENING FOR DOOR SIZE; REF. DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN & DOOR SCHEDULE. OREMOVE EXISTING FILM ON STOREFRONT GLAZING AND CLEAN GLAZING TO MAKE LIKE NEW; REPAIR/REPLACE ANY DAMAGED SEAL BB REMOVE EXISTING SPANDREL GLAZING AND PREP TO RECEIVING NEW CLEAR GLAZING. REPLACE ALL SEALS FOR WEATHER TIGHT SHELL. LEGEND EXISTING DEMISING WALL PROVIDED BY LANDLORD UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT. EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL TO REMAIN; REF. SHEET A101 FOR DETAILS. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO BE REMOVED, U.N.O. REFER TO KEY NOTES FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS. T EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB TO BE REMOVED, / U.N.O. REFER TO KEY NOTES FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS. C O U O O O y-0 o=�s Z 0 N -0 o '3 0 2 U N O O c O - O >. N a)N a E O p � O H 6 0 oQ=� (y O 2 m � `o U Q (D o L D O O O } o .N m -_ o o f /U F 3 �• Ln T O m L o . Q a Q U U � 6 n O- N o E °� °� a c o c z N O 6 O 0 cc)U -p U 4- M 0_ c a) a)N = = = O NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT F108/2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED 13RIAN N. R , Q ATE OF WASHENi; 0!= 1ti/06 Its R 's1IEVkED I'OR CODCOMPLIANCE ' APPROVED A 110 4 20415 Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TU.WILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: I CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM r�1 co 06 L11 O U- 0 W Z) !!U) vJ r O N 00 O O T_ PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER D101 Demolition Plan '1 u (h 1. SHOP DRAWINGS ARE REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS. SUBMIT AT LEAST 1. THIS BUILDING HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO SUSTAIN, WITHIN THE LIMITATIONS SPECIFIED IN THE 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC), ALL DEAD LOADS AND OTHER 1. THIS SECTION APPLIES TO THE STRUCTURAL_ PORTIONS OF THE PROJECT REQUIRING (1) SET OF PRINTS FOR ENGINEERS RECORDS (1) SET OF SEPIAS TO BE CHECKED APPLICABLE LOADS SPECIFIED IN CHAPTER 16 OR ELSEWHERE IN THE IBC. SPECIAL INSPECTION. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR'S DUTIES ARE AS DESCRIBED IN BY ENGINEER & THEN REPRODUCED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND CALCULATIONS IBC 1704 (IF APPLICABLE) FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION. 2. ALL ALLOWABLE STRESSES AND SOIL -BEARING VALUES SPECIFIED IN THE IBC FOR DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR: a) CONCRETE REINFORCING BARS WORKING STRESS DESIGN HAVE BEEN INCREASED ONE THIRD WHEN CONSIDERING a) THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE A QUALIFIED PERSON WHO SHALL WIND OR EARTHQUAKE FORCES EITHER ACTING ALONE OR WHEN COMBINED WITH DEMONSTRATE COMPETENCE, TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL b) CONCRETE MIX DESIGN VERTICAL LOADS. NO INCREASE HAS BEEN TAKEN FOR VERTICAL LOADS ACTING AND THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR INSPECTION OF THE PARTICULAR TYPE c) STRUCTURAL STEEL ALONE. OF CONSTRUCTION OR OPERATIONS REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. d) GROUT MIX DESIGN 3. EACH COMPONENT HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO RESIST THE MOST CRITICAL EFFECT b) THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL OBSERVE THE WORK ASSIGNED FOR e) MASONRY REINFORCING BARS RESULTING FROM ALL APPLICABLE LOAD COMBINATIONS REQUIRED BY THE IBC CONFORMANCE WITH THE APPROVED DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. f) GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER MEMBERS 4. GRAVITY LOADS: (THESE ARE THE GENERAL DESIGN LOADS. THEY MAY BE c) COPIES OF TEST RESULTS AND FINAL REPORTS SHALL BE FURNISHED TO DIFFERENT IN LOCALIZED AREAS. THIS ENGINEER IN ADDITION TO OTHER NORMAL DISTRIBUTIONS WITHIN ONE WEEK OF THE TEST OR INSPECTION. a) DEAD LOADS: d) ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF ROOF DEAD LOAD = 14 PSF THE CONTRACTOR FOR CORRECTION. THEN IF UNCORRECTED TO THE „ ROOF POPUP / ENGINEER OF RECORD AND TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. MANSARD DEAD LOAD: = N/A e) THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL SUBMIT A FINAL SIGNED REPORT STATING FLOOR DEAD LOAD = N/A WHETHER THE WORK REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION WAS TO THE BEST 2. ALLOW TEN (10) WORKING DAYS FOR SHOP DRAWINGS REVIEW COMMENCING THE METAL STUD WALL D.L. = N/A OF THE INSPECTOR'S KNOWLEDGE, IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE APPROVED NEXT WORKING DAY AFTER RECEIPT. PLEASE PLAN YOUR SCHEDULE ACCORDINGLY. WOOD STUD WALL = N/A PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND THE APPLICABLE WORKMANSHIP PROVISIONS 3. NO PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE TO BE REPRODUCED AS PART OF THE SHOP DRAWINGS. SHOP DRAWINGS CONTAINING DETAILS, SECTIONS OR PLANS b) LIVE LOADS: ROOF LIVE LOAD = 20 PSF (REDUCIBLE) OF THE I.B.C. 2• ALL TEST AND INSPECTIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING AND PHOTO COPIED FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WILL BE REJECTED. ROOF POPUP / INSPECTION AGENCY EMPLOYED BY THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT AND NOT THE MANSARD LIVE LOAD: = N/A CONTRACTOR PER IBC SECTION 109, APPENDIX GAP CHAPTER, JOB SITE VISITS BY 4. BEFORE SUBMITTING A SHOP DRAWING OR ANY RELATED MATERIAL TO THIS ENGINEER. THE ENGINEER OF RECORD DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A SPECIAL INSPECTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL; REVIEW EACH SUCH SUBMISSION FOR CONFORMANCE WITH FLOOR OFFICE = N/A 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING THE TEST AND INSPECTION THE MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES. AND OPERATIONS OF CONSTRUCTION, PARTITION LOAD = N/A FIRM WITH A SCHEDULE TO FACILITATE THE PROPER COORDINATION OF WORK. AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS INCIDENTAL THERETO, ALL OF WHICH ARE FLOOR EXT. = N/A 4. THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR; AND APPROVE EACH SUCH FLOOR LIGHT STORAGE = N/A PORTIONS OF WORK REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION: SUBMISSION BEFORE SUBMITTING IT. THE CONTRACTOR IS FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY FLOOR HEAVY STORAGE = N/A A) SOIL AND FOUNDATION: CHANGES OR DELAYS CAUSED BY PREMATURELY SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THIS FLOOR RESIDENTIAL BASIC a) SOIL CONDITIONS, FILL PLACEMENT AND LOAD -BEARING YES N/A ENGINEERS SHOP DRAWINGS REVIEW AND STAMP DOES NOT ALLEVIATE THE CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS PER IBC 1705.6 .................... ❑ RESPONSIBILITY TO REVIEW THE SAME SHOP DRAWINGS. THIS ENGINEER SHALL DECKS, & STORAGE = N/A ASSUME THAT NO SHOP DRAWING OR RELATED SUBMITTAL COMPRISES AN INTENTIONAL FLOOR RESIDENTIAL VARIATION UNLESS CONTRACTOR ADVISES THIS ENGINEER OTHERWISE IN WRITING EXTERIOR BALCONIES = N/A WHICH IS THEN ACKNOWLEDGED BY THIS ENGINEER IN WRITING. c) SNOW LOADS: 8v�O7 �R WINGS GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg = 25 PSF ROOF SNOW LOAD, Ps = 25 PSF ",N^ `' 5. WIND LOADS: a) BASIC WIND SPEED (3-SECOND GUST), V = 110 mph 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR JOB SITE SAFETY. THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE A COMPLETE LIST, BUT ARE ADDITIONAL b) RISK CATEGORY = I SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONTRACTOR. OBSERVATION VISITS TO THE SITE BY c) EXPOSURE C THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SHALL NOT INCLUDE INSPECTION OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: d) INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT, GC PL. = N/A 2. THE STRUCTURE SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS IS STRUCTURALLY SOUND ONLY IN ITS e) HEIGHT AND EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT COEFFICIENT, (A) = N/A COMPLETE FOR,. THE DESIGN ADEQUACY AND SAFETY OR ERECTION BRACING, SHORING TEMPORARY SUPPORTS, ETC. IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR, AND 6. SEISMIC LOAD: HAS NOT BEEN CONSIDERED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR IS a) RISK CATEGORY = 2 RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF b) SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATIONS, Ss = 1.451 ALL WALLS AND ROOF & FLOOR SHEATHING. HE SHALL PROVIDE THE NECESSARY BRACING TO PROVIDE STABILITY PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF THE AFORE- S = 0 541 El El Fl I MENTIONED MATERIALS. c) SITE CLASS D b) INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF PILE FOUNDATIONS YES N/A 3. AN ERECTION PLAN IS REQUIRED FOR MOST CONSTRUCTION PHASES. CONTRACTOR d) SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENTS, SDS = 0.967 PER IBC 1705.7.................................................. ❑ 1111 SHALL DETERMINE ALL CONSTRUCTION PHASE WHICH REQUIRE ERECTION PLANS ACCORDING TO ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS. A CERTIFIED COPY OF SUCH SD1 = 0.541 ERECTION PLANS SHALL REMAIN ON THE CONSTRUCTION SITE AT ALL TIMES. e) SESMIC DESIGN CATEGORY D 4. TEMPORARY LOADING DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL NOT OVERLOAD DESIGN VALUES. f) SEISMIC -FORCE -RESISTING SYSTEM = CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR NOTIFYING ALL TRADES OF SUCH DESIGN VALUES. (E) INTERMEDIATE REINFORCED THE USE OF ATV TYPE MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT IS PROHIBITED FROM USE MASONRY SHEARWALLS Cd = 2 1 /4 ON WOOD ROOFS AND ELEVATED FLOORS. 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ATTACHED VISIBLE PLATES INDICATING THE DESIGN g) DESIGN BASE SHEAR, V = N/A LOADS IN ALL SPACES AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS. THE h) SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT, CS = N/A OCCUPANT OF THE BUILDING SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING THE ACTUAL LOAD BELOW THE ALLOWABLE LIMITS. i) EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE ANALYSIS PROCEDURE USED 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE IF A CALOSHA PERMIT IS REQUIRED, IF SO, IT SHALL 7• FROST LINE DEPTH = 1'-O" (VERFY W/ BLDG. DEPART) BE THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO OBTAIN SUCH PERMIT. 8, THE GOVERNING BUILDING CODE IS THE 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) 7. THE LACK OF A HIGH GUARDRAIL AT BUILDING PARAPETS FLOOR OPENING & ROOF g• BY ISSUING A BUILDING PERMIT, THE GOVERNING BUILDING DEPARTMENT OPENINGS DOES NOT MEET CURRENT LABOR CODE FOR AN OCCUPIED SPACE. THIS ENGINEER RECOMMENDS THE USE OF GUARDRAILS AT STATED LOCATIONS. FOR THIS PROJECT IS APPROVING ALL LOADS AND LOAD FACTORS IF GUARDRAILS ARE NOT USED THE OWNERS SHALL ACCEPT FULL RESPONSIBILITY. LISTED IN ITEMS 4b, 4c, 5, 6, & 7. IN ADDITION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CLEARLY LEGIBLE SIGNS AT THESE LOCATIONS STATING "CAUTION: NO GUARDRAIL" 10. N/A INDICATES THAT THIS ITEM IS NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT. CONTINUOUS PERIODICALLY VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION TASK DURING TASK DURING LISTED TASK LISTED 1. VERIFY MATERIAL BELOW FOOTING ARE ADEQUATE TO ACHIEVE THE DESIGN BEARING X CAPACITY 2. VERIFY EXCAVATIONS ARE EXTENDED TO PROPER DEPTH AND HAVE REACHED PROPER X MATERIAL 3. PERFORM CLASSIFICATION AND TESTING OF X CONTROLLED FILLED MATERIALS. 4. VERIFY EXCAVATIONS ARE EXTENDED TO PROPER DEPTH AND HAVE REACHED PROPER X MATERIAL 5. PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONTROLLED FILLED, OBSERVE SUBGRADE AND VERIFY THAT SITE X HAS BEEN PREPARED PROPERLY. CONTINUOUS PERIODICALLY VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION TASK DURING TASK DURING LISTED TASK LISTED 1. VERIFY PILE MATERIALS, SIZES AND LENGTHS COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS. X 2. DETERMINE CAPACITIES OF TEST PILES AND CONDUCT ADDITIONAL LOAD TESTS, AS X REQUIRED 3. OBSERVE DRIVING OPERATIONS AND MAINTAIN COMPLETE AND ACCURATE RECORDS FOR EACH X PILE. 4. VERIFY PLACEMENT LOCATIONS AND PLUMBNESS CONFIRM TYPE AND SIZE OF HAMMER, RECORD NUMBER OF BLOWS PER FOOT OF PENETRATION, DETERMINE REQUIRED X PENETRATIONS TO ACHIEVE DESIGN CAPACITY, RECORD TIP AND BUTT ELEVATIONS AND DOCUMENT ANY PILE DAMAGE. HE Is El M E] Ill 8. ALL TEMPORARY FLOOR AND ROOF OPENINGS LACKING GUARDRAILS SHALL BE ADEQUATELY COVERED AND DESIGNED TO RESIST CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC LOADS. c) INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF PIER FOUNDATIONS YES N/A PER IBC 1705.8..................................................... ❑ 6 C; DESIGN CR'1 "ER'A 9 CONTRACTOR SHAL S N L VERIFY THAT ALL KYLIGHTS ARE DESIG ED TO WITH STAND .�;`:;. THE LOADS SPECIFIED IN THE BUILDING CODE. : _:> 2 "S`' 10. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR LOCATE ALL EXISTING UTILITIES 1 • THE SOILS REPORT (SEE NOTE a&b BELOW WHERE APPLICABLE) IN ITS ENTIRELY WHETHER SHOWN HEREON OR NOT, AND TO PROTECT THEM FROM DAMAGE. THE SHALL BE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR SHALL BEAR ALL EXPENSE OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT IN IS RESPONSIBLE FOR READING AND UNDERSTANDING ALL OF THE SOILS REPORTS CONJUNCTION WITH THE EXECUTION OF THIS WORK. RECOMMENDATIONS. ALL OF THE SOILS REPORTS RECOMMENDATIONS MUST BE 11. MATERIAL USED IN THIS DESIGN MAY BE HAZARDOUS TO ONES HEALTH. THE FOLLOWED. FOR RECOMMENDED SOIL BEARING PRESSURE, FOUNDATION MATERIAL CONTRACTOR AND OWNER SHALL ACCEPT ALL RESPONSIBILITY AND SHALL POST AND SITE GRADING SEE SOILS AND GEOLOGICAL REPORT BY: SUCH WARNING DURING CONSTRUCTION. NO SOILS REPORT HAS BEEN PROVIDED BY THE OWNER 12. THE CONTRACTOR, DURING CONSTRUCTION, AND THE OWNER, DURING OCCUPANCY, SHALL ASSUME ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROPER ROOF MAINTENANCE TO INSURE PROPER ROOF DRAINAGE. 13. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING BUILDING ERECTION DESIGN SOIL BEARING VALUE = 1000 PSF. IBC TABLE 1804.2 SAFETY. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FOLLOWING ALL ERECTION LAWS AND 2. EXISTING FOOTING OR FOUNDATIONS WHICH MAY BE AFFECTED BY ANY GUIDELINES. IF THE CONTRACTOR FEELS THAT THE ERECTION OF THE STRUCTURE e EXCAVATION SHALL BE UNDERPINNED ADEQUATELY OR OTHERWISE PROTECTED REPRESENTED IN THESE PLANS WILL NOT MEET THOSE LAWS & GUIDELINES. THE AGAINST SETTLEMENT AND SHALL BE PROTECTED AGAINST LATERAL MOVEMENT. CONTRACTOR MUST NOTIFY THE ENGINEER BEFORECONSTRUCTIONAND FABRICATION BEGINS. 3. FILLS USED TO SUPPORT THE FOUNDATIONS OF ANY BUILDING OR STRUCTURE ADDITIONAL E NOTES SHA9 BE PLACEDI ENGINEERING CEMENT A Vf11 / SOILL INVESTIGATION R PORTRDANDEAWITH REPORT OF SATISFACTORY PLAACCEPTED ,-11„"., ; OF FILL BOTH ACCEPTABLE TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND THE ENGINEER ' `''' "' OF RECORD SHALL BE SUBMITTED. A SOILS REPORT PROVIDES THE BUILDING DESIGN ENGINEER WITH SITE PREPARATION AND FOUNDATION DESIGN 1- THESE GENERAL NOTES SUPPLEMENT THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. RECOMMENDATIONS. IF THE BUILDING OWNER OR TENNANT AUTHORIZING THE REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. CURRENT CONSTRUCTION DOES NOT PROVIDE A SOILS REPORT TO THE 2. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO BE USED WITH ARCHITECTURAL, ENGINEER OF RECORD, THE OWNER OR TENNANT AUTHORIZING THE CURRENT PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, CIVIL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR CONSTRUCTION BY PROCEEDING WITH CONSTRUCTION, IS PROCEEDING AT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING SUCH REQUIREMENTS INTO THEIR SHOP THEIR OWN RISK AND THIS ENGINEER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE DRAWINGS AND WORK. POSSIBLE MOVEMENT°OF THE SOILS SUPPORTING THE BUILDING FOUNDATION. 3. NO OPENING SHALL BE MADE IN ANY STRUCTURAL MEMBER WITHOUT THE 4• FOUNDATIONS SUPPORTING WOOD SHALL EXTEND AT LEAST 8" ABOVE THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. ADJACENT FINISH GRADE. 4. NO CHANGE IN SIZE OR DIMENSION OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SHALL BE 5. VAPOR BARRIER SHOULD CONFORM WITH ASTM ® 775-85 STANDARD MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. PRACTICE FOR SELECTION OF VAPOR RETARDER FOR THERMAL INSULATION. 5 OPENINGS 1'-4" AND LESS ON A SIDE ARE GENERALLY NOT SHOWN 6. SITE PREPARATION SHOULD BE DONE ACCORDING TO THE SITE SOILS ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL AND REPORT. GENERAL SITE CLEARING SHOULD INCLUDE REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR SUCH OPENINGS. VEGETATION; EXISTING UTILITIES; STRUCTURES INCLUDING FOUNDATION; BASEMENT WALLS AND FLOORS; EXISTING STOCKPILE SOIL; TREES AND 6. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR LIMITING THE AMOUNT OF ASSOCLATED ROOT SYSTEMS; RUBBLE; RUBBISH; AND ANY LOOSE AND / OR CONSTRUCTION LOAD IMPOSED UPON STRUCTURAL FRAMING. SATURATED MATERIAL. SITE STRIPPING SHOULD EXTEND TO A MINIMUM DEPTH CONSTRUCTION LOADS SHALL NOT EXCEED THE DESIGN CAPACITY OF OF 2 TO 4 INCHES, OR UNTIL ALL ORGANICS IN EXCESS OF 3 PERCENT BY THE FRAMING AT THE TIME THE LOADS ARE IMPOSED. VOLUME ARE REMOVED. DEEPER STRIPPING MAY BE REQUIRED IN LOCALIZED 7. AREAS. THESE MATERIALS WILL NOT BE SUITABLE FOR USE AS ENGINEERED THE STRUCTURE IS DESIGNED TO FUNCTION AS A UNIT UPON COMPLETION. FILL. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING ALL TEMPORARY BRACING AND / OR SUPPORT THAT MAY BE REQUIRED AS THE RESULT OF 7• DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN SITE GRADES WHICH WILL RAPIDLY DRAIN SURFACE THE CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION METHODS AND / OR SEQUENCE. AND ROOF RUNOFF AWAY FROM FOUNDATIONS AND FLOOR SLABS -BOTH DURING AND AFTER CONSTRUCTION. ADJACENT OF AT LEAST 5' AWAY FROM 8. DO NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS, USE DIMENSIONS. STRUCTURES TO PRECLUDE POUNDING OF WATER ADJACENT TO FOUNDATIONS. 9• CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION AND / OR ERECTION SEQUENCES 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SHORING NECESSARY TO SHALL RECOGNIZE AND CONSIDER THE EFFECTS OF THERMAL SUPPORT CUT AND / OR FILL BANKS DURING EXCAVATION, AND FOR & MOISTURE CHANGES THAT WILL RESULT IN MOVEMENTS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. FORMING AND PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND CONCRETE SUB- CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM THE ENGINEER OF RECORD IN WRITING WITH THE SOILS REPORT.°• OF ANY DEVIATION FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BE RELIEVED OF THE RESPONSIBILITY OF SUCH DEVIATION 9. VERIFY BUILDING ORIENTATION & PLACEMENT ON THE SITE WITH THE BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD, REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT APPROVED PROJECT SITE PLAN. THE PROJECT SITE PLAN SUPERSEDES NORTH DATA, ETC., UNLESS THE CONTRACTOR HAS SPECIFICALLY INFORMED THE ARROW SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL PLANS. ENGINEER OF RECORD OF SUCH DEVIATION AT THE TIME OF 10. A LETTER FROM SOIL ENGINEER SHALL BE PROVIDED CONFIRMING THAT THE SUBMISSION, AND THE ENGINEER OF RECORD HAS GIVEN WRITTEN FOUNDATIONS PLAN, GRADING PLAN, AND SPECIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN APPROVAL TO THE SPECIFIC DEVIATION. REVIEWED AND THAT IT HAS BEEN DETERMINED THAT THE RECOMMENDATIONS 11. THE CONTRACTOR MUST ENSURE THAT MANUFACTURED (ENGINEERED IN THE SOILS REPORT ARE PROPERLY INCORPORATION INTO THE PLANS. BY OTHERS) ROOF & FLOOR FRAMING IS DESIGNED TO RESIST UPLIFT 11. CONTINUOUS AND PAD FOOTINGS SHOULD HAVE A MINIMUM EMBEDMENT LOADS DURING &AFTER CONSTRUCTION. DEPTH AS SPECIFIED IN THE FOOTING SCHEDULE ("T") OR NOTED IN THE EXISTING CONSTRICTION NOTES: PLANS BELOW ROUGH PAD GRADE OR ADJACENT EXTERIOR GRADE, WHICHEVER IS LOWER. THE ENGINEER MUST BE NOTIFIED IF THERE IS A DISCREPANCY 12. WORK SHOWN IS NEW UNLESS INDICATED AS EXISTING. BETWEEN THE SOILS REPORT°• REQUIREMENTS AND THE STRUCTURAL PLANS. 13. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING JOB CONDITIONS, 12. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE CIVIL & REVIEW ALL DRAWINGS AND VERIFY DIMENSIONS, ELEVATION, AND MEMBER ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, WITH RESPECT TO GRADE, WITH THE FOUNDATION SIZES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR MATERIAL PURCHASE. THE CONTRACTOR PLAN. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED T0, COORDINATING ALL REQUIRED SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD IN WRITING OF ALL STEP FOOTING LOCATIONS BASED ON THE GUIDE LINES IN THE STEPPED DISCREPANCIES AND EXCEPTIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL BETWEEN THE REQUIRED FINAL GRADING / CIVIL 14. THE REMOVAL, CUTTING DRILLING, ETC. OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION SHALL PLANS & ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND FOOTING/ FOUNDATION LAYOUT. ANY BE PERFORMED WITH GREAT CARE IN ORDER NOT TO JEOPARDIZE THE DISCREPANCIES MUST BE BROUGHT TO THE ENGINEERS ATTENTION BEFORE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURAL SYSTEM. IF ANY CONSTRUCTION BEGINS. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OR MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, OR ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES NOT INDICATED FOR REMOVAL INTERFERE WITH THE NEW WORK, 13. THE EXTERIOR FLATWORK SHOULD BE POURED SEPARATELY IN ORDER TO ACT THE ENGINEER OF RECORD SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY NOTIFIED AND PRIOR INDEPENDENTLY OF THE WALLS AND FOUNDATION SYSTEM. WRITTEN APPROVAL SHALL BE OBTAINED BEFORE REMOVAL OR MODIFICATION SEE CIVIL / ARCH. PLANS FOR EXTERIOR FLATWORK INFO. OF MEMBERS. 14. THE GEOTECHINICAL ENGINEER SHALL SUBMIT A WRITTEN STATEMENT WITH A 15. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY REPAIR DAMAGE TO EXISTING FRAMING COPY DIRECTLY TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AT THE COMPLETION OF THE CAUSED DURING CONSTRUCTION WITH SIMILAR MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP. PART OF THE PROJECT SUMMARIZING THE TEST RESULTS / ITEMS CONTACT THE ENGINEER OF RECORD TO VERIFY THE PROPOSED REPAIR MONITORED WITH THE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS. SOLUTION. DEMOLITION SHORING NOTES: NOTE: 16. THE CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE MEANS AND METHODS °• IF NO SOILS REPORT HAS BEEN PROVIDED BY THE OWNER OR TENNANT OF ALL DEMOLITION WORK AND FOR PROVIDING ALL NECESSARY TEMPORARY AUTHORIZING THE CURRENT CONSTRUCTION AS INDICATED BY NOTE 1, SHORING, BRACING AND PROTECTION AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY, STABILITY THE OWNER OR TENNANT AUTHORIZING THE CURRENT CONSTRUCTION BY AND PROTECTION OF ALL EXISTING ELEMENTS AND STRUCTURE TO REMAIN. PROCEEDING WITH CONSTRUCTION, IS PROCEEDING AT THEIR OWN RISK TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING SHALL BE ADEQUATE TO RESIST ALL AND THIS ENGINEER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE POSSIBLE APPLIED LOADS INCLUDING DEAD LOAD, LIVE LOADS, SNOW LOADS AND MOVEMENT OF THE SOILS SUPPORTING THE BUILDING FOUNDATION. IF NO CONSTRUCTION LOADS, TO PROVIDE STABILITY, AND TO PROVIDE FOR SOILS REPORT HAS BEEN PROVIDED IGNORE THE SOILS REPORT RESISTANCE TO WIND AND SEISMIC FORCES UNTIL ANY REQUIRED REFERENCE IN NOTES 3,6,8,10 & 11. MODIFICATIONS TO THE STRUCTURE ARE COMPLETED. b• THE BUILDING CODE REQUIRES THAT A SOILS REPORT BE PROVIDED FOR ALL PROJECTS IN SEISMIC DESIGN CATAGORIES C-F. BY PROCEEDING 10 MISCELLANEOUS WITH CONSTRUCTION THE OWNER OR TENANT AUTHORIZING THE CURRENT CONSTRUCTION MUST OBTAIN WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM THE GOVERNING � N R BUILDING DEPARTMENT TO PROCEED W/ CONSTRUCTION W/O A SOILS REPORT & TO USE THE BUILDING CODE TABLE 1804.2 FOR SOIL DESIGN VALUES. VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION TASK CONTINUOUS DURING TASK LISTED PERIODICALLY DURING TASK LISTED 1. OBSERVE DRILLING OPERATIONS AND MAINTAIN COMPLETE AND ACCURATE RECORDS FOR EACH X PIER. 2. VERIFY PLACEMENT LOCATIONS AND PLUMBNESS, CONFIRM PIER DIAMETERS, BELL DIAMETER (IF APPLICABLE), LENGTHS, X EMBEDMENT INTO BEDROCK (IF APPLICABLE) AND ADEQUATE END BEARING STRATA CAPACITY. B) STEEL CONSTRUCTION PER IBC 1705.2 VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD 1. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF HIGH -STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: a) INDENTIFICATION MARKINGS APPLICABLE ASTM TO CONFORM TO ASTM MATERIAL STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN X SPECIFICATIONS; THE APPROVED AISC 360, SECTION CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. A3.3 b) MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF X COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. 2. INSPECTION OF HIGH -STRENGTH BOLTING: a) BEARING - TYPE AISC 360, SECTION CONNECTIONS. X M2.5 b) SLIP - CRITICAL X X AISC 360, SECTION CONNECTIONS. M2.5 3. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL: a) INDENTIFICATION MARKING TO CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARD SPECIFIED IN ASTM A6 OR ASTM THE APPROVED A 568 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. b) MANUFACTURES CERTIFIED ASTM A6 OR ASTM MILL TEST REPORTS A 568 4. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF WELD FILLER MATERIALS: a) INDENTIFICATION MARKING TO CONFORM TO AWS SPECICIFCATION IN THE AISC 360, SECTION APPROVED COINSTRUCTION 5 DOCUMENTS. b) MANUFACTURES CERTIFIED OF COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. 5.INSPEC11ON OF WELD: a) STRUCTURAL STEEL: 1) COMPLETE AND PARTIAL PENETRATION GROOVE X AWS D7.1 WELDS. 2) MULTIPASS FILLET WELDS, X AWS D1.1 3) SINGLE PASS FILLET )( AWS D1.1 WELDS > 5/16" 4) SINGLE PASS FILLET X AWS D1.1 WELDS < 5/16" 5) FLOOR AND ROOF DECK X AWS D1.3 WELDS b) REINFORCING STEEL: 1) VERIFICATION OF AWS D1.4 D1.4 WELDABILITY OF X ACI 5.2 REINFORCING STEEL OTHER THAN ASTM A 706. 2) REINFORCING STEEL -RESISTING FLEXURAL AND AXIAL FORCES IN INTERMEDIATE AND SPECIAL MOMENT X AWS D1.4 FRAMES, AND BOUNDARY ACI 318:3.5.2 ELEMENTS OF SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS AND SHEAR REINFORCEMENT. 3) SHEAR REINFORCEMENT )( AWS ACI 318:18: 3.5.2 4) OTHER REINFORCEMENT )( AWS D1.4 ACI 318:3.5.2 6. INSPECTION OF STEEL FRAME JOINT DETAILS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: a) DETAILS SUCH AS BRACING AND STIFFENING. b) MEMBER LOCATIONS. c) APPLICATION OF JOINT DETAILS AT EACH CONNECTION. El E3 El M YES N/A 1:1 Is YES NO N/A ❑ ❑ jltEM■■ 11111110111111*11111 ■ ■ ■ YES NO N/A ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ IM El 7 FOUNDATION NOTES �����'°-_� `t "C 5 SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES C) CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION PER IBC 1705.3 1. DETAILS AND DIMENSIONS OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE VERIFIED AT THE SITE BY THE (NOT APPLICABLE TO ISOLATED SPREAD FOOTINGS YES N/A CONTRACTOR AND ANY DISCREPANCY BETWEEN THE PLANS AND THE INTENT OF THE STANDARD NOTES AND DETAILS OR NON-STRUCTURAL SLABS ON GROUND) ............................. 13 ❑ PROJECT SHALL BE PROMPTLY REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION OR S1.1 • • • • • • • • • STANDARD NOTES AND DETAILS FABRICATION BEGINS. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. S1 2 STANDARD NOTES AND DETAILS VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD 1.INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL, INCLUDING X ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-7.7 PRESTRESSING TENDONS, AND PLACEMENT. 2.INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL WELDING IN AWS D1.4 ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE ACI 318: 3.5.2 1704.3. ITEM 5b 3. INSPECTION BOLTS TO BE INSTALLED IN CONCRETE PRIOR TO AND DURING X PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE WHERE ALLOWABLE LOADS HAVE BEEN INCREASED. 4. VERIFY USE OF REQUIRED X ACI 318: DESIGN MIX. CH. 4,5.2-5.4 5. AT THE TIME FRESH CONCRETE IS SAMPLED TO FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR ASTM C 172 STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM )( ASTM C 31 SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT ACI 318: 5.6,5.8 TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CONCRETE. 6.INSPECTION OF CONCRETE AND SHOTCRETE PLACEMENT FOR PROPER APPLICATION X ACI 318: 5.9,5.10 TECHNIQUES. 7. INSPECTION FOR MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED X IACI 318: 5.11,5.13 CURING TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES. 8. INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE: a) APPLICATION OF X PRESTRESSED FORCES. ACI 318: 18.20 b GROUTING OF BONDED )PRESTRESSED X ACI 318: 18.18.4 TENDONS IN THE SEISMIC -FORCE -RESISTING SYSTEM 9. ERECTION OF PRECAST X ACI 318: CH. 16 CONCRETE MEMBERS 10. VERIFICATION ON IN -SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH PRIOR TO STRESSING OF TENDONS IN POSTTENSIONED CONCRETE X ACI 318: 6.2 AND PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND STRUCTURAL SLABS. 11.INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS OF THE X ACI 318: 6.1.1 CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED. 2. ALL IDEAS, DESIGNS, ARRANGEMENTS AND PLANS INDICATED OR REPRESENTED BY THIS S1.3 • • • • • • • • • STANDARD NOTES AND DETAILS DRAWING ARE OWNED BY AND THE PROPERTY OF BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. (BYA), AND WERE CREATED, EVOLVED AND DEVELOPED FOR USE ON AND IN CONNECTION WITH PLANSTHE SPECIFIED PROJECT ONLY. NONE OF SUCH IDEAS, DESIGNS, ARRANGEMENTS OR PLANS ❑ MSHALL BE USED BY OR DISCLOSED TO ANY PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION FOR ANY S2.1 • . • • • • • • • CEILING PLAN PURPOSE WHATSOEVER WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF BYA, FILING THESE S2.2 . • • .. • • • • ROOF FRAMING PLAN DRAWINGS H AGENCY PUBLICATION REUSE, REPRODUCTION OR PUBLICATIONBY ANY METHOD INWHOLE OR NE PROHIBITED. FRAMING DETAILS ❑ E3 TITLE TO THESE PLANS REMAINS WITH THE BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. AND VISUAL S3.1.... • • • • • FRAMING DETAILS CONTACT WITH THEM CONSTITUTES PRIMA FACIE EVIDENCE OF THE ACCEPTANCE OF THESE RESTRICTIONS. 3. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL, COUNTY, STATE, OR ElFEDERAL AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION. BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION OR PROPER EXECUTION OF THE WORK SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS. SAFETY METHODS AND TECHNIQUES ARE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. ANY DEVIATIONS OR UNAUTHORIZED CHANGES TO ElTHESE DRAWINGS ARE NOT THE RESPONSIBILITY OF BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. DEVIATIONS FROM THE ORIGINAL DRAWINGS MUST BE APPROVED IN WRITING PRIOR TO , CONSTRUCTION. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY OTO N NOTIFY THE ENGINEER STRUCT/ /��� ®� ' �� OF THE PROGRESS OF THE PROJECT TO FACILITATE OUR ON -SITE VISITS TO ANSWER (J A ❑ QUESTIONS AND VIEW THE PROGRESS AND QUALITY OF WORK IF REQUIRED. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY OUR OFFICE 48 HOURS PRIOR TO THE FOLLOWING PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION * ONLY IF THESE PLANS OR ANY OTHER AUTHORITY A.B. ANCHOR BOLT E.N. EDGE NAILING SPECIFICALLY REQUIRES THE ENGINEER OF RECORD TO MAKE A JOB INSPECTION. ADJ. ADJUSTABLE ELEV. ELEVATION a) FOUNDATION POURS * ABV. ABOVE ENGR. ENGINEER b) AFTER THE ERECTION OF THE SUPERSTRUCTURE AND PRIOR A.C.I. AMERICAN EQ. EQUAL ❑ E3 TO CLOSING -IN OF ANY PHASE. * CONCRETE EQUIP. EQUIPMENT INSTITUTE ES EDGE SCREW OR 5.THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE VERIFICATION OF A.I.S.C. AMERICAN EACH SIDE ALL DIMENSIONS, GRADES, AND OTHER CONDITIONS, AND SHALL CORRELATE AT INSTITUTE EXIST (E) EXISTING E]DISCREPANCIES THE JOB SITE ALL SUCH ITEMS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ANY STEEL CONSS TR. EXPANSION TO THE ENGINEER FOR CLARIFICATION AND CORRECTION PRIOR TO FIN.EXP FIN. FINISH BEGINNING ANY WORK. A.S.T.M. AMERICAN SOCIETY F.N. FIELD NAILING 6. ALL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SHOWN ON THE PLANS ARE DESIGNED AS IN THEIR FINAL FOR TESTING & MATERIALS FM FACE MOUNT LOCATION. BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. HAS NOT PERFORMED CONSTRUCTION FLR. FLOOR ENGINEERING (SHORING CALCULATIONS) OR ENGINEERING NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY APA AMERICAN PLYWOOD FTF FLOOR TO FLOOR ❑ M STRUCTURAL MEMBERS IN THEIR FINAL LOCATION (ERECTION CALCULATIONS). ASSOCIATION FTG. FOOTING ARCH. ARCHITECTURAL) FDN. FOUNDATION 7. DETAILS AND NOTES ON TYPICAL SHEETS SHALL APPLY UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN AWS AMERICAN WELDING FRMG. FRAMING OTHERWISE. DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION NOT FULLY SHOWN SHALL BE OF THE SAME SOCIETY GA GAUGE NATURE AS SHOWN FOR SIMILAR CONDITIONS. TYPICAL DETAILS ARE AT NO SCALE. BD. BOARD GALV. GALVANIZED ❑ 11111 8. DO NOT SCALE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. IF DIMENSIONS OR DETAIL ARE NOT CLEAR, OR BLK. BLOCK GF GOOD FOR DISCREPANCIES EXIST ON THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS, CONTACT THE ENGINEER. BLKG. BLOCKING G.L.B. GLUE LAM BEAM 9. SEE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND/OR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION AND BOT. BLDG. BOTTOM BUILDING GIRD. H.D. GRADE HOLDOWN SIZE OF PIPES, CONDUITS, FLOOR DRAINS, VENTS, DUCTS, DRAIN LEADERS AND BM. BEAM HGR. HANGER El 13 OTHER SIMILAR OPENINGS NOT INDICATED ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. B.N. BOUNDARY NAILING HDR. HEADER 10.SEE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND/OR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EMBEDMENT OF C CHANNEL HT. HEIGHT BOLTS, ANCHORS AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS EMBEDDED ITEMS NOT SHOWN ON CLG. CEILING HORIZ. HORIZONTAL STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CLR. CLEAR HSB. HIGH I T STRENGTH COL. COLUMN 11.SEE PLUMBING & ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR REQUIRED SLAB WORK FOR FLOOR DRAINS C.M.U. CONCRETE MASONRY IN. INCH 12.THE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL ACCEPTED LOCAL UNIT I.D. INSIDE DIAMETER El GOVERNING CODES OF THE PARTICULAR AREA UNDER CONSTRUCTION. C.J. CONSTRUCTION INT. INTERIOR JOINT JST. JOIST 13 THE DUTY OF THE ENGINEER TO CONDUCT CONSTRUCTION REVIEW OF THE CONTRACTOR'S CONC CONCRETE K or KIPS 1000 lb . s YES N/A PERFORMANCE, IF REQUIRED, IS NOT INTENDED TO INCLUDE REVIEW OF THE ADEQUACY CONN. CONNECTION LAM. LAMINATED D) MASONRY CONSTRUCTION PER IBC 1705.4................................ M ❑ OF THE CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY MEASURES IN, ON, OR NEAR THE CONSTRUCTION SITE. CONSTR. CONSTRUCTION LB or L.BS. POUNDS LEVEL 1 FREQUENCY OF REFERENCE FOR INSPECTION CRITERIA INSPECTION TASK CONTINUOUS DURING TASK LISTED PERIODICALLY DURING TASK USEED ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 4020 ACI 530.1/ACSE 6/TMS 602° 1. AS MASONRY CONSTRUCTION BEGINS, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE VERIFIED TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE: a) PROPORTIONS OF SITE -PREPARED X ART 2.6A MORTAR b) CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS X ART 3.3B c) LOCATION OF REINFORCEMENT, CONNECTORS, PRESTRESSING X ART 3.4 ART 3.6A TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES d) PRESTRESSING TECHNIQUE )( ART 3.68 e) GRADE AND SIZE OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND X ART 2.4B ART 2.4H ANCHORAGES 2. THE INSPECTION PROGRAM SHALL VERIFY: a) SIZE AND LOCATION OF STRUCTURAL X ART 3.3G ELEMENTS b) TYPE, SIZE AND LOCATION OF ANCHORS, INCLUDING OTHER DETAILS OF ANCHORAGE OF X SEC 1.2.2(e) MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, FRAMES OR OTHER CONTTRUCTION c) SPECIFIED SIZE, GRADE AND TYPE OF REINFORCEMENT X SEC 1.13 ART 2.4 ART 3.4 d) WELDING OF REINFORCING BARS X EC 2.1.10.7.2 EC 3.3.3.4(b) ART 2.4 ART 3.4 e) PROTECTION OF MASONRY DURING COLD WEATHER (TEMPERATURE BELOW 40•F) OR HOT X ART 1.8C ART 1.8D WEATHER (TEMPERATURE ABOVE 9(rF) f) APPLICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF X ART 3.68 PRESTRESSING FORCE 3. PRIOR TO GROUTING, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE VERIFIED TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE: a) GROUT SPACE IS CLEAN )( ART 3.21) b) PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT AND CONNECTORS AND PRESTRESSING X SEC 1.13 ART 3.4 TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES c) PROPORTIONS OF SITE -PREPARED GROUT AND PRESTRESSING GROUT )( ART 2.6B FOR BONDED TENDONS d) CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS x ART 3.38 4. GROUT PLACEMENT SHALL BE VERIFIED TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH CODE X ART 3.5 AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT PROVISIONS a) GROUTING OF PRESTRESSING X ART 3.6C BONDED TENDONS 5. PREPARATION OF ANY REQUIRED GROUT SPECIMENS, MORTAR X ART 1.4 SPECIMENS AND/OR PRISMS SHALL BE OBSERVED 6. COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIRED INSPECTION PROVISIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION X ART 1.5 DOCUMENTS AND THE APPROVED SUBMITTALS SHALL BE VERIFIED 14.ANY SUPPORT SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE ENGINEER FIELD REPRESENTATIVES DURING CONT. CONTINUOUS LT. WT. LIGHT WEIGHT CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE DISTINGUISHED FROM CONTINUOUS AND DETAILED INSPECTION DA DOUBLE ANGLE LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL SERVICES WHICH ARE FURNISHED BY OTHERS. THESE SUPPORT SERVICES PERFORMED DEMO. DEMOLISH M.B. MACHINE BOLT BY THE ENGINEER WHETHER PERFORMED PRIOR TO, DURING, OR AFTER COMPLETION OF DET. DETAIL MAS. MASONRY CONSTRUCTION ARE PERFORMED SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSE OF ASSISTING IN QUALITY DIAG. DIAGONAL MAX. MAXIMUM CONTROL AND IN ACHIEVING CONFORMANCE WITH CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICA- DIA. (0) DIAMETER MTL. METAL TIONS, BUT THEY DO NOT GUARANTEE CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE AND SHALL NOT DIM. DIMENSION MIN. MINIMUM BE CONSTRUED AS SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION. DBL. DOUBLE N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE DWG. DRAWING NO. or # NUMBER 15.ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST APPLICABLE CONSTRUCTION SAFETY REQUIRE- EA. EACH MENTS OF 0 S H A AND ANY OTHER GOVERNMENT L ENTITY HAVING JURISDICTION O.C. ON CENTER A EF EACH FACE 16. THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE CONSIDERED SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETE. HOWEVER, IT IS THE � ABBREVIATIONS - EITHER RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS E] NECESSARY TO RENDER THE WORK COMPLETE, AS IS THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS, SHOWN OR INFERRED HEREIN, THROUGH PROPER ESTABLISHED CONSTRUCTION ❑ 13 PRACTICES 0 U 2 N U a° a)N _ v o a Cc) a�<0 OPNG. OPENING v = O a OPP. OPPOSITE c Z � H O.D. OUTSIDE DIA. CI o ° cy PL. PLATE N " Q- PENNY(d) NAILS PLYWD. PLYWOOD P.S.F. POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT P.S.I. POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PRESS. PRESSURE R. RADIUS REINF. REINFORCING READ. REQUIRED RM. ROOM SCHED. SCHEDULE SHTG. SHEATHING SHT. SHEET SIM. SIMILAR >� SLV SHORT LEG VERTICAL SPEC. SPECIFICATION pq STGR. STAGGER STD. STANDARD GC STL. STEEL STIFF. STIFFENER 9 J -6 00 STRUCT. STRUCTURAL r M SQ. SQUARE .- SYM. SYMMETRICAL W CO 00 O� N TF TOP FLANGE i � 0) 04 THK. THICK W (D Q cC TS TUBE STEEL (- W U.B.C. UNIFORM BUILDING CODE Q Z Cz W a U.N.O. UNLESS NOTED LL.I , cz LL. O OTHERWISE V = 0 U ~O VERT. VERTICAL no, WIDTH CO seWT. WEIGHT ~ 0) =3 B' W.W.F. WELDED WIRE04 =) Co (- FABRIC O W.W.M. WELDED WIRE F4 (n MESH W.F. WIDE FLANGE 19921, W/ WITH WS WOOD SCREW Anftk 17. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE WORK AND THE -STEEL - -NATIVE SOIL COORDINATION OF ALL TRADES AND GOVERNING AGENCIES, AND SHALL PROVIDE ❑ El ALL MATERIAL AND LABOR SHOWN OR INFERRED ON THESE PLANS. -MASONRY 18. ALL MATERIAL AND WORK PERFORMED SHALL CONFORM WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE BUILDING CODE OR OTHER GOVERNING CODES AND BUILDING ORDINANCES. -ENGINEERED FILL ?; ❑ ALL REFERENCE TO THE BUILDING CODE SHALL BE THE LATEST ADOPTED EDITION. -AGGREGATE -GROUT 19. THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REPRESENT THE FINISHED STRUCTURE AND ❑ DO NOT INDICATE THE METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK AND SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION MEANS -WOOD BLOCK ° -CONCRETE METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES, AND PROCEDURES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED a TO BRACING AND SHORING. OBSERVATION VISITS TO THE SITE BY FIELD REPRESENTATIVES OF THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER SHALL NOT INCLUDE INSPECTIONS OF THE PROTECTIVE -CONTINUOUS WOOD MEMBER ❑ 13 MEASURES OR THE CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES. ANY SUPPORT SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER DURING THE CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE DISTINGUISHED FROM CONTINUOUS AND DETAILED INSPECTION SERVICES WHICH ARE FURNISHED BY OTHERS. THESE SUPPORT SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER, DETAIL WHETHER OF MATERIAL OR WORK, AND FOR THE PURPOSE OF ASSISTING IN QUALITY ❑ CONTROL AND IN ACHIEVING CONFORMANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, DO NOT BDETAIL GUARANTEE CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE AND SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION. SHEET DRAWN ON 20. WHERE A SECTION OR TYPICAL DETAIL IS SHOWN FOR ONE CONDITION, IT SHALL APPLY FOR ALL LIKE OR SIMILAR CONDITIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. X DETAIL CUT ❑ 21.IT SHALL BE THE GENERAL CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SUPERVISION OF X REFERENCE THE WORK OR POSSIBLE OMISSIONS SHOWN OR INFERRED ON THESE PLANS. El Is 22. CONNECTIONS OF ALL ITEMS SUPPORTED BY THE STRUCTURAL ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY X SECTION CUT OF THE DISCIPLINES WHO ARE MAKING THESE ATTACHMENTS. THESE ATTACHMENTS X -- -- REFERENCE SHALL BE DESIGNED TO RESIST ALL GRAVITY, WIND, SEISMIC, THERMAL LOADS, ETC SPRINKLER PIPING SHALL BE SUPPORTED AND BRACED PER NFPA-13 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS OF ACOUSTICAL TILE OR LAY -IN PANELS SHALL BE SUPPORTED XX FOOTING & COLUMN ❑ AND BRACED PER CBC 1615.10.13 XX SCHEDULE ITEM 23. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY OF ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND WITHIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. SHEARWALL 24.CONCRETE SLAB -ON -GRADE HAS NOT BEEN DESIGNED FOR CONSTRUCTION LOADS OR A SCHEDULE ITEM SPECIFIC OCCUPANT SERVICE LOADS BY THIS ENGINEER. ❑ 13 25.VIBRATIONAL EFFECTS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HAVE NOT BEEN CONSIDERED BY THIS +HEIGHT ELEVATION ENGINEER. T•O• SECTIONS & PLANS 26.NOTES AND DETAILS ON DRAWINGS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THESE GENERAL NOTES 27. CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL SHALL COMPLY WITH AND BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE ❑ WITH ALL THE REQUIREMENTS OF ALL LEGALLY CONSTITUTED PUBLIC AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL COUNTY AND LOCAL ORDINANCES, AND THE SAFETY -.----(: ) - INDICATES NEW BUILDING ORDERS OF THE STATE INDUSTRIAL ACCIDENT COMMISSION, OSHA. GRID LINE. ❑ 28.ANY REFERENCE TO THE WORDS APPROVED, OR APPROVAL IN THESE DOCUMENTS SHALL BE HERE DEFINED TO MEAN GENERAL ACCEPTANCE OR REVIEW AND SHALL NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR AND / OR HIS SUBCONTRACTORS OF ANY LIABILITY IN FURNISHING INDICATES EXISTING BUILDING THE REQUIRED MATERIALS OR LABOR SPECIFIED. ---(X) - GRID LINE. 29. CONSTRUCT THOSE FEATURES OF THE PROJECT, WHICH MAY NOT BE FULLY SHOWN, IN ❑ M A MANNER SIMILAR TO THAT USED FOR SIMILAR FEATURES. ^ SYMBOLS 30. SEE ALSO SPECIFICATIONS. WHERE AVAILABLE. 31.THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SUPERVISION OF THE WORK OR 11 ❑ THE PROPER EXECUTION OF SAME. 32. CONTRACTOR IS TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO BEGINNING OF CONSTRUCTION. ANY DISCREPANCIES MUST BE REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH Is ❑ WORK. COORDINATE STRUCTURAL DIMENSIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLANS, ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS, DETAILS ETC. 33.THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED TO CARRY THE SUPERIMPOSED LIVE ❑ 13 LOADS AS PRESCRIBED BY THE BUILDING CODE AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARD ENGINEERING PRACTICES, WITH NO SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR CARRYING CONCENTRATED LOADS FROM STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS OR FROM OPERATION OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL SCAFFOLDING, ❑ M BRACING, AND SHORING SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION, STABILITY, AND SAFETY OF NEW WORK AND PROVIDE PROTECTION AS REQUIRED FOR THE SAFETY OF PEDESTRIANS AND JOB SITE PERSONNEL AT ALL TIMES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY AND COMPLETELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONDITIONS OF THE JOB SITE INCLUDING SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS FROM ADVERSE CONDITIONS AND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROJECT NEW DAMAGE. ❑ 34.IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR, ARCHITECT, MECHANICAL ENGINEER, AND OTHERS DESIGNERS OF THE BUILDINGS HEATING. COOLING, & VETATATION SYSTEM TO ENSURE THAT THE STRUCTURE DETAILS IN THESE PLANS WILL NOT BE EXPOSED TO HARMFUL (TO THE STRUCTURE AND / OR ITS OCCUPANTS) ACCUMULATION OF MOISTURE YES NO N/A & OTHER HARMFUL SUBSTANCES THAT COULD LEAD TO HARMFUL / DESTRUCTIVE MOLD, E) WOOD CONSTRUCTION PER IBC 1705.10.1..................................... ❑ E3 ❑ MILDEW, CORROSION, ETC. BUILD UP ON STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. a) HIGH -LOAD DIAPHRAGM: INSPECT WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL SHEATHING TO 35.THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE CONSIDERED SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETE. HOWEVER, IT IS THE ASCERTAIN WHETHER IT IS THE GRADE AND THICKNESS SHOWN ON THE APPROVED RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS BUILDING PLANS AND VERIFY THE NOMINAL SIZE OF FRAMING MEMBERS AT NECESSARY TO RENDER THE WORK COMPLETE, AS IS THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS, ADJOINTING PANEL EDGES, THE NAIL OR STAPLE DIAMETER AND LENGTH, THE EITHER SHOWN OR INFER HERIN, THROUGH PROPER AND ESTABLISHED CONSTRUCTION NUMBER OF FASTENER LINES AND THAT THE SPACING BETWEEN FASTENERS IN PRACTICES. EACH LINE AND AT EDGE MARGINS AGREES WITH THE APPROVED BUILDING PLANS. 36.IN THESE PLANS THERE IS NO DISTINCTION BETWEEN POSTS & COLUMNS BASED ON OSHA DEFINITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING THE F) EXPANSION /ADHESIVE ANCHORS IN CONCRETE OR MASONRY ............... ❑ [:1 OSHA OF EACH "VERTICAL" MEMBER AND FOLLOWING THE REQUIRED OSHA (IF THEY ARE REQUIRED BY THESE PLANS OR REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION) ERECTION GUIDELINES. SEE NOTE 13 ON ADDITIONAL SAFETY NOTES FOR MORE INFO. 5. APPROVED FABRICATORS: (MUST SUBMIT CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE TO 37.DRAWINGS OF SPECIFIC DETAILS ON THE DRAWINGS INDICATE THE INTENT OF THE THE BUILDING OFFICAL PER IBC 1704.2.5.2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND IN MOST CASES, ARE TYPICAL CONDITIONS OR VERY FOR ALL OFFSITE FABRICATION SUCH AS STRUCTURAL STEEL, SIMILAR TO OTHER DETAILS. TYPICAL CONDITIONS NOT NECESSARILY NOTED AS GLU-LAMS, PRECAST CONCRETE, ETC ......................................... ❑ IN ❑ TYPICAL SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS TYPICAL FOR OTHER CONDITIONS. 6. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REQUIRED ........................................ ❑ ❑ M 38•DUTY OF COOPERATION: ISSUANCE OF THESE STRUCTURAL DOCUMENTS (DRAWING WHEN REQUIRED BY THIS ENGINEER OR THE BUILDING OFFICAL, THE OWNER AND SPECIFICATIONS) CONTEMPLATES FURTHER COOPERATION AMONG ALL PARTIES SHALL EMPLOY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD (EOR) BRAD YOUNG AND ASSOCIATES, INVOLVED. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ARE COMPLEX, AND ALTHOUGH THE DESIGN w4now I? INC. TO PERFORM STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION AS DEFINED IN IBC 1704.5, AND SERVICES HAVE BEEN PERFORMED WITH DUE CARE AND DILIGENCE, PERFECTION I SN 0=1. AT THE INSTANCES LISTED BELOW (a). PLEASE PROVIDE 2 WEEKS NOTICE IN CANNOT BE GUARANTEED. COMMUNICATION IS NECESSARY AND ANY STRUCTURAL WRITING PRIOR TO NEEDING ALL INSPECTIONS. DISCREPANCY SHALL BE REPORTED IMMEDIATELY TO THE ENGINEER WHOSE b 6 INTERPRETATION SHALL BE FINAL DISCREPANCIES NOT BROUGHT TO THE ENGINEER'S ATTENTION DURING THE BIDDING OF THE PROJECT WILL BE DEEMED TO HAVE BEEN BID IN THE MORE COSTLY MANNER. 1 4 GENERAL NOTES .:'v 0"I NO REVISION REVIEV\.'ED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE JAIN 0 4 2016 City of Tukthjila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF Tui:WILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER 0 W 06 5 Lu n rr O H 0 W ��Z) JJ VJ UD T NC) 00 O CD I DRAWN BY: I CHECKED BY: KS TT PROJECT NUMBER BYA# 15 2 5 6 BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. DA STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 POLLASKY DI M CLOVES, CALIFORNIA 93612 PHONE: (559) 323-9600 FAX: (559) 323-9633 EXPIRES 11-7-2015 DATE OF THIS PRINTING - 1. ALL CONCRETE MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL CONFORM AT ACI 318-11 AND TO ALL REQUIREMENTS OF ACI 301-10, SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS, EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY 'THE SUPPLEMENT REQUIREMENTS BELOW. 2. SEE CONCRETE NOTES ON SHEET S1.2 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3. IF MOISTURE BARRIER IS REQUIRED BY SOILS ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT, PROVIDE 2" MINIMUM COMPACTABLE GRANULAR FILL OVER BARRIER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN SOIL REPORT. 4. MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: a) THE CONCRETE SUPPLIER MUST BEAR THE TOTAL RESPONSIBILITY THAT THE MIX DESIGNS WILL ATTAIN THE REQUIRED STRENGTH AND ACCEPTABLE SHRINKAGE CHARACTERISTICS. ACCEPTANCE OF MIX DESIGN BY THE ENGINEER WILL BE BASED ONLY ON CONFORMANCE OF SPECIFIED DESIGN STRENGTH, DESIGN SLUMP, AND AGGREGATE SIZE. b) SEE TABLE UNDER CONCRETE NOTES ON THIS SHEET FOR CONCRETE STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS. 5. HOT WEATHER CONCRETING: COMPLY WITH THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF SECTION 7.6 ACI 301 REGARDING PLACING OF CONCRETE DURING HOT WEATHER. a) WHEN AIR TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 80' F, THE GUIDELINES FOR PROTECTING THE CONCRETE FROM PLASTIC SHRINKAGE CRACKING AND CRAZE CRACKING, BY PROVIDING A TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED MIX AND PROTECTING THE CONCRETE SURFACE FROM RAPID WATER EVAPORATION AS DESCRIBED IN ACI 305R, SHALL APPLY. b) WHEN THE RATE OF EVAPORATION EXCEEDS 0.2 POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PER HOUR, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS AGAINST PLASTIC SHRINKAGE CRACKING AS DESCRIBED IN ACI 305R. CONTROL JOINT SEE NOTE 10 EXISTING SLAB OR FOOTING (IF APPLICABLE) AT CORNERS 6. SAW CUT JOINTS IN CONCRETE SLAB AT LOCATIONS SHOWN ON FOUNDATION PLAN. SAW CUT JOINTS AS SOON AS THE SLAB WILL SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE SAW AND OPERATOR WITHOUT DISTURBING THE FINAL FINISH. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN SAW CUT JOINTS SHALL BE 24 (8'-0" MIN.) TO 30 (16'-0" MAX.) TIMES THE SLAB THICKNESS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE CONTROL JOINT SYSTEM SHOULD DIVIDE THE SLAB INTO SECTIONS OF NOT MORE THAN 250 SQUARE FEET OF SURFACE AREA, U.N.O. 7. IF JOINTS NEED SUPPORT AT EDGES TO WITHSTAND THE ACTION OF SMALL HARD -WHEEL TRAFFIC. THIS ENGINEER RECOMMENDS FILLING THE JOINTS WITH AN EPDXY JOINT FILLER IF SUCH USAGE IS ANTICIPATED. 8. MAXIMUM RATIO OF LONG SIDE TO SHORT SIDE SHALL BE 1 1/2 : 1 9. PROVIDE CONSTRUCTION JOINT AT THE END OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT FOR THE DAY. 10. PROVIDE 2- #4 X 4'-0" LONG AT 4" O.C. AT MID -DEPTH OF SLAB AT CORNERS OF BLOCK -OUTS AND AT RE-ENTRANT CORNERS WHERE CONTROL JOINTS DO NOT OCCUR AND WHEN RE-ENTRANT CORNERS OR BLOCKOUTS EXCEED 15% OF THE PIECE OF SLAB 11. SEE FOUNDATION PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 12. CONTRACTOR MUST FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE SOILS REPORT FOR SUBGRADE/SUB SLAB PREPARATION AND FOLLOW ALL RECOMMENDATIONS. 13. ANY FLOOR SLAB HOLES FROM THE ATTACHMENT OF PANEL CHAMFER AND REVEAL STRIPES SHALL BE PROPERLY PATCHED PRIOR TO SEALING FLOOR SLABS. 14. BUILDING SLAB IS NOT DESIGNED TO SUPPORT CRANE LOADS, CONCRETE MIXING TRUCKS, OR OTHER SPECIFIC CONSTRUCTION LOADINGS. IF SUCH LOADS OCCUR DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO UPGRADE THE SLAB THICKNESS AND PROVIDE ADDED REINFORCING AS REQUIRED. ANY DAMAGE CAUSED TO THE SLAB SHALL BE REPAIRED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE PER THE OWNERS REQUEST. 15. WHERE DEPRESSIONS OCCUR IN THE SLAB BELOW THE NORMAL T.O. SLAB ELEVATION TO ACCOMMODATE THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ARCHITECTS OR PLUMBING PLANS, THE SLAB SHALL BE THICKENED TO MEET THE REQUIRED SLAB THICKNESS REQUIRED BY THE FOUNDATION PLAN. SEE THIS DETAIL FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS 16. THE MINIMUM SLAB THICKNESS IS 4" 17. THE MINIMUM SLAB REINFORCEMENT FOR SLABS UP TO 5" THICK IS 1 1/2" lbs. OF FIBERMESH PER CUBIC YARD OF CONCRETE U.N.O. 18. THE MINIMUM SLAB REINFORCEMENT FOR SLABS 5" THICK & UP IS #4 @18" O.C. E.W. CENTERED IN THE SLAB 19• AN IMPERVIOUS MEMBRANE (VAPOR BARRIER) SHOULD BE PLACED UNDER ALL SLABS (THE ONLY EXCEPTIONS IS A SLABS WHERE MOISTURE TRANSMISSIONS THROUGH THE SLAB WILL NOT DAMAGE, ALTER, OR HARM ANY PART OF THE STRUCTURE, INTERIOR, AND OCCUPANTS). A 10 MIL. (MIN.) MEMBRANE SHOULD BE USED THAT MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM E1745, THE MEMBRANE JOINTS SHOULD BE SPLICED & TAPED TYP. 20. 2" OF MOIST CONCRETE SAND (ASTMC-33) MUST BE PLACED UNDER ALL SLABS BETWEEN THE BOTTOM OF' 5LAB & TOP OF VAPOR BARRIER OR (NEXT LAYER DOWN AS REQUIRED BY THE SOILS REPORT). 21. THE VAPOR BARRIER SHOULD REST ON 4" OF 3/4" CLEAN CRUSHED ROCK U.N.O. (THIS RECOMMENDATION IS ONLY REQUIRED 0 SITES WITHOUT A SOILS REPORT RECOMMENDATION FOR SUB SLAB PREPARATION) 22. ALL REFERENCE TO FIBERMESH IN THESE PLANS REFERS TO THE PRODUCT BY SI CONCRETE SYSTEMS "FIBERMESH 300" TYP. U.N.O. DETAIL SEE NOTE #10 (PROVIDE WHERE CONTROL JOINT DOES NOT OCCUR) O O aCONTROL JOINT O 01 U.N.O. CONTROL JOINTS ISOLATION JOINT B(PROVIDE BOND EAK R) R =TAIL 3/4" SQ. CUSHION DOWELS x16" LONG ®12" O.C. CUSHIONING TO OCCUR AT SIDES bt OF DOWELS ONLY NOTE: THE OWNER MAY CHOOSE TO USE #5 REBAR DOWELS x 16" LONG 012" O.C. OR 3/4" 0 x 16" LONG 0 OL JOINT SMOOTH DOWELS @12" O.C. THIS OPTION MAY RESULT IN MORE SLAB CRACKING. THINNER SLAB THICKER ��`�� THICKNESS a . 4 • ; d,.. ' • SLABTHICKNESS d 1L '.' a.- _ , A •A .�' J1 qt (4" MIN.) d d (4" MIN.) J (IF APPLICABLE) 11 TYPICAL SLAB ON GRADE NOTE: REINFORCING IS ONLY REQUIRED TERMINATE REINFORCING IF THERE IS REINFORCING WITH IN 12" IN THE SLAB OF CONTROL JOINT 1/8" SAW -CUT CONTROL JOINT. FILL JOINT W/ ELASTOMERIC FILLER. w SLAB - SEE FOUNDATION A 4 , , PLAN FOR MORE INFO. w 12" MAX. TYP. 5/8" SMOOTH ROD x 16" LONG W/ SAW CUT 3" MIN. TYP. ENDS (FULLY GREASED ® 24" O.C. IN PRE - MANUFACTURED DOWEL BASKET ASSEMBLY. SEE SLAB CONTROL JOINT -OPTION 1 NOTE ABOVE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECOMMENDED METHOD ONLY IN SLABS W/ REINFORCING BARS 1/8" SAW -CUT CONTROL JOINT. FILL JOINT W/ ELASTOMERIC FILLER. o w 410 SLAB - SEE FOUNDATION o •a 4 PLAN FOR MORE INFO. d " A • k s � CUT EVERY OTHER REINFORCING BAR (BARS RUNNING PERPENDICULAR TO THE SAW CUT CONTROL JOINT) 1" E.S. OF CONTROL JOINT SLAB CONTROL JOINT -OPTION 2 (2" TOTAL) OWNER MY CHOOSE THIS OPTION OVER OPTION 1 2" MIN. BAR LAP D11 12" • P ALTERNATING D15 14" MIN. LAP PER TABLE MATS D20 16" *SEE REINFORCING DETAIL FOR REBAR LAPS IF REBAR IS REQUIRED AS SLAB REINFORCEMENT p CONTROL JOINT NOTE: REINFORCING IS ONLY REQUIRED IF THERE IS REINFORCING IN THE SLAB (DOWELS ARE ALWAYS REQUIRED) 5/8" SMOOTH ROD x16" LONG ® 12" O.C.. DOWELS SHALL BE INSTALLED ® SLAB PROVIDE MAXIMUM 1/8" RADIUS CENTERLINE, PERPENDICULAR TOOLED EDGE WHERE JOINTS TO JOINT, CENTERED ON THE ARE TO BE FILLED, SAW CUT JOINT, AND LEVEL. THE TOOLED JOINT. . - b "j, •-- 9. .p• - WRAP W/ F AM OR COAT TERMINATE REINFORCING-)W/ GREASE ONE END OF WITHIN 12" OF CONSTRUCTION DOWEL TO ASSURE SLIPPAGE JOINT APPLY BOND BRAKER TO 12"MAX. TYP. JOINT PRIOR TO SECOND SLABS 3" MIN. TYP. POUR s N 6" LONG KEY N 4- ®18" O.C. N COO WALLS AND FOUNDATIONS CONT. KEY 3/4" 1 1/2- CONSTRUCTION JOINT 1/8" RADIUS (TYP.) 1/2" PREFORMED FIBER EXPANSION JOINT, HOLD 1/2" DOWN FROM TOP OF SLAB 1/2"... EXPANSION / ISOLATION APPROVED CAULKING AFTER CONCRETE IS IN PLACE CONCRETE SLAB #5 BARS x16" LONG 012" O.C. ( 0 SLABS: W/ 3/4" 8" CUSHION ON SIDES OF DOWELS. NOTE: THE OWNER MAY EMBED CHOOSE TO USE #5 REBAR DOWELS x 16" LONG 012" O.C. W/ OUT THE 3/4" CUSHION. THIS OPTION CONTROL Ji INT MAY RESULT IN MORE SLAB CRACKING.) 3 •a . NEW CONCRETE cy uj SLAB THICKNESS ....:...................... '$ �' 4" MIN. 4" MIN. USE SIMPSON SET-XP EPDXY 12" EXISTING CONCRETE NEW CONCRETE JOINING (E) CONCRETE W/ (N) CONCRETE NORMAL FINISHED ELEVATION OF BUILDING SLAB DEPRESSED SLAB X d - (SEE ARCH'L. PLANS SEE FOUNDATION FORco''., • • A FOR DEPRESSION DEPTH) SLAB THICKNESS a a 41 • ' 1 6 SEE FOUNDATION FOR 2 x d 1• a . '• a ` : SLAB THICKNESS A K • N • 1 d Id + 4" d+4" ,n SLAB DEPRESSIONS (IF APPLICABLE - SEE ARCH'L. PLANS FOR LOCATIONS, DEPTH, & NO SCALE . ' 8-2., . •_. C DETAILING HOOK DETAILING DIMENSION A OR G DIMENSION D D ` Db Db = BAR DIAMETER w D = FINISHED INSIDE BEND DIA. o¢ o 1 " IN. D = 6Db FOR #3 THROUGH #8 D = 8Db FOR #9, #10, AND #11 0-DEG D = 1ODb FOR #14 AND #18 -DEG BAR DIMENSION OF STANDARD 180-DEG HOOKS, ALL GRADES DIMENSION OF STANDARD 90-DEG HOOKS, ALL GRADES SIZE A OR G J D A OR G D #3 1 5" 3" 2 1 /4" 6" 2 1/4- #4 6" 4" 3" 8" 3" #5 7" 5" 3 3/4" 10" 3 3/4" #6 8" 6" 4 1/2- 1'-0" 4 1/2- #7 10" 7" 5 1 /4" 1'-2" 5 1 /4" #8 11" 8" 6" 1'-4" 6" #9 1'-3" 11 3/4" 9 1/2- 1'-7" 9 1/2- #10 1'-5" 1'-1 1/4" 10 3/4" 1'-10" 10 3/4" #11 1'-7" 1'-2 3/4" 12" 2'-0" 12" #14 2'-3" 1'-9 3/4" 18 1 /4" 2'-7" 18 1 /4" #18 3'-0" 2'-4 1/2" 24" 3'-5" 24" #3 TO #5 6Dk OR 12Db D = BEND DIAMETER HOOK A OR G II I6DbOR = 2 1/2 -% MIN. O of 0 z o Fn G =, cn a o Db o o Db BEAM BEAM CL q I0-DEG 135- STIRRUP HOOKS (TIE BENDS SIMILAR) HO, A( zl 0 U) z Wi0 I BEAM GL 135-DEG SEIISMIC SnMUP/ nE BAR SIZE D 90" 135" 135° SEISMIC HOOK A OR G A OR G APPROX. H SIZE D A OR G APPROX. H #3 1 1/2" 4" 4" 2 1/2" #3 1 1/2" 5" 3 1/2" #4 2" 4 1/2" 4 1/2" 3" #4 2" 6 1/2" 4 1/2" #5 2 1/2" 6" 5 1/2" 3 3/4" #5 12 1/2" 8" 5 1/2" #6 4 1/2" 1'-0" 8" 4 1/2" #6 4 1/2" 11" 6 1/2" #7 5 1 /4" 1'-2" 9" 5 1 /4" #7 5 1 /4" 1'-0 1 /2" 7 3/4" #8 6" 1'-4" 110 1/2" 6" #8 6" 1'-2 1 /2" 9" CONCRETE SLAB SEE FOUNDATION PLAN FOR REINF. (2) #5 BOTT. BARS OVER PIPE M 1" CLEAR BETWEEN PIPE AND SLEEVE (TYPICAL) SEE FOUNDATION PLAN FOR REINF, (REINF. TO MATCH BOTTOM FTG. REINF.) (TYP.) "I 400 LAP (TYP-) / BOTTOM OF J FOOTING FOR STEPPED FOOTING SEE STANDARD DETAIL 5 PIPE---PENETRA TION AT FOOTING NO SCALE 3 % SEE REINFORCING 1CL • SC ENGULE TH AND INFOCE njEXTEND REINFORCEMENT OF...r........�N:.........:.............�....�....�.......��.�...:... SMALL GRADE BEAM INTO LARGER GRADE BEAM AS SHOWN d a° ° d -a. \4�������������.�������� 4. d d d ° d . GRADE BEAM (SEE FOUNDATION I GRADE BEAM (SEE FOUNDATION PLAN FOR MORE INFO.) PLAN FOR MORE INFO.) 1. REINFORCEMENT, SHALL BE DEFORMED REINFORCEMENT, EXCEPT THAT PLAIN REINFORCEMENT -MAY BE USED FOR SPIRALS. 2. REINFORCEMENT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A 615, REINFORCING BARS FOR CONCRETE. 3. REINFORCING BARS SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING SPECIFIED YIELD STRENGTHS: b� NO. 3 AND SMALLENO. 4 AND LARGERR - 60.000 PSI GRADE 60� NOTE: A706 GRADE 60 MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR a) & b) REINFORCING. 4. WELDED SMOOTH WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM 185. GRADE 65 FOR PLAIN WIRE AND ASTM A497 GRADE 75 FOR DEFORMED WIRE ALL LAPS TO BE AT LEAST TWO CROSS WIRES. 5. ALL WELDED REBAR SHALL BE ASTM A706 *U.N.O. �c PREHEAT THE REBAR IF REQUIRED BY AWS (BASED ON THE CARBON CONTENT OF THE REBAR) 6. AT THE TIME CONCRETE IS PLACED, REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE FREE FROM MUD, OIL OR OTHER NONMETALLIC COATING THAT DECREASE BOND. EPDXY COATING OF BARS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 318-11 SECTION 7.4 SHALL BE PERMITTED. 7. REINFORCEMENT, PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND DUCTS SHALL BE ACCURATELY PLACED AND ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED BEFORE CONCRETE IS PLACED, AND SHALL BE SECURED AGAINST DISPLACEMENT WITHIN TOLERANCES. 8. TOLERANCE FOR DEPTH d, AND MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER IN FLEXURAL MEMBERS, WALLS AND COMPRESSION MEMBERS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: TOLERANCE ON TOLERANCE ON d MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER d < 8" f 3/8" - 3/8" d > 8" f 1/2" - 1 /2" 1. ALL CONCRETE MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL CONFORM TO CHAPTER 19 OF THE 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE TO ALL REQUIREMENTS OF ACI 318-11, SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS, EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY THE SUPPLEMENT REQUIRED BELOW. 2. MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: a) CONCRETE MIX SHALL BE PLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING CEMENT TYPES. MAXIMUM WATER/CEMENT RATIOS, COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS (f'c), AND MAXIMUM SIZE AGGREGATE. SULFATE EXPOSURE SHALL BE OBTAINED DIRECTLY BY THE CONTRACTOR FROM THE PROJECT'S SOILS ENGINEER AT THE TIME OF THE BUILDING PADS CONSTRUCTION SULFATE EXPOSURE CEMENT TYPE MAXIMUM WATER/ CEMENT f'c (PSI) MIN ® 28 DAYS U.N.O. S.O.G.FOUND. WALLS COLUMN BEAMS ABV GIRD FLOOR DECK PLYWOOD TOPPING SLAB NEGLIGIBLE (0-150 PPM) II 0.45 3000 3000 N/A /// N/A N/A MODERATE 1500-10000 PPM V+ OVER 10000 PPM POZZOLAN MAXIMUM SIZE AGGREGATE 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/8 3/8 *SEE PANEL ELEVATIONS (WHERE APPLICABLE) FOR SPECIAL MINIMUM f'c. WHERE SULFATES ARE PRESENT, THE ABOVE TABLE SHALL GOVERN IF THE TABLE VALUES ARE HIGHER. WALLS f'c ALSO IS APPLICABLE FOR RETAINING WALLS. b) CONCRETE SLUMP SHALL BE DESIGNED TO 4". ALL CONCRETE WITH SLUMPS IN EXCESS OF 5" SHALL BE REJECTED AND NOT USED. r EXCEPT THAT TOLERANCE FOR THE CLEAR DISTANCE TO FORMED SOFFITS c) THE CONCRETE SUPPLIER MUST BEAR THE TOTAL RESPONSIBILITY THAT THE SHALL BE MINUS 1/4" (6.4 mm) AND TOLERANCE FOR COVER SHALL NOT MIX DESIGNS WILL ATTAIN THE REQUIRED STRENGTH AND SHRINKAGE EXCEED MINUS ONE THIRD THE MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER REQUIRED BY THE CHARACTERISTICS. ACCEPTANCE OF MIX DESIGN WILL BE BASED ONLY ON _ m APPROVED PLANS OR SPECIFICATIONS. CONFORMANCE OF SPECIFIED DESIGN STRENGTH AND DESIGN SLUMP. - r- 9. TOLERANCE FOR LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF BENDS AND ENDS OF REINFORCEMENT 3. PIPE MAY PASS THROUGH STRUCTURAL CONCRETE IN SLEEVES, BUT SHALL NOT BE SHALL BE f2" (f51 mm) EXCEPT AT DISCONTINUOUS ENDS OF MEMBERS EMBEDDED THEREIN. SLEEVES SHALL BE WRAPPED WITH EXPANSION JOINT FILLER WHERE TOLERANCE SHALL BE f1/2" (f12.7 mm). MATERIAL TO ALLOW CONCRETE TO CURE WITHOUT RESTRAINT. PIPES OR CONDUITS EXCEEDING ONE-THIRD THE SLAB OR WALL THICKNESS SHALL NOT BE IN 10. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR LOCATION OF REINFORCING STEEL ARE TO FACE OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DETAILS SEE MECHANICAL AND / OR BAR AND DENOTE CLEAR COVERAGE. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED, CONCRETE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF SLEEVES, ACCESSORIES, ETC. J COVERAGE SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: 4 X da. U CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH: 3" 4. ALL REINFORCING STEEL, WIRE MESH, ANCHOR BOLTS, HOLDOWN ANCHORS, AND OTHER INSERTS SHALL BE SECURED IN POSITION AND INSPECTED BY THE BUILDING WEATHER: THROUGH NO. 18) 2" CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR (NO. 6 OFFICIAL PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE. ..........:.. (N0. 5 AND SMALLER) 1 1/2" 5. LOCATION OF CONSTRUCTION OR POUR JOINTS NOT SPECIFIED IN THESE DRAWINGS N Q CO CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR IN CONTACT WITH GROUND: MUST BE REVIEWED BY THE ENGINEER. J 00 SLABS, WALLS AND JOISTS: (NO. 14 AND NO.18) 1 1/2" 6. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOLDS, GROOVES, ORNAMENTS, OR cd 0- - m (NO. 11 AND SMALLER) 3/4" ACCESSORIES REQUIRED TO BE CAST IN CONCRETE, AND FOR LOCATIONS OF FLOOR FINISHES AND SLAB DEPRESSIONS W 0) On 04 BEAMS AND COLUMNS: 1 1/2 co (SMALLER OF THE TWO GRADE BEAMS (LARGER OF THE TWO GRADE BEAMS W N Q IN THE PLAN DIMENSION) IN THE PLAN DIMENSION) SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATE MEMBERS: (NO. 6 THROUGH NO. 18) 3/4" 7. HORIZONTAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL HAVE ENTIRE SURFACE REMOVED TO F- -0a (NO. 5 AND SMALLER) 1/2- EXPOSEDCLEANDEMBEDDED. z } PLAN VIEW CONCRETE TILT -UP PANELS CAST AGAINST A 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL 1/2" PRE -MOLDED EXPANSION W " cz LL O A RIGID HORIZONTAL SURFACE, SUCH AS A JOINTS IN ALL EXTERIOR WALKS AND SLABS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, BUT IN (,� Q CONCRETE SLAB, EXPOSED TO THE WEATHER: (NO. 8 AND SMALLER) 1 NO CASE MORE THAN 24'-0" O.C. V mi = �� U 0 SEE REINFORCING 3" SEE REINFORCING (N0. 9 THROUGH N0. 18) 2 9. FOUNDATION PLATES OR SILLS SHALL BE BOLTED TO THE FOUNDATION OR I- m 0- SCHEDULE FOR SPLICE CL SCHEDULE FOR SPLICE NOTES: FOUNDATION WALL WITH NOT LESS THAN 5/8" NOMINAL DIAMETER STEEL ANCHOR LENGTH AND INFO. LENGTH AND INFO. " O E-- 1. PLACE REINF. AT MID -THICKNESS FOR SLABS ON GROUND BUT MAINTAIN BOLTS EMBEDED AT LEAST 7 INTO THE CONCRETE OR MASONRY AND SPACED NOT 5i ABOVE CLEARANCES. MORE THAN 4' APART. THERE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF TWO BOLTS PER PIECE WITH °d ONE BOLT LOCATED WITHIN 12" OF EACH END OF EACH PIECE NOT CLOSER THAN 7 94 1-16������������������������������������������,�������������������������������������������� 2. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ADDING ADDITIONAL CONCRETE TO BOLT DIA. FROM THE END OF EACH PIECE. A NUT AND 3x3x1 /4 PLATE WASHER MEET THE ABOVE CLEARANCES & ALL OTHER CLEARANCES REQUIRED BY �..............�� ��������� THESE PLANS AND AC1. TYP. @ ALL CONCRETE. CONTACT THE ENGINEER IF SHALL BE TIGHTENED ON EACH BOLT TO THE PLATE.0 THERE ARE ANY QUESTIONS BEFORE BEGINING CONSTRUCTION & / OR 10. WATER USED IN MIXING CONCRETE SHALL BE CLEAN AND FREE FROM FABRICATION. INJURIOUS AMOUNTS OF OILS ACIDS ALKALIS SALTS ORGANIC MATERIALS Ki �d ° 11. ALL SPLICES IN CONTINUOUS REINFORCEMENT OR REINFORCING AS USED IN WALLS, OR OTHER SUBSTANCES THAT MAY BE DELETERIOUS TO CONCRETE OR SAME SIZE REBAR AS THE LARGEST ��REINFORCEMENT. NONPOTABLE WATER SHALL NOT BE USED IN CONCRETE. NOTE: REBAR REQUIRED IN EITHER OF THE FOOTINGS, ETC. SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN NOTE 14. VERIFY WALL BARS 1. ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE BENT COLD, UNLESS OTHERWISE PERMITTED BY TWO FOOTINGS, SAME NUMBER OF M -� a SHALL BE SPLICED AT OR NEAR FLOOR LINES. BARS MAY BE WIRED TOGETHER AT 11. CONCRETE SHALL BE DEPOSITED AS NEARLY AS PRACTICABLE IN ITS FINAL POSITION THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. BARS AS IN THE SMALLER FOOTING SPLICES OR LAPS EXCEPT FOR TOP REINF. OF BEAM AND SLABS, OR WHERE TO AVOID SEGREGATION DUE TO REHANDLING OR FLOWING. CONCRETE SHALL BE LINED UP WITH THE BARS IN THE " SPECIFICALLY DETAILED TO BE SEPARATED. ALL REINF. SPLICES OR LAP SPLICES SMALLER FOOTING 3 SEE REINFORCING CARRIED ON AT SUCH A RATE THAT CONCRETE IS AT ALL TIMES PLASTIC AND 2. REINFORCEMENT PARTIALLY EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE FIELD BENT, SHALL BE LOCATED AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS IF SPLICE OR LAP LOCATIONS CL SCHEDULE FOR SPLICE FLOWS READILY INTO SPACES BETWEEN REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE THAT HAS EXCEPT AS SHOWN ON THE DESIGN DRAWINGS OR PERMITTED BY THE LENGTH AND INFO. ARE NOT INDICATED ALL LAP & SPLICES SHALL BE STAGGERED 2 0 O.C. PARTIALLY HARDENED OR BEEN CONTAMINATED BY FOREIGN MATERIAL SHALL NOT BUILDING OFFICIAL. GRADE BEAM (SEE FOUNDATION GRADE BEAM (SEE FOUNDATION 12. CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE DROPPED THROUGH REINF. STEEL (AS IN WALL) SO AS BE DEPOSITED IN THE STRUCTURE. PLAN FOR MORE INFO.) PLAN FOR MORE INFO. TO CAUSE SEGREGATION OF AGGREGATES. IN SUCH CASES, HOPPERS AND VERTICAL 12. ADDITIVES AND ADMIXTURES TO CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE USED UNLESS APPROVED STANDARD HOOK DETAILS IN MTHLEEDEPTHTDIMENSION�DE BEAMS I(LARGER OF THE TWO GRADE BEAMS CHUTES OR TRUNKS SHALL BE USED. CHUTES C TRUNKS SHALL BE EX VARIABLE BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. ® IN THE DEPTH DIMENSION) LENGTHS SO THAT FREE UNCONFINED FALL OF CONCRETE SHALL NOT EXCEED NO REVISION �! FIVE (5) FEET AND SUFFICIENT NUMBER SHALL BE USED TO INSURE THE 13. THE EXTERIOR FLATWORK SHOULD BE POURED SEPARATELY IN ORDER TO ACT ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 4db OR 2 1 /2/2" MIN. 1 .d ® ® 16 :0 ° d d. NO SCALE € '':::?':: c CONCRETE BEING LEVEL AT ALL TIMES. INDEPENDENTLY OF THE WALLS AND FOUNDATION SYSTEM. SEE CIVIL / ARCH. & BID B SECTION 13. REINFORCING BARS SHALL NOT BE RE -BENT WITHOUT APPROVAL OF ENGINEER. PLANS FOR EXTERIOR FLATWORK INFO. BENDS SHALL BE MADE COLD. 14. FOOTINGS SHALL BE LOCATED ON CENTER LINE OF WALL, PILASTER, OR COLUMN SPLICE AT DIFFERENT SIZE GRADE BEAMS 14' UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 180' HOOK 6 APPLICABLE) NO SCALE .:• ':::" BUILDING WALL ABOVE ELEVATION OF COMPACTED VERTICAL OR UNDISTURBED SINGLE BARS ® SLAB ABOVE --,ADJACENT SOIL 4db OR WALL 2 1/2- LOCATIONS MIN. ADDITIONAL FOOTING DEPTH a d 180' HOOK MAY BE REQUIRED TO MEET v ..............................����.........:.....u.......��..........:......��.......................r�.............................�......�...���� THE ADJACENT GRADE ® 'd ® ° ® a REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR ' d d \�\\\\\\°, & CIVIL ENGINEER MUST ° v' d a COORDINATE THE REQUIRED ° VERTICAL DEPTH OF FOOTING IF d ° d. d v ..�..��.�.�.��..�.��� BARS APPLICABLE d d d 4 WALL FOOTING DEPTH AS ° ® i ° a ® d a d a LOCATIONS REQUIRED BY THE PLANS • ��.......:���......���..��...��.........��......��.....�u�.��..:...��.��...����.....�u.���.:......��..........����................�.�.�.��.�.....�:..,.Jd (THE FOOTING DEPTH d ° MUST BE AT LEAST AS DOUBLE DEEP AS REBY THE PRO ECTIRESOILLS REPORT CONTACT THE NOTE ENGINEER IF THERE ARE THIS DETAIL DOES NOT APPLY TO PAD FOOTINGS ANY DISCREPANCIES 10 TERMINATION OF CONCRETE BEM/ WALL 15. AGGREGATES SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C33. 16. CONCRETE MIXES SHALL BE DESIGNED BY A TESTING LABORATORY APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. MIXES SHALL CONFORM TO APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS, REGARDLESS OF OTHER MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED HEREIN OR ON THE DRAWINGS. MIX DESIGNS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL BEFORE USE. DESIGNS SHALL SHOW PROPORTIONS OF CEMENT, FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES AND WATER, AND GRADATION OF COMBINED AGGREGATES. 17. PROVIDE 3/4" CHAMFER AT EXPOSED EDGES OF CONCRETE, UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN. 18. SECURE REINFORCING, ANCHOR BOLTS, INSERTS, ETC. RIGIDLY IN PLACE PRIOR TO POURING CONCRETE. 19. SUPPORT HORIZONTAL REINFORCING ON GALVANIZED CHAIRS EXCEPT MORTAR BLOCKS OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD OF SUPPORT AT FOOTINGS, AND SLABS ON GRADE. NOTE THAT BRACING AND LIFT INSERTS, AND CHAIRS AT TILT -UP PANELS, NEED NOT BE GALVANIZED BUT SHALL HAVE PLASTIC TIPS. 20. REMOVE FORMS AT FOLLOWING MINIMUM TIMES AFTER POURING: AT SLAB EDGES - 24 HOURS; AT WALLS LESS THAN 4' HIGH - 36 HOURS. 21. CONSTRUCT FORMWORK TO MAINTAIN TOLERANCE AS OUTLINED IN ACI 347. FORMWORK SHALL BE REUSED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 347. 22. TRENCHING OF GRADE BEAMS SHALL BE EXCAVATED IN ORDER TO PROVIDE THE BEAM CROSS SECTION INDICATED. BEAM AND SLAB DEPTHS AND WIDTHS AS INDICATED ARE MINUMUM ACCEPTABLE SIZES. LARGER SIZE BEAMS AND SLABS FORMED BY LESS ACCURATE TRENCHING MAY REQUIRE ADDITIONAL REINFORCING NOT SHOWN WHICH SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER DURING CONSTRUCTION REVIEW. ALL LOOSE DIRT FROM SIDES AND BOTTOMS OF TRENCHES SHALL BE REMOVED. HAUCHES SHALL BE CUT ON EACH SIED OF TRENCHS OF ADEQUATE SIZE TO MAINTAIN THE VERTICAL SIDES OF THE TRENCH. 23. WHERE HILTI EPDXIES ARE SPECIFIED IN THESE PLANS THE CONTRACTOR MAY SUBSTITUTE AN APPROVED EQUAL (ie SIMPSON STRONG TIE, ETC.) �M ADJACENT GRADES TO FTC. I 15. ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE DETAILED, FABRICATED AND PLACED, IN CONCRETE NOTES 1 7 W NO SCALE' 5' SLOPE I........................ I=) Q_ 5' MIN. 45' MAX. -III- =I -� 6" CLR. MIN., " - x TYP. & 12" CLR. MAX. U.N.O. =III=1il W W FOOTING WIDTH AS REQUIRED BY THE PLANS 2- #6 AT HEAD UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 2-#5 TYPICAL (1) #448" LONG AT CORNERS OTE: EE "TYPICAL REINFORCEMENT AT PANEL OPENINGS (AND KNOCKOUTS)" FOI (PICAL CONCRETE WALL PANEL REINFORCING. OPENING IN CONC. FLOOR SLAB OR WALL NO SCALE 1 TYPICAL REINFORCEMENT SPLICES & EMBEDMENT LENGTH REBAR SIZE SPLICE LENGTH, INCHES EMBEDMENT W/ HOOK EMBEDMENT W/O HOOK #3 24" 9" 21" #4 32" 12" 27" #5 40" 15" 33" #6 48" 18" 38" #7 69" 21" 53" #8 78" 24" 59" #9 88" 27" 65" #10 98" 31" 73" #11 108" 35" 81" SPLICE LENGTH EMBEDMENT LENGTH INTO - CONCRETE REBAR TO BE .�..... ��......��...���.�........�..�...���� STANDARD SPLICED HOOK 1 BAR DIAMETER CONCRETE SURFACE OR MAX JOINT IN CONCRETE ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ACI DETAILING MANUAL. 16. ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE SUPPORTED IN FORMS, SPACED WITH NECESSARY ACCESSORIES AND SHALL BE SECURELY WIRED TOGETHER, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE CRSI " MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE" 3 REINFORCING 32 DIA's 1, 32 DIA's • +t 6 4. -. A K _ � .. •:1 4 ` � 4 A i7. R w• a 1 32 DIA's 32 DIA's SINGLE CURTAIN 32 DIA's 16 DIA's a • � ° 4.• cD N r- n A • - A N b• Q s A N M 16 DIA's 12" MIN. • R' a: a e. A . d o N 9g r- r2 Qv REINFORCING LAPS AT CONC. ;..:, 06 PIPES PERMITTED IN THIS AREA NORMAL BOT. OF FTG. x 1" CLEAR BETWEEN 18" MIN. PIPE AND SLEEVE. ' (TYP-) M CONCRETE FILL TO BE �. a PLACED BEFORE FOOTING Z IS POURED - MAKE a� A..•- IE I ifl SAME WIDTH AS FOOTING AND FULL WIDTH OF PIPE TRENCH. (TYP.) 1 FOR PIPES PASSIM UNIIDER 2 FOOTIw w OR LESS ma -OW PIPES IN BACKFILLED TRI NORMAL BOTTOM OF FOOTING, B PARALLEL TO FOOTINGS 2 NOTE: Q 1 SEE TYPICAL STEPPED FOOTING DETAIL i° FOR REINFORCING. W coa > o ..' a 11. W, W n ! O RIT � lE�D FOR COMPLIANCE W ;O A.PPROVED J Q rD V, o z LO ;iw Of TLllcvrila Q T BUI DING DIVISION, w Q ECEIVIED z N CI Y OF T'r,�VVILA o W OCT 0 9 2015 z CD Q O PE RMIT CENTER r DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: KS TT PROJECT NUMBER BYA# 15256 BRAD YOUNG &ASSOCIATES, INC.DAk ILE�"�ti�. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING ZONAL �� DIE345 FOLLASKY CLOW$, CALIFORNIA 93612 PHONE: (559) 323-9600 FAX: (559) 323-9633 EXPIRES 11-7-2015-1 DATE OF THIS PRINTING - 1. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE TYPE "N" AS SET FORTH IN A.S.T.M. SPEC NO. C90, F'm=1500 P.S.I. MINIMUM, TYPE 1, MOISTURE CONTROLLED. SEE PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIRMENTS (IF APPLICABLE) 2. MORTAR SHALL BE TYPE "S" WITH A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 1800 P.S.I. AT 28 DAYS. THE MORTOR STRENGTH MUST ALSO BE 500 PSI GREATER THAN THE F'm OF THE CMU IT IS PART OF, TYP. 3. GROUT SHALL HAVE A MIN. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2000 P.S.I. AT 28 DAYS. THE GROUT STRENGTH MUST ALSO BE 500 PSI GREATER THAN THE F'm OF THE CMU IT IS PART OF, TYP. 4. HORIZONTAL REINFORCING SHALL BE LAID IN BOND BEAM UNITS AND SECURELY WIRED TO THE VERTICAL REINFORCING. 5. VERTICAL REINFORCING SHALL BE CENTERED IN WALL U.N.O. AND PLACED IN OPEN END UNITS BEFORE BLOCK WORK BEGINS AND SHALL BE HELD IN POSITION AT TOP AND BOTTOM AND AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 192 BAR DIAMETERS. 6. ALL CELLS SHALL BE GROUTED SOLID. 7. LAP HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL REINFORCING BAR 48 DIAMETERS AT SPLICES. 8. DOWELS IN ALL FOUNDATIONS SHALL HAVE THE SAME LOCATION, SIZE, AND SPACING AS THE VERTICAL MASONRY REINFORCING. 9. GROUT SHOULD BE PUDDLED OR TAMPED WITH A 5/8" ROD OR A 1 "x2" STICK AS IT IS PLACED. 10. MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE LAID IN RUNNING BOND, U.N.O. 11. GROUTING OF BEAMS OVER OPENINGS SHALL BE DONE IN CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH A MINIMUM 12" SEAT AT EACH END UNLESS PLACED IN TOTAL WITH WALL GROUTING. 12. USE 2-#5 HORIZONTAL BARS AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF ALL LINTEL BEAMS EXCEPT AS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 13. PROVIDE 2-#5 VERTICAL BARS AT ALL CORNERS AND WALL ENDS. 14. ALL WALL OPENINGS SHALL BE SHORED FOR A MINIMUM OF 28 DAYS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 15. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE GRADE 60 16. TYPICAL WALL REINFORCING SHALL BE #4 AT 24" O.C. EACH WAY, EXCEPT AS SHOWN OTHERWISE. 17. GROUT PLACEMENT SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ACI 530-11 18. MATERIAL: a) MOTAR SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C 270. AND GROUT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C 476 b) WATER USED IN MIXING MORTAR OR GROUT SHALL BE CLEAN AND FREE FROM INJURIOUS AMOUNTS OF OILS. ACIDS. ALKALIS, SALT, ORGANIC MATERIALS OR OTHER SUBSTANCES THAT MAY BE DELETERIOUS TO MASONRY OR REINFORCEMENT NONPOTABLE WATER SHALL NOT BE USED. 19. ADDITIVES AND ADMIXTURES TO MORTAR OR GROUT SHALL NOT BE USED UNLESS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER OR RECORD. 20. PRIOR TO GROUTING. THE GROUT SPACE SHALL BE CLEAN SO THAT ALL SPACES TO BE FILLED WITH GROUT DO NOT CONTAIN MORTAR PROJECTIONS GREATER THAN 1/2- MORTAR DROPPINGS OR OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL. GROUT SHALL BE PLACED SO THAT ALL CELLS SHALL BE FILLED SOLID. 21. A PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE SHOULD BE PLACED AT THE BASE OF ALL RETAINING WALLS SO THAT HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE CANNOT FORM BEHIND THE WALL. 22. ALL MASONRY PLACED DIRECTLY AGAINST SOIL (EARTH, SAND, GRAVEL, DIRT, ETC.) OR WHERE STANDING WATER WILL BE PRESENT FOR MORE THAN ONE DAY AT A TIME, SHALL BE WATERPROOFED ON EA. FACE WITH THE ABOVE EXPOSURE INCLUDING ALL JOINTS W/ ADJOINING STRUCTURES (FOOTINGS, WALLS, ETC.). THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR USING AN INDUSTRY APPROVED METHOD FOR THE ABOVE WATERPROOFING. NOTE: WHERE PLYWOOD OCCURS ON EACH SIDE OF THE STUD WALL THE NAILING 0 EACH SHEARWALL MUST BE STAGGERED FROM SIDE TO SIDE (ie: EN 0 6" O.0 ON EACH SIDE WOULD BE STAGGERED VERTIVCALY ON THE STUDS SO EFFECTIVELY THERE WILL BE NAILS 03" O.C. THE SAME CONCEPT APPLIES TO NAILING ON HORIZONTAL FRAMING) TYPICAL WALL CONST. #€ €# €# ## E1 €€ E€ #E SEE "WALL FRAMING OPENING" UNLESS #; #; ## ## EI #E €E NOTED OTHERWISE ON IE #E #� DRAWINGS IE €# #€ ## ## EI # PLYWOOD SHEATHING SPAN RATING PROVIDE 2x 1 # MUST MEET OR EXCEED BLOCKING ' SUPPORT SPACING FOR 0 HORIZONTAL THE GIVEN APPLICATION ## PLYWOOD PANEL EDGES, U.N.O. €1 11 11 €€ €€ #1 € NOTE: # €E €€ E# E# ;€ ROTATE SHEATHING 1 90' FROM WHAT IS €# EE €€ E€ 3E € SHOWN WHEN USING 7/16" SHEATHING AND THINNER. TYP. VERTICAL PANEL JOINTS MAY LINE UP SEE "TYP. WOOD WALL WHEN THE STUD 0 1 8" FRAMING PLUS, TYP. HEADER THE JOINT IS A 3x AND BEAM SIZES" DETAIL FOR SILL PLATE BOLT INFO., TYP. OR GREATER STUD. FIELD EDGE EDGE NAILING NAILING NAILING Jr SHEAR WALL DIAPHRAGM NO SCALE NOTE: BLOCK ALL SHEATHING EDGES WHEN ROOF FRAMING CHANGES DIRECTIONS WITHIN 16' OF DIAPHRAGM BOUNDARIES (i.e. @ TURN FRAMING, etc.) PROVIDE SHEATHING BN TO FRAMING LINE THAT DIVIDES FRAMING DIRECTION CHANGES (i.e.. TWO ROWS OF BN - ONE ES OF CHANGE TO SAME FRAMING MEMBERS PLYWOOD SHEATHING SEE PLANS. SPAN RATING MUST MEET OR EXCEED SUPPORT SPACING FOR THE GIVEN APPLICATION -EDGE NAIL WHEN BLOCKED ---JOIST SEE PLANS 00 GENERAL MASONRY NOTES FIELD EDGE NAILING NAILING 6 ROOF AND FLOOR D1APHRAG DIMMA NO SCALE ;' `' WOOD I - JOISTS FOR JOIST SPACING OF 32" O.C. AND LESS JOIST TOP FLANGE HANGER, U.N.O. FLANGE WIDTH RANGE DEPTH OF JOIST RANGE 1 1/2- 0-14 ITT 1 1/2" 16 LBV 1 3/4" 0-16 W M 2 1/4 - 2 5/16 0-12 WM 2 1/4 - 2 5/16 14-22 WP 2 1/4 - 2 5/16 24-30 HW 2 1/2 - 2 9/16 0-13 LBV 2 1/2 - 2 9/16 14-30 HWI 3 1/2 0-30 HWI JOIST FACE MOUNT HANGER, U.N.O. FLANGE WIDTH RANGE DEPTH OF JOIST RANGE 1 1/2- 0-11 7/8 MIU 1 1/2- 14 IUT 1 3/4 0-20 MIU 2 5/16 0-30 HU (MAX.) 2 1/2 0-16 HU 2 1/2 18-26 MIU DI ENSIONED LUMBER JOIST TOP FLANGE HANGER, U.N.O. FACE MOUNT HANGER, U.N.O. JOIST TOP FLANGE HANGER, U.N.O. FACE MOUNT HANGER, U.N.O. 2x4 HU24TF LUS24 3x4 HU34TF U34 2x6 JB26 LUS26 3x6 W36 U36 2x8 JB28 LUS26 3x8 W38 U36 2x10 JB210 LUS28 3x10 W310 U310 2x12 JB212 LUS210 3x12 WNP312 U310 204 LB214 LUS210 3x14 WNP314 U314 2x16 LB216 U214 3x16 WNP316 U314 JOIST TOP FLANGE HANGER, U.N.O. FACE MOUNT HANGER, U.N.O. JOIST TOP FLANGE HANGER, U.N.O. FACE MOUNT HANGER, U.N.O. 4x4 HU44TF LUS44 6x6 WNP66 HU66 (MAX.) 46 HUS46TF LUS46 6x8 WNP68 HU68 (MAX.) 48 B48 LUS48 6x10 WNP610 HU610 (MAX.) 410 HUS41OTF LUS410 6x12 HW612 HU612 MAX. 412 HUS412TF LUS412 6x14 HW614 HU614 MAX. 414 HUS414TF LUS414 6x16 HW616 HU616 MAX. 416 WNP416 HU416 (MAX.) GLULA S6 JOIST SIZE TOP FLANGE HANGER, U.N.O. FACE MOUNT HANGER, U.N.O. 3 1/8" GLULAM LEG HGUS / (GLULAM DEPTH) 5 1/8" GLULAM EG EG (W/O TOP FLANGE) 6 3/4" GLULAM EG EG (W/O TOP FLANGE) 8 3/4" GLULAM EG NOTE 1. THIS SCHEDULE GIVES TYPICAL HANGER SIZES, U.N.O. ON PLANS. 2. IF THE DETAILS DO NOT INDICATE WHETHER A TOP FLANGE OR FACE MOUNT HANGER IS USED CONTACT THE ENGINEER BEFORE SELECTING A HANGER. 3. THE HANGERS LISTED IN THE ABOVE TABLE ARE THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR A SIMPSON STRONG TIE HANGER. THE CONTRACTOR MAY CHOOSE TO USE A HANGER OF THE SAME TYPE AS REQUIRED BY THE DETAILS BUT WITH GREATER STRENGTH PROPERTIES., U.N.O. 4. THE HANGER SCHEDULE IS ONLY APPLICABLE FOR HANGERS FOR ROOF JOIST U.N.O. ( ie NOT FOR FLOOR JOIST) 5. WHERE A WOOD BEAM RUNS INTO A STEEL COLUMN USE A STEEL SADDLE WELDED TO STEEL COLUMN, U.N.O. (SEE "TYP. WOOD BEAM TO SIDE OF STEEL COLUMN" DETAIL) 6. TOP FLANGE HANGERS MUST BE USED AT ALL GLULAMS, U.N.O. 7. A TOP FLANGE HANGERS MUST BE USED AT ALL WOOD I -JOIST, U.N.O. 8. HANGERS FOR MANUFACTURED JOIST ARE SPECIFIED BY THE JOIST MANUFACTURE. SEE JOIST MANUFACTURES PLANS FOR MORE INFO. 7 TYP. HANGER SCHEDULE 1. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE NAILING SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE, USING ONLY COMMON WIRE NAILS. NAILING NOT NOTED BELOW OR ON THE PLANS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 2 NAILS AT EACH CONTACT, 8d FOR 1 x MATERIAL AND 16d FOR 2x MATERIAL. 2. NAILS SHALL NOT BE DRIVEN CLOSER TOGETHER THAN 1/2 THEIR LENGTH NOR CLOSER TO EDGE OF MEMBER THAN 1/4 THEIR LENGTH. HOLES SHALL BE BORED WHERE NECESSARY TO PREVENT SPLITTING. PENETRATION INTO THE PIECE RECEIVING THE POINT SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 1/2 THE LENGTH OF THE NAIL. 3. WHERE POSSIBLE NAILS DRIVEN PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN SHALL BE USED INSTEAD OF TOE NAILS. 4. BUILT UP BEAMS, JOIST, AND RAFTERS: TYPICAL jl2" 1 2"j, 16d SPACED AS SHOWN 10" IN DEPTH OR LESS TYPICAL 24" 24" 1/2"0 BOLTS SPACED AS SHOWN MORE THAN 10" IN DEPTH 2" TYP. T.&B. 5. FOR PLYWOOD SHEATHING, SEE DIAPHRAGM DETAILS AND SCHEDULES. VERTICAL PANELS OF EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD NOT INCLUDED IN THE PLYWOOD SHEATHING SCHEDULE SHALL BE NAILED WITH 8d AT 6" O.C. AT PERIMETER OF PANELS AND 8d AT 12" O.C. AT INTERMEDIATE BEARINGS. (a) WHERE THE DIAPHRAGM IS CURVED "OUT OF PLANE" (CURVE RADIUS = 6' OR GREATER) USE THREADED NAILS W/ THE SAME MIN DIA. & LENGTH CHARACTERISTICS SPECIFIED & WHEN THE CURVE RADIUS IS LESS THAN 6' (2 1/2' MIN) USE WOOD SCREWS W/ SIM OR GREATER DIA. AS NAIL REQUIREMENT & 3" LONG MIN. 6. STUDS TO BEARINGS USE TOE NAILS EACH SIDE: 2x4-(2) 10d, 2x6-(3) 10d, 2x8-(4) 10d. STUDS OVER 14'-0" HIGH AT EXTERIOR WALLS, PROVIDE A FRAMING CLIP ON ONE SIDE AT EACH END OF STUD IN LIEU OF TOE NAILS ON THAT SIDE. 7. BLOCKING BETWEEN STUDS, EACH END: (2) 10d TOE NAILS TOP & BOTTOM. 8. DOUBLE TOP PLATE NAILING LEGEND: (A) LOWER PLATES (TO STUD): 2x4-(2) 16d, 2x6-(3) 16d, 2x8-(4) 16d. (SEE NOTE NO. 7 FOR STUDS OVER 14' HIGH.) (B) UPPER PLATE TO LOWER PLATE, 16d NAILS: TYPICAL 16" 16" (C) UPPER PLATE TO LOWER PLATE AT SPLICE: (8) 16d STAGGERED 9. MULTIPLE MEMBERS (KING, TRIMMER, POSTS) STICHED NAIL TOGETHER, STAGGER NAILS FOR STUD WIDTHS OVER 4": 16d 06" O.C. 10. MULTIPLE STUDS AT CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS (AT CONTACTS): 16d 012" O.C. 11. DOUBLE JOIST UNDER PARTITIONS: WHERE NOT BLOCKED APART, WILL BE SAME AS BUILT UP BEAMS NOTE NO.5. WHERE BLOCKED APART (AT EACH BLOCK SIDE): (2) 16d. 12. TOE -NAILS SHALL BE DRIVEN AT AN ANGLE OF APPROXIMATELY 30' WITH THE MEMBER AND STARTED APPROXIMATELY 1/3 THE LENGTH OF THE NAIL FROM THE MEMBER END 13. NAILS SHALL ACHIEVE THE MINIMUM PENETRATION SPECIFIED IN THE TABLE BELOW. NAILS SHALL NOT BE DRIVEN CLOSER TOGETHER THAN THE MINIMUM SPACING NOR CLOSER TO THE MEMBERS END OR EDGE THAN 1/2 THE MINIMUM SPACING. HOLES SHALL BE BORED WHERE NECESSARY TO PREVENT SPLITTING. COMMM VME NAL PRO LIMES PENNY WEIGHT (SIZE) NAIL DIAMETER MINIMUM PENETRATION AND SPACING 6d .113 1.36" 8d .131 1.57" 10d .148 1.78" 16d .162 1.94" 20d .192 2.30" * PENETRATION INTO THE PIECE RECEIVING THE POINT 14. NAILS USED IN PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER SHALL BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED. 3 � NAILING SCHEDULE 15. BRIDGING TO JOIST, TOENAIL EACH END. 2-8d 16. SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING, BLOCKING, FACE NAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16d 0 16" O.C. 17. TOP PLATE TO STUD, END NAIL. . . . . . . . . 2-16d FOR 2x4 (NOT REQUIRED WHERE A35 3-16d FOR 2x6 ANCHORS ARE USED) 4-16d FOR 2x8 18. STUD TO SOLE PLATE . 4-8d TOENAILS (USE ONE HALF OF REQUIRED TOE NAILS OR 2-16d ENDNAILS ON ONE SIDE WHERE A35 ANCHORS W/ 2x SILL ARE USED). 2x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8d TOENAILS OR 3-16d ENDNAILS W/ 2x SILL 2x8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8d TOENAILS OR 4-16d ENDNAILS W/ 2x SILL 19. DOUBLE STUDS, FACE NAILS . . . . . . . . . . . 16d 0 12" O.C. STAGGERED 20. DOUBLE TOP PLATES, FACE NAILS. . . . . . . . 16d 0 16" O.C. 21. TOP PLATES, LAPS AT INTERSECTIONS, FACE NAILS 2-16d 22. CEILING JOIST TO PLATE TOENAIL 3-16d 23. STUD TO CONTINUOUS HEADER, TOENAIL. 4-8d 24. CEILING JOIST, LAPS OVER PARTITIONS, FACE NAILS. . . . . . . 3-16d 25. CEILING JOIST TO PARALLEL RAFTERS, FACE NAILS. . . . . . . 3-16d 26. 1" BRACE TO EACH STUD AND PLATE, FACE NAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8d 27. DOUBLE RAFTERS, FACE NAIL . . . . . . . . . . 16d 0 12" O.C. 28. BUILT UP STUDS . . . . . . 16d 0 24" O.C. 29. BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS OR RAFTERS TO JOIST OR RAFTERS TOENAILS, EACH SIDE, EACH END . . . . . . . . 2-1Od TO JOIST OR RAFTER BEARINGS TOENAILS EACH END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10d 30. BLOCKING BETWEEN STUDS . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16d OR 2-10d TOENAILS 31. 1x8, OR LESS, SHEATHING EACH BEARING . . . . 2-8d 32. BLOCKING BETWEEN JOISTS OR RAFTERS TO TOP PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8d TOENAILS 33. CEILING JOISTS TO TOP PLATE. . . . . . . . . . 3-8d TOENAILS 34. JOIST TO SILL OR GIRDER, TOE NAIL • • • • • • . 3-8d 35. 1"x6" SUBFLOOR OR LESS TO EACH JOIST, FACE NAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8d 2 STAPLES 1 3/4" 36. 2" SUBFLOOR TO JOIST OR GIRDER, BLIND AND FACE NAIL. . . . . . . . . . . • • • 2-16d 37. BUILT-UP HEADER, TWO PIECES WITH 1/2- SPACER • • . • • • • • • • • • . . . 16d 016" O.C. ALONG EACH END 38. CONTINUED HEADER, TWO PIECES 16d 016" O.C. ALONG EACH END 39. 1" BRACE TO EACH STUD AND PLATE, FACE NAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8d 40. BUILT-UP GIRDERS AND BEAMS, 2" LUMBER LAYERS • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10d NAIL EACH LAYER AS FOLLOW: 32" O.C. AT TOP AND BOTTOM AND STAGGERED. 41. ROOF RAFTERS TO RIDGE, VALLEY TWO NAILS AT ENDS AND AT OR HIP RAFTERS: EACH SPLICE. TOE NAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16d FACE NAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 3-16d 42. RAFTERS TIES TO RAFTERS, FACE. . . . . . . . 3-8d 43. ALL NAILS EXPOSED TO THE WEATHER SHALL BE GALVANIZED. 44. JOIST TO LEDGER 3- 16d (ONLY 0 JOISTS W/ TOTAL LENGTH OF 4' OR LESS 45. JOISTS/TRUSSES OR RAFTERS AT BEARING, TOENAIL EACH SIDE. . 2-10d 46. CEILING/SOFFIT JOISTS TO PERPENDICULAR LEDGER/BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16d OR FM HANGER 0 2x4 4-16d OR FM HANGER 0 2x6 5-16d OR FM HANGER 0 2x8 6-16d OR FM HANGER 0 2x10 7-16d OR FM HANGER 0 202 FM HANGER 0 WOOD I -JOIST <2x2x3/16 W/ (2) 1/2" 0 x 3" LAG BOLTS TO SILL PLATE, TYP. LAP PLATES 48" AT TOP PLATE SPLICES 4 -0 SPLICE- USE 12-16d MUST BE CENTERED EACH SIDE OF SPLICE 3/16 ON A STUD SEE FRAMING DETAILS TOP OF FOOTING 1 FOR ADDITIONAL SPLICE �= REQUIREMENTS IF GIVEN TOP PLATE SPLICE DOUBLE TOP PLATE (2) FOOTING BARS OR FRAMING STUDS ADDITIONAL FOOTING BARS. ONE EA SIDE OF TUBE 12 IBC SILL PLATE HSS 3x3x3/16 STANTON BRACE 0 10' O.0 (MAX.) & AT ENDS OF SILL PLATE THAT DO NOT STOP 0 A FULL HEIGHT POST. 12 NOTES: 1. HOLDOWN BOLTS SHALL NOT REPLACE SILL ANCHOR BOLTS. 2. ANCHOR BOLTS WITH UPSET THREADS SHALL NOT BE USED. 3. SILL PL W/ HOLE OR NOTCH LARGER THAN THE SILL WIDTH SHALL REQUIRE EXTRA ANCHOR BOLTS, SAME AS AT END OF SILL PIECE. 4. HEADER / BEAM SIZES ARE TYP. U.N.O. OR DETAILED OTHERWISE 5. SEE NAILING SCHEDULE FOR TYP. NAILING U.N.O. 6. A WALL STUD MUST BE PLACED UNDER ALL ROOF TRUSSES BEARING ON A WALL THAT ARE OVER 20' IN LENGTH OR IN BUILDINGS SUPPORTING SNOW LOADS (SEE DESIGN CRITERIA ON S1.1 TO SEE IF SNOW LOADS ARE APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT) TYP. UNO. STUDS MAY BE PLACED 0 12" O.C. 0 CONTRACTOR OPTION. 7. A WALL STUD MUST BE PLACED UNDER ALL FLOOR TRUSSES BEARING ON A WALL THAT ARE OVER 18' IN LENGTH OR IN BUILDINGS SUPPORTING SNOW LOADS (SEE DESIGN CRITERIA ON S1.1 TO SEE IF SNOW LOADS ARE APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT) TYP. U.N.O. 8. A DOUBLE WALL STUD (TRIPLE 0 4" WALLS) MUST BE PLACED UNDER ALL BEAMS & MULTIPPLE TRUSSES BEARING ON THE WALL, (TRIPLE (QUADDRUPLE 0 4" WALLS) 0 MEMBERS OVER 18' IN LENGTH OR IN BUILDINGS SUPPORTING SNOW LOADS. SEE DESIGN CRITERIA ON S1.1 TO SEE IF SNOW LOADS ARE APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT) TYP. U.N.O. 9. GWLAM BEAMS SHOULD GET STANDARD CAMBER "UP" U.N.O. 10. WHERE A DIMENSION LUMBER BEAM IS SPECIFIED THE CONTRACTOR MAY CHOOSE TO USE A GWLAM BEAM OF EQUAL OR GREATER NOMINAL WIDTH & DEPTH. 11. ALL GWLAM BEAMS SHALL BE SUPPORTED BY A (WALL WIDTH x WALL WIDTH) POST (ie: 2x6 STUD WALL - USE 6x6 DF#2 POST) 12. THE STUDS IN A MULTI STORY WALL MUST LINE UP FROM THE ROOF TO THE FOUNDATION ADD ADDITIONAL STUDS IF NECCASSARY. 13. WHEN A BUILDING SUPPORTS SNOW LOADS USE THE HEADER OR BEAM SIZE THAT CORRESPONDS TO A MEMBER TWICE THE LENGTH AS THE ACTUAL SPAN (ie: A 6" WALL WITH A 6' OPENING / HEADER USE A 5 1/8"x12 GLULAM W/ (2) TRIMMER STUDS (REQUIRED FOR A 12' OPENIG) 14. INTERIOR WOOD FRAMED WALLS THAT ARE NON -BEARING & NON SHEARWALLS MAY HAVE A 2x SILL PLATE W/ HILT] X-DNI (.145 0) x 1' EMBED SHOT PINS 0 18" O.C. & EA END OF INDIVIDUAL PIECES OF SILL INPLACE OF EMBEDED ANCHOR BOLTS. 15. THE CONTRACTOR MUST COORDINATE & IF NECESSARY DECREASE THE SILL BOLT SPACING SO THAT THE TOTAL NUMBER OF SILL BOLTS REQ'D. ARE INSTALLED IN ALL SHEARWALL SILL PLATES (IE: IN A 4' SHEARWALL W/ SILL BOLTS SPACED 0 16" O/C & 9" OFF EA. END THERE SHOULD BE 48/16+1=4 SILL BOLT ANCHORS) 16. AT FULL HEIGHT / SHEARWALLS SUPPORTING JOISTS/TRUSS SPANS GREATER THAN 30',34',&38' (COMBINDED SPANS OF 30',34',&38' EACH SIDE OF THE WALL) USE 2x DF#1 STUDS 016" O.C., 2x SELECT STRUCT STUDS 016" O.C., & 3x DF#2 STUDS 016" O.C. RESPECTIVELY, TYP. (STUDS OVER HEADERS CAN BE 2x DF#2 0 16" O.C. U.N.O.) 17. ALL BEARING / SHEARWALLS MUST HAVE SHEATHING (PLYWOOD, OSB, OR GYPSUM BOARD) ON BOTH SIDES OF THE STUD WITH CODE MINIMUM ATTACHMENT OR BETTER, TYP. DOUBLE TOP PLATE SLOPE WHERE REQ'D. (USE 3x SHAPED PL 1 1 /2"MIIN./DIM. WHERE SLOPE IS REQ'D.) (4) 16d NAILS EACH END SIMPSON A35 T&B OF KING STUD & HDR. FOR OPN'GS LARGER THAN 6'-0" HOLDOWN IF REQUIRED - SEE FOUNDATION PLAN 7" MIN. SILL BOLT EMBED BREAK IN SILL PLATE SEE NOTE 15 FOR MORE INFO ON SILL BOLTS HEADER OR BEAM SPAN Il I II HEADER ORBEAM REQUIRED II OR BEAM NUMBER OF SPAN SIZE 13 TRIMMER STUDS II UP TO 4'-0" STUD W.x6 1 4'-0"TO 8'-0" STUD W.x8 1 II 8'-0"TO 10'-0" STUD W.x10 2 II 1O'-O"TO 12'-0" STUD W.x12 2 rt 12'-O"TO 14'-0" STUD W.x12 2GLLILAM II II II 14'-O"TO 16'-0" STUD W.03.5 2 II GLULAM GREATER THAN STUD W.x (1" OF W.x6 POST 16'-0" DEPTH PER FOOT II II OF HEADER SPAN) II (2) 2x DF#2 SILL PLATE. SEE STANTON BRACE DETAIL FOR MORE 5/8"0 x 7" EMBED ANCHOR BOLTS ENDS U.N.O. (SEE NOTES) REQUIRED NUMBER OF TRIMMER STUDS CANNOT BE COUNTER SUNK FOR HOLDOWNS 4" 9" 9" BOLTS. AN ADDITIONAL PIECE OF FRAMING 4" IYP. TYP. TYP. MUST BE USED AT THE FACE OF TRIMMER STUD THAT CAN BE COUNTER SUNK TYP• (ie: ADDITIONAL TRIMMER STUD OR PLYWOOD, etc.) UP TO 3'-0" OPENING USE 1-2x STUD 3'-0" -8'-0" OPENING USE 2-2x STUDS 8'-12' OPENING USE 3- 2x KING STUDS 12'+ OPENING USE 3-2x KING STUDS & BRACE HEADER BACK TO ROOF FRAMING. - 2x STUDS 0 16"o.c. - (1) 2x TRIMMER STUDS 0 0'-12' HEADERS 4x OR (2-2x) 012'-16' HEADERS USE 6x POST UNDER ALL OTHER HEADERS, U.N.O. 2x STAGG. BLOCKING 0 SHEATHING EDGES, TYP. 8'-0" MAX. WHEN THIS DIMENSION IS GREATER THAN 4' USE (4) 2x SILL PLATE MEMEBERS 0 BOTTOM OF OPENINGS WIDER THAN 4' 7 2x BLOCKING WHERE ANCHOR BOLT OCCURS AT STUD �- SILL PLATE, SEE GENERAL WOOD NOTES & FOUNDATION PLANS A35, TYP. SEE PLAN FOR SIZE & SPACING, 48" O.C. MAX. 4 � NP. WOOD WALL FRAMING PLUS TYP. HEADER AND BEAM SIZES a 1. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OTHERWISE, BOLTS WHERE CALLED FOR ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE MACHINE MADE A307 TYPE. 2. ALL BOLTS AND LAG SCREWS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH STANDARD STEEL WASHERS UNDER HEAD AND NUTS WHICH BEAR ON WOOD ACCORDING TO THE WASHER SCHEDULE ON THIS SHEET, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE 3. BOLTS AND SCREWS SHALL BE TIGHTENED AT TIME OF ERECTION AND RE - TIGHTENED BEFORE CLOSING IN OR AT COMPLETION OF JOB. 4. SILL PLATES OF INTERIOR WALLS THAT ARE COVERED WITH STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD (SHEAR PANEL) AND EXTERIOR WALLS, SHALL BE FOUNDATION GRADE REASSURE TREATED D.F. 2x OR 3x (SEE SHEARWALL SCHEDULE) THICK AND OF SAME WIDTH AS STUDS. ALL OTHER WALLS THE SAME EXCEPT PLATES SHALL BE 2x THICK PRESSURE TREATED FIR. PRESSURE TREATED D.F. SHALL BEAR THE AWPB QUALITY MARK AND ALL CUTS OR HOLES SHALL BE RE -TREATED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 5. NO SILL PLATE PIECE SHALL END WITHIN THE LENGTH OF SHEAR PANEL UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN AND DETAILED ON THE PLANS. 6. BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE DOUBLE TOP PLATES, PROVIDE METAL FRAMING ANCHOR AT EACH SIDE OF TOP PLATE AT INTERSECTING WALL PARTITIONS. 7. PLYWOOD NOTES: A IN HORIZONTAL PLYWOOD DIAPHRAGMS, NO PANEL LESS THAN 24" WIDE SHALL BE USED. IN VERTICAL PLYWOOD DIAPHRAGMS, NO PANEL LESS THAN 12" WIDE SHALL BE USED. B. ANY PIECE OF PLYWOOD SPANNING ACROSS FEWER THAN 3 SUPPORTS SHALL BE BLOCKED ON ALL EDGES. C. SHEAR WALL PLYWOOD SHALL BE BLOCKED ALL EDGES. B. ANCHOR AND/OR SILL BOLTS WITH UPSET THREADS ARE NOT PERMITTED. 9. BOLT HOLES IN WOOD SHALL BE OVERSIZED BY 1/32". STANDARD WASHERS SHALL BE USED UNDER ALL HEADS AND NUTS BEARING ON WOOD 10. ALL BOLTS IN WOOD SHALL BE SPACED FOUR DIAMETERS MINIMUM AND SEVEN DIAMETERS MINIMUM END DISTANCE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 11. PREDRILL HOLES WHERE WOOD TENDS TO SPLIT. 12. LUMBER SHALL BE GRADED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/AF&PA NDS-2005 CLASSIFICATION. DEFINITION AND METHODS OF GRADING FOR ALL SPECIES OF LUMBER. SOLID SAWN LUMBER SHALL BE GRADE MARKED DOUGLAS FIR 19% MOISTER CONTENT MAXIMUM AS FOLLOWS: a) HORIZONTAL FRAMING MEMBERS (JOIST, RAFTERS, & BEAMS): D.F. #2 U.N.O. b) VERTICAL FRAMING MEMBERS (POST, 4x AND LARGER): D.F. #1 (STUDS 2x AND 3# D.F. #2 c) PLANKING, 2" OR MORE IN DEPTH: D.F. #2 13. STRUCTURAL GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER SHALL CONFORM TO ANSI / ARC STANDARD A190.1 AND ASTM D3737. THE FABRICATION SHALL BE PERFORMED IN AN APPROVED FABRICATIONS SHOP IN ACCORDANCE WITH CBC 1701 DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE OF STRUCTURAL GLUED- LAMINATED TIMBER. GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MATERIAL PROPERTIES: SIMPLE SPANS: COMBINATION 24F-V4 DF/DF, CANTILEVERED SPANS: COMBINATION 24F-V8 DF/ DF, FB=2400, PSI FV=165 PSI, E=1,800,00 PSI, Fc=650 PSI, U.N.O. 14. PLYWOOD SHALL CONFORM TO 2013 CBC STANDARDS CONSTRUCTION AND INDUSTRIAL PLYWOOD (5 PLY MIN.) PLYWOOD SHALL BE MANUFACTURED USING EXTERIOR GLUE. PLYWOOD DIAPHRAGMS AND SHEAR WALLS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED WITH PLYWOOD SHEETS NOT LESS THAN 4' BY 8'. EXCEPT AT BOUNDARIES AND CHANGES IN FRAMING WHERE MINIMUM SHEET DIMENSION SHALL BE 24" UNLESS ALL EDGES OF THE UNDERSIZED SHEETS ARE SUPPORTED BY FRAMING MEMBERS OR BLOCKING. FRAMING MEMBERS OR BLOCKING SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE EDGES OF ALL SHEETS IN SHEAR WALLS. DIAPHRAGM SHEATHING NAILS OR OTHER APPROVED SHEATHING CONNECTORS SHALL BE DRIVEN FLUSH BUT SHALL NOT FRACTURE THE SURFACE OF THE SHEATHING. SPAN RATING MUST MEET OF EXCEED SUPPORT SPACING FOR THE GIVEN APPLICATION. 15. LUMBER SHALL NOT BE CUT OR NOTCHED UNLESS APPROVED, IN WRITING, BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. 16. ENDS OF WOOD GIRDERS ENTERING MASONRY OR CONCRETE WALLS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A 1/2" AIR SPACE ON TOPS SIDES AND ENDS. 17. THE NUMBER AND SIZE OF NAILS CONNECTING WOOD MEMBERS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THAT SET FORTH IN UBC FOR STANDARD CONSTRUCTION. 18. COLUMNS: SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR GRADE REQUIRED. EXPOSED COLUMNS SHALL BE SET PLUMB WITHIN f 1/8" 19. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE CONVENTIONAL FRAMING TECHNIQUES WHEN FRAMING THIS STRUCTURE. WHEN THE DETAILS OR PLANS DON'T SHOW OTHERWISE, CONTACT THE ENGINEER WITH ANY FRAMING QUESTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. 20. ALL METAL CONNECTORS IN THESE PLANS ARE MANUFACTURED BY SIMPSON STRONG TIE. THE CONTRACTOR MAY USE A SIMILAR PRODUCT BY A DIFFERENT MANUFACTURE IF THE STRUCTURAL VALUES FOR THAT PRODUCT ARE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN FOR THE PRODUCT SPECIFIED. THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE DOCUMENTION THAT PROVIDES A SIDE BY SIDE COMPARISON OF THE TWO PRODUCTS FOR A GENERAL REVIEW FROM THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. 21. ALL NEW FRAMING LUMBER SHALL HAVE 19 % MAX. MOISTURE CONTENT WHEN THE ROUGH FRAMING PACKAGE IS FINISHED AND BEFORE ANY ADDITIONAL INTERIOR FRAMING BEGINS. 22. WHEN COUNTERSINKING IS REQUIRED BY A DETAIL IN THESE PLANS. THE DEPTH OF THE COUNTERSINK CAN ONLY BE 1/4" GREATER THAN THE THICKNESS OF THE BOLT HEAD OR NUT & WASHER. 23. PROVIDE A DOUBLE ROW OF BN TO ALL FRAMING ON IDENTIFIED STRUT AND/OR COLLECTOR LINES (ie: IF PLYWOOD EDGES ARE ON A STRUT AND/OR COLLECTOR LINE THERE WILL BE 4 ROWS OF BN STAGGERED IF THE STRUT AND/OR COLLECTOR IS AT THE EDGE OF A DIAPHRAGM OR IN THE MIDDLE OF A SHEET OF PLYWOOD (NOT 0 EDGE OF PLYWOOD) THERE WILL BE 2 ROWS ON BN STAGGERED TYP.) 24. ALL LAG SCREWS SHALL HAVE LEAD HOLES AS FOLLOWS a) THE CLEARANCE HOLE FOR THE SHANK SHALL HAVE THE SAME DIAMETER AS THE SHANK, AND THE SAME DEPTH OF PENETRATION AS THE LENGTH OF UNTHREADED SHANK. b) THE LEAD HOLE FOR THE THREADED PORTION SHALL HAVE A DIAMETER EQUAL TO 60% TO 75% OF THE SHANK DIAMETER IN THE WOOD AND A LENGTH EQUAL TO AT LEAST THE LENGTH OF THE THREADED " PORTION. THE LARGER PERCENTILE SHALL APPLY TO LAG SCREWS OF GREATER DIAMETERS. THE THREADED PORTION OF THE LAG SCREW SHALL BE INSERTED IN ITS LEAD HOLE BY TURNING WITH A WRENCH NOT BY DRIVING WITH A HAMMER. SOAP OR OTHE LUBRICANT SHALL BE USED ON THE LAG SCREWS OR IN THE LEAD HOLES TO FACILITATE INSERTION AND PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE LAG SCREW. GENERAL WOOD NOTES WN100-2012 IBC DRILL 3/4"0 HOLE AND C"' NOTCH AS SHOWN. USE T DETAIL WHERE NOTCH MORE THAN 3/ DO NOT OVERCUT USE THIS DETAIL- \45* WHERE NOTCH IS LESS THAN 3/4 WOOD JOIST NOTCH D/3 MIN. NO DRILLED HOLES OR SLOTS IN THIS AREA-c \ \ COMBINED *ffl 1) I - ALLOWABLE IS D/10 D = DEPTH o O____0--o c F MEMBER - D D D_ I D/3 I_, c FLOOR & ROOF BEAMS / JOIST NOTE: 1. HOLES & NOTCHES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN BEAMS IN COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION W/O WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. THEY ARE OK AS NOTED IN RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION. 2. VALUES ARE HALF OF THOSE SHOWN ABOVE 0 GLULAMS OR OTHER MANUFACTURED BEAMS. 3. THESE VALUES DO NOT APPLY TO MANUFACTURED TRUSSES OR JOIST. DO NOT NOTCH OR DRILL HOLES IN MANUFACTURED TRUSSES OR JOIST W/O/ THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD & THE I/IDaEWLlw© Ali SWAM KYAL1i l/L = KW%M �3i E�i1� �L31� �1�i I®LDi t'i■ �ILii LMNU l iQ AL.Jd I WI -A EM EII/LA EWM Dili■ MWALA ��■EWAA[W%AW ALAI DWLM NM REWLA LWALAl EWAI-A ■KW%A NO HOLES OR NOTCHES ARE ALLOWED IN THE TOP PLATE SPLICE ZONES. ALLOWABLE BORED HOLE DIA. IS 50% OF THE STUD WIDTH WHEN THE STUD IS DOUBLED NO MORE THAN TWO ADJACENT STUDS MAY BE BOREq. ALLOWABLE BORED HOLE IS 25% OF PLATE WIDTH ALLOWABLE BORED HOLE DIA. IS 25% OF ANY STUD 25% OF WIDTI-PO EDGE OF STUD CLEARANCE ES OF HOLE ALLOWABLE CUT OR NOTCH IS 25% OF WIDTH DOUBLE UP STUDS THAT HAVE wm ROOF OR FLOOR MEMBERS BING DIRECTLY OVER THE STUD WALLS NOTCHED STUD NO BORED HOLES MAY BE LOCATED AT EXTERIOR BEARING THE SAME SECTION OF STUD WHERE THE / SHEARWALLS & STUD IS CUT OR NOTCHED INTERIOR BEARING NOTE: NO NOTCHING IS ALLOWED IN TOP PLATES ALLOWABLE BORED HOLE IS 40% OF PLATE WIDTH �-ALLOWABLE CUT OR OF WIDTH 25% OF WIDTH MIN. EDGE OF STUD CLEARANCE ES OF ALLOWA BLE ABLE BORED HOLE IS 60% OF STUD WIDTH ,--NO BORED HOLES LOCATED MAY BE AT THE SAME SECTION OF STUD WHERE THE STUD IS CUT OR NOTCHED NON -BEARING INTERIOR SIZE SPUD WIDTH NOTCMNG WID1H HOLE DIAMETER NOM. I ACM W/ 1 25% 1 40% 1 25% 50% 60% 2x4 4• 1 3-1/2* 7 1-7 16 7 1-3 4 2-1/8- 2x6 6' S-1 2 1-3 8 2-1 4 1 1-3/8 1 2-3 4 3-5 16 2x8 8• 1 7-1 4 11-13/16-1 2-7/8- 1 1-3/16- 1 375 8• 4-3/8- DIES- HOLES AND NOTCHES ARE NOT TO BE LOCATED ADJACENT 1 UNSOUND OR LOOSE KNOTS. PREFERRED LOCATION OF NOTCH IS AT TOP OF MEMBER. 2 CUT AND NOTCH N Al v v y • � r NO REVISION REVIEWED FOR uj CODE COiMPLIANCE APPROVED J A N 0 4 2 01110 (n City Of Tukwila � LO BUILDING DIVISION 1 T CITY OF TUK ILA Q� O OCT 0 9 2015 1--- O PERMIT CENTER I - DRAWN BY- CHECKED BY. KS TT PROJECT NUMBER BYA# 15256 GN009 BRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 345 POLLASKY DIM CLOVIS, CALIFORNIA 93612 PHONE: (559) 323-9600 FAX: (559) 323-9633 EXPIRES 11-7-2015 DATE OF THIS PRINTING - NOTE& /W u. iw.- - hil i i, w-rli ll ff 1. THE CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY ALL EXISTING STRUCTURE IN LOCATIONS THAT ARE BEING EFFECTED BY THE TENANT IMPROVEMENT AND REPORT ANY DIFFERENCE FROM THESE PLANS TO THE ENGINEER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION OR FABRICATION BEGINS 2. THESE PLANS AND ANALYSIS ONLY ADDRESS THE LOCALIZED AREAS BEING EFFECTED BY THE CURRENT REMODEL AS SHOWN IN THESE PLANS. ALL OTHER ANALY915 (IF REQUIRED) ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY OTHERS. 5. SEE THE STANDARD DETAILS FOR MORE INFILL INFORMATION, TYR 4. DURING THE DEMOLITION OF ALL INTERIOR/EXTERIOR FRAMING (AS SHOWN ON THE DEMO PLAN) THE CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY THAT ALL FRAMING COMING OUT(IE: BEING DEMO'D) IS NOT LOAD BEARING OR IF IT 15 LOAD BEARING SHORING PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR MUST BE INSTALLED UNTIL PERMANENT STRUCTURE (AS SPECIFICALLY DETAILED IN THESE PLANS) IS COMPLETELY CONSTRUCTED. THE CONTRACTOR MUST CONTACT THE ENGINEER BEFORE CONTINUING WITH CONSTRUCTION (IN THAT AREA) IF THERE ARE AREAS OF THE EXISTING STRUCTURE THAT APPEAR TO BE OR ARE LOAD BEARING (Le.: ALL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS SUCH AS BEAMS, WALLS, COLUMNS, FLOOR/ROOF FRAMING, ETC) AND ARE ON THE DEMO PLAN TO BE REMOVED BUT ARE NOT ADDRESSED WITH ADDITIONAL FRAMING IN THE STRUCTURAL PLANS BEFORE CONTINUING WITH CONSTRUCTION IN THAT AREA. 5. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. 0 LO U '7) N N > > .- O° � m � V U a U Q JE U U 7t `c N O ,- Z a � N M CL NO REVISION REVIEWED FOR, CODE COIAPLIANCE APPROVED AN 0 n r 016 Citj Of TukvviIa BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED ITY OF TUll"MILA OCT 0 9 2015 'ERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: I CHECKED BY: KS 0 W Z) r� w m r N 00 O O TT PROJECT NUMBER BYA# 15256 SHEET NUMBER SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 NBRAD YOUNG & ASSOCIATES, INC. D2v4d STRUCTURAL EGINEERING DIN345 POLLASKY CLOVIS, CALIFORNIA 93612 PHONE: (559) 323-9600 FAX (559) 323-9633 EXPIRES 11-7-2015 DATE OF THIS PRINTING - E a 0 12 cV 1 m C:) cV 0 0 - o Lij z CD 0 z 0 25 m d Ln = 0 z W 0 U RE-: I - W z w U _ 7D 0 V)i 0 0 � ¢ En 6j m5E CD oZ z ��� mo GENERAL NOTES: A. GENERAL 4. IF REQUIRED AND PRIOR TO STARTING WORK, ERECT TEMPORARY BARRIERS AROUND G. CHANGES IN WORK 1. THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, A.I.A. STANDARD THE PERIMETER OF THE PROJECT AND BASE BUILDING TOILET FACILITIES TO PREVENT 1. THE TENANT WITHOUT INVALIDATING THE CONTRACT, MAY ORDER EXTRA WORK OR MAKE FORM A201 - CURRENT EDITION, ARE HEREBY INCORPORATED INTO THIS DOCUMENT THE SPREAD OF DUST AND OTHER CONTAMINANTS TO ADJACENT AREAS OF THE CHANGES BY ALTERING, ADDING TO OR DEDUCTING FROM THE WORK - THE CONTRACT EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY MODIFIED BELOW. BUILDING. MAINTAIN DUST PROOF AND SOUND BARRIERS THROUGHOUT THE COURSE SUM BEING ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY. SUCH WORK SHALL BE EXECUTED UNDER THE OF CONSTRUCTION OR UNTIL NO LONGER REQUIRED. REMOVE BARRIERS AND REPAIR CONDITIONS OF THE ORIGINAL CONTRACT EXCEPT THAT ANY CLAIM FOR EXTENSIONS 2. CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL CAREFULLY REVIEW THE CONSTRUCTION ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY THEIR INSTALLATION TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES. OF TIME CAUSED THEREBY SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE CHANGE ORDER. DOCUMENTS. INFORMATION REGARDING THE COMPLETE WORK IS DISPERSED THROUGHOUT THE DOCUMENT SET AND CANNOT BE ACCURATELY DETERMINED WITHOUT 5. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL DEMOLISHED DEBRIS, MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND 2. CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL WORK WILL BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING FOR REVIEW BY THE REFERENCE TO THE COMPLETE DOCUMENT SET, FIXTURES BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THE CONTRACTOR WHO IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ITS - OWNER AND ARCHITECT AND SHOULD INCLUDE A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF THE SAFE REMOVAL FROM THE SITE. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIAL SHALL BE IN WORK, MATERIALS BEING USED, THE ROOM NUMBER OR AREA AFFECTED, AND THE 3. THE OWNER SHALL SECURE AND PAY FOR THE BUILDING PERMIT AND OTHER PERMITS ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RULES, REGULATIONS AND ORDINANCES OF AUTHORIZATION UNDER WHICH THE WORK IS BEING PERFORMED. AND GOVERNMENTAL FEES, LICENSES AND INSPECTIONS NECESSARY FOR PROPER AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. COORDINATE WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT. EXECUTION AND COMPLETION OF THE WORK. SCHEDULING OF APPROVALS AND H. SITE CONSIDERATIONS INSPECTIONS BY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION OVER THE WORK IS THE 6. PATCH ALL EXISTING OR NEWLY DAMAGED AREAS TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES IN 1. DEMOLITION WORK SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE LANDLORD TO MINIMIZE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. QUALITY, TEXTURE AND COLOR. DISRUPTION AND INCONVENIENCE TO OTHER TENANTS IN OCCUPIED BUILDINGS. MAINTAIN SAFE MEANS OF ACCESS AND EGRESS TO OCCUPIED TENANT SPACES. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF 7. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF ALL TRENCHING AND UNDER- 1.1. DAILY CLEAN-UP - BROOM OR CLEAN. AS AN ALTERNATIVE, OWNER MAY ELECT TO WORK. GROUND WORK WITH SUBCONTRACTORS. PERFORM CLEAN-UP AND DEDUCT COSTS FROM GENERAL CONTRACTORS CONTRACT. 5. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONVEY DESIGN INTENT AND THE GENERAL TYPE OF D. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION DESIRED ARE INTENDED TO APPLY TO THE FINEST QUALITY OF 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL GRID LINE COORDINATES AND CHECK THEM AGAINST 2• PROVIDE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB THROUGHOUT "LEAVE -OUT" AREA (BACK HALF OF CONSTRUCTION, MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP THROUGHOUT. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON PLANS AND DETAILS BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. ENTIRE LEASE AREA).REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS: ARCHITECT AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER SHALL BE NOTIFIED OF ANY DISCREPANCY A. COMPACTION OF SOIL 6. ITEMS NOTED "BY OWNER" IN THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE DURING STAKING. B. DOWELING NEW AND EXISTING SLAB 1 OWNER AND INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR HIS FORCES AS REQUIRED. C. THICKNESS OF CONCRETE/ AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (IF REQUIRED) THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL ACCESSORY 2. ALL LANDSCAPE MATERIALS DISPLACED OR DISTURBED AS A RESULT OF CONSTRUCTION D. ANY ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, I.E. REINFORCING. MATERIALS REQUIRED TO INSTALL SUCH ITEMS AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS. SHALL BE REPLACED OR REPAIRED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 3. MAINTAIN THE INTEGRITY OF RATED PARTITIONS AND OTHER FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. 7. PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL OR COMMENCEMENT OF WORK, THE CONTRACTOR 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIRMLY ANCHOR PARTITIONS PER JURISDICTION AND REPAIR OR REPLACE DAMAGED PORTIONS WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH AND BIDDING SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE PROJECT SITE TO COMPARE THE SCOPE INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND USE METAL TRIM ACCESSORIES AT EXPOSED CORNERS, EXISTING AND HAVE REPAIR WORK APPROVED BY THE BUILDING INSPECTOR. OF WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND OTHER CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WITH EXISTING EDGES AND ENDS IN PLASTER AND DRYWALL PARTITIONS. 4. WHERE APPLIES THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE RETURN AIR OPENINGS IN CONDITIONS. PROMPTLY REPORT ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INCONSISTENCIES OR OTHER PARTITIONS TO DECK AND ABOVE CEILINGS TO MATCH AREA CALCULATION DETRIMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE ARCHITECT. IF THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO PERFORM 4. PROVIDE WOOD BLOCKING FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED PLUMBING FIXTURES, TOILET REQUIREMENTS AS SHOWN ON ENGINEERING DRAWINGS. OPENINGS IN DEMISING AND THIS OBLIGATION, THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL COSTS AND ACCESSORIES, CABINETS, TABLES, KITCHEN EQUIPMENT & ALL ITEMS REQUIRED TO BE SOUND ATTENUATED WALLS TO HAVE SOUND BOOTS. OPENINGS IN FIRE RATED WALLS DAMAGES ASSOCIATED WITH ACTIONS REQUIRED TO CORRECT UNREPORTED ATTACHED TO WALLS. SHALL HAVE FIRE OR SMOKE DAMPERS AS REQUIRED BY CODE. OPENINGS SHALL BE CONDITIONS THAT OTHERWISE COULD HAVE BEEN AVOIDED. SUFFICIENTLY FRAMED FOR VIBRATION. 5. ALL CONCEALED PLYWOOD, WOOD BLOCKING, AND WOOD STUD/JOIST FRAMING SHALL 8. IN THE EVENT THAT DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND/OR BE TREATED TO MEET UL FIRE RETARDANT REQUIREMENTS, 5. PRIOR TO SHUTDOWN, IF A BUILDING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICE SHUT SPECIFICATIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIRECT RFI'S IN WRITING TO THE DOWN IS REQUIRED FOR THIS WORK NOTICE SHALL BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S RESPONSE TO THE 6. ALL MATERIALS USED IN UNFINISHED ATTIC SPACE SHALL BE NON-COMBUSTIBLE. ANY CONTRACTOR A MINIMUM OF (72) HOURS IN ADVANCE OF THE SHUT DOWN (OR PER CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR INFORMATION SHALL NOT BE CAUSE FOR A CHANGE IN THE WOOD SHALL BE UL RATED NON-COMBUSTIBLE. LANDLORD REQ'S). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN APPROVAL FROM AUTHORITIES CONTRACT AMOUNT UNLESS IT IS AGREED THAT THE ORIGINAL SCOPE OF WORK HAS HAVING JURISDICTION PRIOR TO SHUT DOWN AND SHALL NOT OVERLY INCONVENIENCE BEEN ALTERED BY THE RESPONSE. 7. DO NOT PUNCH OR USE METAL DECK TO SUPPORT SUSPENDED CEILING. SUSPENDED BUILDING OCCUPANTS. METAL FRAMING -CEILING AND METAL STUD PARTITION FRAMING SHALL BE SUPPORTED 9. THE SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL CONSULTANT DRAWINGS ARE SUPPLEMENTAL TO THE FROM STRUCTURAL STEEL ROOF FRAME. 6. BUILDINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH NATURAL VENTILATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO SECTION 1202.4, OR MECHANICAL VENTILATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE THE INSTALLATION OF ANY 8. IF REQUIRED BY LANDLORD, ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS SHALL BE CUT, FLASHED AND INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE. 2003IBC SECTION 1203.1. OF THE CONSULTANTS WORK AND TO BRING ANY DISCREPANCIES OR CONFLICTS TO THE SEALED BY THE LANDLORD'S BUILDING ROOFING SYSTEM INSTALLER IN ORDER TO ARCHITECT AND CBC'S ATTENTION FOR CLARIFICATION. IMPROPERLY INSTALLED WORK MAINTAIN THE ROOF SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND WARRANTY. SUBJECT TO FAIR MARKET 7. SUPERINTENDENT TO HAVE: COMPUTER, DIGITAL CAMERA, WIRELESS CARD AND CELL SHALL BE CORRECTED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AT HIS EXPENSE AND AT NO PRICING. PHONE ON -SITE AT ALL TIMES AND BE KNOWLEDGABLE IN USE AND FUNCTION. EXPENSE TO THE ARCHITECT, HIS CONSULTANTS OR THE OWNER. 9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS REQUIRED FOR MECHANICAL, 8. IN BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTED WITH POST -TENSIONED CONCRETE, LOCATE P-T TENDONS 10. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS PER LOCAL BUILDING CODES. LOCATIONS BY X-RAY DETECTION PRIOR TO STARTING OF ANY CUTTING OR DRILLING. COORDINATE PERFORM WORK TO MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT AS PART OF SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. ALL SUCH ACTIVITIES WITH THE LANDLORD. THE BID DOCUMENTS. CONTRACTORS WORK IS SUBJECT TO INSPECTION BY THE BUILDING PERSONNEL FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT. 10. CEILING JOINTS IN THE FIELD SHALL BE SQUARE, LEVEL AND PERFECTLY ALIGNED WITH 9• WHERE NEW STOREFRONT IS INSTALLED, STOREFRONT MUST BE SELF SUPPORTING. ANY EACH OTHER AND WITH THE RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES. ALL RECESSED FIXTURES ATTACHMENT TO DEMISING WALL, NEUTRAL SOFFIT CONSTRUCTION, OR ROOF 11. SEE THE LANDLORD WORK LETTER AS PART OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, SHALL BE SET FLUSH INTO CEILING. STRUCTURE SHALL BE FOR LATERAL STABILITY ONLY. DO NOT SUPPORT FROM LANDLORD'S SOFFIT, ROOF FRAME OR COLUMNS. 12. PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH A CONSTRUCTION 11. NEW PIPE, CONDUIT, AND DUCT PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES ARE TO BE SCHEDULE SHOWING THE CHRONOLOGICAL PHASES OF WORK, SCHEDULE OF VALUES, CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AN UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY TESTED 10. WHERE NEW STOREFRONT IS INSTALLED, PROVIDE NON-COMBUSTIBLE BEAM TO AND INSURANCE CERTIFICATE. THIS SCHEDULE SHALL INDICATE ORDERING LEAD TIMES, DESIGN. SUPPORT STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION IF NECESSARY. DO NOT SUPPORT FROM LANDLORD'S SOFFIT, ROOF FRAME OR COLUMNS. A BEGINNING AND END DATE FOR EACH PHASE AND A PROJECTED COMPLETION DATE FOR THE ENTIRE PROJECT. 12. WIRING AND CONDUIT IS TO BE CONCEALED IN BOTH NEW AND EXISTING PARTITIONS WITH ALL OUTLETS, SWITCHES AND SIMILAR DEVICES MOUNTED IN RECESSED JUNCTION 11. PLUMBING TO BE ABANDONED SHALL BE CAPPED PER CODE BEHIND EXISTING FINISHED 13. THE CONTRACTOR IS WHOLLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING BOXES WITH FLUSH COVER PLATES. SURFACE MOUNTED CONDUIT, WIREMOLD, SURFACES. EXISTING SURFACES SHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT OF THE WORK EFFORTS FOR ALL ENGINEERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, CRAFTSMEN, AND OUTLETS, ETC. WILL NOT BE PERMITTED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FINISHES. TRADESMEN REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE JOB AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING THEM WITH FULL SETS OF CURRENT DRAWINGS, ADDENDA, CHANGE MEMOS 13. VERIFY EXACT DIMENSIONS OF ALL OWNER AND/ OR TENANT SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT, 12. WOOD CASEWORK SHALL CONFORM TO ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (Awl) AND OTHER SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION PERTINENT TO THE COMPLETION OF THE FEATURES AND FIXTURES TO ASSURE A PROPER FIT WHERE EQUIPMENT, FEATURES, AND "PREMIUM GRADE" QUALITY STANDARDS AND SHALL BE "FLUSH OVERLAY" WORK. FIXTURES ARE SHOWN BUILT-IN TO NEW MILLWORK, UNDER COUNTER AND BETWEEN CONSTRUCTION UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. NEW AND EXISTING PARTITIONS. 14. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF THE VARIOUS TRADE ITEMS 13. PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK SHALL CONFORM TO ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WITHIN THE SPACE AND ABOVE THE CEILINGS (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, 14. COMMUNICATION, DATA, SECURITY, AND SIMILAR SYSTEMS WILL BE FURNISHED AND INSTITUTE (Awl) "CUSTOM GRADE" QUALITY STANDARDS AND SHALL BE "FLUSH STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, LIGHT FIXTURES, CEILING SYSTEM AND INSTALLED BY THE OWNER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OVERLAY" CONSTRUCTION UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. ANY SPECIAL STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS REQUIRED) AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ITS SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH THE MAINTAINING THE FINISH CEILING HEIGHT ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR INDICATED IN THE OWNER'S VENDORS AND PROVIDE CONDUIT, BOXES AND OTHER ROUGH -IN 14. CASEWORK SHALL BE SCRIBED TO WALL OR CEILING. CONTRACTOR SHALL DRAWINGS AND THE FINISH SCHEDULE. REQUIREMENTS TO FACILITATE FINAL WIRING INSTALLATION PER CODE OR LEASE COORDINATE WITH OTHER INVOLVED TRADES. REQUIREMENTS. 15. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR 15. SPRINKLER HEADS AT STOREFRONT AND DISPLAY WINDOWS MUST BE FLUSH TYPE WITH TRADES. TEMPORARY LIGHTING SHALL MEET OR EXCEED OSHA STANDARDS. 15. G.C. TO ARRANGE RE -KEY ALL LOCKS AT BUILDING TURNOVER AND IN THE PRESENCE OF COVER PLATES PAINTED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT CEILING COLOR. DINING AND THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER OR CBC OPERATION REPRESENTATIVE. LOCKSETS SHALL KITCHEN MUST HAVE SEMI -RECESSED HEADS WITH ESCUTCHEON RINGS PAINTED TO 16. UNLESS OTHERWISE STIPULATED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, THE CONTRACTOR BE "KEYED" IN ACCORDANCE WITH OWNER REQUIREMENTS. "KEYS" ARE TO BE MATCH THE ADJACENT CEILING COLOR. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROVISION, STORAGE AND PAYMENT OF ALL LABOR, DELIVERED TO OWNER PROPERLY TESTED. THE NUMBER OF MASTER AND PASS KEYS MATERIALS, TAXES, EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT, MACHINERY, SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT. 16. ASHALL BE UPDATED DAILY. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN VERIFICATION TRANSPORTATION AND OTHER FACILITIES NECESSARY FOR PROPER EXECUTION AND ATT THE HE SOLE EXPENSE OF THE GC INCLUDING ANY PROJECT DELAY DURING COMPLETION OF THE WORK WHETHER OR NOT IT IS SPECIFICALLY CALLED OUT OR 16. PROVIDE STANDARD IDENTIFICATION PLATE WITH TENANT NAME AND SPACE VERIFICATION AND/OR CORRECTION OF WORK. DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS. DESIGNATION/ADDRESS AS SPECIFIED THROUGH A COMMON MANUFACTURER BY THE LANDLORD. IF NOT LANDLORD STANDARD PROVIDED, PROVIDE A STANDARD 3" X 9" 17 G.C. TO ENSURE ALL TRADES ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE ENTIRE SET OF DRAWINGS. 17. THE CONTRACTOR WARRANTS TO THE OWNER THAT MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT LAMINATED PLASTIC, DARK COOL GRAY COLORED FACE WITH WHITE LETTERING ROUTED FURNISHED UNDER THE CONTRACT WILL MEET INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND BE NEW AND INTO FACE. FASTENED TO TENANT REAR EXIT SERVICE DOOR ON THE ACCESS 1. EXTRA MATERIALS OF GOOD QUALITY UNLESS OTHERWISE PERMITTED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CORRIDOR FACE. WORK WILL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS, FREE FROM DEFECTS 1. FURNISH EXTRA MATERIALS DESCRIBED BELOW, BEFORE INSTALLATION BEGINS, THAT AND WILL BE COMPLETED IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER ACCEPTABLE TO THE 17. PROVIDE WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD AT ALL TILE LOCATIONS, FRP, AND MATCH PRODUCTS INSTALLED AND THAT ARE PACKAGED WITH PROTECTIVE COVERING OWNER. MECHANICAL ROOM WALLS. FOR STORAGE AND IDENTIFIED WITH LABELS DESCRIBING CONTENTS. STORE IN DESIGNATED LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY OWNER. 18. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY CORRECT IN A PROFESSIONAL MANNER, AT NO COST 18. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLYING WITH LOCAL V.O.C. 1.1. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS: PROVIDE EXTRA PANELS EQUAL TO 2 PERCENT OF TO THE OWNER AND WITHOUT CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME, ALL NON -CONFORMING OR REGULATIONS FOR MATERIALS USED IN CONSTRUCTION. TOTAL FOR EACH TYPE USED BUT NOT LESS THAN 1 FULL CARTON. DEFECTIVE WORK AND DAMAGES CAUSED BY HIS WORK OR WORKMEN WHETHER 1.2. VINYL WOOD FLOORING: FURNISH NOT LESS THAN 10 LINEAR FEET FOR EACH 500 DISCOVERED BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. 19. SPACES BEING SURFACED SHALL BE CLOSED TO TRAFFIC AND OTHER WORK DURING LINEAR FEET OR FRACTION THEREOF, OF EACH DIFFERENT WEARING SURFACE AND COLOR OF FLOOR COVERING INSTALLED. THE LAYING OF FLOORING, STONE, WOOD, OR OTHER MATERIAL. FINISHED FLOORS 1.3. CARPET TILE: FULL-SIZE UNITS EQUAL TO 5 PERCENT OF AMOUNT INSTALLED FOR 19. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT ALL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS FOR PROPER SHALL BE COVERED AFTER INSTALLATION FOR PROTECTION. EACH TYPE INDICATED, BUT NOT LESS THAN 10 SQUARE YARDS. OPERATIONS UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF PROJECT. 1.4. PAINT: PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF ONE GALLON OF PAINT FOR EACH COLOR USED. 20. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THEIR OWN CLEAN-UP DURING 1.5. TILE: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY PERCENT OF EXTRA MATERIAL AT BID. 20. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY CLEAN THE ENTIRE PROJECT SITE AND ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION. IF CONTRACTOR FAILS TO PROVIDE SUCH CLEAN-UP, ANOTHER AFFECTED SPACES TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE DIRECTED TO PERFORM THE CLEAN-UP AND THE NEGLIGENT . CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY THE ASSOCIATED BACK-UP CHARGES AS DEEMED 21. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING REPORTS AND APPROPRIATE BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. GUARANTEES TO THE ARCHITECT OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. A. CITY ELECTRICAL INSPECTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH CITY E. FIRE / LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. 1. ALL REQUIRED PERMITS AND APPROVALS MUST BE OBTAINED FROM THE FIRE B. CITY PLUMBING INSPECTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH CITY DEPARTMENT BEFORE BUILDINGS ARE OCCUPIED. REQUIREMENTS C. CITY FIRE MARSHALL'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH CITY REQUIREMENTS. 2. MAINTAIN THE FUNCTION AND INTEGRITY OF EXISTING FIRE, LIFE/SAFETY AND SECURITY D. CITY BUILDING INSPECTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH CITY REQUIREMENTS. SYSTEMS. E. STATE DIVISION OF HEALTH CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH CITY REQUIREMENTS. F. CITY CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. 3. PROVIDE OCCUPANCY SIGNS CONFORMING TO APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE G. ALL OTHER REQUIRED INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS. REQUIREMENTS OR LOCAL JURISDICTION, INCLUDING BLACK FRAME. 22. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO ACCEPT AND STORE ALL OWNER 4. THE G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL REQUIRED EXIT SIGNS AND FIRE DELIVERIES. EXTINGUISHERS IN TYPE, NUMBER AND LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT FIELD INSPECTOR. 23. G.C. SHALL INSTALL PVC TUBE IN OFFICE FOR A COMPLETE SET OF AS -BUILT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 5. DURING CONSTRUCTION THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER WITH A RATING OF NOT LESS THAN 2-A WITHIN (75 FT.) FOOT TRAVEL 24. 21. G.0 TO PROVIDE ALL DUMPSTER REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL OWNER SUPPLIED ITEMS AS DISTANCE TO ALL PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING ON EACH FLOOR. PART OF CONTRACT. F. REQUIRED APPROVALS AND SUBMITTALS 25. 22. WHERE THERE IS EVIDENCE THAT WORK OF ONE TRADE WILL INTERFERE WITH WORK 1. WHERE THE TERMS "APPROVED EQUAL", "OTHER APPROVED", "EQUAL TO", "ACCEPTABLE" OF OTHER TRADES, ALL TRADES SHALL MEET ON JOB SITE TO WORK OUT SPACE OR OTHER GENERAL QUALIFYING TERMS ARE USED, IT SHALL BE UNDERSTOOD THAT CONDITIONS AND MAKE SATISFACTORY ADJUSTMENTS TO INSTALLATION OF THE NEW REFERENCE IS MADE TO THE RULING AND JUDGMENT OF THE CBC PROJECT MANAGER WORK. CONTRACTORS SHALL VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS OF ALL DEVICES AND PRIOR TO AND MUST BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO PURCHASE OR USE OR INCLUSION IN ROUGH -IN. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE AT THEIR OWN EXPENSE, FOR THE BID. THE REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF ANY PART OF THEIR WORK. IF SAME WAS INSTALLED WITHOUT CONSULTING WITH OTHER TRADES BEFORE INSTALLING THEIR 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE (1 0) WORKING DAYS FROM AWARD OF THE CONTRACT TO WORK. SUBMIT SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED PRODUCTS OR WORK FOR REVIEW BY OWNER AND SHALL INCLUDE CUT SHEETS WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND REASONS FOR B. DRAWING CONVENTIONS SUBSTITUTION. THE OWNER SHALL RESPOND IN (10) WORKING DAYS FROM RECEIPT OF 1. DIMENSIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER SCALE ON THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS. SUBMITTAL. NO SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE ACCEPTED AFTER THE INITIAL TIME LIMIT HAS NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER OF DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN EXPIRED. DRAWING DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW, SIGN, DATE AND SUBMIT A MINIMUM OF (3) SETS OF 2. PLAN DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN TO FACE OF SUBSTRATE TO FACE OF SUBSTRATE UNLESS COMPLETE AND DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS, FINISHES, FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT CUT NOTED OTHERWISE. SHEETS TO THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER FOR REVIEW. THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER SHALL HAVE (10) WORKING DAYS TURNAROUND TIME FROM RECEIPT OF SUBMITTAL. ALL 3. PARTITION THICKNESS IS DERIVED FROM DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTITION CONSTRUCTION SHOP DRAWINGS AND CUT SHEETS SIGNED "REVIEWED" SHALL SUPERSEDE ORIGINAL AND/OR DESIGNATED DETAIL DRAWINGS IN DESIGN APPEARANCE ONLY. CONTRACTORS SHALL ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR ERRORS IN THEIR DRAWINGS. 4. PARTITIONS THAT INTERSECT INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR GLAZED WALLS ARE TO CENTER OF MULLIONS AND PERPENDICULAR TO EXTERIOR WALL UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE. 4. IN THE EVENT THAT THE AFOREMENTIONED DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, ETC. ARE NOT SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME FULL 5. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, PARTITIONS AND OTHER ELEMENTS ON THE DRAWING THAT RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE REPLACEMENT, CORRECTION OR ACQUISITION OF PRODUCTS ARE DRAWN AT AN OBLIQUE ANGLE ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED AT A 45-DEGREE ANGLE TO TO COMPLY WITH OWNER'S SPECIFICATION AND APPROVAL. THE MAIN GRID. 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CHALK LINES ON THE SLAB OF PARTITIONS FOR 6. WALLS SHOWN ALIGNED WITH BASE BUILDING STRUCTURE SHALL BE FLUSH AND SMOOTH APPROVAL PRIOR TO FRAMING AND SHALL NOTIFY OWNER OF ANY DEVIATION FROM WITH BASE BUILDING STRUCTURE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CONSTRUCTION DIMENSIONS OR CLEARANCES AS DESIGNATED ON THE DRAWINGS OR OF APPARENT CONSTRUCTION CONFLICTS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. 7. UNLESS DIMENSIONED OTHERWISE, DEPTH OF FURRING ON COLUMNS AND OTHER ELEMENTS IS TO BE HELD TO THE MINIMUM THICKNESS REQUIRED TO CONCEAL 6. UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF WORK, THE HVAC SYSTEM SHALL BE BALANCED BY MECHANICAL, PLUMBING OR ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. MELINK (OWNER PROVIDED) AND A WRITTEN REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER - G.C. TO COORDINATE AND MAKE CORRECTIONS. 8. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, POSITION DOOR JAMBS 4" OFF THE FACE OF ADJACENT INTERSECTING PARTITIONS OR CENTER ON PARTITION. 7. UPON SUBMISSION OF THE "FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT', THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE OWNER WITH (2) SETS OF AS -BUILT DOCUMENTATION INCLUDING 9. OUTLETS THAT OCCUR ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF THE SAME PARTITION ARE TO BE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, ADDENDA, CHANGE ORDERS, PRODUCT DATA, EQUIPMENT STAGGERED HORIZONTALLY A MINIMUM OF 12" TO MINIMIZE SOUND TRANSMISSION. WARRANTIES AND MANUALS, FINISH SAMPLES AND OTHER REQUIRED SUBMITTALS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE OWNER WITH A WRITTEN WARRANTY COVERING ALL C. DEMOLITION, CUTTING, AND PATCHING WORK PERFORMED UNDER THE CONTRACT. WARRANTY SHALL BE FOR A PERIOD OF ONE 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT THE SITE AND CALL ATTENTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL YEAR COMMENCING ON THE DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND SHALL BE HAZARDS WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT. SAID HAZARDS ARE TO BE REMOVED AT THE INCLUDED WITH THIS SUBMITTAL. LANDLORD'S EXPENSE; NOTIFY CONSTRUCTION MANAGER TO COORDINATE REMOVAL. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL REMOVAL TO ADHERE TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY'S GUIDELINES. 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY UNCONDITIONAL LIEN WAIVERS RELATING TO ALL WORK WITH THE "FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT' TO BE REVIEWED FOR "FINAL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS - NOTIFY THE 2. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL DEMOLITION, CUTTING, AND PATCHING CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT'. ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO REQUIRED TO FACILITATE COMPLETION OF THE WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL RECEIVE "HOT BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. WORK PERMIT' PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXTENT OF DEMOLITION PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. A - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ACST ACOUSTIC ACT ACOUSTICAL CLING TILE ACOUS PNL ACOUSTICAL PANEL ADDM ADDENDUM ADDL ADDITIONAL ADJ ADJACENT (ADJUSTABLE) AGGR AGGREGATE A/C AIR CONDITION ALT ALTERNATE ALUM ALUMINUM AISC AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE APA AMERICAN PLYWOOD ASSOCIATION ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS ADA AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT AMT AMOUNT MR ANCHOR APPROX APPROXIMATE ARCH ARCHITECT A/E ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AWI ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORKING INSTITUTE AD AREA DRAIN ASPH ASPHALT ABC ASSOCIATED BUILDERS AND CONTRACTORS AGC ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS AUTO AUTOMATIC AUX AUXILIARY AVE AVENUE AVG AVERAGE AZ AZIMUTH B - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS BDD BACKDRAFT DAMPER BFP BACKFLOW PREVENTER BM BEAM BRG BEARING BRG PL BEARING PLATE BLW BELOW BM BENCHMARK BITUM BITUMINOUS BD BOARD BOT BOTTOM BLVD BOULEVARD BRK BRICK BRKT BRACKET BRCG BRACING BRDG BRIDGING OLD BUILD BLDG BUILDING BOCA BUILDING OFFICIALS AND CODE ADMINISTRATORS ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL BP BUILDING PAPER BLT BUILT BLKHD BULKHEAD BID BY OWNER / BY OTHERS C - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS CAB CABINET CTV CABLE TELEVISION CAN CANOPY CAW CANVAS CPT CARPET CO CASED OPENING (CLEAN OUT) CLG CEILING CLG HT CEILING HEIGHT CEM CEMENT CTR CENTER CER CERAMIC CT CERAMIC TILE CTB CERAMIC TILE BASE CTI CERAMIC TILE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA CO CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY CHFR CHAMFER C CHANNEL CHK CHECK CKT CIRCUIT CKT BRKR CIRCUIT BREAKER CLASS CLASSIFICATION CLR CLEAR CLT CLEAT CW CLOCKWISE COL COLUMN CO COMPANY CONC CONCRETE CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CNDS CONDENSATE CONDN CONDENSATION COND CONDITION (S) CND CONDUIT CONSTR CONSTRUCTION CD CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT/CONTROL JOINT CSI CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE CONSULT CONSULTANT CONT CONTINUE CONTR CONTRACT CD CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COW CENTER ON WALL COF CENTER OF FIXTURE CONTR CONTRACTOR CNR CORNER CG CORNER GUARD CORR CORRIDOR (CORRUGATED) CNTR COUNTER CCW COUNTERCLOCKWISE CFLG COUNTER FLASHING C&G CURB AND GUTTER CUR CURRENT D - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DMPR DAMPER DAT DATUM dB DECIBEL D DEEP DEF DEFINITION DFLCT DEFLECTION DEG DEGREE DEMO DEMOLITION DEPT DEPARTMENT DSGN DESIGN DTL DETAIL DIAG DIAGONAL DIA DIAMETER DIFF DIFFERENCE (DIFFUSER) DIM DIMENSION DMR DIMMER DC DIRECT CURRENT DIR DIRECTION DW DISHWASHER DISP DISPENSER DIST DISTANCE DISTR PNL DISTRIBUTION PANEL DOC DOCUMENT DR DOOR DR FR DOOR FRAME DBL DOUBLE XXH DOUBLE EXTRA HEAVY DS DOWN SPOUT DWR DRAWER DWG DRAWING OF DRINKING FOUNTAIN DX DUPLEX DX OUT DUPLEX OUTLET E - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS EA EACH EW EACH WAY ESMT EASEMENT EL EASEMENT LINE E EAST EOS EDGE OF SLAB ELAST ELASTOMERIC ELEC ELECTRIC EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER EP ELECTRICAL PANEL (PANEL BOARD) ELEV ELEVATION EMER EMERGENCY ENAM ENAMEL ENCL ENCLOSURE ENGR ENGINEER EWA ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION ENTR ENTRANCE ENVIR ENVIRONMENT EPA ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY EQ EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT ESC ESCUTCHEON EST ESTIMATE ETC ET CEIERA EPDM ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER IX EXAMPLE IXH EXHAUST IXH FN EXHAUST FAN EXIST EXISTING EXT LT EXIT LIGHT EPS EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD (INSULATION) EXP EXPANSION E - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS' EJ EXPANSION JOINT EXTN EXTENSION EXT EXTERIOR EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM EPT EXTERIOR PAINT XL EXTRA LARGE EXTRU EXTRUSION (EXTRUDED) F - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS FOC FACE OF CONCRETE (FACE OF CURB) FOF FACE OF FINISH FOS FACE OF SLAB (FACE OF STUD) FACIL FACILITY FAX FACSIMILE FAS FASCIA FSTNR FASTENER FT FEET FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FCB FIBER CEMENT BOARD AN FINISH FF FINISH FACE AN FLR FINISH FLOOR FF EL FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION AN GR FINISH GRADE FAAP ARE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL FE ARE EXTINGUISHER FR ARE RESISTANT FRTW ARE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD FIXT FIXTURE FLASH FLASHING FLEX FLEXIBLE FLR FLOOR FAR FLOOR AREA RA110 FCO FLOOR CLEAN OUT FD FLOOR DRAIN FLR FIN FLOOR FINISH FLUOR FLUORESCENT FT FOOT FTG FOOTING FDTN FOUNDATION FR FRAME (FRAMED) (FRAMING) FRWY FREEWAY FS FULL SCALE FURN FURNISH FF&E FURNITURE, FIXTURE, AND EQUIPMENT G - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS GA GAGE GAL GALLON GALV GALVANIZED GEN GENERAL GEN COND GENERAL CONDITIONS GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GL GLASS GFRC GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE GLU LAM GLUED LAMINATED WOOD GB GRAB BAR GR BM GRADE BEAM GRAN GRANITE GROM GROMMET GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GYP GYPSUM GYP BD GYPSUM BOARD GBD GYPSUM BOARD H - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS HD HAND DRYER HC HANDICAP HNDRL HANDRAIL HGR HANGER HDW HARDWARE HDR HEADER . HVY HEAVY HT HEIGHT HWY HIGHWAY HO HOLD OPEN HLDN HOLDDOWN HM HOLLOW METAL HORIZ HORIZONTAL HB HOSE BIBB HW HOT WATER HYD HYDRANT 1 - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ID IDENTIFICATION ILLUM ILLUMINATION INCAND INCANDESCENT ID INSIDE DIAMETER (INSIDE DIMENSION) INSTIL INSTALL IGL INSULATED GLASS INSUL INSULATION INT INTERIOR IBC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE INV INVERT J - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS JAN JANITOR J-BOX JUNCTION BOX JST JOIST K - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS KES KITCHEN EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER KIT KITCHEN L - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS LRG LARGE LAV LAVATORY LS LANDSCAPE LDR LEADER LT LIGHT LTG LIGHTING LF LINEAR FEET (FOOT) LIQ LIQUID LVR LOUVER LS LUMP SUM M - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS MH MANHOLE MR) MANUFACTURED MFR MANUFACTURER MFR REC MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION MFG MANUFACTURING MO MASONRY OPENING MATL MATERIAL MAX MAXIMUM MECH MECHANICAL MECH RM MECHANICAL ROOM MED MEDIUM MEL MELAMINE MBR MEMBER MEMB MEMBRANE MWP MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING MTL METAL METF METAL FLASHING MIRR MIRROR MISC MISCELLANEOUS MOD BIT MODIFIED BITUMEN MLDG MOLDING (MOULDING) MS MOP SINK MTD MOUNTED MULL MULLION N - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION G NATURAL GAS NEG NEGATIVE NOM NOMINAL N NORTH NA NOT APPLICABLE NTS NOT TO SCALE N P NOTICE TO PROCEED ' NO NUMBER O - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS OSHA OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION OCC OCCUPY (OCCUPANCY) OC ON CENTER OPNG OPENING OPP OPPOSITE O.H. OPPOSITE HAND ORIG ORIGINAL OZ OUNCE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER OA OVERALL OFD OVERFLOW DRAIN ORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN OF/CI OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OF/01 OWNER FUNISHED/OWNER INSTALLED P - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS PNT PAINT PR PAIR PNL PANEL PAR PARALLEL PARPT PARAPET PRKG PARKING PKWY PARKWAY PTN PARTITION PAT PATTERN PVG PAWING D PENNY (NAIL) PERP PERPENDICULAR PH PHASE PC PIECE PLAS PLASTER / PLASTIC PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLBG PLUMBING PLYWD PLYWOOD LB POUND PWR POWER PREFAB PREFABRICATE PT PRESSURE TREATED PTD PAINTED PROJ PROJECT PROP PROPERTY PL PROPERTY LINE PB PULL BOX PS PULL STATION Q - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS QC QUALITY CONTROL OCR QUALITY CONTROL REVIEW QTY QUANTITY QT QUARRY TILE R - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS R RADIUS REC RECESSED REF REFERENCE RE: REFERENCE REAL REFLECT (ED) RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN REBAR REINFORCING STEEL BARS RA REQUEST FOR INFORMATION REQ REQUIRE (MENT) REQD REQUIRED RESIL RESILIENT RB RESILIENT BASE REST REST ROOM RA RETURN AIR RVL REVEAL REV REVISION ROW RIGHT OF WAY ROG INS RIGID INSULATION, SOLID RD ROAD RM ROOM RFG ROOFING RO ROUGH OPENING RS ROUGH SAWN RND ROUND S - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS SAN SANITARY SLNT SEALANT SND SOUND SCHED SCHEDULE SCP SCUPPER SH SHELVING (SHELF) SDG SIDING SD SOAP DISPENSER SC SOLID CORE SND INS SOUND INSULATION STC SOUND TRANSMISSION GLASS S SOUTH SPKR SPEAKER SPKLR SPRINKLER SPCL SPECIAL SQ SQUARE SF SQUARE FOOT (FEET) SQ IN SQUARE INCH SQ YD SQUARE YARD SST STAINLESS STEEL STD STANDARD SS STANDING SEAM STL JST STEEL JOIST STL LNTL STEEL LINTEL STL PL STEEL PLATE STN STONE STOR STORAGE SD STORM DMN SDMH STORM DRAIN MANHOLE SS STORM SEWER ST STREET STRUCT STRUCTURAL STR STRUCTURE STU STUCCO SUP SUPPLEMENTARY SUSP CLG SUSPENDED CEILING SYM SYMBOL SYMM SYMMETRICAL SYNTH SYNTHETIC SYS SYSTEM T - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS TEL TELEPHONE TV TELEVISION TEMP TEMPERATURE (TEMPERED) TMPD GL TEMPERED GLASS TIGL TEMPERED INSULATED GLASS TEMP TEMPORARY TB-XX TEST BORING-XX (E.G. TB-01) THERM THERMAL THK THICKNESS (THICK) THRES THRESHOLD THRU THROUGH TPD TOILET PAPER DISPENSER TOIL TOLERANCE T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE T&B TOP AND BOTTOM TOB TOP OF BEAM TOC TOP OF CONCRETE TOC TOP OF CURB TFF TOP OF FINISH FLOOR TO FDN TOP OF FOUNDATION TOF TOP OF FRAME (ING) TOJ TOP OF JOIST TOM TOP OF MASONRY TOP TOP OF PARAPET (TOP OF PAVEMENT) TOS TOP OF SLAB (TOP OF STEEL) TOT TOP OF TRUSS TOPO TOPOGRAPHY TO TOWEL DISPENSER XFER TRANSFER XFMR TRANSFORMER TRANS TRANSPARENT T TREAD TRTD TREATED TD TRENCH DRAIN TN TRUE NORTH TS TUBE STEEL TRNBKL TURNBUCKLE TYP TYPICAL U - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UR URINAL UTIL UTILITY V - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS VAR VARIATION (VERIFY) (VARIES) VNR VENEER VP VENEER PLASTER VIF VERIFY IN FIELD VENT VENTILATION VERT VERTICAL VEST VESTIBULE VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VWC VINYL WALL COVERING VOLT VOLTAGE W - TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS WSCT WAINSCOT WC WATER CLOSET WH WATER HEATER WP WATERPROOFING (WEATHERPROOF) WS WEATHERSTRIP WT WEIGHT WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC WWM WELDED WIRE MESH WDW WINDOW WGL WIRE GLASS W/ WITH W/0 WITHOUT WD WOOD DRAWING SYMBOLS LEGEND: EXISTING DEMISING WALL PROVIDED BY LANDLORD UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT. EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL TO REMAIN. CORNER BAKERY CAFE G.C. TO PROVIDE BAIT INSULATION AND A LAYER OF 5/8° TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. AT INTERIOR. GYP. BD. IS TO EXTEND FULL HEIGHT (TO B.O. DECK). ARE RATED WALL CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO SHEET A101 FOR LOCATION & A105 FOR ARE RATED ASSEMBLY DETAILS. INTERIOR PARTITION WAIL CONSTRUCTION; REFERENCE WALL TYPES ON SHEET A105. FREEZER/COOLER WALL PANEL ' BATT INSULATION. HALF HEIGHT PARTITION; REFERENCE WALL TYPES FOR HEIGHTS) - � DIMENSIONED TO CENTER LINE. C 0 U -96 0 CD CL U U N o=--. O 8 'p z � -0 9 U (O 0 m O C 0 0 2o I ,, 2 E 21 -C -0 o ff - 0 a8, a� L 0� o Q . Tn c.i 0 2 0 .! U c (D 0 .g, °s E- m3 N N - O O 2 a o Z) -a :^ m 0 `2 -0 ��o C 0 U '� QD i-- Z .q. Lo a 0 C m --o R r , UU a) 0L o0 Q Q ,.;Ua „ o e- -_ 2 oc a N � 0 E L� a § 5:2 Cco Z � `c 3 0. 0 C: 00� U -0`0 U 0 -�-- N - � � = -r- O ME NO -------, _11h NO ----­AA/AAAA WALL SECTION, BUILDING SECTION, DFaW ��1_ OR DETAIL KEY tmTmV vat ELEVATION VIEW KEY Q 4) A < N . 00 PT-01 -j ­0 00r0 GYP BD MATERIAL / FINISH / HEIGHT (RCP ONLY) �- m 0000 m 0)cxc HT11'-0• a-, i r- N 80 LL F-70CO In Q �w zC� to - w /. W L 1 1 8 DIMENSION TO FACE OF FRAMING OR EDGE OF (� -1-0 = U O� SLAB UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED = ?: O 4) CY) _�e ~ 01 REVISION TO DRAWING O 94 Cn o4/AWI DETAIL REFERENCES 0 REFER SECTION KEY FOR DESIGNATION INFORMATION ROOM NNO -,_/ 103 ROOM NUMBER/ SPACE NAME RooM/SPam mW__,,,DINING A OA WINDOW DESIGNATION 101 DOOR DESIGNATION 0 COLUMN REFERENCE DESIGNATION < KEYNOTE TAG Su COmmol ; Fu e�IF U ELEVATIONS WAL WALL TAG CEILING ACCESS PANEL CEILING SUPPLY CEILING RETURN DRAWING TITLE & SCALE INDICATION: mmvm ru 01 FLOOR PLAN c NUI®Ex SCALE: 1 /4"= V-0" DAATM SC BID ALTERNATE: REPLACE ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILING IN THE DINING AREAS WITH ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE (ACT-02). REFERENCE SHEET A121 - ALTERNATE FOR DETAILS. • _e NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT �11 08/2015 & BID RE-VIEVLIED FOR CODE CONIP1_IANCE JAI 0 4 20 16 City Of-1uh,mila BUILDING DIVISION 13E.CEN12_7D CITY OR- TU,< ILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER IDRAWN BY: I CHECKED BY. EW,CA AH,SM m 06 75 fy ui I 0. O LL 0 W rrD v, U) L0 r O N 00 O O r PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER 001 Drawing Conventions & Abbreviations DATE OF THIS PRINTING - Oct 08, 2015 Convention Description ACCESSIBLE PARKING STALL NOTES dimension showing English units (in 1. WHEN PARKING SPACES ARE MARKED WITH LINES, WIDTH MEASUREMENTS OF PARKING SPACES AND ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE INTERNATIONAL inches unless otherwise specified) MADE FROM THE CENTERLINE OF THE MARKING. SIGN OF FULL LENGTH OF 916 above the line and SI units (in ACCESSIBILITY, SEE VEHICLE PULL-UP SPACE millimeters unless otherwise specified) EXCEPTION: WHERE PARKING SPACES OR ACCESS AISLES ARE NOT ADJACENT TO ANOTHER PARKING SPACE OR ACCESS AISLE, PARKING COMMUNICATION 20' MINIMUM 6 below the line MEASUREMENTS SHALL BE PERMITTED TO INCLUDE THE FULL WIDTH OF THE LINE DEFINING THE PARKING SPACE OR ACCESS ONLY ELEMENTS AND ACCESS AISLE 150 AREA TO BE MARKED 2. AISLE. CAR PARKING SPACES SHALL BE 96 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM AND VAN PARKING SPACES SHALL BE 132 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM FEATURES DETAIL CURB LINE CONNECTS DIRECTLY TO AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE dimension for small measurements �+ 3611 FOR MORE EXCEPTION; VAN PARKING SPACES SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE 96 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM WHERE THE ACCESS AISLE IS 96 Ilan INFORMATION o 33-36 dimension showing a range with can 915 BLUE BACKGROUND 3. INCHES WIDE MINIMUM. ACCESS AISLES SERVING PARKING SPACES SHALL ADJOIN AND ACCESSIBLE ROUTE. TWO PARKING SPACES SHALL BE PERMITTED V z m a o 840-915 minimum - maximum WHITE TO SHARE A COMMON ACCESS AISLE. VAN ACCESSIBLE : 0 ° ° N o 2 Z 4. ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE MARKED SO AS TO DISCOURAGE PARKING IN THEM. SIGN min max minimum maximum a EMBLEM MUST BE 5. ACCESS AISLES SHALL NOT OVERLAP THE VEHICULAR WAY. ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE PLACES ON WITHER SIDE OF THE PARKING SPACE EXCEPT FOR ANGLES VAN PARKING SPACES WHICH SHALL HAVE ACCESS AISLES LOCATED ON THE PASSENGER SIDE OF THE PARKING SPACES. o JS a 0 .3 LOCATED IN STALL h o > than M SO THAT IT IS 6. GROUND SURFACES SHALL BE STABLE, FIRM AND SLIP RESISTANT. ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE AT THE SAME LEVEL AS THE E o `o > greater greater than or equal to o ❑ ❑ VISIBLE BY A TRAFFIC 7, PARKING SPACES THEY SERVE. CHANGES IN LEVEL ARE NOT PERMITTED. SLOPES SHALL NOT BE GREATER THAN 1:48. PARKING SPACES FOR VANS AND ACCESS AISLES AND VEHICULAR ROUTES SERVING THEM SHALL PROVIDE A VERTICAL CLEARANCE OF 98 INCHES _ CO 2" STEEL POST o a� E o E. ao N MINIMUM. o o a < less than Z C� ENFORCEMENT 8. PARKING SPACE IDENTIFICATION SIGNS SHALL INCLUDE THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY. SIGNS SHALL BE 60 o - a) r o t m n < less than or equal to OFFICER WHEN A INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACE MEASURED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SIGN. FINISHED GROUND PASSENGER LOADING ZONE oO o o- VEHICLE IS 9. PARKING SPACES AND ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE DESIGNED TO THAT CARS AND VANS, WHEN PARKED CANNOT OBSTRUCT THE - N m 2 o •o boundary of clear floor space or � PROPERLY PARKED REQUIRED CLEAR WIDTH OF ADJACENT ACCESSIBLE ROUTES. � � � rn maneuveringclearance �' IN THE SPACE NOTES: "? o o = o 0- o centerline (CENTERED AT TOTAL PARKING REQUIRED MINIMUM NUMBER 8" MINIMUM 1. PASSENGER LADING ZONES SHALL ADJOIN A ACCESSIBLE ROUTE AND SHALL `- 0 E' = 2 0 132 min 60 min 96 min ENTRANCE TO IN LOT OF ACCESSIBLE SPACES OVERLAP NOT OVERLAP THE VEHICULAR WAY } m a� o �'� c o a permitted element or its extension ,r STALL 1 TO 25 1 E 2. ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE MARKED SO AS TO DISCOURAGE PARKING IN THEM. U - o 3350 1525 2440 RECOMMENDED.) 26 To 50 2 io 3. GROUND SURFACES SHALL BE STABLE, FIRM AND SLIP RESISTANT. ACCESS N 3 � Z `o s 4>direction of travel or approach 51 TO 75 3 "' AISLES SHALL BE AT THE SAME LEVEL AS THE PARKING SPACES THEY SERVE. U ° v 0 4) ° a wall, floor, ceiling or other element Van Car 76 To 100 4 101 To 150 5 STEEL SIGN POST ANCHOR CHANGES IN LEVEL ARE NOT PERMITTED. SLOPES SHALL NOT BE GREATER THAN L Q JE °� Q 0 o o ° N > o e cut in section or plan PROPORTIONS - 201 TO 300 7 U ° r o SURFACE IDENTIFICATION NOTE 4. VEHICLE PULL-UP SPACE, ACCESS AISLES SERVING THEM, AND A VEHICULAR ° 0 E C ° a highlighted element in 301 To aoo a ROUTE FROM AND ENTRANCE TO THE PASSENGER LOADING ZONE, AND FROM } Z D H E- `0 elevation or Ian p 401 TO 500 9 1. SIGN TO BE CENTERED AT THE INTERIOR THE PASSENGER LOADING ZONE TO A VEHICULAR EXIT SHALL PROVIDE A U rn a 3 0 o o 0 0 -- 501 TO 1000 2 PERCENT OF TOTAL END OF PARKING SPACE. VERTICAL CLEARANCE OF 114 INCHES MINIMUM. 00 M �- � � ° a ° j location zone of element, control or 1001 AND OVER 20 PLUS 1 FOR EACH 100 OVER 1000 2. AREA OF SIGN TO BE SQUARE INCHES A MINIMUM OF 70 N .- ~ ` feature VAN SPACES: FOR EVERY SIX OR FRACTION OF SIX 3. DESIGNATE FOR "VAN ACCESSIBLE" WHEN 17 GRAPHIC FOR F1CiUF�3 13 ABLE PARt{�IQ STALLS ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES, AT LEASE ONE SHALL BE APPROPRIATE. PASSENGER LOADING A VAN -ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. 1 - NTS - NTS REQUIRED ACCESSIBLE - NTS REV 5 PARKING STALLS REV 5 REV 5 at least as wide as NOTES: 1. WHERE DINING SURFACES ARE PROVIDED FOR THE CONSUMPTION OF FOOD OR DRINK, curb ramp 2-36 min 1. CURB RAMPS AND THE FLARED SIDES OF CURB AT LEASE 5 PERCENT OF THE SEATING SPACES AND STANDING SPACES AT THE 36 min 815-915 RAMPS SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT THEY DO DOMINANT DIRECTION DINING SURFACES SHALL COMPLY. IN ADDITION, WHERE WORK SURFACES ARE max slope 2% any NOT PROJECT INTO VEHICULAR TRAFFIC LANES, OF TRAVEL PROVIDED FOR USE BY OTHER THAN EMPLOYEES, AT LEASE 5 PERCENT SHALL 915 PARKING SPACES, OR PARKING ACCESS AISLE. COMPLY. direction CURB RAMPS AT MARKED CROSSINGS SHALL BE LONG DIMENSION 2. DINING SURFACES AND WORK SURFACES REQUIRED TO COMPLY SHALL BE DISPERSED WHOLLY CONTAINED WITHIN THE MARKINGS, PERPENDICULAR 1 THROUGHOUT THE SPACE OR FACILITY CONTAINING DINING SURFACES AND WORK flared �_ DOMINANT DIRECTION OF EXCLUDING ANY FLARED SIDES. SURFACES. sides 1:10 E 2. DIAGONAL OR CORNER TYPE CURB RAMPS WITH TRAVEL 3. WHERE PROVIDED, CHECK-OUT AISLES, SALES COUNTERS., SERVICE COUNTERS, FOOD w max slope Nt RETURNED CURBS OR OTHER WELL-DEFINED , SERVICE LINES, QUEUES, AND WAITING LINES SHALL COMPLY ^' o N EDGES SHALL HAVE THE EDGES PARALLEL TO THE h maxAD B CD 0 DIRECTION OF PEDESTRIAN FLOW. THE BOTTOM OF 13 x DIAGONAL CURB RAMPS SHALL HAVE A CLEAR Val 36 min SPACE 48 INCHES MINIMUM OUTSIDE ACTIVE ELONGATED OPENINGS IN FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES 915 TRAFFIC LANES OF THE ROADWAY. DIAGONAL Q slope slope CURB RAMPS PROVIDED AT MARKED CROSSINGS N -0- ®- SHALL PROVIDE THE 48 INCHES MINIMUM CLEAR 1/2max Q SPACE WITHIN THE MARKINGS. DIAGONAL CURB /4 �/ 13 6 4 2 /4 max o 00 RAMPS WITH FLARED SIDES SHALL HAVE A � 1 13 SALES AND SERVICE COUNTERS _I � SIDES AT CURB RAMPS E �, ��o SEGMENT OF CURB 24 INCHES LONG MINIMUM /a 6.4 36 INCHES MINIMUM FORCU i M CUT THRU ISLAND o0 �` �ti LOCATED ON EACH SIDE OF THE CURB RAMP AND 6.4 PARALLEL APPROACH m o N d WITHIN THE MARKED CROSSING. 30 INCHES FOR FORWARD 3. COUNTER SLOPES OF ADJOINING GUTTERS AND SALES AND i r' L6 24 min ROAD SURFACES IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO THE CARPET PILE HEIGHT PASSENGER LOADING ZONE PASSENGER LOADING ZONE SERVICE APPROACH W (1)Q C0 max slope 2% any 610 COUNTERS �-- -0 `- LLJ CURB RAMP SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1T CHANGES IN LEVEL GREATER THAN 1 2 SHALL BE RAMPED. " � direction THE ADJACENT SURFACES AT TRANSITIONS AT / " 36 MAXIMUM � z i CURB RAMPS TO WALKS, GUTTERS, AND STREETS (a -. LLJ SHALL BE AT THE SAME LEVEL. DINING AND `� W � LL_ O 4. WHERE PROVIDED, CURB RAMPS FLARES SHALL E slope slope NOTES: Y SURFACES SAME DEPTH U � - U H NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:10 O -® �- 1. FLOOR AND GROUND SURFACES SHALL BE STABLE FIRM AND SLIP RESISTANT. SURFACES ® AS COUNTER � M � � M 1:12 max 112 max 5. LANDINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE TOPS OF 2. CARPET OR CARPET TILE SHALL BE SECURELY ATTACHED AND SHALL HAVE A FIRM 28" MINIMUM CURB RAMPS. THE LANDING CLEAR LENGTH SHALL CUSHION, PAD, OR BACKING OR NOT CUSHION OR PAD. CARPET OR CARPET TILE 34" MAXIMUM (3) =) BE 36 INCHES MINIMUM. THE LANDING CLEAR SHALL HAVE A LEVEL LOOP, TEXTURED LOOP, LEVEL CUT PILE, OR LEVEL (o WIDTH SHALL BE AT LEASE AS WIDE AS THE CUT/UNCUT PILE TEXTURE, EXPOSED EDGES OF CARPET SHALL BE FASTENED TO O 72 max 60 min 72 max CURB RAMP, EXCLUDING FLARED SIDES, LEADING FLOOR SURFACES AND SHALL HAVE TRIM IN THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE EXPOSED 1828 1525 1828 I TO THE LANDING. EXCEPTION: IN ALTERATIONS EDGE. CARPET TRIM SHALL COMPLY WITH CHANGES IN LEVEL. CoCURB RAMP AT ISLAND WHERE THERE IS NO LANDING AT THE TOP OF 94 DIAGONAL OR CORNER TYPE CURB RAMPS CURB RAMS, CURB RAMP FLARES SHALL BE CURB RANPS PROVIDED AND SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 0 18 1:12. 6 FLOOR OR GROUND FACES/CHANGES N LEVEL 2DINM AND WORK 3lJFiFACE.S NTS SEE RAMP DETAIL FOR MORE INFORMATION NTS - NTS REV 5 REV 5 REV 5 3. REVOLVING DOORS, REVOLVING GATES AND TURNSTILES SHALL NOT BE APART OF AN ka) tuj -"' . ­' ACCESSIBLE ROUTE. CLEAR WIDTH OF AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE elevation plan 4. ACCESSIBLE ROUTES SHALL COMPLY WITH FLOOR AND GROUND SURFACES. U) 5. ACCESSIBLE ROUTS SHALL COMPLY WITH CHANGES IN LEVEL. 8min 6. THE RUNNING SLOPE OF WALKING SURFACES SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:20. THE 205 c N E m O CROSS SLOPE OF A WALKING SURFACE SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:48 N A M x 1 7. AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE WITH A CLEAR WIDTH LESS THAN 60 INCHES SHALL PROVIDE F 00 x 0 PASSING SPACES AT INTERVALS OF 200 FEET MAXIMUM. PASSING SPACES SHALL BE S In EITHER A 60 INCH MINIMUM BY 60 INCH MINIMUM SPACE . OR AN INTERSECTION OF o E �► I E 60 min TWO WALKING SURFACES THAT PROVIDE A T-SHAPED TURNING SPACE COMPLYING o E ` 9 min 1 M Jszs 06 TURNING SPACE PROVIDED THE BASE AND ARMS OF THE T-SHAPED SPACE EXTEND �r N 230 L _ _ _ 36 min 48 INCHES MINIMUM BEYOND THE INTERSECTION. 0 sJs 8. EMPLOYEE WORK AREAS: COMMON USE CIRCULATION PATHS WITHIN EMPLOYEE WORK ADDITIONAL MANEUVERING CLEARANCE ADDITIONAL MANEUVERING CLEARANCE AREAS SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE ROUTES. EXCEPTION: COMMON USE CIRCULATION PATHS, 25 max FOR FORWARD APPROACH IN ALCOVE FOR PARALLEL APPROACH IN ALCOVE ?4 LOCATED WITHIN EMPLOYEE WORK AREAS THAT ARE LESS THAN 300 SQUARE FEET IN 11 min 635 SIZE AND DEFINED BY PERMANENTLY INSTALLED PARTITIONS, COUNTERS, CASEWORK OR 280 NOTES: n/ FURNISHINGS, SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO BE ACCESSIBLE ROUTES. (a) (b) 1. FLOOR SURFACES OF A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL HAVE A SLOPE NOT STEEPER LL 9. MULTILEVEL BUILDINGS: AT LEAST ONE ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL CONNECT EACH 0 elevation plan THAT 1:48 AND SHALL COMPLY WITH FLOOR SURFACES. ACCESSIBLE LEVEL, INCLUDING MEZZANINES, IN MULTILEVEL BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES.P10 2. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL BE PERMITTED TO INCLUDE Uj EXCEPTIONS: AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO STORIES AND 3. KNEE ESAND ECLEARANCE. THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL BE POSITIONED FOR n MEZZANINES ABOVE AND BELOW ACCESSIBLE LEVELS THAT HAVE AN AGGREGATE AREA � ERE SPACE BENEATH AN ELEMENT IS INCLUDED AS PART OF CLEAR FLOOR EITHER FORWARD OTHERWISE PARALLEL APPROACH TO AN ELEMENT. OF NOT MORE THAN 3,000 SQUARE FEET, THIS EXCEPTION SHALL NOT APPLY TO 42 min 42 min 36 min 36 min SPACE AT AN ELEMENT, CLEARANCE AT AN ELEMENT, OR A TURNING SPACE, 4. ONE FULL. UNOBSTRUCTED SIDE OF THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL ADJOIN OR MULTIPLE TENANT FACILITIES OF GROUP M OCCUPANCIES CONTAINING FIVE OR MORE 1065 Joss 915 915 THE SPACE SHALL COMPLY WITH KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS. TENANT SPACES. ADDITIONAL SPACE BEYOND KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE SHALL BE PERMITTED OVERLAP AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OR ADJOIN ANOTHER CLEAR FLOOR SPACE. O BENEATH ELEMENTS. 5. IF A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE IS IN AN ALCOVE OR OTHERWISE CONFINED ON ALL OR PAR X < 48 X < 48 OF THREE SIDES. ADDITIONAL MANEUVERING CLEARANCES COMPLYING WITH 1220 Jzzo MANEUVERING CLEARANCE IN ALCOVE. 20 �L N011Ea 16 ACCESSIBLE R� 8 KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE 4 CLEAR FLOOR SPACE Q NTS - NTS 180 DEGREE TURN 180 DEGREE TURN (EXCEPTION - NTS - NTS REV 5 REV 5 REV 5 REV 5 W E D a vJU ^ o r7 CV w / O L / N O RZCEiVLEE D 6i CITY OF TU KVVILA N REVIEWED FOR 0000DE COMPLIANCE OCT p 9 2015 APPROVED 0 A'N 0 4 20 oIS PERMIT CENTER O o o Cis/ OfTUII,Jalla DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: BUILDII G DIVIS10aEW,CA AH,SM J m N En PROJECT NUMBER W 2007855013 Z U 1 S o SHEET NUMBER Cn I 0 0 Z fV 4 A002 m� o z Accessibility Details Uj Z� �o DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 E o.. 0 n cV L 0 N 0 0 U 0 w 0 z a RARY .F 1FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS SHALL HAVE PERMANENTLY INSTALLED AUDIBLE AND VISIBLE ALARMS COMPLYING WITH NFPA 72 (1999 OR 2002 EDITION) EXCEPT THAT clear floor THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SOUND LEVEL OF AUDIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES COMPLYING WITH SECTION 4-3.2.1 OF NFPA 72 (19999 EDITION) SHALL HAVE A area SOUND LEVEL NO MORE THAT 11ODB AT THE MINIMUM HEARING DISTANCE FROM THE AUDIBLE APPLIANCE. AREA OF 2. WHERE BOTH VISUAL AND TACTILE CHARACTERS ARE REQUIRED, WHETHER ON SIGN WITH BOTH VISUAL AND TACTILE CHARACTERS, OR TWO SEPARATE SIGNS, REFUGE 18 min ONE WITH VISUAL, AND ONE WITH TACTILE CHARACTERS, SHALL BE PROVIDED. 45° 3. RAISED CHARACTERS SHALL BE 1/32 INCH MINIMUM ABOVE THEIR BACKGROUND. REF GE I, ass o 4. CHARACTERS SHALL BE SANS SERIF. CHARACTERS SHALL NOT BE ITALIC, OBLIQUE, SCRIP, HIGHLY DECORATIVE OR OF OTHER UNUSUAL FORMS. 5. CHARACTERS SHALL BE SELECTED FROM FONTS WHERE THE WIDTH OF THE UPPERCASE LETTER "0" IS 55 PERCENT MINIMUM AND 110 PERCENT MAXIMUM OF THE o X centered on HEIGHT OF THE UPPERCASE LETTER "I". o E N tactile characters V)) 6. CHARACTER HEIGHT MEASURED VERTICALLY FORM THE BASELINE OF THE CHARACTER SHALL BE 5/8 INCH MINIMUM AND 2 INCHES MAXIMUM BASED ON THE m o E 0 CL 00 IL HEIGHT OF THE UPPERCASE LETTER "I". EXCEPTION; WHERE SEPARATE RAISED AND VISUAL CHARACTERS WITH THE SAME INFORMATION ARE PROVIDED, RAISED4J � � v " 18 min ME not in CHARACTER HEIGHT SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE 1/2 INCH MINIMUM. ° Z L o 8 0, o 455 pictogram INTERNATIONAL INTERNATIONAL VOLUME CONTROL INTERNATIONAL 7. STROKE THICKNESS OF THE UPPERCASE LETTER "I" SHALL BE 15 PERCENT MAXIMUM OF THE HEIGHT OF THE CHARACTER. o T3 o e LOCATION OF TACTILE field SYMBOL OF SYMBOL OF TTY TELEPHONE SYMBOL OF ACCESS 8. CHARACTER SPACING SHALL BE MEASURED BETWEEN THE TWO CLOSEST POINTS OF ADJACENT RAISED CHARACTERS WITHIN A MESSAGE, EXCLUDING WORD • 0 � h ° ACCESSIBILITY FOR HEARING LOSS SPACES, WHERE CHARACTERS HAVE RECTANGULAR CROSS SECTIONS, SPACING BETWEEN INDIVIDUAL RAISED CHARACTERS SHALL BE 1/8 INCH MINIMUM AND 4 o SIGNS AT DOORS TIMES THE RAISED CHARACTER STROKE WIDTH MAXIMUM. WHERE CHARACTERS HAVE OTHER CROSS SECTIONS, SPACING BETWEEN INDIVIDUAL RAISED CHARACTERS m N E o o. o HEIGHT OF TACTILE CHARACTERS ABOVE PICTOGRAM FIELD SHALL BE 1/16 INCH MINIMUM AND 4 TIMES THE RAISED CHARACTER STROKE WIDTH MAXIMUM AT THE BASE OF THE CROSS SECTIONS , AND 1/8 INCH MINIMUM a; to)a T FINISHED FLOOR OR GROUND HEIGHT OF RAISED CHARACTERS AND 4 TIME THE RAISED CHARACTER STROKE WIDTH MAXIMUM AT THE TOP OF THE CROSS SECTIONS. CHARACTERS SHALL BE SEPARATED FROM RAISED o 0 0 BORDERS AND DECORATIVE ELEMENTS 3/8" MINIMUM. N 2 C m °' distance between distance between dots AREA OF 9. SPACING BETWEEN THE BASELINES IF SEPARATE LINES OF RAISED CHARACTERS WITHIN A MESSAGE SHALL BE 135 PERCENT MINIMUM AND 170 PERCENT +0C) 0 0 0 corresponding dots in the same cell U E BRAILLE DIMENSIONS VISUAL CHARACTER HEIGHT MAXIMUM OF THE RAISED CHARACTER HEIGHT. 0 o o °' o s. 10. BRAILLE SHALL BE CONTRACTED (GRADE 2). N N E o -6 in adjacent cells single braille MEASUREMENT MINIMUM IN INCHES HEIGHT ABOVE FLOOR TO BASE HORIZONTAL MINIMUM (D p c p RANGE MAXIMUM IN INCHES LINE OF CHARACTER VIEWING DISTANCE CHARACTER HEIGHT 11. BRAILLE DOTS SHALL HAVE A DOMED OR ROUNDED SHAPE AND SHALL COMPLY WITH TABLE 703.3.1. THE INDICATION OF AN UPPERCASE LETTER OR LETTERS V) Z) > -35 o c distance between dots cell SHALL ONLY BE USED BEFORE THE FIRST WORK OF SENTENCES, PROPER NOUNS AND NAMES, INDIVIDUAL LETTERS OF THE ALPHABET, INITIALS, AND ACRONYMS. - o DOT BASE DIAMETER 0.059 (1.5MM) 40 INCHES TO LESS THAN OR LESS THAN 6 FEET 5/8 INCH U -in the same cell 0 0 To EQUAL TO 70 INCHES 12. BRAILLE SHALL BE POSITIONED BELOW THE CORRESPONDING TEXT, IF TEXT IS MULTI -LINED, BRAILLE SHALL BE PLACED BELOW THE EN11RE TEXT. BRAILLE SHALL (D m o o _ blank cell space 0.063 (1.6MM) 6 FEET AND GREATER 5/8 INCH , PLUS 1/8 INCH PER FOOT OF BE SEPARATED 3/8 INCH MINIMUM FORM RAISED BORDERS AND DECORATIVE ELEMENT. EXCEPTION: BRAILLE PROVIDED ON ELEVATOR CAR CONTROLS SHALL BE o o�. E - 12 �, 0 distance between 0 0 0 O 0 VIEWING DISTANCE ABOVE 6 FEET SEPARATED 3 16 INCH MINIMUM AND SHALL BE LOCATED EITHER DIRECTLY BELOW OR ADJACENT TO THE CORRESPONDING RAISED CHARACTERS OR SYMBOLS. U o C>.. v ' m o °' between words DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO DOTS IN THE 0.090 (2.3MM) / o corresponding dots SAME CELL TO GREATER THAN 70 INCHES TO LESS THAN LESS THAN 15 FEET 2 INCHES 13. TACTILE CHARACTERS FOR ELEVATORS SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO BE MOUNTED BETWEEN 48 INCHES AND 60 INCHES. Q 3E U o e raised dot 0.100 (2.5MM) OR EQUAL TO 120 INCHES 14. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED AT A DOOR, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ALONGSIDE THE DOOR AT THE LATCH SIDE. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED U c o from one cell DISTANCE BETWEEN CORRESPONDING DOTS 0.241 (6.1MM) 15 FEET AND GREATER 2 INCH ,PLUS 1/C INCH PER FOOT OF AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH ONE ACTIVE LEAF, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE INACTIVE LEAF. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH N o E a o �' °' o VIEWING DISTANCE ABOVE 15 FEET ,- directly below 0 - 3/8 7y.min IN ADJACENT CELLS TO TWO ACTIVE LEAFS, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED TO THE RIGHT OF THE RIGHT HAND DOOR. WHERE THERE IS NO WALL SPACE AT THE LATCH SIDE OF A M o 0 0 base diameter _ _ s s 0.300(7.6MM) GREATER THAN 120 INCHES LESS THAN 21 FEET 3 INCHES SINGLE DOOR OR AT THE RIGHT SIDE OF DOUBLE DOORS SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE NEAREST ADJACENT WALL. SIGNS CONTAINING TACTILE CHARACTERS �- v -`o v 2' BRAILLE - DOT HEIGHT 0.025 (0.6MM) 21 FEET AND GREATER 3 INCH , PLUS 1/8 INCH PER FOOT OF SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OF 18 INCHES MINIMUM BY 18 INCHES MINIMUM, CENTERED ON THE TACTILE CHARACTERS, IS PROVIDED c}n `^' � o MEASUREMENTS 0 0 0 0� no raised dot 3/8 min 0.037 TO (0.9MM) VIEWING DISTANCE ABOVE 21 FEET BEYOND THE ARC OF ANY DOOR SWING BETWEEN THE CLOSED POSITION AND 45 DEGREES OPEN POSITION. EXCEPTION: SIGNS WITH TACTILE CHARACTERS SHALL 9.5 BE PERMITTED ON THE PUSH SIDE OF DOORS WITH CLOSERS AND WITHOUT HOLD -OPEN DEVICES. 48 -62 DISTANCE BETWEEN CORRESPONDING DOTS 0.395 (10MM) 15. CHARACTERS AND THEIR BACKGROUNDS SHALL HAVE A NON -GLARE FINISH. CHARACTERS SHALL CONTRAST WITH THEIR BACKGROUND WITH EITHER LIGHT 17 ATi?�1 ELEMENTS AND FEATURES 1220-1s25 FROM ONE CELL DIRECTLY BELOW T1 - CHARACTERS ON A DARK BACKGROUND OR CARK CHARACTERS ON A LIGHT BACKGROUND. 0.400 10.2MM NTS 16. CHARACTERS SHALL BE UPPERCASE OR LOWERCASE OR A COMBINATION OF BOTH. POSITION OF BRAILLE REV 5 39-41 r=7 ,' , ,+� NOTES. ,. 990-1040 U I TOILET AND BATHING ROOMS 54 min 1. TOILET AND BATHING ROOMS SHALL PROVIDE TURNING SPACE. 12 max 1370 0 z 0_ 0 I 0 2. REQUIRED CLEAR FLOOR SPACES, CLEARANCE AT FIXTURES, AND TURNING SPACE SHALL BE PERMITTED TO ° O w OVERLAP. 4-4.8 perimeter 3os 42 min 00 a E ;_ 8 _ I 3. DOORS SHALL NOT SWING INTO THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OR CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR ANY FIXTURE. DOORS 10-120 ° 1065 rn � L_ z I SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SWING INTO THE REQUIRED TURNING SPACE. EXCEPTION: DOORS TO A TOILET ROOM OR E �' "' = BATHING ROOM FOR A SINGLE OCCUPANT ACCESSED ONLY THROUGH A PRIVATE OFFICE AND NOT FOR COMMON cv 1'/2 Ca �' o : I 6 min USE OR PUBLIC USE SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SWING INTO THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OR CLEARANCE PROVIDED 38 16-18 17-19 „ „ M� o - - - co I 15o THE SWING OF THE DOOR CAN BE REVERSED TO COMPLY WITH 603.2.3 2max 405-455 430-485 17 -19 co ° M - - - L - - - - -� 4. WHERE THE TOILET ROOM OR BATHING ROOM IS FOR INDIVIDUAL USE AND A COMPLYING CLEAR FLOOR SPACE IS " 1'/z min A B 430 485 coo m PROVIDED WITHIN THE ROOM BEYOND THE ARC OF THE DOOR SWING, DOORS SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SWING INTO 3a WHEELCHAIR ACCESSIBLE AMBULATORY ACCESSIBLE 6 min THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OR CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR ANY FIXTURE. 01% - WATER CLOSETS WATER CLOSETS 150 5. MIRRORS LOCATED ABOVE LAVATORIES OR COUNTERTOPS SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH THE BOTTOM EDGE OF THE 32"� SIDE WALL GRAB BAR AT WATER CLOSETS REFLECTING SURFACE 40 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. MIRRORS NOT LOCATED ABOVE Q 18 min 66 LAVATORIES OR COUNTERTOPS SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH THE BOTTOM EDGE OF THE REFLECTING SURFACE 35 N 455 24 min 6 36 min 60 min 60 min SIZE OF GRAB BARS SPACING OF GRAB BARS 12 min 1675 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. 00 915 305 1525 152s 6. COAT HOOKS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN ONE OF THE REACH RANGES. SHELVES SHALL BE LOCATED 40 INCHES 00 Q s10 ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE REQUIRED_ (A) (B) MINIMUM AND 48 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR. J > M ADULT WALL HUNG ADULT FLOOR MOUNTED WATER CLOSET WITHOUT TOE CLEARANCE Cd _ O I WATER CLOSET AND CHILDREN'S WATER CLOSET THE FRONT PARTITION AND AT LEAST ONE SIDE WATER CLOSETS AND TOILET COMPARTMENTS_ NOTES: m M 1. THE REQUIRED CLEARANCES AROUND THE WATER CLOSET SHALL BE PERMITTED TO OVERLAP THE WATER CLOSET, CAI I I PARTITION SHALL PROVIDE TOE CLEARANCE. TOE ASSOCIATED GRAB BARS, DISPENSERS, SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS. COAT HOOKS, SHELVES, ACCESSIBLE 1. GRAB BARS IN ACCESSIBLE TOILET OR BATHING FACILITIES SHALL COMPLY. � CLEARANCE AT THE FRONT PARTITION IS NOT 2. GRAB BARS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A HORIZONTAL POSITION, 33 INCHES E N L ROUTES, CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AND CLEARANCES REQUIRED AT OTHER FIXTURE, AND THE TURNING SPACE. MINIMUM AND 36 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FLOOR MEASURED TO THE TOP; W � Q o I E I o a �, REQUIRED IN A COMPARTMENT GREATER THAN 62 r LO I o I M- alternate INCHES DEEP WITH AN WALL HUNG WATER CLOSET OR FLUSH VALVES OF THE GRIPING SURFACE. LLJ cn I a; ° 6 door O 0 65 INCHES DEEP WITH A FLOOR MOUNTED WATER 1. FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE HAND OPERATED OR AUTOMATIC, HAND OPERATED FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL COMPLY 3. GRAB BARS, AND ANY WALL OR OTHER SURFACES ADJACENT TO GRAB BARS, Z coo location CLOSED. TOE CLEARANCE AT THE SIDE PARTITION IS SHALL BE FREE OF SHARP OR ABRASIVE ELEMENTS. EDGES SHALL BE W W WITH REACH RANGES AND NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST, THE FORCE ROUNDED. -CU(W O L- - - - - I E NOT REQUIRED IN A COMPARTMENT GREATER THAN 66 REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE 5 POUNDS MAXIMUM. _ 60 min COS S o � INCHES WIDE. 2. WHERE AN ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY REQUIRES FLUSH CONTROLS FOR FLUSH VALVES TO BE LOCATED IN A 4. GRAB BARS SHALL NOT ROTATE WITHIN THEIR FITTINGS. _ U) •� < O L - - - - - � 4 max partition partition 1525 ° POSITION TEAT CONFLICTS WITH THE LOCATION OF THE REAR GRAB BAR, THEN THE REAR GRAB BAR SHALL BE 5. GRAB BARS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ANY MANNER THAT PROVIDES A GRIPPING Of L100 PERMITTED TO BE SPLIT OR SHIFTED TO THE OPEN SIDE OF THE TOILET AREA. SURFACE AT THE LOCATIONS SPECIFIED IN THIS STANDARD AND DOES NOT co G_ DOORS MAY NOT 60 min E m 6 min OBSTRUCT THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE. � SWING INTO REQUIRED 152s N "' 6 min DISPENSERSAMMA 150 1so 6. STRUCTURAL STRENGTH. ALLOWABLE STRESSES SHALL NOT BE EXCEEDED FOR D (o CLEARANCES SPACE x 1. DISPENSERS SHALL NOT BE OF A TYPE THAT CONTROLS DELIVERY OR THAT DOES NOT ALLOW CONTINUOUS PAPER I- 0 cm o 36 MATERIALS USED WHERE A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL FORCE OF 250 POUNDS E cxa E s15 FLOW. IS APPLIED AT ANY POINT ON THE GRAB BAR FASTENER MOUNTING DEVICE O SIZE OF CLEARANCE AT OVERLAP OF WATER CLOSET IN E E N v 2. IF TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS ARE INSTALLED ABOVE THE SIDE WALL GRAB BAR, THE OUTLET OF THE TOILET OR SUPPORTING STRUCTURE. U) WATER CLOSETS RESIDENTIAL DWELLING UNITS "� T N N 12 min PAPER DISPENSER MUST BE 48 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR AND THE TOP OF THE GRIPPING v 9 min SURFACE OF THE GRAB BAR MUST BE 33 INCHES MINIMUM AND 36 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR. 230 305 UNISEX TOILETS: 0 18701LIET COWARTMENTS1. IN ASSEMBLY AND MERCANTILE OCCUPANCIES, AN ACCESSIBLE UNISEX TOILET ROOM SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEN AN 2 GRAB BARS 7-9 AGGREGATE OF SIX OR MORE MALE AND FEMALE WATER CLOSETS IS REQUIRED. IN BUILDINGS OF MIXED NTS 180-230 WHEELCHAIR ACCESSIBLE AMBULATORY ACCESSIBLE (A) (B) OCCUPANCY, ONLY THOSE WATER CLOSETS REQUIRED FOR THE ASSEMBLY OR MERCANTILE OCCUPANCY SHALL BE - NTS DISPENSER OUTLET LOCATION TOILET COMPARTMENT DOORS TOILET COMPARTMENT ELEVATION ADULT ELEVATION CHILDREN USED TO DETERMINE THE USED TOILET ROOM REQUIREMENT. REV 5 REV 5 32 min --------- NOTES: sliding door F 18 AT LEAST ONE OF THE ACTIVE LEAVES OF DOORWAYS WITH TWO LEAVES SHALL COMPLY I 118 min F -1 I I 2. THERE SHALL BE NO PROJECTIONS INTO THE REQUIRED CLEAR OPENING WIDTH LOWER THAT 34 I I I I I INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. PROJECTIONS INTO THE CLEAR OPENING WIDTH 32 min E u� 445 v I BETWEEN 34 INCHES AND 80 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL NOT EXCEED 4 815 folding door of I I'� N I I I ° N I o INCHES. EXCEPTION: IN ALTERATIONS A PROJECTION OF 5/8" MAXIMUM INTO THE REQUIRED CLEAR o E N 12 min N 36 min 13'/2 min 13'/2 min I v I 305 W I s1s WIDTH SHALL BE PERMITTED FOR THE LATCH SIDE STOP. DOOR CLOSERS AND DOOR STOPS SHALL 345 345 c BE PERMITTED TO BE 78 INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. E 2'/2 max N 32 clear mi I 3. PROVIDE REQUIRED MANEUVERING SPACE AT DOORS. MANEUVERING CLEARANCES SHALL EXTEND m o a 64 I bench 0 0 815 THE FULL WIDTH OF THE DOORWAY AND THE REQUIRED LATCH SIDE OR HINGE SIDE CLEARANCE. E 20-24 rn m I �' 4. THRESHOLDS IF PROVIDED SHALL COMPLY WITH CHANGES IN LEVEL. EXCEP1ON: EXISTING OR hinged door ALTERED THRESHOLD 3/4 INCH HIGH SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO COMPLY. 42 min ON N 510-610 o NO REVISION o o' 5. DOOR HARDWARE: HANDLES, PULLS, LATCHED, LOCKS AND OTHER OPERABLE PARTS ON DOOR AND 17 max I loss ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 GATES SHALL BE 34" MINIMUM AND 48 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR OR GROUND. a3o L - - J & BID WHERE SLIDING DOORS ARE IN THE FULLY OPEN POSITION, OPERATING HARDWARE SHALL BE 31c_ L front approach, pull side front approach, front approach, push side,door hinge approach, pull side EXPOSED AND USABLE FROM BOTH SIDES. EXCEP1ON: EXISTING LOCKS SHALL BE PERMITTED IN PP P pP PP P 9 pp p ANY LOCATION AT EXISTING GLAZED DOORS WITHOUT STILE, EXITING OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS OR BENCH BACK SUPPORT AND SEAT HEIGHT CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AND DIMENSIONS push side provided with both closer and GRILLS, AND SIMILAR EXISTING DOORS OR GRILLES THAT ARE DESIGNED WIT LOCKS THAT ARE doorways WALL HUNG TYPE STALL TYPE - N Y latch ACTIVATED AT THE TOP OR BOTTOM RAIL. V `° without doors 6. DOOR CLOSERS AND GATE CLOSERS SHALL BE ADJUSTED SO THAT FROM AN OPEN POSITION OF NOTES: 12 min 90 DEGREES,THE TIME REQUIRED TO MOVE THE DOOR TO A POSITION OF 12 DEGREES FROM THE 1. CLEAR FLOOR SPACE POSITIONED FOR A PARALLEL APPROACH SHALL BE 1 06 min LATCH IS 5 SECONDS MINIMUM. PROVIDED. 915 305 7. DOOR AND GATE SPRING HINGES SHALL BE ADJUSTED SO THAT FROM THE OPEN POSITION OF 70 NOTES: 2. BENCHES ALLOWABLE STRESS SHALL NOT BE EXCEEDED FOR MATERIALS USED DEGREES, THE DOOR OR GATE SHALL MOVE TO THE CLOSED POSITION IN 1.5 SECONDS. 1. WHERE NO MORE THAN ONE URINAL IS PROVIDED IN A TOILET ROOM. THE WHFRF A VFRTICAL OR HORIZONTAL FORCE OF 250 POUNDS IS APPLIED AT I I F_ T _ _ _ _ _ - F- _ _ _ _ _-j I 8. DOOR AND GATE OPENING FORCE. FIRE DOORS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OPENING FORCE URINAL IS NOT REQUIRED TO BE ACCESSIBLE. ANY POINT ON THE SEAT, FASTENER MOUNDING DEVICE, OR SUPPORTING - - - - - ALLOWABLE BY THE APPROPRIATE ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY. THE FORCE FOR PUSHING OR 2. A CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE POSITIONED FOR FORWARD APPROACH STRUCTURE. c I I I c I 24 min = o 24 min PULLING OPEN A DOOR OR GATE OTHER THAN A FIRE DOOR SHALL BE 5 POUNDS FOR INTERIOR SHALL BE PROVIDED. 3. WHERE PROVIDED IN WET LOCATIONS THE SURFACE OF THE SEAT SHALL BE ° I I N I I N 610 E s10 DOORS, GATES, SLIDING OR FOLDING DOORS. 3. FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE HAND OPERATED OR AUTOMATIC HAND OPERATED SLIP RESISTANT AND SHALL NOT ACCUMULATE WATER. 42 min I 22 min N 2 �r � ' I u, 2 I I oo � I I 22 min I Oo � I I L 9. DOOR AND GATE SURFACES. SWINGING DOOR AND GATE SURFACES WITHIN 10 INCHES OF THE FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL COMPLY WITH REACH RANGES AND NOT REQUIRE TIGHT 4. BENCH SUPPORT SHALL PROVIDE BACK SUPPORT OR SHALL BE AFFIXED TO A loss cv ss0 v v Z FINISHED FLOOR OR GROUND MEASURED VERTICALLY SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH SURFACE ON THE I � I I I sso ( I GRASPING, PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST, THE FORCE REQUIRED TO WALL. I PUSH SIDE EXTENDING THE FULL WIDTH OF THE DOOR OR GATE. PARTS CREATING HORIZONTAL OF ACTIVATE OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE 5 POUNDS MAXIMUM. 5. DINING AREAS: IN DINING AREAS, THE TOTAL FLOOR AREA ALLOTTED FOR VERTICAL JOINTS IN THESE SURFACES SHALL BE WITHIN 1/16 INCH OF THE SAME PLANE AS THE SEATING AND TABLES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. OTHER. CAVITIES CREATED BY ADDED KICK PLATES SHALL BE CAPPED. EXCEPTIONS: SIDING DOORS 6. WHERE DINING SURFACES FOR THE CONSUMPTION OF FOOD OR DRINK ARE ARE NOT REQUIRED TO COMPLY. TEMPERED GLASS DOORS WITHOUT STILES AND HAVING A BOTTOM PROVIDED, AT LEASE 5%, BUT NOT LESS THAN ONE, OF THE SEATING AND RAIL OR SHOE WITH THE TOP LEADING EDGE TAPERED AT 60 DEGREES MINIMUM FROM THE STANDING SPACES AT THE DINING SURFACES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE AND BE HORIZONTAL SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO COMPLY. DOORS AND GATES THAT DO NOT EXTEND TO DISTRIBUTED THROUGHOUT THE FACILITY. WITHIN 10 INCHES OF THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO COMPLY. EXISTING DOORS AND GATED WITHOUT SMOOTH SURFACES WITHIN 10 INCHES OF THE FINISH FLOOR hinge approach, push side hinge approach, push side, door latch approach, pull side BENCHES OR GROUND SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH SURFACES PROVIDED THAT IF ADDED 7 Uf�VAJ.S 3►�� hinge approach, pull side latch approach, pull side, KICK PLATED ARE INSTALLED CAVITIES CREATED BY SUCH KICK PLATED ARE CAPPED. _ NTS _ NTS provided with both closer and latch door provided with closer 10. VISION LIGHTS: DOORS , GATES AND SIDE LIGHTS ADJACENT TO DOORS OR GATES, CONTAINING ONE OR MORE GLAZING PANELS THAT PERMIT VIEWING THROUGH THE PANELS SHALL HAVE THE REV 5 REV 5 - - - BOTTOM OF AT LEAST ONE GLAZED PANEL LOCATED 43 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH 8211 < r - - - - - r FLOOR. EXCEPTION: VISION LIGHTS WITH THE LOWEST PART MORE THAN 66 INCHES FROM THE �� I C% I �� r I I FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO COMPLY. REu1STERED c c 5 max 15 min 3 1/2 max ARC I I •'= I I � I � •E N I I •c ,� I I •� � I I .= N 11. AUTOMATIC AND POWER ASSISTED DOORS AND GATES. AUTOMATIC DOORS AND AUTOMATIC GATES 125 380 89 y1TE'CT 24 min E o 24 min co o � 22 min E o E o E o SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI/BHMA A156.10. LOW ENERGY AND POWER ASSISTED DOORS SHALL I I I 610 I v I I 560 I c� I I N I c COMPLY WITH ANSI/BHMA A156.19 (1997 OR 2002 EDITION). AUTOMATIC DOORS SHALL PROVIDE A 610 I � I I I v v I I CLEAR OPENING OF 32 INCHES MINIMUM IN POWER -ON AND POWER -OFF MODE AND APPLIES TO r - - 1 x d. p ALL LEAVES IN THE OPEN POSITION. MANEUVERING CLEARANCES AND THRESHOLDS SHALL COMPLY. F - - I I ca S E DF WAB)l;pdC;Dg; 0'w i MANUAL CONTROLS SHALL COMPLY WITH REACH RANGES AND BE LOCATED BEYOND THE ARC OF ,..�� THE DOOR SWING. WHERE DOORS AND GATES WITHOUT STANDBY POWER ARE A PART OF A MEANS i i r, OF EGRESS, THE CLEAR BREAK OUT OPENING AT SWINGING OR SLIDING DOORS AND GATES SHALL ID BE 32 INCHES MINIMUM WHEN OPERATED IN EMERGENCY MODE. L L - - J NOTES: latch approach, push side latch approach, push side, front approach pocket or hinge approach side approach front approach 1. A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE POSITIONED FOR FORWARD APPROACH SHALL BE PROVIDED. door` with closer provided FORWARD APPROACH PARALLEL APPROACH KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE SHALL BE PROVIDED, THE DIP OF THE OVERFLOW SHALL Q p 60 min 60 min 60 min (EXISTING BUILDINGS) NOT BE CONSIDERED IN DETERMINING KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCES. 1525 1525 1525 2. FAUCETS SHALL COMPLY WITH OPERABLE PARTS. HAND -OPERATED METERING FAUCETS NOTES: SHALL REMAIN OPEN FOR 10 SECONDS MINIMUM. - - - - 1. A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE POSITIONED FOR A FORWARD APPROACH SHALL BE 3. WHERE ENHANCED REACH RANGE IS REQUIRED AT LAVATORIES, FAUCETS AND SOAP PROVIDED. PROVIDE KNEE AND TOE SPACE. THE CLEAR SPACE SHALL BE CENTERED DISPENSER CONTROLS SHALL HAVE A REACH DEPTH OF 11 INCHES MAXIMUM OR, IF A� -1 - - - - ON THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. EXCEPTION. IN EXISTING BUILDINGS, DRINKING AUTOMATIC, SHALL BE ACTIVATED WITHIN A REACH DEPTH OF 11 INCHES MAXIMUM. W 18 min --- �� aas FOUNTAINS WITH A PARALLEL APPROACH CENTERED ON THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN WATER AND SOAP FLOW SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A REACH DEPTH OF 11 INCHES E 12min I I I � I E � I I '� 0 3os I I •° SHALL BE PERMITTED MAXIMUM. o EN N _ 2. OPERABLE PARTS SHALL COMPLY WITH OPERABLE PARTS REQUIREMENTS. 4. WATER SUPPLY AND DRAINPIPES UNDER LAVATORIES AND SINKS SHALL BE INSULATED cE2v o I 24 min I cD X > 8 3. SPOUT OUTLETS OF WHEELCHAIR ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAINS SHALL BE 36 OR OTHERWISE CONFIGURED TO PROTECT AGAINST CONTACT. THERE SHALL BE NO v I 610 I 2os \ / \ / \ INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FLOOR. SPOUT OUTLETS OF DRINKING FOUNTAINS FOR SHARP OR ABRASIVE SURFACES UNDER LAVATORIES AND SINKS. 111111 IBM AI X > 8 STANDING PERSONS SHALL BE 38 INCHES MINIMUM AND 43 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE 5. OPERABLE PARTS ON TOWEL DISPENSERS AND HAND DRYERS SHALL COMPLY WITH / \ �_ \ THE FLOOR. THE FOLLOWING TABLE: X g ° E E N 4. THE SPOUT SHALL PROVIDE A FLOW OF WATER 4 INCHES MINIMUM IN HEIGHT. THE W 205 E N ANGLE OF THE WATER STREAM FROM THE SPOUTS WITHIN 3 INCHES OF THE FRONT MAXIMUM REACH DEPTH AND HEIGHT ^ \ co \ OF THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN SHALL BE 30 DEGREES MAXIMUM, AND FROM SPOUTS L.L / \ \ BETWEEN 3 INCHES AND 5 INCHES FROM THE FRONT OF THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN MAXIMUM 5 INCHES 2 INCHES 5 INCHES 6 INCHES 9 INCHES 11 INCHES SHALL BE 15 DEGREES MAXIMUM, MEASURED HORIZONTALLY RELATIVE TO THE FRONT REACH DEPTH (13mm) (50mm) (42mm) (40mm) (230mm) (280mm) _ - FACE OF THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. MAXIMUM 48 INCHES 46 INCHES 42 INCHES 40 INCHES 36 INCHES 34 INCHES stopor latch approach REACH HEIGHT 1220mm 1170mm 1065mm 1015mm 915mm 865mm O Pp alcove alcove alcove pull side push side push side, door provided with LL both closer and latch 20 DOOFA DOORWAYS, AND GATES g DF&A(M FOUKrAN3 4 LAVATORIESQ - NTS - NTS - NTS REV 5 REV 5 REV 5 W r� rVn! v L/ Ir- RECEIVED CITY OF T10"K ILA N 00 OCT 0 9 2015 O PERMIT CENTER 0 V_ DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 E _o L6 0 N 0 0 0 w 0 z it o_ . , 'Lock Phone Land . ownerr Contractor r.. Ccntracto. GontractorTrEMS Supeel _owne.r SuP #rd #ed: Fur Insta##ed id'' Co#na ed#mt pdatedl,10j15 , II. CONCRETE, New slab Under slab preperation V. MASONARY V. STEEL Structural modifications to shell building for equipment (site specfic verify on plans) VI. CARPENTRY Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-029 ♦ Greg Collier 2972-539-2671 x1004 972-484-8855 x1031 Millwork Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-0292 Greg Collier 972-539-2671x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Solid surface top Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-0292 Greg Collier 972-539-2671 x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Fluted glass Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-0292 Greg Collier 972-539-2671x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Millwork cabinets Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-0292 Greg Collier 972-539-2671 x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Running trim Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-0292 Greg Collier 972-539-2671 x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Beverage Menu Brackets VII. THERMAL & MOISTURE Roofing penetrations- Unless itemized by LL or LOI Insulation (interior walls) Caulking (all disimilar material) and sealant Waterproofing at wet area walls/floor ♦ Laticrete 9235 VIIL DOORSANDW#IUdOw5 Hollow metal doors and frames ♦ Locknet Thomas Howard 800-887-4307 x104 Storefront & Glazing (unless itemized by LL in LOI) Frames and Hardware ♦ Locknet Thomas Howard 800-887-4307 x104 Plastic laminate doors ♦ Locknet Thomas Howard 800-887-4307 x104 ♦ ♦ ♦ . Eliason doors ♦ Locknet Thomas Howard 800-887-4307 x104 Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-029 Greg Collier 2972-539-2671 x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Wood entry doors (one pair) hardware on all exterior doors Panic ha ♦ Locknet m H Thomas Howard o a d 80 0 887 4307 x104 X. FINISHES ♦ National Account Simulated wood flooring Adelta Kevin Minissale 972-620-5600 x1662 ♦ National Account -Daltile - TJ#eKwaIfJFOH Floor/Curry Acct #NA001453 Brett McLeroy 877-556-5728 T#te Ulfa#I/FOH Large Format Floor, ♦ TransCeramica Noreen Schertler 312-342-4689 allshed Citncrete ♦ UIt ,ficir tennifer Faller, 15=828-9797 V ♦ National Account - National Account Wall coverings RF1 Distribution Michele Gross 866-628-2280 National Account - ♦ Mural production Wall mural Production (verify field dimensions) HillebrandCory Stephanie Cane 214-823-9941 National Account - ♦ Mural manufacturer Wall mural Manufacture (delivery of installed vinyl) The Store Decor Susie McCracken 972-475-4404 x2234 Painting - see finish schedule FRP - see finish schedule Stainless steel wall panels, trim and bottom trim at ♦ N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 quarry tile and accessories Stainless steel corner guards ♦ N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 Stainless Steel panels behind hood equipment ♦ N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 Carpet squares ♦ Milliken Carpet Bill Zimmerman 617-413-2679 Walk off mat carpet ♦ Milliken Carpet Bill Zimmerman 617-413-2679 Walk off mat transitions ♦ Milliken Carpet Bill Zimmerman 617-413-2679 Carpet glue ♦ IMilliken Carpet Bill Zimmerman 617-413-2679 Carpet transitions and accessories (Reference sheet ♦ Schluter Earl Maicus 800-472-4588 x111 A452) ♦ Veneer Stone Ron Cossette 214-491-5100 Wall brick National account desk 508-472-5773 Acoustical Ceiling Tiles ♦ Armstrong 800-442-4212 X. SPECIALTIES Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-029 Greg Collier 2972-539-2671 x1004 Toilet partitions and hardware including purse hook ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 (Included in millwork package) Grab bars ♦ Delivery 1-Smallwares Hand towel dispensers in restrooms (1 each) Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 ♦ Delivery 1- Smallwares Hand towel dispensers at sinks in BOH Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 ♦ Delivery 1- Smallwares Toilet paper dispensers Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 T Delivery 1- Smallwares Sanitary napkin disposals (in women's restroom) Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 ♦ Delivery 1- Smallwares Toilet seat cover dispensers Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 ♦ Eco Lab Cmcly Padilla Lylecla . -972-232-8650 Soap dispensers y Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-029 Greg Collier 2972-539-2671 x1004 Mirrors (part of millwork package including mirror ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 glass and plywd cleat) Awning Material - VINYL (Ultra Shade Plus) ♦ Innovative Industrial Clay Eakins 800-928-4204 CLOTH (Subrella) Solutions 817 994 9091 Cell Interior "Restroom", ADA & HC tactile signs per city, The Store Decor Susie McCrackin 972-475-4404 x2234 local and state codes (to receive Certificate of Occ.) Fire extinguishers per city and local Fire marshal All specialty signage per city or local codes ♦ Delivery 1-Smallwares Diaper change tables in restrooms (1 each) Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-029 Greg Collier 2972-539-2671 x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Restroom robe hooks Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-029 Greg Collier 2972-539-2671 x1004 Restroom upper wall cabinet (part of millwork ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 package) "CBC To Go" and "CBC" parking signs for exterior Delivery 1 building- Verify quanitity and location with owner. ♦ Inven Cynthia Wise 972-590-4212 Must be approved by LL "CBC To Go" and "CBC" parking poles and bases XII.FURNISHINGS Tables - see A602 Table bases - see A602 Shelley Dungan 817-332-2702 ♦ Bianco 817-336-4922 Booths - contractor to secure with blocks to the floor Shelley Dungan 817-332-2702 Banquette seating - GC to provide dimensions to ♦ Bianco 817-336-4922 Owners Vendor Shelley Dungan 817-332-2702 Banquette seating full size wall template - GC to Bianco 817-336-4922 provide dimensions to Owners Vendor Chairs - see A602 Couch - see A602 ♦ Stratacache Ryan Murray 877-761-1122 x410 Digital Feature Board 937-424-7023 mobile Grand Openings Steve Edgemon 972-523-029 Greg Collier 2972-539-2671 x1004 ♦ 972-484-8855 x1031 Lounge/Nook table Leather lounge chairs (2) - see A602 Patio chairs - see A602 Patio tables - see A602 Patio umbrella steel base ♦ Sunnyland Patio Furniture Toni Stein 972.239.3716 ♦ Sunnyland Patio Furniture Toni Stein 972.239.3716 Exterior ornamental iron benches. Attach to concrete Patio umbrellas Sunnyland Patio Furniture Toni Stein 972.239.3716 ♦ OR American Trading Co. Paul Weintraub, 215.295.4040, Base Nick Hodge, Rep 972.733.1724 Patio trash receptacles ♦ Sunnyland Patio Furniture Toni Stein 972.239.3716 Roller shades ♦ MS Supply Mary Reimschussel 817-429-6786 Window curtains ♦ MS Supply Mary Reimschussel 817-429-6786 Window graphics - By Owner Exterior Sign contractor Wall pictures with frames (preframed, ready to hang. ♦ The Store Decor Susie McCrackin 972-475-4404 x2234 GC to supply hanging hardware) Hang interior "To Go/Call Ahead" sign and chain at ♦ Delivery 1 Cynthia Wise 972-590-4212 main pick up counter (1) - GC to provide hooks Inven ♦ Delivery 2 - Smallwares - Lori Beck 614-228-6525 Trash receptacles- Restroom Wasserstrom Delivery 2- Smallwares - Lori Beck 614-228-6525 Trash receptacles- under beverage counter Wasserstrom Install Baker Boy bronze medallion at entry tile. A&B Aluminum Foundry Dave Williamson 972-247-3579 Install menu board slide in panels (6) + (1) Beverage Delivery 2 Cynthia Wise 972-590-4212 Panel Inven Exterior building signage - GC to provide electric and TBD by Project Manager conduits TV's TBD by Project Telephone system - GC to provided electric and CBC IT Implementation Michael Young 972-619-4184 conduits Coordinator ♦ CBC IT Implementation Michael Young 972-619-4184 POS system - GC to provide electric and conduits Coordinator Music system - GC to provide electric and conduits ♦ lAmbiance Radio Sean Adams 805-217-3086 Topher Cramm 214-257-1612 Stanley Yvett Bontrager 214-257-1611 Security system - GC to provide electric and conduits Program Manger 940-231-4130 - cell Stanley - Preferred Vendor Topher Cramm 214-257-1612 Fire alarm system - GC to furnish and install complete system per local code and governing authorities and GC Vendor Yvett Bontrager 214-257-1611 LL requirements Program Manger 940-231-4130 - cell Office safe -to be installed after floor tile and base N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 installation Office furniture Staples Aubin Tucker 800-866-1211 x2433 Lockers N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 CO2 tank & lines - GC to provide chase in wall NuCO2 Jon Gallup 817-808-9959 Coca Cola Jana Coody 404-887-3884 Soda system - GC to provide hole in counter Installation Eco Lab Akemi Stark 972-232-8650 Mop holders Lyle Clay .Crick ( :. nd Or Ovu e n Owne Owner, Contracto r Cortt r r acta Co ntTacio �. rfEMS S `. Vendor _ a Coon i Contact - P hone `` r Su ed P P) + Su I#ed Fp #nstalled Fur tshed n ! s ## d n to e Coory#Hated Install knife racks with screws in back of house areas Owner to verify exact Per CBC on FRP walls (2 - 3 units) amount and locations Manager Instruction Install clip boards with screws in back of house areas Owner to verify exact Per CBC on FRP walls (10 -12 boards) amount and locations Manager Instruction Install Espresso Machine - GC to coordinate utilities, Schaerer Food Art Espresso David Kevil 414-899-1451 plumbing and access at counter Install Coffee Brewer (KES will take out of box and set N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 on counter) - GC to coordinate utilities Install beverage area hanging frames, signs and hooks (1st)Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 (4) Smallwares Install insulated coffee urns (4-5 units, remove from N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 box and set on counter) Kitchen equipment N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 Ice head at soda station Hoshizaki -national account Kelly Marincik 817-832-7342 cell Remote roof top condenser & run Refrigeration lines Hoshizaki - national account Kelly Marincik 817-832-7342 cell for soda counter soda Kitchen ice machine bin and ice head Hoshizaki -national account Kelly Marincik 817-832-7342 cell Delivery 1- Smallwares Display frames at POS shrouds Wasserstrom Lori Beck 614-228-6525 Walk in cooler/freezer N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 Refrigeration equipment N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 Refrigeration roof penetrations and roof jacks - General Contractors responsible for roof penetrations Bubbler at Berverage Station N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 Tea Brewer (beverage counter) N. Wasserstrom & Sons Inc Rosie Bonlarron 614-737-8803 XIV. MECHANICAL Trane Ethan Kinsey 972-406-6081 - cell RTU units and curbs 972-207-4869 Exhaust pans and Pitch Pans 1D Higgins Al Lapinski or Anna Heaton 800-772-5452 Exhaust fans and curbs JD Higgins Al Lapinski or Anna Heaton 800-772-5452 Ansul system JD Higgins At Lapinski or Anna Heaton 800-772-5452 Kitchen hoods JD Higgins Al Lapinski or Anna Heaton 800-772-5452 Kitchen hood stainless steel skirts - GC to confirm JD Higgins Al Lapinski or Anna Heaton 800-772-5452 height of skirt prior to owner ordering Exhaust duct fire wrap JD Higgins Al Lapinski or Anna Heaton 800-772-5452 Ductwork Supply & return grills Certified air balance Melink Corporation Steve Buelterman 513-965-7300 x113 Trane Ethan Kinsey, National Acct 972-406-6081- cell Thermostats and remote sensors Mgr 972-207-4869 JD Higgings CalCana Al Lapinski or 800-772-5452 Patio heaters (gas- awning mounted) Anna Heaton RTU filters & change at construction turn over to Owner XV. PLUMBING Paul Lawson 800-447-1953 24/7 National ♦ A.O. Smith plawson@hotwater.com Accounts Water heater National Account Mgr (615) 804-8696 cell ♦ Elge Plumbing Kerry Mason 617-782-4300 Water Filter/Softener 617-719-7264 Clear silicone all escutcheon rings to wall Grease trap - verify on plans, unless itemized by LL on LOI Plumbing Fixtures ♦ Ferguson Michael Whitley 855-267-2456 ♦ MistAMERICA Robert Lank 602-255-0500 02-721-0930 Patio Misters 6 - cell XVL ELECTRICAL Ken Chigani ♦ Marlin Controls kchigani@marlincontrols.co 214-553-5700 Mini Panel 4 dimmers Lighting Control System Bridget Mason 214-352-3900 ♦ Meletio Light fixtures Scott Salyer 972-559-6988 Bridget Mason 214-352-3900 ♦ Meletio Light fixture light bulbs Scott Salyer 972-559-6988 ridget tvlason 1 214-,,357-39CO: . Dimrler.Contro#s cote 5alyr , 972 688 , Electrical Switchgear ♦ WESCO Travis Carr 614-934-6415 Daylight Photocell/Sensor/Tmeclock/Override Timer ♦ WESCO Travis Carr 614-934-6415 Electrical Disconnect/CT/Metering Enclosure WESCO Travis Carr 614-934-6415 ♦ CBC IT Implementation Michael Young 972-619-4184 IT Rack Coordinator NOTES TOGENERAL CONTRACTOR 1. G.C. TO COORDINATE, SCHEDULE AND RECEIVE ALL ITEMS WHETHER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER, OWNER'S VENDORS OR CONTRACTOR. G.C. TO PREPARE A MASTER SCHEDULE IDENTIFYING RESPONSIBILITIES FOR ACTIVITIES THAT DIRECTLY RELATE TO THIS WORK. 2. ALL ITEMS SCHEDULED FOR DELIVERY SHALL HAVE A LOCATION COORDINATED FOR STORAGE ONSITE. 3. G.C. TO INSPECT ALL ITEMS FOR DAMAGE UPON DELIVERY. LANDLORD'S SCOPE OF WORK SUMMARY EXHIBIT C-2 LANDLORD'S WORK "Landlord's Work" shall be defined as follows: - Landlord shall add a demising wall (the "Demising Wall") in the Premises in the approximate location shown on Exhibit B - Part 2, such that the Premises' square footage equals approximately 3,777 of GLA. The Demising Wall will be taped/sanded and prepared for Tenant's finishes. - The following existing minimum standards shall be delivered with the Premises in good working order: 1. 18 tons HVAC service; 2. 400A three-phase, four -wire electrical service; 3. 1.5" cold water stub- 4. 2" gas stub; and 5. connection to the existing in -ground grease interceptor stubbed-up/capped inside the Premises. 09/29/15 INITIAL HERE BID ALTERNATE 1. PROVIDE SEPARATE LINE ITEM PRICING FOR PROVIDING WALL COVERING WC-01 AND PAINT FINISH IN LIEU OF WALLS RECEIVING WC-02 THIN BRICK VENEER AS SHOWN ON SHEET A401. REVIEWED FOR CODE MAV'IPLIAN'CE APPROVED V iU Cib of Tulk"Wile BUILDING DIVISION c 0 U o 0 a5 o= C� ca): Z 0 m0 Uo '3 0 U O N O p C IS C N N C E o Qo = a) CL > ofCD m 0 CL � 2 T U s� Q 0 L C N c —3 0.) a 0 N - C �� o � o ago °c > U _ �'! o _ Lr) E Z5 m L i 01 U 0 Q Q U v o ° a o t U o a a Qi O E u L Z o S° U � o 0 0 ° Ua U -�— N M (D n- N c 'c - `o N Q 00 m 0) 0) N W (D < co `� 3 Ld Z C 0- W CU w -}; Q O _ Co O co D co ~ 'O'^ VJ NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10/08/2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED AFIC 1 E—T 1--b4MM14. Rfr-,!O STATE OF ! AS1il Ib/V 8/!5 '-I W nW f� O W U) U)/ L0 O N RECENED CITY OF TLAKWILA O OCT 0 9 2015 O PERMIT CENTER r DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: I EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A004A Responsibility Schedule n Arr nr ruic% nn1L1"\1r% n-a n0 nn. C J SINGLE DOOR EXIT WIDTH 42 — CLEAR. MAINTAIN 1'-6" (MIN. CLEAR AT STRIKE SIDE OF DOOR. I F E' — D POST OCC PANT LOAD IN ORMATION AS REQUIR D BY BUILDI OFFICIAL 0 i 2 0 M cV I O N 0 0 U O A W W ¢I z W U H O O �N z CD 0 0. Ln 6i m 5E oZ Z� �o KITCHIEW �XLTH-- 1 8 OCCUPANTS I I— _ F- — — — — -1 / 1 221 1 M N'S L—�-- LI--- J I 1&36E 74 5 C 1 115 1 2 KI114r 160" R 111 �1% 113 50'-2" — a11a�; �I 2 :i 110 K 117'-3" IIIIIIIII H - - ---- ----------- ----------- --------- yg,7 v, W.I. l r ... . I _.... �.r-�,>rui�i i �i� r l,t{rJ>! >.r R>R>r+>II .>,R.1/1 R>/•i I I®I r nN� — . of>i>. �i I .i.,i>rrrlmi! o> Is>Rt, � I, >rr,. >••rl � I,. >rlr . ✓I . 1 . >i : -.N�: .. !.: �. > >� :d Iri loariisl.y: .17✓.. ... .I � 1.� 1� . � ��>.R 1!r � IR r.k rr>I■�>�>I >I■I I N d� BUILDING CODE INFORMATION: BUILDING CODE: 2012 IMERNATION BUILDING CODE W/ STATE AMENDMENTS OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: RESTAURANT GROUP A-2 CONSTRUCTION TYPE: TYPE V B SPRINKLER: FULLY SPRINKLERED TO COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND CITY CODES FLAME SPREAD RATING CLASS C TOTAL MAXIMUM OCCUPANT LOAD: ENCLOSED BUILDING 106 OCCUPANTS EXTERIOR PATIO 20 OCCUPANTS TOTAL BUILDING AND PATIO OCCUPANT LOAD: 126 OCCUPANTS EXITING REQUIREMENTS: 7.5.1.3.3 OF NFPA 101 LIFE SAFETY CODE KITCHEN AREA = 1 EXIT DINING AREA = 2 EXITS DIAGONAL OF OVERALL AREA = 90'-0" 1/3 MIN. DISTANCE OF MAX. OVERALL DIAGONAL W/AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM = 90'-0" / 3 = 30'-0" MIN. REQUIRED DISTANCE BETWEEN EXIT DOORS = 38'-10" PROVIDED EGRESS CAPACITY BUILDING EGRESS MAIN ENTRY DOOR WIDTH = 72"/0.2" = 360 PERSONS PATIO DOOR WIDTH = 3670.2" = 180 PERSONS TOTAL = 540 PERSONS OCCUPANCY SIGNAGE NOTES: 1. SIGNS STATING THE MAXIMUM OCCUPANT CONTENT SHALL BE CONSPICUOUSLY POSTED IN EACH AREA OF ASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY ROOM, OR ROOM USED FOR SIMILAR PURPOSE. OCCUPANCY CALCULATIONS 2012 IBC MEANS OF EGRESS ILLUMINATION 1006.1 Illumination required. TOTAL INTERIOR OCCUPANTS The means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means of egress is occupied. 1006.2 Illumination level. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot-candle at the walking surface. 1006.3 Illumination emergency power. The power supply for means of egress illumination shall norms y be provided by the premises' electrical supply. In the event of power supply failure, an emergency electrical system shall autom t II ill ASSEMBLY AREAS TOT. SQ. FT. MAXIMUM OCCUPANTS* SEAT COUNT E�]DINING AREAS ('LESS CONCENTRATED USEI 801 54 68 15 SQ.FT. PER OCCUPANT BENCH TYPE SEATING 18 LINEAL INCHES PER OCCUPANT 0 EACH BENCH BACK - REFER TO OCCUPANCY PLAN 3 3 4 L I 19 11 BENCH SEATING - BOOTH 24 LINEAL INCHES PER OCCUPANT ® EACH 240L1 10 10 BENCH BACK - REFER TO OCCUPANCY PLAN OFIXED SEATING - - - NUMBER OF SEATS KITCHENS 81 STAFF AREAS 200 SQ.Fr. PM OCCUPANT 1, 43 7 8 - OFFICES 68 1 100 SQ.FT. PER OCCUPANT STORAGE 300 SQ.FT. PER OCCUPANT 234 1 - POTENTIAL WAITING 62 13 5 SQ.FT. PER OCCUPANT - PATIO ('LESS CONCENTRATED USE'S 3 00 20 18 15 SQ.FT. PER OCCUPANT PATIO 18 LINEAL INCHES PER OCCUPANT g EACH _ _ _ BENCH BACK - REFER TO OCCUPANCY PLAN i a ca y um inate the following areas: 0 1 1. Aisles and unenclosed stairways of rooms that TOTAL EXTERIOR OCCUPANTS require two or more means of egress. 2. Corridors, exit enclosures and exit passageways... 3. Exterior egress components... 4. Interior exit discharge elements... 5. Exterior landings ... for exit discharge doorways... TOTAL OCCUPANCY 126 107 ...4� o�o-rQnnRA oll I1RAQ1�r± cIVrIloco REVIEIAE€3 FOR CODE COAMPLIANCE G APPROVED t2 U 1 JA'11 0 4 2' . E p City ®f Tuk-vljila �UILOIN� Di��' PATIO ('LESS CONCENTRATED USE'S 3 00 20 18 15 SQ.FT. PER OCCUPANT PATIO 18 LINEAL INCHES PER OCCUPANT g EACH _ _ _ BENCH BACK - REFER TO OCCUPANCY PLAN i a ca y um inate the following areas: 0 1 1. Aisles and unenclosed stairways of rooms that TOTAL EXTERIOR OCCUPANTS require two or more means of egress. 2. Corridors, exit enclosures and exit passageways... 3. Exterior egress components... 4. Interior exit discharge elements... 5. Exterior landings ... for exit discharge doorways... TOTAL OCCUPANCY 126 107 ...4� o�o-rQnnRA oll I1RAQ1�r± cIVrIloco REVIEIAE€3 FOR CODE COAMPLIANCE G APPROVED t2 U 1 JA'11 0 4 2' . E p City ®f Tuk-vljila �UILOIN� Di��' i a ca y um inate the following areas: 0 1 1. Aisles and unenclosed stairways of rooms that TOTAL EXTERIOR OCCUPANTS require two or more means of egress. 2. Corridors, exit enclosures and exit passageways... 3. Exterior egress components... 4. Interior exit discharge elements... 5. Exterior landings ... for exit discharge doorways... TOTAL OCCUPANCY 126 107 ...4� o�o-rQnnRA oll I1RAQ1�r± cIVrIloco REVIEIAE€3 FOR CODE COAMPLIANCE G APPROVED t2 U 1 JA'11 0 4 2' . E p City ®f Tuk-vljila �UILOIN� Di��' d) 0 U 7 m 6 O 41 o=-- Z� m� 0 3 o e U y O O CC: O`c OV C � m In � •- to 0 O h 04 T O U') O. CN m ro m .^� U O n� 0r C — m 1 V) N N O O O 0 - o `o D m m ` o � v c t U in - a � a 0, ' U t o 0 OO Q C� G U � y T Li U L t +- O ..1 C1. z� N O E o co C Z ? I! c3 00 ccoo 0 0 0� U -0 U m Cn Q N Cd J .00 > 0 L oo 0) N � ^' W �� < r- LLJ toot zCD U�caUo R'S - a_ w CO V 0 D co 0 94 NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT [2,08 2015 & BID 5277.1 10/b8 A5 W co W 0 LL r) W D Cn CD L C`� RECc1VIED \ CITY OF TUCKWILA 00 0 OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER Egress Plan DATE OF THIS PRINTING - Oct 08, 2015 i E a 0 r7 CV t2 0 cV C 0 U 0 Li.l Q 0 Z Of d C.J 0 Z LL 0 M CV I C) N 0 0 0 �r G F Ir D i� A REMOVE EXISTING FURREE OUT W AND VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION EXISTING COLUMN. ADJUST FLOOR PLAN AS NECESSARY. LINE OF AWNING ABOVE (TYP.) 53'-10 3/4' LINE OF AWNING ABOVE (TYP.) ---------- \ -------------------- ----------�- I I I j I I II E— I I i � I MEN'S L___`------- — i i UI V IGL p L / II 114 -- 1836E 1 74 c CF�ERIING " I 118 � I i I STORAGE I I� I 107 RESTROOM- VESTIBULE I ' I I I I L . - r / I I I I 11 �AO� EN'S I I II 1 4'-O' ( Nx 1 I LI p I J 1 111 PREP /A\ ( 3'-4 3/4" SERVICE I I I N 8 ,_, —_� Iw■ �_� ice■ Li S 'IIII� 1111II�'IIII�'IIII� III TYPES ,VERIFY SIZE 1 LOCATION OF I� FURNITURE' SPECIFICS COLUMN.rEXISTING ADJUST FLOOR 4' A DINING I L-4-J L___J 1 I I — — — i PLAN AS NECESSARY. --��—� �a 4'-6' I ® — - — i�-----� I 2 RF OUT - I( ii ii ii i t i II II II I II I I I I I L�__J L_ ,—J L_ _J L--- J , 1 I 103A M I L--- � I .- DINING A �; M I I I ---� r-i---i 4'-6' I I i I L '---- I I _-- _—.�—__1___ I I I I I I\ I I I I I I I o I I Q0 I I i i i i i I i EFER TO A701 FOR L___J--- -- i--- ---� FURNITURE TYPES I I I I _T_J AND SPECIFICS1A ---T--- --- --- a -IJ3 I cV I I I I 1 PATIO DOSTING WALK � Y . ,.li, .i�ii,: ,1•ri ,in YY. 1 it Yi• t1�• (, .h`1�,, ir` iY • �..�� _, �. ��IY �. 1GJ, (, ��r1:.Y.b1 �;, Y,Y;.4.. . I, . ,.l 2� ♦.�.. , Yy''YY yY ., .Y Y1Y?.Y„Y`., ' I, .�•. ,•• YYY .Y, .1� I LLJ 0 0 W Z W U:. S O LO zo gl 1 2 3 C ¢. � W o� �z �� ao LINE OF AWNING ABOVE (TYP.) 4 01 COMPOSITE FLOOR PLAN N SCALE: 1 /4" = 1'-0" 4 3'-2 ADJACENT TENANT SPACE (N.I.G.) METRICS - PROTO 5.2 WASTE PROJECT ROTO-5.2 USABLE NET SF (INTERIOR) 3645 3800 NET LEASEABLE 3785 BOH IN -LINE TARGET ST 1610 1500 BOH w 233sf WIB 1610 1750 BOH INEFFICIENT SF 17 - COLUMNS SF 2 - - RESTROOMS w VESTIBULE 321 - RR INEFFICIENT SF 6 - - MANAGER'S STORAGE 8 - FOH SQ 1706 - COLUMNS 6 - INEFFICIENT SF) - TOTAL INEFFICIENT SF 31 SEATING SEATS 85 90 PARTIES 37 32 WAmNG 3 4 TOTAL SEATING INTERIOR 88 94 PATIO SEATS 18 30 PARTIES 5 13 TOTAL SEATING EXTERIOR 18 30 GRAND TOTAL SEATING 106 124 �5 bps-o��� REVIEV,IE 3 FOR i CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED nr� A. —HI 0 4 2:� I1 I I t City! ®T 1 uliw ifa WILDINIG DIVIS10'r-1 0 0 U m O m `" D CL m U rn O m O C m U 0 a)m H N C a O 0-0 -m a� p t0 m O O L O Q0 (V mm m U C (D 9,- bo N0 0 0 4— m C � O U o !- N 3 oo cap �o rn_ U a o ? 0 2 .2 Q U ��° o U s_ EL $ 0 H a N 0 O E E u .0 r- o c' � 0 Z ? " 3 a 0 co 0 0 0� U -0 U m _F Cu ■ • 00 •• ■ •• oo • co NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 FRE(IISTERED RCNITEGT 0 06 N5 0. W a_ ry 0 LL Q W D U) U) u') T_ O C\1 00 CITY Or TU11 WILA O OCT 0 9 2015 O PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 FOR REFERENCE ONLY SHEET NUMBER Al 00 Composite Floor Plan DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 ANDOVER PARKWAY W. E�SCALE:SERVICE COUNTER / COFFEE STATION LAYOUT 1 /4 =1 -0 PROTOTYPE 5.2.13 E 0 r2 N t!7 O 0 O O 0 z *Separate Mechanical Permit shall be required for: Coolers, freezers, walk-in coolers and freezers, i.e. assembled and hardwired. *Self-contained "plugin" coolers or freezers (appliance type) shall not require a mechanical permit. PLANTING STRIP (N.I.C.) 01 DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN N SCALE: 1 /4" = V-0" **DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF SUBSTRATE OR FACE OF MASONRY, U.N.O.** ( io GENERAL NOTES I 1. REFER TO THE PLUMBING AND KITCHEN FLOOR PLANS FOR SINK AND FLOOR DRAIN LOCATIONS. FLOOR SINKS TO BE FLUSH WITH TILE UNLESS OTHERWISE REQ'D BY CODE FLOOR FINISH TO SLOPE 1/8' PER FOOT TO DRAINS, TYP. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL 10 LB. 'ABC' FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES. LOCATE PER THE DIRECTION OF THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL 3. PROVIDE WATER RESISTANT GYP. BOARD AT ALL KITCHEN, RESTROOM AND MECHANICAL ROOM WALLS AND AT TILE & FRP LOCATIONS. (TYPICAL) 4. ALL WOOD IN CONTACT WITH CONCRETE MUST BE PRESSURE TREATED, MOISTURE RESISTANT WOOD, 5. MAXIMUM EFFORT TO OPERATE DOORS SHALL NOT EXCEED: 5.0 LB.F. (22.2N) FOR INTERIOR DOORS. 6. PROVIDE AND INSTALL OCCUPANCY SIGN IN A CONSPICUOUS LOCATION IN AVOIDANCE WITH STATE AND LOCAL CODES. 7. ALL DOORS SHALL BE KEYLESS IN DIRECTION OF EGRESS. 8. PRESERVE & PROTECT ALL EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN DURING CONSTRUCTION. GC TO INSTALL BATT INSULATION AND 5/8' GYP BD ON ALL EXTERIOR WALLS. GYP BD IS TO EXTEND FULL HEIGHT (TO DECK) IN DINING AREA, AND TO 6' ABOVE CEILING IN AREAS WITH A CEILING. 9. SAW CUT CONCRETE SLAB FOR PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, PHONE/DATA AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWINGS. NEW CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB OVER COMPACTED FILL AT CUTOUTS AND LEAVE -OUTS SHALL MATCH EXISTING. PREPARE FOR NEW SCHEDULED FINISH - COORDINATE WITH SHEET A451 AND KITCHEN DRAWINGS. 10. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE.LOCAL CODE AND FIRE MARSHAL REQUIREMENTS WITH DOCUMENTS; CONTACT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER IF DISCREPANCIES ARE BETWEEN DOCUMENTS AND LOCAL REQUIREMENTS. 11. *** ALL GYPSUM BOARD TO BE TYPE 'X' ARE RESISTANT THROUGHOUT EXCEPT IN LOCATIONS NOTED BY GENERAL NOTE #3. *** 12. LATERAL FORCE BRACING FOR WALLS SHALL NOT BE PROVIDED BY SUSPENDED T-BAR CEILING. 13. SECURE MILLWORK CAPS TO LOW WALLS WITH CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE AND CONCEALED MECHANICAL FASTENERS. 14. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED HOLES IN SOLID SURFACE COUNTER TOPS AS NEEDED TO INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. NOTE: MILLWORK SUPPLIER PROVIDES BEVERAGE COUNTER SODA SYSTEM HOLE IN SHOP. 15. ARCHITECT TO CONFIRM AWNING BLOCKING REQUIREMENTS, COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH AWNING COMPANY AND PROVIDE/INSTALL BLOCKING. 16. *** ALL PLYWOOD TO BE FIRE RATED THROUGHOUT. *** KEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES LISTED ARE USED - REFER TO DRAWING) ORAISED 4' WOOD PLATFORM; Rff. FINISH FLOOR PLAN ON SHEET A451 FOR DETAILS. <9>MOP SINK OREFER TO SHEET A105 FOR SUBSTRATE AT ALL PERIMETER WALLS. OLOW WALL WITH SHROUD; REFER TO MILLWORK DETAILS. OLOW WALL WITH GLASS PANEL ABOVE, REFER TO MILLWORK DETAILS. OPASS THROUGH WINDOW. DIMENSION SHOWN IS TO SUBSTRATE; REFERENCE DETAILS ON SHEET A122 FOR ROUGH OPENING SIZE & LOCATION. OCONCRETE PAD UNDER WATER HEATER. REFERENCE DETAILS ON SHEET A452. OPROVIDE SPACE FOR RECESSED BOX IN WALL FOR CO2 LINES AND PVC CONDUIT FOR SODA COUNTER. REFERENCE DETAILS ON SHEET /A505. OLINE OF AWNING ABOVE (BY OTHERS). ODECORATIVE FLUTED WOOD COLUMN. REFERENCE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & MILLWORK DETAILS. L MURAL PROVIDED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. G.C. TO FOLLOW AND PREP THE WALLS AS REQUIRED BY MFG'S SPECIFICATIONS OF THE VINYL MURAL WALL COVERING. M SPACE METAL STUDS TO ALLOW FOR MIN. 10" WIDE REFRIGERATION CHASE TO ROOF; REF. KITCHEN, MECHANICAL, & PLUMBING SHEETS FOR DETAILS. OENCLOSURE PANEL 00O2 FILL PORT. REFERENCE SHEET K211. OLINE OF CEILING ABOVE. OKITCHEN HOOD; REFER MECHANICAL & KITCHEN SHEETS FOR DETAILS. $O LOW WALL WITH ENOS PANEL ABOVE; REFER TO MILLWORK DETAILS. O2' MINIMUM AIR GAP BETWEEN FREEZER/COOLER WALL AND WALL OPROVIDE KNOX BOX WHERE REQUIRED BY JURISDICTION PURCHASED FROM LOCAL ARE DEPARTMENT. MOUNT PER FIRE DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS ON WALL ADJACENT TO ENTRANCE. OMILLWORK PROVIDED BY OTHERS, INSTALLED BY G.C. OLINE OF SOFFIT/HEADER ABOVE; REF. SHEET A121. OAWNING STRUCTURAL SUPPORT COLUMNS (BY OTHERS); REF. AWNING DRAWINGS. OKITCHEN EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS. REFERENCE KITCHEN SHEETS FOR STAINLESS STEEL PANEL LOCATIONS THROUGHOUT KITCHEN AREA. OLOCATION OF ELECTRIC CONDUIT DROP. Rff. MILLWORK/ENOS WALL DETAILS & ELECTRICAL OTHIN BRICK VENEER; REF. INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & INTERIOR MATERIALS/FINISH SCHEDULE. gg PLUMBING CHASE; REF. PLUMBING SHEETS. 4SWITCHGEAR CONCRETE CURB & CONTACTOR ENCLOSURE PANEL; REF. ELECTRICAL LEGEND EXISTING DEMISING WALL PROVIDED BY LANDLORD UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT. EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL TO REMAIN. CORNER BAKERY CAFE G.C. TO PROVIDE BATT INSULATION AND A LAYER OF 5/8' TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. AT INTERIOR. GYP. BD. IS TO EXTEND FULL HEIGHT (TO B.O. DECK). ARE RATED WALL CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO A105 FOR FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY DETAILS. INTERIOR PARTITION WALL CONSTRUCTION; REFERENCE WALL TYPES ON SHEET A105. SIM. CONDITION; SUBSTRATE ON ONE SIDE ONLY WALL TYPE FREEZER/COOLER WALL PANEL NEW PARTITIONS W/ R-11 SOUND BATT INSULATION. HALF HEIGHT PARTITION; REFERENCE WALL TYPES FOR HEIGHTS) DIMENSIONED TO CENTER LINE. 101DOOR TAG - TO SHEET A 02 FOREFER D OR & HARDWARE SCHEDULES. r_ 0 U m O O U 0 IO ` o_ 10 o tiv Z 0 3 0 -E o �m O C o .0 m 0 0 C O H O t fl O o ° � mmg U G ° C 0 a)a'0- o �- Lao o m r u v o > '26 m i 8 U . Q JE Q oiv po NTo� U ,- oo Ha a) O C U C CO M 02 0� Ua U„ cn t N 4) < • . • .• _W • ;4 W CU LLJ 0 NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED ARCHITECT to/as/I.5 q2 W O LL REVIEWED F®R. CODE COMPLIANCE U) A8`�gPR VE-D U)1'. JAB) 0 4 �Jy L� 1L7 ^' ' CIt, 01 Tukwila T_ EUILD ,IG DIVISION N_ _ RE E '11[1"D 00 CITY Oi= TUKW'ILA O OCT 0 0 2015 0 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER Al 01 Dimensioned Floor Plan DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 1' E rr7 [V 0 0 0 0 0 z Q4 o 0 off Z W 5/8' GYP BD ^ Pi-01 SCHLUTER TILE EDGE TRIM' REFER TO ELEVATIO 1 FOR WALL FINI ' GROUT 5/8' TILE BACKER BOARD 20 TILE DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 9SCALE: TILE DETAIL 3" = 1'-0" 18 NOT USED SCALE: 17 NOT USED SCALE: 4" REFERENCE SHEETS A101 IAX. AND A105 FOR WALL TYPES �� SEMI -RECESSED PAPER r \ M 16 P.T. DISPENSER SECTION @NOT USED SCALE: 1 "=1'-O" SCALE: 2x WD BLOCKING AT PERIMETER OF DISPENSER 1'-4' R.O. (V.I.F.) REFERENCE SHEET A101 �& A105 FOR WALL TYPES `--5/8" GYP BD ERAMIC TILE AS SCHEDULED SOUND BATT INSUL WHERE INDICATED SEMI -RECESSED PAPER ON FLOOR PLAN TOWEL DISPENSER PAPER TOWEL 15 DISPENSER PLAN SCALE: 1 "=1'-0" 12 NOT USED SCALE: 1 1/4' NOTE: FLUSH CONTROLS FOR THE ACCESSIBLE URINAL SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH ONE HAND AND SHALL NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, 1/4' CLEI PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST AND GLASS MII SHALL BE MOUNTED NO MORE THAN 44' ABOVE THE FLOOR. THE FORCE REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE CONTROLS SHALL BE NO GREATER THAN 5 LBF. CONTINUOI N FRAME WE -' CORNERS WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 14 URINAL DETAIL 8SCALE: MIRROR DETAIL SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" 1'-0" = 1-0" LIN OF PLYWOOD CLEAT ABOVE FACE OF TILE BACKER FACE OF TILE WAINSCOT 102 CLEAT (3/4' PLYWD ON LYWD) ATTACHED TO WALL LYWD BACKER 1/4" PLYWD BACKER j 1O/A102 1/4' CLEAR FLOAT 1 4" 3/4' 4' GLASS MIRROR ON 1/8' MASTIC BED 5/8" MOISTURE RESISTANT GYP BD 1/2' THICK PICTURE FRAME 1 1/4' CONTINUOUS HARDWD I FIAT RUBBER BUMPER; FRAME WITH MITERED VERIFY THICKNESS IN FIELD CORNERS CONTINUOUS HDWD FR WITH MITERED CORNERS MIRROR SECTION 10 @ TILE WAINSCOT 08 MIRROR SECTION SCALE: 1 "=1'-0" SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" PLYWD CLEAT FROM TOP OF FACE OF GYP BD MIRROR TO TOP OF CERAMIC TILE (BUILD UP TO CLEAR PAINT EDGE BLACK SHELF RAIL BELOW) M N / �1/4' PLYWD BACKER 1/4 3/4' 1/4 1/4' CLEAR FLOAT 1 1/4' GLASS MIRROR ON 1/8' MASTIC BED CONTINUOUS HDWD FR WITH MITERED CORNERS MIRROR SECTION OSCALE: 0 GYPSUM BOARD 1 "=1'-O" ACCESSORY MOUNTING SCHEDULE (NOT ALL ACCESSORIES ARE USED. REFER TO PLAN(S) FOR LOCATION.) T COVER TOILET SEAAl PAPER TOWEL54" 0 SOAP DISPENSER A4 ❑ SANITAY 0 136" GRAB BAR A7 42" GRAB BAR/ EMPLOYEE 0 DIAPERCHANGING A10 DISPENSER DISPENSER D SI NLET S RPER NAPK NTAMPON DISPOSAL 8" VERTICAL GRAB BAR RESTROOM MIRROR STATION REOSTROOM PARTITION MIN. 4" MAX PROJECTION A 36° 39' �i ° 7_9OF T.P. 11-9" 2' 24" MIN. 2" 42" d N _ oil 00 RO O_ _ 0 O � 'd0_ R M 16"-18 M 17'-19" M M U d_ Z .a.. Q N o CV VERIFY LOCAL REQUIREMENTS WOMEN'S RESTROOM ONLY MOUNT AT 4'-0' AT FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS HANDI-CAP STALL DOOR SPECIFICATIONS BOBRICK #B-4221 GEORGIA PACIFIC ENMOTION RECESSED AUTOMATED TOUCHLESS BY VENDOR GEORGIA PACIFIC MODEL BRADLEY MODEL 4781-15 AMERICAN SPECIALTIES #3100 AMERICAN SPECIALTIES #3100 BOBRICK: #B-165 2436 KOALA BEAR KARE PRODUCTS: BOBRICK #B-6717 SURFACE -MOUNTED; STAINLESS TOWEL DISPENSER & WASTE LS DBA - TRANSLUCENT SMOKE STAINLESS STEEL W/ATIN FINISH FINISH: SMOOTH, FINISH: SMOOTH, (FOR USE ONLY IF EMPLOYEE HORIZONTAL #KB100-00 CREAM SATIN STAINLESS STEEL W/ATIN FINISH CONTAINER NO. 4 SATIN FINISH NO. 4 SATIN FINISH RESTROOM IS REQUIRED) 59491 STAINLESS FRAME iYP.) 03A 03B 03C 03D MEN'S RESTROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1/4"=1'-O" FRAME ACCESSIBLE VANITY 18 1/2' 19" EXPOSED PLUMBING; REF. RESTROOM NOTE,*-------' OTE-7► :) ACCESSIBLE CLEARANCE 05 LAVATORY SECTION SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 8'-10" M A6 / I I u,, / A7 A4 ' E A9 I \ , 1' -� 7/8" 3'-0' �, ', A6 i I 03C A102 FINISH 8'-1o'Al � I , A10--- --- / / 3_011 4 I I \� G C 1 ' R "' / / I N N \ I a I , 2-0 1-----�N--S— o o —I / �. 109 1 1 j �'� Cto i \ i I / 19/A102 l \ /. -103A A102 \�----------� / / / / /'' 3'-0 3/4' -I----- II II I II II I I I I II II I I 13'-0' T VESTIBULE RESTROOM .__.� 107 I I I I I I I I i I Co ' I / L------- -- KEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES ARE USED) OPROVIDE WALL BLOCKING FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED PLUMBING FIXTURES, GRAB BARS, AND `V , ACCESSORIES. SEE ALSO GENERAL RR NOTE #3. / OHOT WATER & DRAIN PIPES EXPOSED UNDER SINKS SHALL BE INSULATED OR OTHERWISE CONFIGURED SO AS TO PROTECT AGAINST CONTACT. THERE SHALL BE NO SHARP OR ABRASIVE SURFACES UNDER SINKS. OC PROVIDE PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD TOILET PARTITIONS. OMIRROR BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR. REFER TO MIRROR DETAILS ON THIS SHEET. o OINSTALL WALL BUMPER AS SHOWN FOR PARTITION DOORS. MOUNT AT HEIGHT OF PARTITION HARDWARE V I F (IVES 408 S32D FINISH) OWALL MOUNTED CABINET. PROVIDE 2x FRT WD BLOCKING IN WALLS. OFLOOR TO CEILING MOUNTED PARTITION LEGS WITH BLOCKING FOR PARTITIONS. ONOT USED. ONOT USED. OSCHLUTER JOLLY TRIM AT CORNER EDGE OF TILE; REFERENCE INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE ON SHEET A602 AND DETAIL 19/A102 - 20/A102. PLYWOOD - BLOCKING BEYOND MIRROR — PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY G.C. I o 7 CV OF LAV. 1'-3' MIN. 1' u -8" WALL SCONCE LIGHT BORE LOCATION; MOUNT AS SHOWN; REFERENCE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS & LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE 1/4' CLEAR FLOAT GLASS MIRROR EDGE ON 1 /8' MASTIC BED FINISHES TO BE EXTENDED BEHIND MIRROR FINISH DETAIL 19/A102 L4 W U R O V o C= EXPOSED PLUMBING; REF. RESTROOM NOTE 30' MIN. CLEAR FLOOR SPACE of NOTES: REFER TO INDIVIDUAL RESTROOM PLAN, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, & ACCESORY MOUNTING SCHEDULE FOR LAVATORY, LIGHT FIXTURE, & ACCESSORY LOCATIONS. 04 TYPICAL COUNTER ELEVATION )SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RESTROOM NOTES 1. REFER TO SHEET A105 FOR WALL TYPES AND BASE DETAILS. REFER TO SHEET A501 FOR WOOD TRIM TYPES. 2. REFERENCE ACCESSORY MOUNTING SCHEDULE FOR MOUNTING DIMENSIONS OF TOILET & ACCESSORIES. 3. PROVIDE 2X FRT WOOD BLOCKING FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED PLUMBING FIXTURES, GRAB BARS, CABINETS, COUNTERS, TOILET ACCESSORIES, ETC. G.C. TO PROVIDE BOBRICK ANCHOR BOLTS #2582 WHERE GRAB BAR MOUNTS TO TOILET PARTITION. MOUNT BLOCKING TO STUDS W/ #8x1 1/2' WOOD SCREWS (4 MIN. AT EACH STUD). ANCHOR TOILET ACCESSORIES TO BLOCKING W/ MANUR PROVIDED ANCHORING DEVICES. 4. TOILET FIXTURE TO BE MOUNTED 18' FROM FINISHED WALL TO CENTERLINE OF TOILET FIXTURE. 5. WATER CLOSET COMPARTMENT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A DOOR THAT HAS AN AUTOMATIC -CLOSING DEVICE. THE DOOR IS REQUIRED TO HAVE A MINIMUM 9 INCH CLEARANCE FOR FOOTRESTS UNDERNEATH. THE INSIDE & OUTSIDE OF THE COMPARTMENT DOOR SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A LOOP OR U-SHAPED HANDLE IMMEDIATELY BELOW THE LATCH. THE LATCH SHALL BE FLIP -OVER STYLE, SLIDING OR OTHER HARDWARE NOT REQUIRING THE USER TO GRASP OR TWIST. 6. CONTROLS FOR FLUSH VALVES SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE WIDE SIDE OF TOILET STALLS NO MORE THAN 44" AFF. 7. HOT WATER & DRAIN PIPES EXPOSED UNDER SINKS SHALL BE INSULATED OR OTHERWISE CONFIGURED SO AS TO PROTECT AGAINST CONTACT. THERE SHALL BE NO SHARP OR ABRASIVE SURFACES UNDER SINKS. 8. G.C. TO CAULK INSIDE CORNERS AND TOP OF TILE. 9. RESTROOM FLOOR COVERING TO COMPLY WITH LOCAL CODES. 3'-9 3/8" 9'-2 3/4' F_ — — — 02D A102 A10 E WOMEN'S 0---� EQ. 2'-0" EQ. i o \ On / �1N ------------- I I \ I A4 Al -- -- -- \ I 1\ JI---� \ I N I A oN A3 I I I As L_Er_— J 01 I Eli 2'-61/2' 2'-6 1/2' EQ. EQ. 3'-7" 1'-6" 5'-1" 2'-8' 5'-1' 02A 02B 02C 02D WOMEN'S RESTROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN DSCALE: ( 4 SCALE: 1/4'=1'-O" 1/2" = 1'-0" *INSTALL BLOCKING IN WALL FOR ALL HARDWARE AND PARTITIONS*N / / / / /, / / REVIE".¢ED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED ' .!Ail 0 4 L010 Ci4f of Tu01wila BUILDING DIVISION! 0 U m 6 2 2 U CL o5 z-0 ma a 0 3 0:p o 0.0 C o N a) Eo o� o m� Oo oCOL wm (V ro m 2 t! U a)�s ft-_ E � cn o o o Z) o o a .,- U - ''E of N i= 3 v po �1,:� 0 m .- -Cp ' v m v >_ 1 o U - o n N o C:° r c 3 ao Co O O o Ua U 2 v) L L Q N Q . 70 00 O �. '+ M 00Wor) 00 O) O N ui I— 70 w z U� C: (u CU w U a- o � 00 � ry M ~ M1 O Au U) 0 Pak NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 �RIE�CMSTEERElol A€1CHI � EGa E OF IVASHI;GMIN 0 m 06 w 0 LjL vJ Lo r O N CITY OF TuI;WiL A 00 OCT 0 9 2015 O PERMIT CENTER r— DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER Al 02 Enlarged Restroom Plan & Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 3 5/8° KICKERS ATTACHED � 4' O.C. ' 3 5/8" KICKERS ATTACHED 0 4' O.C. 3 5/8' KICKERS ATTACHED 0 4' O.C. o MAX. ALTERNATE DIRECTION TO ' ` I MAX. ALTERNATE DIRECTION TO " MAX. ALTERNATE DIRECTION TO I " " co — STRUCTURE ABOVE ca — i i. STRUCTURE ABOVE :I cfl — cc — STRUCTURE ABOVE co — ° ° 2 2-0 aai • STRUCTURE ABOVE REFERENCE HEAD I. DETAIL I IO i i s ' ' B.O. CEILING C0 0 3 0 • ° ' i i • SCHEDULED CEILING SCHEDULED CEILING = A; O C ° U SCHEDULED CEILING i I SCHEDULED CEILING I SCHEDULED CEILING o o y - CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED WITH D FASTENERS 0 24 O.C. MAX. ' I I -� I: CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED WITH I I; D t 1 : FASTENERS 0 24 O.C. MAX. CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED WITH r FASTENERS 0 24 O.C. MAX. � � 2 280 m o o m ° 0 m .� 11�- .. I t = °t c- �_ CHANNEL SHAPED STEEL STUD BLOCKING E r CHANNEL SHAPED STEEL STUD BLOCKING CHANNEL SHAPED STEEL STUD BLOCKING CHANNEL SHAPED STEEL STUD BLOCKING COOLER/ a KITCHEN a KITCHEN N `" �_ v m a o 0 �°`, o '0- ° o o VINYL DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND, VINYL DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND, VINYL DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND, 2X4 TOP PLATE, OVERLAPPED W/ METAL CHANNEL RUNNERS AT 36' MIN. AT ENDS _ �, o a E ° � 11 o 2 2 1 VINYL DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND, 1 I ; APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS & SCREW ' I I r I I HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2 WIDE, EMBEDDED IN APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS &SCREW ° APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS & SCREW HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2 WIDE, EMBEDDED IN I . D HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2 WIDE, EMBEDDED IN EXISTING STRUCTURE/ PARTITION STOREFRONT / EXISTING STRUCTURE/ PARTITION STOREFRONT / o L U a Q U m > - t - o ° ° o ° a APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS & SCREW ` 1 HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2' WIDE, EMBEDDED IN . I I FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL ° I I ' I , FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINTS. FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINTS. 22 GA. METAL 22 GA. METAL I I METAL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN; REF. SHEET A101 o , _ 0 E ° ° L ' o = E FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL r JOINTS. I i JOINTS' I I EXTERIOR OR TENANT I COOLER/ KITCHEN FREEZER SOUND BATT INSULA11ON 0 RESTROOM STRAPPING AT TRANSITION BETWEEN STRAPPING AT TRANSITION BETWEEN I i i I I C3 c -�- a� to � 0 a U m N N m s t 1 I I I WALL OR RESTROOM ONLY &DINING AREAS ONLY P��' TENANT P��' TENANT z I I o I I I i i I D TSN MIDWALL 24 PARTIAL WALL FRAMING ANCHORING SYSTEM OR APPROVED EQUAL; ° I I ALTERNATE SYSTEM MUST COMPLY WITH ' I I 22 GA. METAL STRAPPING AT TRANSITION BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR LIVE LOADS; BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. o KITCHEN INSTALL PER MANUFACTURE'S INSTRUCTIONS MTL STUD FRAMING I I MTL STUD FRAMING 1 I MTL STUD FRAMING I 22 GA METAL STRAPPING AT TRANSITION 03/A105 I I I h www.steeinetwork.com Product MidWall // / / :I I' ' BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. SOUND BATT INSULATION 0 RESTROOM ONLY •� — I I I SUBSTRATE PER PLAN . I. N Y ' cn E5® I METAL STRAPPING AT TRANSITION 22 GA.ME N BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. 0 RESTROOM 1 `� N N o I I SCREW ANCHOR OR WEDGE BOLT EMBEDDED INTO I I N o REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS o I I CONCRETE PER MANUFACTURE'S INSTRUCTIONS } REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR WALL i REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR WALL I B o REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR WALL FOR WALL AND BASE FINISH. I I 4,000 PSI MINIMUM CONC. STRENGTH REQ'D ( ) AND BASE FINISH. I i AND BASE FINISH. = o AND BASE FINISH. w 'I TOP OF CONC7 METAL STUD CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED I I �' 1 TOP OF CONC i i METAL STUD CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED o W TOP OF CONC r I METAL STUD CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED METAL STUD CHANNEL RUNNERS ATTACHED TOP OF CONC7 D TOP OF CONC (I I ( TOP OF CONCRETE SLAB ' W/ FASTENERS 0 24' O.C. MAX. i i W/ FASTENERS 0 24' O.C. MAX. o ® I W/ FASTENERS 0 24' O.C. MAX. I W/ FASTENERS 0 24' O.C. MAX. 7 TOP OF CONC Q ❑A 3-5/8" MTL STUDS B 3-5/8' MTL STUDS ❑ C 3-5/8' MTL STUDS ❑ D 3-5/8" MTL STUDS ❑ E COOLER/ FREEZER WALL ❑ F KITCHEN WALL AGAINST D(ISTING WALL G ❑ ❑ 3-5/8" MTL STUDS G 6 6' MTL STUDS ❑ Q 00 SOUND BATT INSULATION SOUND BATT INSULATION 0 RESTROOM ONLY AGAINST EXISTING WALL 3'-6- TO TOP OF PLATE (STANDARD) 3'-6* TO TOP OF PLATE I 00 �- A 6 60 MTL g g 6" MTL STUDS C.6 6° MTL STUDS ❑ DA 3-5/8' MTL STUDS WITH SOUND BATTS H ❑ 3-5/8" MTL STUDS H. 6 6' �- STUDS m 00 rn N SOUND BAIT INSULATION NSULATION SOUND BATT INSULATION 0 RESTROOM ONLY 3'-10' TO TOP OF PLATE (WHERE REQUIRED) 3'-100 TO TOP OF PLATE L [B.8] 8' MTL STUDS D.6A 6" MTL STUDS WITH SOUND BATTS ❑j 3-5/8' MTL STUDS J•6 6" MTL STUDS LU N Q TO TOP OF PLATE HIGH ( BACK BOOTHS ) 4 9 TO TOP OF PLATE z � � � � WALL TYPES 05 **ALL 49 W �CU Lij O SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" REFER TO SUBSTRATE PLAN FOR INTERIOR WALL SHEATHING LOCATIONS METAL STUD FRAMING TO BE 20 GAUGE & 16" O.C., UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE** Q _ Ci ��'j U O co I I: 5/8' TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ATTACHED W/ ' 5/8" MOISTURE RESISTANT i I 5/8' TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. ATTACHED w I 11 TYPE S SCREWS 0 8 O.C. ALONG I I " I I I GREENBOARD ATTACHED W/ 1 TYPE I i ' ' " ' ' W/ 1 TYPE S SCREWS 8 O.C. SPACE PARTIAL WALL FRAMING N ANCHORING SYSTEM PER o GENERAL NOTES I: EDGES, 0 12 O.C. IN THE FIELD OF S SCREWS 0 8 O.C. ALONG EDGES, I I; I i i ALONG EDGES, 0 12° O.C. IN THE SUBSTRATE PER PLAN 10 MANUFACTURES REQUIREMENTS I I THE BOARD. JOINTS ORIENTED - 0 12' O.C. IN THE FIELD OF THE FIELD OF THE BOARD, JOINTS oBOH u VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. BOARD. JOINTED ORIENTED VERTICALLY i i AND STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE SIDES i I ORIENTED VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. 1. OSB IS NOT AN APPROVED CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL AND I I OF ASSEMBLY. I SHALL NOT BE SUBSTITUTED FOR PLYWOOD. I I I I 22 GA METAL STRAPPING AT TRANSITION BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. I I I I i i 22 GA. METAL STRAPPING AT TRANSITION " BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. Q BOH - - BOH - - - - - - 1 I 2. CDX 3-PLY FIRE RATED PLYWOOD PREFERRED FOR FULL 1 I I I 2X WOOD STUD BLOCKING TO METAL STUD FRAMING PERE PLAN HEIGHT WALLS. I I 1 I I i i i i '� 5/8° ARE TREATED PLYWOOD ATTACHED W/ 1' TYPE 'S' SCREWS 8" O.C. MATCH WIDTH 0 METAL STUD TRACK 0 END OF WALL PARTIAL WALL ANCHORING SYSTEM ATTACHED TO METAL STUDS I 115 R C nnNc 1 COOLER ' FREEZER I I / 116 L- 1,7 I I I 3. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR WALL AND BASE I I I I I ALONG EDGES, 0 12 O.C. IN THE _ _ I - - - - - - - BOH - - FINISH, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. I I FIELD OF THE BOARD. JOINTED NO REVISION = ORIENTED VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED. I I ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 I i I I ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. HALF WALL PLAN DETAIL I - BOH - \ BOH I 4. ALWAYS WATERPROOF DEMISING WALLS IN WET AREAS, & BID 22 GA. METAL STRAPPING AT I I I I 03 I I INCLUDING BEHIND COOLER/ FREEZER AND BEVERAGE I I I -a I t TRANSITION BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. I I I 22 GA METAL STRAPPING AT TRANSITION BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" I ,os MEN'S5 IBOHBOH OCE7 REF. SHEET A452 FOR DETAILS. COUNTER. R" 8° DENSHIELD TILE BACKER i I / N BOH ,� 5. ALL SUBSTRATES ARE TO EXTEND 6 ABOVE CEILING, I 5/8" DENSHIELD TILE BACKER ATTACHED TO METAL STUDS W/ I ATTACHED TO METAL STUDS W/ 1-1/4"- HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED SCREWS 0 8" i O.C. i i I 1 5/8' DENSHIELD TILE BACKER ATTACHED TO METAL STUDS W/ 1-1/4" HOT DIPPED DESIGN NO. U 419 RR % I I I ' 114 II I UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. I I 1-1/4' HOT DIPPED SIZED SCREWS ® 8' O.C. o Z i I GALVANIZED SCREWS @ 8' D.C. FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS, P. 728, 2000 Non Bearing Wall Ratings - 1, 2, 3, or 4 Hr 1 CATERING BOH I 6. ALL SUBSTRATES ARE TO BE APPLIED OVER AND IN 4 _ _ FOH I I I I I Q�D I ADDITION TO THE SUBSTRATE REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATED 2 3 3 „8 1 I STORAGE I , I BOH ' ' DEN WALL CONSTRUCTION DESCRIBED ON THIS SHEET." CBS 0 BEVERAGE STATIONS ONLY RR SE 0 PROTO 5.2 & 5.X ONLY I J 112 ( I 7. FIRE RATED WALL CONSTRUCTION TO BE FULL HEIGHT, 107 - - - DISHWASH I BOH UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. UL RATED FIRE CAULK TO BE 1 I I I RESTR00 IVESTIBU I USED AT ALL GAPS BETWEEN FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY & -• _ _ I - - 108 I ,,, NON-CONBUSTIBLE CONSTRUCTION. I I I I I I WOMEN'S I I I PREP 5/8" ARE TREATED PLYWOOD r "S' I 1 ATTACHED W/ 1 TYPES I 5/8" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD i r 'S'I I ATTACHED W/ 1 TYPES I I 5/8' FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD D 'S' ATTACHED W/ 1 TYPES q I i I ' I 1 I i - - - - - - - - - I - - BOH - - - - - S2iy REGISTERED SCREWS 0 8" O.C. ALONG EDGES, SCREWS 0 8' O.C. ALONG EDGES, i i SCREWS 0 8' O.C. ALONG EDGES, I ARCHITECT 0 12' O.C. IN THE FIELD OF THE 0 12" O.C. IN THE FIELD OF THE i I 0 12' O.C. IN THE FIELD OF THE f BOARD. JOINTED ORIENTED I 1 t VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. ' BOARD. JOINTED ORIENTED i i VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON I I OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. i i BOARD. JOINTED ORIENTED VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. 1. FLOOR AND CEILING RUNNERS- (NOT SHOWN) CHANNEL SHAPED, FABRICATED FROM MIN. 25 MSG CORROSION -PROTECTED STEEL, MIN WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE STUD SIZE, WITH MIN 1 IN. LONG LEGS, ATTACHED TO FLOOR AND CEILING WITH FASTENERS 24 IN. OC I _ I - RR ;�,--;; -;;- ;,--:,-•;:--;:- — ,;•-;,--;. ;;,--;;--;,;; ' - RI a N. EN STATE OF WASHINGTQ;m I i i MAX. I FOH - - - - - - 1 110 I I I I I I I i i I I 2. STEEL STUDS- CHANNEL SHAPED, FABRICATED FROM MIN 25 MSG CORROSION- PROTECTED STEEL, MIN WIDTH AS INDICATED UNDER ITEM 4, MIN 1-1/4 IN. FLANGES AND 1/4 IN. RETURN, SPACED A MAX OF 24 IN. OC. STUDS TO BE CUT 3/8 TO 3/4 IN I I I I I SERVICE I 'b�D$/S I ' I I I I LESS THAN ASSEMBLY HEIGHT. - _ - _ - _ - - _ _ - - _ - t I I I 3. BATTS AND BLANKETS*- (REQUIRED AS INDICATED UNDER ITEM +MINERAL WOOL BATTS, FRICTION FITTED BETWEEN STUDS AND RUNNERS. MIN NOM THICKNESS AS INDICATED UNDER ITEM 4. I 1 DINING DINING C 0 I i I -- - FOH - -- -- -- -- -- -- m 22 GA. METAL STRAPPING AT I 22 GA. METAL STRAPPING AT i i 3A. BATTS AND BLANKETS*- (OPTIONAL)- PLACED IN STUD CAVITIES, ANY GLASS FIBER OR MINERAL WOOL INSULATION BEARING THE TRANSITION BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. I TRANSITION BETWEEN PANELS, TYP. I I UL CLASSIFICATION MARKING AS TO SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS AND/OR ARE RESISTANCE. ' VNR - I I • 06 D N I D i i N i i 4. WALLBOARD, GYPSUM*- GYSPUM PANELS WITH BEVELED, SQUARE OR TAPERED EDGES, APPLIED VERTICALLY OR HORIZONTALLY. VERTICAL JOINTS CENTERED OVER STUDS AND STAGGERED ONE STUD CAVITY ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF STUDS. VERTICAL JOINTS IN I �� I--- I ADJACENT LAYERS (MULTILAYER SYSTEMS) STAGGERED ONE STUD CAVITY. HORIZONTAL EDGE JOINTS AND HORIZONTAL BUTT JOINTS I I I / 5/8' DENSHIELD TILE BACKER ATTACHED TO METAL STUDS W/ I 5/8' DENSHIELD TILE BACKER i ATTACHED TO METAL STUDS W/ I I ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF STUDS STAGGERED A MIN OF 12 IN. HORIZONTAL EDGE JOINTS AND HORIZONTAL BUTT JOINTS IN ADJACENT LAYERS (MULTILAYER SYSTEMS) STAGGERED A MIN OF 12 IN. THE THICKNESS AND NUMBER OF LAYERS FOR THE 1 HR, 2HR, 3HR, CBS FOH I I I I I 1-1/4' HOT DIPPED ' 1-1/4' HOT DIPPED I I AND 4HR RATINGS ARE AS FOLLOWS: W GALVANIZED SCREWS 0 8' O.C. GALVANIZED SCREWS 0 8' O.C. i i I I I i i i I n I 1 1 I I I 1 I I WALLBOARD PROTECTION ON EACH SIDE OF WALL I I 1 10sA UNR MIN. STUD NO. OF LAYERS AND MIN. THICKNESS VNRF DINING A - - J I O BDH OFF COF 0 COFFEE STATION ONLY RATING DEPTH THICKNESS OF PANELS OF INSULATION 1 3-1/2 1 layer, 5/8 in. thick Optional I 1os6 - layer, in. 1c - in. DINING B - - - - I i 2 1-5/8 2 layers, 1/2 in. thick Optional i I I I .' I I :• I I 2 1-5/8 2 layers, 5/8 in. thick Optional I I_l_I 2 3-1/2 1 layer, 3/4 in. thick 3 in. E I I: 1 o i I I `. I 1 r 1 5/8 TYPE X GYP. BD. ATTACHED W/ 'S' 3 1-5/8 3 layers, 1/2 in. thick Optional 3 1-5/8 2 layers, 3/4 in. thick Optional i I __ - FOH 1' TYPE SCREWS 0 8" O.C. ALONG EDGES, 0 12 O.C. IN THE FIELD OF 4 1-5/8 4 layers, 1/2 in. thick Optional 4 2-1/2 2 layers, 3/4 in. thick 2 in. I I I i r^ v J i I THE BOARD. JOINTS ORIENTED I ; 1 1 I •. I 1 � i i VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO.-1/2 IN THICK TYPE C, WRC OR IP-X2; 5/8 IN. THICK TYPE SCX, SHX, WRK, IP-Xl, AR, C, WRC, ORLO 0 o I I, 1 I I I � I I I: I I I I I OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. IP-X2; 3/4 IN THICK ULTRACODE OR TYPE IP-X3 -- I FOH ' I r� O C«' 0 '� r ' " t '�� D N 5. FASTENERS- (NOT SHOWN) -TYPE S OR S-12 SELF DRILLING, SELF -TAPPING STEEL SCREWS USED TO ATTACH PANELS TO - - 1 CITY r STUDS (ITEM 2) OR FURRING CHANNELS (ITEM 6) SINGLE LAYER SYSTEMS: 1 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 AND 5/8 IN. THICK PANELS OR --- VESIIBU OF T✓�:V11'iLl� co Z I I 1 I I I 1 1= I I 1-1/4 IN LONG FOR 3/4 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 8 IN. OC. WHEN PANELS ARE APPLIED HORIZON. OR 12 IN. O.C. WHEN O 1 I PANELS ARE APPLIED VERTICALLY. OCT 09 2015 TWO LAYER SYSTEMS: FIRST LAYER-1 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 AND 5/8 IN. THICK PANELS OR 1 1/4 IN. LONG FOR 3/4 IN 0 I �, I i THICK PANELS, SPACED 16 IN. O.C. SECOND LAYER- 1-5/8 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 IN THICK PANELS OR 2-1/4 IN. LONG FOR 102 PERMIT CENTER r— 1 1 5/8' DENSHIELD TILE BACKER I I 5/8' TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. S = I I I.' I I 1/2" PLYWOOD ATTACHED W/ 3/4 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 16 IN. OC WITH SCREWS OFFSET 8 IN. FROM FIRST LAYER. PATIO FULL HEIGHT OF WALL ATTACHED TO c�� ATTACHED W/ 1° TYPE 'S' o o I I 1' TYPE 'S' SCREWS 0 16" THREE LAYER SYSTEMS: FIRST LAYER-1 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 24 IN. O.C. SECOND LAYER - METAL STUDS W/ 1-1/4 HOT t i 1 . SCREWS 0 8 O.C. ALONG EDGES, 1 z I I i' i i O.C. ALONG EDGES & IN THE FIELD OF THE BOARD. JOINTED 1-5/8 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 24 IN. O.C. THIRD LAYER- 2-1/4 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 IN. THICK PANELS, DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: DIPPED GALVANIZED SCREWS 0 8' I I I 0 12' O.C. IN THE FIELD OF THE I I I ORIENTED VERTICALLY AND SPACED 12 IN. O.C. SCREWS LONG FOR 1/ 2 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 12 IN. OC. SCREWS OFFSET MIN 6 IN. FROM LAYER- i�`i%lEV'E0� EW,CA AH,SM ; O.C.; TO EXTEND 18' MIN. AT EACH ° BOARD. JOINTS ORIENTED o I I BELOW 1 I . SIDE OF ALL HOOD LOCATIONS I 1 VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON ;' ``' I I E� I I STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE FOUR LAYER SYSTEMS: FIRST LAYER- 1 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 24 IN. OC. SECOND LAYER- — �;Q�'jE I�i�� IN�L N I I I I OPPOSITE SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. 11,10 I t SIDES OF ASSEMBLY. 1-5/8 IN. LONG FOR 1/2 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 24 IN. O.C. THIRD LAYER- 2-1/ 4 IN LONG FOR 1/ 2 IN. THICK PANELS, Amy PROJECT NUMBER � I I' I I ° 1 1 I• I I-: V, I I I W I I I I I SPACED 24 IN. O.C. FOURTH LAYER- 2- 5/8 IN. LONG FOR 1/ 2 IN. THICK PANELS, SPACED 12 IN. O.C. SCREWS OFFSET MIN 6 IN. FROM LAYER BELOW. nip^ JAI 0 4 2007855013 I I I ,� 1 I I 6. FURRING CHANNELS- (OPTIONAL, NOT SHOWN, FOR SINGLE OR DOUBLE LAYER SYSTEMS) RESILIENT FURRING CHANNELS FABRICATED FROM MIN 25 MSG CORROSION -PROTECTED STEEL, SPACED VERTICALLY A MAX OF 24 IN. OC. FLANGE PORTION p� y- , kwila City of Tukwila SHEET N U M B E F2 ATTACHED TO EACH INTERSECTING STUD WITH 1/2 IN. LONG TYPE S-12 PANHEAD STEEL SCREWS. BUILDING ®l�ilSlN =o In 0 0' V) W I I; I DEN 1. I I FOH VNR 0 WOOD VENEER PANELS ONLY 7. JOINT TAPE AND COMPOUND- VINYL OR CASON, DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS AND SCREW HEADS OF OUTER LAYERS. PAPER TAPE, NOM 2 IN. WIDE, EMBEDDED IN FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINTS OF OUTER PANELS. 2 3 4 e0 601 Al 05 m Wall & Substrate Types 04 SUBSTRATE TYPES 02 1 HR FIRE RATED WALL ASSEMBLY 01 )SCALE: SUBSTRATE PLAN N o SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" SCALE: N.T.S. 3/16 = 1 -0 DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 w Q 0 Z Of 06 NOT USED SCALE: 1 1 /2" = 1'-0" 04 NOT USED SCALE: 1 1 /2 = 1'-0" Irk 1:911a:1111U11►Tf, LOWEST POINT OF FESTOON LIGHTS TO HANG JUST BELOW BOTTOM OF AWNING ATTACH FESTOON LIGHTS TO AWNING FRAME 47A I►[all]IaI SPAN NOT TO EXCEED 8 FT. SPAN NOT 11 05 STRING LIGHT DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. J H - - G 3 5/8' MTL STUDS 16" O.C. TO BjO. DECK 3 5/8' METAL STUD DIAGONAL '� I '�; I 5/8' GYPSUM BD. ON SUSPENDED BRACING 48' O.C. TO CEILING SYSTEM FROM STRUCTURE STRUCTURE ABOVE (TYP.) ' ABOVE; REF. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 3 5/8' CONTINUOUS ! REF. REFLECTED METAL STUD BRACE WITH CEILING PLAN (2) 110 SCREWS ® EACH E - - WALL STUD (TYP.) VARIES (6" MIN.) REF. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN WT-8 WS-01 ACT SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM; 5/8' GYPSUM BD. ® BULKHEAD REF. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PT-09 BULKHEAD SECTION 03 @ GYPSUM BOARD (HIGH) SCALE: 3/4"=1 '-O" DIGITAL MONITOR; REFERENCE SHEET A122 FOR MOUNTING DETAIL ! pp / ■ Ii ■ r 1 —U 1 2 2'-5- i 2'-5- 2 -5 2'-5* 2 -5■ CEILING OUTLET FOR DIGITAL ! MENU BOARD; REFERENCE SHEET MONITOR, REF ELECTRICAL DWGS. A122 FOR MOUNTING DETAIL 01D1 OD1 N 0D1 I OD1 D1 ACT-02 I I l i I I I 10'-6° 18 -6 n SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-0" 02 NOT USED SCALE: PROTOTYPE 5.X n; Gt-S G1-S G1-S G1-S G1-S G1-S Gt-S G1-S 11 ►, 1 1- 1 ►', 1 11 ►, 1 1 G1-S Gt-S G1-S A W D7 I ' I o EQ. V EQ. G1 S i D7 I i � 109 MEN':- P G1 S � i GYP-Ot d- D7 W1 -PT-- 0-9 77 I I I GYP-01 1:331E 74 C Elmo w IN , 1 MLI EMS 0 son WOMEN'S PA sm EQ. 4�-O' 4'-0' EQ. sm0 r.>I � — — 1■: r� � V ��1 1" wa , 1 `p1 1 �w��iii . 1ME MEAN no Him, a ME 11ow"Al uZzymmill" mv mvmv mv III so 0 me I mv N. rom • 1' O - . . RCP WORKPOINT- � 1 1 CENTERED ON THIS POINT, U-N 0 i1 rolo l ' 11 tZ GENERAL NOTES 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY LEASE DIMENSIONS, EXISTING DIMENSIONS, EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, AND CEILING HEIGHT CLEARANCES, ETC. AND REPORT TO ARCHITECT ANY INCONSISTENCY PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE WORK OF ALL TRADES INVOLVED IN THE CEILING WORK TO ENSURE THAT PROPER CLEARANCES FOR DUCTS, LIGHTS, PIPING, ETC. ARE MET AND THAT THE CEILING HEIGHTS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE MAINTAINED. 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO VERIFY THAT THE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, AND SPRINKLER CONTRACTORS ARE SUPPLYING AND INSTALLING THE SPECIFIED ITEMS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CLARIFY ANY INCONSISTENCY BETWEEN ARCHITECTURAL CEILING PLAN AND MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND KITCHEN ROUGH -IN PLANS PRIOR TO ANY INSTALLATION. 4. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY REQUIREMENTS AND QUANTITIES OF ARE PROTECTION DEVICES. INCLUDE SMOKE DETECTORS, FIRE ALARMS, RELATED SPEAKERS, STROBES, ETC. INCLUDE COSTS TO TIE SUCH DEVICES INTO BUILDING PANEL LIFE SAFETY INSTALLATIONS TO MEET REQUIREMENTS OF ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES. 5. ALL WOOD PRODUCTS USED FOR FRAMING, ETC., THAT ARE NOT CLASSIFIED AS 'INTERIOR FINISH MATERIALS' ACCORDING TO CODE SHALL BE FIRE PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER. 6. PROVIDE ARE STOPPING PER LOCAL FIRE CODE IN CONCEALED WALL SPACES, IN CONCEALED SPACES OF STUD WALLS AND PARTITIONS, INCLUDING FURRED OR STUDDED OFF SPACES OF MASONRY OR CONCRETE WALLS, AT CEILING, FLOOR OR ROOF LEVELS. 7. PENETRATION THROUGH RATED WALLS AND FLOORS SHALL BE SEALED WITH A MATERIAL CAPABLE OF PREVENTING THE PASSAGE OF HOT GASES WHEN SUBJECT TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE TEST STANDARD SPECIFIED FOR ARE STOPS IN ASTM-E-814. 8. ENTIRE CEILING WILL BE CONCEALED AIR PLENUM SYSTEM, MATERIALS EXPOSED WITHIN PLENUMS ARE REQUIRED TO BE NONCOMBUSTIBLE OR SHALL HAVE FLAME SPREAD INDEX OF NOT MORE THAN 25 AND A SMOKE -DEVELOPED INDEX OF NOT MORE THAN 50 AS DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 84 EXCEPT FOR TESTED AND LABELED WIRING, ARE SPRINKLER PIPING, PNEUMATIC TUBING, AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 9. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LIGHTING ZONES. 10. MENU BOARDS AND GRAPHICS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY, REF. A701 FOR TYPES AND SCHEDULES. KEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES ARE USED) OLOCATION OF MILLWORK POST FOR ELECTRIC CONDUIT DROP; REF. MILLWORK DETAILS & ELECTRICAL OSERVICE COUNTER SOFFIT AT MENU BOARD; REF. DETAILS ON SHEET A122. OCASED OPENING; REF. MILLWORK DETAILS. ORESTROOM MILLWORK CABINET ® CEILING; REF. SHEET A102 FOR DETAILS. OFESTOON STRING LIGHTS; REFER TO ELECTRICAL OEXTERIOR CEILING FANS SHALL BE MOUNTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE TO BOTTOM OF SOFFIT (B.O. FAN AT 9'-0' A.Y.F.). OPATIO HEATERS TO BE CENTERED W/ PATIO TABLES BELOW. REFER TO PATIO HEATER DETAIL ON SHEET A122 & VERIFY LOCATION W/ FURNITURE LAYOUT. OAWNING ABOVE, REFER TO WALL SECTIONS. OAWNING LIGHT, REFER TO AWNING LIGHT DETAIL ON THIS SHEET. OALL LIGHTS TO BE CENTERED WITHIN EACH INDIVIDUAL CEILING TILE, U.N.O.; REF. ELECTRICAL FOR DETAILS. OL LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE CENTERED W/ TABLE BELOW. VERIFY LOCATION W/ FURNITURE LAYOUT. M LIGHT FIXTURE (P-10), TO BE HUNG FROM CEILING OF VESTIBULE; 8 REF. LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. N CEILING HEIGHT TRANSITION. REFERENCE 'BULKHEAD SECTION" DETAILS ON THIS SHEET. P RESTOOM LIGHT FIXTURE; REF. SHEET A102 FOR LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATION. OLIGHT FIXTURE TO ALIGN W/ FM-01 BELOW, VERIFY LOCATION W/ FLOOR FINISH PLAN. OACUDOR DW-5040, 24'x24' FLUSH DRYWALL ACCESS PANEL; INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. OSERVICE / EXPO -LINE PASS THRU; REFER TO DETAILS ON SHEET A122. OHVAC DIFFUSER; REF. MECHANICAL FOR DETAILS. OU KITCHEN HOOD; REF. MECHANICAL & KITCHEN SHEETS FOR DETAILS. OV SPACE BETWEEN COMMUNITY TABLE LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE f 1 OBULKHEAD TO ALIGN W/ LOW WALLS BELOW; REF. SHEET A101. OREF. SHEET A122 FOR TV MOUNTING DETAILS. G1 S I P5 O I I D7 O �o O 103A b O ACT-02 0 D3� O> L D7 D7 D7 I I ING A D7 D7 10 -6 D7 D4 1036 D71 G1 S I INING I I "� I D3 4 < A P5 0 0 O 0 0 O O L D7 D7 D7 7 D7 D7 D7 ct s l I I I �j I I K X1 04 GYP-01 M PT-09 G1 S I ACT-02 I I 0 11'-6° I I O O D O O O D7 P10 D7 D D7 D7 D7 7 D7 D7 — EQ.�,2#4,_j2'-6" EQ. 101 I I V STIBUL I I EM2 Al Al H 1-S t-S I I 102 I PATIO E L L L L — �'J l?JLJ L 4 01 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE: 1 /4" = 1'-0" L� / L I -S G4S G1-S G1-S H i a 0 5 5.5 REVIEVI ED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED JAN 0 4 Z Ib I � c Cit Oi TuhmIIa BUILDING CEIV ION 0 0 U mo 0 U N o`_ ne Z 0 m a 0•3 0� • U y O m R C .0 N 2 N C O N a� 41 CD L o CL C, a)m m .� U c. � D �� oL � - 0 0 0 m�•ao Z) - b Co9 Nam r- CC)— of N N o `) oca $ R r C 0-- O, 0 �ovm i Q U U U t= o � o 2 $o moo. N o U " o c Z c 3 ao __ 0000 U -0 U m 4__c N 2 N a) am a> > -C==o Q N J�� . 00 m � O� N go 126 uj a) < z UCCU (6 W Q o C") U C)= C) D co ~ O C/) NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT M/2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED Aflc.,;ITECT i TATE OF 0 I�iINGTON Ib/O 9A5 00 06 N3 1_f_ W ry O 0 W rr� vJ r O (N_ Co R �CF'JED C) CITY oi: TL;t:WiLA 0 OCT 0 9 20b 0 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A121 Reflected Ceiling Plan DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 3 5/8° METAL STUD JOISTS 0 32' O.C. MAX. TO SPAN OVER EXTENTS OF MENU BOARD & DIGITAL MONITOR ONLY: 3 5/8' CONTINUOUS METAL STUD fl fl fl II II II fl � fl fl II I II II �l � II REF. DETAIL 06/A122; **ALTERNATE: ALLTHREAD & UNISTRUT TO EXTEND TO STRUCTURE ABOVE I.L.O. METAL JOISTS** BRACE WITH (2) 110 SCREWS ® I I METAL STUD EACH WALL STUD (TYP.) ff I = 11X/A122II II I II I I = am o 41 Np CEILING OUTLET FOR o IIDIGITAL MONITOR; 110 I I I I MENU BOARD; Rff. SHEET A701 & A60 ----------------------------------- ------- ------- -- ELECTRICAL FOR DETAILS SERVICE a o_o -Ea m ----------------------------------- ---- -------------- o �------- " m I I-20 8' METAL STUD ' ' HVAC DUCT AND o I I +' ' / 3 5 8' METAL STUD DIAGONAL I N V) m '6''o m� z a L BULKHEAD FRAMING i DIFFUSER, REFERENCE i ' I Z iA BRACING @ 48° O.C. TO ( ( 0 9-�= • MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 16 O.C. MAX. I I i ` I STRUCTURE ABOVE (TYP.) -- I I I • (I 1-4 I 7 -9 v 2 ° 'E- o o� CD I I i i EXTENSION COLUMN SECURED To PLATE; Rff. GITAL I I I I I I NMOUNTING I I I o o C m m a m I I I I MONITORTO DEPILG N N Q U S > o I I rj DIGITAL MONITOR; Rff. I I I I I I I I I I Z E° 3 a o • I I SHEET A701 & A602 1'-D' 17'-6A M p m mSUSPENDED I I II I N L L L ` ".TRACK CEILING SYSTEM; n n 08/A122 i i Rff. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN13-0FIXTURE; RECESSED LIGHT REF. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIXTURE; REF. RCP II II o II II 08/A504X//'\ METAL STUD WALL PER PLAN; I I REF. DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN _ L — — — — — — — — — — - _ _ L — — — — — — — — — — 5'-7 3/4' 0 2'-8° I 9 1/4' 8'-3 3/4° ' I I - - — ENLARGED MENU BOARD PLAN 12 SCALE: 1/2" = V-0" PROTOTYPE 5.X NOTE G.C. TO VERIFY ANGLE OF DIGITAL MONITOR WITH CORNER BAKERY PROJECT MANAGER BEFORE PERMANENTLY ATTACHING. 04 9'-1° I I — — I — or B.O. MENU BOARD _ i If/Al 22 6'-5 1/4' A.F.F. i i III N . 00 MENU BOARD (NIC) TO BE INSTALLED BY G.C.; -� n > 00 REFERENCE MENU BOARD ELEVATIONS & DETAILS -o' i Imo' W CO CO � r- 0) N Uj �i�J f= Cn '•� � � � Z ^W^ LL CU _ VMS LLJ �= CU LL- 0 3'-0' S-6' � I 2'-7' 8 ( V co = U ~ FRONT COUNTER AISLE SPACE AT COUNTER EXPO COUNTER i i A122 OPP• co I I `-3 1-n co � I ' I UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR; REFER TO K-SHEETS FOR DETAILS 02/A501X OPP. O I I I I 1 I I I I I 2' MINIMUM FINISHED CLEARANCE TO ALLOW FOR CORD AND PLUG DEPTH NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 NOTE: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO SUBSTRATE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REFER TO "DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN" SHEET FOR WALL & SUBSTRATE TYPES & 'INTERIOR ELEVATIONS' SHEETS FOR WALL FINISHES. SERVICE/ C O O K L I N E SECTION 14 2 ABOVE:CONTINUATION OF METAL STUD SUBBSTRATE TO EXTEND R WALLS SHOWN AT CEILING AS SHOWN ON SHEET A105. COOKLINE TO �D TO STRUCTURE NOT USED 1 3 NOT USED 1 1 SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" PROTOTYPE 5.X SCALE: - SCALE: - SLOT FOR MENU GRAPHICS 6 1/2' CONT. P1000T 1-5/8' x 1-5/8', 12 GAUGE UNISTRUT (TYP.) METAL STUD FRAMING; REF. 11X/A121; ALT: 4' MIN. 32' MAX. 4' MIN. METAL STUD JOISTS; REF. SERVICE COUNTER/ COOKLINE SECTION ON THIS SHEET pGAP� 1 1/2 1 ° MENU GRAPHICS EQ. 1 7/8• EQ. STRUCTURE ABOVE I.L.O. METAL STUD JOISTS 191 10C ° d i N 096 -------------------------------- 1/2' ALLTHREAD ROD SECURED THE 'Z' CONNECTOR TO UNISTRUT W/ ----------------- P3010 CHANNEL NUTS ® 32' O.C. CONT. P1000T 1-5/8' x 1-5/8°, -------------------------------- ----------------- 0 12 GAUGE UNISTRUT TYP. o ASH WD MENU FRAME ASH WD SUB -FRAME WS-01 WS-01 ASH WD T-HEADER WS-01 Z 1/2' ALLTHREAD ROD SECURED 0 Z N CONT. P1000T 1-5/8' x 1-5/8', 12 1/4° 1/4" GAUGE UNISTRUT SECURED TO (2) 2X6 CONT. WOOD BLOCKING WITH P1045 'Z° N _ THRU UNISTRUT AS SHOWN 8271 ' 1/2" GAP ° ° ' 1/21' SLOT FOR MENU 1 1 MENU GRAPHICS GRAPHICS 0 10BASrlINGTOa; ASH WD MENU FRAME ON 04B/A122 CENTER PIVOT HARDWARE N — _01 N __[S�j E CONNECTOR ® 32' O.C. 3' X 3/8' LAG BOLTS ® ALTERNATING 16' O.C.ATE SUSPENDING CEILING SYSTEM PER PLAN; REF. SHEET Al1 CEILING OUTLET FOR DIGITAL MONITOR; REF. ELECTRICAL FOR DETAILS 3' X 3/8' LAG BOLTS @ � ALTERNATING 16 O.C. 2X8 WOOD BLOCKING Q REGIST AE® R�,HI,ECT Or MENU GRAPHICS ........... ............................. ASH WD MENU FRAME ASH WD SUB -FRAME WS-01 WS-Ot SLOT FOR MENU GRAPHICS 4 MIN. CEILING PER PLAN 4° MIN. 12° MIN. ASH WD MENU FRAME ON 1/4' CENTER PIVOT HARDWARE CMA106°CEILING SLOT FOR MENU 1 1 2 CAP 1 1/2 MENU GRAPHICS_01 GRAPHICS ALIGNMENT TRIM I ALIGN I A THRU BOLTS W/ NUTS &WASHERS (BLACK) B Iff Q \ CMS036 EXTENSION COLUMN M ^6 10 09 \ SCREWS FOR MENU BOARD 08B/A122, LCM1U FUSION LARGE FLAT W ATTACHMENT (BY MILLWORKER) PANEL CEILING MOUNT °°° ° �-- i �• ASH WD MENU FRAME ASH WD SUB -FRAME WS-01 y�_0t ASH WD SUB -FRAME 1 7/8• � DIGITAL MONITOR (SHOWN) WS-01 \ OR FLAT PANEL N 3/4° � W 9SCALE:MENU BOARD PLAN DETAILS MENU BOARD SECTION DETAIL )SCALE: *SCALE:MENU BOARD CONNECTION DETAIL NOT USED — — — 7 -5 A.F.F. — B.o. DIGITAL MONITOR T PANEN w 6" = 1'-0" 3" = V-0" 3" = 1'-0" PROTOTYPE 5.X SCALE: - TRIM REMAINING EXTENSION O 0. B O COLUMN IF DESIRED A O LL 14'—"' DIGITAL MONITOR/ NOTE: E M BLOCKING AS 1 5s A 59 ° 59 FLAT PANEL TV 1. G.C. TO FIELD SURVEY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION & VERIFY IF NOTED MOUNTING EQUIPMENT IS APPROPRIATE. 0 N DETAIL 0 5A 09B A122 REQUIRED _ / \ MOUNTING DETAIL G.0 TO NOTIFY ARCHITECT IF A DIFFERENT MOUNTING SOLUTION IS NEEDED. 2. ALL MOUNTING EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED ARE MANUFACTURED BY 'CHIEF°. ALL SUBSTITUTIONS ARE TO BE APPROVED BY ARCHITECT. o �i `���.. y� EVI' �i W p ° --- — n — f— ft 06 SCALE: 1 1 0 i T6� A90 Q�E CO'NI LRANCE �` o_ �...—...— .. ..—.... �...— .........—.. .. .. .. ..... I �....................... 05A A122- �....................... �......................�0 ... .. .. .... I...................... o i............ N .. ...................... ``' 1OC/A122 I .............. ........................ .............1.0 0122 ........... I I ........................ :•..,: ............ 1OC/A122 OPP. I I .� 4 tD _ 0 •.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•. :......................... .......................... .................... •. •.•.•.•.•.•. •. •.•.•.•.•..•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•. I .......................... ........................... •..•.1.•.•.•.•.•.•.1.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.1. I I :........................ .:........................ . ........................ •..•.•.•..•.•.•.•.•. •. •. •. •.. •.•.•. •. •. •. •.. I :........................: I :..:...................... METAL STUD i i �� ..•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•. a I .......................... ........................ I.:.:.:.I:::: ........................: ........................ ........................ I:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:. I:::.:.:.:.:.:.:. ........................ ....................... . .. I:.:.;.:.:.:.:.:.: I::::I:::: FRAMING PER PLAN SUBSTRATE; REFER TO �! 0 �i�is'1iDIVISION, ASH WD T-HEADER WS-01 d d :.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:. FRONT M , , , M M MN-3 ........_.: MN-3 :.......: MN-3 :......:. MN-3 :.......: :. d �' MN-3 ::.......:. MN-3 .:........: M M ALL THREAD SUBSTRATE PER PLAN; REF. WALL &SUBSTRATE TYPES I I I I INTERIOR ELEVATIONS sUILDIN \ (CUSTOMER SIDE) � :................. I.• I I I : I I I I I AND SUBSTRATE TYPES I R-:-I- ;' fL_ 00 o I 10Q/A122 — ASH WD SUB -FRAME Z........................ o .......................... ,,, B ......................... .. .... C .......................... :. I ..... .. ......... ..... _.._..... I: •.. .......................... .......................... .... .... ......... .... .......................... .......................... :.•:I.:.. •.•...•.•.• ............ I. .... ...... ....... ................... r_,.__... . I I I I I I METAL STUD TRACK I I I I I WALL FINISH; REF. ( I "INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I I fit/ CIT OF Tvr.V� iLA► �� Oa. 3 2015 Q \ O WS-01 ....... ........................ •.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•...•.•.•.•.•.•.•.... ........................ . •.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•...•.•...•.•.. i i i `� I I I I ° ' I 5/8 PLYWOOD BACKING o o' o _ .......... .......... I : :: I : :: ........................ 05B' A122':............: I : :...... ........................ :........................: ............. .................... I • . . . . . I I I I i i I I I I I I FOR SUSPENDED CEILING ATTACHMENT I I I I I PERMIT CENTER T m I ... ........................ .. .. .. ... .... .. ............••.••.•.•••• .......•.•............. ......••.•.•.•.•.•.•.•••••• •••.••........------.. ------------......•...•.. --------- i i CEILING PER PLAN; REF. I I SEALANT @ BOTH SIDES W L MENU GRAPHICS I :.. :. ........ : / ....................... .......... ®°, —... :.:...................... ...................... ...................... I I 'REFLECTID CEILING PLAN" I I SEALANT I I CEILING PER PLAN; i I ROUGH OPENING �, _ ( DRAWN BY: LIN,CA CHECKED BY: AH,SM Z o ASH WD MENU 1/4" 1/4 FRAME ON CENTER GAp \ — 09A A122 28 1/8' 28 1/8° \ 28 1/8' 28 1/8' 28 1/16' 28 1/8' I I I SSTL METAL SKIRT TO \ / I7\ REF. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SUBSTRATE TO S lA 1A PIVOT HARDWARE . . . .I '_ • 14 9 • I I 3 ABOVE CEILING AT I i ' ,� — SUBSTRATE IT PROJECT NUMBER W 5=2$' O 1 1/2' 1 1/ ' .� " MENU FRAME ON CENTER VERTICAL SECTION A PIVOT HARDWARE A ff ELEVATION C LINE OF MENU SLOT BEYOND i t i i ALL EXPOSED SIDES I I i i I I I i I i i WALK-IN COOLER/ FREEZER VARIES REF. DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN CONTINUOUS FRP J-CHANNEL TRIM (WHITE) 2007855013 ¢� W W ^. NOTE ONE 1 SET OF 3 MENU FRAMES REQUIRED. CONSTRUCTED -, \ () () / ' r / ' r / / // I // / 10A/A122 / / / // // o �" 10B/A122 / / 10C/A122 OPP. / / _ // // HOOD SIZE, LOCATION & , , MOUNTING HEIGHTS VARY; I I REFER TO K-SHEETS & I I I I I I I 2-PEICE STAINLESS 0 BOTTOM OF FRP WALL STEEL PANEL TO PAN WHERE OCCURS EL, WRAP OPENING AT SHEET NUMBS R Z InI 04 o \ / / OF STAIN GRADE ASH SOLIDS. EACH MENU FRAME HAS A / PIVOT HINGE & MAGNETIC CATCH PROVIDED BY MILLWORKER 74 1ocA122 / / / / I I SUBSTRATE PER HOOD SPECIFICATIONS PLAN REF. WALL & SUBSTRATE TYPES ° 2 AIR -SPACE BETWEEN COOLER FREEZER AND DRYWALL / ALL SIDES NOTE WC-10 REFER TO SERVICE COOKLINE / Q DETAIL 05B SECTION FOR ROUGH & Al 2 2 N ���111NNN o 6 59 59 C�' 59 FINISHED OPENING HEIGHTS miE Service/ Cookline & oz MENU BOARD ELEVATION DETAIL 9SCALE: 3" = V-0" FLIPPING MENU BOARD 04 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 14'_sA HORIZONTAL SECTION "B" HOOD SECTION 9SCALE: 1/2" = V-0" (§SCALE: COOLER SECTION 1/2" = V-0" PASS—THRU DETAIL 01 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" Menu Board Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING - Oct 08, 2015 0 GENERAL NOTES 1. SINGLE -PLY ROOFING SYSTEM WITH BASE FLASHING SHEET EXTENDING UP PARAPET AND TERMINATED UNDER COPING HOT WELDED TO SEALING STRIP SECURED TO WOOD BLOCKING 2. INSTALLATION OF ROOFING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS AND PER DETAIL 2 OF THIS SHEET. 3. PROVIDE PREFABRICATED METAL CURBS. COORDINATE SIZE, LOCATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS W/ M, E, P & S SHEETS. PROVIDE SHIMS TO LEVEL CURB AREAS WHERE ROOF DECK IS PITCHED. 4. FOR EXACT LOCATION OF EXHAUST FANS, HVAC UNITS, AND ROOF HATCH. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 5. CRICKETS MUST BE INSTALLED AT ALL ROOF CURBS & EQUIPMENT PLATFORMS BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. IKEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES ARE USED)I O(E) PARAPET TO REMAIN. $O (E) ROOF DRAIN. O(E) BRACING/CRICKETING TO REMAIN. O(N) MECHANICAL HVAC UNIT, SEE STRUCTURAL AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. O(N) PLUMBING VENT, SEE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. O(N) EXHAUST FAN, SEE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. O(N) CONDENSER UNITS, SEE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND KITCHEN DRAWINGS. O(N) MAKE UP AIR UNIT, SEE STRUCTURAL AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. O(N) AWNING STRUCTURE AND FABRIC BELOW. COORDINATE W/ AWNING SUPPLIER. <9>OUTLINE OF CORNER BAKERY CAFE'S DEMISING WALL BELOW. OOUTLINE OF FREEZER/COOLER BELOW OCOORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF (N) HVAC AND DUCT DROPS IN FIELD. O(E) STANDING SEAM ROOF ASSEMBLY O(E) ROOF HATCH AND LADDER FOR ROOF ACCESS. OINSTALL 2'-6" WALKWAY PADS FROM ROOF ACCESS TO (N) RTUS. ONOT USED O$ OUTLINE OF HOODS BELOW O(E) ROOF TO REMAIN; EXISTING EQUIPMENT ON CORNER BAKERY SPACE TO BE BE REMOVED BY GC. REMOVE ABANDONED ROOF VENTS AND CAP, PATCH AND REAPIR TO MATCH EXISTING ROOF CONSTRUCTION FOR WEATHER -TIGHT SEAL, TYP. GC TO VERIFY CONDITION OF ROOF AND REPORT ANY EXISTING DAMAGES PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. GC TO PATCH AND REPAIR EXISTING ROOF DUE TO DEMO OR NEW WORK. O(E) SKYLIGHT TO REMAIN LEGEND F-------� L— — — — — — I EXISTING TO REMAIN. LINE OF WALL, BELOW. EXISTING CRICKETING 06 PIPE FLASHING SCALE: 3 = 1 -0 PARAPET WALL 12" MINIMUM CLEAR BETWEEN PENETRATION SLEEVE AND BOTTOM OF CANT AT PARAPET WALL SEE DETAIL 06/A131 FOR FLASHING AT PIPE THROUGH ROOF 12" MINIMUM CLEAR BETWEEN PENETRATION SLEEVES — 0 U - 0Q 6-o �'5 O 0 0 2-0 '3 0 o • U � a N O Cc O U �ID �� 0 0 0 Q t N O o6 U a) oL S c= m0 cn OO O C 6 Q� d Z) > a) m r O C, N 0 0 2 m :'- 3LO toms = 0 v i Q V Q U U g c 5 � oa .tea 0 Z E O pU C p `c 3 L o 0 M 0 0 0 U-0 U L � � = o N co J c m c 0) N W N Q (c) `n CLd z (Q Lu Ri Q o =�.�5 U O c1r) Of n a M O U) NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10/08/2015 & BID T 8211 --� REGISTEREID AE?C. TECT BRIAN N. R NO STATE OF WASI�{Ir`�GT®N to%8/t 5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CURB, SEE DETAIL 05/A131 w m 015 75 W O LL 0 xm_ 7i,:IF j%jo W CODS COSN'iPLI' ACE �h 9 JAN 0 4 2`-;1.5 L'u 2 °.� 4 w / - R. L / CRY 01� Tukwila � DIVVISIC-N,c O N OCT 0 9 2015 j PERMIT CENTER r DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: I EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER ROOF PLAN N SCALE: 1 /4,= 1 -0 " 0 12" MINIMUM CLEAR BETWEEN PENETRATION SLEEVE AND BOTTOM OF CANT AT MECHANICAL CURB - 07 ROOF PENETRATIONS SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" Al 31 Roof Plan 03 EAST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 02 NORTH SCALE: 1 /4" 01 WEST ELE' SCALE: 1 /4" = 1'- NOT IN SCOPE J4 CORNER BAKERY CAFE NEY (p5 2J 86i 2 GENERAL NOTES � 1. EXTERIOR WALL SIGNS & WINDOW GRAPHICS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE BUILDING PERMIT AND SHALL REQUIRE A SEPARATE PERMIT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 2. EXTERIOR AWNINGS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE BUILDING PERMIT SUBMITTAL A SEPARATE SUBMITTAL BY THE AWNING MANUFACTURER IS REQUIRED BY THE MUNICIPALITY TO REVIEW CALCULATIONS AND ATTACHMENTS AND SHALL REQUIRE A SEPARATE PERMIT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 3. G.C. TO PROVIDE FIRE RATED 2x6 WOOD BLOCKING BEHIND AWNING FRAME. COORDINATE BLOCKING LOCATIONS WITH AWNING COMPANY'S CUT SHEETS. 4. T = TEMPERED GLAZING. PROVIDE TEMPERED GLAZING WHERE INDICATED TO MATCH EXISTING LANDLORD PROVIDED STOREFRONT SYSTEM. IKEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES LISTED ARE USED - REFER TO DRAWING)I OPRESERVE AND PROTECT EXISTING BASE BUILDING DURING CONSTRUCTION. B SIGNAGE BY SIGN MANUFACTURER (N.I.C.) G.C. SHALL COORDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 9 AND BLOCKING AS REQUIRED, REF. ELECTRICAL. OGOOSENECK SURFACE -MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, RE: ELECTRICAL. OAWNINGS ON METAL FRAMES (N.I.C.). GC TO PROVIDE PROVIDE/INSTALL BLOCKING; REF TO WALL SECTIONS FOR DETAILS. OSTOREFRONT DOOR; REF. SHEETS A601 & A602. OEXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO REMAIN; GC TO VERIFY IF IN GOOD WORKING CONDITION. G EXISTING STOREFRONT SYSTEM TO REMAIN. GC TO VERIFY EXISTING SEAL IN GOOD CONDITION FOR WEATHER TIGHT SHELL, REPAIR AS REQUIRED 00O2 FILL VALVE 1 (1) 26 1/2"X88" TRADITIONAL WOOD LOUVERED SHUTTERS BY "TIMBER CROFT", FULL LOUVER, O MAHOGANY W/ BRANDYWINE FINISH. G.C. TO HAVE INSTALLATION ONTO BUILDING TO BE APPROVED BY LANDLORD. VERIFY SHUTTER DIMENSIONS IN FIELD. (3) 26 1/2"X88" TRADITIONAL WOOD LOUVERED SHUTTERS BY "TIMBER CROFT", FULL LOUVER, <8>MAHOGANY W/ BRANDYWINE FINISH. G.C. TO HAVE INSTALLATION ONTO BUILDING TO BE APPROVED BY LANDLORD. VERIFY SHUTTER DIMENSIONS IN FIELD. O44"0/16" STEEL TUBE COLUMN FOR AWNING. REF. SHEETS A301 & A302 FOR DETAILS. OSCREENED LINEWORK INDICATES EXISTING BUILDING. OEXISTING FINISH TO REMAIN, TYP. OEXISTING GAS METER. ®PROVIDE KNOX BOX WHERE REQUIRED BY JURISDICTION PURCHASED FROM LOCAL FIRE DEPARTMENT. MOUNT PER FIRE DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS ON WALL ADJACENT TO ENTRANCE. OELECTRIC METER AND PANEL. O$ ELECTRICAL RACEWAY FOR BUILDING SIGNAGE. OAWNING LIGHT FIXTURE (TYP.); REF. SHEET A121 FOR DETAILS. OEXISTING DOWNSPOUT OINFILL EXISTING OPENING TO MATCH EXISTING WALL MATERIAL OPUSH BUTTON 0 WALL; REF. ELECTRICAL. OELECTRICAL CONDUIT, REF. ELECTRICAL OOPAQUE BLOCKOUT PRIVA I ILM APPLIED TO INTERIOR SIDE OF EXISTING STOREFRONT GLAZING. COLOR: BLAC ONOT USED OEXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURE BEYOND AWNING; REF. SHEET A121 & ELECTRICAL FOR DETAILS. BB INFILL STOREFRONT SECTION TO MATCH EXISTING; REF. SHEET A601 FOR DETAILS AND DIMENSIONS. RE Pl./ E DEC 0 0 2015 y= E iiR PAIT C E N T ER 0 C) 04 U � 'S LCO U 0 a SO a�� ai O E o z m co N � 555 N 4 00 J 00 m 00CY) N W N C° `6 z �a_ C� w � o Q _-'S CO U O ~ O co NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10/O8/2015 & BID QREV PER CITY 11/20/2015 COMMENTS 13211 F- EGISTEREDCHiTECT /2-02- Sys ems. Zr 0 4 CE `_' v `b. itv 1 T 4' s Leila k a -,, . { IDRAWN BY: I CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER v, z Cw G O U U ry w CL w L0 Irl- N O N 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER 01 Exterior Elevations DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Dec 02, 2015 E a rn N t1'J O N O U O W Q 0 H Z d C7 N LO O U En W NI Z .- I E_ N I 0 N C 0 421 W 1.9 CD 0 Ci CD Z 383 Strander Blvd., Seattle, WA 98188 6 2 49.5 SQ.FT. ALLOWED FOR EAST ELEVATION; 47.65 SQ.FT. USED EAST ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1/8" = V-0" 49.5 SQ.FT. ALLOWED FOR NORTH ELEVATION; 22.14 SQ.FT. USED NORTH ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 383 Strander Blvd., Seattle, WA 98188 17'-4" D4 ®? D v. a .04 • z. 5'-8" 18-11" 17'-4" 0 17'-4" 10" 10" 10" 6-4" ®e � 6'-10" 10" 6" 10" 6" Mounting Detail Scale: NTS AWNING FRAME: 1"SQ.x 16 GAUGE WALL THICKNESS STEEL TUBE FRAME TEK SCREW THRU CLIP INTO AWNING FRAME 1/4" THICK X 2" LG. 6063 T6 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM CLIP 3/8" NON -CORROSIVE BOLT BUILDING WALL Non Illuminated Canvas Awnings -10" valliance preferred -Scalloped edge is preferred -Straight edge is acceptable when required by Land- lord or municipality 1" square steel 16" gauge galvanized tube framing and 4" square steel 14 gauge post preferred - All welded - Powder coated Black Satin -Use 1/2" black lace to bar and black zip ties Awning Fabric & Jumbrella Fabric Ultrashade Plus - Customed printed black and white awning fabric Available thru Innovative Industrial Solutions Atten- tion: Nick Bouchard nick@iisfla.com 800 928 4204 -Alternating printed stripe are 9 3/4" black and white -Start and Finish with White stripe on each awning -Ultrashade "Black" ends required corner bakery C A F E Client Comer Bakery Project Seattle, WA Drawing # CBC.SEATTLE.6-8-15 Scale As Noted Designer IH Project Manager Aaron Hill mamum 6-18-15 Updates -IH 9-28-15 New Elevs - IH [ ]APPROVED [ ] APPROVED AS NOTED [ ] REVISE & RESUBMIT NAME: DATE: Fri n FRANCHISE SIGNS INTERNATIONAL Main Office 1101-A W. Melinda Lane Phoenix, Arizona 85027 PHONE: 623 792 3061 FAX: 623 792 3063 ELEVATIONS corner bakery C A F E Client Comer Bakery Project Seattle, WA Drawing # CBC.SEATTLE.6-8-15 Scale As Noted Designer IH Project Manager Aaron Hill • 6-18-15 Updates -IH 9-28-15 New Elevs - IH [ ] APPROVED [ i APPROVED AS NOTED [ ] REVISE & RESUBMIT NAME: DATE: — FRANCHISE SIGNS INTERNATIONAL Main Office 1101-A W. Melinda Lane Phoenix, Arizona 85027 PHONE: 623 792 3061 FAX: 623 792 3063 AWNINGS 383 Strander. Blvd., Seattle, WA 98188 2 WEST ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1/8" = V-0" 383 Strander Blvd., Seattle, WA 98188 70 SQ.FT. ALLOWED FOR WEST ELEVATION 69.95 SQ.FT. USED Code Check. Sheet CPU E!fen.�_ Are Freestanding Signs °red- a cMng Type of Temp sign 4 Qry of Permit Submittal 4 AElowed allowed Sets Number of'Si panelon lesli5dng MVariance Time Frame -weeks Allovred A rnie-CanQp' 4'i Calor r ati fora air Maximum 5g Footage existing Color Allowed Signs�s€1iZ Maximum Dserall'Height exisda Maximum8�g Footage No max Oy�terSignature yes Allowad Required Minimum Sl=tback existing Maternal Allowed '"inyl abric/metal Cost of Permit $258 per -sign Minimum Clearance existing: Sprinkler Req- rbr Panes Approx. Processing Time 3 weeks Ave Grade F?rojtiesn Site Distance Triangle n1a Copy.Allowed on NO- you get either awni ng.gaphics OR Other Approvals Needed Required Awnings1Canapies wall sign. Calculation Formula Iva Maximum Height V c[earance required EEectrieal :Permit yes Allowed Required MINER 9FREMAbove Minimum Clearance li' Building emit Required yes Grade' ArelAtallSigns.Allowed 1yesMaximum PFojerdDn No limit- may.require engineering upon Inspectians Required yes IA-Dowed lrokffw I I 1llumina�an Allowed yes Do They Count in Total no ; - Sq Fr Murlicipality:Application - i as ElevaliarisAllowed 3ifentrances present Are permits required: Yes Signage Number of Signs t per eleu Site Plan yes Allowed Tertal Sq Footage AI€€ewe Sealed Site Plan) Maximum Sq; Footage '70- North,- 49 5 East. .. no A Llowed: Maximum Height Rona Site 5ethia[i� BURding Sign Eieva ons yes Allowed Maxiinu ProJecdDn No limit rnayrtiequire Additional Clearnm Sealed Er�ginccreel no Allo-wed sneering upon rrew . Restri~.-trans Drawings Qflculation. Farmu[.a . Table in Code A€€ditibnal Restr cti€sns. Additional Dora menta on corner bakery C A F E Client Comer Bakery Project Seattle, WA Drawing # CBC.SEATTLE.6-8-15 Scale As Noted Designer IH Project Manager Aaron Hill • e 6-18-15 Updates IH 9-28-15 New Elevs - IH [ ] APPROVED [ ] APPROVED AS NOTED [ ] REVISE & RESUBMIT NAME: DATE: I FRANCHISE SIGNS INTERNATIONAL Main Office 1101-A W. Melinda Lane Phoenix, Arizona 85027 PHONE: 623 792 3061 FAX: 623 792 3063 ELEVATIONS corner bakery C A F E FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT C O U a, O O U U ID O :1 m Z L m "O 3 e O U H O m C O C O U E O Oa - T 0 N QC) O 'C m 0 N N — U C 2 .n� °L = r� 0 Q) N - 0 0 o' CL o0 > m� 0o o N � 00 ciu 3 -� � O j iI U o' U Q V U y T o U � N Ci o C c t T o 0' o Cl)0 J 0 0 0 -o U N m o` N Cd J 0- . m 00 0 N W N cfl Ln r Ld 49 Z LLl =U).�5 ([S a- U Q O U O of co 0^ U) NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED APCE q RIAN N. -ENC STATE ()F J'�'�f8' a�`j 1v/0g/l5 W W L.L. W n 0 LL W l EVI:_YVED FOR CODE COB PLIANCE (n P_�.� JW1 0 4 /—� L J Ultra eo Tulwvsla O BUILDI("r4 N N CITY O1= TU WiLA 00 O 9 2015 PT 0 PERMIT CENTER � DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A303 Awning Drawings DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 i __ 01/A504X-01_7 KEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES ARE USED) 10'-6" A F.F. — #IB'-06' A.F.F. 1 O'-6" A.F.F. A WOOD UPPER CABINET, REF. KITCHEN EQUIPMENT PLAN. B.O. CEILING .0.CEILING 8.0. CEILING B CONTINUE WALL BASE BEHIND BOOTHS. m 0 PT 02 O o U ...................... ................. ::::::::::::::::::::.: :......�:::::::.�:::::::: .::::::::::::::::::. O 1►1 t v. U N 7 -8 A.F.F. ........................ 0 DG t ::::::::::::::::. ::.-:::::::::::::::::::: :::::::::. MN 3 .. ii .:::::::::.-.-:::::::::::::::::..::::::::::::::::::::::::: 7 -8 A F.F. 7 -8 A F.F. WOOD BASE, REF. SHEETS A452 & A501. Z o U 1 t O o=~ is"...... ii ':•:::a;::: •::•zc:;3'i .....: :. ?:::........ : ii r <;::•:i iiii ii ::::::::::: :: ::ii i tr> r? t : ': '::::':.::::::::::::::::::.:::::..:....................................................................::::::::.:.:::::. _::.:::::::::. 3 � B.O. TRIM ..................... B 0 TRIM B.O. TRIM 0 0 �o s`b2,Ynxs.:.;..-,. - ............ .•:.:�F'••••:. ::•V'•••...`F••:.: .. .. ::.`F••.�. :. -:: :.:�F'•• :'.:.�i•••.-:.`!'.•••:'.�Y'•••:'.1r ••':. W•.':: �••::.�1'••.:: .'.Si•• ..: B.O. DG-1 T T T WOOD TRIM REF. SHEET A501. C � ` O O C ! _ U .................................................................................................................................................................. ..... .................................................................................................................................................................. ...... WT-2 O y C N T_g2l-' GR-6": :'.: ::'.." :..::.::. aOP:::'::..::::::..:::.:::::::::::::::::::::::::..............::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::..::::::::::'. T a o PT-07 :'::::::;':: :::= ::::...::::::.::: ::':':.........::::.::::: '::: E OWNER GRAPHICS FILM APPLIED TO INTERIOR SIDE OF GLASS. O 1 f 1 °.::.:'.'::.T:::.:.:.'.:.:T:::::.;;::."..::::..:•:::: _ / 1 Q m I- 3 -6 Al .F.::..::::.:::.::::::...:::::.:::.::::::.:.::::::..::.:::::::::::.::.:::.::::::::::::.:.::.:::.:.::::::::::::::::::::::::.:... MD 1 _A.F.F.m m .� 3 -6 A.F.F. I s ' -- 3 6 v o 0 0 T.O. TRIM RAISED WC-11 Q I ( Q T.O. TRIM RAISED T.O. TRIM B.O. F LOW WALL W/ WOOD CAP; REF. MILLWORK DETAILS ON SHEET A502. •� m OPEN FOR � Ws-ot EQUIP I . i WOOD CAP O FLUTED GLASS PANEL; REF. MILLWORK DETAILS ON SHEET A502. N ° N N a oV) o cap O MENU BOARD ASSEMBLY BY G.C.; REFERENCE DETAILS ON SHEET A122. o o o U 0 a U —'C-°o 0 WS-01 B-1 C WC-11 WS-01 WC-11 -g_j C B-1 O B.O. SIGNAGE TO BE HUNG AT 42' ABOVE COUNTERTOP. CHAINS HUNG Q v o a Q O VERTt1CALLY FROM TWO BLACK COFFEE CUP HOOKS (G.C. PROVIDED) MOUNTED o E v o o ON GYP BD B.O. CEILING ABOVE REF. SHEET A122 & A504 FOR DETAILS. Z ? 3 a `o co j O REF. SHEET A122 & A701 FOR TV DETAILS. °- SERVICE COUNTER ELEVATION SERVICE COUNTER ELEVATION VESTIBULE OCOUNTER SHROUD, REF. MILLWORK DETAILS ON SHEET A501. 01 SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" PROTOTYPE 5.2 9SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" PROTOTYPE 5.2 9SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" CURTAIN ROD TO BE MOUNTED INSIDE WINDOW; BOTTOM OF CURTAIN TO REST O ON SILL; REF. DETAILS ON SHEET A701. OPROVIDE WOOD CORNER GUARDS @ WOOD PANELS; REF. LOW WALL DETAILS ON A502. SOLDIER COURSE SIDEWALL SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE O FINISHED BACK ON BOOTH, REF. MILLWORK DETAILS ON SHEET A502. SIDEWALL WC-02 SIDEWALL SOLDIER COURSE WC-02 SIDEWALL WC-02 SIDEWALL SIDEWALL WC-02 SIDEWALL SIDEWALL WC-02 SIDEWALL WC-02 SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE Q ENOS PANEL WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 10'-6" A.F.F. SIDEWALL 10'-6° A F.F. O LIGHT FIXTURE SHADE TO BE INSTALLED WITH BACK SEAM TO FACE WALL, B.O. CEILING B.O. CEILING AWAY FROM DINING AREA PT-02^u TTACHED TO BOTTOM OF COU ,REF. MILL _ . •• s ' PRNACY SCREEN A LATER• WORK MS-2 �� :, � S DETAILS ON A502. MS-2 , MS-2 A WC-02 �, WC-02 ,� MS-2 T (E) T (E) T (E) T T (E) T (E) T SIDEWALL WC-02 (E) T (E) T (E) T MS-2 O OUTLET TO BE MOUNTED AS SHOWN, U.N.O.; CENTER OUTLET WiTH TABLE N T (E) T _ (E) T (E) T T T (E) T (E) T (E) T (E) T (E) T (E) T (E) T (E) T (E) T (E) T - WHERE CONDmON OCCURS; REF. A701 &ELECTRICAL SHEETS. J 5 6 A.F.F. — — T T\ T WC 02 WC-02 \ 5 6 A.F.F. — — WC-02 WC 02 O BREAK METAL STOREFRONT HEAD; REF.SHEET A601 FOR DETAILS. _00 0 B.O. FIXTURE WC-02 �� �� �i % \ i, B.O. FIXTURE i, i, i, i� i, i, m 00 N 1 SIDEWALL SIDEWALL 102 O CANTILEVER TABLE BRACKET, REF. SHEET A502. LL.I Q Lj co I I I I I I E Ww~I I I I I I CO O U+-+Q I LEGEND W_O 21-Z SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COURSE I--- n WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WC-02 WOOD TRIM TYPE, REF. SHEET A501 FOR WOOD TRIM TYPES. M MS-1 M M MS-1 MS-1 M MS-1 M MS-t M MS-1 a- B-� BASE TYPE; REF. SHEET A452 FOR BASE TYPES. MS- MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS; REF. SHEET A602 FOR MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS SCHEDULE. GR- GRAPHICS. REF. SHEET A602 FOR GRAPHICS SCHEDULE 04 DINING ELEVATION 9SCALE: DINING ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" 1 /4"=1 '-O" SOLDIER COURSE WS-01 Wi-7 Wi-1 WC-02 10'-6' A.F.F. 10'-6' A.F.F. _1010'-6" A.F.F. 10'-6' A.F.F.-t 10'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILJNG B.O. CEILING B.O. CEILING B.O. CEILING B.O. CEILJNG NO REVISION PT-02 GR-12_1_1 PT-02 PL-03 GR_12 PT-02_1 Q pT-02-1 Q ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 PT-06 PT-02 PT-02 �OP WC-02 &BID 7'-8" A.F.F. 7'-8" A.F.F. 7'-8° A.F.F. T-8=A F.F. II Ililll ❑©Illii IIi T-8° A F.F. °� illlllil ❑ ❑ Illllli I 3 8.0. TRIM B.O. TRIM 8.0. TRIM B.O. TRIM B.O. TRIM PT-01 OP III i i I I� .III PL-03 _ i \-OPE G WT 11 -0 PT 1 i l II I III IIII PT os wi-2 a� Wi-2:.:.......:.::::::.:::::::::::.:.::.:::.............::::::::::::.::::::::::::::::::..........:::.:: Wr- F wr-2 _ 2 ❑ ❑ ❑ (Illlll ❑ �,�/ wr-2 ❑ Illlllll ❑ ■ ❑ wr-2 F FRAME G ppEN �:��:;� PT 07 ���:�:�:��:�:�:�:��:�:�:::•:::::::;•:::;;;:i::;:�;;:;::;:: 3'-6' A.F.F. 3'-6' A F.F. \ I R-1 3'-6" A.F.F. 3 -6 A.F.F. Z 3'-6° A.F.F. IIII II __ __ ppEN __ I III �' T.O. TRIM (RAISED) 109 0 118 T.O. TRIM (RAISED) 114 108 o T.O. TRIM (RAISED) T.O. TRIM (RAISED)-u1 T.O. TRIM (RAISED) WS-0 \ u' \ We-ot / \ U-3 we-o1 we-o1 � � T we-o1 N N N Ws-o1 w N B-1 C B_t C B-1 C C B-1 WS-01 SOLDIER WC 02COURSE C B-1 C B-1 C B-1 RESTROOM RESTROOM VESTIBULE VESTIBULE *SCALE:ELEVATION ELEVATION *SCALE:MURAL WALL ELEVATION DINING ELEVATION 10 DINING ELEVATION 8211 1 /4"=1 '-0" )SCALE: 1 /4"=1'-0" 1 /4"=1 '-0" )SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-0" SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" REGISTEREII CHITECT N ENO STA E F WASHiPIGTOi4 SOLDIER COURSE WC-02 10'-6' A.F.F. 10'-6' A.F.F. 10'-6" A.F.F. B.O. CEIl1NG Q_1 B.O. CEILING B.O. CEILING Pi-2 PT-02 PT-02 WC-02 7'-8A.F.F. IIIII ( ❑ ❑ III 7'-8" A.F.F. 7'-8° A F.F. C OPEN B.O. TRIM l LJ PT-01 B.O. TRIM PT-01 B.O. TRIM pT-Ot Q I Y FIF �pp � _�.r Mr _ � x OPEN ❑III I WT-2 C ,� C06 ❑ ❑ II C C OPEN p F WT-2 ' _. _ � k � II IIII , _t WAITING . _. _ -� i IIIII I II IIIIi. I I I II it I I I DISPLAY::h _ 3 -6 A.F.F. �� - 3 -6 A.F.F. TABLE 3 -6 A.F.F. TABLE T.O. TRIM (RAISED) N T.O. TRIM (RAISED) T.O. TRIM (RAISED) WS-Ot WS-01 gel l \ i = MS-12 WS-01 N N x e LLl SOLDIER COURSE 06 WC-02 T T C B-1 B-1 C C B-1 C B-1 O o Q �I. _ _ Ill 11 BEVERAGE STATION � 2 DINING ELEVATION � 3 DINING ELEVATION � / n— r n "= r n / " 1 n CODEg� �_tl ✓ �"OR�e'� SCALE: 1 4 -1 -0 SCALE: 1/4 -1 -0 SCALE: 1 4 =1 -0®���� , E N 08 U) I 0(} y o 0 0eo1 4 2sl S:i ' o- _--. -- -- `O SOIER COURSE SOIER COURSE I o L �+ CRY Of 1O'�-g1uffa Q r t r t 01 O UILD r IOeNI Y N U WC-02 WC-02 o Q 10-6 A.F.F. 10-6 AF_F. CITY'OF TUi!"WiLA 00 B.O. CEILJNG14 B.O. CEILING ENOS O 11 Q I PANEL ( PT-02 �_1 Pi-PTT T PT-02 N 13 1; OCT 0 9 2015 F ►T-2 IIII II III II I Q Q I I III ❑ ❑ IIIIII I \_ - 0 I CD-1-10 �� iI ■❑ OPN o HERMIT CENTER G I I I I � I I T T T T T I o C)I ( Wi-2 F ■ ❑ IIIII T / Wi-2 pT_01 WC-02 T / WT-2 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: ISP III I DISPLAY F Wi-2 I CB-t-10 DTABLE I ❑ I I WI-2 F / D / I Ew,CA AH,SM w 0 3'-6' A.F.F. TABLE CD-2 3'-6' A.F.F. 100A 100 3' 6' A.F.F. B.O. 15 T.O. TRIM/B.O. MD-1 T.O. TRIM/B.O.-01 / PROJECT NUMBER WOOD CAP WC-01 N I WS-01 WOOD CAP / ws-01 WC-02 / WOOD CAP ws-Ul 04 0 2007855013 N N We-o1 n Z N N � B-1 B-1 \I/ —- C SOLDIER COURSE SOLDIER COUR SE 19 SHEET N U M B E FR 6SID&WALL WC-02 WC-02o z¢ 0CD1.4- A401 0 tale m VESTIBULE VESTIBULE VESTIBULE VESTIBULE Interior Elevations oZ DINING ELEVATION DINING ELEVATION DINING ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION 14 SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" 9SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" 9SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" 17 SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" &SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" 19 SCALE: 1 /4"=1'-O" 9SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" KEY PLAN DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 PT-Ot OPEN 7 CCOUNTER TOP Z-----� OPEN FOR EQUIP II WING WALL I Ir :7 WING WALL , ¢ �N �N 0 0 01 SERVICE COUNTER ELEVATION )SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" *SCALE:PREP AREA ELEVATION 1 /4"=1'-O" 9'-6' A.F.F. Ak B.O. CEILING �OR 0 8SCALE:PREP AREA ELEVATION 1 /4 =1 -0 .10 WC-09 WC-09 0 Z WC-09 0 D A WC 10 F WC-09 R 0 I M 0 0 @SCALE:PREP AREA ELEVATION 1 /4"=1'-0" cc-w 0 @SCALE: CATERING ELEVATION 1 /4"=1 '-O" I B-2 I 10-4 A.F.EgK B.O. COUNG 9'-6' B.O. BULK HEAD 10'-6' A.F.F. gK CEILING c oo_w 9SCALE:SERVICE AREA ELEVATION 03 SERVICE AREA ELEVATION 1 /4 =1 -0 SCALE: 1 /4 =1 -0 9'4 A.F.F. Ak B.O. CEILING --- B C WC-09 F G D A 13'-1' I LO B-2 Q 0 (,-7\DISHWASH ELEVATION j �we �a SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-O" 9'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING li B-2 B-2 0 0 9SCALE:PREP AREA ELEVATION 1 /4"=1'-O" 9'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING 9'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING 9'-6' A.F.F. 9'-6' A.F.F. AK B.O. CEILING B.O. CEILING B C 9'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING We=10 �j F H �E� /� N 'T-Tu B-2 0 0 13 PREP AREA ELEVATION )SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-0" WC-09 8'-10° LO ' R OPEN OPEN F G DA co B-2 0 *SCALE:3-COMP ELEVATION 1 /4"=1'-0" OPEN 7 10'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING �_w 0 SERVICE 04 COUNTER ELEVATION )SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-0 9'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING w 9 0 09 BACKROOM ELEVATION )SCALE: 1 /4"=1'-0" t w o SSCALE:OFFICE/ COOLER -FREEZER ELEVATION 1 /4"=1 '-O" I WC - 09 OPEN 7 G -5S ::::::::: GR-5S :`;: :: GR-5S :::::;: ::::::�IR-5S R::- - - :::: PT 07 :::: :::: PT 07 :::-: :::.:::: :::: PT 07 :::: :::::: _ WC-09 OPEN / - GR 5S :::: PT 07 ::•::• I7-77 o S 17 BACKROOM ELEVATION )SCALE: 1 /4"=1 '-0" 9'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING 0 *SCALE:BACKROOM ELEVATION 1 /4"=1 '-O" S`W 21 BACKROOM ELEVATION )SCALE: 1 /4"=1'-O" co w 0 9'-6' A.F.F. Alk B.O. CEILING - WC 09 0 )PENS 9'AK -6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING PEN 7 10'4 A.F.F. AK EILING B.O. HEAD 10'-66' A.F.F. B.O. CELNG o w SERVICE 9SCALE:COUNTER ELEVATION 1 /4"=1 '-0 B C we-to QV� B-2 0 9SCALE:PREP AREA ELEVATION 1 /4"=1 '-O" OPEN 9'-6" A.F.F. B.O. CEILING OPEN? A D 9'-6' A.F.F. B.O. CEILING 8SCALE:BACKROOM ELEVATION 1/4 =1 -0 (E) T r/ (E) T rr (E) T r (E) T r (E) T r (E) T / T 1 zz I B-2 I 9SCALE: BACKROOM ELEVATION 1 /4 =1 -0 0WC-09 GENERAL NOTES 1. MOISTURE RESISTANT GYP BD - REF. PLAN FOR WALL TYPES 2. PROVIDE NON-COMBUSTIBLE WD BLKG FOR SSTL SHELVES. REFERENCE 02/K404 FOR LOCATION. 3. STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD BY KES. REFERENCE KITCHEN DRAWINGS. KEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES ARE USED) A PROVIDE TRANSITION STRIP AT JOINT BETWEEN WC-10 AND WC-09, REF. DETAILS ON SHEET A105 OSTAINLESS STEEL HOOD. REFERENCE KITCHEN DRAWINGS. OPROVIDE FULL HEIGHT CONCRETE BACKER BOARD BEHIND HOODS, TYPICAL OD PROVIDE CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT AT TRANSITION FROM WC-10 TO WC-09. OWRAP BREAK METAL INTO CASED OPENING; REF. DETAILS ON SHEET A122. OREFERENCE KITCHEN SHEET K321 FOR STAINLESS STEEL PANEL LOCATIONS THROUGHOUT KITCHEN AREA. SSTL PANELS FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY K.E.S. G ***PROVIDE FRP BEHIND S/S PANELING AT THIS AREA. COORDINATE WITH KITCHEN SHEETS. H ***NO FRP BEHIND S/S PANE ING AT THIS AREA. COORDINATE WITH KITCHEN 8 SHEETS. OPROVIDE 2 1/4' WIDE S/S BATTONS TO COVER PANEL JOINTS. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH KITCHEN SHEETS. OCONCRETE PAD BENEATH ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR. OMOP SINK. OPROVIDE LOCK BOX AT 72' A.F.F. (5401D SELECT ACCESS MASTER LOCK) PLACE ABOVE SECURITY KEYPAD. 8>A105 STAINLESS STEEL PANEL; REF. KITCHEN DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS & SHEET FOR STAINLESS STEEL EXTENTS BEYOND HOOD. G C TO INSTALL 18 GAUGE SHEET METAL SKIRT ABOVE ELECTRICAL P SWITCHGEAR TO HIDE ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. SKIRT To B.O. CEILING AT ALL EXPOSED SIDES. PRIME AND PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES. OINTERIOR LIGHTING DIMMING, FAN & HEATER CONTROLS LOCATION; REF. ELECTRICAL OGENERAL PURPOSE BELL, RE. ELECTRICAL S PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE ILO G.W.B. FOR METAL CABINET ATTACHMENT. REF. KITCHEN SHEETS. ODOOR FRAME FOR 7'-0' DOOR TO BE 1' TALLER TO ACCOMMODATE THRESHOLD; REF. SHEET A451, A452, & A601 FOR DETAILS; VERIFY ADDITIONAL FRAME HEIGHT WITH DOOR FRAME MANUFACTURER. OEXPO WALL PASS-THRU OPENING; REF. SHEET A122 FOR DETAILS. OENCLOSURE PANEL; VERIFY DOOR CLEARANCE W/ FREEZER COOLER MANUFACTURER. OELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR & CONTACTOR PANEL; REF. ELECTRICAL SHEETS. OSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM KEY PAD ® 48' A.F.F.; REF. ELECTRICAL SHEETS. OE-SMART CLOCK 0 48' A.F.F.; REF. KITCHEN SHEETS. OPRIVACY WINDOW FILM APPLIED TO INTERIOR SIDE OF STOREFRONT GLAZING. OGRAPHICS SUSPENDED FROM CEILING WITH AIRCRAFT CABLES. LEGEND F-W—r-1-1 WOOD TRIM TYPE; REF. SHEET A501 FOR WOOD TRIM TYPES. g- BASE TYPE, REF. SHEET A452 FOR BASE TYPES. MS- MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS; REF. SHEET A602 FOR MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS SCHEDULE. GR- GRAPHICS. REF. SHEET A602 FOR GRAPHICS SCHEDULE. E T:::::::::::::: E E T E T:.:::; .... ( ) T T I B-2 I 9'-6' A.F.F.gK' B.O. CEILING v 9'-6" A.F.F. B.O. CEILING WC-09 O Z I N Q B-2 0 CO 14 0 0 S 13 N 06 C 0 U 0 a o m y� os�m Z IS 8) 00 3 0 -e V N O m O C O U N H O C O O O o� ot: m� � . c �9 Up (D - O O O o s - 5 �ob� �- m �� °a U — -0'E 0- N 00 c`m } 3 Z O mL U a� 0 Q < U m 0 c L . 8 Q O .n n. N o E o c 0)o Z ? " c 3 0.`0 M 0 0 0 ua c/) o- ro `o 011111� Q N cd J 00 � r lu L 0) N Ln (-- � Q Ld V-4 z U�C13Q° tt5 w U O D � ~ a- Opq Cn 0 NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08/2015 & BID 8�„ REGISTERED FI BRIAN N. RENO STATE OF WASHINGTON W W I- Ill O LjL Q _ .E7.'17�`vfE W BODE CoGfiPLIANCE= APPRMVED L / CIf� of Tuhmv11a T_ BUILDING DIVIS10 !_ O 00 CITV OF TLr,WP!_A 0(" T 0 9 2015 p PERMIT CENTER � DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY' EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER i Interior Elevations DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 1,10., 1' i0° et FLOOR SCHEDL 1/8' S 0 N FLOOR 07 FLOOR DRAIN DETAIL SCALE: 1 = 1 —0 05 NOT USED SCALE: 03 NOT USED SCALE: E a [V i 0 N 0 0 0 w 0 z Of 1NISH AS LED SLOPE 1/8' PER Fr .OPE PER FOOT 14 d d p DRAIN/SINK p p• CONCRETE SLAB; REF. — SHEET A006 FOR DETAILS SLOPE 1/8' PER FT THIN SET BOND COAT OR PRIMER PER ---------- MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS u \�aJ ...1/MEMBRANE; REF. TO 1 1 06 FLOOR SINK DETAIL (FLUSH) SCALE: N.T.S. WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE, — REFER TO PLAN DETAIL 02/A452 SLOPE 1/8' PER FT d GId p . .d CONCRETE SLAB; REF. SHEET A006 FOR DETAILS 04 FLOOR DRAIN DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. NOTE: VERIFY DIMENSIONS IN FIELD 02 ENLARGED CURB PL, SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" FINISH PER PLAN SLOPE /8' PER FT d d p d p' THIN SET BOND COAT OR PRIMER PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 3'-0' 01 FLOOR FINISH PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" FINISH NOTES 1. ALL INTERIOR FINISHES TO BE CLASS 2 OR BETTER. 2. CONTRACTOR TO FLOAT AND SCRAPE FLOOR TO BE LEVEL AND PREPARE FOR SCHEDULED FINISH. 3. CONTRACTOR TO RESERVE SPECIFIED FLOORING AND BASE UPON BEING AWARDED THE BID TO ENSURE AVAILABILITY AND TIMELY INSTALLATION. SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT PERMITTED. 4. FLOORS IN WET AREAS TO SLOPE TO DRAINS 1/8' PER FOOT, TYP. 5. PROVIDE A BEAD OF CAULK AT INTERIOR CONDITIONS PER OWNER DIRECTION AND PROJECT NEEDS. CAULK IS TO MATCH COLOR OF ADJACENT MATERIAL 6. REFERENCE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR WALL FINISHES. 7. G.C. TO INSTALL HARD SURFACE FLOORING AS SHOWN UNDER ALL BOGTHS, BANQUETTES AND MILLWORK. 8. REFERENCE SHEET A452 FOR BASE TYPES. KEY NOTES (NOT ALL KEY NOTES ARE USED) ONOT USED. OPROVIDE QUARRY TILE AND BASE ON TOP, BACK AND SIDES OF B CONCRETE PAD UNDER WATER HEATER AND WATER SOFTENERS PER DETAILS ON SHEET A452. TILE TO BE INSTALLED WITHIN COOLER/FREEZER WALLS AFTER EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. ONO TILE AT FREEZER FLOOR WHEN INSULATED FLOOR PANEL IS USED. OE TILE TO BE INSTALLED UP TO EDGE OF MOP SINK. <z> THRESHOLD TO BE SET IN FULL BED OF MASTIC. G.C. SHALL BE REQUIRED TO SET THE MILLWORK CABINET IN PLACE G PRIOR TO STARTING OF THE TILE BORDER TO ENSURE THAT THE TILE BORDER ALIGNS WITH THE FRONT & ENDS OF THE CABINET. <8NO QUARRY TILE ON TOP OF CONCRETE PAD AT >SWITCHGEAR LOCATION; REF. SWTTCHGEAR CONCRETE CURB DETAIL ON SHEET A452. FLOOR SINK/DRAIN PER PLAN, REF. DETAILS ON THIS SHEET & KITCHEN & PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION. ONOT USED. OBASE TRIM AROUND CABINET BASE PANEL AT FLOOR DRAIN; REF. SHEET A452 FOR DETAILS. OG.C. SHALL BE REQUIRED TO SET THE SERVICE COUNTER WALLS IN PLACE PRIOR TO STARTING THE TILE FLOOR FINISH. ONOT USED. OQ REF. KITCHEN & OFFICE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR BASE TYPES. ONOT USED. C O U mo 0 U a a) O 0 � o a E ° ao 0-0 O y O ) a� m L o CL 04 ID U � ) oL N o N " D O UI O C ai N OO cN } _-0 rnL U a >c�0' i U Q u V o - o o e- U N O E oc'o C 0 CCOO Ua U� •i— V) ^ ai n- a)m IDD A--ic `o 3 • .• •• Ab i• •• • • Yq • n • 94 0 NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED ARCHITECT, WINN.►ONO OF WASHINGTON 1ti/DS115 D FOR fig[9''°^;�{ ¢�' 0ti P�e3 "ii° CE 8pn y" F;"ate 4 nrGy� City Of 1'L1VMA1 uILCIi �0 10)1VI'"0 RE:CE1;VED CITY OF TUKWILA ®CT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER IDRAWN BY: I CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM w co W 1� W O H 0 W rrD , ry v / V / r O N 00 O O T_ PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A51 Floor Finish Plan DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 i a cV 0 N 0 0 U 0 w 0 z 0- o.. R 0 O U 7 2 -6-9 N 4J � O p U Z Z L_ m Z 3 p� • U N w C C � d N H � C 0 a C to O t m O o �Z u') m m m �y n 4 0 V � ) o c rn` N N C s o is SIM. AT VINYL FLOORING, REF. L 19/A452 FOR TRANSITION ul _+_ STRIP & LEVELING COMPOUND FLOOR FINISH AS U v9 0 O° • o: a0 FLOOR FINISH AS CERAMIC TILE QUARRY TILE SCHEDULED; REF. A451 U 6 U t ,o-oa OR SCHEDULED; REF. A451 PORCELAIN TILE Q v �' a ° L SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE U v = :E = U [ SLOPE Z � o a 000 O U -a U +— N m m C e 21 CERAMIC TILE/ QUARRY TILE 9SCALE: NOT USED NOT USED SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" (PORCELAIN SIMILAR) SCALE: NOTE: 5/8" TILE FRP DIVIDERS SHALL BE CUT OFF ABOVE BACKER BOARD AL THE QUARRY TILE BASE PRIOR TO TILE METAL STUD FRAMING TO 12" AFF INSTALLATION. FRP DIVIDERS ALSO NEED �i TO BE CUT PRIOR TO THE CEILING GRID INSTALLATION FOR THE WALL MOLDING TO i LAY FLAT AGAINST THE FRP. i FRP PANEL AT 3' AFF Q -600 00 CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT M Cd op O N THIN SET BOND COAT �. W cfl L6 A �• I � I I i- II • r �\ II LZ CO - � � u METAL FRAMING I B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-6 U U O CONTINUOUS BED TRACK IN AI 5 1/4' WD BASE (WT-5) QUARRY TILE.5'x6° SANITARY COVE ALUMINUM: 5" COVE BASE CERAMIC TILE 6°x6° COVE BASE CERAMIC TILE: 4 1/4°x6" = co OF SEALANT _0t DALTILE: QUARRY TEXTURES FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY DALTILE: RITTENHOUSE SQUARE SANITARY COVE BASE ~ COVED TILE BASE COLOR: "DIABLO RED" K.E.S. (COOLER WALLS) COLOR: WHITE #K101 DALTILE: #S-3419T, 0100 Ch �— *NOTE: INSTALL QUARTER GROUT: CUSTOM BUILDING GROUT: MAPEI 'ALABASTER' #1 COLOR: 'WHITE" (SEMI GLOSS) O TILE GROUT 5/8' BACKER BOARD ROUND TRIM PIECE AT PRODUCTS 119 PEWTER GROUT: MAPEI "ALABASTER' 11 � & SEALANT CONTINUOUS CARPET LOCATIONS ONLY 0 NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED FRP DETAIL" SEALANT DETAIL BASE TYPES & EDGE PROFILES 18 SCALE: 17 SCALE: 9SCALE: 8SCALE: 1 0 - 1 0 14 SCALE. 1 0 1 0 13 SCALE. 6 1 0 FOR USE AT FLOOR ABOVE 5/8" GYP BD 5/8' MOISTURE RESISTANT GRADE APPLICATIONS ONLY 5/8" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD 5/8' DENSHIELD, REFER TO 5/8" ARE TREATED PLYWOOD GREENBOARD PARTITION TYPES FOR HEIGHT WALL FINISH PER INTERIOR CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT a. ELEVATIONS 'G' (TYPICAL) 1x WOOD TRIM AT END OF WC- FACE OF COOLER WALL WC-03 ° WC-10 .4.. FRP (RUN BEHIND TILE) - 18 GA SSTL WALL PANEL NO REVISION WALL WS-01 (INSTALLED BY OTHERS) 3/4" � COOLER A •}.•:-•• CLEAR CONTINUOUS SILICONE STAINLESS STEEL WALL PANEL a a = ' ' ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 GROUT SET SIM. CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT I �)HCONE SEALANT G SEALANT B-2 a _ GROUT SILICONE IN FULL BSEALANTED OF C ° LEAR NJ 101, <. 8. :. " DRIP LEG B-2 3/4' VNR PLYWD CABINET GROUT B-2 GROUT ENDCAP/INTERIOR DIVIDER. GROUT:: REFERENCE BEVERAGE 5 8° DENSHIELD REFER TO a FREEZER PANEL FLOOR TRACK GROUT " COUNTER DETAILS ON A504 0 / ° 5/8 DENSHIELD, REFER TO , FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. PARTITION TYPES FOR HEIGHT 5/8' DENSHIELD, REFER TO 5/8' DENSHIELD, 1 1/4° a I; . PARTITION TYPES FOR HEIGHT PARTITION TYPES FOR HEIGHT CONTINUOUS WATERPROOFING REFER TO PARTITION B-2 18" WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE TO BE INSTALLED TYPES FOR HEIGHT "' GROUT "' 18' WATERPROOFING , , ;t• SILICONE BED MEMBRANE ASSEMBLY ° 18° WATERPROOFING PRIOR TO COOLER WALL 18° WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE ASSEMBLY � TYPICAL CLEAR SILICONE SEALANT G MEMBRANE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION ° MEMBRANE ASSEMBLY 18 WATERPROOFING (TYPICAL) FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED a a MEMBRANE ASSEMBLY FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED. FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED ° REF A451 FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED. REF A451 FLOOR FINISH AS SCHED. REF A451 REF A451 REF A451 a REF A451 REF A451 REF A451 a :. . TILE BASE @ BEVERAGE SILICONE BED BASE OVER TILE STATION BASE DETAIL DISPLAY CASE BASE DETAIL DETAIL BASE DETAIL BASE DETAIL BASE DETAIL BASE DETAIL BASE DETAIL 82„12 SCALE: 1/4"=1'-O" SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" )BASE SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" O9 SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" *SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 07 SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" *SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 9SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" REGISTERED ARCHITECT TA W HINGiON 09 a Q REFERENCE BASE DETAILS TO / — COORDINATE BASE WITH WALL REFERENCE BASE DETAILS TO ' : I ' ' :: ' FINISH/CONDmON. 00 COORDINATE BASE WITH WALL N o FINISH/CONDITION.06 .. ........ .. . FACE OF :.'� - ❑ SWITCHGEAR PANEL C QUARRY TILE COVE BASE AT G • � FRP PANEL AS SCHEDULED; WATER HEATER PAD ONLY METAL STRAPPING; REFERENCE LAP BEHIND TILE 3" AFFry FACE OF A105 FOR LOCATION : SWITCHGEAR TO BE : 15 A452. ': ' ui FLUSH WITH FACE GROUT OF CURB NOTE: SEAL ALL JOINTS & WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE TRIM. REF. A451 1:. F 51 ( O 3COW.AT12'O.C. " :., .. # #3 CONT. AT 12 O.C. I LL (2 MIN.) ( .. ' .. � � _ _ _ (2 MIN.) BACKER ROD & SEALANT AT PERIMETER JOINT �'EI�.+�m� ��°� PLIANCE LLI ad WATERPROOFING ALL AROUND CEDE Ce MEMBRANE ❑ F,0 t� ` C Ya E D TILE BACKER BOARD AS SCHEDULED- q .. . d a NO HORIZONTAL JOINTS PERMITTED - - ' - ♦^ v QUARRY TILE COVE a QUARRY TILE COVE CENTER VERTICAL JOINT ON STUD v! d BASE AS SPEC'D d BASE AS SPEC'D WB}I 2" GLASS FIBER MESH TAPE SET TILE BASE S(OP 0§ TuI iIa a ON INTERIOR a ON INTERIOR IN SKIM COAT OF LATEX MORTAR - �%�p %8• CIty L0 ELEVATIONS ELEVATIONS SOLID ALL JOINT WITH LATEX MORTAR. BUILDING DIVISION a d d Q d: a d d a d: DO NOT PENETRATE BACKER BOARD. • GROUT I - I• GROUT O • - a I .4. CONC SLAB d CONC SLAB CITY OT= Tu�:VI�'ILA 0`0 FlN. FLR AS ° FlN. FLR AS FLOOR TILE O d I SCHED I d I SCHED AS SCHED OCT O O 2015 O • . ..• •. PERMIT CENTER . . .:. . .. .. ... . . .. � • .. �1HIN SET d G1 c d ° A20 A452 MORTAR BED v y c METAL STUD FRAMING . . a .r a rw DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: d r, G :. :. .. ap \ ' - EW,CA AH,SM �' i `,_ c d I 1Bb : • WATERPROOF MEMBRANE: REFERENCE DETAILS ON THIS METAL FRAMING TRACK I 9T S SHEET. ALL PARTITIONS ADJACENT TO MEMBRANE TO c d c v' d I I HAVE DENSHEILD SUBSTRATE AS SCHEDULED. REFER TO PROJECT NUMBER d ?� . t: ` a d ;' . t•." F WALL 1YPES FOR SPECIFIC ASSEMBLY d• d SEALANT & BACKER 2007855013 1 1 4v 1 1 IV`� ROD * ALWAYS WATERPROOF DEMISING WALLS IN WET AREAS, # FULL BED OF CONTINUOUS LATICRETE "HYDRO BAN" INCLUDING BEHIND COOLER/ FREEZER AND BEVERAGE 3 AT 18' O.C. - 2' EMBED #3 AT 18° O.C. - 2' EMBED SLOPING MUD SET WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE. COUNTER. S H E ET N U M B E F2 W/SIMPSON SET EPDXY W/SIMPSON SET EPDXY PERIMETER SEALANT, TYP. (DO NOT SLOPE AT BACK OF INSTALL PER MFG. INSTRUCTIONS. SERVICE COUNTER) THIN SET BOND COAT OR — PRIMER PER MFG'S OR SUBSTRATE RECOMMENDATIONS RECOMMENDATIONS A452 -= Base &Transition Details 04 SWITCHGEAR CONCRETE CURB DETAIL 9SCALE: WATER HEATER CONCRETE CURB DETAIL 02 WATERPROOFING DETAIL WET AREA PLAN SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 6" = 1'-0 SCALE: 1 -0 = 1-0 )SCALE: 1 /8 = 1 -0 DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 >_ a cV 1 0 0 0 0Lij 0 Z 0 0 WT-1 Wi-2 Wi-3 Wi-4 Wi-5 WT-6A WT-7 -8 10 �-11 N(f- 33 Wi-15 WOOD FLOORING 3/4° '�� /2• 1 1/8• An " 1' WP-01 6 7/8' 2 3/4' 3- 3/_4_0,�c 3�/4•c 3�/4R,�c -77 R /2 FtD R \ I `V \ N N PAINT GRADE ASH PROFILE: 3/4' " CORNER 9618 I N \ I TRIM PAINT GRADE ASH PROFILE PAINT GRADE ASH PROFILE: HALF -ROUND LS CM1 U-) m M ^ M \ \ Wi-6A CR5 PAINT GRADE ASH PROFILE: CR7 PAINT GRADE ASH PROFILE: � r to PAINT GRADE PAINT GRADE ASH ASH PROFILE: Wi-12 BMC 127 I PROFILE: 810 ASH BMC 127 \ I Wf-6B R � Lq M 3/4• �( 3/8' "I M 5/8" L61/2' I \ PAINT GRADE ASH PROFILE: WPD-650 Wf-9 * VARIES PER FLOOR FINISH; REF. SHEET A451 Wf-6B PLYWOOD-01 HALF -ROUND �, y STAINED ASH ON ALL EXPOSED N M \ WS-01 NOTES: EDGES U.O.N. 1. ALL WOOD TRIM SHALL BE PROVIDED BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR. 3/4' \ 2. ALL WOOD SHALL BE STAIN GRADE ASH U.N.O. 3. ALL MILLWORK SHALL BE PREFINISHED U.N.O. TRIM TYPES & EDGE PROFILES 4. PROVIDE PAINT GRADE ASH PROFILES AS SHOWN OR EQUIVALENT. 13 SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 1O/A501 NOTE: REFERENCE SECTION FORiSOR ADDITIONAL FINISHES & DETAILS SERVICE COUNTER EDGE I I I I 36' 1" OVERHANG (TYP.) 2 3/4' STAINED 1x TRIM ENDCAP AT WALL PL-01 LINE OF WING WALL BELOW I I 3' 21' 12" 3/4' PLAIN -SLICED ASH PLYWD SHIMMED TO STUD FRAMING DRYWALL) WS-Ot — 14 5'1 1/4° (NO R WS-01 1/2' PLYWOOD CONTINUOUS BEAD OF I `� WS-01 �- X' SILICONE EA SIDE I I ° LINE OF COUNTERTOP ABOVE I 2X4 WOOD FRAMING FLAT ®16" O.C. 1 ROW OF TiLE AT N I I EMPLOYEE SIDE - - - - ° 1/2' PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE OF WOOD WALL BELOW I I WS-01 "' o o BAKERY CASE; I RLINE PL-01 - - - - - - ,... , �..:-... ,>. .. ; >. - ...:•.... >, ., .:... I 1�O REF. K-SHEETS o 2X4 WOOD FRAMING @ 16" O.C. MILLWORK CONTRACTOR TO ADD TRIM FILLER BETWEEN WALL I SERVICE COUNTER EDGE \ ppZ p _ / - - -L07/A504A HOLE CUT OUT CENTERED ON REGISTER SHROUD; REFER TO AND BAKERY CASE AT FRONT EDGE AFTER CASE IS INSTALLED SERVICE COUNTER SECTION TiLE AT CUSTOMER SIDES; -- REF. SECTION FOR DETAILS 1/2' PLAIN SLICED STAIN NOTE: SHROUDS ARE TO BE INSTALLED TIGHT AGAINST THE SOLID SURFACE GRADE ASH PLYWD WS-01 COUNTER. SHROUDS ARE TO BE CLEAR SILICONED TO THE COUNTERTOP — NOT USED NOT USED ESPRESSO SHROUD PLAN DETAIL REGISTER SHROUD SECTION *SCALE: WING WALL SECTION 12 SCALE: 1 1/2»- _ ,.11»_ 1 -0 SCALE: 1 1/2 1 -0 »10»_ SCALE: 1 1/2 1 -0 PROTOTYPE 5.X ,._ » SCALE: 1 1/2 1 -0 1 1 /2" = 1'-0" 10/A501 NOTES: 1. ADJUSTABLE STL LEGS TO BE USED ONLY WHEN COUNTERTOP SPAN EXCEEDS 40'. ;r, -- - - - - - - - - - - - �,� - - - - - - - E OF COUNTERTO - - l IN 2. SSTL BASE TO BE GLUED & SCREWED TO WOOD SUBSTRATE BY G.C. DISPLAY FRAME BY OWNER WITH CUPS 1 2 P SLICED STAIN >SH DRAWER & PRI BY MFG. (4 TOTAL); GC TO INSTALL G E H PLYWD AT SI ES BY OTHERS REFER TO SERVICE COUNTER PLAN EQ. EQ. I I COUNTERTOP 2' TUBE STEEL BEAM BELOW COUNTERTOP WS-01 TO BE PAINTED BLACK (TYP.) Q REGISTER COUNTERTOP; REF. ESPRESSO SHROUD o o SHROUD o SEC11ON FOR DETAILS REF. SECTION FOR DETAILS o OPEN I ° N El !El I o REFER TO S CE COUNTER PLAN I 10/A501A j OPEN WC-03 on ( I I . I / I 18 3/4' I CUPS N r.% T BEYOND I I _ 11- - - - - - - - - - _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - 04/A501 08/A501 08/A501 OPP. 08/A501 08/A501 OPP. PL-01 PL-01 �- 08/A501 SIM. 04/A501 PL-01 - '- R N FINISH AS SCHEDULED SHELF BELOW ( HOLE IN COUNTERTOP; REF. SERVICE COUNTER PLAN & SECTION I I 1/2' PLAIN SLICED STAIN GRADE 11/A501 ASH PLYWOOD (WS-01) o lk B-2 TRIM FlLI.ER B-2 B-2 REGISTER SHROUD PLAN 9SCALE: EDGE OF COUNTERTOP REGISTER SHROUD ELEVATION 06 07 SERVICE )SCALE: COUNTER ELEVATION SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1/2" = 1'-0 PROTOTYPE 5.X 30'-1' HOLD (SUBSTRATE TO SUBSTRATE) 7'-3° 2 3/4' 3'-6 1/2' 2 3/4' 3'-5' 2 3/4' 4'-4 1/2' J. V 2 3/4° T-8° 2 3/4' 4'-8 1/4' 2°X2' TUBE STEEL BEAM ABOVE TO BE PAINTED BLACK (TYP. 08 A501 SIM. R 2°X2° TUBE STEEL BEAM ABOVE TO BE PAINTED BLACK (TYP.) R � I I WING WALL BELOW;- DETAIL ° ° jam' REFER TO aI ° o ALIGN I I ALIGN R� ® I I i I i I o REGISTER SHROUD PILASTER BEYOND- o N s �O8 d -I— II �lAl II 07 A504A 08 A501 OPP. OS A501 BAKERY CASE, REF. K-SHEETS I I I' IIII o 0 0 LINE COUNTER TOP ABOVE 3/4" PLAIN -SLICED ASH PLYWD SHIMMED TO STUD 42" CLEAR 36' 1/2' 6'-11' 3'-4 1/2' 1/2' le 3'-2 1/4' 4'-10' 5'-6° FRAMING (NO DRYWALL) CLEAR SUBSTRATE TO EDGE OF COUNTER WS-01 SERVICE COUNTER 3/4' 4 3/4' 4 1 /2' 1 ° 1 • 1 • 21 Av-o1 f I 04 UNDER -COUNTER PLAN )SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-O" PROTOTYPE 5.X 0a 07/A501 `D ROUND HOLE WiTH BLACK 3/4' PLYWOOD 1� GROMMETS (CENTER ON REGISTER SHROUD) 30'-1' HOLD (SUBSTRATE TO SUBSTRATE) GRECIAN WIRE PANEL 2x4 WD FR AND TOP PLATES 0# 7'-2' A 4'-2" A EQ 4'-6' CLEAR EQ EQ 4'-6" CLEAR EQ ® REGISTER SHROUD 0 REGISTER SHROUD W/ 1 1/4' ASH FRAME UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR; WING WALL BELOW; REFER TO DETAIL 3'-3 1/4° 0 3/4" COUNTER SHROUD EQ. EQ. 3' DIA. HOLE IN COUNTERTOP; EQ. EQ. REF. K-SHEETS 3/4' PLAN -SLICED ASH REF. SECTION DETAILS PLYWD SHIMMED TO STUD ( I r (-I _ �� - r r r ADJ HEIGHT STEEL. LEG TO FRAMING (NO DRYWALL) RELOCATED TO ALLOW ACCESS TO yyS_0t u I 6' DIA. HOLE IN WING WALL BELOW; REFER TO DETAIL M WS-01 M UNDERCOUNTER EQUIPMENT PL-01 :::��2 1/2" 0 HOLES FOR ELEC - I II o I I I III I III I III n� I I COUNTER TOP 6 I I I I ^ ^ I ( I I SOLID SURFACE COUNTER TO OVERHANG PARTIAL WALL BELOW I® I I I III I I fi 08/A501 1I,I o l 1 I I 1 ON EACH SIDE, TYP. 9• 1/2° PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE — - - - I - - -- - - - - - - B-2 B-1 B-2 2x4 PT WD BLKG ANCHORED TO SLAB 09 A504A 0 0 0 0 I I 07 A R- 0 10504A A501A 0 0 0 � I I c c o MILLWORK CONTRACTOR TO ADD TRIM o L — — — — — — — — — — — — — J 3/4• 0 1/2° 30" 3/4' REGISTER SHROUD; REF. FILLER BETWEEN WALL AND BAKERY CASE SECTION FOR DETAILS AT FRONT EDGE AFTER CASE IS INSTALLED LINE OF WD WALL BELOW COUNTER SHROUD 8" 6'-11"A 3'-6" 8" 3'-3" 5'-0" 5'-6' 5'-0' CLEAR 7r SUBSTRATE TO EDGE OF COUNTER 11'-90 18'-9' HOLD (SUBSTRATE TO SUBSTRATE) SERVICE COUNTER ELEVATION SERVICE COUNTER SECTION SERVICE COUNTER PLAN NOTES: G.0 TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED HOL S IN HE SOLID SURFACE COUNTER 9SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 9SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" PROTOTYPE 5.X 01 )SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" PROTOTYPE 5.X TOPS AS NEEDED TO INSTALL �OWNINFURNISHED EQUIPMENT. c 0 U °2 a 2-0 a) O ° 1� m z 2 0,-° U � U h O C m _ O C 0 U Q ) C a° N TD Qm T o t .a CD LO m2 m U L C — O% j .n N ° CL 70 a (Do �- m ° U - �' °� -- p v o �ovro U ati o oQ 0 E ° L) '2 `c o � oMD � o 0 U -o U 2 � co (D 0-���o mm �D Q N 00 r7 m 00 0) N W L. N Quj V_ co L6 0 CO se rz w :co ~ O co NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 82111 . REGISTERED ARCHITECT c S ATE OF V'IASHIFdGTO,� tb�o8 %15 _.. ENAE.VVE' -C3 CODE CONPaPLI� Num 4 `uIa City ®f Tul vjila DDILDING DIVISaO R Ct'!ED CiTY OF TUK WILA 6 I 2095 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER rd 00 I- �NN L.L. W D_ ry O H 0 W rrZ) v! L0 r O N 00 0 O r 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A a Millwork Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 E N P2 CV I 0 N 00 0 0 0 z 0 J IR 18 NOT USED SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NOT USED 9SCALE: NOT USED 15 NOT USED NOT USED 17 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-O" 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" OF WOOD CAP HARDWOOD WITH 1° CHAMFERS NOTE: I yli5-01 1. REFERENCE SHEET A105 TO LOCATE SPECIFIC SUBSTRATE PER SIDE OF WALL 08/A502 SIM. 2. REFERENCE DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN SHEET FOR HALF -WALL HEIGHT & LOCATIONS. I I ' '/2° 1/4" THICK GLASS PANEL: FLUTED ON ONE SIDE; FLUTES FACING SEATING; TOP EDGE POLISHED 3/4 1/4' ASH VNR PLYWD ON Wi-11 CORNER GUARDS (TYP.) WS-13 / SUBSTRATE PER PLAN /-,- N BEAD OF CLEAR ILLIC ONE 1/4° ASH VNR PLYWD ON M EA E G PANEL SUBSTRATE PER PLAN WOOD CAP; REF. a, 1/2' PLYWOOD WS-13 GLASS PANEL SECTION 5/8' DENSHEILD / WT-11 CORNER GUARDS (TYP.) TILE BACKER PLOYEE SIDES ONLY PL-01 SUBSTRATEff.NTERIOR 0 7 10/A501 ''" 3/4r 3/4' ELEVAS S FOR WALL FINISH i — 2-2X4 STUDS METAL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN STAINED WOOD STOP, EACH SIDE END OF WALL COVERING TO TERMINATE UNDER PATRON SIDES ONLY 4 1/82 CONTINUOUS BEAD OF WS_Ui WOOD CORNER GAURD (WHERE OCCURS) BASE; REF. INTERIOR O-EVA11ONS WC-08 SILICONE TOP & BOTTOM; COLOR TO MATCH GROUT NOT USED 9SCALE: ESPRESSO SHROUD SECTION 11 NOT USED 10 GLASS PANEL ISOMETRIC CORNER GUARD DETAIL )SCALE: 13 SCALE: 1 1/2 = 1 -0 " 3= 1 -0 SCALE. 3= 1 0 SCALE. 3 1 0 3 1 0 0[ WOOD CAP ( 4° I VARIES 1' 2° 1' Id GLASS PANEL; I 08 A502 3/4" ASH WD CAP 3/4" MIN. WS-01 C REF. DETAIL 1' 2" 1' I _ B.O. WOOD CAP FULL BED OF MASTIC I I WOOD CAP UNDER WD CAP (TYP. i I AT ALL LOW WALLS) I I i SUBSTRATE PER PLAN ON SOLID STOCK ASH BEYOND _2 i i METAL STUD FRAMING PER yyS_01 (WT ( I I I PLAN; REF. A101 & A105 I I I I I I I I o z 1/4' THICK GLASS PANEL: / FINISH &TRIM PER HALF—-, ALF WALL SECTION; REF. I I I I I I 1/4' ASH VNR PLYWD BOTH SIDES (U.N.O.) I I o � FLUTED ON ONE SIDE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS WS-01 (FACING SEATING/PATRON ( I I I I AREA); TOP EDGE POLISHED. i i 03/A105 i i o SUBSTRATE; REFER TO I I I I o BEAD OF CLEAR SILICONE WALL TYPES SHEET SECURE GLASS WITH @ EA. SIDE OF GLASS PANEL I I i i I I METAL STUD WALL PER PLAN 'DAB* OF CLEAR SILICONE. MIN. 2/PANEL SOLID STOCK ASH 03/A105 SIM. ( i i I I I z ILu yyS_01 I I I M WOOD CAP I I I i i I B-1 HALF -WALL CONSTRUCTION PER PLAN; REF. FLOOR PLAN, WALL TYPES AND HALF WALL I I I I I I I I METAL STUD PLATE PER PLAN DETAILS ON THIS SHEET HALF -WALL CONSTRUCTION PER PLAN; REF. FLOOR PLAN, WALL TYPES AND I i i I I ( i i I I I HALF WALL DETAILS ON THIS SHEET I I 06A PROTOTYPE 5.2 CAFE ONLY I I I O6/A502 I (i iI I I 08 GLASS PANEL )SCALE: SECTION I I 07)SCALE: HALF WALL SECTION I I @ GLASS PANEL 06)SCALE: HALF WALL SECTION 3= 1 -0 1 1/2" - 1 -0 1 1/2" = 1 0 " Ism's lqm� 0491�& NOTE 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE SHIPPING STRAPS BETWEEN BOOTH BACK AND SEAT CUSHION AND ALSO UNSCREW SEAT CUSHIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. (AT BOOTHS ONLY, NOT BANQUETTES) HALF -WALL CONSTRUCTION PER PLAN; REF. FLOOR PLAN, 2. WOOD BLOCKING TO THE FLOOR IS NOT REQUIRED FOR CURVED BANQUETTES. WALL TYPES AND HALF WALL 3. REFER TO SHEET A501 FOR WOOD TRIM DETAILS. DETAILS ON THIS SHEEP 47 1/2" I I I I 25 1/8' i i 25 1/8' i I I UPHOLSTERED UPPER I I UPHOLSTERED UPPER UPHOLSTERED UPPER BASE BY OTHERS BOOTH BY OTHERS i i I BASE BY OTHERSLa o I I Y UPHOLSTERED REMOVABLE BASE BY OTHERS INTERMEDIATE 3/4' INTERMEDIATE 3/4° PLYWD GUSSELTS i i o PLYWD GUSSETTS AT o m AT 16' O.C. (MAX) o Cn 16 O.C. (MAX) m ,� m I I I o I = w w cn ¢ N n I I M o ® C= ¢ ® I I I I I n I I ® M N M W Cn I I I I cv 00 : I I I i I 1 B-1 c N 0D \ " N LO 0 \ OUTLET: M INSTALL HORIZ. 20" i i I i BOTH I r7 2x TREATED BLOCKING r7 0' B_1 WHERE SHOWN; El I 1 SECURED TO FLOOR 2x TREATED BLOCKING REF. SHEET A701 o� I i 40 /4° SECURED TO FLOOR I OO w I I I I I i 02 SECTION AT DOUBLE BOOTH NOT USED 04 NOT USED SECTION AT BANQUETTE 9SCALE: SECTION AT BOOTH (FINISHED BSCALE: )SCALE: 05 - SCALE: - 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 0 U N O O U U m O 0 m Z = d 70 V 0 3 0 -E U N O C � O C U C O � N N C ao O O 2 of - U fl_ O t o- .>,- CLa) L N 0 m 2 m .� U a no oL cg)o O h o a 0 0 -6 N o +- 2t U - •o .j, o (D oa aa) :- 3 Lo o rns U a �s vm i 00 U 0 o Q Q V O o— o e AZ U o o H a U 1__o O E tC o mo Z ? N In 1 o a a� � U N M N 13- roD _r `o Q N . 00 J'0 00 m oo O' N W L N Q Ln _ zLdC: «i W U��Qo U O � M a_ ::) co ~ O U) NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10/08/2015 & BID 8217 — REGIS T ERED TE ^ RIAN N. RENO STATE OF W SHINGTON to .j oi� 0. W O H 0 Lij REVIEVVED F=CR D ODE CoI,APLIA CE U) JAB 0 4 2151 LO cithy of TuI Q �►Lf)INa N CITY OF T U"K%W I L A 00 0 OCT0 9 2095 0 PERMIT CENTER T_ DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA I AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A502 Millwork Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 a cV r''7 N 0 C 0 0 I r. 0 R� 17 NOT USED SCALE: 1 = 1'-0" 13 NOT USED SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" 12 NOT USED SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" 05 NOT USED )SCALE: - 16 NOT USED SCALE: 1 = 1'-0" MILLWORK POST ANCHORED TO — STRUCTURE ABOVE (TYP.) WS-Ot 9 3/4' X 9 3/4' OPENINGS- 20% REEDED GLASS AT EACH PANEL; REFER TO ENOS WALL/ DISPLAY ELEVATION FOR LOCATION AT EACH ENOS WALL PANEL WC-13 07/A503 OPP. WOOD TRIM BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR WS-01 OPEN (TYP.) METAL PANEL (TYP. OF 2) WC-11 TO OF WOOD CAP IF � FIRM IVI �1�1 21 3/4OPEN a CENTER GRAPHICS PROVIDED BY OWNER VERIFY EXACT SIZE M BEFORE PRODUCTION r7 3/4' 48 3/4" M ENOS WALL W/ FRAMED GRAPHICS ELEVATION DETAIL SCALE: 1 " = 1'-0" WOOD TRIM BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR WS-01 9 3/4" X 9 3/4' OPENINGS 20% REEDED GLASS WC-13 WOOD CAP II II I WOOD TRIM PER DETAIL I I 06 A502 I l ' li it I SUBSTRATE ON METAL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN; I I I I I REF. A101 & A105 I I I l i i I I WOOD BASE TRIM I I PER PROTOTYPE I I I I _J 04 ENOS WALL SECTION )SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" T min menn.lnm MILLWORK POST ANCHORED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE 9 3/4' X 9 3/4' OPENINGS 20% REEDED GLASS WC-13 ENOS WALL, BY GRAND OPENINGS ATTACH ENOS WALL TO DOUBLE 2x4 SILL PLATE AND METAL STUD TO TRACK WITH 4' DRYWALL SCREWS 16" O.C. FROM BELOW SILL PLATE. PROTOTYPE 5.2 07/A503 15 NOT USED SCALE: 1 " = 1'-0" &SCALE:NOT USED - 08 NOT USED SCALE: 3 = 1'-0" 9SCALE:NOT USED 3"=1 '-O" 09 NOT USED SCALE: - N REEDED GLASS; REFER TO ENLARGED ENOS WALL ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATIONS 12' 12` 11 1/4" 3/4" 11 1/4" SQ. 1 hill, WOOD TRIM BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR 4L IFWS-01 12' 24 3/4' 24° MILLWORK POST ANCHORED TO I STRUCTURE ABOVE (TYP.) Ws-D, I I i 9 3/4' X 9 3/4" OPENINGS 207. REEDED GLASS AT EACH I ( " I I PANEL; REFER TO ENOS WALL/ DISPLAY ELEVATION FOR LOCATION 1 4 AT EACH ENOS WALL PANELOF WC-13 II II WOOD TRIM BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR ( I 11 1/4' 10 WS-01 r7 M II M CID OPEN (TYP.) 07/A503 OPP. METAL PANEL (TYP. OF 4) LH um AAAA/V WC-11\/V\/\/\/VN \/\/\/V\/\/l TO OF WOOD CAP I IN I, 60 3/4' I, ENOS WALL ELEVATION DETAIL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" 9 3/4' 9 3/4' SO. OPEN (TYP.) 3/4' 3/4' NOTE: ALL ENOS WALL FRAMING TO BE 3/4' PLYWOOD, U.N.O. 07 ENOS WALL FRAMING DETAIL )SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" V•V. IV 11\VvIVL 1 I/T WNI 1 11 SUPPORT SYSTEM W/CROSS, 90' ELBOW, CAP AND FLANGE FITTINGS. LINE OF COUNTERTOP ABOVE — 9SCALE:DISPLAY TABLE SECTION 1 1/2" = 1'-0" CONDUIT CHASE FOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLY TO HALF -WALL BELOW 1/231 1 2' 1, mill) I I �1111 1 EWAN m 3/4' 3/4' 3/4' —3/4! PLYWOOD POST ANCHORED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE; REFER TO ENOS WALL CEILING DETAIL METAL STUD BLOCKING SECURED TO SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM TRACKS CEILING FINISH PER PLAN; REFERENCE SHEET A121 CONDUIT CHASE FOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLY TO HALF —WALL BELOW; REF. ELECTRICAL *SCALE:ENOS WALL CEILING DETAIL 3" = 1'-0" WOOD CAP; — REFER TO DETAIL O6 A502 ' 02/A503 I I METAL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN I I HOLDOWN; REF. WALL l & TYPES FOR DETAILS I I I I l 15" 01 DISPLAY TABLE SECTION )SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4' 07/A503 T—GRID SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM 3/4' PLYWOOD POST ANCHORED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE WITH 2 1/2' X 2 1/2' ANGLED CUPS & 2' DRYWALL SCREWS; REFER TO ENOS WALL FRAMING DETAIL DISPLAY PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR; INSTALLED BY G.C. G.C. TO PROVIDE 1-1/4' BLACK PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM W/CROSS, 90' ELBOW, CAP AND FLANGE FITTINGS. I B-1 I d) 0 U 7 m O O H-0 a) o`=gym _ -041 Z t -° 03 0� � N C '^ O C O V o o Q0 O N O m 0�+7 O O_ � N CN VN +- Z n s .D o 0 •- o N '2 f 0 f N 3 00 cap o. iL o ,0 o� Q < U c U U c o o o H a _N -- O o E v r o c o Z N C 3 a 0 io M N O O O v) 0- m � m rL- -c `O =Y �s • NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 13EGISTERE[D A E OF NJAS�11�lGTO;�I 1 15 0 m W W O LL 0 W REVIEWED FOR :D CODE COMiPLIANCE U) APPROVED aOVED (n 4 20116 i LID City of Tuk uila CITY OF Tiif:WILA 00 O OCT 0 9 2015 p PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A503 Millwork Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 E a CV In N I 0 N C 0 0 w 0 0 J a M p tQ O O I 11 A503 14 A503 �{ — \ 20% OF OPENINGS TO BE REEDED 20% OF OPENINGS TO BE REEDED GLASS; RANDOM LOCATION � EACH ENDS GLASS; RANDOM LOCATION 0 EACH ENOS WALL PANEL; REEDED GLASS ( TO BE ON BOOTH SIDE D�L FORTO OCONSTRUC11OS WALL 0NING I ( El I II TO BE ON BOOTHED I I OPEN (TYP.) MENU DISPLAY (MD-1) PROVIDED BY MILLWORK I CENTER GRAPHICS PROVIDED BY OWNER, CONFIRM/ VERIFY EXACT SIZE BEFORE ENDS PANE WOOD TRIM I I REFER TO ENOS WALL FRAMING VENDOR; INSTALLED BY G.C. WOOD CAP PRODUCTION OPEN (TYP.) WOOD CAP I DETAIL FOR CONSTRUCTION CAKE DISPLAY (CD-1) WOOD TRIM I I DISPLAY TABLE WOOD BASE DISPLAY TABLE I I PROVIDED BY MILLWORK VENDOR; INSTALLED BY G.C. 3/4- X 3/4- ASH CORNER GUARDS ® LOW WALL (TYP.) ' • WS-Ot `o `a 0 o M M o N CVF. Q MILLWORK LEG (TYP.) _ 3/4° X 3/4" ASH CORNER MILLWORK LEG (TYP.) o o GUARDS ®LOW WALL (TYP.) WOOD BASE O WS-01 05 ENOS WALLW/ FRAMED GRAPHICS ELEVATION 04 )SCALE: ENOS WALL / DISPLAY ELEVATION SCALE: 1 /2 = 1 -0" 1 /2 = 1 -0 TABLE & CHAIRS PER PLAN REF A701 t EQ. I EQ. ENOS WALL ABOVE CENTERED _ ON DISPLAY MILLWORK WOOD CAP; REFER TO EQ. EQ. HALF -WALL MILLWORK DETAIL I � - , WOOD CAP; REFER TO CAKE DISPLAY (CD-1) ENOS WALL TO BE �xf FIAIF-WALL SECTION DETAIL PROVIDED BY MILLWORK � CENTERED ON TABLE VENDOR; INSTALLED BY G.C. EQ. EQ. J 10'-1 1/2° 11 1/2° 2'-8° 1 1/2°L. 41-7' 1 1/2 10 -3 1 1/2" 04/A503A a MENU DISPLAY (MD-1) PROVIDED BY 05/A503A MILLWORK VENDOR; INSTALLED BY G.C. o 0 03 NOT USED 9SCALE: ENOS WALL W/ FRAMED GRAPHICS PLAN )SCALE: ENOS WALL / DISPLAY PLAN SCALE: 1/2" = V-0" 1 /2" = 1'-0" 1 /2" = 1'-0" C O U 7 m O 2 U "UO N 0'm Z L � � 0 3 o L U H O m O C 0 U C � N ao 2 y - m C. zt+ O t m .n N m m U a) o 0 Z > O C -1- U m — p N cc p �'E 0= N :'- N 3 ,n E oo ca5 Zo rn t a'omUp O Q U U a)+- 0 „� a U oo �a p O E c C) 1E,. ao Z 0. o 2 ( 0 0 ow U a U Cn a- =_ - - o` N . 00 J 00 m ry 00 N W L N Q ui � � _ � z W its .. W V��Uo � O � M ry M ~ O (/) NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED ARCH(TrCT 10/015/I5 �EIED FOR CODE CONAPLIANCE. APPROVED JAil 0 4 2..1" city of Tul-,x ila BUILDING DIVISION r CITY OF Tur"'%WILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA :1 AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER co 06 Lf� W O LjL W Z) U) U) L/ O N \ M W 0 O T_ 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A503A Millwork Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 8' MTL STUD E a CV In N I C=4)C 0 0 0 V 8' MTL STUD I ' + FRAMING PER PLAN CEILING PER PLAN; 08/A504ASIM r_1'1111� REF. RCP FOR DETAILS I I o I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 'I 3/4' WD PANEL I I I I I I I (WIDTH VARIES (TYP.) — IIIII iIIII •co NW-09DSURROUN I I I I I I I I I I I I :I I I I I I 1 I -I I Wr-16 6' MTL STUD 1 ;I I :I I i I LIGHT FIXTURE PER PLAN; FRAMING PER PLAN i REF. SHEET A121 ° MOSAIC TiLE W/ 5/8 DENSHIELD BACKER BD. AT WALL AREA ABOVE COFFEE STATION COUNTER 1/4' ASH VENEER--, PLYWOOD PANEL (BEHIND CABINET) WS-01 LF I I I 1 I I I I I B-5 I I I I k7 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13 WALL @ COFFEE STATION SECTION SCALE: 1 I � 8° MTL STUD 1 FRAMING PER PLAN + + +. +,�' I CEILING PER PLAN; 08/A504A SIM. �� REF. RCP FOR DETAILS o I I' I I I I. I I I: I I .I I I I? 3/4' WD PANEL (WIDTH VARIES (TYP.) i— WS-01 I I' io I I� I I I GV I I I I Wi-09 i I, SURROUND Wi-16 6' MTL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN o Wi-16 1/4' ASH VENEER I I PLYWOOD PANEL WS-01 i i` I I I I o I I• N 11 A501 I I I I I I I I I I I I B-1 I I. I I I I: I I' I I I I". I (- WALL @ COFFEE STATION SECTION SCALE: 1 " = V-0" 8" MTL STUDS "- -5/8' PLYWOOD----/ (@ PILASTERS ONLY) (WALL PAPER LOACTiON) FLUTED WD TRIM ON n WT-09 5/8" PLYWOOD (TYP.) 8 WS-01 WC-04A 3/4" 2 1/2' SURROUND Wi-16 WS-01 01 A504A PLAN DETAIL @ COFFEE STATION SIGNAGE J SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NOTE: REFERENCE SHEET A505 FOR MILLWORK DETAILS AT COFFEE STATION CABINET CERAMIC TiLE 5/8' GYP BD. 3-5/8° MTL STUDS TRANSITION STRIP: —� SCHLUTER SCHIENE 6° MiL STUDS SERIES; AE80 (TS-01) LINE OF BULKHEAD/ HEADER ABOVE 8' MTL STUDS (� PILASTERS ONLY) 8' 01 2 1/2" 3/4" Wi-02 BLKG AS REQ'D— Wi-08 Wi-02 3 4' ASH PILASTER WC-04A 3/4' PLYWD WRAP - 3/4' ASH PILASTER COLUMN WC-04A BLKG AS REQ'D FLUTED 3/4' ASH WD COLUMN WC-04A VARIES REFER TO SERVICE COUNTER ENTRANCE 3/4" ASH VENEER PLYWD WS-OD �� CERAMIC TiLE 3/4' PLYWD WRAP WC-03 3/4' ASH PILASTER Q EQ COLUMN yyS-01 ° TRANSITION STRIP: 3/4 TYP 2 TiP SCHLUTER SCHIENE SERIES; AE80 (TS-01) 10 PILASTER PLAN/ SECTION/ ELEVATION SERVICE COUNTER; Rff: SCALE: 1 1/2" = V-0" MILLWORK DETAILS NOTE: REFERENCE SHEET A505 FOR MILLWORK DETAILS AT COFFEE STATION CABINET NOTE: REFERENCE INTERI ELEVA11ONS FOR FINISHE CERAMIC TiLE WC-03 LINE OF MILLWORK 5/8" GYP BD. 3-5/8' MTL STUDS TRANSITION STRIP: LINE OF MILLWORK 0 $ CORNICE DETAIL SCHLUTER SCHIENE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" -6" MiL STUDS---� SERIES; AE80 (TS-01) 8' MTL STUDS �- LINE OF SERVICE (® PILASTERS ONLY) COUNTER ABOVE 2 1/2' WT-16 3/4" FLUTED WD g' EQ. COFFEE ffSTO STATION EQ. WS-01 TRIM ON 5/8 ' PLYWOOD (TYP.) 3/4' COFFEE STATION WC-04A CABINET Wi-16 CONT. 1/4° ASH VENEER PLYWD ON 5/8' _01 PLYWD (BEHIND COFFEE SATTON CABINET ONLY) WS-01 01 A504A 8SCALE:PLAN DETAIL BELOW COFFEE STATION COUNTER 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 8'MTL STUD I / + I �' FRAMING PER PLAN I�/' + +/ I � I +,%� I CEILING PER PLAN; 08/A504A SIM. �' i REF. RCP FOR DETAILS � I I I I I I I I I I I I I I o •I :I I I I I I I I. I` I I I I, I I I I I I. 3/4' WD PANEL I I I I I I I I, (WIDTH VARIES (TYP.) I WS-Ol in I I I I I cV I I I, WT-D9 I I I I SURROUND 6" MTL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN WT-16 ESPRESSO SHROUD; REF. DETAILS ON SHEET A502 I I SERVICE COUNTER; REF. SHEET A501 X FOR DETAILS O BULKHEAD SECTION SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" 3/4' WD PANEL ON PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE ws—o1 FLUTED WD TRIM ON 5/8" PLYWOOD (TYP.) WC-04A WT-16 WS-01 8' MTL STUDS LINE OF BULKHEAD/ (® PILASTERS ONLY) HEADER ABOVE 2' 2' FLUTED WD TRIM ON Wi-16 5/8° PLYWOOD (TYP.) 8°K le EQ. COFFEE STATION LENGTH EQ WS-Ot WC-04A 3/4' COFFEE STATION Wf-16 COUNTER WS-Ot MOSAIC TiLE W/ 5/8' DENSHIELD BACKER BD. AT WALL AREA ABOVE COFFEE STATION COUNTER ONLY; REF. A505 FOR DETAILS O1 A504A 09 PLAN DETAIL ABOVE COFFEE STATION COUNTER )SCALE: 1 1/2" = V-0" 9SCALE:COLUMN ELEVATION 1" = V-0" PLAN; Z DETAILS IEL ON 3STRATE NOTES: REFER TO A501 FOR WOOD TRIM PROFILES 2 1/2' i CV N FLUTED 3/4° ASH WD PILASTER (TYP.) WS-04A 09 A504A Wi-12 SCRIBE TRIM 1/4" ASH VENEER PLYWOOD PANEL WS-Ot 11 A504A i.n ..... .T..�.-.� AMR 1/4' ASH VENEER PLYWD ON 5/8' PLYWD WS-01 N 8' MTL STUDS - - - - - - sk 3/4' FLAT WD TRIM ON 5/8' PLYWOOD (TYP.) 8' WC-04A 07 COLUMN DETAIL )SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" ro►owr TA °c LIIIAIC AKI TnD nC SERVICE COUNTER/ COFFEE STATION ELEVATION SCALE: 1 " = V-0" CEILING PER PLAN; REF. RCP FOR DETAILS r--- 2x WD BLKG 5/8' PLYWOOD VARIES BLACK REFER TO PILASTER COFFEE ELEVATION CUP HOOKS 1/4° REVEAL � FLVERTICAL CHAIN LINE OF SERVICE COUNTER ICN LINE OF BULKHEAD a, ABOVE 3/4' FLUTED WD TRIM ON 5/8" PLYWOOD (TYP.) WC-04A 06 NOT USED SCALE: 1 /4"=1'-O" 9SCALE:NOT USED 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 1/2' I B-1 I 0 a U _ m ° ° U .0 N o=�m Z L ° 0 3 a� U iO N � O C ° U a, E ,18S G -° _0.`n N Q 2 o� m CL N COO m m .� U a> a ° 0 N _—_ C°' ° N L= 1616 Z) > mo °C U - p vE ° (D a� oo :t=QiU Lov � oC m� ° O mvpUUoCN0U CCL3 o o yo Ta a :CU r, N Z o °c' o j oao� 0M0 U -° U m 4- N °- `o Q N J. 00 00 m L 00 05 0)N T_ Ln ~ Ld g4 4C z U�MUo Cu W O (y3 ~ O u) NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT M8/2015 & BID 8211 REGISTERED ARCHITECT NN.RE TE OF WASHINGTON 1n%a$i�5 0 06 — 00 Do- W 0— r O LL E�P-ri�D I OR W � S adE E ScO-NI{{Pl!,..S��iWCE b U) N 0 4 25 1f C) Ifs of `julmils LO FU LDING tDIVIsIO. O RECEIVED NC IT Y 0" F T rKWILA 00 0 OCT 0 9 2015 O PERMIT CENTER r— DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 200785.5013 SHEET NUMBER A504A Millwork Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 CV N I s CV C O U O I=' 0 Z C.7 0 J 10 NOT USED 04 NOT USED )SCALE: 12 SCALE. 3 - 1 -0 3/4 1 0„ PANEL LEAVE -OUT FOR PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL 2X BLOCKING BELOW CABINET -GRADE PLYWD LINE OF WALL THROUGHOUT 1/2` SOLID SURFACE CONNECTIONS AT EACH CABINET UNIT (TYP.) BASE SHELF F RACK SYSTEM BY KES 1' 1' SUPER -PLY COUNTERTOP °'. i I L----- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---- SUB TOP i I I i I ( SECURE BRACING TO FLOOR Cq Cq • �: � .:.:... , ... 3 PVC UP TO CEILING �: • . ` - - LET INTO 3/4" VENEER PLYWOOD - - - - - BELOW WITH L C THE PLYWOOD AS REQUIRED ' .• LINE OF CO2 IN WALL i i N Q TRASH CAN - I I- STEEL ANGLE BRACE I I L I ABOVE (TYP.) 1 1/4' X 1 1/4' CONTINUOUS WC-09 AROUND OPENING I i. •... X s m J NOT USED 0 8 NO SHELF 7 BASE & BASE & * 0 SHELF* I* I N STEEL ANGLE SCREWED INTO I I I i 1 I' . is o a °° C> N ouj SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" ADJUSTABLE ADJUSTABLE I NO SHELF* �+ J I I SHELVES SHELVES I SUBSTRATE NO EXPOSED RAW WOOD ®COUNTER PER CODE RECESSED BOX IN WALL I i `.; : a'•:..;:: CJI o o LOCATIONS ONLY I I 12 A451 I L / I I I (INSTALL AT 2'-0' & WIDER CABINET WIDTH) WITH FRP ON DENSHIELD, ALL I I SIDES AND BACK. I I`' i �� . � W LINE OF COUNTERTOP �✓J I -I - - WC-09 �.:? ^ ABOVE SUBSTRATE PER PLAN; 6" GROMMET IN 1'-6 3/4' 1'-6 3/4' __T- �%8' 3/4' VENEER CORE PLYWD "ATLAS HOMEWARTS° HANDLE #235, BRUSHED REF. SHEET A101 i i 6° MIN. i i COUNTERTOP ABOVE FOR DOOR WITH CONCEALlED TRASH CAN; REFER TO 1 1/2' ( 3/4" 3/4' 8'-3 1/2' 3/4' I 1 1/2' HINGES AT ALL DOORS NICKEL COUNTERTOP PLAN FOR I .... , I , LOCATION 1" TYP. �� � 4ull REFRIGERANT LINE BOX @ o o1/A5o5 0 COUNTERTOP DETAIL COLD BEVERAGE STATION DETAIL 8SCALE: 03 COLD BEVERAGE STATION SECTION 15 SCALE: 3 = 1 -0 1 /4 -1 -0 SCALE: 3/4 1 0 1' DIA. HOLE BY MILLWORK 8'X8' BOX RECESSED INTO WALL FOR CONTRACTOR (LOCATION TO BE REFRIGERANT LINE, REFER TO 11/A505 VERIFIED AND CUT IN FIELD) I 2'X8" CUTOUT BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR (LOCATION TO BE - - - - - - VERIFIED AND CUT IN FIELD) I II FULL HEIGHT WALL; i I I REFERENCE SHEET _ _ _ I L 6aX6" BOX RECESSED INTO WALL FOR NOT USED A101 FOR DETAILS N I i 1 I I I It CO2 LINES; REFER TO 13/A505. 07 )SCALE: = I I 12 A451 3/4" = 1'-0" I I I I COLD BEVERAGE EQUIPMENT —I— I I (BY OTHERS) r _ J I I r 1 - I FLOOR DRAIN; REF. PLUMBING 6' DIA, TRASH CUT-OUT I WITH SSTL RING, BY DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION MILLWORK CONTRACTOR 6'-11" TO CENTER LINE OF BEVERAGE MACHINE 8'-5 1/2' �LO ull BEVERAGE STATION PLAN o1/A5o5 9SCALE:COLD 3/4" = 1'-0"044 2-3" CONDUITS FOR CO2 LINES IN rT TT 4' PVC CONDUIT WALL (REQUIRED ONLY WHEN FOR REFRIGERANT °BAG -IN -BOX' IS LOCATED IN KITCHEN ( I I I LINES DOWN FROM ROOF EQUIPMENT B"X8' BOX RECESSED INTO WALL; REFER TO pT_02 I I ( I °REFRIGERANT LINE 14 NOT USED NOT USED 9SCALE: NOT USED 06 BOX @ COLD 3/4' X 3/4" ASH CORNER GUARD 0 I BEVERAGE STATION WT-1 MURAL OUTSIDE CORNER ONLY (TYP.) I I ( DETAIL" SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 3/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" I Ak F — 6.08 TRIM LP I I 6' MIN. METAL STUD FRAMING; REFER TO DIMENSIOND FLOOR PLAN i i WC-07 I COLD BEVERAGE & WALL & SUBSTRATE TYPES i i PT-07 02/A505 ( I EQUIPMENT (BY OTHERS) WC-03 WALL FINISH; REFERENCE ELJ:I/ATION ( I WC-03 i i I I I AV-01 FRP TO CONTINUE BEYOND COUNTERTOP AND CONTINUED TO FLOOR WC-09 02/A505 I I 6' DIA. TRASH CUT-OUT 1' SUPER -PLY COUNTERTOP SUBSTRATE 15 A505 AV-01 i i I I MILLWORK CONNTRACTOR nr tj I `� LO \ 3'-0' c � I I I i I I LE�j I WC-03 I � � i I i WF-2 1;--- 03/A505 �CAN_l-� 03/A505 I I i \ (TNOSSHELF) ■ I I N I \ IN, IN,\ / "' I I o / `; (3) SIDES B-1 i \ 1 3/4' VENEER PLYWOOD DOOR I I I I I �n coSIN B-4 B-4 6'X6 BOX RECESSED INTL O I T-J I ((�\'—OPENING IN CABINET FACE FOR BEYOND CABINET DOOR WALL FOR CO2 LINES o FLOOR DRAIN; REF. PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION 3/4' 2'-8 3/4' 3/4' FLOOR DRAIN; REF. PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIO NOTE: MILLWORK PANEL 1. G.0 TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED HOLES IN THE SOLID SURFACE COUNTER TOPS AS NEEDED TO INSTALL ALL OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. LEAVE -OUT FOR 2. 1'-6' TILE AT ALL FULL HEIGHT WALLS ADJACENT TO BEVERAGE STATION MILLWORK (U.N.O.). CONTINOES BASE NOT USED 09 BEVERAGE STATION SECTION TRIM BEHIND STATION 05 NOT USED 01 COLD BEVERAGE STATION ELEVATION )SCALE: 13)SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 3/4" = 1'-0" C 0 U m ° O U N O. U m p 3 0 0 .0 � � N C '^ O C O U 'C O N E O CL O y � m ❑. T ° m LO 0 0 O- N C 4 m m m C .= �n a 0 Z) >m o c U — E ° N N °0 c`m :'_ 3 Lp ;� O p L T 0 > U p U . g v m 0 i Q Q o°- y� oEj U U $ ° a O O E a U L c ° m °)° Z ? N 0 0 0 N 0- =0 `o Q N . o0 J 00 00 O) N W i N < �_ L6 a_ z�� w U�asao U O F— Cy") a_ M ~ O NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10/08 2015 & BID 8211 REGISTER,® ' UNIAL Pd. RENO .ATE OF WASHINGTON 1 blb$A[s ' E'VED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE F pR0 v 7 J/-yid 0 4 2_U s3 City of Tukwila 1 BUILDING DIVISION � R .:CE JVED CITY OF TuN"'WILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER W W 06 F_ 75; I.J_ W Q- ry O LIL Ur v) J T_ O N 00 O O T_ 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A505 Millwork Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 CV M CV I 0 N 00 0 0 0 o_ 0 0 LINE OF WALL — — — — — — — — — — — — - ------------Id---------------- OF WALL 3/4' VENEER ° BASE & PLYWOOD SIDE I 3/ ADJUSTABLE / I PANEL (TYP.) I I . o I3/4 °° LINE I " BASE & 3/4 ADJUSTABLE I BASE & " ADJUSTABLE 3/4 I o SHELVES �-- 3/4 VENEER PLYWOOD SHELVES SHELVES u SIDE PANEL (TYP.) - - M � M ' M 2'-7 5/8' 3/4' 2'-7 5/8' M -8� 3/4' VENEER PLYWD DOOR WITH CONCEALLED HINGES 3/4° VENEER PLYWD DOOR 5'-4" AT ALL DOORS WITH CONCEALLED HINGES AT ALL DOORS 1 1/2° TYP. 1 1/2" TYP. 1 1/2" TYP. 0 1 1/2" TIP. 05.1�5A o 01A.1� 5A 07 CONDIMENT STATION SECTION COFFEE STATION SECTION 9SCALE: SCALE: 1/4 =1 -0 3/4 = 1'-0" CONDIMENT RACK (BY OTHERS) I 6' DIA. TRASH CUT-OUT WITH SSTL RING, BY HOT BEVERAGE EQUIPMENT; GRAPHICS TO BE CENTERED LLIJ MILLWORK CONTRACTOR REFERENCE K-SHEETS I ABOVE COUNTERTOP LINE OF CABINETS BELOW I I ® o t !. � I II I �� �►j� � a � " L— �l►J� O u') o CV I L-------- ----- ► ------J — — — — — ------J N sk .— GR-2 EQ. EQ. GR-28 1 1/2' TYP. GR-2C o COUNTERTOP TO OVERHANG CABINETS 5-7° o 05.1/A505A COUNTERTOP TO OVERHANG BELOW 1 1/2' AT ALL EXPOSED SIDES 01A.1� 5A o CABINET 1' AT ALL EXPOSED SIDES CONDIMENT STATION PLAN (MS-12) 02 COFFEE STATION PLAN (MS-11) 06 SCALE: 1 /4 -1 0 SCALE: 3/4 1 0 "REFER TO SHEET A504A FOR ADDITIONAL SERVICE COUNTER ELEVATION DETAILS ® COFFEE STATION" 02/A505A COFFEE EQUIPMENT; � GRAPHICS TO BE CENTERED ABOVE COUNTERTOP REFERENCE K-SHEETS Ak 7'-0' A.F.F. — LIGHT FIXTURE; REF. SHEET A121 06/A505A T.O. TRIM i i SUBSTRATE ON METAL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN, U.N.O.; REFER WALL & SUBSTRATE TYPES WALL FINISH AS SCHEDULED o GR-2 GR-2 GR-2 GR-2 GR-2 6" DIA. TRASH CUT-OUT WITH SSTL CONDIMENT RACK GR-26 GR-2B I GR 2B GR-ZB GR-2B WC-08 RING, BY MILLWORK CONTRACTOR 06/ i i (� OTHERS) GR-2C GR-ZC GR 2C GR-ZC GR-2C o 02/A505A COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" i i 6' DIA. TRASH CABINET GRADE PLYWOOD i i I CUT-OUT WITH SSTL M AV-01 i RING, BY MILLWORK WT-12 1'-9 1/2' I i Wf-2 CONTRACTOR SCRIBE TRIM Q AV-01 CABINET -GRADE PLYWOOD I I I 1 1/2' CONSTRUCTION (INTERIOR i I BACKSPASH Lev COLOR: WHITE) 1 °ATLAS HOMEWARES' HANDLE # 235, BRUSHED NICKEL I -� i i I N i i AV-01 �� �___'' -__� TRASH CAN / . SUPPANPLIED BMOULDING BACKSPLASH i I 1 (BEYOND) / \ / \ CABINET FABRICATOR 07/A505A I AV-01 " N C-4 i i i o i I i , X 07/A505A SCRIBE TRIM 03 A505A �MK a FLOOR FINISH--- I I ---� AS SCHEDULED I 1 I I 1'-8 1/2' 00 B-1 B-1 8 3/4' I 8 3/4" LB_1 71 N TRASH CAN AS SCHEDULED �' SCRIBE BASE TRIM o o SCRIBE TRIM (05.1) (05.2) CABINET FACE (BEHIND B-1) PL-04 (01 A.1) (01 A.2) CABINET -GRADE PLYWOOD AT TOE KICK FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION 2X4 BLOCKING NOTE: NOTE: G.0 TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED HOLES IN THE SOLID SURFACE COUNTER TOPS AS NEEDED TO INSTALL ALL OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. G.0 TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED HOLES IN THE SOLID SURFACE COUNTER TOPS AS NEEDED TO INSTALL ALL OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. CONDIMENT STATION SECTION )SCALE: CONDIMENT STATION 05)SCALE: ELEVATION (MS-12) o1A COFFEE STATION ELEVATION (MS-1 1) 09 1/4 -1 -0 1/4 -1 0 SCALE: 3/4 - 1 0 PROTOTYPE 5.X SUBSTRATE ON METAL STUD FRAMING PER PLAN; I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I REFER TO DIMENSIOND FLOOR PLAN & WALL & I I SUBSTRATE TYPES I I I I WALL FINISH; REFERENCE ELEVATION I I 02/A505A I 1 COUNTERTOP ON 3/4" CABINET GRADE PLYWOOD AV-01 I I CABINET -GRADE PLYWOOD I I I I 1'-9 1/2' I CONSTRUCTION (INTERIOR V COLOR: WHITE) I i "ATLAS HOMEWARES" HANDLE #235, BRUSHED NICKEL N I I I I I 1 03 A505A I ADJUSTABLE SHELF o o d N I I I I N o I I I I i I FLOOR FINISH I I I I AS SCHEDULED I I I I B-1 1'-8 1/2' PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLYWOOD BEHIND CABINET BASE (TYP.) PL-04 COFFEE STATION SECTION 04 NOT USED )SCALE: 01 NOT USED )SCALE: 08 )SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 1/4"=1'-0" 3/4" = 1'-0" 0 U 7 m a O 0 ya m 0 m 0 3 0� U h O c O C O U 6 t 47 OId') Q m C 4 m m .� U N 0 0 0 N o o m `o cap E U a �° a 0 ;2 om Q Q U o „� U U c o� o a H a N C a 0 E v r> o c o Z ? " `c 3 0 0 U co 000 0 0 0� U -0 U �— C2 N 0 U 0 7 Q N 00 J. 0000 CO oo N W (D Q C° Ld z�3 0- ca w U� � Q o U O D co ~ O C) NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID 8211 REGI!STEREG STATE OF AWIIVGTtJIj W/b$/i5 REVIEY�VED_ rO CODE CO IPLIANCE PROWED f. ] 0 4 z� ,;10 City O I ulwila BUILDING DhJICIOo� RECt J '•JED CITY OF TUrP"WILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: [AHSM HECKED BY: EW,CA PROJECT NUMBER W m 06 1_1_ W 0 W ��D vJ U) r 0 N 00 0 O V— 2007855013 SHEET NUMBER A505A Millwork Details DATE OF THIS PRINTING - Oct 08, 2015 N P2 CV 0 CV O O 0 w 0 R SHELF WITH HARDWOOD EDGES 11 M"1111 , w•U"vV" cV N TRACK FOR BI-PASS DOORS M I PL-01 III I ( II TRACK FOR BI-PASS DOORS M 3/4" � 3/4" PRE -FABRICATED STORAGE F 9IF — — — — — PRE -FABRICATED STORAGE UNITS WITH ADJUSTABLE UNITS WITH ADJUSTABLE e ° SHELVES & BI—PASS DOORS (WHITE MELAMINE) �_ ° 3/4'---,,I 3/4" 3/4° III 3/4" ! 3/4" I I 3/4' SHELVES & BI—PASS DOORS (WHITE MELAMINE) ° M 3/4' o o NE E. o 0 M O M M TRACK FOR BI—PASS DOORS 04 A506A ° ° F — _ I F — — — — — — — — — 9 TRACK FOR BI—PASS DOORS 04 A506A PRE —FABRICATED STORAGE 3/4' PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD MDF ° 1'-2 1/4" I UNITS WITH ADJUSTABLE I I I 3/4' PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD MDF — ° 1'-2 1/4" SHELF WITH HARDWOOD EDGES AND I SHELVES (WHITE MELAMINE) III I SHELF WITH HARDWOOD EDGES AND UNDERSHELF LIGHTS. PROVIDE 1 }2 a UNDERSHELF LIGHTS. PROVIDE 1 �i ° ° ------------------ ----- SLOT FOR CORD FEED N M \_ N SLOT FOR CORD FEED iv '- PL-01 '� M PL-01 PL-01 � M co M N N \ d' M \ d- M N TRACK FOR BI-PASS DOORS N PLASTIC LAMINATE ON ALL EXPOSED N N PL-01 NOTE: MANAGER'S DESKTOP AT DIFFERENT I PLASTIC LAMINATE ON ALL EXPOSED 28 1/2' \ SURFACES OF 3/4' PLYWOOD. CO ELEVATION THAN CATERING DESKTOP SURFACES OF 3/4' PLYWOOD.17 o� PL-01 28 1/2" I PL-01 MANAGER'S DESK co c0 • PL-01 N \ \ M N \ \ '"' M M 00 00 00 00 3/4" NO REVISION F FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 iV 3/4' PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD MDF SHELF 1'-3 3/8° M M FLUORESCENT STRIP WITH T-5 LAMP �43 1/2' 3 1/2° 3/4° 3/4' PLYWOOD SUPPORT BRACEJ 3 1/2' 3 1/2" 3/4' 3/4' PLYWOOD SUPPORT BRACE 30 3/4' PL-01 I M � 3/4. PL-01 I "' PAINT UNDERSIDE FIAT WHITE e op REGISTERED � N C N \ I N N I N N 3/4' PLYWOOD SUPPORT BRACE �+ �' N N 3/4' PLYWOOD SUPPORT BRACE —") RACE N N N ATE LIE ftsilINGTON PL-01 I PL-01 I N.R ST *SCALE: MANAGER'S DESK MILLWORK SECTION )SCALE: MANAGER»S DESK MILLWORK ELEVATION )SCALE: CATERING DESK MILLWORK SECTION 05 CATERING DESK MILLWORK ELEVATION )SCALE: UNDERSHELF LIGHT DETAIL 1 = 1 —0 1 = 1 —0 1 = 1 —0 SCALE: 1 = 1 —0 3 = 1 —0 Q NOTE REFERENCE SHEET E302 FOR COORDINATION OF WALL MOUNTED SPECIAL SYSTEMS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND SERVICES. N5 0. W o c 6' MIN. n HR/ OSHA POSTERS � CDCLEAR IT CABINET N 0 L.L 9'-6' A.F.F. O 8.0. CEILING ICID LINE OF SHELVES ABOVE SAFE; REF. SHEET IT CABINET; REF. 0 T IT �— INSTALLED PER BE I r ( A701 & A602 A701 & A602f—i�EaViEEAfE = •� 7'-10° A.F.F. ^nno ►9 MI F:� W T.O. MILLWORK I BI—PASS SLIDING DOORS SHELVING UNIT I BY MILLWORKER 05/A506A I 2'-7" A.F.F. _ _ T.O. MANAGER'S DE K I II I I I � II F 1-1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — CATERING I I MANAGER'S DESK ( I PL—Ot III III ( 3/4' � 3/4" E. II 3/4" � 1 3/4" 1 7 E. I F IIF __-=�==9 PRE —FABRICATED STORAGE UNITS WITH ADJUSTABLE i SHELVES (WHITE MELAMINE) III PL-01 I TRACK FOR BI-PASS DOORS NOTE: CATERING DESKTOP AT DIFFERENT PL—Oi ELEVATION THAN MANAGER'S DESKTOP CATERING D SK CV co PL-01 e e II II I DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM I W 09 I I I I I 5'-02 4'-0° SAFE ( ° ° i 1-8 1/2 g _0 3 0 1/4 PROJECT NUMBER 2007855013 B-2 B-2 SHEET NUMBER 02A 02 B A506A Millwork Details 03 NOT USED 9SCALE: ENLARGED OFFICE ELEVATIONS ENLARGED OFFICE PLAN SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 1/2" = 1'-0" )SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 E a 0 J u., 0 0 0 _Z 46 C) O 0 a GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL EXTERIOR STOREFRONT FRAMING & GLAZING TO MATCH EXISTING WHERE CONDITION OCCURS. 2. 1" THERMAL INSULATED GLAZING ACCEPTABLE ® EXTERIOR GLAZING ONLY (VERIFY PER SITE LOCATION). 3. INTERIOR GLAZING SHALL BE 1/4' & TEMPERED TO COMPLY WITH LOCAL/STATE BUILDING CODES.41 �o 0 4. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS & DETAILS. O L N g .3 0 LN O c o •� o � N � O • N tb -0O 0 a) Q 2 O aD o N ` U C D a �Q41 0= m o0.3 cn - m (D a a N m - : � a o o c z o o Novo L 6 a V Q� Q t(D > 2 2 U N i •' o p O 0 E 2 ` m 0) M N n U •o U M 00 M W 11'-2" V.I.F. 7'-6" V.I.F. 6'-8' ce uj W 0 Awk W Q N 6 2" 1 a 4-8 2" f a ° 6-0 2 a 1 m 1 " 2" 2 3-0 3-0 " 1'-D" 2' 2' 1'-6" 2 1 " 2" 1 i-6" 2" 3-0 Z 1LLJ � (n CO 4_0 ` O GL co CD OT N N p N E �� cV CO ..1� U Q_ ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 3/8" CLEAR `" a E E E �; O M I' FRAME BEYOND. MATCH TEMPERED � N / OR RELOCATED EXISTING GLASS OI 10 oN 100ADOOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT/T r9<� o T PARTIAL HEIGHT o WALL N N T EXPANSION JOINT \ \ / 1--WEATHERSTRIPPING. 3/4ROUTE IN DOOR c TYPE o TYPE TYPE EXISTING CONCRETE PAVING OOR FINISH O Og O AS SCHEDULED NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10/08/2015 ALUMINUM THRESHOLD & BID ADA MAX. LEVEL SET IN A FULL BED OF 6'- 1 1/8a CHANGE 1/2" MASTIC S-10" 16 NOT USED 15 EXTERIOR DOOR THRESHOLD DETAIL )SCALE: 1 3/4' 2'-10' 2'-10' 1 3/4' �, 2 3'-6" " 2 " SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 3/4" O N E Q E OT WALL FINISH & SUBSTRATE STOREFRONT GLAZING STOREFRONT FRAMING CV a N a 'y � 2° 4 1/2' AS SCHEDULED SHIM WHERE REQUIRED a � / � \ o o STOREFRONT FRAMING METAL STUD FRAMING; EQ. EQ. 4 1/2" ^ Q REF. WALL TYPES BACKER ROD & SEALANT (TYP.) � ` T T T O —� c9 . 2X WOOD BLOCKING BREAK METAL ®BOTH SIDES 4 1/2° N BACKER ROD & 1' THERMAL INSULATED GLAZING " `�' N o �, r SEALANT (TYP.) N N DOUBLE STUD PLATE '� i i '"� BREAK METAL ®BOTH SIDES i FLOOR FINISH AS STOREFRONT FRAMING TYPE TYPE EQ. EQ. :. WALL FINISH &SUBSTRATE z: i i ; BACKER ROD &SEALANT (TYP.) SCHEDULED O O r- 8211 REGISTEREQ STOREFRONT GLAZING / " 4 1 2 AS SCHEDULED N RCHITECT SHIM WHERE REQUIRED STOREFRONT GLAZING STOREFRONT FRAMING METAL STUD FRAMING; REF. WALL TYPES :: ; ; '` o ST E OF W ASN1NGiQH SHIM WHERE REQUIRED------/ tb�a8%15 14 BUTT HINGE JAMB DETAIL 13 WINDOW JAMB DETAIL WINDOW SILL DETAIL 9SCALE: 11 WINDOW SILL DETAIL STOREFRONT & WINDOW TYPES SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" 1 1/2"=1'-0" SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" *SCALE:1/4" = 1'-0" 0 W 4 1/2' METAL STUD FRAMING; 06 REF. WALL TYPES SHIM WHERE REQUIRED �— STOREFRONT GLAZING WALL FINISH & SUBSTRATE ;` i i ;. METAL STUD FRAMING; i i METAL STUD FRAMING; AS SCHEDULED :: i i . BACKER ROD & SEALANT (TYP.) REF. WALL TYPES -' i , REF. WALL TYPES STOREFRONT FRAMING 2X WOOD BLOCKING :• • i ry BREAK METAL ®BOTH SIDES 1/2 °= i i f. 1/2 1/2 i i �• 1/2 t ' ' 2X WOOD BLOCKING WALL FINISH & i i 2X WOOD BLOCKING ^W WALL FINISH & SUBSTRATE i , r, AS SCHEDULED r SUBSTRATE AS i SCHEDULED .01 EQ. EQ. HOLLOW METAL FRAME `V N HOLLOW METAL FRAME O ° 4 1/2 • "T" ANCHOR FOR FRAME; "T' ANCHOR FOR FRAME; STOREFRONTGLAZINGGLAZING TYPICAL AT JAMB DOOR STOP TYPICAL AT JAMB STOREFRONT GLAZING STOREFRONT FRAMING uiDOOR AS SCHEDULED DOOR ASSCHEDULED eG EAS" 'n � CODE COMPLIANCE A PR(DvV2=D v) DOUBLE-ACTING WINDOW SILL / JAMB DETAIL WINDOW HEAD 09 DETAIL DOOR HEAD DETAIL *SCALE: DOOR HEAD DETAIL 07 UD SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" 1 1/2"=1'-0" SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" DOOR SIGNAGE IS PRE-PRINTED STICK ON SIGN c t, Of Tulwjila HC SIGN REF ACCESSIBILITY SUILDIsd�G DI`%IS - 0 N 7° DETAILS E ,- RECt; Ic UD co 4 1/2' EXISTING WALL FRAMING &EXTERIOR METAL STUD FRAMING; REF. WALL TYPES i i .j. CITY OF TU'r" ILA FINISHES TO REMAIN i i SHIM WHERE REQUIRED / �. / \ OOCT / 6 09 2015 STOREFRONT GLAZING WALL FINISH & SUBSTRATE 2" r AS SCHEDULED :. i ; ." BACKER ROD & SEALANT (TYP.) o PERMIT CENTER SHIM WHERE REQUIRED LO DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: STOREFRONT FRAMING BREAK METAL ® 2X WOOD BLOCKING i BREAK METAL ® BOTH SIDES Q' BACKER ROD & INTERIOR SIDE o 0 EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER N� SEALANT (TYP.) N tv N ❑2 ❑3 © MEN WOMEN STOREFRONT DOOR oe EQ. EQ. STOREFRONT/PATIO RESTROOMS DOUBLE-ACTING RESTROOM DOOR SIGNS 2007855013 AS SCHEDULED ALUMINUM/GLASS SOLID CORE P-LAM PLAM FACED W/ RECT. WINDOWS. 4 1/2° EXISTING TRANSOM EXISTING RELOCATED OVER ENTRY DOORS STOREFRONT FRAMING 4 1/2° STOREFRONT GLAZING STOREFRONT FRAMING FACED DOOR, DOOR PROTECTION AS SCHED. REF. ELEV. FOR FINISHES. 'ELIASON' EASY SWING MODEL #SCP-8 MEDIUM WEIGHT W/ FINISH #1573-6 'FROSTY WHITE" FINISH ON KITCHEN SIDE AND 0 SHEET N U M B E F? BUCK FINISH ON DINING SIDE. SSfI KICKPLATE ON BOTH SIDES. FRAME FINISH TO BE BLACK. A601 STOREFRONT STOREFRONT VESTIBULE DOOR @ TRANSOM DETAIL 06)SCALE: 05 NOT USED 04 WINDOW HEAD DETAIL WINDOW HEAD DETAIL DOOR TYPES T = TEMPERED GLASS Door& Window Details SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" SCALE: SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" 03 SCALE: 1 1/2"=1'-0" 01 1/4" = 1'-0" MATT ^fY Tf.fin E CV M N L2 O cV C O z U O Li tE CD 0 Uj W J W S U t/7 ¢I LU w z w c-11 0 z �I 0 0 o cn � ¢ m . m �w z z � a o 0 Q 1= Cn m m N w 0 s 0 0 0 Locket Submittal Package Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Southcenter Plaza Architect Stantec Architecture 135 South LaSalle Street Suite 3100 Chicago IL 60603-4139 Tel: 312-262-2295 Designer Corner Bakery Cafe 12700 Park Central Dr Suite 1300 Dallas, TX 75251 Tel: 972-619-4116 Fax: 972-692-8476 Plans Dated: 06/29/15 Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Coordinator Thomas Howard 100 Courchelle Dr Nicholasville, KY 04356 Tel: 859-887-9119 Ext 104 Fax: 859-881-5499 E-Mail: thomash@locknet.com Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Southcenter Plaza Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Page 1 of 60 1 Pair of doors, Vestibule Opening: 100A Number Opening Size: 36", 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RHRA) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'[ Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type _ Hd) <Aluminum> AL AL 4 3/4" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'l Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge <Aluminum> AL AL Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Others Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 04) 2 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM95HD1 C 2 Exit Device Dorma 970OBB 630 x 36" x 84" x 630 2 Door Pull Rockwood BF157 US28 Type 17 Mounting US28 2 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST SN1 DP 689 689 1 Threshold Pemko 271A36" A 72' --36"-----36°-- i �I m� I I I i 1 Single door, Receiving O enin : 113 Number Opening Size: 42" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RHR) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'l Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd) <Aluminum> AL AL 4 3/4" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'l Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge <Aluminum> AL AL Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Others Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET- 02 AL) 1 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C 1 Exit Device Dorma 970OBB 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 1 Cylinder Dorma 87R10 00 630 TMP 630 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 1 Threshold Pemko 271A36" A I 36" I I I I I I I I The following items need to be verified before material is ordered 1) Frame jamb sizes 2) Note: All interior frames knock down, exterior frames welded Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Southcenter Plaza Submittal Date: 06/25/15 1 Single door, Entry Opening: 102 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x_ (LHR) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'l Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type_ Hd <Aluminum> AL AL 4 3/4" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'I Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge <Aluminum> AL AL Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Others Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET:_02_AL 1 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM83HD1 C 1 Exit Device Dorma 970OBB 630 x ZP03/630 x 36" x 84" x 630 1 Cylinder Dorma 87R10 00 630 TMP 630 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST DPK89 689 689 1 Threshold Pemko 271A36" A 36" I I I I i I I i I 2— Manufacturers & Finishes Manufacturers Curries Detex Corporation Dorma Eliason Graham Wood Doors McKinney NGP Pemko Rockwood Manufacturing Finishes 626 - Satin chromium plated over nickel 630 - Satin stainless steel 689 - Aluminum painted US26D - Satin chromium plated over nickel US32D - Satin stainless steel USP - Primed for painting Page 3 of 60 1 Single door, Women's Restroom Opening:108 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RH) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat 1 Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd) Curries C CRS 16 5 7/8" KD C 2", 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'[ Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge Graham GCD PLam 13/4" F PC 3/3 Door Finish Door Remarks Sanara 7932 Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 051 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP 1 Door Pull Rockwood BF107 x 70C US32D US32D 1 Push Plate Rockwood 70C US32D US32D 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8616 FHP 689 689 t Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 6" x 34" US32D US32D Pull Side 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 8" x 34" US32D US32D Push Side 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D 1 Miscellaneous Item Rockwood BF687 Brown Brown Restroom Door Sign 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 Index of Abbreviations AnchorTyoe WEWA - Welded Existing Wall Anchor Door Core PART - Particle Core PC - Bonded Particle Core POLYS - Polystyrene Door Edge 313 - Bevel Both Stile Edges A -1 /8" in 2" Lock edge - Square Hinge edge Door Finish PF-STD - Composite Core Prefinish, Standard Color Door Mat'l A60 - A-60 Galvanneal Steel AL - Aluminum RED -Oak - Red Oak Door Seam S - Exposed Seam Door Series 707S - Commercial Grade AL - Aluminum Doors GCD - Custom Door WD - Wood Doors Door Type F - Flush F2P - (2) Viewers FG - Full Glass Frame Construction KD - Knock -Down SW - Weld Seam 1 Single door, Men's Restroom Opening: 109 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (LH) Frame Mat'l A60 - A-60 Galvanneal Steel AL - Aluminum CRS - Cold Rolled Steel Frame Profile C - Double Bend M - Single Bend Frame Series AL - Aluminum Frames C - Drywall frames M - Masonry Flush frames WD - Wood Frames Hand LH - Left Hand LHA/RHA-DA - Both Hands Active, Double Acting LHR - Left Hand Reverse RH - Right Hand RH-DA - Right Hand, Double Acting RHR - Right Hand Reverse RHRA - Right Hand Reverse Active Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Southcenter Plaza Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'l Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd) Curries C CRS 16 5 7/8" KD C 2", 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'[ Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge Graham GCD PLam 13/4" F PC 3/3 Door Finish Door Remarks Sanara 7932 Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET. 05) 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP 1 Door Pull Rockwood BF107 x 70C US32D US321) 1 Push Plate Rockwood 70C US32D U932D 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8616 FHP 689 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 6" x 34" US32D US32D Pull Side 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 8" x 34" US32D US32D Push Side 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D 1 Miscellaneous Item Rockwood BF687 Brown Brown Restroom Door Sign 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 36" I I I I I I 1 Pair of doors, Entry O enin :100 Number Opening Size: 36", 36" x 84" x _ (RHRA) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'[ Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd) <Aluminum> AL AL 4 3/4" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'l Gauge Thickness Tie Lite Kit Core Seam Edge <Aluminum> AL AL _ Door Finish Door Remarks Door & Frame by Others Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 01 AL) 2 Continuous Hinge Pemko CFM95HD1 C 1 Removable Mullion Dorma WS1310-8 628 628 2 Exit Device Dorma 970OBB 630 x 36" x 84" x 630 2 Door Pull Rockwood BF157 US28 Type 17 Mounting US28 2 Surface Closer Dorma 8916 DST SN1 DP 689 689 1 Threshold Pemko 271A72" A 2 Miscellaneous Item Pemko 345ANB36" (TKSP8) A 72" z— I I I 1 Single door, Prep Opening: 111 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RH-DA) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'l Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd) Curries C CRS 16 5 7/8" KD C 2", 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'l Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge Eliason SCP-8 Laminate 1314" F' PC Door Finish Door Remarks Eliason SCP-8 w/ 18" Stainless Steel Kick Plate Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET: 06) 2 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D Corner Bakery SCP-8 sgl Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Southcenter Plaza Southcenter Plaza Southcenter Plaza Southcenter Plaza Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Page 7 of 60 Page 8 of 60 Page 9 of 60 Page 11 of 60 1 Single door, Prep Opening: 111 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (RH-DA) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'l Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd_ Curries C CRS 16 5 7/8" KD C 2", 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'l Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge Eliason SCP-8 Laminate 13/4" F' PC Door Finish Door Remarks Eliason SCP-8 w/ 18" Stainless Steel Kick Plate Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET. 06) 2 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D 36" f i I I I I I I IA I " i Corner Bakery SCP-8 sgl 1 Single door, Catering Opening: 114 Number Opening Size: 36" x 84" x 1 3/4" (LHR) Facing Frame Frame Frame Jamb Frame Frame Anchor (Jamb, Label Frame Catalog Series Mat'l Gauge Depth Construction Profile Type Hd Curries C CRS 16 5 7/8" KD C 2", 2" Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Catalog Label Door Series Mat'[ Gauge Thickness Type Lite Kit Core Seam Edge Graham GCD PLam 13/4" F PC 3/3 Door Finish Door Remarks Sanara 7932 Installed Hardware (Group: HW SET. 07 3 Standard Hinge McKinney MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" USP USP 1 Lockset Dorma C880 D LCC 626 LHR 1 3/4" 626 1 Surface Closer Dorma 8616 AF86P 689 689 1 Kick Plate Rockwood K1050 12" x 34" US32D US32D 1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 409 US26D US26D 1 Threshold Pemko 171A36" A 3 Door Silencer Rockwood 608 Corner Bakery Cafe # 1619 Southcenter Plaza Submittal Date: 06/25/15 Page 14 of 60 d) C O '0 a O a N'0 a) s. t c oL � '3 o 0 • U h O O C O'V E ° $N to a 0 a o OO a;10A o o 8L = N a)- N ^- `o U N :5 ro o n D o 5 o � � 0 6 0 o o - m D a C a U _ �'E o 0) ;- 3 Lo a 2 2 b 2-6 0 L U o. U _> 2 ° Q Q U o a 0 Q T o L U O O Z5 a n R _N O R Z N C 3 OS. O co CO — 0 2 0— U-p U 4 V) N ch m I �, lv a �-C -`o NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10/08/2015 & BID 8211 REGISTEfiED ARC TECT BR fJ N. RE STATE OF''AASHINGTON [o1�ls 0 W W W n W 0 U_ 0 - W BEMs-�: ED FOR �6 AP­�F aOVEitB � •.� n �//) r Arrn I � n ;� sia C ^ L I! CK of Tulfavila t, 9 O d BUILDING N r'�_/�_ rlECEi"IfE000 N CITY Cr TIjif< 'ILA OCT 0 9 2015 0 PERMIT CENTER DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: EW,CA AH,SM PROJECT NUMBER 12007855013 SHEET NUMBER A603 Door Hardware Submittal r%A-rr- ^r IrUIC, rMikiTIAI!'" n_L n0 nn" G Cn v w F— z Z w U �D o NI M Mw m oz z� �� o- o 39 1 2' A.F.F. T.O. NEWSPAPER RACK 05 MOUNTED NEWSPAPER STAND (NS 1) SCALE: N.T.S. (2) RECEPTACLES EACH SIDE POWER CORD; REF. - FABRICATION DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS ELEVATION ELEVATION (CORD SIDE) G.C. TO COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DUPLEX FLOOR BOX; REF. ELECTRICAL FOR DETAILS PER PLAN PER PLAN 12° j 36" l NOTE: D- - TABLE TO BE ROTATED SO POWER � o CORD IS ON DUPLEX FLOOR BOX SIDE. � W a PLAN 04 COMMUNITY TABLE DETAIL (DT-14 ONLY) SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" ---TABLE BASE POST -� ° ..�c I 30' CLEAR MIN. I I m 71 Cn II II M� I I I I � I I ELEVATION F------------- CLEAR FLOOR SPACE I I I I I I TABLE BASE POST I I I I I I I I I I I ICI I I ICI I'I I I I'I C; c� Ill' i i l l w C" r ----------- /�--- - PLAN NOTE: INSTALL FURNITURE BASES AS SHOWN; REF. FURNITURE SCHEDULE ON SHEET A602 FOR SPECIFIC TABLE BASE TYPES 03 TABLE BASE DETAILS SCALE: 1 /2" = V-0" k CURTAIN ROD STOREFRONT FRAME B.O. CURTAIN/ T.O. SILL CURTAIN ROD TO BE MOUNTED AT INSIDE FACE OF STOREFRONT WINDOW FRAME. SEE FURNITURE PLAN & INTERIOR ELEVATION FOR LOCATION. B.O. CURTAINS TO REST ON SILL 02 CURTAIN MOUNT DETAIL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" J F E A GR-5S __+----__ OFFICE r--------- � , I , I 1836E ' 74 c CATERING 5 GR-12 STORAGE L T- ----� 107 RESTROOM - VESTIBULE -I - - I II I I I I •' \�AOp EN'S ------- I GR-1 L I I MS-1 MS-2 r I x cv I I m I I I� IL - �_�_; MURAL V.I.F. BB-2 104 -+-__--_ DINING C I WC-13 GR DT-5 GR i �I i i�i 1036 ! R7 c! lT! ! R7 c-ii! DINING B � !� N !, , GR-5S GR-5S GR-5S 112 DISHWASH 41 C: GR-5S MS-10 .20 I I I I I I I I I PREP I DG-1 - - - MN-3 m l 110 GR-6 SERVICE I I oil — — — L------------J L-------------- NS " • 1 1 11 01 1, •; �� �.� � � �I _ I V is NR rd m 1'TZ•� ' 1�TSa 1'T.�a IT.�a I�TS7 • _._ . .a..,..r.,- ,..�.....�.�- ....�..�..�� = i� ,\ .liJh� r�7'�-'r4 � ®lr �yrearr ar® ®rl,ya`rr® lf�s i.!C14 ®i��w a rr�irre li�l _ rrY A.ihi" ai ii�Wr -JC Fri der riF {he rr{Jr�reJi7i C 1rr.r re fir• _MS . t1i 1 �1 1i 1 ��ji, r (r _ t�r�`r• �rha esii 1 e h'tr� �� +IVr� errs �h,Yra�r1 C14 �Oi "iiw0 1 1 — — Yra i i.L''j — PATIO ue `ye�lrsr'rrt+�*1 t1a.1j FI `.�rraV I I I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 5.5 01 FURNITURE & GRAPHICS PLANN SCALE: 1 /4 = 1 -0 " 0 PLAN NOTE: INSTALL FURNITURE BASES AS SHOWN; REF. FURNITURE SCHEDULE ON SHEET A602 FOR SPECIFIC TABLE BASE TYPES 03 TABLE BASE DETAILS SCALE: 1 /2" = V-0" k CURTAIN ROD STOREFRONT FRAME B.O. CURTAIN/ T.O. SILL CURTAIN ROD TO BE MOUNTED AT INSIDE FACE OF STOREFRONT WINDOW FRAME. SEE FURNITURE PLAN & INTERIOR ELEVATION FOR LOCATION. B.O. CURTAINS TO REST ON SILL 02 CURTAIN MOUNT DETAIL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" J F E A GR-5S __+----__ OFFICE r--------- � , I , I 1836E ' 74 c CATERING 5 GR-12 STORAGE L T- ----� 107 RESTROOM - VESTIBULE -I - - I II I I I I •' \�AOp EN'S ------- I GR-1 L I I MS-1 MS-2 r I x cv I I m I I I� IL - �_�_; MURAL V.I.F. BB-2 104 -+-__--_ DINING C I WC-13 GR DT-5 GR i �I i i�i 1036 ! R7 c! lT! ! R7 c-ii! DINING B � !� N !, , GR-5S GR-5S GR-5S 112 DISHWASH 41 C: GR-5S MS-10 .20 I I I I I I I I I PREP I DG-1 - - - MN-3 m l 110 GR-6 SERVICE I I oil — — — L------------J L-------------- NS " • 1 1 11 01 1, •; �� �.� � � �I _ I V is NR rd m 1'TZ•� ' 1�TSa 1'T.�a IT.�a I�TS7 • _._ . .a..,..r.,- ,..�.....�.�- ....�..�..�� = i� ,\ .liJh� r�7'�-'r4 � ®lr �yrearr ar® ®rl,ya`rr® lf�s i.!C14 ®i��w a rr�irre li�l _ rrY A.ihi" ai ii�Wr -JC Fri der riF {he rr{Jr�reJi7i C 1rr.r re fir• _MS . t1i 1 �1 1i 1 ��ji, r (r _ t�r�`r• �rha esii 1 e h'tr� �� +IVr� errs �h,Yra�r1 C14 �Oi "iiw0 1 1 — — Yra i i.L''j — PATIO ue `ye�lrsr'rrt+�*1 t1a.1j FI `.�rraV I I I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 5.5 01 FURNITURE & GRAPHICS PLANN SCALE: 1 /4 = 1 -0 " 0 �I i i�i 1036 ! R7 c! lT! ! R7 c-ii! DINING B � !� N !, , GR-5S GR-5S GR-5S 112 DISHWASH 41 C: GR-5S MS-10 .20 I I I I I I I I I PREP I DG-1 - - - MN-3 m l 110 GR-6 SERVICE I I oil — — — L------------J L-------------- NS " • 1 1 11 01 1, •; �� �.� � � �I _ I V is NR rd m 1'TZ•� ' 1�TSa 1'T.�a IT.�a I�TS7 • _._ . .a..,..r.,- ,..�.....�.�- ....�..�..�� = i� ,\ .liJh� r�7'�-'r4 � ®lr �yrearr ar® ®rl,ya`rr® lf�s i.!C14 ®i��w a rr�irre li�l _ rrY A.ihi" ai ii�Wr -JC Fri der riF {he rr{Jr�reJi7i C 1rr.r re fir• _MS . t1i 1 �1 1i 1 ��ji, r (r _ t�r�`r• �rha esii 1 e h'tr� �� +IVr� errs �h,Yra�r1 C14 �Oi "iiw0 1 1 — — Yra i i.L''j — PATIO ue `ye�lrsr'rrt+�*1 t1a.1j FI `.�rraV I I I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 5.5 01 FURNITURE & GRAPHICS PLANN SCALE: 1 /4 = 1 -0 " 0 I I I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 5.5 01 FURNITURE & GRAPHICS PLANN SCALE: 1 /4 = 1 -0 " 0 C U 7 m O U6 � � O O U U Z L_ p 3 0 -e �I O C m .0 m H m C E 0 ao O H o � � 1; 0 oa.�� N m m m .� � � Q N . 00 z c NO REVISION ISSUED FOR PERMIT 10 08 2015 & BID REGISTERE 16/cs/1-S I D ARCHITECT EN� ATE OF VASHINGTpR06 NNAPPROVED U) Lo I m L.L. W O CODE COMUPLlA SHEET NUMBER Furniture &Graphics Plan DATE OF THIS PRINTING -Oct 08, 2015 b L0 �—d n EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ITEM NO. QTY DESCRIPTION REMARKS 100 1 WALK-IN COOLER WREMOTE REFRIGERATION 101 1 WALK-IN FREEZER w/FLOOR/RAMP & REMOTE REFRIGERATION 102 8 WIRE SHELVING UNIT WCASTERS, WALK-IN COOLER (6-TIER) 102.1 7 WIRE SHELVING UNIT WCASTERS, WALK-IN FREEZER (5-TIER) 103 6 BUN PAN RACK WCASTERS 104 1 SECURITY ENCLOSURE KIT WCASTERS 200 1 OFFICE SAFE 201 1 MOP SINK 201A 1 MOP/BROOM WALL HANGER BY OWNERNENDOR 201E 1 MOP BUCKETS WWRINGERS BY OWNER/VENDOR 201C 1 SERVICE FAUCET 202 LOT STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD VFY. EXACT LOCATIONS 202.1 LOT STAINLESS STEEL WALL END CAPS VFY. EXACT LOCATIONS 203 1 STAINLESS WALL PANEL RIGHT & REAR WALLS OF MOP SINK 204 LOT WIRE WALL SHELVING UNIT MOUNT AT 94 1/2" A.F.F. 205 LOT WIRE WALL SHELVING MOUNT AT 54" A.F.F. 206 LOT S/S WALL FLASHING BEHIND DISHTABLES & 3-COMPARTMENT SINK 207 1 THREE COMPARTMENT SINK WCUTTING BOARD STORAGE RACK BELOW 207.1 3 LEVER WASTE PART OF ITEM:207 208 2 FAUCET PART OF ITEM:207 209 1 POT RACK MOUNT TOP OF RACK AT 82 1/2" A.F.F. 210 2 WALL GRID PANEL " 211 1 CLEAN DISH TABLE 212 LOT WIRE SHELVING 2-TIER 213 2 GLASS RACK OVER SHELF 214 - SPARE NUMBER 215 1 PRE -RINSE 216 1 SOILED DISH TABLE 217 1 DISH MACHINE BY OWNER/OPERATOR 218 2 LOCKER INSTALLED BY G.C. 219 1 COAT RACK BY OWNER/OPERATOR 220 1 BUS BOX BY OWNER/OPERATOR 221 1 FLATWARE DISHWASHER RACK BY OWNER/OPERATOR 222 1 SECURITY ENCLOSURE KIT WCASTERS 300 6 WIRE SHELVING UNIT WCASTERS, DRY STORAGE (6-TIER) 300A 1 WIRE SHELVING UNIT WCASTERS, CLOSET STORAGE (4-TIER) 301 1 ROLL -IN REFRIGERATOR, 1 SECTION 302 1 EXHAUST HOOD BY OWNER/OPERATOR 303 1 CONVECTION OVEN 304 2 SAFETY SYSTEM MOVEABLE GAS CONNECTOR FOR ITEMS: 303 & 317 305 1 EQUIPMENT STAND FOR ITEM:303 307 1 WORKTABLE w/UNDERSHELF & CASTERS 308 LOT WIRE WALL SHELVING UNIT MOUNT TOP OF SHELF AT 86" A.F.F. 311 LOT WIRE WALL SHELVING UNIT MOUNT TOP OF SHELF AT 66" A.F.F. 312 2 CHECK HOLDER MOUNT TO FACE OF ITEM:311 314 1 CATERING TABLE WUNDERSHELF & OVERSHELF 314.1 1 POST 315 LOT S/S WALL FLASHING BELOW OVEN HOOD 317 1 CONVECTION OVEN WCASTERS 318 1 RETHERMALIZING UNIT 319 1 REFRIGERATED WORK TOP WCASTERS 320 1 WIRE SHELVING WCASTERS, CATERING SHELVING (8-TIER) 400 2 SAFETY SYSTEM MOVEABLE GAS CONNECTOR FOR ITEMS:410 & 417 401 1 EXHAUST HOOD COOKLINE, BY OWNER/OPERATOR 402 1 BREAD SHELF 406 1 TRASH BIN BY OWNER/OPERATOR 408 1 TOASTER SHELF 408.1 1 SHELF w/ HEAT SHIELD 408.2 1 RETHERMALIZER SHELF 409 1 HOT FOOD WELL COUNTER TOP 410 1 6-BURNER HOTPLATE 410.1 1 PLATE SHELF PART OF ITEMAII0 411 1 REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND WCASTERS 412 2 PANINI OVEN 413 1 POP-UP TOASTER 414 1 CONVEYOR TOASTER 414.1 1 CONVEYOR TOASTER 415 1 PANINNI STATION 416 1 COUNTER TOP WARMING CABINET 417 LOT S/S WALL FLASHING BELOW COOKLINE HOOD 418 1 CONDIMENT WALL SHELF 420 1 COUNTERTOP GRIDDLE 420.1 1 PLATE SHELF PART OF ITEMA20 421 1 RANGE TABLE WCASTERS & UNDERSHELF 422 1 SAUTE PAN WALL RACK 423 1 HOLDING CABINET 424 1 REFRIGERATED SANDWICH/SALAD PREP TABLE WCASTERS 425 1 WORKTABLE WUNDERSHELF 500A 1 REMOTE COMPRESSOR FOR ITEM 512 500E 1 REMOTE COMPRESSOR FOR ITEM 503 & 508 501 4 CHECK HOLDER 502 LOT WIRE WALL SHELVING UNIT MOUNT TOP OF SHELF AT 96 1/2" A.F.F. 503 1 SALAD STATION WREMOTE REFRIGERATION ITEM:500A 503.1 1 SALAD STATION TABLE 504 4 KDS BY OWNER/OPERATOR 505 1 TABLE TRACKER BY OWNER/OPERATOR 506 1 TIME CLOCK BY OWNER/OPERATOR 507 1 LETTUCE CRISPER MOUNT BOTTOM OF UNIT AT 52" A.F.F. 508 1 SANDWICH STATION WREMOTE REFRIGERATION ITEM:500B 508.1 1 SANDWICH STATION TABLE 510 1 BUILT IN DUMP SINK AND FAUCET PART OF ITEM:616 511 8 SOUP WELL 7 QUART 512 1 FRONT EXPO COUNTER 513 1 THIRD PAN HOLDER 516 1 MICROWAVE SHELF 521 1 WORKTABLE WUNDERSHELF 521.1 1 JOVERSHELF 522 1 MICROWAVE OVEN 523 1 WORK COUNTER WUNDERSHELF 524 1 DECORATIVE LAMP 525 1 DECORATIVE LAMP 526 1 DECORATIVE LAMP 530 1 PASS THROUGH SHELF 531 1 ANGLED PRINTED SHELF VERIFY EXACT LOCATION ON PLAN & ELEVATION 532 1 WALL SHELF goo �o� 500 500E VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER, & REFRIGERATED COUNTER COMPRESSORS w/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS I I I I I L 0 I90 ® �j � INS 110 FAMMMM rM A=-- 01.1 .. I I EQUIPMENT PLAN NORTH �'� ��� SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ITEM NO. QTY DESCRIPTION REMARKS 533 1 THIRD PAN HOLDER 534 1 WALL SHELF MOUNT AT 66" A.F.F. 536 1 WALL SHELF MOUNT AT 66" A.F.F. 537 1 WALL SHELF MOUNT AT 52" A.F.F. 537.1 1 POST 601 3 WALL MOUNTED HAND SINK 602 1 ICE CUBER SELF CONTAINED 603 1 ICE BIN 604 1 HAND SINK DROP -IN 604.1 1 HAND SINK SIDE SPLASH PART OF ITEM:604 605 1 WALL SHELF MOUNT TOP OF SHELF AT 68" A.F.F. 605.1 1 WALL SHELF MOUNT TO OF SHELF AT 54" A.F.F. 606 1 PREP TABLE w/SINK & UNDERSHELF 608 - SPARE NUMBER 609 1 COFFEE BREWER 610 1 UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR WCASTERS 611 2 BAR BLENDER 612 2 TRASH BIN BY OWNER/OPERATOR 614 1 COFFEE PRINTER BY OWNER/OPERATOR 615 1 ESPRESSO CAPPUCCINO MACHINE 616 1 STAINLESS BLENDER COUNTER 616A 1 STAINLESS BREW COUNTER — — — — _------ —I I I I I I I --------------- EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ITEM NO. QTY DESCRIPTION REMARKS 616.1 1 BLENDER COUNTER WALL SHELF MOUNT AT 63 1/2" A.F.F. 616.2 1 BREW COUNTER WALL SHELF MOUNT AT 78" A.F.F. 700 2 WIRE SHELVING 702 1 U/C REFRIGERATOR WCASTERS 703 4 POS TERMINAL BY OWNER/OPERATOR 705 1 BAKERY CASE 707 1 MICROWAVE OVEN 800 1 SODA AND ICE DISPENSER BYVENDOR 801 3 TEA DISPENSER 802 1 TEA BREWER 803 4 COFFEE DISPENSER 804 1 ICE CUBER SELF CONTAINED 805 4 CONDIMENT AND NAPKIN DISPENSERS 806 2 TRASH BIN BY OWNER/OPERATOR 807 1 BAG-N-BOX BY VENDOR - LOCATED BELOW COLD BEVERAGE COUNTER 808 1 BUBBLER 809 1 CARBONATER AND HIGH WALL SHELF BY VENDOR - VFY. WARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS 810 1 BULK CO2 TANK BY VENDOR - VFY. WARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS 811 1 CHEMICAL CLEANING SYSTEM BY VENDOR 812 1 HOT WATER DISPENSER 703 700 703 705 I I L I I l I I I I �a © sty Equipment & Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. t.� --_ I w1 o� I xi c� 0 Project Number:D16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit 8s Bid Revisions: GENERAL CONTRACTOR NOTES RL'--- VIEI/VEa 0 ' 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CUT AND PROVIDE HOLES 6. LAST DATED REVISION VOIDS ALL PREVIOUS CODE COM� R.-r I,q;�.ICE - THROUGH CEILINGS, ROOFS, WALLS AND FLOORS FOR DRAWINGS. PU- DUCTS, ETC., IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL FIRE AND BUILDING CODES AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH DUCT 7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO .lP 3 1 I SIZES SPECIFIED. GENERAL CONTRACTOR ALSO TO HOODS AT AREA ABOVE HOODS FOR MOUNTING OF ©� n ��' PROVIDE ALL DUCT FIRE SEPARATIONS, ENCLOSURES, HOOD SUPPORTS (IF ACCESS NOT PROVIDED, GENERAL Q WRAPPINGS, ETC., AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY LOCAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE HOOD SUPPORTS.) 4 BUILDING AND FIRE CODES. (FLAT AND LEVEL), VAPOR BARRIERS AND ,Gila. 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE FLOOR y vi a asa�'v;raE;::� 2. WHERE NOISE OR VIBRATION PRODUCING EQUIPMENT RECESSES �( I (DISHWASHER, DISPOSER, ETC.) IS LOCATED ADJACENT BUILT-IN INSULATED FLOORS (AS SHOWN ON PLAN). 5 ,n�,a,�z�,.���I� TO DINING AREAS AND/OR PUBLIC AREAS, PROVISIONS SHOULD BE MADE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO 9. WEARING FLOOR FINISH AND INTERIOR FINISH IN "DOUBLE STUD" AND SOUND PROOF COMMON WALLS. WALK-IN BOXES BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS Sheet Name: OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 3. IF CANTILEVER BRACKETS FOR TABLE AND STOOL R C C E y�� y� {- SEATS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT ARE SPECIFIED, THE IO.SLEEVES TO BE PROVIDED BY GENERAL CON- Equipment L�yOu 1} . BRACKETS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY W.WEST, BUT TRACTOR IN ALL WALLS, FLOOR AND CEILINGS FOR ALL CITY OF T U i :1I�' I LA INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR IN ACCORDANCE LINES (DRAIN, REFRIGERATION, ETC.) TO PASS WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND DIMENSIONS PROVIDED BY THROUGH AND RESEAL AFTER LINES ARE RUN. ��+h. 20�5 Plan &, Schedule W.WEST. PROVIDE ESCUTCHEON PLATES WHERE APPROPRIATE. 4. W.WEST PLANS ARE PROVIDED FOR THE SOLE I (.SPRINKLER HEADS IN WALK-IN FREEZER AND PURPOSE OF INDICATING OUTLET LOCATIONS AND COOLER BOXES MUST BE PROVIDED AND ADEQUATELY PERMIT CENTER EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS ONLY AND DO NOT PROTECTED AGAINST FREEZING, BY GENERAL RELIEVE THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR SUB -CON- CONTRACTOR. TRACTOR OF THE RESPONSIBILITY OF COMPLYING WITH Sheet Number: ALL APPLICABLE CODES. 12.REMOVAL OF WINDOWS, WINDOW FRAMES AND CENTER DOOR POST FOR ENTRY OF EQUIPMENT SHALL NOTE: 5. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER AND/OR BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO INSURE THAT W.WEST CONTRACTOR AND AT NO EXPENSE TO W.WEST. RECEIVES COPIES OF ALL ADDENDUMS AND CHANGES TO BUILDING PLANS WHICH ARE MADE PRIOR TO AND ANY DIMENSIONS ARCHITECTURAL OR DURING CONSTRUCTION. IN THE EVENT THAT THIS STRUCTURAL, ON THESE DRAWINGS THAT INFORMATION IS NOT DELIVERED TO W.WEST, OWNER ARE IN CONFLICT WITH WHAT ACTUAL JOB WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL COSTS INCURRED BY SITE CONDITIONS NEED TO BE BROUGHT THE FAILURE TO GIVE W.WEST THIS INFORMATION. TO THE ATTENTION OF THE K.E.C. Drawn By Checked By CR CR C U. 1- a C a �i Q a L a (i C a Q C C N V: r- C N L` C (i C .0 (i 1. ALL ROUGH -INS SHOWN RELATE TO FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ONLY. SEE ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS. 2. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL EQUIPMENT BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR, INCLUDING REQUIRED MATERIALS, SUCH AS STOPS, VALVES, FILTERS, TRAPS, CHECK VALVES, PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES, PIPING, ESCUTCHEON PLATES, TUBING, ETC.. 3. WATER QUALITY REQUIREMENT. THE RECOMMENDED MINIMUM WATER QUALITY STANDARDS WHETHER UN- TREATED OR PRE-TREATED, BASED UPON 10 HOURS OF USE PER DAY AND A DAILY BLOW DOWN, ARE AS FOLLOWS: - TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS LESS THEN 300 P.P.M. - TOTAL ALKALINITY LESS THEN 85 P.P.M. - SILICA LESS THEN 13 P.P.M. - pH FACTOR GREATER THEN 7.5 P.P.M. 4. VERIFY ALL PLUMBING ROUGH -INS & LOCATIONS WITH OWNER, VENDOR, OR G.C. ON EXISTING EQUIPMENT OR OTHER EQUIPMENT NOT PROVIDED BY W.WEST. 5. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL THE FOLLOWING AS PER CODE a. ALL WATER, WASTE, GAS, AND STEAM SERVICE TO POINT OF ROUGH -IN AS SHOWN ON PLAN. ROUGH -IN OUTLETS TO STUB 4" OUT OF WALL AT HEIGHT INDICATED FROM FINISHED FLOOR OR CURB. ALL FLOOR OPENINGS ARE TO BE SEALED WATERTIGHT. b. PRESSURE REDUCING AND/OR REGULATING VALVES FOR DISHWASHERS, BOOSTER HEATERS, AND AS OTHERWISE NOTED, KITCHEN AREAS. c. ALL FLOOR SINKS, COMPLETE WITH TOP GRATES INDICATED AND REMOVABLE SEDIMENT BUCKETS SET FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS NOTED OR AS PER LOCAL CODE. d. ALL WASTE LINES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, EXCEPT AS NOTED, SHALL BE PITCHED DOWNWARD, ALL WASTE LINES SHALL HAVE ADEQUATE, CLEAN -OUT PROVISIONS. e. INDIRECT WASTE LINES FOR WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR/ FREEZER PITCHED 1/4" TO P-0" (MINIMUM) AND WITH A "P" TRAP AT MINIMUM 2" ABOVE FLOOR SINK. L HEATER TAPE WITH 35 WATTS PER LINEAL FOOT OF DRAIN LINE AND INSULATION OF ALL DRAIN LINES INSIDE WALK-IN FREEZER COMPARTMENTS. g. INSTALL FIRE CONTROL GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES AS PER SUPPLIED BY FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM CONTRACTOR. (IF GAS COOKING EQUIPMENT IS USED.) h. VACUUM BREAKERS AS REQUIRED. i. INSULATION OF ALL STEAM, HOT WATER AND CON- DENSATE LINES IN KITCHEN. ALL SUCH LINES ARE TO BE COLOR CODED ACCORDING TO LOCAL CODES. j. CLEAN -OUT VALVES FOR STEAM CONDENSATE AND AIR LINES. k. ALL PIPING TO AND FROM EQUIPMENT SHALL BE KEPT AT A MINIMUM OF SIX INCHES (6") CLEAR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO ALLOW CLEANING, OR PREVAILING LOCAL CODES. 1. IN -LINE WATER FILTERS ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT" (WATER FILTERS TO BE BY P.0 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.) • WATER HEATERS • BOOSTER HEATERS • SINK HEATERS • DISHWASHERS • GLASSWASHERS • SODA SYSTEMS • STEAM EQUIPMENT • ICE MAKING MACHINES • WATER STATIONS 6. PLUMBING DIVISION TO INTERCONNECT DISHMACHINE WITH BOOSTER HEATER AND WATER TYPE VENTILATORS WITH CONTROL PANELS AS PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS, WHEN APPLICABLE AND NOTED. 7. ALL VENT PIPES ARE TO BE CONCEALED IN WALLS OR COLUMN CHASES. 8. ALL LINES ROUTED THROUGH EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT INTERFERE WITH INTENDED USE OF, OR SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT. 9. INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN STEAM EQUIPMENT AND STEAM GENERATOR. 10. GREASE TRAP TO BE SPECIFIED AND LOCATED BY MECHANICAL ENGINEER AND PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR OR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. 11. A GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR FOR EACH PIECE OF GAS FIRED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY P.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. IN ADDITION A HIGH PRESSURE GAS REGULATOR (VENTED) SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY P.C. WHEN NECESSARY. 12. FLEXIBLE GAS CONNECTIONS WITH OR WITHOUT QUICK DISCONNECT FEATURE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SHUT-OFF VALVE BY K.E.C.. THIS VALVE SHALL HAVE PERMANENT HANDLE, AND NOT BE LESS THEN THE NOMINAL SIZE OF THE CONNECTOR AND BE INSTALLED AT THE GAS PIPING OUTLET IMMEDIATELY AHEAD OF THE FLEXIBLE GAS CONNECTION. INSTALLED BY P.C.. 13. PLUMBER SHALL PROVIDE ALL DRAINS FROM FIXTURES. INCLUDING WALK-IN BOX EVAPORATORS. 14. IF REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT, THE P.C., UNDER HIS PERMIT APPLICATION, SHALL PROVIDE DRAWINGS OR DIAGRAMS OF PIPING LAYOUT, SEWER PIPE SIZES, VENTING CONNECTIONS, ETC. 15. PLUMBER SHALL DETERMINE AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE TOTAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS AND VERIFY SIZE OF SERVICE REQUIRED FOR GAS OR WATER. 16. ALL PIPING, EXCEPT AS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON PLANS OR AS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE BY THE ARCHITECT, SHALL BE RUN CONCEALED IN FURRED WALLS, PARTITIONS, FURRED CEILINGS, ETC. WHERE PIPING IS EXPOSED, IT SHALL BE RUN ADJACENT TO WALLS OR PARALLEL TO CONSTRUCTION IN NEAT AND ORDERLY FASHION AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT. 17. P.C. RESPONSIBLE FOR MAKING ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS. MODULAR BAR DIE WALL DOES NOT COME FROM FACTORY PRE -PLUMBED. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER, & REFRIGERATED COUNTER COMPRESSORS w/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS O HW HOT WATER o CW COLD WATER 9 DW DIRECT WASTE ® FD FLOOR DRAIN ® FFD FUNNEL FLOOR DRAIN ® FS FLOOR SINK 3/4 GRATE ® FSHG FLOOR SINK/HALF GRATE ® G GAS SS STEAM SUPPLY 0 SR STEAM RETURN IW INDIRECT WASTE RIP ROUGH -IN POINT AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FA FROM ABOVE CONNECTION TYPES 1) CONNECT WATER SUPPLY TO FAUCETS 2) CONNECT WATER SUPPLY TO WATER CONNECTION 3) DIRECT WASTE CONNECTION TO UNIT 4) INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION TO UNIT 5) QUICK DISCONNECT FURNISHED BY KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR 6) QUICK DISCONNECT FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR 7) MANIFOLD GAS CONNECTION 8) DIRECT GAS CONNECTION GENERAL G.P.H. LOADS EQUIPMENT TYPE G.P.H. HIGH G.P.H. LOW VEGETABLE SINK 25 15 TRIPLE POT SINK 60 45 PRE -RINSE 45 45 BAR 4-COMP SINK 25 25 HOT WATER FILLER 15 15 COFFEE URN 5 5 MOP SINK 15 15 HAND SINK 5 5 �f UNDER SLAB UTILITIES ROUGH -IN PLAN NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" FLOOR SINK SCHEDULE ITEM NO. CONNECTION SIZE REMARKS 101 FFD 6" DIA. WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER EVAPORATOR COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES DRAIN TO FUNNEL FLOOR DRAIN 201 DW 2" MOP SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 207 DW 2" 3-COMPARTMENT SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 216 DW 11, SCRAPPING SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 217 DW 2" WAREWASHER DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 318 FSHG 12"x12" RETHERMALIZING UNIT & CONVECTION OVEN DRAIN TO FLOOR SINK 503 FSHG 12" x 12" SALAD STATION & SANDWICH STATION DRAIN TO FLOOR SINK 510 DW 1 2' DUMP SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 512 FSHG 12"x12" FRONT EXPO COUNTER DRAINS TO FLOOR SINK 601 DW 1 2' EA. HAND SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE (3) RIP'S 603 FSHG 12NII2" ICE MACHINE & BIN DRAIN TO FLOOR SINK 604 DW 1 2' HAND SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 606 FSHG 12"x12" PREP TABLE SINK DRAINS TO FLOOR SINK 616 FSHG 12"x12" ESPRESSO MACHINE & ICE CHEST DRAIN TO FLOOR SINK 800 FSHG 12N12" SODA DISPENSER, ICE MACHINE, & DRIP TROUGH DRAIN TO FLOOR SINK RECE VED CITY OF TUKIWILA OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CENTER Equipment 8v Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted IDate: 10-08-2015 Issued For Permit & Bid Revisions: 2Q REV1,_V%iE- 3 FORS CODE C0�{ ARI,_ AN,1r- I 0 v —• weoc�u 1661 BOILDIc*-J_G DIV"'6510�j Sheet Name: Under Slab Utilities Rough -in Plan & Schedule Sheet Number: Drawn By s Checked By M I I I I I I Al - �E� I ZE I ��i ral or C� • • Mi P lie • 11IIY�rrA.rn' °03 �I IIff I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I --------------- Ifffflggl ERN1111111m— I- - - T-1 I II Qi ❑_ i�i illi ❑ n --- i�i ilk----Q----I-->I I I _ I I I I I I I �,�� �� �5, PLUMBING ROUGH -IN PLAN NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" PLUMBING SCHEDULE CW HW ITEM NO. QTY DESCRIPTION (IN AFF (IN AFF IW DW DW AFF GAS (IN) GAS AFF MBTU TYPE' REMARKS (IN) (IN) WALK-IN COOLER EVAPORATOR COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN 100 1 WALK-IN COOLER 1-1/2" 4 LINE DRAINS TO FFD101 WALK-IN FREEZER EVAPORATOR COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN 101 1 WALK-IN FREEZER 1-1/2' 4 LINE DRAINS TO FFD101 201C 1 SERVICE FAUCET 1/2" 36" 1/2" 36" 1 207 1 THREE COMPARTMENT SINK 2" 14" 3 3-COMPARTMENT SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 208 2 FAUCET /2" 14" 1/2" 14" 1 215 1 PRE -RINSE 1/2" 18" 1/2" 18" 1 216 1 SOILED DISH TABLE 1-1/2" 14" 3 SCRAPPING SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 140' F INCOMING HW RECOMMENDED, WAREWASHER DRAINS 217 1 DISH MACHINE 1/2" 18" 3/4" 18" 2" 8" 2,3 TO DIRECT WASTE - P.C. TO VFY. REQUIREMENTS w/VENDOR 303 1 CONVECTION OVEN 3/4" 72" 3/4" 3/4" 78" 110.0 2,4,5 CONVECTION OVEN DRAINS TO FS318 317 1 CONVECTION OVEN 3/4" 24" 80.0 5 318 1 RETHERMALIZING UNIT 1/2" 12" 1-1/2" 2,4 RETHERMALIZING UNIT DRAINS TO FS318 410 1 6-BURNER HOTPLATE 3/4" 30" 159.0 5 420 1 COUNTERTOP GRIDDLE 3/4" 30" 75.0 5 510 1 BUILT IN DUMP SINK AND FAUCET 1/2" 24" 1/2" 24" 1-1/2" 20" 1,3 DUMP SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 601 3 WALL MOUNTED HAND SINK /2" 24' /2"EA. 24 1-1/2" 1/ 20" 1,3 HAND SINKS DRAIN TO DIRECT WASTE EA.602 2,4 INTERPLUMB THRU WATER FILTER TO ICE MACHINE, ICE 1 ICE CUBER 1/2" 72" 3/8" MACHINE DRAINS TO FS603 603 1 ICE BIN 3/4" 4 ICE BIN DRAINS TO FS603 604 1 HAND SINK 1/2" 24" 1/2" 24" 1-1/2" 20" 1,3 DROP -IN HAND SINK DRAINS TO DIRECT WASTE 606 1 PREP TABLE 1/2" 14" 1/2" 14" 1-1/2" 1,4 PREP TABLE SINK DRAINS TO FS606 609 1 COFFEE BREWER 1/2" 50" 2 1" 2,4 INTERPLUMB THRU WATER FILTER TO ESPRESSO MACHINE, 615 1 ESPRESSO CAPPUCCINO MACHINE 1/2" 24" ESPRESSO MACHINE DRAINS TO FS510 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS, ICE CHEST DRAINS 616 1 STAINLESS BREW COUNTER 1-1/2" 4 TO FS510 VFY. REQUIREMENTS w/VENDOR, SODA DISPENSER DRAINS 800 1 SODA AND ICE MACHINE 1/2" 14" 1-1/2" 2 4 TO FS800 802 1 TEA BREWER 1/2" 50" 2 INTERPLUMB THRU WATER FILTER, ICE MACHINE DRAINS TO 804 1 ICE CUBER 1/2" 72" 1-1/2" 2,4 FS800 809 1 CARBONATER AND HIGH WALL SHELF /2 78" 2 VFY. REQUIREMENTS w/VENDOR 811 1 CHEMICAL CLEANING SYSTEM 1/2" 1 42" 2 VFY. REQUIREMENTS w/VENDOR 812 1 HOT WATER DISPENSER 1/4" 1 50" 2 VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER, & REFRIGERATED COUNTER COMPRESSORS w/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 1. IN -LINE WATER FILTERS ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT" (WATER FILTERS TO BE BY P.0 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.) 1. ALL ROUGH -INS SHOWN RELATE TO FOOD SERVICE WATER HEATERS EQUIPMENT ONLY. SEE ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING BOOSTER HEATERS PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS. SINK HEATERS • DISHWASHERS 2. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL EQUIPMENT BY PLUMBING GLASSWASHERS CONTRACTOR, INCLUDING REQUIRED MATERIALS, SUCH SODA SYSTEMS AS STOPS, VALVES, FILTERS, TRAPS, CHECK VALVES, STEAM EQUIPMENT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES, PIPING, ESCUTCHEON ICE MAKING MACHINES PLATES, TUBING, ETC.. WATER STATIONS 3. WATER QUALITY REQUIREMENT. THE RECOMMENDED 6. PLUMBING DIVISION TO INTERCONNECT DISHMACHINE WITH MINIMUM WATER QUALITY STANDARDS WHETHER UN- BOOSTER HEATER AND WATER TYPE VENTILATORS WITH TREATED OR PRE-TREATED, BASED UPON 10 HOURS OF CONTROL PANELS AS PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS, USE PER DAY AND A DAILY BLOW DOWN, ARE AS FOLLOWS: WHEN APPLICABLE AND NOTED. - TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS LESS THEN 300 P.P.M. - TOTAL ALKALINITY LESS THEN 85 P.P.M. 7. ALL VENT PIPES ARE TO BE CONCEALED IN WALLS OR - SILICA LESS THEN 13 P.P.M. COLUMN CHASES. - pH FACTOR GREATER THEN 7.5 P.P.M. 8. ALL LINES ROUTED THROUGH EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT 4. VERIFY ALL PLUMBING ROUGH -INS & LOCATIONS WITH INTERFERE WITH INTENDED USE OF, OR SERVICING OF OWNER, VENDOR, OR G.C. ON EXISTING EQUIPMENT OR EQUIPMENT. OTHER EQUIPMENT NOT PROVIDED BY W.WEST. 9. INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN STEAM EQUIPMENT AND 5. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL THE STEAM GENERATOR. FOLLOWING AS PER CODE 10. GREASE TRAP TO BE SPECIFIED AND LOCATED BY a. ALL WATER, WASTE, GAS, AND STEAM SERVICE TO POINT MECHANICAL ENGINEER AND PROVIDED AND INSTALLED OF ROUGH -IN AS SHOWN ON PLAN. ROUGH -IN OUTLETS BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR OR PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. TO STUB 4" OUT OF WALL AT HEIGHT INDICATED FROM FINISHED FLOOR OR CURB. ALL FLOOR OPENINGS ARE 11. A GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR FOR EACH PIECE OF GAS TO BE SEALED WATERTIGHT. FIRED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY P.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. IN ADDITION A HIGH b. PRESSURE REDUCING AND/OR REGULATING VALVES FOR PRESSURE GAS REGULATOR (VENTED) SHALL BE PROVIDED DISHWASHERS, BOOSTER HEATERS, AND AS OTHERWISE AND INSTALLED BY P.C. WHEN NECESSARY. NOTED, KITCHEN AREAS. 12. FLEXIBLE GAS CONNECTIONS WITH OR WITHOUT QUICK c. ALL FLOOR SINKS, COMPLETE WITH TOP GRATES DISCONNECT FEATURE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SHUT-OFF INDICATED AND REMOVABLE SEDIMENT BUCKETS SET VALVE BY K.E.C.. THIS VALVE SHALL HAVE PERMANENT FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS NOTED OR AS HANDLE, AND NOT BE LESS THEN THE NOMINAL SIZE OF THE PER LOCAL CODE. CONNECTOR AND BE INSTALLED AT THE GAS PIPING OUTLET IMMEDIATELY AHEAD OF THE FLEXIBLE GAS CONNECTION. d. ALL WASTE LINES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, EXCEPT AS INSTALLED BY P.C.. NOTED, SHALL BE PITCHED DOWNWARD, ALL WASTE LINES SHALL HAVE ADEQUATE, CLEAN -OUT PROVISIONS. 13. PLUMBER SHALL PROVIDE ALL DRAINS FROM FIXTURES. INCLUDING WALK-IN BOX EVAPORATORS. e. INDIRECT WASTE LINES FOR WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR/ FREEZER PITCHED 1/4" TO P-O" (MINIMUM) AND WITH 14. IF REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT, THE P.C., A "P" TRAP AT MINIMUM 2" ABOVE FLOOR SINK. UNDER HIS PERMIT APPLICATION, SHALL PROVIDE DRAWINGS OR DIAGRAMS OF PIPING LAYOUT, SEWER PIPE SIZES, L HEATER TAPE WITH 35 WATTS PER LINEAL FOOT OF VENTING CONNECTIONS, ETC. DRAIN LINE AND INSULATION OF ALL DRAIN LINES INSIDE WALK-IN FREEZER COMPARTMENTS. 15. PLUMBER SHALL DETERMINE AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE TOTAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS AND VERIFY SIZE OF g. INSTALL FIRE CONTROL GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES AS PER SERVICE REQUIRED FOR GAS OR WATER. SUPPLIED BY FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM CONTRACTOR. (IF GAS COOKING EQUIPMENT IS USED.) 16. ALL PIPING, EXCEPT AS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON PLANS OR AS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE BY THE ARCHITECT, SHALL BE RUN h. VACUUM BREAKERS AS REQUIRED. CONCEALED IN FURRED WALLS, PARTITIONS, FURRED CEILINGS, ETC. WHERE PIPING IS EXPOSED, IT SHALL BE RUN i. INSULATION OF ALL STEAM, HOT WATER AND CON- ADJACENT TO WALLS OR PARALLEL TO CONSTRUCTION IN NEAT DENSATE LINES IN KITCHEN. ALL SUCH LINES ARE TO AND ORDERLY FASHION AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT. BE COLOR CODED ACCORDING TO LOCAL CODES. 17. P.C. RESPONSIBLE FOR MAKING ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS. j. CLEAN -OUT VALVES FOR STEAM CONDENSATE AND MODULAR BAR DIE WALL DOES NOT COME FROM FACTORY AIR LINES. PRE -PLUMBED. k. ALL PIPING TO AND FROM EQUIPMENT SHALL BE KEPT AT A MINIMUM OF SIX INCHES (6") CLEAR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO ALLOW CLEANING, OR PREVAILING LOCAL CODES. SYMBOLS 8, ABBREVIATIONS o HW HOT WATER o CW COLD WATER • DW DIRECT WASTE ® FD FLOOR DRAIN ® FFD FUNNEL FLOOR DRAIN ® FS FLOOR SINK 3/4 GRATE ® FSHG FLOOR SINK/HALF GRATE ® G GAS -4) SS STEAM SUPPLY Cl� SR STEAM RETURN IW INDIRECT WASTE RIP ROUGH -IN POINT AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FA I FROM ABOVE CONNECTION TYPES 1) CONNECT WATER SUPPLY TO FAUCETS 2) CONNECT WATER SUPPLY TO WATER CONNECTION 3) DIRECT WASTE CONNECTION TO UNIT 4) INDIRECT WASTE CONNECTION TO UNIT 5) QUICK DISCONNECT FURNISHED BY KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR 6) QUICK DISCONNECT FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR 7) MANIFOLD GAS CONNECTION 8) DIRECT GAS CONNECTION GENERAL G.P.H. LOADS EQUIPMENTTYPE G.P.H. HIGH G.P.H. LOW VEGETABLE SINK 25 15 TRIPLE POT SINK 60 45 PRE -RINSE 45 45 BAR 4-COMP SINK 25 25 HOT WATER FILLER 15 15 COFFEE URN 5 5 MOP SINK 15 15 HAND SINK 5 5 W, Equipment 8v Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit 8s Bid Revisions: QiGtiV;—U 3 CITY OF TLj VVILA A OCT 0 9 2015 Sheet Name: Plumbing_ Rough -in Plan 8� b c4 =OR 3 CODE C01APLIANCE Ag PROVEED i n J 0 4 2016 Sheet Number: �'(t' of T,.lHa '';Ulf ING D ISlO Drawn By Checked By CR CR 'pl u II II I I II I II I I I I i I I I l I i I I 1 ELECTRICAL ROUGH -IN PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" NORTH E.C. TO RUN (5) #12 WIRES FROM COIL TO FREEZER COMPRESSOR FOR TIME CLOCK, DEFROST CYCLE, o_ -Ti Tll1TS 1TT'1 REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FOOD II ° `ill 1 I Bill ► �; �� ® Ili, ■ WillM 0 ON7wo ME1 ml- ,. ;lmlwimw U"_11 0 Hvw �d�MIII II JJ i WE ---------------� I I I I I I I I I I I I I I --------------J ELECTRICAL NOTES: AS NOTED. 8. VERIFY ALL ELECTRICAL ROUGH -INS AND LOCATIONS WITH OWNER, VENDOR OR G.C. ON EXISTING EQUIPMENT f. ALL REQUIRED BULBS FOR FIXTURES. OR OTHER EQUIPMENT NOT PROVIDED BY W.WEST. g. PLUG MOLDS SUPPLIED & INSTALLED WHERE 1. ALL ROUGH -INS SHOWN RELATE TO FOOD SERVICE 9. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL THE INDICATED. EQUIPMENT ONLY. SEE ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING FOLLOWING AS PER CODE. PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS. 10. WHEN APPLICABLE, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE a. ALL JUNCTION BOXES, ELECTRICAL OUTLETS, COVER CONDUIT WIRING, INSTALL ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND 2. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL EQUIPMENT BY ELECTRICAL PLATES, SWITCHES, ECT., NOT BUILT INTO FIXTURES INTERWIRE BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING: CONTRACTOR, INCLUDING MATERIALS. OR EQUIPMENT. ALL OUTLETS, JUNCTION BOXES, COVER PLATES, ETC., IN LAUNDRY AREAS, DISHROOM OR a. REMOTE REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT TO EVAPORATOR 3. ALL LOADS INDICATED ARE ACTUAL AND NOT CIRCUIT AS INDICATED ON SCHEDULES, MUST BE VAPOR PROOF, COILS AND FOR DEFROST CONTROLS. BREAKER SIZE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. OR AS PER LOCAL CODE. b. CONTROL PANELS TO VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST/ 4. ALL CONVENIENCE OUTLETS TO BE SET HORIZONTALLY. b. ALL PLUGS & CORDS AS NOTED ON SCHEDULE. ALL SUPPLY FANS PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. CORDS SHALL BE N.E.M.A. RATED AND U.L. APPROVED 5. ALL ROUGH -IN HEIGHTS INDICATED FROM FLOOR TO THE FOR MANUFACTURED AND/OR FABRICATED EQUIPMENT. c. KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD/VENTILATORS TO FIRE CENTER LINE OF THE OUTLET. FLOOR ROUGH -INS TO BE CONTROL SYSTEM AND HOOD CONTROLS. STUBBED UP 4" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR OR CURB. ALL c. SHUNT -TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS OR DISCONNECTS FOR FLOOR OPENINGS ARE TO BE SEALED WATERTIGHT. FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM SHUT-OFF OF FOOD SERVICE d. CALL LIGHTS AND WAITRESS CONTROL SYSTEMS. EQUIPMENT BELOW HOODS/VENTILATORS AS REQUIRED 6. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SHUNT TRIP BY N.F.P.A. 96 CODE OR LOCAL CODE. e. LIGHT FIXTURES, CHANDELIERS, ETC., LAMPS FOR ANY BREAKERS FOR EQUIPMENT UNDER HOOD AND INTERWIRE LIGHT FIXTURE ARE TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED TO FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM, PER LOCAL CODE. d. DISCONNECTS OR OTHER DEVICES AS REQUIRED BY BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS INDICATED CODES. ON THE LIGHTING SCHEDULES OR DRAWINGS. 7. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT JUNCTION BOX OR PULL -BOX AND ALL ELECTRICAL WORK FROM PANEL e. ELECTRO-MAGNETIC OVERLOAD PROTECTION FOR AIR f. MODULE COUNTERS AND COMPONENTS OR EQUIPMENT BOARDS, TO BE BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. COMPRESSORS AND VACUUM PUMPS IN THE LAUNDRY, MOUNTED ON COUNTERS. al MURQ� SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS ( JB JUNCTION BOX DR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® SPO SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLET DR/DATA P.O.S. POWER/DATA PORT Up 4B STUB UP 4" TO JUNCTION BOX UP 4B STUB UP 4" TO FLOOR MOUNTED OUTLET UP 4B STUB UP 4" TO FLOOR MOUNTED SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLET iJ) JB JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED IN EQUIPMENT DR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED IN/ON EQUIPMENT J JB DROP CORD - PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY E.C. SW SWITCH 0-%. FLEX FLEX 0 PH PHASE FO FLOOR OUTLET RIP ROUGH -IN POINT AMP AMP KW KILOWATT HP HORSE POWER AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FA FROM ABOVE CLG CEILING E.C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR e -REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL _RE.QUIREMF.NTS FOR 10D1) - I I I 1 I ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE ITEM NO. QTY DESCRIPTION SYMB. CONNECTION NEMA AFF VOLTS PHASE AMPS KW HP ONN TYPE REMARKS 100 1 WALK-IN COOLER COMPRESSOR JB DIRECT VFY. 208 3 1-1/2 1 WALK-IN COOLER COMPRESSOR 100A 1 WALK-IN COOLER JB DIRECT 123" 120 1 15.0 1,5 E.C. INTERWIRE SWITCH, LIGHTS, PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE, DOOR HESTER & OTHER DISCONNECTS AS NEEDED 100E 1 WALK-IN COOLER EVAP. COIL JB DIRECT 123" 120 1 1.8 1,5 WALK-IN COOLER EVAPORATOR COIL 101 1 WALK-IN FREEZER COMPRESSOR JB DIRECT VFY. 208 3 1-1/2 1 WALK-IN FREEZER COMPRESSOR INTERWIRE TO EVAPORATOR COIL 101A 1 WALK-IN FREEZER JB DIRECT 123" 120 1 15.0 1,5 E.C. INTERWIRE SWITCH, LIGHTS, PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE, DOOR HESTER & OTHER DISCONNECTS AS NEEDED 101 B 1 HEAT TAPE JB DIRECT 123" 120 1 10.0 1,5 E.C. TO SUPPLY & INSTALL OUTLET AT FREEZER COIL FOR HEAT TAPE 217 1 DISH MACHINE JB DIRECT 24" 208 3 46.8 1 E.C. TO VFY. REQUIREMENTS wNENDOR 301 1 ROLL -IN REFRIGERATOR, 1 SECTION DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 78" 120 1 6.0 114 6 303 1 CONVECTION OVEN DR CORD & PLUG 72" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 3/4 6 317 1 CONVECTION OVEN DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 36" 120 1 10.0 314 6 318 1 RETHERMALIZING UNIT JB DIRECT 12" 208 1 47.6 9.5 1 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS 319 1 REFRIGERATED WORK TOP DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 18" 115 1 10.0 1/4 6 409 1 HOT FOOD WELL DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 50" 120 1 12.5 1.5 6 411 1 REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 18" 120 1 8.0 1/5 6 412 2 PANINI OVEN SPO CORD & PLUG 6-30P 50" 208 1 30.0 EA. 6.2 EA. 6,8 413 1 POP-UP TOASTER SPO CORD & PLUG 6-15P 50" 208 1 12.5 2.7 6,8 414 1 CONVEYOR TOASTER DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 69" 120 1 15.0 1.8 6 414.1 1 CONVEYOR TOASTER DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 44" 120 1 12.0 1.44 6 415 1 PANINNI STATION DR CORD & PLUG 5-20P 18" 120 1 10.0 3/4 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS 416 1 COUNTER TOP WARMING CABINET SPO CORD & PLUG 6-15P 50" 208 1 9.8 2.04 6,8 DEDICATED CIRCUIT REQUIRED 423 1 HOLDING CABINET DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 50" 120 1 6.7 0.8 6 424 1 REFRIGERATED SANDWICH UNIT DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 18" 120 1 7.2 1/5 6 500A 1 REMOTE COMPRESSOR JB DIRECT VFY. 208 3 7.4 1 1 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWING 500B 1 REMOTE COMPRESSOR JB DIRECT VFY. 208 3 6.1 1/2 1 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWING 503 1 SALAD STATION JB DIRECT 18" 120 1 3.0 1 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS 504 1 KDS DR CORD & PLUG 84" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER " 1 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 84" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 504A 2 KDS DR CORD & PLUG 72" 120 1 15'EAKT' 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER " 2 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 72" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 504B 1 KDS DR CORD & PLUG 66" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER " 1 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 66" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 505 1 TABLE TRACKER DR CORD & PLUG 86" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER " 1 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 86" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 506 1 TIMECLOCK DR CORD & PLUG 55" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 507 1 LETTUCE CRISPER DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 90" 120 1 5.3 .6 1/4 6 508 1 SANDWICH STATION JB DIRECT 18" 120 1 3.0 1 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS 511 4 SOUP WELL DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 18" 120 1 6.7 EA. .8 EA. 6 4 EA. DUPLEX OUTLETS AT 20 AMP EA. 2 EA. SOUP WELLS TO ONE OUTLET 512A 1 FRONT EXPO COUNTER JB DIRECT 18" 120 1 3.0 1 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS 512E 1 FRONT EXPO COUNTER JB DIRECT 18" 120 1 3.0 1 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS 515 1 ANGLED PRINTED SHELF DR CORD & PLUG 50" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIRMENETS WOWNER it 1 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 50" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIRMENETS WOWNER 522 1 MICROWAVE OVEN DR CORD & PLUG 5-20P 64" 120 1 16.0 2.0 6 524 1 DECORATIVE LAMP JB DIRECT 90-1/2" 120 1 2.08 .25 1,5 E.C. INTERWIRE TO SWITCH LOCATED ABOVE ITEM 508 525 1 DECORATIVE LAMP JB DIRECT 90-1/2" 120 1 2.08 .25 1,5 E.C. INTERWIRE TO SWITCH LOCATED ABOVE ITEM 508 526 1 DECORATIVE LAMP JB DIRECT 90-1/2" 120 1 2.08 .25 1,5 E.C. INTERWIRE TO SWITCH LOCATED ABOVE ITEM 508 602 1 ICE CUBER JB DIRECT 80" 120 1 11.7 1 609 1 COFFEE BREWER JB DIRECT 50" 120/208 1 22.4 4.6 T8 34ARES PLUS GROUND, E.C. TO SUPPLY & INSTALL CORD & PLUG 610 1 UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 18" 120 1 4.0 1/5 6 611 2 BAR BLENDER DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 50" 120 1 15.0 EA. 1.8 EA. 6 614 1 COFFEE PRINTER DR CORD & PLUG 28" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER " 1 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 28" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 615 1 ESPRESSO CAPPUCCINO MACHINE SPO CORD & PLUG L6-30P 28" 208 1 30.0 9.0 6,8 702 1 U/C REFRIGERATOR DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 18" 120 1 4.0 1/5 6 703A 4 POS TERMINAL DR CORD & PLUG 28" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER " 4 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 28" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 703B 1 POS TERMINAL DR CORD & PLUG 50" 120 1 15.0 CKT. 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER " 1 DATA PORT DATA DATA PORT 50" 8 DATA PORT, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WOWNER 705 1 BAKERY CASE DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 14" 120 1 12.0 6 PROVIDED WITH 90° PLUG, VFY. REQUIREMENTS WSHOP DRAWINGS 707 1 MICROWAVE OVEN DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 12" 120 1 13.0 1.55 6 800 1 SODA AND ICE DISPENSER DR CORD & PLUG 50" 120 1 15.0 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS w/VENDOR 802 1 TEA BREWER DR CORD & PLUG 5-15P 50" 120 1 13.8 1.65 6 804 1 ICE CUBER JB DIRECT 76" 208 1 9.8 1 808 1 BUBBLER DR CORD & PLUG 50" 120 1 5.5 6 809 1 CARBONATER AND HIGH WALL SHELF DR CORD & PLUG 96" 120 1 5.0 6 VFY. REQUIREMENTS WCARBONATOR VENDOR 812 1 HOT WATER DISPENSER DR CORD & PLUG 50" 120 1 15.0 1.8 6 E1 8 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS DR CORD & PLUG 50" 120 1 8.0 EA. 8 CONVENIENCE OUTLET E2 1 CONVENIENCE OUTLET DR CORD & PLUG 18" 120 1 8.0 8 CONVENIENCE OUTLET E3 1 TELEPHONE JACK JB DATA PORT 50" 8 DATA PORT E4 4 TELEPHONE JACK JB DATA PORT 28" 8 DATA PORT CT 1 FUTURE EQUIPMENT SPO CORD & PLUG 6-30 50" 208 1 22.0 8 FUTURE EQUIPMENT CONNECTION TYPES 1) DIRECT TO JUNCTION BOX ON EQUIPMENT. 2) DIRECT TO OUTLETS INCLUDED WITH DISCONNECT. 3) DIRECT TO JUNCTION BOX THROUGH DISCONNECT. 4) DIRECT SERVICE TO CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL INCLUDED WITH EQUIPMENT. 5) REQUIRES INTERWIRING BETWEEN CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT. 6) CORD & PLUG FURNISHED WITH EQUIPMENT. 7) CORD & PLUG FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 8) OUTLET FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 9) OUTLET FURNISHED WITH EQUIPMENT & INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 10) EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN COUNTER & WIRED BY MANUFACTURER. 11) FINAL CONNECTION BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PRE -WIRED JUNCTION BOX OUTLET IN COUNTER 12) FLEX OUT OF WALL @ ROUGH -IN POINT (NO J-BOX REQ'D) GENERAL WALK-IN NOTES: 1. E.C. TO VERIFY EXACT SIZE & LOCATION OF COMPRESSORS FOR WALK-IN BOXES W/MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 2. E.C. TO MOUNT & INTERWIRE VAPOR -PROOF OR FLUORESCENT LIGHTS, WHICHEVER PROVIDED, PER SPEC.. RUN CONDUIT ON EXTERIOR TOP OF WALK-IN BOXES. LIGHTS FOR WALK-INS PER SPEC. 3. E.C. TO SUPPLY & MOUNT SERVICE DISCONNECTS @ ALL WALK-IN CONNECTIONS. 4. E.C. TO RUN (5) #12 WIRES FROM COILTO FREEZER COMPRESSOR FOR TIME CLOCK, DEFROST CYCLE & COIL POWER. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDE DRAIN LINE HEATER TAPE, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL IT. E.C. TO PROVIDE & MOUNT A JB AT FREEZER COIL FOR DRAIN LINE HEAT TAPE. 0 weik Equipment & Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit & Bid Revisions: A E.C. TO RUN (5) #12 WIRES FROM COIL TO FREEZER RE: n C 3 V -a D Sheet Name: COMPRESSOR FOR TIME CITY OF T u i :W I LA CLOCK, DEFROST CYCLE, �o�J G Electrical Rough -in & COIL POWER OCT iJ n 9 Plan & Schedule PERMIT CENTER ,J) RE4IEVv,'F_D -FOR CODE M,71PLIANCE Sheet Number: -1Pn C11F_D 500AG(J* A 500B �W O 2-51 6 VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF WALK-IN City ® Tla ,VJila COOLER/FREEZER, & REFRIGERATED COUNTER BUiLDMIIVBSiC), COMPRESSORS w/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS Drawn By Checked By CR CR BUILDING CONDITIONS NOTES: 1. ALL WORK INDICATED ON THIS PLAN AND IN THESE NOTES SHALL BE BY OTHER THEN THE KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WALLS, FLOORS, AND CEILINGS IN KITCHEN, PREP, SERVICE, WASHING AND BAR AREAS OR ANY OTHER LOCATION WHERE FOOD OR BEVERAGES ARE PREPARED SHALL BE SMOOTH, EASILY CLEANABLE, NONABSORBENT AND DURABLE. WALL AND CEILINGS SHALL BE LIGHT COLORED, AS PER LOCAL CODES. LEAD BASED PAINT SHALL NOT BE USED. 3. PARTITION WALLS BETWEEN KITCHEN AREAS AND PUBLIC AREAS SHOULD BE CONSTRUCTED FOR MAXIMUM SOUND CONTROL. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR EQUIVALENT SHALL: a. PROVIDE WALL REINFORCING OR BACKING AS REQUIRED FOR WALL MOUNTED KITCHEN EQUIPMENT. SEE WALL BACKING SCHEDULE FOR BACKING TYPES AND HEIGHTS. b. SLOPE FLOORS TO FLOOR DRAINS OR FLOOR TROUGHS, AND FLOOR SINKS IF NOT ELEVATED. c . PROVIDE DOOR/WALL OPENINGS AND/OR PASSAGES TO ASSURE ACCESS FOR ALL KITCHEN EQUIPMENT AND FRONT END ITEMS. COORDINATE SIZES WITH W.WEST. d. PROVIDE DEPRESSIONS FOR WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER. SMOOTH AND TRANSIT LEVEL, WHERE DEPRESSIONS ARE REQUIRED. DEPTH AS NOTED. e. AFTER WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER HAS BEEN INSTALLED BY W.WEST, FILL EXCESS DEPRESSION AROUND WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER w/GROUT. FINISH FLOOR MATERIAL AND COVED BASE. PROVIDE ENCLOSURES FROM TOP OF WALK-IN TO FINISHED CEILING (IF REQUIRED) E.C. WALK-IN PENETRATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ESCUTCHEON PLATES BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. f. PROVIDE MASONRY PADS WITH TROWEL SMOOTH AND LEVEL FINISH AS REQUIRED. (SEE MASONRY CONTRACTOR NOTES) g. PROVIDE FIRE RATED MATERIALS AND/OR INSULATION AS REQUIRED FOR EXHAUST DUCTS, VENT STACKS, HEAT PRODUCING EQUIPMENT, ROOF/WALL PENETRATIONS, ETC.., PER LOCAL CODES. h. PROVIDE COVED BASE -MOULDING OR COVED INTEGRAL FLOOR MATERIALS AS REQUIRED AT ALL VERTICAL SURFACES FOR KITCHEN FLOORS. i. PROVIDE FANS, DUCTWORK, CONTROLS, DUCT COLLAR, FINAL CONNECTION, HANGING OF HOODS, PERMITS, AND MAKE-UP AIR EQUIPMENT. THE ABOVE FURNISHED BY H.V.A.C. CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED ON DRAWING OR CONTRACT WITH W.WEST. j. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR (H.V.A.C.) TO BALANCE EXHAUST SYSTEM. (NEGATIVE PRESSURES IN THE FACILITY SHALL MEET LOCAL CODES.) k. ALL ROOF CURBS AND ROOF JACKS TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. INCLUDING RESEALING OF ROOF PENETRATIONS. 5. ALL C.F.M. REQUIREMENTS SHOWN ON DRAWING TO BE VERIFIED BY M.C. 6. ALL DUCT COLLARS, CUT-OUTS AND PENETRATIONS IN HOODS TO BE LOCATED AND PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IN FIELD. 7. M.C. TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE VENTILATION AT/AROUND ALL REMOTE COMPRESSORS & CONDENSERS. 8. ALL REMOTE COMPRESSORS & CONDENSERS ARE TO BE LOCATED OUTDOORS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED BY ARCHITECT & MECHANICAL ENGINEERS. SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS ® EXHAUST DUCT CONNECTION ® MAKE-UP AIR DUCT CONNECTION ® SPECIAL PURPOSE EXHAUST DUCT w/ GRILLE ® FLOOR DEPRESSION ® SMOOTH & LEVEL FLOOR INSULATED FLOOR ® 6" DIA. P.V.C. SODA/BEER CHASE iH I ; I I I I I _ I ; L I i I ; I II I ; 3 I I I of E] 1830I I ; I ; I � � �l 2 BUILDING CONDITIONS PLAN Ch SCALE: 1/4" = P-0" NORn J � r--1F--1 CHASE FOR SODA LINES TO RUN FROM SODA L _ L RACK TO SODA TOWER. VFY. SODA LINE CHASE — — DETAILS. II di II — ----- ------------- it p� l3 I T-8" 0 oC I o CV F I I N I M �!I 0 In 0 7 4'-0" I I I I I i -----1 I I I I I P I I� � I I ----� � I I I - - - I I I " I —Fiji — 2'-0' T-6" 1. T-Y 4'-2" ---, CHASE FOR SODA LINES TO RUN FROM SODA RACK TO SODA TOWER. Q i VFY. SODA LINE CHASE DETAILS. 1 I i I I I I I I I I I -- F1 i I I I...---------------� a n I II COORDINATE EXACT DIMENS & DETAILS w/ARCHITECT & K.E.C. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION 10'4" T-10" 0 � I Q, la l I rI, o Ili ❑_ _ _ � � iV i �i ❑ � N III----- -I 3---�-- U — — — —-------� — — — — — — — — — 1----------------J L"----------------' I I I I I I I I I �20� 3 �J44 � �5, (4) ROOF CURBS FOR REMOTE REFRIGERATION COMPRESSORS - VFY. LOCATION w/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS - SEE DETAIL ON THIS SHEET. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER, & REFRIGERATED COUNTER COMPRESSORS w/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS WALL BACKING SCHEDULE NO. TYPE HGT. ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR REMARKS (TOP OF BACKING) 0 PL OOD 96" DOWN TO 36" WALL SHELF, POT RACK, MOP RACK, PRE -RINSE // PLYWOOD 72" DOWN TO 24" HAND SINK 3 18 GA. MET 81" DOWN TO 33" COOKLINE WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT ® 5 8 PLYWOOD 52" DOWN TO 34" BOWL SHELF, 1/3 PAN HOLDER 5 PLYW /8 D CEILING DOWN TO TOP OF PASS WINDOW WALL SHELF © 5/8 PLYWOOD 96" DOWN TO 24" WALL SHELF, UTILITY SINK FAUCET WALL BACKING IS TO PROVIDE SUPPORT FOR ALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. ALWAYS EXTEND BACKING TO THE NEXT STUD IN EACH DIRECTION. WALL BACKING MAYBE INDICATED ON WALLS THAT MAY BE OF CONCRETE BLOCK CONSTRUCTION, AND THEREFORE WALL BACKING MAY NOT BE REQUIRED. REFRIG. SYSTEM ROOF CURB DETAIL HAT SECTION 20 GA. GALV. STEEL BY G.C. 3/4" PLYWOOD TOP 0,0" 3'-0" X 3'-0" BY G.C. FLASHING AS REQUIRED BY G.C.�'�'� ' •"wr t�'.ir s n ri ROOF BY G.C. I ' iI2. 2"X1O" BY G.C. ILI. 3" DIA. ROOF JACKYs;' SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY G.C., RESEAL AFTER REFRIG. ` ' •� LINES HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. ss dye. ,art,-r i 1" DIA. ROOF JACK, :-. ..... SUPPLIED & INSTALLED BY 3 "� G.C., RESEAL AFTER ELECTRICAL LINES HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. REFRIG. SYSTEM ROOF CURB DETAIL NOT TO SCALE WESIT O Equipment & Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/Plannii Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manage. 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans withc the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. 00 N � Cd c� Co � Co Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit & Bid Revisions: 0 iff Sheet Name: Building Conditions R-CC;VED Plan & Schedule CITY OF TU WILA OCT 0 9 2015 Sheet Number: PERMIT C E W" E-R---, RE,@ fin°z'd L) FOR CODE CO%NIRLIANCE J 04 E City of T 11�1jiia s BUILDING���� ` Drawn By Checked By CR CR in BUILDING CONDITIONS NOTES: 1. ALL WORK INDICATED ON THIS PLAN AND IN THESE NOTES SHALL BE BY OTHER THEN THE KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WALLS, FLOORS, AND CEILINGS IN KITCHEN, PREP, SERVICE, WASHING AND BAR AREAS OR ANY OTHER LOCATION WHERE FOOD OR BEVERAGES ARE PREPARED SHALL BE SMOOTH, EASILY CLEANABLE, NONABSORBENT AND DURABLE. WALL AND CEILINGS SHALL BE LIGHT COLORED, AS PER LOCAL CODES. LEAD BASED PAINT SHALL NOT BE USED. 3. PARTITION WALLS BETWEEN KITCHEN AREAS AND PUBLIC AREAS SHOULD BE CONSTRUCTED FOR MAXIMUM SOUND CONTROL. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR EQUIVALENT SHALL: a. PROVIDE WALL REINFORCING OR BACKING AS REQUIRED FOR WALL MOUNTED KITCHEN EQUIPMENT. SEE WALL BACKING SCHEDULE FOR BACKING TYPES AND HEIGHTS. b. SLOPE FLOORS TO FLOOR DRAINS OR FLOOR TROUGHS, AND FLOOR SINKS IF NOT ELEVATED. c . PROVIDE DOOR/WALL OPENINGS AND/OR PASSAGES TO ASSURE ACCESS FOR ALL KITCHEN EQUIPMENT AND FRONT END ITEMS. COORDINATE SIZES WITH W.WEST. d. PROVIDE DEPRESSIONS FOR WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER. SMOOTH AND TRANSIT LEVEL, WHERE DEPRESSIONS ARE REQUIRED. DEPTH AS NOTED. e. AFTER WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER HAS BEEN INSTALLED BY W.WEST, FILL EXCESS DEPRESSION AROUND WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER w/GROUT. FINISH FLOOR MATERIAL AND COVED BASE. PROVIDE ENCLOSURES FROM TOP OF WALK-IN TO FINISHED CEILING (IF REQUIRED) E.C. WALK-IN PENETRATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ESCUTCHEON PLATES BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. f. PROVIDE MASONRY PADS WITH TROWEL SMOOTH AND LEVEL FINISH AS REQUIRED. (SEE MASONRY CONTRACTOR NOTES) g. PROVIDE FIRE RATED MATERIALS AND/OR INSULATION AS REQUIRED FOR EXHAUST DUCTS, VENT STACKS, HEAT PRODUCING EQUIPMENT, ROOF/WALL PENETRATIONS, ETC.., PER LOCAL CODES. h. PROVIDE COVED BASE -MOULDING OR COVED INTEGRAL FLOOR MATERIALS AS REQUIRED AT ALL VERTICAL SURFACES FOR KITCHEN FLOORS. i. PROVIDE FANS, DUCTWORK, CONTROLS, DUCT COLLAR, FINAL CONNECTION, HANGING OF HOODS, PERMITS, AND MAKE-UP AIR EQUIPMENT. THE ABOVE FURNISHED BY H.V.A.C. CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED ON DRAWING OR CONTRACT WITH W.WEST. j. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR (H.V.A.C.) TO BALANCE EXHAUST SYSTEM. (NEGATIVE PRESSURES IN THE FACILITY SHALL MEET LOCAL CODES.) k. ALL ROOF CURBS AND ROOF JACKS TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. INCLUDING RESEALING OF ROOF PENETRATIONS. 5. ALL C.F.M. REQUIREMENTS SHOWN ON DRAWING TO BE VERIFIED BY M.C. 6. ALL DUCT COLLARS, CUT-OUTS AND PENETRATIONS IN HOODS TO BE LOCATED AND PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IN FIELD. 7. M.C. TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE VENTILATION AT/AROUND ALL REMOTE COMPRESSORS & CONDENSERS. 8. ALL REMOTE COMPRESSORS & CONDENSERS ARE TO BE LOCATED OUTDOORS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED BY ARCHITECT & MECHANICAL ENGINEERS. SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS ® EXHAUST DUCT CONNECTION ® MAKE-UP AIR DUCT CONNECTION ® SPECIAL PURPOSE EXHAUST DUCT w/ GRILLE ® FLOOR DEPRESSION ® SMOOTH & LEVEL FLOOR INSULATED FLOOR ® 6" DIA. P.V.C. SODA/BEER CHASE �E A— I __T__ u REFRIGERATION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" NORTH I I I I REFRIGERATION LINES FOR ITEM: 101 (WALK-IN FREEZER) TO DROP I 19'-8" DOWN FROM ABOVE I I II I s' 1" L J L B I °P REFRIGERATION LINES — — I FOR ITEM: 100 (WALK-IN COOLER) TO DROP DOWN FROM ABOVE I ------------- II gl II Y 1 I �L■ I I -----1 I I FTFI 1 I f -1 REFRIGERATION LINES FOR ITEM: 503 I � (SALAD STATION) TO RUN DOWN I I _J INSIDE WALL, STUB OUT OF WALL AT — — — 18" A.F.F., EXTEND ALONG BACK OF COUNTER & MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO ITEM: 508 (SANDWICH STATION) I I I FE -- � i D ` Io — — — — — — — — — — — — — — I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I --------------- r�---71 I II REFRIGERATION LINES FOR — ITEM: 512 (FRONT EXPO COUNTER) TO RUN DOWN INSIDE WALL, STUB OUT OF WALL AT 18" A.F.F. I 111 �tlI I!i I I I L A B D�® C VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER, & REFRIGERATED COUNTER COMPRESSORS w/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE SYSTEM ITEM DESCRIPTION HEIGHT LOCATION REFRIGERATION/ A.F.F. FIXTURE TEMP. A 100 WALK-IN COOLER FA CEILING R-404A, 35°F B 100 WALK-IN FREEZER FA CEILING R-404A, -10°F C MULTIPLEX V-6" WALL R404A C1 512A 24" REFRIGERATED BASE _ FROM R-404A, 35°F SYSTEM C C2 512B 27" REFRIGERATED BASE, RAISED RAIL _ FROM R-404A, 35°F SYSTEM C D MULTIPLEX 1'-6" WALL R-404A D1 503 (2) 19" REFRIGERATED BASES, MEGA TOP _ FROM R-404A, 35°F SYSTEM D D2 508 (2) 19" REFRIGERATED BASES, MEGA TOP _ FROM R-404A, 35°F SYSTEM D 7ii_uEi ,!CE CITY OF Tjr U'+<'IL A OCT 0 9 2015 PERMIT CEN UL CODE C0jAIILIAiMCE °L 5-� � Z n/7itPF� j! �7 ic1 City of T ull',V3ila I suit 0 W4,11" 0, Equipment & Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit & Bid Revisions: 0 a Sheet Name: Refrigeration Plan & Schedule Sheet Number: O Equipment & Furnishings Co. f z O cc W 0 U Q O 1-4 a 0 0 6i L0 O N 0 z a_ a W vl W ALK-IN COOLER/ FREEZER SHELVING LAYOUT SCALE: 1/2" = P-0" 5 ALK—IN FREEZER SHELVING LAYOUT SCALE: 1/2" = P-0" ATERING STATION SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" C ALK—IN COOLER/FREEZER SHELVING LAYOUT SCALE: 1/2" = P-0" 202.1 VFY. DESK WALL CABINETS w/ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS VFY. DESK DETAILS w/ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS 42 42" 502 502 605 605.1 202.1 - C° - O � ++++++++++ ++++++++++ ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + d z 200 100 (606 ALK—IN COOLER/ FREEZER /PREP /CATERING SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" CATERING STORAGE SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" COOKLINE SCALE: 1/2" = 1-0 300 a RcCE'VED CITY OF f 'U"I' ILA ---P,,ERr, IT G.ENZIEI i" CODE GCp APLQAq**����qq' �G A_amp i! -D- S' ' YJi O A GI y of a ulvaui SUIL UNNIG DIVISiCA Food Service Design/ Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit & Bid Revisions: Sheet Name: Equipment Elevations Sheet Number: Drawn By CR Checked By CR 202.1 418 412 C= C= 409 416 O 202 / =_= 224 REF'G DOOR R'40.4A 24" REF'G DOdR R404A OPEN SHELF OPEN SHELF c C w a O 0 W :d- o 00 LL_ w _ m 00 W O O -EXHAUST HOOD- 02 / / � . / i W, zz jjj . 5 j 415 601 J18 315 t7XJ305 QOA "Di-IA STATION CONVECTION OVEN SCALE: 1/2 1-0 SCALE: 1/2 1-0 DISH LINE 12 _ SCALE: 1 / 2 II 1-0II EN OR ■ d 1 r.7 1 /A„ � 501 537) 537.1 534 533 TABLE 505 TRACKER 504 KDS -/04 O II— 27" REF G O jf— DOOR R404A. / SLIDING SLIDING / 616A 612 EXPO LINE 14 SCALE. 1 /2 - 14 523 526) (525) (524 531 530 ^OPEN ^-- O — \—I SLI ING SLI 511 J ^ W w O � W � 0 a J OO W _ ij N \ Lo O �h CL N 14. 24=DD Y O � L C, Q C PREP AREA 10 SCALE: 1 / 2I1 _ - 1-0II 60" 60" S70 2) <504) 413 402 KDS KDS 7 11 530 ��OPEN ^� C51 S/S APRON PLATE SHELF ® ADJUSTAE 19" REF'G SHELF OPEN AWER R404 0 19" REF' 19" REF'G DOOI�R404A SHELF 508.1 508 CHEFS LINE 13 SCALE: 1/2 - 14 W W LL__ \ V) \ C —27=BELL _ d p Ln W DOOR R404ACL O / 0 0 703 60" 502 50i m -J PLATE SHELF 11 S/S APRON JUSTABLE ® N SHEF OPEN ®<4 9" REF'G 19" REF' SHELF DOOR-4Z404A DOOgR404A 03 S Q�11�►© 603 C, a 9 511 511 512 700 705 707 700 ORDERING BLENDER COUNTER 15 �1 _ 11 SCALE: 1/2 - 1-0 601 703 I n a 1 /.Q 3-COMPARTMENT SINK SCALE. 1 / 2 - 1-0 d- 204 13 21 11 614) (615 604 611 16. ■II�II��Ii CODE COAMPLIMIUL Si: �y2f :•. JAi'11 C 4 a i C! EST Equipment & Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/ Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit 8v Bid Revisions: 0 Sheet Name: Equipment Elevations CODE COAMPLIMIUL Si: �y2f :•. JAi'11 C 4 a i C! EST Equipment & Furnishings Co. Food Service Design/ Planning Shawn Sandt Designer/Project Manager 9355 Northfield Blvd. Denver, CO 80238 Phone: 303.289.9378 Fax: 303.289.9505 GENERAL NOTE These plans are the property of W.West and use of these plans without the written consent of W.West is prohibited. No Responsibility is assumed by W.West for deviations from these drawings. Project Number: D 16349 Scale:As Noted Date:10-08-2015 Issued For Permit 8v Bid Revisions: 0 Sheet Name: Equipment Elevations